JP7392807B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

BACKGROUND ART Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery that is conducted based on the establishment of lottery conditions is a win. Some of these gaming machines are configured to be able to set a plurality of states that have different degrees of advantage to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2001-038007

However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in playing games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an acquisition unit that acquires predetermined information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and executes a determination using the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit. and an advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. A determining means for determining one of the plurality of advantageous games including at least a specific advantageous game as the advantageous game executed by the means; a specific state setting means for setting a specific state advantageous to the specific state; and a determination that continuously differs from the specific determination result over a predetermined number of times of determination by the determining means after the specific state is set. a predetermined state setting means for setting a predetermined state that is less advantageous than the specific state based on the result, and after the specific state is set, which can continue until the specific number of determinations are performed; Based on the fact that the number of determinations made by the determining means is greater than a predetermined number of times less than the specific number of times and is less than or equal to the specific number of times, the determining means a first performance execution means capable of executing a performance including at least a predetermined performance mode as a predetermined performance for indicating the determination result of the above, and a specific state that can continue until the specific number of determinations are performed; A performance that does not include the predetermined performance mode can be executed as the predetermined performance based on the fact that the determination by the determination unit has been performed within a range where the number of determinations by the determination unit is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times . and a second performance execution means, wherein the number of times of determination by the determining means after a specific state that can continue until the specific number of determinations is executed is within the range of the predetermined number of times or less. , the expected value at which the advantageous game is executed and the specific state is set is different depending on the number of times that is greater than the predetermined number of times and is less than or equal to the specific number of times, and the determination of the specific number of times is different. Based on the fact that a predetermined execution condition is satisfied in a range of times that is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the number of decisions made by the determining means after a specific state that can continue until execution is set is greater than the predetermined number of times. It is possible to perform a performance that suggests the degree of expectation that the advantageous game will be executed and the specific state will be set in the range of a large number of times but not more than the specific number of times, in the range of the number of times not more than the predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, an acquisition unit that acquires predetermined information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a determination unit that executes a determination using the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition unit; an advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result, and the advantageous game execution means is executed by the advantageous game execution means. determining means for determining one of the plurality of advantageous games including at least a specific advantageous game as the advantageous game; and a specific state advantageous to the player as a state after the gaming state related to at least the specific advantageous game is completed. and a specific state setting means for setting the specific state, and a determination result that is different from the specific determination result continuously over a predetermined number of times of determination by the determination means after the specific state is set. a predetermined state setting means for setting a predetermined state having a lower advantage than the specific state based on the above, and a determining means after the specific state is set, which can continue until the specific number of determinations are executed. The determination result of the determination means is indicated based on the fact that the determination of the determination means has been performed within a range where the number of determinations is greater than a predetermined number of times that is less than the specific number of times and is less than or equal to the specific number of times. a first performance execution means capable of executing a performance including at least a predetermined performance mode as a predetermined performance for the purpose of the present invention; and a first performance execution means capable of executing a performance including at least a predetermined performance mode as a predetermined performance for the purpose of the present invention; Execution of a second performance that is capable of executing a performance that does not include the predetermined performance mode as the predetermined performance based on the fact that the determination by the determination means has been executed within a range where the number of determinations is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times. and a range in which the number of determinations by the determining means after a specific state that can continue until the specific number of determinations is executed is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times, The expected value at which the advantageous game is executed and the specific state is set is different depending on the range of the number of times that is greater than the number of times and the number of times that is less than or equal to the specific number of times, and the expected value is different when the advantageous game is executed and the specific state is set, and continues until the judgment of the specific number of times is executed. The number of times the determination means makes a determination after a possible specific state is set is greater than the predetermined number of times based on a predetermined execution condition being satisfied within a range of times less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. It is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the advantageous game will be executed and the specific state will be set within the range of the specific number of times or less, within the range of the specific number of times or less.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an operation diagram of the operation unit viewed from the back side. (a) is a schematic top view of the operating unit in a closed state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the operating unit in an open state, seen from above. It is a back view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment when entering the time saving state. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in a time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a small win A is won during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a small win B is won during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the contents of the situation display mode displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that emphasizes right-handed hitting among the small winning A game screens displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that emphasizes right-handed hitting. It is a figure showing an example when a ball wins after a) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that emphasizes right-handed hitting among the small winning B game screens displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is It is a figure showing an example when a ball wins after a) is displayed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 2 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 2 jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a grant table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the small hit type selection table in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is a diagram. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving variation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an open scenario table in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the status display selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final status display selection table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small winning game when the small winning A is won in the first embodiment. (a) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of the small winning game when winning the small winning B in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process for small hits performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing small hit control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related update process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flowchart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart that is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit start command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing small winning end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the small winning end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing V entrance passing command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing instruction command processing. It is a flowchart which shows production related command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed when entering a time saving state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a left-handed game is started during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a left-handed game is started during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a right-handed game is started during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the mode. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode related to a right-handed game in a time saving state displayed on a third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the time-saving game contents during the time-saving state in the second embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is the content of the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 2 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 2 jackpot type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving grant 2 table in the form. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable pattern 2 table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving variable pattern 2 table in the second embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 small winning type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small winning type selection 2 table in the second embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. be. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a hold display selection table set in a ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the number of time saving number update process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process 2 performed by MPU in a main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a game state setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game content determination process performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows various counter update processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd pattern display device in 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd pattern display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example which shows the number of times of time saving in a time saving state displayed on the 3rd pattern display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of ROM in a main control device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 3 table in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving grant 3 table set in the ROM of the device. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of an open scenario 3 table set in a ROM in a main control device in a third embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. be. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving remaining period determination table set in a ROM in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow of a pachinko machine in a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving remaining period determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows definite fluctuation discrimination processing performed by MPU in a sound ramp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when time saving A is set as the time saving state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on a 3rd pattern display device when time saving B is set as a time saving state in . (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of the time saving number correction effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in a main control device in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in a main control device in a fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the content of the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern 4 table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal variation pattern table in a fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for time saving B in the fourth embodiment. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the small win type selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows small hit control processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing 4 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display time reduction number correction process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a modification of the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode in the time saving state displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the production modification example of each embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in a production modification example of each embodiment. (b) is a diagram illustrating the flow of performance in a modified example of performance. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th embodiment. (a) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the game board in the fifth embodiment. (a) is an enlarged front view showing that the electric accessory provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment is in an open state, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the electric accessory provided on the game board in the fifth embodiment. It is a front enlarged view showing that the accessory is in a closed state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when a jackpot game is started in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when a jackpot game is started in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on a 3rd pattern display device which may be displayed inside. It is a schematic diagram which showed the time-saving game content in the time-saving state in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern 5 table in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table in the fifth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the signal input process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and production process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 6th embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of a game board in a sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the opening pattern of the electric accessory in the sixth embodiment. It is a transition diagram showing a transition destination of a gaming state in a sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM in the main control device in a 6th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 1 selection table set in the ROM in the main controller in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the main controller in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the special figure 2 selection table set to ROM in. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ending process 6 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th embodiment. It is a top view of the V winning prize device. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the opening pattern of the small hit in 7th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the time saving state of the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when a small win is won during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device in the seventh embodiment. , is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when a small win is won after the end of the time saving state. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the seventh embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning type selection table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the direct winning table in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the V hit table in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the time saving grant table in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the time saving variation pattern table in the seventh embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a mode transition method in a seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage process 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information related process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning related process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows small hit start command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device at the end of the time saving state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device at the end of the time saving state in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a small hit is won with a reserved ball of the second special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing a change over time in the production mode when a starting prize corresponding to a small hit is detected within 5 seconds from the start of variation in the final variation display in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment; (b) is a diagram showing a change over time in the production mode when a starting prize corresponding to a small win is detected after 5 seconds from the start of variation in the final variation display in the time saving state of the eighth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the regulation content of the special design 2 random number table in 8th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first hit type selection table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the stipulated contents of the special first shift table in the eighth embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the table for special second shift in the eighth embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram of the table for special second shift in the eighth embodiment. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the time-saving grant table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the general map type selection table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing 8 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information related process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the switching pattern of the switching valve provided in the distribution apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the regulation content of the time saving grant table in 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the mode transition method of the Pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows start-up processing 9 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 10th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high for which a variable probability state is set in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the probability variable state is set in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode indicating that the set expectation level is low. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the first winning random number table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning type selection table in the tenth embodiment. It is a block diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the special 1 winning table in the 10th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the special 2 winning table in the 10th embodiment. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the normal table in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the table for time saving in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the table for reaching the limit in the tenth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the time saving grant table in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a variation pattern scenario table in the tenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the mode transition method of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. be. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of a back mode lottery table in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing 10 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 10 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing 10 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 10th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the normal table in a modification of the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the regulation of the table for when a limit is reached in the modification of the tenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the regulation content of the time saving grant table in the modification of 10th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a variation pattern scenario table in a modification of the tenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh time saving state in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth time saving state in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on a 3rd pattern display device in the time saving state of an 11th embodiment in the 10th time saving. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the number of reserved special drawings 2 is acquired more than a specific number in the time saving state of the eleventh embodiment. In the time saving state of the 11th embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when a small hit is won in a state where there is no special drawing 2 pending. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the time saving grant table in the 11th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a normal variation pattern table in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a time-saving variation pattern table in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. (a) to (e) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of changes in the acquisition expectation of the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 in the time saving state of the 11th embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information related process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during the period before an end performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit start command processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 81, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 to 7 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entry holes 63, 64, 640, etc. into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. The contents of the numerous ball entry holes provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 2.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

Specifically, a ball fired with a firing intensity of 90% to 100% always passes through the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and a ball fired with a firing intensity of 40% to 50% always passes through the variable display unit 80. The ball is configured to pass through the left side area of the device unit 80, and most of the balls fired with a firing intensity of 50% to 60% pass through the left side area of the variable display unit 80, and some of the balls are configured to pass through the left side area of the variable display unit 80. It passes through the area to the right of the equipment unit 80. Further, the ball fired with a firing intensity of 70% to 90% is configured so that most of it passes through the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and a part passes through the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80. has been done.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is constructed by assembling a mouth 63, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. , its peripheral edge is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entrance hole 64, the second ball entrance hole 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The gaming area is the area in front of the gaming board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and the outer edge member made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. . Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in short-time mode or normal mode, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by indicating whether it is changing, and display stop symbols. is a symbol that corresponds to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set as a gaming state after the end of a jackpot game), a symbol that corresponds to a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which a normal state is set as a gaming state after a jackpot game ends), or a missing symbol. The presence of balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds in the jackpot and errors are displayed by the 7-segment display device. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here include 15R time-saving jackpot (15R time-saving jackpot) where the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 and a time-saving state is given after the jackpot ends, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds and the time-saving state is given after the jackpot ends. A 5R time-saving jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) in which a time-saving state is given, and a 5R normal jackpot (5R no-time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5R and a time-saving state is not given after the end of the jackpot are prepared.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the jackpot lottery results are not the above-mentioned jackpot but a miss, fewer benefits are given to the player than in the case of the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). A small prize is available. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (or not) as a stop symbol after the variation ends (or not), but also indicate whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not. The symbols according to the type of jackpot are shown.

Here, the "15R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and the "5R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 after a jackpot. This is a jackpot that moves you to a time-saving state. Moreover, "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds and then shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state.

In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game provided when a special symbol jackpot is won, the "15R time-saving jackpot" that can give the player the most benefits, and the next most benefits can be given. The game is configured so that either one of the "5R time-saving jackpot" and the "5R normal jackpot" which provides the fewest benefits to the player among the jackpot games is provided. As a result, even if you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, you can play the game with the expectation that among the jackpot games with different benefits that can be awarded, the jackpot game that will give you the most benefits will be provided. can be set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the benefits given to the player are determined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the gaming state that is set after the jackpot game ends. Although the sizes are defined, the size is not limited to this, and the size of the benefits granted to the player may be defined using conditions other than those described above, or different benefits may be granted without defining the size of the benefits. It is also possible to simply change the contents of the jackpot game so that the jackpot game can be played differently.

In addition, the "time saving state" refers to a game in which the jackpot probability is the same as in the normal state, but the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640, as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the jackpot ends. state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is made shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is made to be a hit. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a that is operated in this case is set so that the period during which the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set the game state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640, and only a part of the setting contents described above may be used, or the above-mentioned contents may be used. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, as a condition for the "time saving state" to end, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (total number of fluctuations) reaches the first predetermined number (100 times). (first ending condition), or when the number of small wins in the special symbol lottery reaches a second predetermined number of times (for example, once) (second ending condition). When the game is established, the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state. In this way, multiple termination conditions are prepared to transition the gaming state from the time-saving state to the normal state, and when any one of the multiple termination conditions is met, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to set multiple timings at which the time-saving state ends, and it is possible to have the player play the game while being excited about how long the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue. can.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a plurality of small winning types (for example, small winning A to small winning C) are prepared as small winnings that can be won in the special symbol lottery, and a second small winning type is provided for each small winning type. The number of times the termination condition is satisfied is set to be different. With this configuration, it is difficult to predict whether or not the time saving state will end based only on the number of small wins won during the time saving state. You can play games.

In addition, in this embodiment, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (the special discharge channel 650e2 which is the specific area). When the V switch 650e3 provided in the ball detects the ball), a jackpot (so-called 2-type win) is generated (see FIG. 6). In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation that the ball will pass through a specific area during the small win game (V winning expectation degree) is configured to differ depending on the type of small win that has been won. Then, the number of times the second ending condition set for each small win type is satisfied (the number of small wins) is set to be smaller for the small win type in which a small win game with a high V winning expectation is executed. It consists of

By configuring in this way, it is possible to associate the V winning expectation level for winning a second type win when winning a small win during a time-saving game with the feeling of anxiety that the time-saving state may end, It is possible to make the player more motivated to play the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first predetermined number of times (100 times) is set as the end condition (first end condition) for the number of changes of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) as described above. However, other end conditions may be set for the number of variations of the special symbol, for example, when the number of variations of only the first special symbol reaches a third predetermined number (for example, 50 times), , it may be configured such that the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied when the number of times only the second special symbol changes reaches a fourth predetermined number (for example, 80 times). Furthermore, only some of the many termination conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger (starting winning), and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. A third symbol display device 81 is configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays a variable display of the third symbol, and a third symbol display device 81 is configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays a variable third symbol. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays two symbols is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9), so that, for example, three symbols on the left, middle, and right can be displayed. Two symbol rows are displayed (see FIG. 10). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol column, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37a, 37b that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, the third symbol is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) in which the first symbol is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b. The third symbol is displayed as a special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the timing at which the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbol.

That is, the determination by the determination means is performed (a special symbol lottery is performed) based on the fact that the determination condition (the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640) is satisfied, and a predetermined lottery is performed. After the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (fluctuating display) until the dynamic display period has elapsed, the display mode (combination of symbols) showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means (special symbol lottery result) is displayed. , the identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

Note that the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be displayed in a manner that corresponds to the lottery result of the special symbol, and may be a part of the lottery result of the special symbol (e.g., a win/fail judgment such as a jackpot or a miss). It may be a display mode that corresponds to the result only) or a display mode that corresponds to the details of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the type of jackpot won). In addition, if there are three types of lottery results (for example, jackpot, small hit, and loss) as the lottery results for the special symbol, the display mode of the third symbol is such that the lottery result for the special symbol has three types of lottery results as described above. A display mode may be used that indicates one of two specific types of results (for example, a big win or a small win).

Furthermore, instead of the display device used in this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

The second symbol display device 83 displays an "O" symbol and an " This is a dynamic display (fluctuating display) in which the lights are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "○" after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 It is configured to be in an activated state (protrude) for a predetermined period of time. Although the details will be described later, the ball can enter the second ball entry opening 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time saving state than in the normal gaming state. As a result, during the time saving state, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that more winning lots can be drawn than in the normal state. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to activate the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second ball entry port 640 during the time saving state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the second symbol (normal symbol) is won during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is used more than when the second symbol (normal symbol) is won during the normal state. The operating period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is projected to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be long. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.

Note that the configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 during the time saving state is not limited to the above-mentioned content, but includes, for example, increasing the probability of winning the second symbol, A configuration may be used in which the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a is increased. In addition, if the time saving state is made to be a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the time required for the fluctuating display of the second symbol will be taken regardless of the gaming state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the electric winning The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a are varied, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the gaming state set at the time when the variable display of the second symbol stops, and the timing when the second symbol indicating a win is displayed The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be determined in accordance with the game state set in the winning game (ie, the timing of operating the electric accessory 640a). With this configuration, for example, when the second symbol whose variation has started during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a hit during the normal state, the corresponding electric accessory 640a is changed during the normal state. It can be operated according to the operating pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

Note that the relationship between the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be other than the above-described relationship, for example, the relationship between the fluctuation start timing of the second symbol and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. If it is determined that the time-saving state is set as the game state at either the start timing or the start timing, an operation pattern advantageous to the player (executed during the time-saving state) is set as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. It may also be configured to set the operating pattern).

The normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80 as shown in FIG. It is configured so that some (most) of the balls flowing down the right side of the board can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, If there is, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol for the variable display.

Note that this embodiment does not have a function to hold that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, but it does not have a function to hold that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67. If the ball is held up to a maximum of 4 times in total, the second symbol holding display means for indicating the number of balls held is displayed in a place where the player can see it (for example, on the third symbol display device 81). It is good to provide it in a part of the room.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, if there is a function to suspend the passing of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but may be 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. The number of times (for example, eight times) may be set. Further, the number of normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, to the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch, The main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) draws a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the first ball entry port 64 is designed so that the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (a so-called left-handed game), and the first ball entrance hole 64 is located on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Nails are planted on the game board 13 so that it is easier for the ball to enter the game than in a game where the ball flows down (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to cause the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. Ru.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entry port 64 when viewed from the front, a second ball entry port 640 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second ball entrance switch, A jackpot lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

Further, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 each serve as one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the prize. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 640. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in this embodiment, a switch (a first ball entrance switch, a second ball entrance switch) that detects a ball that is a lottery trigger for a special symbol (a jackpot lottery trigger) is provided in the ball entrance. Although the configuration is such that a special symbol lottery opportunity is obtained and a prize ball can be acquired, other configurations may also be used.For example, an area (gate) through which the ball can pass is provided, and the area (gate) is It may be configured such that when a switch (detection means) that detects a passing ball detects the passing of a ball, a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained. In this case, at least a portion of the balls that pass through the area (gate) that can be used as a chance to draw a special symbol will be allowed to enter, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls will be paid out. It would be good to have a ball entrance. With this configuration, the number of times the special symbol lottery opportunity is acquired can be made different from the number of times the prize ball is acquired, so it is possible to provide a variety of gaming features.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric accessory 640a can be changed into a protruding state (permissive state) in which it protrudes toward the front side from the game board 13 (front side in the perspective of FIG. 2) and a retracted state (restricted state) in which it retracts toward the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (regulated state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It becomes. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, If a winning result is won in the two-symbol lottery, the electric accessory 640a will be in a protruding state (allowed state), and the ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entry opening 640.

Here, the flow of balls into the second ball entry port 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed approximately in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is located on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left-handed play area). It is divided into a right side (right-handed hitting area), and by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51, the player can change the destination of the fired ball into the right-handed hitting area or the left-handed hitting area. It is composed of Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to fire a ball into a left-hand hitting area of the game area will be referred to as a left-handed game, and a game in which the player will fire a ball into a right-handed hitting area will be referred to as a right-handed game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and a lottery trigger for determining whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a A normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is disposed in the right-handed area, and when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the right-handed game is configured to be played.

A nail is installed below the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball fired in a left-handed game will not enter the second ball entry port 640. The configuration is such that a ball does not enter the mouth 640. With this configuration, in a left-handed game, a game is performed in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in order to vary the first special symbol, and in a right-handed game, the second special symbol is varied. Therefore, a game in which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 can be played, and different game features can be appropriately provided depending on the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a V winning device 650 whose upper surface is sloped downward toward the lower left direction (lower left direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 2) is located in the right-handed area. Each mechanism is arranged so that the ball that flows down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the retracted state, the ball passes through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located in a protruding state, the ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a flows down toward the lower right direction (lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 2). The ball that has reached the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and if the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state by the time it reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a, It is configured so that the ball enters a general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the above-mentioned electric accessory 640a, second ball entrance 640, and general winning opening 63. The surface of this cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the interior of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third symbol display device 81 during the game. It can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of playing a right-handed game by timing the operation of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, when a game is not being played (the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the incident light to the cover member 655 is suppressed, so the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily seen, and the pachinko machine is turned off. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be performed easily. In addition, when using a configuration in which the internal visibility is varied using the cover member 655 in this way, it is possible to share the light emitting means by configuring the light emitting means that emits light for decoration to be usable as described above. Although it is possible to reduce the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10, a dedicated light emitting means may be provided to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see.

Further, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made difficult to see for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a operates.For example, when it is determined that the operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed (i.e., Control the light emitting means so that characters (for example, "OPEN") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates are displayed on the surface of the cover member 655 when a winning result is won by drawing a normal symbol, The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This allows the player to understand that the electric accessory 640a operates, and makes it difficult for the player to understand the detailed operation timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the configuration of the right-handed playing area of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 3, among the balls fired in the right-handed game, the balls that pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. To explain specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, is composed of a plate-like member on the top surface of which a ball can flow down, and is directed toward the lower right (lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 3). The game board 13 is arranged so as to be sloped downward toward . The ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down to a region a (see FIG. 3) that corresponds to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is located in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located at the protruding position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a toward the right end position. When the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state with the ball reaching area b (an area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), the electric accessory 640a is placed below the electric accessory 640a. The ball is configured so that it flows down toward the general winning hole 63. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (an area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, in this embodiment, the period in which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates is different in the game state, and the normal state is set as the game state. When the electric accessory 640a operates in a state where the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state before the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a located in the protruding state reaches area b (see FIG. 3). In the state where the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a remains in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the area c (see FIG. 3). It is configured to be located in

Specifically, the operating period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is continuously positioned in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric accessory 640a is configured so that the period during which the ball flows down the area shown in FIG. 3 (range from area a to area c) is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (0.8 seconds in this embodiment). With this configuration, even if a player plays a right-handed game during the normal state, wins a normal symbol, and the ball flows down the top surface of the operating electric accessory 640a, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, it is ensured that the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. It can be prevented.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. , it is possible to make it easier for the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (projected state) to reach the second ball entrance 640, and to make it easier to perform the lottery of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, for example, a ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric accessory 640a is activated flows down the top surface of the electric accessory 640a, and when it reaches area b, the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a. The operation of the accessory 640a ends (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 3, such balls enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when playing a right-handed game during the time-saving state, different ball entry ports (second ball entry port 640 Alternatively, by configuring the ball to be guided to the general winning hole 63), it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the right-handed game during the time saving state.

Although the details will be described later, this pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed using the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger. However, since it does not have a means for suspending and storing the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (a means for suspending and storing the right to execute the lottery of special symbol 2), the variation of the special symbol is not executed. Even if a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 while the ball is being played, only the privilege of paying out prize balls (5 balls) corresponding to the entry will be given to the player.

As described above, the structure is configured such that the number of prize balls that enter the general prize opening 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls that enter the second ball entrance 640 is five. Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be executed, it is easier for the player to enter the second ball entry hole 640 than to enter the general winning hole 63. advantageous benefits (i.e., the lottery of special pattern 2 and 5 prize balls) can be given, and the lottery of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) cannot be executed (while the special pattern is changing). If there is, the configuration is such that if the ball enters the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640, a more advantageous benefit (namely, 10 prize balls) can be given to the player.

As a result, the player can change the ball entry port (ball entry port where many benefits can be obtained) that the player wants to enter depending on the game situation (whether or not there are changes in special symbols), which saves time. The player can enjoy the right-handed game in this state. In addition, in order to let the ball enter both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continue playing the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the performance of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. A long period (2 seconds) is set to ensure that the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 when the electric accessory 640a operates. The period of operation of the electric accessory 640a in , for example, is a period slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 0.9 seconds). seconds). With this configuration, after the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the time saving state, the action of stopping the ball launch and starting the ball launch again after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has operated ( Since it is possible to suppress so-called "stop hitting", it is possible to continue playing the right-handed game during the time saving state and improve the performance of the game.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the ball fired in the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be explained. The V-winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state where balls can win prizes and a closed state where it is difficult to win, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win", a V-winning device 650 is configured. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is configured to operate and change to an open state in which a ball can be won in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

Further, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, in some cases where the special symbol "jackpot" is won (jackpot type is jackpot D), the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is The system is configured to operate in the same way as when winning a "small win". Thereby, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is operated, it can be made difficult to ascertain whether the special symbol has won a "big win" or a "small win".

Here, the configuration of the V prize winning device 650 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. First, as shown in FIG. 3, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state closing the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the top surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is turned into a sphere. The balls that reach the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in the closed state flow down toward the lower left side (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 3) on the opening/closing door 650f1. , are flowed out toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in an open state (that is, during a small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650.

In this embodiment, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during a small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times (see FIG. 25), and the opening/closing door is opened at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens. The ball flowing down on 650f1 enters the V winning device 650. The winning balls in the V winning device 650 are configured to flow down the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652 while being aligned toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 6(a)). There is. With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly thrown. It can be flowed down.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds; Any other period may be set as long as it is a period in which the ball in question can enter the V-winning device 650 to win a prize. Further, in this embodiment, the number of times the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the period from when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once to when it is opened the next time in the small winning game (interval period between openings) is set to 5 during the small winning game. 5 seconds is set after the 1st and 10th opening operation, and 0.5 seconds is set at other timings. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the V winning device 650 during the period when the small winning game is being played. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the end of the fifth opening operation during a small winning game, during the interval period between openings after the fifth opening operation is completed. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display that emphasizes and urges the player to play right-handed games.

Then, even if a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is such that the ball can enter the V winning device 650. is set longer than usual. Further, the same control process is executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the end of the tenth opening operation during the small winning game.

With this configuration, even a player who is not playing an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who is not playing a right-handed game) can be made to easily perform an appropriate game. In this way, during a specific game (small winning game) in which multiple opening operations are performed, if the interval period between openings is set longer than others for some, and it is determined that the game is not being played properly, By making it possible to display a game guide display to encourage appropriate game content, players who are playing the wrong game can be allowed to play the game with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, a longer special opening interval period is set after the 5th and 10th opening operations during the small winning game. In this way, by providing multiple timings for displaying the game guide display to the player during one small winning game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the case where a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display are provided, it is preferable to set at least the notification timing for the second transition to a timing that cannot be reached by a player who is normally playing the game. That is, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, by continuously playing the right-handed game during the small winning game, at least one ball enters in one opening operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that the ball can be hit, if you play normally (continuously playing right-handed games), the winning number (10 pieces), which is the condition for ending the small winning game, will be reached during the 10th opening operation. This is reached, and the small winning game is ended.

In other words, the interval period between openings executed after the 10th opening operation during a small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is being played. Therefore, by using this timing to set the timing to display the game guide display, it is possible to avoid an unnecessarily long special opening interval period for players who are playing normally (continuing right-handed games). This eliminates the need for execution, and the small winning game can be executed smoothly.

In addition, when setting the interval period between the first special opening to a timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) that can be reached even if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed as in this embodiment, , the timing at which the first special opening interval period starts (timing at which the fifth opening operation ends), or the timing at which a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first special opening interval period starts (the fifth opening operation end timing). It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 is detecting a ball at the timing when the period required for the ball that entered the ball to be ejected from the V winning device 650 has passed, and if the V switch 650e3 is detecting a ball. If it is determined that the ball has not been detected, a notification effect will be displayed to notify that during the interval period between the first special openings, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball, the game guidance display will be displayed as described above. It is best to configure it so that it is displayed. Thereby, the special opening interval period set during the small winning game can be effectively used depending on the game content.

Furthermore, in the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guide display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without allowing a predetermined number of balls (10 balls) to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the V winning device 650 is assembled with an opening forming member 650b that is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 650b. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. For opening and closing the arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a channel cover body 650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a channel, and a flow channel cover body 650g formed by the back cover body 650e and the channel cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the channel to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, and the back surface thereof. A flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 650j with screws. It is made up of.

FIG. 5 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 5(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5(b) is a sectional view of the V winning device 650 along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a is a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is designed so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5(b). The bottom surface slopes downward to the left. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through this detection port 650a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 5(a).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5(b), the opening of the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a is an opening that allows game balls to enter through an opening/closing door 650f1 that is configured with a shutter mechanism that can come in and out from the game board 13 side. state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper part of the opening/closing door. In addition, in the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to be evacuated from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a by being evacuated inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, it is possible to continuously play the right-handed game during time-saving games, jackpot games, and small win games, thereby reducing the effort of changing the gaming method depending on the gaming state. be able to. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

In addition, when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can be efficiently entered into the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a. can be done. Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5(a) is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5(b). As shown in FIG. 5A, a magnetic sensor 650c1 having a detection port 650a1 is fixed to a base member 650c such that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 6(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 that guides the game ball, and the channel cover body 650g It is rotatably pivoted from the back side. Here, the channel cover body 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h is rotated into the distributed channel from the back side of the channel cover body 650g. It is configured so that it can be placed anywhere.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. Ru. The game balls that have passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 are detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured with a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of game balls provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls. be done.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a jackpot game is set after the small win game by the game ball passing through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during the small win game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a jackpot game. In addition, the switching member 650h allows the ball won in the V winning device 650 during a small hit to pass through the V switch 650e3 (special discharge channel 650e2), or a flow path that is impossible (difficult) to pass through the V switch 650e3. This is to connect any of the channels (normal discharge channel 650e1), and by setting the channel solenoid 650k to ON, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge channel 650e2. (See FIG. 6(b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in this embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to OFF during normal gaming, so that the ball won by the V winning device 650 normally flows down the discharge flow path 650e1. It is composed of When a small hit is won, the channel solenoid 650k is turned on according to the contents stipulated in an open scenario table 202g, which will be described later with reference to FIG. The flow path 650e2 is configured to be able to flow downward. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to OFF, a state that is maintained for a long time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, a winning ball of the V winning device 650 normally flows down the discharge flow path 650e1. By providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 6(a)), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is varied depending on the falling route of the game ball that won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so the player's interest is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. In addition, the time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (specific winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guiding piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. It consists of With this configuration, even if the switching member 650h switches the falling route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened even though the small hit has not been won, the ball will be reliably released. It is possible to suppress the situation in which the water flows down the special discharge channel 650e2.

Furthermore, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1. Thereby, it can be determined whether all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged based on the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (the ending condition for the small winning game (when there is a predetermined number of wins (10) in the V winning device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is met. If all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have not been ejected at the timing when the small winning ending period (which is executed after It is preferable to configure the system to notify an abnormality or to stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game does not start. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in a part of the pachinko machine 10, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, a game ball that has won a prize in the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, a prize ball (in this embodiment, one ball won) is given to the player as a bonus. 10 prize balls) can be paid out. Furthermore, by using the detected game ball, it is possible to determine whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, thereby determining whether or not a jackpot game will be executed after the small win game ends. I can do it. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning hole (specific area) for awarding jackpot games separately from the V winning device 650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a small winning game in which the period and timing for setting the flow path solenoid 650k on differ depending on the small winning type (small winning A to small winning C) set when winning a small winning. is configured to run. With this configuration, the degree of expectation that the ball will pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game (V winning expectation degree) is made to vary depending on the content of the small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won. be able to. Therefore, the player can be made to play a game while expecting not only to win a small win, but also to execute a small win game with a high expectation of winning a V prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the ball flow lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic plan view of a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is closed. As shown in FIG. 7(a), the opening/closing door 650f1 of this embodiment allows the ball that reaches the top surface of the V winning device 650 to move along the slope of the top surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2). It is configured to flow from the right upper surface 650y1 of 650 to the left upper surface 650y2 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1, and to flow out toward the variable winning device 65.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the top surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the ball, so that the ball can be placed on the top surface of the opening/closing door 650f1. It is configured such that the period during which it flows down is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by small winning games. It is designed to be long. With this configuration, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to reliably win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by a small winning game.

When the small winning game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7(a) and the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 7(b). FIG. 7(b) is a schematic plan view of a state in which the V-winning port 650a of the V-winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves to retreat inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a is opened so that a prize can be won. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a because the opening/closing door 650f1 is located in the retreat position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 has a system for smoothing the ball flow after winning, no matter from which position the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a. A first regulating member 651 and a second regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 2), and the ball that enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 is placed in the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652. After being aligned in a line via the two regulating members 652, the particles are configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at the lower position of the first regulating member, the ball that enters the prize through the opening/closing door 650f1 will directly enter the detection port 650a1. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 from malfunctioning. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down over the first regulating member 651 and second regulating member 652) for aligning the balls before they pass through the detection port 650a1 with a passage width for one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to prevent balls from clogging in the V winning device 650 and hindering the game.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the operation is performed in a bonus game (small winning game) that is awarded when the judgment result of the judgment means (result of special symbol lottery) is a predetermined judgment result (small winning). The flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval period (0.5 seconds) between openings of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1). This configuration ensures that the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in the closed state) during the small winning game is entered into the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

In addition, it is possible to win a predetermined number of balls (10 balls) during a small winning game by simply placing only the balls flowing down on the variable member into the V winning device 650 during a small winning game. Since the number of opening operations in the winning game (12 times) is set higher than the number of winnings (10 pieces) as the ending condition for the small winning game, even if the opening period for one opening (0.1 seconds) is set short. , it is possible to secure a sufficient number of prizes. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are entered into the V winning device 650 during a small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 8, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 9), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 is connected to the front side, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing, a solenoid for driving electric accessories, etc., and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, first frame button 22, second frame button 23, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 for performance.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The audio lamp control device 113 also receives input from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are shown, they are referred to as the frame button 22). , and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the production content at the time of super reach. 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory drive command is sent to the other device 228 in order to drive a performance accessory (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is sent. It is possible to set an audio output command for outputting audio to the audio output device 226, or to set a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a lighting mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22. It may be configured as follows.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is 10 imitating the numbers "0" to "9". Each type is composed of the main pattern. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777") is performed, and the variable display It is structured so that the jackpot occurs after the end of the game. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

Further, a third symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the main display area Dm. If the third symbols are stopped on the active line with a jackpot symbol combination (in the first embodiment, the same main symbol combination), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

Note that the manner in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned one and may be arbitrary, and may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the direction of fluctuating display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in a column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those mentioned above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the variable display area smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing or not. You may also do so. Further, during the period in which the special symbols are varying, the variation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be varied again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol is the same as the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify the third symbol). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 10(b). As shown in FIG. 10(b), a small display area Dm2 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm2 displays a guide display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be launched (game direction) (see FIG. 11(a)). That is, in this embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as a guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily understand which area of the game board 13 he should shoot the ball toward just by visually checking the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this pachinko machine 10, when the guidance display mode displayed in the small display area Dm2 is variable, the audio guidance using the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are used. The light emitting guidance according to the invention is configured to be executed. Here, as the voice guidance using the voice output device 226, a voice indicating the display content to be displayed in the small display area Dm2 is outputted, such as a voice indicating "right-handed play".

Further, as a light-emitting guide using the lamp display device 227, for example, when guiding "right-handed hitting", a plurality of LEDs (not shown) used as light-emitting means are lit in order from the left side to the right side. Light emission is controlled. With this configuration, by visually recognizing the lighting pattern of the light emitting means provided on the game board 13, it is possible to easily grasp which area of the game board 13 the ball should be fired towards. In addition, it is possible to notify the player that the direction in which the ball is launched to the player (playing direction) has been switched not only by the display content of the third symbol display device 81 but also by audio guidance and luminous guidance. Therefore, it is possible to immediately make the player aware that the playing direction has been switched.

A small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is configured to be able to display a variable display of the third symbol in a simple manner. Here, when performing a variable display in the small display area Dm1, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is executed. This is the case. While the display effect is being executed, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide an easier-to-understand effect. In addition, by simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm1 while the display effect is being executed, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third symbol is continuing. can be made to understand.

Although the details will be described later, the small display area Dm1 includes a special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a where a third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, and a second special symbol which corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. It is formed from the special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b in which 3 symbols are displayed (see FIG. 11(a)). As a result, even when a display effect is being executed in the main display area Dm, it is possible for the player to easily understand which special symbol the third symbol is changing. . Note that this pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration in which a special figure 1 variable display area Dm1a and a special figure 2 variable display area Dm1b are formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one variation is formed in the small display area Dm1. A display area may be provided to display only the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner out of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

A small display area Dm3 is formed at the lower right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Although the details will be described later, this small display area Dm3 is a state (state) for indicating whether or not the time-saving state ends when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a specific gaming state (time-saving state). ) This is the area where the display mode Dm3a (see FIG. 11(a)) is displayed. Thereby, the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 allows the player to play the game while predicting the timing at which the time saving state will end.

Furthermore, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 10(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed in this sub-display area Ds. As described above, if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying the variable display, the number of times the ball enters the ball is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls entered. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is 4, and the second special symbol is set so that no reserved balls can be secured, so the sub-display area Ds is , up to four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbols was varied in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed numerically. Furthermore, the player may be visually notified of the size of the number of balls on hold by changing the appearance of the character in response to an increase or decrease in the number of balls on hold.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to this, a game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display being executed in the main display area Dm. A performance explanation mode for explaining, a frame button related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and a winning related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are in the sub display area Ds. The display area ratio between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to vary depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss, and there are pending balls, after the stop display for 1 second (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed), the lottery based on the pending balls will be entered. A corresponding variable display is started. In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time. In this way, after the lottery result corresponding to one special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stopped display state is continued for a predetermined period of time, and then the next special symbol variation is started. , it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that a new special symbol change has started. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned symbol confirmation period is always provided after the symbol variation time has elapsed, but detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there are no reserved balls, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that there is no ball entering either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 even though the player shoots the ball continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases, when the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it is because the player has quit playing the game and no games are being played with the pachinko machine 10 at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. A variable display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner below the main display area Dm, and the first display area Ds1 is horizontally long when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is formed as a reservation display area that displays a reservation symbol that is the number of balls (retention balls) whose variation has not yet been executed. In this first display area Ds1, winning information acquired when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is stored in the order in which they are stored (in order of the oldest pending storage timing), first pending symbols Dsb, second pending symbols Ds1, and second pending symbols Ds1. A pending symbol Dsc, a third pending symbol Dsd, and a fourth pending symbol Dse are displayed. Then, the pending symbol corresponding to the variation currently being executed is displayed at the center position of the sub-display area Ds as the currently executing symbol Dsa.

When the currently executed variation display ends and the next variation starts, the pending symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 is the pending symbol corresponding to the next variation (the front side of FIG. 10(b)). The first pending symbol Dsb) that is visually displayed on the rightmost side is erased, and the remaining pending symbols (Dsc to Dse) are shifted to the right and displayed. Then, the erased first pending symbol Dsb is displayed as an active symbol Dsa. As a result, it is possible to inform the player which pending symbol the variable display in progress corresponds to, so for example, by changing the display mode of the pending symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the pending symbol can be displayed. When a performance that increases the expectation that the lottery is a jackpot (so-called pre-reading performance) is executed, the player can easily know that a variable display corresponding to a pending symbol whose display mode is varied by the pre-reading performance is being executed. can be recognized.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the direction in which each pending symbol (first pending symbol Dsb to second pending symbol Dse) displayed in the first display area Ds1 moves (shifts) when a new special symbol variation is started. Since the configuration is such that the currently executed symbol Dsa is displayed in the right direction from the viewpoint in FIG. Since the player can understand it in a series of sequences, it is possible for the player to easily understand which pending symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to.

In addition, in this embodiment, only balls entering the first ball entrance 64 can be held up to a maximum of four times, but the upper limit of the number of balls held is not limited to four times, but is not limited to three times or less. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, it may be configured such that balls entering the second ball entry port 640 can be held up to a predetermined upper limit, or the upper limit of the number of balls entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 may be held. The upper limit of the number of balls held for balls entering the ball entrance 640 may be different from the upper limit of the number of balls held for balls entering the first ball entrance 64. The number may be greater than the upper limit of the number of balls held, or conversely, it may be less than the upper limit. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls can be displayed numerically on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four can be displayed in a manner that differs by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are in a lit state.

A second display area Ds2 is formed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds, and a production explanation for supplementing the content of the production (display production) executed in the main display area Dm is displayed (FIG. 11). b)). In this way, a plurality of pieces of information are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, namely, the variable display information of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the currently executed special symbol. Display effect information to indicate the degree of expectation that the corresponding lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot win), effect explanation information that supplements the contents of the display effect information, and pending symbol information indicating the number of reserved memories of the special symbol. By displaying the currently executed symbol information indicating the currently executed symbol in a predefined section (area), it is possible to notify the player of various information displayed at the same time in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the presentation contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17. This third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting winning), this is used as a trigger to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the first A fluctuating display of symbols) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

Note that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in common with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol, is configured to be displayed in a variable manner with priority over the first special symbol. The structure is such that the two special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

However, in the first embodiment, since the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured, the special symbol is set so that the reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed in order. The variation of the symbols is executed, but for example, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol both become variable at the timing of starting the variation of a new special symbol, that is, the first If the timing to start a new variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the special symbol and the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize winning) match, the variation of the second special symbol will start. It is configured to be executed with priority.

As a result, the player loses an opportunity to receive an advantageous lottery (opportunity to execute the second special symbol lottery) because a more disadvantageous lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed. can be reliably prevented.

As the display performance executed by the third symbol display device 81, a performance suggesting the presence or absence of various contents that can be established based on the lottery of special symbols is executed. Specifically, it is part of the jackpot winning suggestion effect that suggests whether or not you won the jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and the case where you did not win the jackpot by drawing a special symbol (you won a miss). A small win suggestion effect that gives the player a benefit (for example, the payout of a prize ball) that is smaller than a jackpot, and a small win suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the player has won a small win, and a game state that is advantageous to the player depending on the lottery result of a special symbol. A game state transition suggestion effect to suggest transition to a time saving state, or when a time saving state is set as a gaming state, the time saving state ends according to the lottery result of the special symbol or the variable display of the special symbol. An effect suggesting the end of the time-saving state is executed to suggest that the time-saving state is to be terminated.

In addition, a performance that suggests the lottery result of a special symbol (a performance suggesting a jackpot win, a performance suggesting a small win, etc.) is a display of the third symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and then stopped. Depending on the combination, an effect is executed using the period until the lottery result is announced (dynamic display period). For example, a static display indicating that the third symbol has won a jackpot during the dynamic display period. A reach display mode in which only some of the combinations (for example, the combination of "777") are stopped and displayed (for example, only two of the three third symbols are stopped and displayed as "77", After that, while the third symbol showing the reach display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm1, the story is displayed in the main display area Dm. The given effect is executed, and when the story is correctly completed, the effect is executed to stop and display the third symbol at "777".

In addition, in the above example, the reach display mode is a state in which some of the combinations of the third symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner that matches the combination that indicates that the lottery result is a hit (jackpot), but other than that, the reach display mode is The display mode may be used as a reach display mode, for example, some of the third symbols may be displayed in a dedicated display mode to indicate the reach state, or some combinations of the third symbols may be displayed. may be displayed in a special display mode to indicate the reach state, rather than in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won. By configuring the system so that the player can understand that the reach state has been established by checking the stopped display mode of a part of the third symbol, the player can win the jackpot. It is possible to gradually increase the sense of expectation for what has been done, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a continuous performance that is executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations as a performance that suggests the special symbol lottery result. This continuous performance is performed when a winning information command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 to indicate various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the command is displayed during the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation that is executed before the target special symbol variation) This is an effect to suggest to the player using the period during which the game is executed.

In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol that is executed before the target special symbol, it is possible to provide a longer-term effect to the player. It can provide better performance and enhance the performance effect. In addition, since it is possible to execute a continuous performance without highlighting the lottery results of special symbols (for example, winning) every time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's desire to play decreases. can.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in addition to the effect that suggests whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is also possible to change the gaming state depending on the number of times the special symbol is drawn (variable number of times). It is configured to also perform a suggesting performance (a time-saving state end suggestion performance). This time-saving state end suggestion performance is a performance that is continuously executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time-saving state, and is a performance that is continuously executed when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state. This is an effect to suggest that the time-saving state may end depending on the number of times that the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result (for example, a small winning win).

Here, the presentation contents of the above-mentioned time-saving state end suggestion presentation will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and the second ball entrance is changed depending on the operating state (variable state) of the electric accessory 640a. The configuration is such that a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball opening 640 (first state) and a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the ball opening 640 (second state) are set. Furthermore, a second special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, and if a small win is won, a small win game is executed in which the V winning device 650 is opened. Ru. The V winning device 650 has a special discharge channel 650e2 as a specific area through which the winning ball can pass, and the V switch indicates that the ball has passed (flowed down) the special discharge channel 650e2. The configuration is such that a jackpot (two types of winning) is set when 650e3 is detected. The time-saving state set as the gaming state is advantageous to the player, in which the electric accessory 640a easily moves (changes) to the second state (a state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640). Since the game state is entered, a right-handed game in which the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 is performed during the time saving state.

As described above, the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is configured to end when an end condition (time-saving end condition) is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, if the special symbol variation based on the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the special symbol lottery The time-saving state is terminated (the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state) when any condition is satisfied when a small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, three times).

In this way, by making it possible to set a plurality of time-saving termination conditions, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time-saving state advantageous to the player will continue. On the other hand, there is no suggestion (notification) to the player of whether or not the time-saving end condition is met, or time-saving information that will be updated toward the fulfillment of the time-saving end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small wins won during the time-saving state). ), there is a problem in that the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends abruptly, giving the player a sense of dissatisfaction.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the time saving state, whether or not the time saving end condition is met, time saving information that is updated toward the satisfaction of the time saving end condition (for example, information indicating the number of small wins won during the time saving state) ) is suggested (notified) to the player as a time-saving state end suggestion performance, so that the player can play the game while anticipating the period during which the time-saving state will continue to be set. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the time-saving state advantageous to the player suddenly ends, causing the player to feel dissatisfied.

In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions include time-saving termination conditions that are advantageous to the player (time-saving termination conditions that are established due to winning the jackpot) and other disadvantageous time-saving termination conditions. In the time-saving state end suggestion performance that is executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state end suggestion performance simply checks whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied or not, and the time-saving information that is updated toward the fulfillment of the time-saving end condition (for example, the number of small wins won during the time-saving state). Rather than executing a performance based on the information (information indicating information such as configured to run.

With this configuration, it is possible to not only allow the player to predict whether or not the end of the time-saving state is approaching, but also to predict whether or not a time-saving end condition advantageous to the player will be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to create interest in the performance to be performed (performance suggesting the end of the time-saving state), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, multiple types of small win games are executed, and depending on the small win game to be executed ( Depending on the set type of small win), the degree of expectation that two types of wins are set during the small win game is varied. Of the above-mentioned time-saving ending conditions, the time-saving ending conditions are established based on winning a small hit a predetermined number of times in the special symbol lottery. The system is configured to set the number of winnings for which .

By configuring in this way, when the time-saving ending condition is satisfied due to the winning of a small hit with a special symbol, the time-saving ending condition that is satisfied this time is an advantageous time-saving ending condition for the player (the type of small winning that is easy to win is set). A time-saving ending condition that is satisfied as a result of a small winning type that is difficult to win) or a time-saving ending condition that is disadvantageous to the player (a time-saving ending condition that is established as a result of a small winning type that is difficult to win). This can be suggested (notified) to the player. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition is satisfied due to winning a small win, the player can be made to pay close attention to the performance executed in the time saving state end suggestion performance.

In addition, the number of times set for each small win type mentioned above (the number of times the time-saving termination condition is satisfied set for each small win type) is set to a different number of times depending on the expectation level of winning two types of each small win type. It is configured as follows. Specifically, small winning types with high expectations for winning two types (e.g., small winning A) finish in a shorter time with fewer wins than small winning types with lower expectations for winning two types (e.g., small winning C). It is configured so that the conditions are met.

By configuring in this way, for example, immediately after the time saving state is set, the time saving state ends based on the small winning of the special symbol in the time saving state end suggestion effect, or until just before the time saving state ends. When a performance indicating that the time-saving information has been updated is executed, it is possible for the player to predict that the small win won this time will be a small win with high expectations for winning two types. In other words, it is possible to make the player predict various game results based on the content of the performance suggesting the end of the time-saving state and the period during which the time-saving state continues, thereby increasing the performance effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, as time-saving ending conditions that are advantageous for the player, a time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won as described above, and a small winning type that is easy to win in two types of small winning games are set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and among the multiple time-saving termination conditions, if the time-saving termination condition is satisfied, the player will be more likely to be satisfied than if the other time-saving termination conditions are satisfied. It is good as long as it is advantageous. For example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) and the time-saving end condition is met, a special state is set in which the special symbol lottery to be executed thereafter is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine having this function, the time-saving termination condition advantageous to the player may be the time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

Specifically, for example, a special symbol high probability state in which it is easy to win a jackpot with a special symbol, or a special symbol low probability state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot is set, and the player can set a special symbol high probability state in which it is easier to win a jackpot with a special symbol. By setting either the normal symbol high probability state where it is easy to win or the normal symbol low probability state where it is harder to win, you can set the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal low probability state of symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), short time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), potential state (high probability state of special symbols) , normal symbol low probability state), and the like, and the degree of advantage for the player in each game state is configured such that at least the probability state is more advantageous to the player than the probability variable state.

Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, only when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) and the time saving end condition is met, the state changes from the normal symbol high probability state to the normal symbol low probability state. The configuration is configured such that a potential state is set by transitioning to . By configuring this way, it is better to win a jackpot when the variable probability state is set than to win a jackpot in a state where the variable probability state is set, and then set a gaming state other than the probability state after the jackpot ends. To provide a game state that is more advantageous to the player if the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) without winning, and a probability state is set. I can do it.

In addition, in the above example, the condition for setting a probability state that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number in a state where a probability change state is set. By setting the time-saving ending condition only when the time-saving ending condition is satisfied, the time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is set as a time-saving ending condition that is advantageous to the player. To the configuration of the example described above, a configuration may be added in which a probability state is set in a small portion (for example, 1%) of cases where a jackpot of a special symbol is won in a state where a probability variable state is set.

As a result, in a state where a variable probability state is set, it is possible to set a probability state that is advantageous to the player, whether the special symbol wins a jackpot or the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. However, in this case, the time-saving ending condition in which a potential state is more likely to be set is the time-saving ending condition that is more advantageous to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 11 to 15, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the time-saving state end suggestion production in this embodiment will be specifically explained. FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and a time saving state is set after the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the time-saving state is set, the words "Pounding Rush Enter" are displayed in the main display area Dm, indicating that the time-saving state has been set. This "pounding rush" is a performance executed in response to the period in which the time-saving state is set, and serves as a notification mode to show the player that the current gaming state is the time-saving state.

Then, in the small display area (guidance display area) Dm2, the words "Right-handed game" are displayed to guide the game to be played during the time-saving state, and it is notified that the right-handed game should be played during the time-saving state. . Also, during the pounding rush, a third symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and in the center of the main display area Dm, a character 801 resembling a boy (see FIG. 12(a)) appears in a treasure box 802 (see FIG. 12(a)). (reference)) is executed. Returning to FIG. 11, the explanation will be continued. In the small display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a situation (state) display mode Dm3a for suggesting whether or not the time saving state ends is displayed. This situation (state) display mode Dm3a shows whether or not the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executed special symbol variation has won a jackpot, and whether or not the time saving state is based on the currently executed special symbol variation. Variable in various display modes (see Figure 15) depending on the determination result of whether the time saving state ends or not, or whether the information regarding the condition for the time saving state has been updated based on the currently executed special symbol variation. It is configured so that

In FIG. 11(a), a display mode "display mode 1" (see FIG. 15) is displayed, which indicates that the currently executed special symbol variation has not won a jackpot or a small win. The display screen shown in FIG. 11(a) is when the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and when the change of the first special symbol that was already held and stored at the time of winning the jackpot is being executed. Therefore, the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 variable display region Dm1a of the small display region Dm2, and the pending symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as the active symbol Dsa. The display mode "circle mark" is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11(b), we will explain the display screen when there is a reserved symbol that wins the jackpot among the first special symbols (reserved symbols) that were already reserved and stored at the time of winning the jackpot. . FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when there is a pending symbol winning the jackpot when the time saving state is set after the jackpot. In FIG. 11(b), winning information corresponding to the first reserved symbol Dsb includes winning information about winning a jackpot, and the small display area Dm3 has a display mode " "Display mode 3" (see FIG. 15) is displayed as the status display mode Dm3b.

Then, in the second display area Ds2, characters "Look forward to it" indicating the content of the status display mode Dm3b are displayed. Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 11(b), the jackpot is won immediately after the time-saving state is set (after the special symbol 1 variation is executed three times after the time-saving state is set), so the above-mentioned time-saving state The setting is such that the jackpot is won while the display screen shown in FIG. 11(b) is maintained without executing the pounding rush that is executed during the game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the pounding rush from being executed for only a short period of time.

In this case, in the main display area Dm, a display screen (production start screen during the time saving state) that is different from the normal display (see FIG. 11(a)), such as "Entering a thrilling rush?", is displayed. Note that the display screen shown in FIG. 11(b) may be configured to be displayed also when, for example, the normal state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, when the display mode of "Pounding Rush Enters!!" shown in FIG. 11(a) is displayed after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the time saving state has been set. This allows players to play games with peace of mind. In addition, if the display mode of "Entering a pounding rush?" shown in FIG. 11(b) is displayed after the jackpot game ends, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, or the jackpot is won while pending. It is possible to notify the player that one of these things is happening, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In addition to the configuration described above, a determination means is provided for determining whether or not there is winning information that will win a jackpot in the reserved symbols that exist after the end of the jackpot game, and there is winning information that will win a jackpot based on the determination means. If it is determined that this is the case, the same display mode (for example, the words "Big Chance") may be configured to be displayed regardless of the gaming state (normal state or time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game. . Furthermore, the jackpot information discriminated by the above-mentioned discrimination means is analyzed, the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the analyzed jackpot information (pre-read jackpot information) is determined, and the jackpot is won based on the determination result. The display mode may be configured to be set after the game ends.

In this case, for example, if it is determined that the time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the look-ahead jackpot information, the display mode after the end of the jackpot game will be the characters "Pounding Rush Enters!!" (i.e., the time-saving state If it is determined that the normal state will be set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the pre-read jackpot information, the display mode after the end of the jackpot game will be "Are you in a pounding rush?" ” (that is, a display mode that does not notify that the time saving state has entered) may be configured to be displayed.

By configuring this way, if the winning information for winning a jackpot is included in the pending symbols that exist after the end of the current jackpot game, the pending symbol will be used instead of the gaming state that will be set after the end of the current jackpot game. The display mode to be displayed after the end of the current jackpot game can be set based on the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot (next jackpot) included in. Therefore, for example, a time saving state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the current jackpot game, and a jackpot that was included in the pending symbol is won during that time saving state, and after the end of the jackpot game, the player becomes more advantageous than the time saving state. When an unfavorable normal state is set, a display mode is displayed that does not notify the player that the time saving state has been set, so the time saving state advantageous to the player ends in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Here, the display mode of the status display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining the types of situation (state) display modes Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3. As shown in FIG. 15, this embodiment is configured so that nine types of situation display modes can be displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the lottery results of the changing special symbols (big hit winning, small winning winning ), the status display mode is set according to the content that is updated when the special symbol changes (the number of small winnings, the number of special symbol changes) for the time-saving end condition that ends the time-saving state when it is satisfied. It is displayed in the display area Dm3.

As a result, by understanding the situation display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, the player can predict how the time saving state will progress due to the special symbol fluctuations being executed, making it easy to understand. can provide games.

To specifically explain the status display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3, "display mode 1 (first display mode)" is displayed as a "white circle" (see FIG. 11(a)). ) Display mode. This "display mode 1" is the condition that the time saving state ends without winning the jackpot, and the contents related to the conditions for the time saving state ending (for example, the number of special symbol changes and the number of small winnings) reach a predetermined stage. This is the display mode that is set when the information has not been updated. If this "display mode 1" is displayed, it can be confirmed that the time-saving game (time-saving state) will not end due to this special symbol change, and the player can look forward to the next special symbol change with confidence. .

Next, "display mode 2 (second display mode)" is a display mode in which "black circles" are displayed. This "display mode 2" is a display mode that is set when the condition for ending the time saving state and the condition for ending the time saving state have not been updated to a predetermined stage, indicating that a small win has been won. . Here, this embodiment is configured so that a jackpot (two types of winnings) is set based on the small winning game as described above, and the contents of the small winning game to be executed (small winning of the won small winning) The expectation level (probability that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball during a small winning game) at which a two-type win is set is configured to differ depending on the type (type).

This "display mode 2" notifies the player that he or she has won a small win, but it does not notify the player of the small win type of the small win that was won. The player plays the game while expecting that the small win type is a small win type (for example, small win A) in which it is easy to set a two-type win. In addition, players will play the game while feeling the possibility that the end conditions of the time saving state will be updated (updated within the range of the stage before reaching the predetermined stage) due to winning a small win, so it creates a sense of tension. You can play games.

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, the plurality of small winning types are divided into a small winning type (small winning A) in which two types of winnings are likely to be set, and a small winning type in which it is more difficult to set two types of winnings than small winning A. (Small win B, small win C), and as the end condition of the time-saving state that can be established based on the small win (time-saving end condition), the smaller the number of wins is set for the small win type where it is easier to set two types of wins. It is configured so that In other words, the time-saving ending conditions are configured to be set differently for each of the multiple small winning types depending on the degree of advantage to the player, and the more advantageous the lottery result is to the player, the more time-saving ending conditions are set. It is structured so that it is easy to establish.

Therefore, for example, if "display mode 2" is displayed immediately after the time-saving state is set, it is predicted that one of all small winning types has been won, and the predetermined period has passed since the time-saving state was set. If "display mode 2" is displayed after (after you have already won multiple small wins during the time saving state), the small win for which the number of wins is set to be large as the time saving end condition, that is, the 2nd type win is displayed. It can be predicted that the player has won a small win for which a small win type that is difficult to set is set. In this way, it is possible to predict in detail the lottery result of the current special symbol based on the type of display mode displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the elapsed period of the time saving state, which gives the player the pleasure of predicting. can be provided.

“Display mode 3 (third display mode)” is a display mode in which a “sun symbol using a white circle” is displayed (see FIG. 11(b)). This "display mode 3" is a display mode indicating that a special symbol jackpot (symbol hit) has been won. As a result, when a jackpot (jackpot game) is set on multiple occasions as in the present embodiment, it is possible to inform the player of the occasion when a jackpot (jackpot game) is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

“Display mode 4 (fourth display mode)” is a display mode in which “the word chance is displayed in a white circle” (see FIG. 14(a)). This "display mode 4" includes the conditions for winning a small win B or C (i.e., a small win with low expectations for two types) as the small win type, and for the time saving state to end, and for the time saving state to end. This is a display mode that is set when the termination condition is updated to a predetermined stage.

“Display mode 5 (fifth display mode)” is a display mode in which “last chance” is displayed in a white circle (see FIG. 13(a)). This "display mode 5" is a display mode that is set when a small win is won and the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied. By displaying this "display mode 5", the player is notified that the time saving condition has ended.

By configuring this way, it is possible to know at a stage before the small winning game is executed that the time saving state will end if the two types of wins are not won in the small winning game corresponding to the small winning game that was won this time. Since it is possible to notify the player (before the special symbol indicating that he/she has won the small hit is stopped and displayed), the player will be more motivated to play the small win game than usual. can be set.

"Display mode 6 (sixth display mode)" is a display mode in which "large pinch characters inside a white circle" are displayed (see FIG. 14(b)). This "display mode 6" is a display mode that is set when the small win C, which has the lowest expectation of two types of small win, is won and the conditions for the time saving state to end are satisfied. "Display mode 6" is for indicating to the player that the time saving state will end due to winning the small win (small win C). In this way, by suggesting to the player that the current special symbol change is another time-saving change during the time-saving state, the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, will suddenly end, and the player will be discouraged. This can prevent embarrassing situations from occurring.

"Display mode 7 (seventh display mode)" is a display mode in which "super hot letters in a white circle" are displayed. This "display mode 7" is a display mode that is set when the small win A, which has the highest expectation of two types of small win among the small win types, is won and the conditions for the time saving state to end are satisfied.

In addition, in the first embodiment, "once" is set for the small win A, which has the highest expectation for winning two types, as the time-saving ending condition (the winning number ending condition) that can be satisfied if a small win is won. Therefore, in the explanation of "Display mode 7", it is explained that it is set when the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied, but it is not limited to this, and multiple small winning types Among them, it may be used as a display mode to only indicate that the small win A, which has the highest expectation level for two types, has been won.

"Display mode 8 (eighth display mode)" is a display mode in which "the word "end" is displayed in a white circle. This "display mode 8" is set when the time-saving end condition (variation number end condition) that is satisfied when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number without winning a jackpot or small win. This is the display mode. By displaying this "display mode 8", it is possible to reliably notify the player of the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the present first embodiment, when the winning number end condition and the variable number end condition are satisfied by the same special symbol fluctuation (lottery) as the condition for the time saving state to end, it is assumed that the variable number end condition is satisfied. It is configured to make a determination. That is, in the special symbol variation in which the variation number end condition is satisfied, when the small win A is won, "display mode 8" is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that he or she has won a small win after making the player think that the time-saving state has ended, thereby giving the player a surprising experience in the game. can be provided.

“Display mode 9 (ninth display mode)” is a display mode in which “?” characters are displayed in a white circle. This "display mode 9" is a display mode that is set without regard to the special symbol lottery results or update information of the time saving state. This "display mode 9" is a display mode that is set by a predetermined lottery regardless of the special symbol lottery result or the progress status of the time saving state. In this way, by making it possible to set a display mode that does not notify the player of the gaming status or situation, each time a special symbol variation is executed, the player will be notified of the current special symbol variation. There is no need to provide information (updated information).

In addition, in the first embodiment, by displaying "display mode 9", it is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand (make it difficult for the player to understand) the game content during the time saving state. Alternatively, a configuration may be provided in which a determining means is provided to determine whether display modes 1 to 9 are to be displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the display content is determined based on the determination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the contents of the pounding rush executed on the third symbol display device during the time saving state will be explained. FIG. 12(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance content of the pounding rush that is executed during a period when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, and small win A is set as the small win type. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance content displayed while the second special symbol winning the small hit is changing.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the small display area Dm1, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the special symbol 2 variable display region Dm1b, and the second special symbol ( A "triangle mark" indicating special map 2) is displayed. This state occurs after all the first special symbols (special symbols 1) that have been suspended and stored in the time-saving state shown in FIG. This is a state in which the variation of the second special symbol is started due to (trigger) that a ball fired in a right-handed game enters the second ball entry port 640.

The details will be described later, but in this embodiment, if you win one small win for which small win A is set, the time saving end condition (number of winnings end condition) is satisfied, so this special symbol change , "Display mode 5" is displayed as the situation (state) display mode Dm3a indicating that the small win has been won and the time-saving termination condition has been met, and the second display area Ds2 shows that the small win has been won. The words "Treasure Chest Found" will be displayed.

Then, when the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a small hit, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shows the image shown in FIG. 12(b). The display contents shown in are displayed. FIG. 12(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner in FIG. 12(a) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 12(b), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 2 variable display area Dm1b of the small display area Dm1 with the combination "341" to indicate the lottery result (small win) of the second special symbol. The treasure box 802 is displayed in an enlarged manner in the main display area Dm, and the words "What's inside (the treasure box)..." are displayed in the second display area Ds2 to guide the future development of the performance.

This treasure box 802 is used to show the game result of the small winning game that will be executed immediately after, and an effect is executed in which opening of the treasure box 802 is successful or unsuccessful depending on the result of the small winning game. Ru. The details of the performance executed according to the result of the small winning game will be described later with reference to FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b).

Here, with reference to FIG. 13(a), a description will be given of the presentation contents when a two-type win is obtained during a small win game in which a small win A is set. FIG. 13(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when a 2nd type win is won (a V prize is won) in a small win game in which a small win A is set, which is executed during a time saving state. . As shown in FIG. 13(a), when a V prize is won during a small winning game (when the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), , an effect in which the treasure box 802 is successfully opened is executed, and a V display 803 is displayed indicating that a jackpot game is set. Then, the words "Jackpot" are displayed in the second display area Ds2, indicating that a jackpot (type 2 win) has been won.

On the other hand, if the second type of win cannot be obtained during the small win game in which the small win A is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. FIG. 13(b) schematically shows the display contents when the second type win is not won (no V prize is won) in the small win game in which the small win A is set and is executed during the time saving state. It is a schematic diagram. As described above, in this embodiment, the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied by winning the small win once for which the small win A is set, so in the small win game of the small win A. If the player fails to win the prize, the time saving state ends and the normal state is set.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13(b), if a player fails to win V in the small win game of small win A, a failure display mode 803 in which the treasure box 802 explodes is displayed, and a time saving state is displayed in the second display area Ds2. The words "Unfortunately, rush has ended" will be displayed to indicate that the rush has ended. After this screen is displayed, the words "left-handed hit" are displayed in the small display area Dm2 as game guidance corresponding to the normal state, and a screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed.

Next, an explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 14(a) about the performance when a small win with small win B set during the time saving state is won. FIG. 14(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when a small win for which small win B is set is won for the first time during the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21(d), but in this embodiment, "winning 3 times in a small win with small win B set" can be set as one of the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state. It is composed of Here, if a small win for which small win B is set is won for the first time during the time saving state, display mode 4 is displayed in the small display area Dm3, as shown in FIG. 14(a), and the main display area A treasure box 804 is displayed on DM.

This treasure box 804 has a different display form from the treasure box 802 shown in FIG. 12(b), and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the expectation level of winning the second type of small win this time. Specifically, the configuration is such that the more the player wins the small win (small win A) with a high expectation level for the second type, the more the treasure box (treasure box 802) with a gorgeous display mode is more likely to be displayed. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the expectation level for winning two types based on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure chest displayed on the main display area Dm. can.

In the small winning game (small winning game corresponding to small winning B) that is executed after the display screen of FIG. 14(a) is displayed, if a V prize is won, the effect display screen similar to that shown in FIG. 13(a) will be displayed. (The only difference is that the display mode of the opened treasure chest is changed to the treasure box 804). On the other hand, if the V prize is not won, a production display screen is displayed that shows that the contents of the opened treasure chest 804 are empty. After that, the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed, and the effect of the boy 801 searching for the treasure box again is executed.

Next, an explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 14(b) regarding the effect when a small win with a small win C set during the time saving state is won. FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the small win C is set and the small win is won five times during the time saving state. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 21(d), but in this embodiment, it is possible to set "winning 5 times in a small win with a small win C" as one of the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state. It is composed of Here, if the small win C is set and the small win is won 5 times during the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 14(b), display mode 6 is displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the main display A treasure box 805 is displayed in area Dm.

This treasure box 805 has a different display form from the above-mentioned treasure boxes 802 and 804b, and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of winning the second type of small win this time. Specifically, the configuration is such that the treasure box (treasure box 805) with a poor display mode is more likely to be displayed if the small win (small win C) with the lowest expectation level for two types is won. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the expectation level for winning two types based on the display mode of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 and the display mode of the treasure chest displayed on the main display area Dm. can.

In other words, if the display screen shown in FIG. 14(b) is displayed, there is a high possibility that the time-saving termination condition is satisfied because the small win (small win C) with the lowest expectation level for the second type was won. Therefore, the player will play the small winning game that will be executed after this while praying that he will win a V prize.

As explained above, the present embodiment is configured to be able to set a plurality of time-saving termination conditions that can be established based on the lottery (variation) of special symbols executed during the time-saving state. It is possible to execute an effect (display of the situation (state) display mode Dm3a) that allows the player to grasp the situation of the time saving state based on whether the time saving end condition is satisfied or not and the update status until the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set, it is possible to prevent a situation where the time-saving state suddenly ends and the player is confused.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during a small winning game in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 16(a) shows a display screen that is displayed when the right to win two types has not been acquired after a predetermined period of time has passed since a small win game in which small win A is set as the small win type is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 16(b) is a case where the right to win two types is acquired after a predetermined period has elapsed after a small win game in which small win A is set as the small win type is executed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the screen. In addition, Fig. 17(a) is displayed when the right to win two types has not been acquired after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the small winning game in which small winning B or C is set as the small winning type is executed. FIG. 17(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen in which a small win type is set as small win B or C. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the rights to are acquired.

In the first embodiment, a small winning game is executed in which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened 12 times during the small winning game, and at the fifth or tenth opening timing, The configuration is such that an instruction command is output when the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball (see S1609 in FIG. 54). If it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an emphasis guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win the ball. Set the display instruction command to display.

Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball while the highlighted guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16(b), an achievement display mode is displayed to congratulate the player. Set the command. In other words, in this embodiment, if a small winning game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is configured to reliably win in the V winning device 650 by playing a right-handed game. In addition, the ball won in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 in which the V switch 650e3 is provided. Despite this configuration, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball at the fifth opening timing of the opening/closing door 650f1, the third symbol will be displayed when the small winning game is started. The player is playing the left-handed game without noticing the display in the guidance display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10(b)) of the display device 81 that guides the player to play right-handed. Alternatively, it is possible that the player has stopped playing.

In such a case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play the right-handed game by changing the display that guides the right-handed game displayed in the guide display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Furthermore, as the timing for displaying the highlighted guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)), if a right-handed game is performed after the highlighted guidance display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the right-handed game The timing is such that the fired ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who has played a right-handed game according to the display of the emphasis guide display mode Dy1 is unable to cause the ball to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2 during a small winning game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the degree of expectation of winning two types is different depending on the type of small winning won, and a small winning game (small winning A) with a high expectation of winning two types is executed. The content of the effect display that is executed at the 5th or 10th opening timing in the case where the small win game (small win B, C) with low expectation level for 2 types is being executed. It's different.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. A first win type counter C2 used for this, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and a small win type counter C5 used to select the small win type of the special symbol. , a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Further, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 37), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 51). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a that corresponds to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, which is made up of four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4). is the value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 according to the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. are stored respectively.

Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, A special symbol variation is started based on the various stored values. Note that this embodiment does not have a configuration in which the ball is stored while holding the entry into the second ball entrance 640, and a configuration in which the ball is stored while holding that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Also, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area may be provided as a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas).

Next, each counter will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 18. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999), it becomes 0. It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 51).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is provided with two types: a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special symbol. The number of random numbers that result in a small win is the same, but the number of random numbers that result in a small win is set to be different (see FIG. 20). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in small wins, the level of expectation for the award of benefits (big or small wins) to players can be increased between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. can be made different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained. FIG. 20(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 20(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. FIG. 20(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In this first winning random number table 202a, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot and a random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win are set. It's a table.

Specifically, when executing the lottery of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, among the values of the random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values are other than jackpot (i.e., It is specified as the judgment value for Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is one of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

When executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 20(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, among the values of the random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as jackpot determination values, and "5 to 989" are defined as small hit determination values. , and "990 to 999" is defined as the determination value for other cases (that is, outliers). Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a jackpot, and if the value is any one of "5 to 989", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In some cases, it is determined as a small hit.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 in the event of a special symbol jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, in a state where the special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed (that is, a state other than the special symbol variation, jackpot game, or small win game), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. When the ball enters the ball, it is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is not a random number that is determined to be a special symbol jackpot or small hit, That is, if the random number is determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random numbers that will be a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are as described above. are stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 5 out of the total number of random numbers of 1000, so the probability of a special symbol winning a jackpot is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is used to refer to the first winning type selection table 202b to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 21.

FIG. 21(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 21(a), in this embodiment, the special symbol 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 when drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1) It has a selection table 202b1 and a special pattern 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 that is used when determining the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 when drawing the second special symbol (special pattern 2). . As a result, the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery is made different from the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, or each of multiple types of jackpot is selected. Since the ratio of the special symbols used can be made different, the game using the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special symbol 2) provide different gameplay to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21(b), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 used when drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be explained. FIG. 21(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the first winning type counter C2, when the random number is any one of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and any of "10 to 49" is the jackpot type. If the number is between 50 and 99, the jackpot type will be ``Jackpot B,'' and if the number is between 50 and 99, the jackpot type will be ``Jackpot C.''

“Jackpot A” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (one time saving number). "Jackpot A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is large and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random values for which "Jackpot A" is selected, so it is a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In this case, the rate at which "Jackpot A" is selected is 10%.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (one time saving number). Although the number of rounds is smaller than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," the "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player because the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 40 random values for which "Jackpot B" is selected, so the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a jackpot. 40% of the time, "Jackpot B" is selected.

“Jackpot C” is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "Jackpot C" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous for the player. Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 50 random values for which "Jackpot C" is selected, so the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a lottery. In this case, the rate at which "Jackpot C" is selected is 50%.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected at a rate of 10% when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and a jackpot game of 90 rounds is selected. 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of %. Also, a jackpot is selected in which the gaming state shifts to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game at a rate of 50%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21(c), the special pattern 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used when drawing the second special symbol (special pattern 2) will be explained. FIG. 21(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 21(c), when the random number value is one of "0 to 99" in the first winning type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot D". That is, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), "jackpot D", which is most advantageous for the player, is always selected as the jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21(d), the time saving grant contents for each jackpot type will be explained.

In the present embodiment, there are four types of jackpots, but the jackpot is not limited thereto, and may be one type, or may be configured to have five or more types. Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first winning type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, by setting a jackpot type in which more rounds are executed when a jackpot is achieved with the second special symbol, it is possible for the player to win more easily with the second special symbol. It can make you look forward to it. Therefore, it is possible to make winning in the high-probability gaming state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly want to shift to the high probability state, and it is possible to make the player play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first win type counter C2 is set to correspond to each jackpot type. It may be configured such that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 with the aim of a specific counter value from being carried out using both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of a miss, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied. Two stop (performance) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (in the range of 0 to 89, for example) where the symbol stops. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Furthermore, in this embodiment, this table is divided into one for the normal state and one for the time saving state, and the range of random values set for each stop type of failure is changed depending on the table. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal state or a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

For example, in a time-saving state, jackpots are likely to occur, so in order to avoid selecting more reach effects than necessary, there is a table for high-probability situations with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 that corresponds to the stop type of "completely missed". "Completely out of reach" becomes more likely to be selected, and "out of reach" narrows to 90 to 99, making it difficult to select "out of reach". In addition, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is narrow from 0 to 79 in order to ensure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table for low probability times is selected, making it difficult for "completely off" to be selected, and widening the range of random numbers corresponding to the "out of reach" stop type from 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, many reach displays with long production times can be performed, so the time for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can continue. It becomes easier to perform.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to change the selection ratio of stop types according to the gaming state, a stop type selection table (not shown) is provided for the normal state and for the time saving state. A dedicated table may be provided corresponding to the gaming state. For example, as a gaming state, a high probability state (high probability of winning a special symbol) in which it is easier to win a special symbol (jackpot) than in a normal state. In a gaming machine having a probability state or a variable probability state, a stop type selection table for the variable probability state may be provided.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 in the case of a special symbol winning. 99), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in a state in which special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed (that is, in a state other than the special symbol variation, jackpot game, or small win game). Alternatively, the ball is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the small winning type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) for determining the type of small win to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is set.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202f will be explained with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, in the small hit type selection table 202f, three types of small win A to small hit C are defined as the small win type of the second special symbol to be selected by the value of the small win type counter C5. ing. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is "0", the small win type is "small win A (big win A when passing V)", and any one of "1 to 10" If the number is between 11 and 99, the small win type will be “Small win B (Jackpot B when V passes)”, and if it is any of “11 to 99”, the small win type will be “Small hit C (Small win C (Jackpot B when V passes)”). The time will be a jackpot A).

Here, each small winning type (small winning A to small winning C) is executed after the small winning game ends when a ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the respective small winning game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of small win A, jackpot A (15R time-saving jackpot) is set, and after execution of small win A, a jackpot is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state, and then the time saver state is executed. It is configured such that one time-saving game (a period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set. In addition, in the case of small win B, a jackpot B (5R time saving jackpot) is set as a 5R time saving one-time jackpot, and after execution of small win B, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. is executed, and then one time-saving game is set as a time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed). ing. In the case of small win C, jackpot A (15R time-saving jackpot) is set as in the case of small win A, and after execution of small win C, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state. is executed, but after the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set and the normal state is set.

In this way, depending on the selected small winning type, the contents of the jackpot game to be executed after the small winning game ends and the game state set after the jackpot game can be varied. Specifically, small win A is the most advantageous for the player because the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is large (15R), and a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot game ends. Small win B is set as a small win, and the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is small (5R), and it is set to be more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned small win A, but the time saving state is set after the jackpot game. Ru. Small win C is set as the most disadvantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is small (5R) and the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as an end condition for the time saving state, the number of changes of the second special symbol is one time (first end condition), or the number of times of change of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second termination condition) is set. By configuring this way, if a jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special symbol 1 ) even if the change is executed, the time saving state does not end. In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the above-mentioned second ending condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. special symbols) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short time off, long time off, normal reach, super reach, etc. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 51) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23(a)) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is set in.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used when the time saving state is set. A time saving variation pattern table 202d2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the data table used to select the fluctuation pattern is different depending on the gaming state, so the fluctuation pattern (variation time) to be selected is different depending on the gaming state. be able to.

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 provided in the variation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the normal variation pattern table 202d1, symbol types, lottery results, the range of values of the variation type counter CS1, and variation patterns are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "lost", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation with a variation time of 7 seconds is defined in the range of , a 20 second variation is defined in the range of "140 to 149", and a variation in the range of "150 to 179" is defined. Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in association with each other, and a super reach a with a variable time of 80 seconds is defined in association with a range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the 1st special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "Jackpot", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the normal reach type with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is supported. A super reach with a variation time of 80 seconds is defined in the range "30 to 189", and various special reaches with a variation time of 140 seconds are defined in the range "190 to 198". has been done.

Next, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is "lost", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is in the entire range. If a long miss of 180 seconds is specified and the lottery result is a "big win or a small win", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 180 seconds in the entire range. A long miss is specified.

In this way, one of the fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. By doing so, a variable performance corresponding to the variable time is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured so as not to enter the second ball entry opening 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game is performed in which a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a first special symbol is drawn. In the normal state configured as described above, the second special symbol lottery is executed when the player illegally inserts a ball into the second ball entrance 640. For the variation of the second special symbol in , a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the second special symbol is drawn illegally within a short period of time. In addition, if it is determined that the second special symbol lottery (variation) has been executed during the normal state, the second special symbol lottery will be fraudulently performed using the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed. It may be configured to notify the outside that the (variation) has been executed. In addition, if a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is fraudulently executed, the winning lottery (variation) result will be forcibly used as the lottery (variation) result of the fraudulently executed second special symbol. It may be configured to create and display the information.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is 7 seconds when the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is a loss (the selection rate is 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate is approximately 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate approximately 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate approximately 5%). . In addition, if the lottery result is a jackpot, it will be easier to select in the order of 80 seconds (selection rate is approximately 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate is approximately 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate is approximately 5%). stipulated in

In this way, there is a relationship between the special symbol lottery results and the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the ratio of the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot and the special It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation when a specific variation time (variation pattern) is selected based on the proportion of variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of a symbol is a loss. ing. With this configuration, the player can predict whether or not he or she has won a jackpot based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the jackpot type won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A). A configuration may be adopted in which different variation pattern tables are used for the case where the jackpot type is a jackpot type and the case where the jackpot type is a jackpot type that indicates other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating another jackpot has a shorter variation than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A). It is preferable that the configuration is such that a time variation pattern is easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the executed variation pattern, the more advantageous the player can expect a gaming result to be, making the player interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is more likely to be selected in a fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type that indicates a regular jackpot than a fluctuation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type that indicates a variable jackpot. With this, if a player wins a jackpot with a short fluctuation time, it is possible to provide a surprising gaming result to the player, and even if a short fluctuation time is selected, , can keep you looking forward to the end.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 24, in the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2, the symbol type, the number of variations, the lottery result, the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, if the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4, and the lottery result is "lost", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, if a short error of 2 seconds is defined in the entire range, and the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198". A range, that is, a short hit of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range. If the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of variations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is "lost", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range If a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified and the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is determined for the entire range. is stipulated. In addition, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is "lost", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If a variation time of 30 seconds is specified for the entire range and the lottery result is a "small win", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 160", a short/small win with a variation time of 10 seconds. is defined, a small to medium win with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "161 to 198", and if the lottery result is a "big win", a medium to large win with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined.

Returning to FIG. 18, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of execution and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The random number value for the normal symbol win is set by the second win random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second win random number counter C4 is set by the second win random number table 202c. If it matches the random number value set by , it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol is always constant regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the second winning random number table 202c may be used for times when the probability of normal symbols is low (a period in which the normal symbols are in their normal state), and when there is a high probability that the probability of winning the normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low (periods when the normal symbols are in the normal state). Two types may be provided: one for a period in which the time is shortened and one for a period in which the time is shortened. In this case, the number of winning random numbers included in each is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, it is possible to change the probability of a win depending on the low probability of a normal symbol and the high probability of a normal symbol.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state, and if the gaming state is the time saving state, a second symbol is displayed. In the device 83, a fluctuating display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the time saving state, a variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds on the second symbol display device 83.

If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is displayed by lighting up. Then, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) is a time saving state, and the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) is in the time saving state, and When the second symbol fluctuation start point is also in the time saving state, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second ball entry opening 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled (short-circuit opening control) so that the second ball entry port 640 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds. Note that the time and number of times the second ball entry port 640 is opened may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operation details of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (opening period and number of openings of the second ball entrance 640) are variable depending on the set gaming state. If the gaming state at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation is in the short time state, the time for the fluctuation display will be extremely short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds compared to the normal state, and furthermore, If the lottery result of the second symbol that started changing during the period in which the time saving state is set is a hit and the time saving state is also set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts operating, otherwise Compared to this, the opening period of the second ball entry port 640 is much longer, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. state. A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit based on the value (random number) of the second random number counter C4.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the gaming state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the gaming state at the timing of starting the operation of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, Although the configuration is such that the variation time of the second symbol and the operation content of the electric accessory 640a are set differently, other configurations may be used. For example, the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) From the start timing to the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a, a determining means is provided to determine that the time saving state is continuously set, and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is determined using the determination result of the determining means. It may also be configured to set the operation details of the electric accessory 640a.

As described above, in this embodiment, in order to perform an operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as an operation of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to The time saving state must be set at any timing. With this configuration, for example, when the second symbol that starts changing at the timing when the normal state is set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a hit at the timing when the time saving state is set, or , based on the lottery of one second symbol, such as when a second symbol that starts changing at the timing when the time saving state is set stops displaying with identification information indicating a hit at the timing when the time saving state is set. When the fluctuation of the second symbol executed by the player and the operation of the electric accessory 640a span multiple game states, the operation control (long release) of the electric accessory 640a that is advantageous to the player may be executed. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous situation from being provided to the player.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the main controller 110 ROM 202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 19(a). As shown in FIG. 19(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data. At least a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a time saving grant table 202e, a small winning type selection table 202f, and an open scenario table 202g are stored.

Of the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first winning random number table 202, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the small winning type selection table 202f are as follows. Since the detailed contents have already been explained, the explanation will be omitted.

The time-saving granting table 202e is a data table that is referred to when setting a plurality of time-saving termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state, different for each jackpot type of the won jackpot, and is a data table that is referred to when the jackpot game ends (the ending of the jackpot game). When the period ends) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), it is referred to and a different number of time reductions (time reduction end conditions) is set depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, the contents defined in the time saving grant table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 21(d). FIG. 21(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving grant table 202e. In this embodiment, there are jackpot types (jackpot A, B, and D) in which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and jackpot types (jackpot C) in which the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (the normal state is set). As shown in FIG. 21(d), a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are defined corresponding to each type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, there is a first time-saving end condition that is established according to the number of changes in the special symbol, a second time-saving end condition that is established according to the number of times that the small win A is won in the special symbol lottery, and a second time-saving end condition that is established according to the number of times that the special symbol lottery is won. It has a third time-saving termination condition that is established according to the number of times that the small winning B is won, and a fourth time-saving ending condition that is established according to the number of times that the small winning C is won in the special symbol lottery.

As shown in FIG. 21(d), the time saving granting table 202e defines values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of a plurality of time saving end conditions, and the values set as the first time saving end condition described above are The value set in the time saving middle counter 203k, the value set as the second time saving end condition is set in the small hit A counter 203m, the value set as the third time saving ending condition is set in the small winning B counter 203n, and the fourth time saving end condition is set. The value set as the condition is set in the small hit C counter 203p.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A and B, the time saving end condition is "100" in the time saving medium counter 203k (first time saving ending condition), "1" in the small winning A counter 203m, and the small winning. It is specified that the value of "3" is set in the B counter 203n and the value of "5" is set in the small win C counter 203p, and in the case of a jackpot D, the time saving middle counter 203k (first time saving ending condition) is set as the time saving ending condition. The small win A counter 203m is set to ``2'', the small win B counter 203n is set to ``10'', and the small win C counter 203p is set to ``50''.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, so jackpot C in the time saving granting table 202e is set for the various counters mentioned above. No value specified. In this way, by changing the end conditions of the time-saving state that is set after the end of the jackpot game for each type of jackpot won, even if it is announced in advance that the time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, the specific Since the time saving content can be made difficult to grasp, the player can play the game with a heightened desire to play until the end (until the time saving state ends).

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving end state set using the time-saving granting table 202e, the time-saving state is also configured to end when a special symbol jackpot is won. The time-saving ending conditions that are satisfied based on the jackpot type set are not different depending on the set jackpot type, so they are omitted from the time-saving granting table 202e. The time saving end condition) may also be configured to have a value defined in the time saving granting table 202e.

Further, in this embodiment, a configuration having the above-mentioned first time saving ending condition to fourth time saving ending condition is used as the plurality of time saving ending conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time saving ending condition. For example, a time-saving end condition is established when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), or when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times). or the number of times the V winning device is activated by winning a small win (the sum of the values of the small win A counter 203m, the small win B counter 203n, and the small win C counter 203p) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 It is also possible to set a time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when the number of times) is reached.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving termination condition that is satisfied based on another factor, not based on the number of changes of the special symbol or the lottery result. A time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when the number of activations) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls that enter a specific ball entry hole (for example, general winning hole 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50). The configuration may be such that a time-saving termination condition or the like that is satisfied is set in advance.

As described above, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set for terminating the time-saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the time-saving state is configured to end when any of the time-saving termination conditions is set. This makes it difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will last, so it is possible to prevent monotonous games from being played.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, control is used to end the time saving state when any one of the plurality of time saving ending conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, if a predetermined number of time saving ending conditions are met, It may be configured such that the time-saving termination condition is satisfied when (for example, two conditions) are satisfied. In this case, a fulfillment number determining means for determining the number of time-saving termination conditions that have been met; a condition attainment determining means for determining whether the number of satisfaction determined by the fulfillment number determining means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two); It is preferable to provide a configuration in which the time saving state is ended (the normal state is set) when the condition reaching determination means determines that the number of conditions satisfied has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means for discriminating the content of the first time-saving termination condition that is satisfied is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a criterion for determining whether the condition has been reached is varied based on the discrimination result of the content discriminating means. A means for varying the number of discrimination criteria may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end, depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is initially met, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. You can play games.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, there is also a predetermined period measuring means that measures a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 10 times), and the measurement results of the predetermined period measuring means. If the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, the time saving state is not terminated until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time saving termination condition is satisfied. A time-saving end delaying means may be provided to delay the time-saving end, or an end-condition invalidating means may be provided to invalidate the time-saving end condition established when the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period. In addition, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, it determines whether or not the time-saving end conditions are met, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition. ) may not be executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the time saving state ends immediately after the time saving state is set, and it is also possible to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, when using the process of ending the time saving state based on the fulfillment of multiple time saving ending conditions as described above, the multiple time saving ending conditions may be set to the priority time saving ending conditions (for example, if the number of changes in the special symbol is Set a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of small wins reaches 100) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of small wins reaches 3), and then set a priority time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of small wins reaches 3. It is preferable that the time-saving state is terminated immediately when the conditions are met, and the time-saving state is terminated when only a plurality of non-priority time-saving termination conditions are satisfied. By providing the priority time-saving termination condition in this way, it is possible to prevent excessive time-saving conditions from being provided to the player.

The opening scenario table 202g shows the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 ( This is a data table in which an opening scenario is stored, which is a scenario of a pattern for operating various solenoids provided in each winning device, and is a data table that stores an opening scenario that is a scenario of a pattern for operating various solenoids provided in each winning device, and is a data table that stores opening scenarios that are set as scenarios for the winning jackpot type or the winning small winning jackpot type. The contents of the opening scenario are defined in accordance with the type of small win.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be explained with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g. Note that although the schematic open scenario table 202g shown in FIG. 25 lists the periods in which the same scenario is set, in reality, the period that has elapsed since the time when each open scenario was set is A measurement counter is provided to measure the value of the measurement counter, and among the currently set open scenarios, the specified operation is executed in response to the measurement value of the measurement counter. Omitted.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202g will be explained with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g. This opening scenario table 202g is a winning device (variable winning device 65) that allows a ball to enter in a bonus game (big win game, small win game) that is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or a small win. , V winning device 650) is defined according to the winning type (big win type, small win type).

In this way, the winning devices (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and opening operation contents (opening scenario ), it is possible to set multiple levels of advantageousness of bonus games, so even after winning a jackpot or small win, it is possible to let the player enjoy what type of win he won. can.

In the opening scenario table 202g, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from when the winning game starts until the winning device first operates to release) corresponding to the won winning type (big winning type, small winning type) , the opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (the number of rounds between round games). (period in which the winning device set in )) and the on/off switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2 are respectively defined. There is.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to jackpot A, the start interval period is ``2 seconds'', the opening operation mode of the winning device is ``variable winning device 65'', ``15 rounds'', and one round. As for the opening operation mode in which the game is opened for "29 consecutive seconds", "1 second" is defined as the interval period between rounds, and "4 seconds" is defined as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, a jackpot game will be executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds, resulting in a jackpot game in which many prize balls are paid out to the player. . Furthermore, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, since the jackpot is a jackpot in which a time-saving state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set after the jackpot game ends, jackpot A will give the most advantageous benefit to the player. It's a big hit.

Next, the winning type corresponds to jackpot B and C, the start interval period is "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65", "5 rounds", and one round game. In the opening operation mode in which the opening is continued for 29 seconds, an inter-round interval period of 1 second and an end interval period of 4 seconds are specified. Therefore, if a jackpot of jackpot B or jackpot type C is won, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for five rounds will be executed, and the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A will be played to the player. This is a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of the prize balls are paid out. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a time saving state is set which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, the jackpot B is a jackpot that is given a benefit that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and more advantageous than the jackpot C.

Corresponding to the jackpot D, the winning type is "1 second" as the start interval period, the opening operation mode of the winning device is "V winning device 650", and the "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round", and the "variable winning device 65" is opened. is released in the 2nd to 15th rounds, and in the 1st round, the 0.1 second release is released 12 times with an interval of 0.5 seconds, and the 2nd to 15th rounds are released. In the 15th round, the opening operation mode is "continuously open for 29 seconds", but the interval period between rounds is "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. is stipulated.

In other words, the details will be described later, but the period between the start interval period of jackpot D and the period until the second round is executed (the round game content (opening/closing operation mode) of the first round, and the inter-round interval after the end of the first round) The content specified in the period) is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small winning game described later. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the winning game currently being executed is a jackpot game or a small winning game until the end of the first round (if it is a small winning game, the small winning game ends). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of the game. Thereby, it is possible to provide a surprising winning game to a player who has won a small winning and has recognized that a small winning game is being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, and it is set so that most of the drawings using the second special symbol win a small jackpot. (See Figure 20(c)). Therefore, during the period in which the time saving state is set as the gaming state and the second special symbol is mainly varied, some winning game is started after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, whether the player wins the jackpot or the small jackpot, the winning game starts from the same opening action, so it is difficult to determine which win (big jackpot or small jackpot) the player won. It can be difficult to understand.

In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be lower than the probability of winning a small jackpot, and after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot D ends, It is set to give a time saving status. Therefore, a player who wins a jackpot will not be provided with a benefit that is more disadvantageous than if he wins a small win. Since the game can be made advantageous to the players, it is possible to make the players more excited.

In addition, in the case of winning the jackpot D and the case of winning various small wins, the same production mode is executed as a variable display (variable production) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and In order to make it difficult for players to identify the lottery results by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b that show the lottery results of the special symbols, the stop display timing of the special symbols and the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 are adjusted. The stop display timing of the third symbol may be different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol may be synchronized with the stop display timing of the third symbol. In order to make it more difficult for players to identify than during other periods, the display mode and display area may be changed, and the effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the stop display timing of the special symbol. It is good to switch the symbol from the third symbol to a normal symbol for performance that corresponds to the fluctuating display of the normal symbol.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged separately, and the special symbol stop display timing (when any winning game occurs) At the timing of notifying the player that he or she has won, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect that draws the player's attention to the V winning device 650, or as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37a, It is preferable to make the display area of 37b smaller than the display area of the third symbol display device 81 so that the first symbol is more difficult to see than the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result of the current special symbol is a jackpot or a small jackpot by the stop display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and the jackpot continues even during the winning game. It can make you look forward to winning the election.

Returning to FIG. 25, the explanation will be continued. The contents stipulated for the winning types corresponding to the small winnings A to C include, in addition to the small winning game (one round game), the small winning game when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball during the small winning game. An opening scenario for jackpot games (2 to 15 round games) to be executed continuously after the game ends is also defined. Thereby, it is possible to reliably associate the small winning game content of the winning small winning type with the jackpot game content that can be executed after the small winning game ends, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

Specifically, for the win type of small win A, as a small win game, the start interval period is "1 second", the opening operation mode of the winning device is "V winning device 650", and the opening is 1 round. Round game "0.1 second opening 12 times", Inter-opening interval period "0.5 seconds other than after the 5th and 10th opening (interval between openings 1), 5th and 10th opening ends 5 seconds later (opening interval 2).

Then, as a jackpot game that can be executed after the small winning game ends, the "variable prize winning device 65" operates to open in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and one round game "29 seconds continuous opening" is performed during the interval between rounds. As such, "10 seconds" after the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval of "8 seconds" are defined.

In addition, for the winning types B and C, as a small winning game, the start interval period is "1 second", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "V winning device 650", and the opening is "1 round", once. Round game "0.1 second opening 12 times", Inter-opening interval period "0.5 seconds other than after the 5th and 10th opening (opening interval 1), after the 5th and 10th opening 5 seconds (opening interval 2).

Then, as a jackpot game that can be executed after the small winning game ends, the "variable winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 5th rounds", and one round game "29 seconds continuous opening" is performed during the interval between rounds. As such, "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval of "8 seconds" are defined.

In other words, the jackpot games that can be executed after the small win games corresponding to the small wins B and C are set to have a smaller number of rounds than the jackpot game corresponding to the small win A mentioned above. In addition, when the small win type is small win B, a time saving state which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set after the corresponding jackpot game ends, and in the case of small win C, a time saving state is set after the corresponding jackpot game ends. Since the time saving state is not set, the small win B is a small win that is more disadvantageous than the small win A and more advantageous than the small win C.

Returning to FIG. 18, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 51) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 50). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a jackpot start flag 203c, a medium jackpot flag 203d, a small winning type storage area 203e, Small hit start flag 203f, small hit medium flag 203g, V passing jackpot type storage area 203h, V flag 203i, V passing flag 203j, time saving medium counter 203k, small winning A counter 203m, small winning B counter 203n, small winning C counter 203p, a short fluctuation flag 203q, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) as shown in FIG. 18, and each of these areas has a first ball entrance 64. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired based on the ball entering the ball is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the first special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is It is shifted (moved) to the area, and a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

Then, when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not have a function to reserve the second special symbol, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting) in a state where a new special symbol variation can be executed. When winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5, and CS1 is acquired at that timing, and the acquired data is stored as is in the special symbol holding ball execution area.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a function to reserve the normal symbols (second symbols), so if the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 in a state where a new normal symbol variation can be executed. At that timing, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the normal symbol holding ball execution area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b controls the variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the 3-symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it reaches the maximum value of 4. 1 is added (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S207 in FIG. 38).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of reservations N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S208 in FIG. 38, S208 in FIG. 43). (See S705). The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the fluctuations held in the main controller 110 by the special symbol 1 held ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203b is changed. The value of the displayed number of reserved pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the number of held balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

Note that the audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on hold for display to notify the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol (reserved symbol) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this display number of reserved balls command.

The jackpot start flag 203c is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 38). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is on and it is identified that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to off (S1603 in FIG. 52). The jackpot start flag 203c is set to OFF in the initial state, and in the event of a power outage or the like, it is configured to be backed up and the state immediately before the power outage is maintained.

The jackpot flag 203d is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a jackpot is stopped (S216 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is set to OFF (S1620 in FIG. 52). This jackpot flag 203d is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when RAM is cleared, and when a power outage or the like occurs, it is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like. It is configured to

The small win type storage area 203e is a storage area for temporarily storing the small win type set for the won small win, and when it is determined that the small win has been won (S307 in FIG. 39: Yes). ), the acquired small winning type is temporarily stored (S311 in FIG. 39). Then, when the number of openings of the V winning device 650 reaches a predetermined number during the small winning game (S1707 in FIG. 53: Yes) and it is determined that the V flag 203i is not set to ON (S1708 in FIG. 53; No ), the stored small winning type is referred to (S1709 in FIG. 53), and an instruction command corresponding to the referenced small winning type is set. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the information stored in the small winning type storage area 203e (information for indicating the small winning type) is configured to be cleared at the end of the small winning game.

The small winning start flag 203f is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). When it is determined that the small winning start flag 203f is on and it is identified that it is the start timing of the small winning game, it is set to OFF (S1703 in FIG. 53). This small hit start flag 203f is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. is configured to be

The small winning medium flag 203g is a flag indicating that a small winning game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (when it is determined that the game for the set number of rounds of the small win has ended), it is set to OFF (S1720 in FIG. 53). This small hit flag 203g is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage etc. is configured to be

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203h stores data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a winning ball is detected by the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 when a small winning game is being executed. This is a storage area where data is stored. The V passing jackpot type storage area 203h stores data values corresponding to the jackpot type that corresponds to the small win type that has been determined when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small win stops (Fig. 40 S402). When a ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and is detected by the V switch 650e3, a V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h is set. 203i is set to on. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h is configured to be cleared. This V passing jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. is backed up. It is configured to be held by

The V flag 203i corresponds to the type of small winning game being executed when a ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during a small winning game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. A flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set on. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether this V flag 203i is on (S1715 in FIG. 53), and when it is determined that the V flag 203i is on (S1715 in FIG. 53: Yes), it is set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined from the flag that is displayed, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1716 in FIG. 53). This V flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clearing, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. It is configured as follows.

The V passing flag 203j is a flag used to determine whether the V flag 203i is set to on during a small winning game, and is set to on when the V flag 203i is set to on. be done. In this embodiment, most of the winning balls in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game are configured to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2, and the ball corresponding to the first winning ball in the special discharge channel 650e2 is configured to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. It is set to on in the V passing process (see FIG. 48) (S1207 in FIG. 48).

Then, in the V passing process (see FIG. 48), it is determined whether the V passing flag 203j is set to on (S1201 in FIG. 48), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S1201 in FIG. 48: Yes). ), the processing of S1202 to S1208 of the V passing processing (see FIG. 48) is skipped. As a result, even if the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small winning game, only the V passing process corresponding to the ball detected first is executed. Therefore, the process executed during the small winning game can be simplified, and the V passage command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 multiple times, making V passage management on the voice lamp control device 113 side complicated. can be prevented from becoming.

The time-saving counter 203k is a counter for measuring the number of changes in special symbols until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is satisfied, and is a counter for measuring the number of changes in the special symbol until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is satisfied. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the performance (the end timing of the jackpot) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value (100) specified in the time saving grant table 202e is set (S1614 in FIG. 52). .

Then, the counter value is referenced (S601 in FIG. 42) in the time saving number update process (S219 in FIG. 42) executed in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38), and if the counter value is larger than 0, If it is determined (S601 in FIG. 42: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by 1. If it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k after the subtraction is 0 (S604 in FIG. 42: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the gaming state (S605 in FIG. 42). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving termination conditions is satisfied (for example, the time-saving termination condition based on the number of small winnings) Even if (is true), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S505 in FIG. 41). In this way, even if a time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) that refers to the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is satisfied among the plural time saving end conditions, the time saving medium counter 203k is Since the value is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to prevent the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203k from continuing even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, no matter which of the multiple time-saving termination conditions is met, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is met when ending the time-saving state are set to initial values (0). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time saving state ends from becoming complicated.

The small win A counter 203m is a counter for measuring the number of small winnings in which small win A is set as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (the jackpot end timing) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value specified in the time saving grant table 202e ( 1) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the small win of the small win that won this time is entered in the small win time saving update process (S405 in Figure 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in Figure 40) of the special symbol fluctuation process (S104 in Figure 38). When it is determined that the type is small win A (S502 in FIG. 41: Yes), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203m after the subtraction is 0 (S504 in FIG. 41: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the gaming state (S507 in FIG. 41). . In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving ending conditions are set for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving ending conditions is satisfied (for example, the time-saving ending condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations) even if the following is true), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) that refers to the value of the small hit A counter 203m is satisfied among the plural time-saving end conditions, the small hit A counter Since the value of 203m is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to prevent the process of subtracting the value of small hit A counter 203m from continuing even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, no matter which of the multiple time-saving termination conditions is met, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is met when ending the time-saving state are set to initial values (0). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time saving state ends from becoming complicated.

The small win B counter 203n is a counter for measuring the number of small winnings in which small win B is set as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, and In the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (the jackpot end timing) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value specified in the time saving grant table 202e ( 3) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the small win of the small win that won this time is entered in the small win time saving update process (S405 in Figure 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in Figure 40) of the special symbol fluctuation process (S104 in Figure 38). When it is determined that the type is small win B (S510 in FIG. 41: Yes), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small win B counter 203n after the subtraction is 0 (S512 in FIG. 41: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the gaming state (S507 in FIG. 41). . In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving ending conditions are set for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving ending conditions is satisfied (for example, the time-saving ending condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations) even if the following is true), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (third time-saving end condition) that refers to the value of the small hit B counter 203n is satisfied among the plural time-saving end conditions, the small hit B counter Since the value of 203n is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to prevent the process of subtracting the value of the small hit B counter 203n from continuing even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, no matter which of the multiple time-saving termination conditions is met, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is met when ending the time-saving state are set to initial values (0). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time saving state ends from becoming complicated.

The small win C counter 203p is a counter for measuring the number of small winnings in which small win C is set as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, and In the jackpot control process (S1504 in FIG. 52), if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (the jackpot end timing) (S1612 in FIG. 52: Yes), the value specified in the time saving grant table 202e ( 5) is set (S1614 in FIG. 52).

Then, the small win of the small win that won this time is entered in the small win time saving update process (S405 in Figure 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in Figure 40) of the special symbol fluctuation process (S104 in Figure 38). When it is determined that the type is small win C (S510 in FIG. 41: No), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small winning C counter 203p after the subtraction is 0 (S514 in FIG. 41: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the gaming state (S515 in FIG. 41). . In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving ending conditions are set for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving ending conditions is satisfied (for example, the time-saving ending condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations) even if the following is true), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S606 in FIG. 42). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (fourth time-saving end condition) that refers to the value of the small hit C counter 203p is satisfied among the plural time-saving end conditions, the small hit C counter Since the value of 203p is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to prevent the process of subtracting the value of small hit C counter 203p from continuing even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, no matter which of the multiple time-saving termination conditions is met, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is met when ending the time-saving state are set to initial values (0). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time saving state ends from becoming complicated.

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q is a flag to indicate that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a short fluctuation (variation for 3 seconds). This indicates that a short variation of the pattern) has been executed. This normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203q determines that the timing to set the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 45) is in the time saving state (during time saving) (S909 in FIG. 45: Yes). ), is set to ON when a 3 second fluctuation time (short fluctuation) is set (S911 in Figure 45), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S913 in Figure 45). , is referred to when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a win (S915 in FIG. 45: Yes) (S916 in FIG. 45).

Here, if it is determined that the regular map/short fluctuation flag 203q is set to on (S916 in FIG. 45: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is in a time saving state (time saving) (S918 in FIG. 45). ), if it is determined that the game is in the time saving state (time saving) (S918 in FIG. 45: Yes), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 45 S919). In addition, the normal symbol short variation flag 203q is set to OFF after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 45) (S917 in FIG. 45).

In this way, the gaming state when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to fluctuate (when the fluctuating time is set) and when the electric accessory 640a opening operation is set after the fluctuating time of the regular symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the configuration is such that the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a only when both the gaming state and are in the time-saving state, It is possible to reliably prevent the electric accessory 640a from opening long by changing the normal symbol (lottery) that is executed across the long opening state (and time saving state), which is advantageous to the player (the long opening of the electric accessory 640a). It is possible to prevent players from being provided with an excessive number of openings.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc. are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening and closing the door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. A solenoid 209 consisting of a flow path solenoid 650k for driving a motor, a solenoid for driving electric accessories (other solenoids 209z), etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. do.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a force corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview effects. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and the frame button 23, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the performance at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a status display selection table 222b, a final status display selection table 222c, and other various data necessary for controlling the game. Programs etc. are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each type of variation pattern (too far, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). Note that the counter for selecting a variation pattern is a counter that is updated each time (each time various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 are executed). This counter consists of a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299). The audio lamp control device 113 also selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the validity determination result, and the acquired selection counter value. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing general information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress the problem of players getting bored of the game early.

Note that the counter value for selecting the fluctuation pattern may be configured to be updated in a process other than the various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 described above. For example, in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, if 1 millisecond has not elapsed since the previous processing, the repeated processing is executed (for example, the processing in S2114 in FIG. 55 is not executed). A process for updating the counter value may be added during the period from when the process is executed until the process of S2115 is executed. With this configuration, in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55), 1 millisecond The number of times the process of updating the value of the counter for selecting a variation pattern is executed can be set to an unconstant number (random). Therefore, based on the content of the display effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected using the variation pattern selection 222a) set by the voice lamp control device 113 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the voice It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the rules regarding the control of the lamp control device 113.

The state display selection table 222b shows the display mode of the state display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state is set as the gaming state (see the state (state) display mode Dm3a in FIG. 11). This is a data table used when selecting. This state display selection table 222b is used when selecting a state display mode corresponding to a variation display other than the variation in which the time saving state ends (the final variation of the time saving state) among the states in which the time saving state is set. .

This status display selection table 222b shows the expected level of jackpot in the change (the level of expectation of winning the special symbol jackpot lottery, the expectation of winning the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the 2nd chance of winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery and during the small win (during the small winning game). Expectation level for winning a seed), update condition of time saving state (whether or not the time saving end condition is met or not, or various factors set as time saving end condition (number of changes of special symbols, number of small winnings, etc.) The configuration is such that different status display modes are selected based on the update status of ). Therefore, by understanding the contents of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the small display area Dm3 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player is made to understand the situation of the currently set time saving state. be able to.

Here, the contents defined in the status display selection table 222b will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the status display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the status display selection table 222b includes the special symbol lottery results (results of winning/failure determination) and the setting status of the time saving lower limit flag 223k (results of determining whether it is set to on or not). , various status display modes are defined in correspondence with the setting status of the quasi-end condition flag 223m (result of determination as to whether it is set to on) and the value of the status rendering counter 223o.

Here, to briefly explain the various flags and counters referred to in the status display selection table 222b, the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are flags to indicate that the time saving state has passed for a predetermined period. This is set to ON when the time saving state has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. The state display mode can be changed depending on the setting status of each flag, that is, depending on the progress of the time saving state.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON based on the number of changes of the special symbol among the termination conditions for ending the time saving state. That is, when the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the end condition that can be satisfied by executing the variation of the special symbol is approaching, and it is possible to create a sense of tension and make the player play the game in the time-saving state. can. Moreover, since various effects can be performed in the time-saving state that is continuously set, the effects of the effects can be enhanced. In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of special symbol changes executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON, and the state (situation) display mode Dm3a However, in order to display various display modes to the player as the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a, for example, the number of special symbol changes executed during the time saving state is displayed. A different state (situation) display mode Dm3a may be displayed for the odd and even times, or for a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, a period until the special symbol changes 10 times). Only for this period, a state (situation) display mode Dm3a that is different from other periods may be set.

The quasi-termination condition flag 223m is turned on based on the number of times the small win is won (the number of times the small win is won and the operation control is executed for the V winning device 650) among the end conditions for ending the time saving state. It is set to . That is, when the small win is won a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the time saving state is set, the display mode of the state (situation) display mode Dm3a can be set differently. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the end condition that can be satisfied by winning a small win is approaching, and it is possible to create a sense of tension and make the player play the game in a time-saving state. Moreover, since various effects can be performed in the time-saving state that is continuously set, the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

The state production counter 223o is a loop counter whose value from "0 to 99" is periodically updated, and various types of processing executed at 1 millisecond intervals in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55) are used. The configuration is such that the value is updated by 1 each time the counter update process (S2111 in FIG. 55) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(a), the contents defined in the status display selection table 222b will be specifically explained. FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the status display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 27(a), the status display selection table 222b shows the performance to be executed in accordance with the validity determination result, the time saving lower limit flag 223k, the semi-end condition flag 223m, and the value of the status performance counter 223o. The state display mode (see FIG. 15 for specific display mode contents) is defined.

Specifically, when the result of the judgment is a jackpot and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". Display mode "3" is defined, status display mode "1" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and status display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". In addition, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "3" is defined when the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49", and " Status display mode “1” is defined in the range of “50 to 69”, status display mode “4” is defined in the range of “70 to 79”, and status display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. stipulated.

Furthermore, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". The display mode "1" is defined, the status display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", the status display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and When the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "3" is defined in the range of "0 to 69" for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o, and the state display mode is defined in the range of "70 to 79". Aspect "1" is defined, and status display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

In other words, when the judgment result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the status display is selected according to the progress status of the set time saving status (the setting status of the time saving lower limit flag 223k and semi-end condition flag 223m). The aspects can be different. Therefore, various state display modes can be displayed during the time saving state, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, there is a period in which both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are set to OFF (the first half period of the time saving state), and either the time saving lower limit flag 223k or the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to ON. Since the display mode that is likely to be selected as the state display mode can be different depending on the period (the middle period of the time saving state), the state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed in the third display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 By having the player understand the following, it is possible to have the player predict the progress of the time saving state.

Furthermore, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to ON and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF, and the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is "70 to 79", the state display The configuration is such that aspect "4" is set. As described above with reference to FIG. 15, this state display mode "4" is a state display mode to suggest to the player that he has won a small win, but in this embodiment, the result of the judgment is that the jackpot is not a win. It is configured so that it can be selected even in certain cases, that is, when the judgment is not a small win (when the judgment result is more advantageous to the player than a small win). Thereby, it is possible to perform a surprising performance for the player, and it is possible to provide a performance that the player will not get tired of quickly.

Next, the win/fail judgment result is a small win A (a small win in which a small win game that is most likely to win two types out of a plurality of small win types is executed), and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are When the value of the acquired state rendering counter 223o is on, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "0 to 79", and the state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". be done. Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the quasi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "7" is defined when the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49", and " Status display mode “5” is defined in the range of “50 to 69”, status display mode “7” is defined in the range of “70 to 79”, and status display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. stipulated.

Next, if the win/fail judgment result is a small hit A, the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off, and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". Status display mode "5" is defined in the range "70 to 79", state display mode "6" is defined in the range "80 to 99", and state display mode "9" is defined in the range "80 to 99". When the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are both off, the state display mode "7" is defined when the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 79", and the state display mode "7" is defined as "80 to 99". The status display mode "9" is defined in the range of ".

Then, the win/fail judgment result is a small win B or C (a small win in which a small win game that is difficult to win in two types out of a plurality of small win types), and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are set. When the value of the acquired state rendering counter 223o is on, the state display mode "5" is defined in the range of "0 to 69", and the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 79". The status display mode "9" is defined in the range "80 to 99". Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "4" is defined when the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69", and " Status display mode "2" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Furthermore, if the win/fail determination result is a small hit B or C, and the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is "0 to 49". Status display mode “6” is defined in the range, status display mode “5” is defined in the range “50-69”, status display mode “6” is defined in the range “70-79”, and status display mode “6” is defined in the range “80-69”. The status display mode "9" is defined in the range "99". Furthermore, when both the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are off, the state display mode "2" is defined when the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49", and the state display mode "2" is defined as "50 to 49". Status display mode “4” is defined in the range of “69”, status display mode “4” is defined in the range of “70 to 79”, and status display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. Ru.

As described above, in this embodiment, different status display modes are displayed depending on the type of small win set for the small win that has been won (according to the expectation level of winning the second type during the small win game being executed). Because the system is structured as It is also possible to predict the result (special symbol lottery result) of the display). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the state display mode displayed during the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case where the small win A is won and the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the semi-end condition flag 223m is set on, the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is "70 to 79". In this case, the contents of the status display selection table 222b are defined so that status display mode "6" is selected. As shown in FIG. 15, this state display mode "6" is a state display mode in which the characters "Big Pinch" are displayed to suggest that the time saving state ends based on a small win. By displaying this state display mode "6" even when winning the small win A, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to the player, and the state display mode "6" is also displayed. In a small winning game that is executed after winning, the possibility of winning two types of winnings can be increased, so the status display mode is based on winning small winning B or small winning C, which has a low possibility of winning two types. Even when "6" is displayed, the player can continue to have expectations for winning the second type until the small winning game ends.

If the validity judgment result is incorrect and the time saving lower limit flag 223k and semi-end condition flag 223m are on, the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is set to the state display mode "1" in the range of "0 to 49". is defined, status display mode "4" is defined in the range of "50 to 69", "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and status display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". ” is stipulated. In addition, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off, the state display mode "1" is defined when the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69", and " Status display mode "3" is defined in the range of "70 to 79", and state display mode "9" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Furthermore, if the validity judgment result is incorrect and the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off and the semi-end condition flag 223m is on, the state display mode is set so that the value of the acquired state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 69". “6” is defined, status display mode “3” is defined in the range of “70 to 79”, and status display mode “9” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. Further, when the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m are both off, the state display mode "1" is defined when the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 79", and the state display mode "1" is defined as "80". The status display mode "9" is defined in the range "99".

In this way, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, that is, if a special symbol variation is executed in which the time-saving end condition is not satisfied based on a small hit or a jackpot win, the quasi-end condition flag 223m is turned on. When set to , the state display mode is selected to make the player think that he or she has won a small win and the time-saving termination condition has been satisfied. As a result, in a state where the quasi-termination condition flag 223m is set to ON, that is, in a state where a predetermined number of small winning games have been executed since the time saving state was set, the game can be played while giving the player a sense of crisis. You can make it happen.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to on, the state display mode ( The status display mode "2, 4 to 7") is configured to be easily selected. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress execution of an effect that pseudo-suggests that a small win has been won unnecessarily when the result of the judgment is negative. Specifically, in a state where the quasi-termination condition flag 223m is set to on, a performance mode (state display mode) that makes it seem that the time-saving termination condition has been met when winning a small win is likely to be selected. In a state where the quasi-termination condition flag 223m is set to OFF, the configuration is such that it is difficult to select a production mode (status display mode) that makes it appear that the time-saving termination condition has been met when a small win is won. There is.

With this configuration, it is possible to set the display mode of the state display mode for a plurality of special symbol changes executed during the period when the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to on in a series of steps. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game executed during the time saving state and from reducing the performance effect.

Further, the state display mode "9" is selected in accordance with the value of the state effect counter 223o, without being based on the result of determination of validity or the setting status of various flags. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the progress status of the current time saving state. Furthermore, the configuration is such that the status display mode "3" is selected in some cases where the result of the validity determination is negative. As a result, when the status display mode "3" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol being dynamically displayed is either a jackpot or a miss. A production that suggests this is carried out.

Here, in this embodiment, the probability that the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a loss (other than a big hit or a small hit) is 1/100 (see FIG. 20(c)), and further, the value of the state production counter 223o is configured so that the status display mode "3" is displayed in the range of "70 to 79", that is, 1/10 of the counter values updated in the range of "0 to 99" ( When the second special symbol is drawn, the state display mode "3" is selected with a probability of 1/1000 when the lottery result is "miss").

Therefore, the status display mode "3" is mostly displayed when winning a jackpot, but it may also be displayed when winning a miss, so the player will not be able to see the lottery results for special symbols until the end. It is possible to have the player play a game with a thrilling feeling (until it is stopped and displayed). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of status display modes are provided so that the player can predict the progress status of the current time saving state (the number remaining until each time saving end condition is met) and the lottery result of the special symbol. Although it is configured to be selected, the state display mode that can reliably notify the progress of the current time saving state (remaining number until each time saving end condition is met) and special symbol lottery results is selected. It may be configured to do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state display mode is set for each validity judgment result based on the progress status of the time saving state (the setting status of the time saving lower limit flag 223k and the semi-end condition flag 223m) and the value of the state production counter 223o. Although the configuration is configured such that the state display mode is selected using different conditions, the configuration may be configured such that the status display mode is selected using other conditions. ) is provided with an operation determining means for determining whether or not the player has executed a predetermined operation, and is configured to select different status display modes based on the determination result of the operation determining means. It's okay. Furthermore, in this case, when the operation determination means determines that a predetermined operation has been executed, the progress status of the current time saving state (the number remaining until each time saving end condition is met) and the special symbol lottery results are displayed. It is preferable to configure the status display mode so that it is easy to select the status display mode that is clearly shown. Thereby, the player actively operates the operating means, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a state where the time saving state is set, each time the production setting process is executed (every time the variable display of the third symbol is set), the state is displayed using the state display selection table 222b. Although the display mode is configured to be selected, for example, a storage means is provided for storing the set state display mode while the time saving state is continuously set, and the contents stored in the storage means are The configuration may be such that a state display mode to be newly set (selected) is determined based on the above. With this configuration, the state display mode can be displayed evenly during the time saving state, or the randomly set state display mode (selected based on the value of the state production counter 223o) can be biased to one side. In this case, the state display mode set during the remaining time saving state may be intentionally biased to one side.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving state is repeatedly set (the number of times when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state (two types of winnings are set) and the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game), and the prize balls acquired during that period. The configuration may be such that the selected state display mode differs depending on the number of objects.

Next, the contents of the final state display selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final state display selection table 222c. This final state display selection table 222c, like the above-mentioned state display selection table 222b, is a data table that is referred to in order to select the state display mode to be displayed in the third display area Ds3 during the time saving state. This final state display selection table 222c differs from the above-mentioned state display selection table 222b in that the change of the special symbol that causes the time saving state to end (when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches the number of changes that satisfies the time saving end condition) It is referred to when setting the fluctuation display (effect display) for the fluctuation of the special symbol in , or the fluctuation of the special symbol when the number of small winnings of the special symbol reaches the number of wins that satisfies the time-saving end condition. It is something.

This final state display selection table 222c is referred to when it is determined that the pre-time saving end variation flag 223n is on (S2905: Yes in FIG. 63) in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63), which will be described later. S2907). The contents stipulated in the final state display selection table 222c will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. Status display mode “7” is defined in the range of “0 to 69”, status display mode “3” is defined in the range of “70 to 89”, and status display mode “8” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. stipulated. When the win/fail judgment result is small win A, the state display mode "7" is defined in the range of "0 to 69" for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o, and the state display mode is defined in the range of "70 to 89". "5" is defined, and a status display mode "8" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

In addition, when the result of the judgment is small hit B or C, the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "0 to 69" for the value of the acquired state effect counter 223o, and the state display mode "6" is defined in the range of "70 to 89". A status display mode "5" is defined in the range "90 to 99", and a status display mode "8" is defined in the range "90 to 99". If the result of the judgment is negative, the state display mode "8" is defined when the value of the obtained state effect counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 99".

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the state display mode that is displayed during the period when the time saving state is continuously set, and the final change display of the special symbol when the time saving state ends (the time saving state ends) Since the state display mode displayed when the time saving state is completed is configured to be selected by referring to a different data table, it is indicated as if the time saving state will continue when the time saving state ends. It is possible to reliably prevent the status display mode from being displayed.

Further, as described above, the state display mode "8" is displayed in some cases when a jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that he or she has won the jackpot by displaying the third symbol in a stopped state after making the player think that the time-saving state has ended, so it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player. .

As mentioned above, the configuration is such that the status display mode "8" is always displayed if the winner is a loser. This can prevent players from having excessive expectations and feeling dissatisfied with subsequent game results.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 26(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a production counter 223e, Game state storage area 223f, time-saving information update area 223g, temporary hit determination flag 223h, temporary time-saving information update area 223i, temporary time-saving end flag 223j, time-saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time-saving before end fluctuation flag 223n, status At least a performance counter 223o and other memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of reserved balls and the like before the fluctuation starts. This winning information storage area 223a stores winning information based on the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 when the winning information related process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2301 in FIG. 57) is executed. The winning information commands transmitted from the main controller 110, which are stored in order from the first area, are set when the prefetching process (S707 in FIG. 44) of the main controller 110 is executed, and The external output processing (S1501 in FIG. 51) executed in the main processing 110 (see FIG. 51) is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

Each piece of winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is stored one by one each time the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. The winning information stored in the second area is shifted to the first area (see S2806 in FIG. 62). Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 will be executed.

In addition, since it is configured to be able to shift the winning information (pre-read information of special symbols) sent by the winning information command to the execution area (area corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation currently being executed), for example, the winning information Based on the reception of the information command, a production using the period from the start timing of the next special symbol variation to the timing until the end of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command (so-called prefetch continuous) When executing the performance), the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-described continuous prefetching performance is completed.

Note that in this embodiment, up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be obtained when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64) can be held and stored, so the winning information storage area 223a is used as the execution area. In addition, it is configured to have a first area to a fourth area, but for example, winning information that can be obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (winning information related to the second special symbol) ) is also configured to be able to store up to four, in addition to the execution area, the winning information storage area 223a has four areas (pending information area) for the first special symbol and four areas for the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that two areas (reserved information areas) are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable performance (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of balls on hold (the number of times of standby) of variable effects held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b calculates the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a number of reserved balls command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command, and The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2208 in FIG. 56). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203b.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, it displays reserved pitches corresponding to the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved pitch counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The information included in the number of reserved balls command sent from the main controller may be information indicating the actual number of reserved balls, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a, or information that indicates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a. It may also be information indicating that the value of 203a has been incremented by 1 or subtracted by 1. In addition, when transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 as a held ball number command, it is included in the held ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113. What is necessary is to provide a calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved pitches based on the information provided.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 56), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2802 in FIG. 62). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, the information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 56), and turned off when the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2808 in FIG. 62). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the display stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (S2810 in FIG. 62).

The production counter 223e is a counter used for lottery when determining the content of various productions to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and although not shown in the figure, the production counter 223e It is updated every time the main processing (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect counter 223e includes a plurality of loop counters (for example, a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and is configured so that the value of each counter is updated without synchronization. There is.

Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters with different values updated each time the main processing (see FIG. 56) is executed are provided, and the updated values of each counter are configured not to be synchronized. Furthermore, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value to be used in a lottery when deciding the performance contents of various performances.

The gaming state storage area 223f is an area for storing a gaming state corresponding to a state command when a state command regarding the gaming state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (gaming status) stored in this gaming status storage area 223f, the current gaming status can be identified on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

In this embodiment, data in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is erased when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, so when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the data is stored in the game state storage area 223f. Information indicating the current gaming status will also be deleted. However, in this embodiment, the status command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 50) of the main controller 110 that is executed after the power is turned on (S1412 in FIG. 50), so the gaming status storage area is immediately set after the power is restored. 223f stores information indicating the gaming state that was set before the power was shut off. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the audio lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state. Also, when the gaming state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the gaming state after the variably setting is set (S509 in FIG. 41, S607 in FIG. 42, S1616 in FIG. 52, etc.) .

The time-saving information update area 223g shows the end conditions of the time-saving state and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times the event targeted by the end condition (for example, special symbol change, small hit, jackpot win) has been executed). This is a data area for storing. The state (situation) display mode Dm3a to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information (end conditions and progress status of the time saving state) stored in the time saving information update area 223a. This time-saving information update area 223g is determined by a time-saving related command including time-saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process of the main control device 110 (S1504 in FIG. 52). In S1612 of FIG. 52), when the time saving setting information command that is set when the time saving state end condition is set (S1613 of FIG. 52) is received, the end condition for ending the current time saving state is set.

Then, in the time saving update process (see S2216 in FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113, update information for updating the time saving information (variation information to indicate that a special symbol variation has been executed, winning a small hit, etc.) 60 (S2604: Yes, S2615: Yes in FIG. 60), the current time saving status is updated in accordance with the received update information. .

To explain specifically about the data area in this time-saving information update area 223g, the time-saving information update area 223g contains various items that can be the conditions for ending the time-saving state (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the second special The number of variations of the symbol, the total number of variations obtained by adding up the number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol, the number of winnings for each small winning type (small winning A to C) (the operation of the V winning device 600) It is configured so that information can be temporarily stored corresponding to the number of starts), the number of small winnings won (the total number of winnings of each small winning type), etc., and for each item, Stores time saving setting information (the number of times the end conditions for the time saving state are met) and update information for each item during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times it is actually executed). is configured to be

In this embodiment, the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g is used to determine which termination condition is more likely to be satisfied than other termination conditions from among a plurality of termination conditions, and to determine whether each termination condition is satisfied. It is configured to determine the number of remaining executions until the end of the process. Further, using the time saving setting information and update information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, for example, calculating the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time saving setting information, The degree of progress in time reduction may be displayed as a numerical value (for example, a percentage).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time-saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times it has been executed (number of fluctuations, number of wins)); However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the remaining number of times until the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied is calculated, and information indicating the calculated remaining number of times is stored in the time-saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in this embodiment, the time-saving setting information and the update information are stored separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, the information stored as the time-saving setting information It may be configured to update directly. With this configuration, the capacity of the time-saving information update area 223g can be reduced.

The provisional hit determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (winning information held and stored) before the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed includes winning information for winning a jackpot. By setting this to ON, it indicates that the winning information that is held and stored includes winning information that will lead to a jackpot. This provisional winning determination flag 223h is a winning information related process (which is executed when the audio lamp control device 113 side receives the winning information command acquired in the prefetching process (S707 in FIG. 44) of the main control device 110). (See S2210 in FIG. 57), when it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information command received from the main controller 110 (S2305 in FIG. 57: Yes), it is set to ON (S2306 in FIG. 57). .

Then, it is referenced in the winning information related process (see FIG. 57) (S2303 in FIG. 57), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2303 in FIG. 57: Yes), various It is configured to skip the determination process. It is also referenced in the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) (S2903 in FIG. 63), and if it is determined that it is set to on, (S2903 in FIG. 63: Yes), the configuration is such that the process for setting the display status display command indicating the status display mode is skipped.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 59), even if it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information of the winning information command received from the main controller 110 (S2504: Yes in FIG. 59), The tentative hit determination flag 223h is set to on (S2506 in FIG. 59).

As explained above, if the winning information included in the received winning information command or the winning information held and stored at the end of the jackpot includes winning information for winning the jackpot, After that, it is determined whether the winning information included in the newly received winning information command includes winning information that will lead to a jackpot, and whether the termination conditions of the currently set gaming state are met. It is configured so that the determination is not performed. In other words, if it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on winning information obtained after that. , is configured to skip that unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of determining the content of winning information is executed when a new winning information command is received and when a jackpot game ends, but at other times, For example, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power outage, etc., in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 50), each winning information stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is The configuration is configured such that a winning information command upon return is set and all of the commands are sent to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the audio lamp control device 113 side receives the winning information command upon returning, the winning information command as described above is set. It may be configured to execute processing for determining the content of information.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the process of determining the content of winning information is always executed when a new winning information command is received or when a jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this. However, if a predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied, the content of winning information may not be determined. In this case, the predetermined prohibition conditions include, for example, a performance mode prohibition condition that is satisfied when the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of performance modes and one of the performance modes is set, and a performance mode prohibition condition that is satisfied when the pachinko machine 10 has multiple performance modes. Multiple special symbol variations based on the jackpot lottery result (win/fail judgment result) included in the winning information and the addictive prohibition condition that is satisfied when a lottery result other than a jackpot (missing) occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) in a row. A prohibition condition during a continuous performance that is satisfied while a continuous performance that spans over 20% is executed, and a predetermined period after the continuous performance ends (for example, when a special symbol change is executed twice). It is a good idea to set conditions for prohibiting multiple occurrences, etc., that are satisfied during the period of

With this configuration, it is possible to set a period in which a performance (so-called pre-reading performance) can be performed and a period in which it cannot be performed according to the content determined in advance based on winning information, so that the game Even if a look-ahead performance is not performed for a player, it is possible to maintain the expectation of a jackpot. In addition, when the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met, the content of winning information may be determined less frequently, or when the prohibition conditions are not met, the content of winning information is always determined. Instead of determining, the content of winning information may be determined more frequently. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player does not know whether or not the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met.

The temporary time-saving information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing time-saving information (temporary time-saving information) updated in advance according to winning information included in the winning information command. In this embodiment, the timing at which the time saving state ends is determined in advance by referring to the temporary time saving information stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i.

This temporary time-saving information update area 223i, like the above-mentioned time-saving information update area 223g, receives time-saving related commands including time-saving setting information from the main controller 110, that is, the jackpot control process of the main controller 110 (S1504 in FIG. 52). It is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612 in FIG. 52), and when the time saving setting information command that is set when the end condition of the time saving state is set (S1613 in FIG. 52) is received (S2602 in FIG. 60: Yes), the termination condition (time saving information) for terminating the current time saving state is set (S2603 in FIG. 60). Then, in the winning information related processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 57), update information corresponding to the received winning information is stored (S2307 in FIG. 57). The temporary time-saving end flag 223j is a flag to indicate that the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the temporary time-saving information stored in the temporary time-saving information update area 223i, and when set to on, the temporary time-saving information is This indicates that the time-saving termination condition has been satisfied based on the above. This temporary time saving end flag 223j indicates that the information (temporary time saving information) in the updated temporary time saving information update area 223i satisfies the time saving end conditions in the winning information related processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2210 in FIG. 57). If it is determined that there is a user, it is set to on (S2309 in FIG. 57).

Then, it is referenced in the winning information related process (S2210 in FIG. 57) (S2304 in FIG. 57), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2304 in FIG. 57: Yes), the winning information command received thereafter The system is configured to skip various types of determination processing.

As explained above, if the time-saving termination condition is satisfied by the winning information included in the received winning information command, the winning information included in the winning information command newly received after that will be a jackpot. It is configured so that it does not determine whether winning information for winning is included or whether or not the termination conditions of the currently set gaming state are satisfied. In other words, if it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on winning information obtained after that. , is configured to skip that unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of variations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number with respect to the end condition established based on the number of variations of the special symbol, and is set to on. This is to indicate that the number of variations of the special symbol during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number. This time saving lower limit flag 223k is set in the time saving update process (S2216 in FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of changes in the first special symbol) among the end conditions for ending the time saving state (time saving end condition) A special symbol executed during the time saving state for the end condition (the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times) set corresponding to the total number of variations (the total number of variations that is the sum of the number of variations and the number of variations of the second special symbol) If it is determined that the number of fluctuations in has exceeded the predetermined number (70 times) (the remaining number of times until the time saving state ends is less than 30 times) (S2608 in FIG. 60: Yes), it is set to on. Ru. Then, it is referred to when selecting a state display mode using the state display selection table 222b in the performance setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2804 in FIG. 63) (S2906 in FIG. 63). Then, when it is determined that the remaining time saving number is 0 (S2612: Yes in FIG. 60), or in the small win related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60), If it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to off (S2613 in FIG. 60, S2708 in FIG. 61).

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to on depending on the progress until the time-saving end condition is met, and by configuring the performance mode to be varied depending on the setting status of the flag, it is possible to This makes it possible to predict the timing at which the time-saving termination condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance that suggests the end timing of the time saving state.

Note that in the first embodiment, the progress until the time saving end condition is met is determined in two stages, but more stages may be provided. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) is provided that can identify the state every 10 times when a change in the special symbol is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, and the production mode is set according to the flag (counter). It may be configured to be variable.

The quasi-termination condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number for the termination condition that is established based on winning a small hit by drawing a special symbol, and is turned on. This is set to indicate that the number of changes in the special symbol during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number. The semi-end condition flag 223m is referenced in the small hit related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) (S2703 in FIG. 61), and the semi-end condition flag 223m is off ( S2703 in FIG. 61: No), and when it is determined that the quasi-termination condition is satisfied (S2704 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to ON (S2705 in FIG. 61). Then, if it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to off (S2707 in FIG. 61).

The time saving before end variation flag 223n is a flag to indicate that a change is to be performed before the time saving state ends (time saving end conditions are met), and when set to on, the time saving state ends. This indicates that the previous variation will be executed. Specifically, among the end conditions of the time-saving state that are set multiple times, when there is only one remaining period (number of fluctuations) until the time-saving end condition is satisfied, which is set based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Set to on. By executing the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 62) while this pre-time saving end fluctuation flag 223n is set to ON, it becomes possible to determine the fluctuation as the final fluctuation of the time saving state, and It is possible to perform a performance that corresponds to the final fluctuation.

This pre-time saving end variation flag 223n is set to ON (S2611 in FIG. 60) when it is determined that the remaining number of time reductions is 1 in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60) (S2610 in FIG. 60: Yes). ). Then, when it is determined that the remaining time saving number is 0 (S2612: Yes in FIG. 60), or in the small win related update process (see FIG. 61) executed in the time saving update process (see FIG. 60), If it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied (S2706 in FIG. 61: Yes), it is set to off (S2614 in FIG. 60, S2709 in FIG. 61). It is also referenced in the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) (S2905 in FIG. 63), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S2905 in FIG. 63). : Yes), the process using the final status display selection table 222c (processing for the final change of the time saving status) is executed to set the display status display command that indicates the status display mode, and if the status is not set to on (off (S2905 in FIG. 63: No), the configuration is configured to execute processing using the status display selection table 222b (processing for fluctuations other than the final fluctuation in the time saving state). .

In this embodiment, in order to determine that the variation before the end of the time saving is completed (executed), the variation flag 223n before the end of the time saving is set, but other than that, for example, , a configuration is provided in which the winning information of the second special symbol can be held and stored, and a pre-reading process (see FIG. 44) is also executed for the held winning information, and the result of the pre-reading process is shown. The winning command is configured to be received, and the winning information of the second special symbol winning the small hit is determined in advance based on the received winning command. Then, based on the result of the preliminary determination, when a variation before a special symbol variation is executed in which a small winning winning that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state is executed, the variation flag 223n before the end of the time saving state is set to be turned on. You may also add additional configurations. As a result, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time-saving termination conditions, it is possible to reliably determine the special symbol variation immediately before the time-saving termination condition is satisfied.

The state production counter 223o is a counter used for various drawings used when setting the performance mode of various productions executed by the audio lamp control device 113, and although not shown, the state production counter 223o It is updated by 1 each time the main processing (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. The state performance counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the performance counter 223e described above. The detailed configuration will be omitted since it is the same as the performance counter 223e described above. The value of this state rendering counter 223o is referred to when selecting a state display mode using the state display selection table 222b or the final state display selection table 222c (see FIG. 63).

In this way, when selecting a specific display mode according to specific regularity (appropriate judgment result, setting status of various flags), the selection is made based on the randomly updated value (value of the state production counter 223o). By configuring the display modes to be divided into more detailed categories, the display modes can be diversified, and the current gaming state can be determined depending on the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81). It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the update status of the time saving state.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 56) of the voice ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This controls the performance (performance) and preview performance. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply section 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 49).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (in the normal state), a left-handed game is performed and a special 1 game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 is performed. be done. Here, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the player shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type.

Specifically, if the jackpot type of the won jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state will be set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot will end. It is configured to later shift to a time-saving gaming state (time-saving state) which is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, if a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal state and a second special symbol is drawn, and if a jackpot is won, the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. It is composed of This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state (normal game), the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640. (difficult to do so), the act of drawing the second special symbol in the normal state is considered a fraudulent act, and the player who committed the fraudulent act is not allowed to play an advantageous game. This is a measure for this purpose. As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the time saving state, the lottery (game) with the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, there was a risk that the lottery for the second special symbol would be drawn by fraudulent acts. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn by a fraudulent act.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the winning information of the second special symbol (winning information obtained when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640) is not stored on hold, for example, it saves time. During the state (when the electric accessory 640a is easily moved to the protruding position), the winning information of the second special symbol is held and stored, and the second special symbol is drawn in the normal state based on the held winning information. (variation) is never executed. Thereby, when a normal game is being played, it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball is easily entered into the second ball entry port 640 by the opening operation (protrusion action) of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640. Therefore, a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entry opening 640 is performed.

Here, if a small hit is won by drawing the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (ball passes through a specific area), a jackpot game is started. In this embodiment, when a jackpot game is set (executed) via a small jackpot game, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid giving discomfort to a player who has won a big win through a small win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the small winning type (small winning A to C) that is set when a small winning is won by drawing the second special symbol, it is possible for the ball to pass through a specific area during the small winning game. It is configured such that small winning games with different probability (probability that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball) are executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special symbol (the first special symbol or the first The number of fluctuation end conditions (first time saving end condition) that are satisfied when the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol (2 special symbol) reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times), and the lottery number of the special symbol (second special symbol). As a result, the operation number end condition (second time saving end condition) that is satisfied when the number of small winning wins (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small winning winning) reaches the specified number of operations. , is set.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the second time saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small winning type (small winning game to be executed) that is set when a small winning is won. There is.

Then, in the state (situation) where the time saving state is set, before the above-mentioned first time saving end condition or second time saving end condition is met, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (per type). Or, if you win a small hit in a lottery with a special symbol, and during a small win game corresponding to the won small win (a small win game depending on the type of small win), pass the ball into a specific area and win the jackpot. When the item is acquired (win type 2 is acquired), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) where the time saving state is set, before acquiring the first type or the second type winning, the above-mentioned first time saving ending condition (ending condition according to the number of changes of the special symbol) or the second If any of the time saving end conditions (end conditions corresponding to small win winning (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted (set) from the time saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured in this way has a possibility of ending the time saving state ( It is possible to provide the player with both the possibility that the second time-saving termination condition will be met (the possibility that the second time-saving termination condition will be satisfied) and the possibility that the second type of winning will be won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game (the lottery of the second special symbol) executed during the time saving state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, if the time saving state is set and a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, that is, a state where a left-handed game is being played, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls) is the upper limit. number (4 pieces), you win a jackpot, and you win a jackpot in the "first special symbol variation (lottery) during the time-saving state" that can be executed when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Even so, it is possible to suppress providing the player with a result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, the flow during a small winning game of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be explained. FIGS. 29(a) to 29(f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small winning game. As shown in FIGS. 29(a) to (f), when a small winning game is executed by the control process of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 displays a small winning game effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. is executed. Then, when t1 (1 second) has elapsed after the start of the small winning game, the V prize opening solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 27). Further, the flow path solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The ball flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and the V switch 650e3 is activated for 17 seconds (V valid period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small winning game. By detecting the ball, a jackpot game is executed after the small win game ends, and when an opening period t6 (2 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the jackpot game, the first round round game is started and the specific winning hole 65 is opened. It will be released.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to win a ball to the V winning device 650 during a small winning game by simply executing the right-handed game normally, and it is also possible to cause the V switch 650e3 to detect the ball. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the time saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is configured to end when the second special symbol is drawn once, the game can be played without any inconvenience. You can make it happen. In addition, since the time-saving state is configured to end when the second special symbol lottery is held once, the type of small win won in the second special symbol lottery is identified, and the player To prevent a game in which a ball is not entered into the V winning device 650 and the next lottery of the second special symbol is aimed when winning a small win that is disadvantageous (for example, a small win with a small win type of small win C). can do.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 36. FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. Thereby, the display control device 114 can be brought into a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying an address to outputting data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) that is executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing the image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which has a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b detects that the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 in a variation effect when the lottery result is selected by the main controller 110.

The MPU 231 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply section 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 64).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 32(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (“○” and “x” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the display control device 114 as shown in FIG. 32(b). As shown in FIG. 32(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 32(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. 32(b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in FIG. 32(c) is displayed. The image shown in is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on variation image area The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 31, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 33, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 33B shows a back surface A corresponding to the "sandy beach stage" and a back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", respectively.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back images corresponding to each back surface A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then when the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, the third symbol display device 81 displays a smooth image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back type and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Sandy Beach Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Sandy Beach Stage" that is frequently displayed. By having all of them reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(b), on the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only the image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, the image between position a and position b, is for permanent use. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, when the stage is changed, the initial position of the back image that is first displayed is set in the range from position a to position a' (or in the range shown in FIGS. 33(a) to 33(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image data can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone as time passes. It can be displayed. Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back side B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this time, the range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Note that on the back side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 31) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 31, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable presentation after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third symbol display device 81 immediately starts the variable presentation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which this is not the case.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes it to the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading resident image data in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, round presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , ending effects, and demo effects are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a jackpot A to D. If either is the case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stop displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

By notifying the time period of the normal symbol in the ending performance, the player can easily recognize the time period of the normal symbol. The longer the time period for this normal symbol, the more opportunities the ball will have to pass through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, so there will be more chances for the normal symbol to be drawn, and the normal symbol will win. There will be more opportunities. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the electric accessory to be released due to the jackpot of the normal symbol, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and making it easier for the special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, and the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot.This increases the player's desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first ball entry hole 64 is a winning hole from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a jackpot with a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball mouth 640, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player can be in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a feeling of expectation that you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending performance, by informing that the lottery result of one of the pending special symbol drawings will be a special symbol jackpot, the player can win the special symbol in the pending special symbol drawing. Since the player can recognize that it will be a jackpot with a special symbol, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player will definitely get a jackpot with a special symbol. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image displayed on the back side of the sprite will be. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is determined by whether to display either the back surface A or B that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface that is different from back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If the back surface type specifies that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from among the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target. , and also specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. However, instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are defined. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81), depending on the back type. Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 36) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all of the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 35). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 35 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 (see S4005 in FIG. 64). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S4305 in FIG. 66(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 66(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 66(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S4308 in FIG. 66(b), S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6301 in FIG. 79(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 79(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 80) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of the image drawing instructions for the image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and displays the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 66(b ), pointer update processing (see S6005 in FIG. 78) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 36), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and acquires the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2,...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2,..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The rendered image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to display the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending pitch number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in this order.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 66 (b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6007 in FIG. 76). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 80). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S6514 in FIG. 80). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k specifies a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 66(b)) is executed (see S6602 in FIG. 81).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 53. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum When the values (in this embodiment, 999, 99, 99, 239, and 99, respectively) are reached, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process is executed in conjunction with winning a winning ball into the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. A through gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. After executing the through gate passage process, the V entrance passage process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). Thereafter, the V passing process associated with winning the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S109). Note that the details of the V entrance passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

Next, a firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpot period includes a period during which the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). There is a period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), a period during the jackpot game (round game period), and after the round game period ends, a new special symbol lottery (variation) starts. This includes a grace period (ending period) up to.

Here, in order to determine whether or not there is currently a jackpot, it is specifically determined whether the jackpot flag 203d is set on. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON) (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If there is no special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203d is not set on (set off) (S201: No), the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b are It is determined whether the display mode is changing (S202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S202: No), the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It is determined whether the ball has entered the ball (S203).

If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 (S203: Yes), that is, when the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot or the special symbol is not changing, the ball enters the second ball entry port 640. When the ball enters, that is, when the second special symbol variation (lottery) start condition is met, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 Each value is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S204).

Next, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is executed (S210), and this process is ended. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S203: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (N1) (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is greater than 0 (S206). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S206: No), the reserved balls of the 1st special symbol to start the variation (lottery) are currently secured. Since there is no state, this process for executing the special symbol variation is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not 0 (S206: Yes), that is, if the reserved balls of the first special symbol to start the fluctuation (lottery) are secured. For example, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted (S207), and the reserved ball number command (special symbol 1 Pitch pitch count command) is set (S208). After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command through the process of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). Thereafter, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S211). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the variation time has not elapsed (S211: No), that is, if the current period is during the variation period of the special symbol, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S211, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S211: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is set. (S212). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S210) which will be described later with reference to FIG. Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, the stop display set in the process of S212 is displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). In this way, by continuously displaying the display mode of the stopped symbols (stopped display) for a predetermined period of time, unlike the case where the fluctuating symbols are displayed for a moment, the first stop symbol is reliably displayed to the player. The content of the pattern can be recognized.

In this embodiment, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (determined period) for displaying the above-mentioned stop state of the first symbol, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the first symbol is If a blinking display that repeats a lit state and a cleared state is used to indicate that the display is changing, the duration of the blinking display is longer than the one-time lit display period (for example, 0.2 seconds). The period may be set as the above-mentioned fixed period. With this configuration, the player can easily determine whether the first symbol is changing or stopping (determining).

After the process of S212 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is started, the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 39) It is determined whether the symbol lottery result (current determination result) is a special symbol jackpot (S213). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S213: Yes), the specific winning opening (variable winning device) 65 An opening scenario is set (S214), and then a jackpot start is set (S215). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c and jackpot flag 203d are set to ON (S216), the time saving counter 203k is set to 0 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and this process ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, as explained in the process of S217, when a special symbol wins a jackpot, after the variation of the special symbol is finished (the confirmation display of the first symbol is finished), the jackpot is won. The time saving state is configured to end at the timing before the game starts. Note that the timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the present embodiment described above, the time saving state may be terminated based on the winning of the special symbol (first symbol). In addition to after the confirmation display, for example, you can end the time saving state at the timing when the special symbol winning the jackpot starts changing, or the time saving state may end at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the confirmation display starts). You may terminate the state. Further, the time saving state may end at the timing of starting a jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot or after a predetermined period of time after the start of the jackpot game (for example, at the start timing of a round game when the variable winning device 65 is released). However, the time saving state may end at the timing when the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, the end timing for ending the time-saving state based on winning the special symbol jackpot (the timing for establishing the time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when the special symbol jackpot is won) is selected from among the multiple timings described above. It may be configured such that only one is set in advance, or the time saving state may be configured to end at different timings depending on the jackpot type of the won jackpot.

By configuring this way, for example, if the time saving state ends at the timing when the special symbol changes, the time saving state will end for the player (for example, if the number of changes of the special symbol is the specified number of times ( It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the normal state has been set after reaching 100 times) or whether the time-saving state has ended due to winning a jackpot during the time-saving state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the performance display (variation display) of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-saving end condition is met (the timing at which the time-saving state ends when winning a jackpot) to be different for each of multiple jackpot types, special symbols can be displayed based on the end timing of the time-saving state. It is possible to prevent the lottery result (discrimination result) from being grasped by the player. In addition, if the player identifies the timing at which the time-saving state ends as part of the timing at which the time-saving end conditions set for each of the multiple jackpot types are satisfied, the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special symbol will be A time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot may be provided in which the time-saving state ends only when a time-saving end condition that is established by winning the jackpot is satisfied, that is, a timing at which the player can be notified of the jackpot.

With this configuration, by knowing the timing at which the time-saving state ends, the user can quickly learn that he or she has won the jackpot, and the period during which the user feels superior can be extended. In addition, in order to make such an effect even more effective, the time-saving end timing for the above-mentioned jackpot is set to the first half of the fluctuation period from when the special symbol fluctuation is executed until the end of the special symbol fluctuation. It is good to configure.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S213: No), a time saving number update process is executed to update the time saving number (S219), and then the current lottery result It is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S220). A detailed explanation of the above-mentioned time saving number update process (S219) will be described later with reference to FIG. Processing is executed to update information regarding the varying number of times end condition that can be satisfied based on the number of lottery times).

In the process of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S220: Yes), a small win start setting process is executed (S221), the process of S218 described above is executed, and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S220: No), the small win start setting process (S221) is skipped, the process of S218 is executed, and this process is executed. finish.

As explained above, in the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 38) of this embodiment, the second special symbol It is configured to determine whether special symbol lottery (variation) conditions are satisfied (processing of S203 in FIG. 38). This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol that is advantageous to the player, does not have a retention storage means for retaining winning information and can be changed (variable) when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. Easy), and when the normal state is set, the second special symbol that cannot be changed (difficult to change) is configured so that it is a special symbol that is harder to change (lottery) than the first special symbol. This is because it has been

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, in the unlikely event that the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are simultaneous (timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 37) (Reference) processing period (including error of 2 milliseconds), the first special symbol will begin to fluctuate in priority over the second special symbol, which is difficult to fluctuate (lottery). This gives the player a sense of discomfort. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is easier to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player in the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol than the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (it is easier to win a small win). Since the lottery (variation) conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are configured at the same time (timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 37)), (including the error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period), if the first special symbol starts to fluctuate in priority over the second special symbol, which is difficult to fluctuate (lottery), it becomes more There was a problem that it caused discomfort.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when executing the process of starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol has a high added value for the player (the probability of winning a small hit is This is because it is configured to prioritize (first) determine the lottery (variation) condition of the special symbol (in this embodiment, the second special symbol) which is higher than the lottery (variation) is difficult to actually execute. , it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problem from occurring.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a process for updating the number of time savings, after executing the process related to the end condition of the number of fluctuations (time reduction number update process (S219)) that is established according to the number of changes of the special symbol, the small hit is won. It is configured to execute a process (small win start setting process (S221)) related to the winning count end condition that is satisfied according to . With this configuration, in one special symbol variation (lottery), if a lottery result is obtained in which the variation number end condition and the winning number end condition are satisfied, the variation number end condition is set first. is satisfied, and the time saving state ends based on the fact that the variation number end condition is satisfied.

In this way, by configuring to determine whether or not each time-saving ending condition is established in a predetermined order for multiple time-saving ending conditions, multiple time-saving ending conditions can be set with the same special symbol variation ( It is also possible to regularly terminate the time-saving state even if it can be reached in a lottery (lottery).

In addition, in the above-mentioned configuration, for example, when the variable number end condition is met, the time saving state is ended after the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed as confirmed, and when the number of winning number end condition is met, the time saving state is ended. By using the present invention in a pachinko machine 10 configured to end the time saving state after a winning game ends, the end timing of the time saving state can be varied depending on the time saving end condition that is satisfied.

Specifically, for example, if a small win B is won and the condition for ending the number of wins is satisfied independently, the time saving state ends after the small win game corresponding to the small win B ends. On the other hand, if a small win B is won in a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) in which the variable number end condition is met, the variable number end condition is satisfied with priority and the small win game corresponding to the small win B starts. The time saving state ends before the special symbol lottery result (small win B) is displayed, that is, after the special symbol (first symbol) indicating the special symbol lottery result (small win B) is displayed.

In the above example, in a state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state, even if the time saving state ends based on the lottery (variation) of the special symbol that won the small win B, the time saving end is established. The timing of ending the time saving state (whether or not time saving occurs during a small winning game) can be varied and set according to the conditions, so the time saving state can be set according to the time saving ending conditions to establish the length of the period that is advantageous to the player. can be made different. Thereby, it is possible to set time-saving ending conditions that are advantageous to the player and time-saving ending conditions that are disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in addition to a game in which the player expects that the time-saving termination condition will not be satisfied, it is possible to provide a new gaming experience in which the player expects the time-saving termination condition to be satisfied as advantageously as possible.

In addition, for the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, for example, even during a small winning game, there is a ball entrance (second ball entrance) that allows ball entry (easily) when the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation (long opening). In order to allow a ball to enter the ball entry opening 640), a second ball entry opening 640 is provided above the specific winning opening (V winning device 650) that is opened in the small winning game, and It is preferable to configure the player to play a game in which a ball enters the second ball entry hole 640.

Furthermore, the period of the small winning game (the period when the V winning device 650 is open (1.8S) and the period when it is closed) is long (for example, 60 seconds), and the small winning game is executed. The number of prize balls provided to the player when winning the V winning device 650 is greater than the number of prize balls provided to the player when the ball enters the second ball entrance (for example, five balls). By configuring the game so that the number of prize balls (e.g., 3 balls) is smaller, the game result (the number of balls won through the game) can be made to vary greatly depending on whether or not there is a time-saving state during the small winning game. . In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by providing the technique of varying the end timing of the time saving as described above, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is more interesting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol variation start process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S210). This special symbol variation start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is executed in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the area, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small win", or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment), and the first symbol display device 37a , 37b and the third symbol display device 81 to determine the performance pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation performance.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type are stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counter C5 is acquired (S301). Next, the lottery result is determined based on the first winning random number table 202a (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). (S302). Specifically, if the first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 22(b)) It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing the random numbers stored in A big hit or a small hit is determined by comparing the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 22(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S303). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S303: Yes), a jackpot type is acquired based on the first winning type selection table 202b corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (S304). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 or the special drawing 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. , determines what type of jackpot is among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to D) (see FIG. 23(b) or (c)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but they are not limited to this, and may be different random values. With this configuration, a random number value that is determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, so that illegal games aiming at the same random number value are not performed. Even if this happens, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being unevenly executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to that, and the number of random values for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same. The number of random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher jackpot probability, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

Then, a display mode at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol type) and the jackpot type is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to D). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A to D) are set as stop types in order to stop display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Thereafter, a jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S306), and the process moves to S314. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S306, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the obtained special symbol type, lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2. Then, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24).

In the process of S314, a variation pattern command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S306 is set (S314). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 (S315). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are sent to the audio lamp control device during external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) described later. 113. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as is to the display control device 114. When the process of S315 ends, this process ends and returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, in the process of S303, if the lottery result is not a jackpot (S303: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small win or not (S307). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S307: Yes), the small win type is acquired based on the small win type selection table 202f (S308). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the small hit type selection table 202f, and the small win (small win) of the three types of special symbols is compared. Among A to C), it is determined what type of small win is (see FIG. 22).

Next, a display mode at the time of a small win corresponding to the small win type is set (S309). Thereafter, a small winning variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the small winning symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S306, the type of the special symbol obtained, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24).

Next, the small win type acquired in the process of S308 is stored in the small win type storage area 203e (S311), and then the process of S314 and S315 described above is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). . In addition, in this embodiment, out of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, only the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit, so it is not necessary to refer to the special symbol type in S308 and S309. However, for example, if the configuration is such that a small win can be won in the first special symbol lottery, the special symbol type is also referred to to obtain the small win type in the processing of S308 and S309, and the small win type is obtained in the process of S308 and S309. The configuration may be configured to set the display mode.

In addition, in the processing of S314 and S315 in this case, the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see S310) and the stop type (see S309) set when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit. is set.

If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win (S307: No), a display mode at the time of a win corresponding to the type of special symbol is set (S312). Thereafter, a variation pattern when missing is determined based on the number of reserved pitches (S313). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S306, the type of the special symbol obtained, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation (FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24). Next, the processes of S314 and S315 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the small hit start setting process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S221). This small hit start setting process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see Figure 38) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 37), and is for small hit types (small hit A to C). Based on this, the start of the small winning game is set, and processing for updating the time saving information according to the won small winning (updating process for the winning number end condition) is executed.

Here, when a small winning game is started, this pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state in which a ball can win (easily), and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 is placed in a specific area (V By passing the winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the jackpot game is executed (set) after the small win game ends.

That is, the gaming state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and a jackpot game is executed compared to the normal gaming state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a higher possibility. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, different small winning games are executed depending on the small winning type (small winning A to C) that is set when winning a small winning. , the possibility that a ball will pass through a specific area during a small winning game is made different depending on each small winning type.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the possibility (expectation level) that a jackpot game (2 types of winnings) will be executed (set) depending on the small winning game to be executed, so it is possible to Since it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not he or she wins, but also in the type of the small win won, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the small winning start setting process (S221) is executed, first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small winning type is set (S401). Thereafter, a jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is set in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, based on the small winning type and the small winning type selection table 202f, the V passing jackpot type (a jackpot game that is set (executed) when a ball passes a specific area during a small winning game) is determined. do. As mentioned above, if the small win type is A, it is determined that it is a jackpot A (a jackpot with a time saving of 15 rounds), and if the small win type is B, it is determined that it is a jackpot B (a jackpot with a time saving of 5 rounds). If the small win type is C, it is determined that it is a jackpot A (5 round time saving jackpot) (see FIG. 22). In other words, in this embodiment, the content of the jackpot game is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during the small winning game, and the jackpot (one type per winning) is determined by drawing a special symbol. ), so that the same jackpot game will be executed when winning the 2nd type win (when the ball passes through a specific area), the 1st type win will be executed. The jackpot type (jackpot A or B) is set according to the type of small win executed.

In this way, by setting the jackpot type and starting the jackpot game based on the set jackpot type when winning two types of winnings, The processing related to the jackpot game can be shared between the cases where a win is obtained, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Note that the configuration of this embodiment is not limited to the configuration, and may be configured to allow setting of a jackpot game that can be executed only when winning one type or only when winning two types. It may be configured to perform different jackpot game processes for winning and type 2 winning.

Returning to FIG. 40, the explanation will be continued. When the process of S402 is finished, the start of a small win is then set based on the small win type (S403), and the small win start flag 203f and the medium small win flag 203g are set to ON (S404). After that, a small winning time saving update process is executed (S405), and this process is ended. This time-saving update process for small winnings (S405) is a process for updating time-saving information corresponding to the number-of-winnings ending condition, which is a condition for ending the time-saving state that can be established when winning a small winning, and updating the time-saving information. This is to execute a process for shifting the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state when the winning number end condition is satisfied as a result of the above, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the small winning time saving update process (S405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small winning time saving update process (S405). This small hit time saving update process (S405) is a process executed in the small hit start setting process (see Figure 40) of the special symbol variation process (see Figure 38) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 37). This is a process for updating the time saving information based on the won small win and updating the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the small winning time saving update process (S405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is greater than 0 (S501). That is, it is determined whether the current time saving state is present. In the process of S501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S501: No), it is a state in which a small win has been won in a gaming state other than the time saving state. This process is completely skipped in order to update the time-saving information, and this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured so that a small hit will not be won in a state other than the time saving state (so that the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is not executed), S501 If it is determined in the process that the time saving state is not set, an error command for executing error notification (abnormality notification) may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is larger than 0, that is, the time saving state is set (S501: Yes), next, It is determined whether the small win type is "small win A" (S502). Here, in the process of S502, the small win type stored in the small win type storage area 203e in the process of S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) is read out and determined.

In the process of S502, if it is determined that the current small win type is "small win A" (S502: Yes), the value of the small win A counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S503), and the small win A after the subtraction is It is determined whether the value of the counter 203m is 0 (S504), and if it is determined to be 0 (S504: Yes), the time saving end condition for this small win win (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small win A) is determined. ) is satisfied, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203k, which was measuring the period until the varying number of winning number ending conditions were met, is set to 0 (S505), and the value of the time saving counter 203k, which was measuring the period until the varying number of winning number ending conditions were met, is set to 0, The respective values of the winning A counter 203m, the small winning B counter 203n, and the small winning C counter 203p are set to 0 (S506), and the normal state is set as the gaming state (S507).

By executing the processes of S505 to S507 described above, it is possible to measure the period until the other time-saving termination conditions are satisfied when one of the multiple time-saving termination conditions is satisfied. Since the value of each counter can be set to a value that indicates that the time-saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to update the time-saving information after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the gaming state). Processing (processing for updating the values of the small winning A counter 203m, the small winning B counter 203n, the small winning C counter 203p, and the time saving medium counter 203k) can be reliably prevented from being executed. Therefore, unnecessary processing can be suppressed from being executed, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when any one of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set to 0 ( Since the configuration is only configured to set a value indicating that the time-saving end condition has been met, after the time-saving state ends, it is necessary to determine which time-saving end condition the previous time-saving state ended with. However, for example, a storage means capable of storing the time-saving termination conditions that have been satisfied may be provided so that the type and number of times the time-saving termination conditions have been satisfied in the past can be determined.

With this configuration, for example, a time-saving ending condition that is likely to be satisfied can be determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of times it is satisfied, and the player can be satisfied based on the determined content. It can be configured to suggest (notify) easy time-saving termination conditions. Furthermore, the update status of the time saving information corresponding to other time saving ending conditions when the time saving ending condition 1 is satisfied (for example, the small win A counter 203m, the small winning B when the value of the time saving middle counter 203k becomes 0) The values of the counter 203n and the small hit C counter 203p) are configured to be memorizable, and when the time-saving ending condition that is most difficult to satisfy, that is, the time-saving ending condition of one of the plurality of time-saving ending conditions is satisfied, the maximum The configuration may be such that a time saving end condition having time saving information of a value is determined.

After completing the process of S507, next, a remaining time shortening number command corresponding to the subtracted value of each small winning counter is set (S508), a status command indicating the current gaming status is set (S509), and the main process is completed. end. Here, the commands set in S508 and S509 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) described later, It is transmitted to the control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 manages the time saving information based on the received remaining time saving number command, and sets a status display mode for suggesting (notifying) the time saving situation (period until the time saving state ends). Further, the current gaming state is grasped based on the received state command.

On the other hand, in the process of S504, if it is determined that the value of the small win A counter 203m is not 0 (S504: No), the time saving state does not end due to the current small winning winning, so the time saving state is terminated in S505. The process in S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S508.

Returning to the process of S502 described above, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S502, if it is determined that the small win type of the small win won this time is not "small win A" (it is "small win B" or "small win C") (S502: No), the next Then, it is determined whether the small win type of the small win won this time is "Small win B" (S510), and if it is determined that it is "Small win B" (S510: Yes), the small win B counter 203n The value of is subtracted by 1 (S511), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the small win B counter 203n is 0 or not (S512).

In the process of S512, if it is determined that the value of the small win B counter 203n is 0 (S512: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small win B) is satisfied with this small win win. In this case, the process moves to the process of S505 described above, and the process for ending the time saving state is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S512, if it is determined that the value of the small win B counter 203n is not 0 (it is 1 or more) (S512: No), the time saving state does not end due to the current small winning winning, so the time saving state The process skips steps S505 to S507 to end the process and moves to step S508.

In the process of S510, if it is determined that the small win type of the small win won this time is not "small win B", that is, it is "small win C" (S510: No), the value of the small win C counter 223p is subtracted by 1 (S513), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit C counter 223p after the subtraction is 0 (S514).

In the process of S514, if it is determined that the value of the small win C counter 223p is 0 (S514: Yes), the time saving end condition (the winning number end condition corresponding to the small win C) is satisfied with this small win win. In this case, S515 to S517 are executed, which are the same processes as S505 to S507 described above, and the process moves to S508. On the other hand, in the process of S514, if it is determined that the value of the small win C counter 203p is not 0 (it is 1 or more) (S514: No), the time saving state does not end due to the current small win winning, so the time saving state does not end. The process skips steps S515 to S517 to end the state and moves to step S508.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol winning a small hit has elapsed, the value of the counter corresponding to the small winning is subtracted, and the time saving is completed based on the small winning. It is configured to determine whether a condition (a condition for ending the number of winnings) is met. With this configuration, it is possible to end the time saving state according to the winning number end condition before the small winning game is executed. Therefore, even if either of the time saving end conditions, the variable number end condition or the winning number end condition, is satisfied, it is possible to prevent a large difference from occurring in the timing at which the time saving state ends.

Specifically, in the first embodiment, when the variation number end condition, that is, the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol, is established, the special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed to be displayed. The time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the time-saving state ends, and if the winning number end condition, that is, the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of winnings in the special symbol lottery, is satisfied, the special symbol The time saving state is configured to end at the start setting timing of the small winning game after the final symbol (first symbol) is displayed.

In other words, no matter which time-saving end condition is met, the time-saving state is configured to end immediately after the corresponding special symbol stops changing. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving end condition was satisfied to end the time-saving state set this time. In addition, in order for the player to determine whether or not the time saving state has ended, it is necessary to identify, for example, the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. For example, as in this embodiment, by setting the time saving state to end when the small winning game is set (immediately before the small winning game starts), the time saving state will end immediately after the small winning game starts. This can make it difficult to determine whether the process has ended or not.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, out of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions, when either of the variable number termination conditions and the winning number termination conditions is satisfied, the timing is approximately the same (at a level that is difficult for the player to distinguish). Although the configuration is such that the time-saving state is terminated using a concept that includes a time difference, other configurations may be used. For example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is met, the special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed. It may be configured such that the time saving state is ended immediately after the display, and if the winning number end condition is met, the time saving state is ended after the small winning game that is executed after the special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed and displayed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the time saving state during the period when the small winning game is being executed.

Therefore, during a small winning game, the player cannot determine whether the time saving state has ended due to the current small winning winning, and until the small winning game ends (whether or not the player has won the second type of winning or not) Until the game result is announced), it is possible to make it difficult to tell whether the time saving state has ended or not. Furthermore, as in this embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 which has a gameplay feature in which it is possible to win two types of wins during a small winning game, the player is notified whether or not the time saving state has ended after the small winning game ends. By configuring this, isn't this small winning game based on a small winning that ends the time saving state? Since the game is played while predicting that, the player can always be motivated to aim for two kinds of winnings in the small winning game executed during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the time saving number update process (S219) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the time saving frequency update process (S219). This time saving number update process (S219) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and updates the time saving number and changes the gaming state to the normal state. This is the process to set it to .

In the time saving number update process (S219), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0, that is, whether the current time saving period is in progress (S601). In the process of S601, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not greater than 0 (it is 0), that is, it is determined that the time is not being reduced (S601: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than 0, that is, it is determined that the time is being reduced (S601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the process moves to S603. do.

In the process of S603, a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203k that has been changed (subtracted by 1) by the calculation is set (S603). The remaining time shortening number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device during external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) described later. 113.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S604). If it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S605), and the small winning A counter 203m, the small winning B counter 203n, and the small winning C counter 203p is set to 0 (S606). Next, a status command indicating that the current gaming status is the normal status is set (S607), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not 0 (S604: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38).

As explained above, in this embodiment, whether or not the time saving end condition (variation number end condition) that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol is satisfied is determined by the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42), The configuration is such that whether or not the time-saving termination condition (number-of-wins termination condition) is established based on the number of wins of special symbol winnings is determined by the time-saving update process for small winnings (see FIG. 41). . In any process, if any of the multiple time-saving termination conditions is met, the values of various counters indicating the update status of time-saving information corresponding to other time-saving termination conditions are set. All are configured to be set to a value (0) to indicate a state in which the time-saving termination conditions are satisfied. Therefore, no matter which of the time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, the processing contents for terminating the time-saving state can be unified.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to indicate the update status of the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition, values indicating each time saving end condition are set in various counters at the timing when the time saving state is set, and each time saving end condition is set. When the time-saving information corresponding to the condition is determined, the values of various counters are subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time-saving end condition is satisfied. In addition, when the time saving state is set, the values of various counters are set to 0, and when the corresponding time saving information is determined, the counter value is incremented by 1, and the counter value after the addition is the time saving end condition. It may be configured such that the time saving state is ended when it is determined that the value indicates the value. In other words, there is a means for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and when the time-saving state is set, time-saving information corresponding to various time-saving end conditions (number of changes in special symbols, number of small winnings, etc.) is updated. Any configuration may be used as long as the update means is provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, among the time-saving termination conditions, as the number-of-winnings termination condition, a termination condition that is satisfied when the individual number of wins of each small winning type reaches a predetermined number is used, but in addition to this, for example, , the winning number end condition may be set corresponding to the total number of times each small winning type is set, that is, the total number of small winnings won during the period in which the time saving state is continuously set; A winning number ending condition may be set that is satisfied when the total number of times that the winning B is set and the number of times that the small winning C is set reaches a predetermined number.

In this case, the number of winnings for which the winning number ending condition corresponding only to small winning B is satisfied (the number of winnings ending for small winning B (for example, 3 times)) and the number of winnings for which the winning number ending condition corresponding only to small winning C is satisfied ( It goes without saying that the total number of times mentioned above should be less than the sum of the number of small winnings B and the number of small winnings C ending, as well as the number of small winnings B ending and the number of small winnings ending small winning C (for example, 5 times). It is preferable to set a value smaller than a large value (5 times in this example) among the number of times the winning C ends. As a result, for the small win type that is set when a small win is won during the time saving state, it is not possible to predict the end timing of the time saving state unless you understand the time saving situation in a composite manner. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the game.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) will be explained. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether there is a winning (starting winning, ball entering) into the first winning hole (first ball entering hole) 64. However, when it is determined that there is a winning prize, that is, when a ball is detected by the ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 (S701: Yes), various random number counters are activated. This is the process to obtain the value and execute the reservation process for that value.

When the starting winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting winning, ball entering) in the first winning hole (first ball entrance) 64 (S701). . Here, a ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 determines whether or not the state in which a ball is detected continues over three timer interrupt processes that are repeatedly executed. By determining this, it is configured to determine whether a ball enters the first winning hole (first ball entering hole) 64 (ball entering). In this way, only when it is determined that the ball is detected continuously for a predetermined period (the period during which timer interrupt processing is executed three times (4 milliseconds)), it is determined that the ball has won a prize (ball hit). By configuring it to Processing can be performed by classifying events caused by noise (instantaneous turn-on) and events caused by the passage of a ball (turn-on continued for a predetermined period of time).

In addition, when using a control that determines that a ball has entered the ball when a ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time, as described above, if the period during which it is determined that a ball has been detected is less than the predetermined period ( In addition to instantaneous detection due to noise), it is also preferable to configure the system to determine that an abnormality has occurred when an upper limit period longer than a predetermined period is exceeded, and not to determine that the ball has won a prize (hit the ball). As a result, even if noise is generated for a long period of time due to an unauthorized operation, it is possible to prevent the ball from hitting the ball incorrectly.

Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of pending times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

In the process of S703, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (3 or less) (S703: Yes), the special symbol Add 1 to the value (N1) of the 1-held ball counter 203b (S704), and use the command to indicate the value of the special symbol 1-reserved ball counter 203b changed by the calculation (special figure 1-reserved ball number command) is set (S705).

The held ball number command set here (special figure 1 held ball number command) is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. During the external output process (S1501), it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203b from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved balls command in the process of S705, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, which were updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), Each value of the small winning type counter C5 is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In addition, in the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S707, a prefetch process is executed (S707). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning (ball entering) into the first winning opening (ball entrance) 64 (S701: No), or if there is no winning (ball entering) into the first winning opening (ball entrance) 64 Even if it is determined that there is (S701: Yes), if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is not less than 4 (4) (S703: No), S707 Shift to prefetch processing.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the winning information of the first special symbol (the right to execute the lottery) is configured to be stored on hold up to a predetermined number (4), and the winning information of the second special symbol is stored. Although the configuration is such that the winning information of the first special symbol and the winning information of the second special symbol cannot be stored on hold, a configuration may be used in which both the winning information of the first special symbol and the winning information of the second special symbol can be stored on hold up to a predetermined number. In this case, the process described above with reference to FIG. 43 may be configured to be executed also for the winning information of the second special symbol (second winning opening (ball entry opening) 640).

In addition, when using a configuration in which winning information can be held and stored for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the upper limit of the number of winning information that can be held and stored for each special symbol is unified (for example, 4). Alternatively, different values may be set as the upper limit number (for example, 4 for the first special symbol and 2 for the second special symbol). Further, the upper limit number of balls that can be held and stored is set to the sum of the number of balls that are held in the first special symbol (the number of balls that are held in the memory) and the number of balls that are held in the second special symbol (the number of balls that are held in the memory). It's okay.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a pre-reading process (S707) which is one process in the start-up winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S707).

In this pre-reading process (S707 in FIG. 44), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize (ball entered) in the first winning hole (ball entrance) 64 (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that there is no new prize in the first ball entry opening 64 (S801: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new prize in the first winning hole (ball entrance) 64 (S801: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the fluctuation pattern table 202d Based on the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2, the lottery result, jackpot type, and variation pattern are obtained in advance (S802).

Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, and fluctuation pattern obtained in the process of S802 is set (S803), and this process is ended. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) to be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes winning information related processing (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, and sets the display mode of various effects to be executed on the third symbol display device 81. Processing is performed to (temporarily) update the progress of the time saving state in advance. Then, the winning information included in the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol fluctuation processing (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and is performed during the fluctuation display of the second symbol and the fluctuation time performed on the second symbol display device 83, and in the second ball entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accompanying electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 45), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S901). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S901: Yes), it is in a state where it is not possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery). This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S901: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol changing). (S902), and if it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol fluctuation) (S902: No), that is, even if the current normal symbol is a hit, the normal symbol is changing. If it is determined that there is no state among them, that is, a state in which it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery), a second winning random number counter is stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area. It is determined whether there is a person there (S903).

In the process of S903, if it is determined that the second winning random number counter is not stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area, that is, if it is determined that there is no winning information of the normal symbol to be newly executed. (S903: No), this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S903: Yes), the value of the stored second winning random number counter C4 is acquired (S904). .

Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S904 and the normal symbol (second) winning random number table 202c, a lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a win or not is obtained (S905). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is outside the normal pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S905 is a normal symbol win (S906), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S906: Yes), the winning time is determined. The display mode is set (S907), and the process moves to S909. In the process of S907, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S906, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S906: No), the display mode when the pattern is out is set (S908), and the process proceeds to S909. In the process of S908, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to step S909.

When the process of S907 or S908 is completed, in the process of S909, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S909), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols ( S909: Yes), sets the normal symbol fluctuation time on the second symbol display device 83 to 3 seconds (S910), then sets the regular symbol short fluctuation flag 203q to ON (S911), and ends this process. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (normal symbol state) (S909: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S912), this process ends.

The normal symbol/short fluctuation flag 202q set to ON in the process of S911 is a structure for temporarily storing whether or not the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is executed is a time saving state. The fluctuation of the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state and is referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Thereby, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be varied depending on which game state the normal symbol variation (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640a are.

In this embodiment, the gaming state at the start (execution) timing of normal symbol variation (lottery) is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may also be used. For example, when it is determined that the drawing result of a normal symbol is a win, the gaming state at the time when the drawing of the normal symbol was executed is stored in the gaming state storage means that can always store the currently set gaming state. It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means is provided to always remember the period in which the normal state is set, and the period stored in that means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the drawing of the normal symbol is carried out. By doing so, it may be configured such that the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is performed can be determined. In other words, it is sufficient to have a configuration that includes a storage device that can store the currently set gaming state and a storage device that can store at least the gaming state that was set at a predetermined timing in the past.

On the other hand, in the process of S902, if it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S902: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S913). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S910 or the process of S911 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S913, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S913: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S913, if it is determined that the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S913: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S914). In the process of S914, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S907, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S908, the "x" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to In addition, the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "x") indicating that the second symbol is changing is lit. (confirmed display). Thereby, the player can easily understand that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S914, when the second symbol display update process (S1508 of FIG. 51) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next, the change in the second symbol display device 83 The display ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S907 or S908.

When the process of S914 is finished, next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result (this time) of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 45, S106) (lottery result) is a normal symbol win (S915). If it is determined that the current lottery result is an outlier of the normal symbols (S915: No), the present process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S915: Yes), then it is determined whether the regular symbol short fluctuation flag 203q is set on (S916).

In the process of S916, if it is determined that the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the current regular symbol lottery (fluctuation) was started is If it is determined that it is in the normal state (S916: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of openings is set to 1 (S921), and the process moves to S920. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S916, if it is determined that the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203q is set to on, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the current regular symbol lottery (variation) is started is the time short state. If so (S916: Yes), the normal figure/short fluctuation flag 203q is set to OFF (S917), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (time saving) (S918).

In the process of S918, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a time saving state (S918: No), the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) was started is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1. (S921), and the process moves to S920.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a time saving state (S918: Yes), the timing at which the current normal symbol lottery (variation) was started and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 640a) Since the timing for setting the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 2 (the timing for setting the electric accessory 640a). (S919), and the process moves to S920.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is executed and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set, which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, are set. Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player, so for example, if the normal symbol lottery ( Even if the time-saving state is set before the normal symbol's variation time (30 seconds) ends after the variation) is executed and the winning occurs, the long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 640a. Nothing happens. Similarly, if a player wins in a normal symbol variation (lottery) executed while the time saving state is set, and the normal state is set as the gaming state until the normal symbol variation stops. Even in this case, the long release of the electric accessory 640a is never set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous benefit (long opening of the electric accessory 640a) from being provided to the player.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the electric accessory 640a from being opened long when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is easy to draw a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to a time saving state. In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state is determined at the timing when the drawing (variation) of normal symbols is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set, and the gaming state set at each timing is determined. Although the above-mentioned configuration is used as a configuration for setting the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the above, other configurations may be used.

For example, an opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player (S921 in FIG. 45 It may be configured such that the opening operation set in step S919 of FIG. 45 is set (opening operation set in S919 of FIG. 45) is set (short opening is set), and the long opening (opening operation set in S919 of FIG. 45) is set in other states. With this configuration, a benefit (long release) advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations executed before and after the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, compared to the case where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is extremely short from "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and furthermore. Since the release period of the second winning hole 640 becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. In addition, in this embodiment, since the time saving state is configured to end when a jackpot game is executed, a normal state is entered during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when a small win game is executed, the time saving state is configured to be set continuously unless the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the small winning game is executed while the time saving state is set. During the winning game, there is a period in which the V winning device 650 opens in the small winning game and the electric accessory 640a opens for a long time, and the ball enters multiple winning holes (V winning hole 650a, second ball entrance 640). This will be a specific period during which it will be easier to enter the ball.

Using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. It is preferable to configure the ball so that it enters two winning holes (V winning device 650a, second ball entering hole 640), thereby increasing the number of prize balls that can be won during the small winning game. , it becomes possible to provide more advantageous benefits to players.

Returning to FIG. 45, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S920, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set (S920), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S920, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1506) of the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S921 or the process of S919 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 46, S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S1001). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (S101). Note that the content of this detection is similar to the process of S701 of the above-mentioned starting winning process (see FIG. 43), so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Then, it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1001: Yes), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing the normal symbol (S1002), If it is determined that the display mode of the 2-symbol display device 83 is normally changing symbols (S1002: Yes), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, if it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not in the normal symbol fluctuation state (S1002: No), it is determined whether the current state is in the normal symbol winning state (S1002: No). S1003). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol is being hit (S1003: Yes), this process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that the normal symbol is not hit (S1003: No), it is the timing when a new normal symbol variation (execution) can be drawn, so it is updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (S101). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S1004). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V entrance passage process (S108), it is first determined whether the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1101). In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is not on (S1101: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is on (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning a prize opening 650a is in the open period (S1102).

In the process of S1102, if it is determined that the V winning a prize opening 650a is in the open period (S1102: Yes), a V entrance passing command is set (S1103), and this process ends. The V entrance passing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio output during the external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the V-entrance passing command, it counts the balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V-entrance passing. Thereby, it is possible to perform a performance during a small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V-winning slot 650a is not in the open period (S1102: No), this is a case where a ball enters the V-winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is sent. Set (S1104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1105), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the V passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S109). This V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether the V passing flag 203j is on (S1201). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203j is on (S1201: Yes), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203j is not on (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not V passing is present (S1202). That is, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S1202, if it is determined that V does not pass (S1202: No), this process is directly ended.

In the process of S1202, if it is determined that there is a V passage (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the V passage is valid (S1203). If it is determined that the V passing valid period is in effect (S1203: Yes), the V passing jackpot type value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h is acquired (S1204), and the acquired V passing jackpot type is The V flag 203i indicating this is set on (S1205). Then, a V passing command is set (S1206).

Next, the V passing flag 203j is set on (S1207). Thereafter, the time saving counter 203k is set to 0 (S1208), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if it is determined that the V passing validity period is not in effect (S1203: No), an error command is set (S1209), and this process ends. If the game ball passes the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 when the V passage is not valid, it is considered that the ball has been illegally won to the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1209, error output is executed, and fraudulent activity can be discovered.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1301), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, initial settings are first performed upon power-on (S1401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S1402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1403).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1404), and if it is turned on (S1404: Yes), the process moves to S1415. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405), and if it is not stored (S1405: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S1415 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1405: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1406), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1407: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S1415 in such a case. Note that, as described later in the process of S1515 in FIG. 51, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1415, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1416, S1417).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417) is executed. In addition, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1416, S1417) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1416, S1417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1417). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S1410.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1404: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1405: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1407: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power outage is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1408). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1410, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, the value of the time saving counter 203k is read (S1411), and a status command is set based on the read value (S1412). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S1413). Thereafter, interrupts are permitted (S1414), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1501 to S1508 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec period, and the counter update process of S1511 and S1512 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing (see FIG. 51), first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing to be sent to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1501). Specifically, it is determined whether there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 39) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S1501), a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command (S1602), round number command (S1607), and ending command set in the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1611). In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S1502) is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1503), and then, if the special symbol is in a jackpot state, a jackpot effect is executed. Or, execute jackpot control processing to open or close the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) (S1504). . In the jackpot control process (S1504), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the corresponding winning hole ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V It is determined whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the V-winning port 650a) of the winning device 650. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. Opening and closing of the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, when there is a small hit state with a special symbol, various effects are executed according to the small hit, and the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole of the V winning device 650) is executed. 650a) is executed (S1505). In the small winning control process (S1505), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning hole ( The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V It is determined whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the V-winning port 650a) of the winning device 650. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In addition, in this embodiment, although the small hit control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S1506). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S920 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S919 or the process of S921 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b (see FIG. 2) (S1507). In the first symbol display update process (S1507), when a variation pattern is set by the process of S306, S310, or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the first symbol display update process changes the variation display according to the variation pattern. 1 starts on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time has elapsed, the red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main process (see FIG. 51) is executed every 4 msec, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process (S1507), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of S306, S310, or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) ends, the first symbol display update process (S1507) The variable display being executed on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is finished, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device 83 (S1508). In the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation time is changed in the second symbol display device 83. Start displaying. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process (S1508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S914 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the second symbol display device 83 The fluctuating display being executed is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S907 or S908 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). Displays stoppage (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1509: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1510). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1510: Yes), the process moves to S1501, and each process from S1501 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S1510: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1511, S1512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1511). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1502 (S1512).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1501 to S1508 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time (S1511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1509, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1509: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 49 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1513 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1513), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1515), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1516), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1509 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the game status performed in S1501 to S1508, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1511 and S1512 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process of S1501. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1501, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S1401). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1501. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52, the jackpot control process (S1504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1504). This jackpot control process (S1504) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot and the corresponding winning opening. This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 52, S1504), first, it is determined whether it is the special symbol jackpot start timing (S1601). Specifically, this determination is made by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203c. This jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S216) when the jackpot start is set by the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). In the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203c is on) (S1601: Yes), an opening command is set (S1602), and then the jackpot start flag is set. 203c is set to off (S1603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203c is set to OFF) (S1601: No), then the current jackpot is being hit. (S1604). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes the period during a predetermined time period after the end of the jackpot game, and corresponds to the period during which the above-mentioned jackpot flag 203d is set to ON. In the process of S1604, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is off) (S1604: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1604, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (the jackpot flag 203d is set on) (S1604: Yes), various processes are executed at multiple timings during the jackpot. Determination processing (S1605 to S1612) is executed to determine whether it is the timing to execute.

In the process of S1604, if it is determined that the current state is a jackpot (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of a new round (S1605). In the process of S1605, it is determined whether the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. In the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V The V-winning port 650a) of the winning device 650 is opened (S1606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1607). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp during external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if the jackpot continues (for example, if the number of special symbol changes (number of drawings) during multiple jackpot games is less than 50, or if there is a break between jackpot games) When the game is executed (during the period in which the time saving state is repeatedly set), the number of rounds of the jackpot game that is continuously executed is cumulatively displayed on the audio lamp control device 113 side. . In other words, the audio ramp control device 113 is a period setting unit that sets a period (continuous winning period) during which it is determined that a jackpot is continuously being executed based on the status command and fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. If a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the number of rounds (rounds) of the new jackpot game is added to the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the previously executed jackpot game. A round number accumulating means for adding up the number of rounds) and a round number command for display according to the cumulative number of rounds accumulated by the round number accumulating means are transmitted to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game and display control means for displaying the cumulative number of rounds. This allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, thereby increasing the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1605: No), next, the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V It is determined whether the conditions for closing the prize opening 650a) are satisfied (S1608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls in total) win in the winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1608, if it is determined that the closing condition for the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1608: Yes), the corresponding winning hole is closed. The opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing conditions for the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) are not satisfied (S1608: No), then: It is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610). The starting timing of the ending performance is the end of the 15th round (the final round game preset in this jackpot game), the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in this embodiment, the ball is thrown). 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. The start timing and end timing of this ending effect, which will be described later, are also determined based on an opening scenario (see S214 in FIG. 38) that is set when a jackpot is won.

In the process of S1610, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: Yes), an ending command is set (S1611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1610, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1610: No), in the process of S1612, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612). In the process of S1612, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1612, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether the jackpot type being executed is jackpot A to jackpot D (S1613). In the process of S1613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the set jackpot type is read out.

Next, based on the read jackpot type, a corresponding time saving end condition is set using the time saving granting table 202e (S1614). Specifically, if the jackpot type is jackpot A (jackpot with 15R time saving) or jackpot B (jackpot with 5R time saving), set 100 to the time saving middle counter 203k, set 1 to the small win A counter 203m, and set 1 to the small win B counter. 203n is set to 3, and small hit C counter p is set to 5. In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot D (jackpot with 15R time saving), 100 is set to the time saving middle counter 203k, 2 is set to the small winning A counter 203m, 10 is set to the small winning B counter 203n, and 50 is set to the small winning C counter p. Set each.

In addition, if the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R no time saving jackpot), it is a jackpot type where the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, so the time saving medium counter 203k, small winning A counter 203m, small winning B counter 203n, small winning. The configuration is such that no value (time saving termination condition) is set for each of the C counters p. After completing the process of S1614 described above, next, a time saving setting information command is set to indicate information corresponding to the values of various counters indicating the time saving end conditions set in the process of S1614 (S1615).

The time saving setting information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time-saving setting information command, it sets time-saving information indicating the time-saving end conditions of the current time-saving state in the time-saving information update area 223g and the temporary time-saving information update area 223i (see S2603 in FIG. 60). . Based on the time-saving information set here and the update information of the time-saving state that is updated based on changes in special symbols (lottery), the remaining number of time-saving states (remaining conditions) is determined, and based on the remaining number of times, Various performance modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After completing the process of S1615, next, a state command corresponding to the gaming state to be set after the jackpot is set (S1616), an end of the jackpot is set (S1617), and the jackpot flag 203d is set to off (S1618). ), this process ends.

As described above, this embodiment is configured so that the end conditions for the time saving state can be set differently depending on the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won. Furthermore, in this embodiment, compared to the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol is established as the end condition for the time-saving state (time-saving end condition). The configuration is such that difficult time-saving termination conditions are set.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with added value when winning one type instead of two types during a right-handed game while the time saving state is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that are set when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol are configured so that the same time-saving ending conditions are set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, a time-saving ending condition may be set that is more difficult to satisfy when the jackpot type is jackpot A. Furthermore, some of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions may be set so that jackpot A is more likely to be achieved, and others may be set so that jackpot B is more likely to be achieved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 21(d), in this embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a variation number end condition regarding the number of changes of the special symbol (an end condition based on the value of the time saving counter 203k) The system is configured to set conditions for ending the number of winnings (ending conditions based on the value of each small winning counter) regarding the number of winnings of small winnings as a result of the special symbol lottery.

In addition, the winning count ending condition is configured to be set in correspondence with a plurality of small winning types set at the time of winning a small winning. With this configuration, the player can be informed of which small winning type the small winning game will be executed until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times), and how much longer the small winning game will be executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the number of variations of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is set to "100 times" as the variation frequency ending condition, but the number of variations varies depending on the jackpot type. A condition for ending the number of fluctuations may be set. In addition, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is established when a first special symbol fluctuation measuring means that measures only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is provided, and the measurement result of the first special symbol fluctuation measuring means becomes a predetermined result. The first special symbol fluctuation end condition is established when a second special symbol fluctuation measuring means is provided that measures only the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the measurement result of the second special symbol fluctuation measuring means is a predetermined result. A second special symbol variation end condition may be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the winning count ending condition, an ending condition is set based on the measurement results of the counters (small winning A counter 203m, small winning B counter 203n, small winning C counter 203p) corresponding to each small winning type. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set a time-saving ending condition that is satisfied simply based on the sum of the number of small winnings, or to set multiple (3 or more) small winning types. Of these, a means is provided for summing up and measuring the number of times small winning games in which a predetermined number (two) of small winning types are set are executed, and an ending condition is set based on the measurement result of the means. You may do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time saving end condition is set for all of the small winning types that can be set when winning a small winning, but this is not limited to this, and the number of times to set when winning a small winning is set. It may be configured such that the small winning type Z can be set as the small winning type for which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied even if the small winning type Z is set. Thereby, even if the player realizes that he has won a small win during the time saving state, it is difficult to determine whether the time saving state is nearing the end due to the current small win.

In addition, when providing the above-mentioned small winning type Z, it is preferable to perform a small winning game having the same content as the small winning game for which the winning number ending condition is set. With this configuration, even if the game content of the small winning game executed during the time saving state is identified, it is difficult to determine whether the current small winning game is approaching the end of the time saving state. .

In this way, by determining that a small win has been won, or by determining the game content of a small win game that is executed based on winning a small win, in other words, the game of the pachinko machine 10 is By distinguishing the content, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the time saving state (whether it is nearing the end or not), so it is difficult to grasp the progress of the time saving state (whether it is nearing the end or not). This can arouse strong interest in players. In addition, the content of the control of the performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53, the small hit control process (S1505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1505). This small hit control process (S1505) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 51), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the small win and takes actions. This is a process for opening or closing the winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process (FIG. 53, S1505), first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701). Specifically, if the small winning start flag 203f is set to ON by the process of S404 of the small winning start setting process (see FIG. 40), it is determined that the small winning of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1701, when a small hit of the special symbol is started (S1701: Yes), an opening command is set (S1702). Then, the small hit start flag 203f is set to OFF (S1703), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, if the small winning of the special symbol is not started (S1701: No), it is determined whether the small winning of the special symbol is in progress (S1704). During a small hit with a special symbol, a small win with a special symbol is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a small win game with a special symbol); This includes during the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol winning game. The determination in S1704 is made by analyzing whether the medium-small hit flag 303g is set to on. In the process of S1704, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the middle of a small hit (S1704: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1704, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the midst of a small hit (S1704: Yes), the process of S1705 is executed. In the process of S1705, it is determined whether it is V winning opening opening timing (S1705). In the process of S1705, if it is determined that it is the timing to open the V winning hole (S1705: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202g ( S1706), it is determined whether this is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707).

In the process of S1707, if it is determined that this is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that this is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1707: Yes), then in the process of S1708 it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to on. (S1708), if it is determined that it is not on (off) (S1708: No), the small winning type stored in the small winning type storage area 203e is read (S1709), and then the read small winning An instruction command corresponding to the type is set (S1710).

The instruction commands set in the process of S1710 include, for example, a small win in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during a small win game as a small win type (for example, small win A), and a small win in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during a small win game; An instruction command is set for changing the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 depending on small wins that are difficult to pass through the area (for example, small wins B and C).

Specifically, when small win A, which is easy to win in two types, is set as the small win type during a small win game, a display mode for forcing the player to play a right-handed game (see Fig. 16(a)) is set, and thereafter, when the ball passes through a specific area, a display format (see FIG. 16(b)) indicating that the ball has successfully won the second type is displayed. ing. In this way, by varying the contents of the instruction command set depending on the degree of expectation for the ball to pass through a specific area in the small winning game being executed, a performance that does not feel strange to the player is provided. can do.

Returning to FIG. 53, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1711, if it is determined that the current time is not the closing timing of the V winning a prize opening 650a (S1711: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending performance (S1713). In the process of S1713, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1713: Yes), an ending command is set (S1714), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S1501) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1713, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1713: No), in the process of S1715, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715). In the process of S1715, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1715, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to on (S1716), and if it is determined that it is set to on. (S1716: Yes), sets an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203i (S1717), sets the jackpot start flag 203c and jackpot middle flag 203d to ON (S1718), and sets the V flag 203i. OFF (S1719), V passing flag 203j is set OFF (S1720), small hit medium flag 203g is set OFF (S171721), and this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 63. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 54, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in power-off processing (S2118 in Figure 55). It is determined whether or not the process was started during execution (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 55, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (S2115 in FIG. 55: Yes), it executes the power-off process in S2118. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2062 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S2118 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2063).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2066. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2063: Yes), the process moves to S2064 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2063: No), the process moves to S2068.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2063: Yes), and the process moves to S2064. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and after the execution of the power-off process in S2118 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2063: No), and the process moves to S2068.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2062: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2118, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2064 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2064, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2064). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S2066). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2065: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2067), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the lamp display device 227. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You may also do so.

In the process of S2068, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S2068). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2118 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 55). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2118 is executed, so the reason why the process in S2068 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2068: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S2069), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2070), the interrupt Permission is set (S2071) and the process moves to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S2068 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S2064 to S2066 and then S2068. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2068: No), S2069, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S2070, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2070), interrupt permission is set. (S2071), and moves to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S2069 is skipped is because if the process has reached S2068 from S2064 through the process in S2068, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2064. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the working area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or the current processing in S2101 was executed (S2101), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process moves to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed or not, whereas S2102 to S2112 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S2113 and the variable display setting process in S2114 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S2114 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S2103 to S2112 are sent to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the lamp display device 227 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108, which will be described later (S2103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S2104). . The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the pending number display update process, a process is performed in which a pending lamp (not shown) is lit according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter referred to as frame buttons 22) operated by the player to enhance the production effect is pressed, and This is a process for setting a corresponding effect to be performed when the input of 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal performance execution management process (S2110), various counter update processes (S2111) are executed. This various counter updating process is a process for updating the values of a plurality of counters included in the effect counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in this embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every millisecond in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113. Here, a method of updating the plurality of counters included in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained.

In this embodiment, when setting the production mode of each production displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the configuration is such that the values of a plurality of counters are referred to. In such a configuration, for example, if the value of all counters is updated by 1 every time various counter update processing (S2111) is executed, that is, if the update method of each counter is unified, the update of each counter The updated values of each counter are configured so as not to be synchronized, since this would cause the problem that randomness cannot be imparted to the effect mode that is set.

After completing the various counter update processes (S2111), next, the effect update process (S2112) is executed. This performance update process (S2112) is for performing processing for changing the content of the currently executed performance (already set variable display) during performance execution.

After the effect update process (S2112), a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S2113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the process moves to S2114. In the process of S2114, a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

When the variable display setting process (S2114) is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off process is executed (S2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2119), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .

In the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and then sent to the main controller 110. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203). Other processes corresponding to the command are executed (S2217), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 62) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) to be described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). When the held ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 (special The number of pending times N1) of the variable display in the symbol is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 (S2208). In addition, in the process of S2208, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After completing the process in S2208, the process in S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or when a special symbol lottery is held. Therefore, each time a starting prize is detected or each time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol of the main controller 110 by the process of S2208. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., when a starting prize is detected. When a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. Incidentally, when the process of S2208 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2207, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S2207: No), then it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), winning information related processing is executed (S2210). Next, the process of S2117 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the winning information related process (S2210) will be explained with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information related processing (S2210). This winning information related process (S2210) determines whether or not to execute a temporary winning effect based on the winning information (variation type) included in the winning information command received this time and the current gaming situation. The processing for this is executed.

When the winning information related process (S2210) is executed, first, the information stored in the gaming state storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 is read out (S2301). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state read in the process of S2301 is in the time saving mode (S2302), and if it is determined that the playing state is in the time saving mode (S2302: Yes), then the tentative hit determination flag 223h is turned on. It is determined whether there is one (S2303). In the process of S2303, if it is determined that the temporary hit determination flag 223h is not on (that is, it is off) (S2303: No), the process moves to the process of S2304, and it is determined whether the temporary time saving end flag 223j is on. (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the temporary time saving end flag 223j is not on (off) (S2304: No), the process moves to S2305, and the winning information received from the main controller 110 this time is It is determined whether there is information (S2305).

On the other hand, in the process of S2303 described above, if it is determined that the temporary hit determination flag 223h is on (S2303: Yes), or if it is determined that the temporary time saving end flag 223j is on in the process of S2304 (S2304: If Yes), the process skips the process of determining whether or not to execute the tentative winning effect and moves to the process of S2311, which will be described later.

In this way, in this embodiment, in the winning information related process (S2211), the provisional winning effect can be executed only when the read gaming state is in the time saving mode. Therefore, the temporary winning performance can be executed only when the time is shortened, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, if the temporary hit determination flag 223h is on, that is, if a temporary winning effect has already been executed, a new temporary winning effect is not set. It can be provided to players until the end.

Next, a description will be given of the process (S2305 to S2311) for setting a tentative winning effect. In the process of S2305, it is determined whether there is winning information in the winning information received from the main control device 110 this time (S2305). If it is determined that the received winning information is a win (S2305: Yes), the temporary win determination flag 223h is set on (S2306), and the information in the temporary time saving information update area 223i is updated (S2307). On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information is not winning information (S2305: No), the process of S2306 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2307.

Next, it is determined whether the information updated in the process of S2307 is a time-saving termination condition (S2308). If it is determined that the time saving end condition is met (S2308: Yes), the temporary time saving end flag 223j is set to ON (S2309). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving termination condition is not met (S2308: No), the process of S2309 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2310, which will be described later. Next, a winning information command for display corresponding to the information in the temporary time saving information update area 223i is set (S2311), information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S2311), and the main processing end. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the read gaming state is not in the time saving mode (S2302: No), a winning information command for display corresponding to the winning information received this time is set (S2312), and the above-mentioned S2311 Execute the process and end this process.

Returning to FIG. 56, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2209, if a winning information command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2211). If a win-related command is received (S22111: Yes), a win-related process (S2212) is executed, the process of S2217 described above is executed, and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the contents of the winning related process (S2212) will be explained with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related process (S2212). The win-related process (S2212) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game or a small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. When a jackpot or small jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the win-related process (S2212 in FIG. 58), first, it is determined whether the win-related command received in the command determination process (S2113) is a jackpot start command (S2401). When the jackpot start command is received (S2401: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S2402), the provisional hit determination flag 223h is set to OFF (S2403), and this process is ended. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 56). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect that suggests the start of a jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2401: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S2404). If the number of rounds command is received (S2404: Yes), a number of rounds command for display is set based on the number of rounds (S2405), and this process ends. Note that in this embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 transmits information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, the voice lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided that accumulates the number of received round update commands. The configuration may be such that the number is calculated and a display round number command is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2404, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2404: No), it is determined whether the jackpot end command has been received (S2406). When the jackpot end command is received (S2406: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S2407), and the jackpot end process (S2408) is executed. Details of the jackpot end process (S2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

On the other hand, in the process of S2406, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S2406: No), it is determined whether the small win start command has been received (S2409). When the small winning start command is received (S2409: Yes), a small winning start command for display is set (S2410), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small winning start command has not been received (S2409: No), it is determined whether the small winning ending command has been received (S2411). When the small winning end command is received (S2411: Yes), a small winning ending command for display is set (S2412), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2411, if it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2411: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passage command has been received (S2413). If the V entrance passage command is received (S2413: Yes), a display V entrance passage command is set (S2414), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2413, if it is determined that the V entrance passing command has not been received (S2413: No), it is determined whether the V passing command has been received (S2415). If the V pass command is received (S2415: Yes), a display V effect command is set to indicate the effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 (S2416), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S2415, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (S2415: No), it is determined whether or not an instruction command has been received (S2417). If an instruction command is received (S2417: Yes), a display instruction command is set (S2418), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2417, if it is determined that the instruction command has not been received (S2417: No), this process is directly ended.

This embodiment is configured to execute a small winning game in which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened 12 times during the small winning game, and at the fifth or tenth opening timing, the V switch 650e3 is opened. The configuration is such that an instruction command is output when the ball is not detected by the ball (see S1609 in FIG. 54). If it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an emphasis guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win the ball. Set the display instruction command to display.

Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball while the highlighted guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16(b), an achievement display mode is displayed to congratulate the player. Set the command. In other words, in this embodiment, if a small winning game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is configured to reliably win in the V winning device 650 by playing a right-handed game. In addition, the ball won in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 in which the V switch 650e3 is provided. Despite this configuration, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball at the fifth opening timing of the opening/closing door 650f1, the third symbol will be displayed when the small winning game is started. The player is playing the left-handed game without noticing the display in the guidance display area Dm2 (see FIG. 10(a)) of the display device 81 that guides the player to play right-handed. Alternatively, it is possible that the player has stopped playing.

In such a case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play the right-handed game by changing the display that guides the right-handed game displayed in the guide display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Furthermore, as the timing for displaying the highlighted guidance display mode (see FIG. 16(a)), if a right-handed game is performed after the highlighted guidance display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the right-handed game The timing is such that the fired ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who has played a right-handed game in accordance with the display of the highlighted guide display mode is unable to cause the ball to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2 during a small winning game.

Here, the jackpot end process (S2408), which is one process in the win-related process (S2212), will be explained with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2408).

In the jackpot end process (S2408 in FIG. 59), first, the information stored in the gaming state storage area 223f is read out (S2501). Next, it is determined whether the information read in the process of S2501 indicates a time saving state (S2502). If it is determined that the read information is in a time saving state (S2502: Yes), all information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S2503). On the other hand, in the process of S2502, if it is determined that the read information is not in a time-saving state (S2502: No), this process is directly ended.

After executing the process of S2503, next, in the process of S2503, it is determined whether there is any hit information in the read information (S2504). If it is determined that there is winning information (S2504: Yes), a consecutive winning command for display is set (S2505). Next, the tentative hit determination flag 223h is set to ON (S2506), a state display command for display is set (S2507), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2504, if it is determined that there is no winning information in the read state (S2504: No), a display winning information command corresponding to the read state is set (S2508), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 56, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that a winning-related command has not been received (S2211: No), then it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S2213). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S2214), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether a time saving related command has been received (S2215). If it is determined that a time saving related command has been received (S2215: Yes), a time saving update process (S2216) is executed and this process ends. Details of the time saving update process (S2216) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S2215, if it is determined that a command related to time saving has not been received (S2215: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S2217), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the time saving update process (S2216), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113), will be explained with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process (S2216).

In the time saving update process (S2216), first, the time saving related information received this time is analyzed (S2601). Next, in the process of S2601, it is determined whether the analyzed time saving related information is time saving setting information (S2602). If it is determined that the time-saving related information is time-saving setting information (S2602: Yes), the time-saving information is set in the time-saving information update area 223g and the temporary time-saving information update area 223i (S2603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2602, if it is determined that the time saving related information is not time saving setting information (S2602: No), it is determined whether the time saving related information is variable information (S2604). When it is determined that the time-saving related information is variable information (S2604: Yes), the information in the time-saving information update area 223g is updated (S2605). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2606), and it is determined whether the time saving lower limit flag 223k provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2607). When it is determined that the time saving lower limit flag 223k is off (S2607: No), it is determined whether the remaining number of time saving times is less than 30 (S2608). If it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is less than 30 (S2608: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to ON (S2609). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2608 that the number of remaining time reductions is greater than 30 (S2608: No), this process ends. In addition, in the process of S2607, if it is determined that the time saving lower limit flag 223k is on (S2607: Yes), the processes of S2608 to S2609 are skipped and the process moves to the process of S2610, which will be described later.

Next, it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions is one (S2610). When it is determined that the remaining number of time reductions is one (S2610: Yes), the time reduction before end variation flag 223n is set to ON (S2611), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2610, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 1 (S2610: No), it is determined whether the remaining number of time reductions is 0 (S2612). When it is determined that the remaining number of time reductions is 0 (S2612: Yes), the time reduction lower limit flag 223k is set to OFF (S2613), and the time reduction before end fluctuation flag 223n is set to OFF (S2614). Next, the temporary time saving end flag 223j is set to OFF (S2615), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2612, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is not 0 (S2612: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2604, if it is determined that the time saving related information is not variable information (S2604: No), it is determined whether the time saving related information is small winning information (S2616). If it is determined that the time-saving related information is small win information (S2616: Yes), small win related update processing (S2617) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2616, when it is determined that the time-saving related information is not small winning information (S2616: No), this process is directly ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 61, the small hit related update process (S2617) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related update process (S2617).

In the small hit related update process (S2617 in FIG. 61), first, the information in the time saving information update area 223g is updated (S2701). Next, the updated information is analyzed (S2702), and it is determined whether the quasi-end condition flag 223m is on (S2703). If it is determined that the quasi-termination condition flag 223m is off (S2703: No), it is determined whether the quasi-termination condition is satisfied (S2704). If it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied (S2704: Yes), the semi-termination condition flag 223m is set to ON (S2705), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the quasi-termination condition flag 223m is on (S2703: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S2704 that the quasi-termination condition is not satisfied (S2704: No), it is determined whether the termination condition is satisfied (S2706). If it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (S2706: Yes), the semi-end condition flag 223m is set to OFF (S2707), and then the time saving lower limit flag 223k is set to OFF (S2708). Next, the time saving end fluctuation flag 223n is set to OFF (S2709), the temporary time saving end flag 223j is set to OFF (S2710), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, if it is determined that the termination condition is not satisfied (S2706: No), this process is directly terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2801). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S2801: No), the process moves to S2807 because the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S2802), and then, in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 56), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S2802). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2803).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a production setting process is executed to set a production to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2804), and thereafter, a display variation is executed to notify the display control device 114. A pattern command is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type and the state display mode set in the effect setting process, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2805). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started. When the process of S2805 is finished, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2806), and the process moves to S2807.

Here, the contents of the effect setting process (S2804) executed in the process of S2804 will be explained with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S2804). This effect setting process (S2804) includes the winning information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57), and the variation pattern set in the current variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 62) when a temporary winning effect is set. This is a process for setting a tentative winning performance.

When the effect setting process (S2804) is executed, first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read out (S2901). Next, in the process of S2901, it is determined whether the read information is in a time saving state (S2902). If it is determined that the read information is not in a time saving state (S2902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read information is in a time saving state (S2902: Yes), it is determined whether the tentative hit determination flag 223h is on (S2903). If it is determined that the tentative hit determination flag 223h is on (S2903: Yes), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2903, if it is determined that the tentative hit determination flag 223h is not on (that is, off) (S2903: No), reading of information in the time saving information update area 223g is executed (S2904). . Next, it is determined whether the time saving before end variation flag 223n is on (S2905). If it is determined that the time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is off (S2905: No), the ROM 222 The status display mode is selected using the status display selection table 222b provided in (S2906). Next, a display command indicating the selected state display mode is set (S2908), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the time saving before end variation flag 223n is on (S2905: Yes), the final A status display mode is selected using the status display selection table (S2907). Next, the process of S2908 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 62, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is off (S2801: No), or after executing the process of S2806 described above, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807). . If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S2808), and the extracted stop type command is obtained (S2809). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the extracted stop type (S2810), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2807, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S2807: No), this process is directly ended.

<About the control process executed by the display control device in the first control process example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 81. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 64, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S4001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S4101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S4102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the command to be executed after this boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 64) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 64) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S4001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complex performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 65, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S4101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S4102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S4101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the steps S4102 and S4102 multiple times, the steps S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, upon starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 64. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S4003, the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S4004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S4004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 79(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S6302 in FIG. 79(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are images at power-on, are drawn. Command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 66(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 66(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), and the main controller 110 issues an instruction to start the variable performance through audio lamp control. If received via the device 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S4005, interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set in the process of S4006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 66(a). FIG. 66(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 66(b). FIG. 66(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 66(b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image (not shown) but the normal production. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S4302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75.

In the display setting process (S4303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S4304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S4303) or the simple display setting process (S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, various commands are sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the performance and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S4304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S4305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 38, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S4307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command judgment process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A to D, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss, chance win) is detected. ) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 32) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S4309) is executed, and the steps in S4304 are executed. Move to processing.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. First, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 67, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S4303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S4402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S4403).

Then, it is first determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4405), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S4405) will be described with reference to FIG. 68(a). FIG. 68(a) is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of S4501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S4501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S4505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4504, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, transfers data to the transfer data table buffer 233e through the process of S4502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data was set in the process of S4503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 81. In the process of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4406), If there is a display variation type command (S4406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S4407), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off, complete miss, or chance) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S4601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) is executed, and displays the stop type table in the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S4603), this stop type command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S4602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S4304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S4602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S4603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, but before drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is stored from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S4602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 67. In the process of S4406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4408), If there is an image change command (S4408: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S4409), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. 69(a). FIG. 69(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, a back image change flag is set to on (S4701), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S6303) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back face A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S4702), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S4701 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S4702. . If the identified back image type is back B, as described above, some of the image data corresponding to those back images are not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of back images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back side A or B should be displayed according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image determination flag set in S4702 is used to determine whether the back side image is to be displayed. The type of back image to be displayed at a time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 67. In the process of S4408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4410), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no error command. If (S4410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4802). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S4801, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S4802, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 67. In the process of S4410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and if there is a hit-related command, it is determined that there is no error command. If (S4412: Yes), the winning related command process is executed (S4413), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, details of the win-related command processing (S4413) will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing win-related command processing. This win-related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command, display round number command, and display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the winning related command processing (FIG. 70, S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined in the process of S4901 that there is a winning start command for display (S4901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S4902), and the process moves to S4903.

Here, details of the jackpot start command processing (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. 71(a). FIG. 71(a) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing (S4902). This jackpot start command process (S4902) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is a display jackpot start command in the win-related command process (FIG. 70), and the effect that suggests the start of a jackpot is This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S4902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). After that, time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5005), This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4901, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S4901: No), the process moves to S4903. After completing the processing in S4901 or S4902, it is determined whether there is a display round number command (S4903). In the process of S4903, if it is determined that there is a round number command for display, the round number command process is executed (S4904), and the process moves to S4905.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S4904) will be described with reference to FIG. 71(b). FIG. 71(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S4904). This round number command processing (S4904) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a display round number command has been received in the winning related command processing (FIG. 70), and the round number during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying an effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the game is played.

In the round number command processing (S4904), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5105), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S4903: No), the process moves to S4905. After completing the process of S4903 or S4904, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S4905). In the process of S4905, if it is determined that there is a display jackpot end command (S4905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S4906), and the process moves to S4907.

Here, details of the jackpot end command processing (S4906) will be explained with reference to FIG. 72(a). FIG. 72(a) is a flowchart showing jackpot end command processing (S4906). This jackpot end command process (S4906) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a jackpot end command has been received in the win-related command determination process (FIG. 70), and the effect that suggests the end of the jackpot game is This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command processing (S4906), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5203). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5205), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4905, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S4905: No), the process moves to S4907. After completing the process of S4905 or S4906, it is determined whether there is a small winning start command for display (S4907). In the process of S4907, if it is determined that there is a display small win start command (S4907: Yes), the small win start command process is executed (S4908), and the process moves to S4909.

Here, details of the small hit start command processing (S4908) will be explained with reference to FIG. 72(b). This small win start command process (S4908) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a small win start command has been received in the win related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and it suggests the start of a small win game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small win start command processing (S4908), first, a small win start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small winning start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demo display flag and confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5305). , this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4907, if it is determined that there is no small winning start command for display (S4907: No), the process moves to S4909. When the process of S4907 or S4908 is finished, it is determined whether there is a small winning end command for display (S4909). In the process of S4909, if it is determined that there is a small hit end command (S4909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S4910), and the process moves to S4911.

Here, details of the small hit end command processing (S4910) will be explained with reference to FIG. 73(a). This small winning end command process (S4910) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a small winning ending command has been received in the winning related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and it suggests the end of the small winning game. This is a process for displaying an effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small win end command processing (S4910), first, a small win end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small winning end display data table (S5403). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5405), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4909, if it is determined that there is no small winning end command for display (S4909: No), the process moves to S4911. After completing the processing in S4909 or S4910, it is determined whether there is a display V entrance passage command (S4911). In the process of S4911, if it is determined that there is a V entrance passage command (S4911: Yes), the V entrance passage command process is executed (S4912), and the process moves to S4913.

Here, details of the V entrance passage command processing (S4912) will be described with reference to FIG. 73(b). This V entrance passage command processing (S4912) is a process executed when it is determined that a V entrance passage command has been received in the winning related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the switch (V switch) 650e3.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S4912), first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passage command (S4911: No), the process moves to S4913. After completing the process of S4911 or S4912, it is determined whether there is a display V effect command (S4913). In the process of S4913, if it is determined that there is a V effect command (S4913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S4914), and the process moves to S4915.

Here, details of the V effect command processing (S4914) will be explained with reference to FIG. 74(a). This V effect command processing (S4914) is a process executed when it is determined that a V effect command has been received in the winning related command determination process (see FIG. 70), and there is a high probability that a jackpot game will be awarded. This is a process for displaying an effect suggesting this on the third symbol display device 81.

In the V effect command processing (S4914), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S5603). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5605), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 70, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4913, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S4913: No), the process moves to S4915. After completing the processing in S4913 or S4914, it is determined whether there is a display instruction command (S4915). In the process of S4915, if it is determined that there is an instruction command (S4915: Yes), the instruction command process is executed (S4916), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4915, if it is determined that there is no display instruction command (S4915: No), this process ends.

The details of the instruction command processing (S4916) will now be described with reference to FIG. 74(b). This instruction command processing (S4916) is a process that is executed when it is determined that an instruction command has been received in the winning related command determination processing (see FIG. 70), and indicates that the probability of a jackpot game being awarded is high. This is a process for displaying a suggested effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the instruction command processing (S4916), first, an instruction effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5651). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5652), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the instruction performance display data table (S5653). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5654), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5655), and this process ends.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 67. In the process of S4412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether there are various production-related commands corresponding to the depression of the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands. (S4414), and if there are various production-related commands (S4414: Yes), production-related command processing is executed (S4415), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, details of the production-related command processing (S4415) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing production-related command processing. This production-related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to various production-related commands received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the production-related command processing (S4415), first, a production display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the effect display data table (S5703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S5705), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4414, if it is determined that there are no various production-related commands (S4414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the process returns to S4401.

In the process of S4401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes). ), the processes of S4402 to S4416 are executed again. Then, the processes of S4401 to S4416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S4401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S4309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (see Figure 32), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type commands are extracted and the processing corresponding to each command, that is, the variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 68(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 68(b)), is executed. Regarding the command, the process is performed to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 68(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S4501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S6001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S6001: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S6002 to S6004 and moves to the process S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S6002), S6003 to S6004 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S6003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S6004).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6101).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, information necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. After the warning image setting process (S6004) or in the process of S6003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6003: No), then the process moves to S6005.

In S6005, pointer update processing is executed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be explained with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S6202). As a result, if the information is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6203), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S6203: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6205), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S6206), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6202: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In task processing, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S6006, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, rotation angle, etc.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the presentation time of the presentation corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S6009).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S6009: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S6010), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6011). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6012), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S6014), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Incidentally, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S4304), until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S6015, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S6016). If the demo display flag is off (S6016: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S6017), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6018). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S6021), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S6016, if the demo display flag is on (S6016: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process will end. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S4309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 66(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the variation effect using the power-on variation image has ended, for a predetermined period of time, the power-on variation image (Fig. A process is performed in which a display data table that specifies that the image (not shown) is to be stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. First, FIG. 79(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S6302), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6301: No), all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 79(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S6401), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S6401: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S6402). In the process of S6402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not finished (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6402: Yes), the process moves to S6403. Also, as a result of the process in S6401, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

In the process of S6403, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6403), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S6403: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S6403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 66(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 67 to 75) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 76 to 78) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 80) (see S6301: No in FIG. 79(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S6501). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S6502), and if it is transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6503), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Further, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6502: No), the process of S6503 and S6504 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not finished (S6506: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6506: Yes), the process moves to S6507. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S6505, if an image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S6505: No), the process proceeds to S6507.

In the process of S6507, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on (S6507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6507: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S6509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), there is no image data to start transferring, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S6510), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S6511). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally (S6512), and proceeds to the process of S6513.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S6511, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is directly ended.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The determination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the processing in S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6513, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6514, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and this normal image transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer setting process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image will be changed. Among the image data used in the video RAM 235, image data that is not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), a drawing list shown in FIG. 36 is generated (S6601). That is, in the process of S6601, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S4305), the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored (storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as the drawing target buffer information, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1; includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. I can do it.

In the drawing process, after the process of S6602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S6603). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 66(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

As explained above, in the first embodiment, the time-saving termination condition for ending the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is set when the player wins a jackpot (wins a symbol or wins two types). The time-saving end condition (special prize end condition) that is set when the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (change end condition) Since it is configured so that it is possible to set a time-saving end condition (win-time end condition) that is set when the number of wins reaches a predetermined number, the period during which the time-saving state continues to be set (time-saving end condition) is set. This makes it difficult for the player to easily predict the timing at which a state ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the condition for ending the number of winnings described above is configured to be satisfied when a small win is won multiple times. Will the time-saving state end? It can make you think. In addition, in this embodiment, when a small win is won, it is possible to set multiple small win types, and as the multiple small win types, there is a small win type that sets a winning number ending condition, and a winning number ending condition. There is a small winning type that does not have a setting. This makes it difficult to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends based on the small winning game executed during the time saving state.

As mentioned above, when setting a small win type that sets a winning number ending condition and a small winning type that does not set a winning number ending condition, the small winning game to be executed (opening operation of the V winning device 650) For the same content (same concept that includes errors that cannot be discerned by players), we will set a small win type that sets a winning number ending condition and a small winning type that does not set a winning number ending condition. It is best to configure it as follows. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a plurality of small winning types can be set for setting the winning number ending condition, and the number of winnings ending conditions is configured to be different for each small winning type. are doing. With this configuration, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be predicted by determining the content of the small winning game executed during the time saving state.

In the first embodiment described above, it is configured such that a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) that is more likely to be executed when the time saving state is set, and the system corresponds to the small win that has been won. If the ball passes through a specific area during the small winning game (when the V switch 650e3 detects that the ball has flowed down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 that is opened by the small winning game), The configuration is such that a jackpot (two types of winning) is set after the small winning game ends.

In addition, the above-mentioned two-type winning setting means that in the first embodiment described above, the jackpot game based on the jackpot type (jackpot game content) that is set when a small win is won by a special symbol lottery is set as a small win. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during the game, but it is not limited to this. It may be configured such that a jackpot type corresponding to the type of small winning game (small winning type) is read out (drawn by lottery) and a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type read out (selected as a result of the lottery) is executed. , a jackpot is set on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game, and a jackpot game corresponding to a jackpot type selected based on the result of a predetermined lottery may be executed. .

In the first embodiment, which is configured such that two types of winnings can be set, a small winning game with different expectations for two types of winnings is set depending on the type of small winnings won, and for each small winning type. It is configured such that a time-saving end condition (a winning number end condition) is set. Furthermore, the smaller winning game (small winning type) in which two types of winnings are more likely to be set, the smaller the number of times the winning number ending condition is satisfied (number of winnings) becomes smaller.

By configuring this way, if you win a small win during the time saving state, you can play the small winning game while assuming both the possibility of winning the 2nd type win and the possibility that the time saving state will end. Since the game is executed, it is possible to enhance the gameplay in a time-saving state. Furthermore, the more the player wins a small winning game in which it is easy to obtain two types of winnings, the more easily the time saving state ends, so that the player can be motivated to play the small winning game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, among the types of small winnings, the condition for ending the number of wins is 1 for small winning A, which allows you to win two types of winnings if you continue to play the right-handed game. (with some exceptions). With this configuration, it is possible to give a large penalty only to players who do not play right-handed games continuously (players who do not play games appropriately), and also to save time for players. It is possible to have the player continue to play the right-handed game during the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the timing at which the time saving state ends is different depending on the type of the time saving end condition that has been established, and the time saving state is terminated during the period in which the small winning game is being executed. It is configured such that it is possible to set whether the time-saving state is continuing or when the time-saving state has ended. As a result, the game result can be changed depending on which time-saving ending condition is met, so players are forced to pay close attention to not only whether a time-saving ending condition is met but also the type of time-saving ending condition that is met. be able to.

Specifically, if a small hit is won in a special symbol variation in which the variation number end condition is met, the timing at which the variation of that special symbol stops (the timing at which the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed) When the time saving state ends and the small winning game is executed after that, the normal state will be entered.However, if the winning number end condition is met, the time saving state will be activated at the timing when the small winning game is executed. is terminated.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the V winning device 650, which is opened during the small winning game, is placed on the upstream side of the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a (the one that is fired in the right-handed game). The ball is disposed on the upstream side of the downstream path along which the ball flows down, and is configured to make it difficult for the ball to flow down to the through gate 67 or the electric accessory 640a side during a small winning game. Thereby, even if the timing at which the time saving state ends differs depending on the established time saving end condition, it is difficult for the player to notice, and therefore it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort given to the player.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, if the winning symbol is won and the time saving state is set at the time when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set, the time saving state will be activated during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Even if the opening operation is completed, the opening operation during the time saving state is configured to continue to be executed. Therefore, even if the timing at which the time-saving state ends differs depending on the established time-saving termination condition, it is difficult for the player to notice, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort given to the player.

Note that instead of making it difficult to understand that the timing at which the time-saving state ends differs depending on the time-saving end condition that is satisfied, as in the first embodiment described above, the time-saving state ends depending on the time-saving end condition that is satisfied. If you want to create a unique gameplay by greatly varying the ending timing, for example, if the variable number ending condition is met, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special symbol changes, and the winning When the number-of-times end condition is satisfied, it is preferable to configure the time saving state to end at the timing when the small winning game ends. With this configuration, it is possible to greatly vary the period during which the time saving state is set depending on the type of time saving end condition that has been met.

In this case, unlike the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are arranged upstream of the V winning device 650, and when the time saving state is set during the small winning game. is configured so that many balls are guided by the electric accessory 640a and enter the ball entrance (for example, the general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640), and furthermore, the opening operation is performed by a small winning game. It is preferable to configure the ball entry opening, which is guided by the operation of the electric accessory 640a, to pay out more balls than to win the V winning device 650.

In addition, as a time saving end condition, the number of variation end condition is set to 2 times and the number of winning number end condition is set to 1 time, and only when a small hit is won in the first special symbol change after the time saving state is set, It is preferable to configure the system so that many balls can enter the ball entry opening guided by the electric accessory 640a during the small winning game. With this configuration, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a specific time saving end condition will be satisfied, and it is possible to provide a new gaming experience.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown with reference to FIG. 2, the V winning device 650, which is opened when a small win is won, is disposed in the right area, and the right-handed game is played during the small win game. By doing so, the ball is entered into the V winning device 650, and when the winning ball passes through a specific area (the V switch 650e3 detects the ball), a 2nd type win is set. ing. Furthermore, the contents of the jackpot set as a 2nd type win (the contents of the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game, etc.) are configured to be set according to the type of small win that is the lottery result of the special symbol. are doing.

In such a game, for example, when a small win is won, the lottery result is identified by the stop display mode of the first symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first display device 37, and the result is identified in response to the current small win. By determining the content of the jackpot that is set as If the player wins a small win in which a gaming state disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the player does not intentionally perform the act of winning the second type of win, and the next small win is set. There was a fear that the game would be played with the aim of winning.

Therefore, as the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The right area is set so that it is longer than the period from when the stopped symbol indicating the lottery result of the symbol is stopped until the small winning game is executed (until the time when the 2nd type winning can be obtained during the small winning game). Of these, it is preferable to provide a delay channel on the upstream side of the V winning device 650 to delay the flow of the ball.

With this configuration, when a right-handed game is performed after determining the lottery result of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first display device 37, it is possible to make it difficult to win the second type. Therefore, in order to win the second type, the right-handed game can be executed continuously even before the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (from when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner). It is possible to prevent malicious games from being played.

In this case, for all small wins, the period until the shot ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the right side game is the stop symbol that shows the lottery result of the special symbol on the first display device 37. There is no need for the period to be longer than the period from when is stopped and displayed until the small winning game is executed (until the time when two types of winnings can be obtained during the small winning game), and some small winning games ( In particular, it is only necessary that the small winning type (in which the jackpot content that is advantageous to the player is set) is executed so as to satisfy the conditions.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the expectation level of two kinds of winnings during a small winning game (the possibility that the ball will pass through a specific area during a small winning game when playing a right-handed game continuously) is calculated as follows: The operating pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k is configured to vary depending on the type of small win. Specifically, as described above, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k is configured to vary depending on the type of small win won. Without being limited to this, for example, by changing the opening timing of the V winning opening 650a that is rotated in a small winning game depending on the winning small winning type, it is possible to When playing a right-handed game, the probability that the ball will pass through a specific area during the small winning game may be configured to be different.

In this case, for example, the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid 650k during a small winning game is set to be a constant operation regardless of the type of small winning, and the flow path through which the winning ball flows down from the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is specified. An operation pattern is set in which a first period in communication with a flow path passing through the area (special discharge flow path 650e2) and a second period in communication with another flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) are established alternately. , the opening timing of the V winning a prize opening 650a may be set to be different from the timing at which the first period and the second period are established.

Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the right-handed game can be continued by performing the same performance as the small winning game. In this case, when a special symbol is a winner in the lottery, the final display time of the special symbol, that is, the period during which the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, is changed depending on the type of lottery. In some cases where the lottery result of a symbol is a failure, the fixed display time of the special symbol can be lengthened (the period until the next special symbol variation is executed can be lengthened).

Therefore, in addition to the case where the player wins the small winning game, it is possible to make the player play a game in which the player aims to win two types of winnings. In addition, by applying this performance at the time of a miss (pseudo small winning game performance) to the pachinko machine 10 having the game board 13 using the above-mentioned delay member, it is possible to make the right-handed game play more continuously.

Furthermore, it is possible to set a small winning type in which a release operation (small winning game) in which a ball cannot win a prize is executed in the V winning device 650a, and when a small winning of that small winning type (unfortunate small winning) is won, Even when a small winning game with no expectation of a second type winning is executed, the above-mentioned (pseudo small winning game effect) may be configured to be executed.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol lottery results (specific misses, unfortunate small wins) that can be executed for the above-mentioned pseudo-small win game performance is measured, and the time-saving end condition is established based on the measurement results. It may be configured. As a result, the time-saving state can be terminated based on the number of times the pseudo small winning game performance has been executed, so in order to understand whether or not the current small winning game performance is a pseudo one, in other words, It is possible to make it easier to continuously play the right-handed game in order to grasp whether or not a ball will win a prize in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game performance.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 105. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is configured so that a small win can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the content set as the end condition of the time saving state is different. The difference is that the content of the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different.

In the above-described first embodiment, the time-saving termination conditions for ending the time-saving state include a variable number-of-time termination condition that is established based on the number of changes in the special symbol, and a winning number that is established based on the number of wins that are won in the small jackpot. It is configured such that the termination conditions can be set, and the time-saving state is terminated when any one of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the time-saving state is set continuously, to have the player play games with a sense of tension during the time-saving state, and to provide a game that never gets boring. there were.

Furthermore, as the winning count ending condition, different conditions can be set depending on the type of small win to be set, which makes it more difficult to understand the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, since different time saving end conditions can be set depending on the type of jackpot for which the time saving state is set, it is possible to make the timing at which the time saving state ends even more difficult to understand.

However, the first embodiment described above only makes it difficult for the player to understand the multiple time-saving end conditions that are set according to the result of the game and the time-saving information that is updated during the time-saving state. There was a problem in that it was difficult to make the player think that he had won the jackpot on his own because it was up to the lottery result of the special symbol to decide which of the time-saving termination conditions would be satisfied.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment allows the player to arbitrarily select whether to play a right-handed game or a left-handed game when the time saving state is set. In addition, the time-saving termination conditions that are likely to be satisfied are configured to vary depending on the selected game content (right-handed game, left-handed game).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, the player can select the game content during the time saving state. Therefore, in a game in a time-saving state that is executed according to the game content selected by the player, whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied early or if the time-saving state is continued for a long period of time, the player is not required to rely on his/her own efforts. This can make people think that this is the result of playing a game.

Furthermore, like the first embodiment described above, the second embodiment is configured so that two kinds of winnings can be won, and when the first game (left-handed game) is played during the time saving state, and when the second game is played during the time saving state. (right-handed game), the expected value for the period in which the time-saving state continues to be set, and the expected value for winning 2 types (expected value for winning 2 types per special symbol change). , are configured to differ.

Specifically, when the first game is played, a time-saving game is executed in which the period in which the time-saving state can continue is likely to be short, and it is easy to win the second type during the time-saving state, and the second game is played. If you do this, the period in which the time-saving state can continue is likely to be long (longer than the first game), and it is difficult to win the second type during the time-saving state (compared to the first game). It is configured so that a time-saving game (which is difficult to obtain) is executed.

With this configuration, the player can select the game content during the time saving mode according to his or her own convenience, so even a player who wants to play for a long time can only play for a short period of time. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows even players who are not skilled at playing games to play games without any dissatisfaction. Note that a detailed explanation of how to play games with different gameplay characteristics during the time saving state will be described later.

<About the production content in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the contents of the performance executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 82(a), the performance contents during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends will be explained. FIG. 82(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the ending period during the jackpot game. Note that among the elements displayed on the display screen, the same elements as in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), during the ending period of the jackpot game, there is a message displayed in the center of the main display area Dm after the jackpot game that is set to guide the gaming method during the time saving state. ``Enjoy this game'' and a comment ``Jackpot Ended'' to notify that the jackpot game has ended are displayed.

The sub-display area Ds includes a first guide display area Dm4 that shows the content of the first game that can be executed during the time-saving state, and a second guide display area that shows the content of the second game that can be executed during the time-saving state. Dm5 and an acquisition content display area Dm9 for showing benefits acquired during the jackpot game are formed. In the second embodiment, the first game that can be executed during the time-saving state is "Left-handed game", which indicates a left-handed game, and "Short-handed game", which indicates the characteristic playability when playing a left-handed game during the time-saving state. The comment “Time game” is displayed in the first guidance display area Dm4.

In addition, in the second guide display area Dm5, "Right-handed game" indicating a right-handed game as a second game that can be executed during the time-saving state, and a characteristic game characteristic when a right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state. A comment indicating "a relaxing game" is displayed in the second guidance display area Dm5. In other words, in the second embodiment, as a gaming method during the time-saving state, it is possible to select a left-handed game in which the time-saving state is resolved in a short period of time, and a right-handed game in which the time-saving state can be enjoyed for a long period of time. This can be displayed immediately before the time saving state is set (during the ending period of the jackpot game). Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a game using any gaming method at the timing when the time saving state is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the major differences between the first game and the second game are displayed in text in the first guidance display area Dm4 and the second guidance display area Dm5, so that the player can learn how to play during the time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that all the differences between the first game and the second game are displayed, or the differences are displayed with pictures instead of text. It may be configured to do so. Further, as shown in FIG. 82(a), only the major differences are displayed in the first guidance display area Dm4 and the second guidance display area Dm5, and during the period in which they are displayed, the first guidance display area It may be configured such that detailed content is displayed by selecting Dm4 or the second guidance display area Dm5.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide information to both players who think that it is enough to roughly understand the game contents that differ depending on the game method, as well as players who want to understand the details of the game contents that differ depending on the game method. It is also possible to provide an appropriate display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82(b), the display contents immediately after the time saving state is set will be described. FIG. 82(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 82(b), the second embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, has a function of suspending and storing the drawing of second special symbols up to a predetermined number (4). The second display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol. It is configured so that four symbols, ie, a first reserved symbol Dsf to a fourth reserved symbol Dsi, are displayed as "triangle" symbols.

Similar to the above-mentioned first special symbol (first reserved symbol Dsb to fourth reserved symbol Dse), these reserved symbols are stored in the order in which they are reserved (the second special symbol that is the trigger for executing the lottery of the second special symbol). The balls are displayed in order from the first reserved symbol Dsf to the fourth reserved symbol Dsi (in the order in which the balls enter the ball entrance 640), that is, from the left side to the right side of the second display area Ds2. In other words, the reserved symbols (Dsb to Dse) of the first special symbol and the reserved symbols (Dsf to Dsi) of the second special symbol are both displayed so as to gradually shift toward the symbol Dsa in progress, The player can easily grasp the pending symbol corresponding to the special symbol to be executed next from the display contents of each special symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), immediately after the time saving state is set, the character "?" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2. This is a display indicating that the player has not determined whether to execute the current time saving state in the first game (left-handed game) or the second game (right-handed game). In addition, in addition to the display mode shown in FIG. 82(b), it is sufficient to display a display mode in the game guide display area Dm2 to indicate that the gaming method during the time saving state has not been determined. , characters ``left or right'' indicating that it is a period in which it is permissible to play either right-handed game may be displayed.

Although details will be described later, in the second embodiment, it is determined whether the first ball entrance port 64 or the second ball entrance port 640 is the first ball entrance port where a ball enters after the time saving state is set. The system is configured to determine the gaming method arbitrarily selected by the player based on the determination result. Therefore, the character "?" is displayed in the game guide display area Dm2 during the period from when the time saving state is set until the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the display content shown in FIG. 82(b) continues for a predetermined period (4 seconds) after the time saving state is set, and the time saving state is The variation pattern is set so that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information that has been stored pending is completed at the time when is set. By configuring in this way, if winning information for winning a jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the special symbol, before deciding and displaying the first game or the second game (in the game guide display area Dm2) It is possible to end the special symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot (before the display mode for guiding the gaming method is displayed).

Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which a jackpot is won due to a special symbol variation on a side different from the gaming method selected by the player, it is possible to suppress the sense of discomfort given to the player.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82(b), the gaming method during the period in which the time saving state is set is configured to be displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, but other display areas The currently set gaming method may be displayed. In other words, during a jackpot game, it is necessary to display a display to guide (instruct) the player on a gaming method that is advantageous to the player, so it is necessary to display the display method in the guidance display area Dm2. is configured so that the player can obtain the same gaming result no matter which gaming method (right-handed game or left-handed game) the player selects while the game is set. Instead of the guide display area Dm2 for guiding (instructing) players on gaming methods that are advantageous to the player, the gaming method may be displayed in a separate area that displays the current gaming method. In addition, when displaying in the guidance display area Dm2, the display format (for example, the color and shape of characters) is changed to indicate a situation in which the player is guided (instructed) about the game method and a situation in which the current game method ( It may also be possible to distinguish between the situation in which the game method selected by the player is displayed and the game method selected by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83(a), the content of the effect when the first game (left-handed game) is executed in a state where the time saving state is set will be explained. FIG. 83(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the first game (left-handed game) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 83(a), when the first game is executed, a game result display 810 resembling a "lottery box" is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm, and at the bottom left of the main display area Dm. A game content display 811 is displayed on the side to guide the player about the game content of the first game. Further, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 for indicating the number of time reduction completion times in the first game is formed.

In other words, in the first game (left-handed game during the time saving state) in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a lottery is executed according to the variation (lottery) of special symbols, and the result (1st prize - out) By displaying as the game result display 810, an effect display is executed to notify the lottery result of the special symbol. Furthermore, when the first game (left-handed game) is executed (set) as a time-saving gaming method, the characters "left-handed game" indicating the first game's playing method are displayed in the game guide display area Dm2. .

In addition, if a specific game method (play direction) such as "left-hand hit" or "right-hand hit" is displayed in this game guide display area Dm2, a game different from the displayed game method (play direction) When a game is played using a certain method (playing direction), an error notification is executed to cause the player to correct the playing method (playing direction). In other words, after it is determined that the first game (left-handed game) will be played during the time-saving state, an error notification will be executed if a right-handed game is performed, and the second game (right-handed game) will be executed during the time-saving state. After it is determined that the game will be played, an error notification is executed when a left-handed game is played. In addition, during the period in which no gaming method has been determined during the time saving state, the configuration is such that an error notification will not be executed even if a left-handed game or a right-handed game is played. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83(a), on the right side of the main display area Dm, there is a special symbol 1 reserved number display area Dm6 that displays the reserved number of the first special symbol (number of reserved symbols), and a special symbol 1 reserved number display area Dm6 that displays the reserved number of the first special symbol (number of reserved symbols). A special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7 that displays the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved symbols) is formed, and a special symbol corresponding to the currently selected gaming method (left-handed game) is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Only the reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Ds1). With this configuration, only the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of special symbols corresponding to the gaming method selected by the player can be highlighted and displayed (effect display).

In addition, the actual number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) corresponding to each special symbol is configured to be displayed in the dedicated special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm6 and special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm7. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the accurate number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) for each special symbol. In addition, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 83(a), the current number of reservations "0" is displayed in the special drawing 1 reservation number display area Dm6 and the special drawing 2 reservation number display area Dm7 to the extent that the player can easily identify the current reservation number "0". However, the number of reservations for each special symbol may be displayed in a size that is difficult for the player to discern unless he or she is aware of it, or the number of reservations may be displayed using an identifier other than a number. It is best to configure it so that

Then, when the performance display corresponding to the left-handed game shown in FIG. 83(a) is executed, the lottery result is displayed in the main display area Dm as a performance result according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. Based on the progress of each value (the number of variations of special symbols and the number of small winnings) for the time saving end condition, the remaining time saving number to suggest the number of time saving ending times is updated and displayed in the time saving number display area Dm10. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game during the time saving state by understanding the lottery results and the display contents of the time saving number display area Dm10.

On the other hand, when the right-handed game is selected as the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 83(b), an effect is performed in which a character 812 imitating a boy searches for a treasure box 813 to notify the lottery result of a special symbol. At the same time, the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls) of the special symbol (second special symbol) corresponding to the selected gaming method (right-handed game) is displayed in the second display region Ds2. In addition, the words "Right-handed" are displayed in the guide display area Dm2. Regarding the content of the performance executed when this right-handed game is selected, the only difference from the performance content of the first embodiment described above is the performance using the reserved symbol of the second special symbol. Since everything else is the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, among the performances performed when a right-handed game is selected during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the performances differ from the performances of the first embodiment described above. Explain the content. FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a game screen when a right-handed game is selected during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 84, the second embodiment is configured to display whether or not the time-saving end condition is met for the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds, or the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. In FIG. 84, the preview display mode 820 showing the word "chance" for the first pending symbol Dsf corresponding to the next special symbol variation is changed to the third pending symbol Dsf corresponding to the special symbol variation after 3 variations. A preview display mode 821 showing the characters "End" is displayed for the symbol Dsh.

The preview display mode set for each pending symbol is selected and displayed using a pending display selection table 222aa, which will be described later.

In this way, by displaying the preview display mode for the pending symbols, the player can anticipate the special symbol variation that will end the time-saving state and be motivated to win the jackpot before the special symbol variation is executed. You will be playing games. Further, based on the content of the preview display mode, it is possible to grasp the period during which the time saving state will not end and execute the special symbol variation with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the content of the game during the time saving state in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 85 is a diagram schematically showing the game contents during the time saving state that are set after the end of the jackpot game in which jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, among the game contents during the time saving state in the second embodiment. be. As shown in FIG. 85, the second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is configured so that a small win can be won in the lottery using the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is better than the first special symbol. It is configured so that it is easier to win the small winning game (the small winning game executed in response to the small winning A) in which it is easier to obtain the second type of winning than the second special symbol.

In addition, the second embodiment uses the same configuration of the game board 13 as the first embodiment described above, and when the time saving state is set, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than in the normal state. The opening operation control of the electric accessory 640a is varied so that the ball enters easily. In other words, when the second game (right-handed game) is executed during the time saving state, more balls enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state, and more drawings (variations) of the second special symbol are performed. be able to. On the other hand, even if the time saving state is set, the ease with which the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 is no different from the normal state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, a description will be given while comparing the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game), which are game contents during the time saving state. First, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the time saving state (the number of prize balls that can be acquired by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640) will be explained. The number of prize balls during this time saving state is configured to be greater in the second game than in the first game. If you play the first game during the time-saving state, you will only be able to win the same number of prize balls as when the normal state is set, and the number of balls (balls you have) will decrease during the time-saving state. The next game is executed. On the other hand, when playing the second game, it is possible to enter many balls into the second ball entrance 640, so it is possible to win many prize balls, and as a result, during the time saving state, A game in which the ball (held ball) is kept (maintained) is executed.

The period during which the time saving state can be continuously set is configured such that the period when the first game is played is shorter than when the second game is played. Specifically, among the multiple time saving end conditions, as a change number end condition that is satisfied based on the number of changes of the special symbol, a change number end condition that is established when the number of changes of the first special symbol reaches 30 times. and a variation number end condition that is satisfied when the number of variations of the second special symbol reaches 80 times, and when executing the first game, the special symbol variation is up to 30 times at maximum. The configuration is such that only the time saving state is set continuously.

Furthermore, the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot (including winning the 1st type and winning the 2nd type) for each special symbol variation (lottery) executed during the time saving state is higher when playing the first game. It is configured to be higher (larger) than when two games are played. To explain the expectation level of winning this jackpot, in this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (the special symbol lottery executed when the first game is executed) and the second special symbol lottery (the special symbol lottery executed when the first game is executed) are performed. The probability of winning a jackpot (probability of winning per type) is the same (1/200) between the special symbol lottery executed when two games are executed. In other words, the first game and the second game are configured to have different expectations for winning the two types.

To explain this point in detail, the first special symbol lottery executed during the first game is set so that the probability of winning a small win is 1/10, and the lottery executed during the second game is set so that the probability of winning a small win is 1/10. In the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a small win is set to 1/2. Then, the distribution of the small win type that is set when winning a small win is set so that the ratio of small win A: small win B is 9:1 when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery. has been done. In other words, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the first game, the small win A is executed with a probability of 1/11.

On the other hand, if a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the small win A is executed with a probability of 1/200. In this way, by changing the probability of winning a small hit and the distribution of the small winning type set at the time of winning a small hit, the first game has a higher chance of changing the special symbol once than the second game. The system is configured so that the expectation level of winning a jackpot (including winning the first type and winning the second type) is high based on the (lottery).

Further, in the second embodiment, the time-saving ending conditions that are likely to be met when the first game is executed are set to be different from the time-saving ending conditions that are likely to be met when the second game is executed. Specifically, when the first game is executed, the time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when the small win A is won once is most likely to be satisfied, and the second is that the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times. The time-saving ending condition is set to become more difficult to satisfy in the order of the time-saving ending condition, which is satisfied when the small win B is won three times, and the time-saving ending condition, which is satisfied when the small win B is won three times.

When the second game is executed, the time-saving ending condition is most likely to be met if the small win D is won 20 times, and the second is to be met if the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 80 times. The time-saving end condition is set to become less likely to be satisfied in the order of the time-saving end condition, which is satisfied when the small win A is won once.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, when the player selects a playing method (left-handed game, right-handed game) during the time-saving state that is set after the end of the jackpot game, the player can enjoy different game characteristics. You can play the following games.

Furthermore, it is possible to select as different game features a game feature that aims for a jackpot in a short period of time (first game) and a play feature that aims for a jackpot over a long period of time (second game). In addition, as a method to make the game method different, multiple time-saving termination conditions are set to terminate the time-saving state, and the conditions are different depending on whether the first game is played or the second game is played. The configuration is such that the time-saving termination condition is easily met. Thereby, the period during which the time saving state is continuously set can be made different between the first game and the second game.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the contents of the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 86 to 92. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the first embodiment, and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. They differ in that they are Since other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86(a), in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the first winning random number table 202aa is replaced with the first winning random number table 202aa, and the first winning type selection table 202b is replaced with the first winning random number table 202a. 1 per win type selection 2 table 202ab is replaced with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad is replaced with the time-saving grant table 202e, and the time-saving grant 2 table 202ae is replaced with the small winning type selection table 202f. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that an open scenario 2 table 202ag is provided instead of the open scenario table 202g for the type selection 2 table 202af.

The first random number 2 table 202aa differs from the first random number table 202a of the first embodiment described above in that the value (first random number counter value C1) used to determine a small win has been changed. There is. Here, the first random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 87.

FIG. 87(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87(a), the first random number 2 table 202aa includes a special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 corresponding to the second special symbol. ,have.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1. This special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 is different from the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above in that a value for determining a small hit is added, and other elements are the same. Descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), in the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa, "10 to 109" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 are defined as small hit determination values. That is, when determining (executing) a special symbol lottery using the special symbol 1 random number 2 table 202aa1 (when executing a first special symbol lottery), a jackpot is determined at a rate of 1/200. , a small hit is determined at a rate of 1/10.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 87(c). FIG. 87(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2. As shown in FIG. 87(c), in the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2, among the values of the first random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as the jackpot determination value, and "5 to 499" are the small win determination values. It is specified as a judgment value. That is, when determining (executing) the special symbol lottery result using the special symbol 2 random number 2 table 202aa2 (when executing the second special symbol lottery), a jackpot is determined at a rate of 1/200. However, the configuration is such that a small hit is determined at a rate of 1/2.

As explained above, in this embodiment, in both cases, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is possible to win a small hit. It consists of As a result, even if the first game (left-handed game) in which the first special symbol is drawn during the time saving state is executed, the second game (right-handed game) in which the second special symbol is drawn is not executed. However, it is possible to establish a condition for ending the number of winnings based on the number of winnings.

In addition, since the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery and the probability of winning a small win in the second special symbol lottery can be set to be different, the first game and the second game The ease with which the conditions for ending the number of winnings are met can be varied depending on the number of wins. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of games in which the ease of ending the time-saving state is different depending on when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed.

Returning to FIG. 86(a), the explanation will be continued. The first winning type selection table 202ab is different from the first winning type selection table 202b of the first embodiment described above in that the presence or absence of a time saving state given to some jackpot types has been changed. All other elements are the same. Descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection 2 table 202ab will be explained with reference to FIGS. 88(a) to 88(c). FIG. 88(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 2 table 202ab, and FIG. 88(b) is the content specified in the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1. FIG. 88(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the first winning type selection 2 table 202ab is a special pattern 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special pattern 2 jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol. A selection 2 table 202ab2 is provided, and various tables are selectively used according to the corresponding special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1 is for the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, where the value of the acquired first winning type counter value C2 is "0 to 9". "Jackpot A" is defined as the jackpot type in the range, "Jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in the range "10-49", and "Jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type in the range "50-99". is stipulated.

"Jackpot A" defined here is a jackpot type in which a round game is a jackpot game of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the round game is 5 rounds, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. "Jackpot C" is a jackpot type where the round game is 5 rounds, and if the gaming state at the time of winning (at the time of setting) is the normal state, the normal state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, and at the time of winning (at the time of setting) ), when the game state is the time saving state, the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

As explained above, the second embodiment has a jackpot type (jackpot C) that is defined so that the gaming state set after the jackpot game is different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. ing. As a result, players can be made aware of whether or not they have won a jackpot, the type of jackpot that has been set, and even the gaming state at the time of winning, making the game more complex and allowing players to quickly become bored with the game. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2 selects the jackpot type as "jackpot D" is specified.

Returning to FIG. 86, the explanation will be continued. The variation pattern 2 table 202ad is different from the variation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above in that the specified content of the variation pattern to be selected during the period in which the time saving state is set is different. . The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 2 table 202ad will be explained with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable pattern 2 table 202ad, and FIG. 89(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variable pattern 2 table 202ad. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents. As shown in FIG. 89(a), the variation pattern 2 table 202ad is the normal variation pattern table 202d1, which is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the normal variation pattern table 202d1, which is referred to when the time saving state is set. It has a time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2, which is a variation pattern according to the gaming state when setting the special symbol variation pattern (when executing the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39)). The configuration is such that a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is set by referring to a table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89(b), the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 will be explained. This time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2 is different from the time-saving variation pattern table 202d of the first embodiment described above, in which special symbol variations (special symbol variations) are performed a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot (after the end of the jackpot game). The difference is that a variation pattern (variation time) in which a specific time is specified is set.

Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, no matter which special symbol fluctuation is executed, the total time of the special symbol fluctuations 1 to 4 after the end of the jackpot is constant (3 seconds). Furthermore, in this embodiment, until a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game, a selection display (Fig. 82(b) )) is configured to be displayed.

With this configuration, when entering the time saving state, special symbol variations corresponding to the reserved balls (reserved symbols) that have already been acquired are displayed during the period when the selection display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it easier to execute special symbols (for example, the first special symbol) that are different from the special symbol variations (for example, the first special symbol) that are mainly executed by the gaming method selected during the time saving state (for example, left-handed game). Even if the variation of 2 special symbols) is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that is set when a win (big hit, small win) is won between 1st to 4th rotation after the end of the jackpot is changed to the variation pattern (variation time) that is set when the special symbol is It varies depending on the number of fluctuations, and there is a timing to stop displaying the lottery result of the special symbol in the 4th rotation after the end of the jackpot, and a timing to stop displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol in the 3rd rotation is a win. The timing of stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol in the second spin is a win and the timing of stopping and displaying that the lottery result of the special symbol in the first spin is a win are configured so that they are all constant. are doing.

With this configuration, the selection display screen (see FIG. 82(b)) that is displayed when the time saving state is set can be displayed for a predetermined period (at least 3 seconds) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, it is possible to use the period during which the selection display screen is displayed to complete the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to many reserved balls.

Further, if a win (small hit, jackpot) is won immediately after the time saving state is set, a specific variation pattern is executed according to the number of special symbol variations after the time saving state is set. Therefore, if a winning result is won within a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot (within a predetermined number of fluctuations of the special symbol (within 1 to 4 rotations)), the timing of notifying the player of the winning result (the timing of notifying the player of the winning result) The timing for stopping and displaying the special symbol (third symbol) indicating the above is configured to be constant.

In addition, in this second embodiment, a variation pattern table is used to select a special variation pattern for the variation pattern set during the period from when the time saving state is set until the variation of the special symbol is executed four times. However, for the period during which the special fluctuation pattern is selected after the time saving state is set, other periods may be used. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls (4) of the first special symbol, A special fluctuation pattern may be configured to be selectable for the number of special symbol fluctuations (8 times) corresponding to the total number (8 balls) of the second special symbol with the maximum number of reserved balls (4 balls). However, the period from when the time saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed twice may be targeted. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when a win is won, a fluctuation pattern exclusively for winning is set. It may be configured such that the variation pattern is set based on the determination result.

Specifically, among the cases where you win a jackpot, there are cases where you win a jackpot and a small win where a small win A is set (i.e., a small win type where it is easier to win 2 types than other small win types). It may also be configured such that a variation pattern exclusively for winning is set only when the player wins a set small winning. Thereby, it is possible to create a sense of high expectation in the player who notices that a special symbol variation is being executed based on a variation pattern (variation time) different from normal.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 89(b), as a variation pattern (variation time) set for the special symbol variation after the 5th rotation (including the 5th rotation) after the time saving state is set, the first special The symbol is configured to have a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the second special symbol. As a result, if it is possible to continuously change the special symbol during the time saving state, the game that changes the first special symbol (first game, left-handed game) is better than the lottery of the special symbol (fluctuation). ) can be executed in large numbers in a short period of time.

In addition, in FIG. 89(b), the contents specified in the time-saving variation pattern 2 table 202ad2, which is referred to when the time-saving state is set, include the number of special symbol variations (the number of special symbol variations) after the end of the jackpot. ) shows only one type of variation pattern for the special symbol lottery results after the 5th rotation (including the 5th rotation), but in reality, a counter (not shown) changes the pattern according to the control process of the main controller 110. Although the configuration is such that one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times is selected depending on the value obtained from the loop counter whose value is updated, a detailed explanation thereof is omitted.

In this way, even in a variation pattern table configured to select one variation pattern from a plurality of variation patterns, a variation pattern is set in which the first special symbol has a shorter variation time than the second special symbol. It is structured so that it is easy to use. Therefore, if it is possible to continuously change the special symbol during the time saving state, the game that fluctuates the first special symbol (first game, left-handed game) is better than the lottery (variation) of the special symbol. can be executed in large numbers in a short period of time. In addition, the above-mentioned variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be set means that among all the selectable variation patterns, the first special symbol has a shorter variation time than the second special symbol, and the most The average fluctuation time per fluctuation when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern that is likely to be selected is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol, or when all fluctuation patterns are set as designed values. is set so that the first special symbol is shorter than the second special symbol, or the shortest variation time that can be set according to the variation of the first special symbol is set according to the variation of the second special symbol. This also includes configurations in which the variation time is set to be shorter than the shortest variation time that can be obtained. That is, when a player actually plays the pachinko machine 10 in the time-saving state, the number of changes per unit time is higher in the first game (left-handed game) in which the first special symbol changes than in the second special symbol. It is good if the setting is set so that the number is larger than .

The time-saving granting table 202ae differs from the time-saving granting table 202e of the first embodiment described above in that the time-saving ending conditions (values set in various counters) set for each jackpot type are different, and The difference is that the type of counter used to set the value serving as the termination condition has been changed (increased). Since other elements are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time saving grant 2 table 202ae will be explained with reference to FIG. 88(d). FIG. 88(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the time saving provision 2 table 202ae. This time-saving granting table 2 202ae, for the above-mentioned time-saving granting table 202e, replaces the time-saving middle counter 203k with a special figure 1 counter 203ad, and replaces the special figure 2 counter 203ae with a small hit C counter 203p, and replaces it with a small hit D. The difference is that a counter 203ac is provided and that the values set (given) to the various counters are different.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the player selects the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game) as a plurality of games with different play characteristics during the time-saving state. Among the multiple termination conditions (time-saving termination conditions) that terminate the time-saving state when the first game is executed and when the second game is executed, the The end conditions are configured to be different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88(d), when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is "100", the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is "100", It is specified that the value of the small win A counter 203m is set to "2", the value of the small win B counter 203n is set to "100", and the value of the small win D counter 203ac is set to "100", and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In this case, the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is ``30'', the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is ``80'', the value of the small hit A counter 203m is ``1'', and the value of the small hit B counter 203n is ``3''. ”, and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to “20”.

In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of special figure 1 counter 203ad is 40'', the value of special figure 2 counter 203ae is ``70'', the value of small hit A counter 203m is ``2'', small hit It is specified that the value of the B counter 203n is set to "5" and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is set to "40", and when the jackpot type is "jackpot D", the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to "30". '', the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is ``80'', the value of the small hit A counter 203m is ``1'', the value of the small hit B counter 203n is ``3'', and the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is ``20''. It is prescribed to be set.

In other words, when the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to "Jackpot A" is set, when the first game is executed, by winning the small win A twice (the small win A counter 203m The time-saving ending condition that is satisfied (by the value becoming 0) is the time-saving ending condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed, the time-saving ending condition that is satisfied (when the value becomes 0) is the time-saving ending condition that is most likely to be satisfied. The time-saving termination condition that is satisfied (when the value of the counter 203ae in FIG. 2 becomes 0) is the time-saving termination condition that is most likely to be satisfied.

In addition, if the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to "Jackpot B" is set, when the first game is executed, by winning small win A once (small win A counter 203m The time-saving ending condition that is satisfied (by the value becoming 0) is the time-saving ending condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed, by winning the small win D 20 times (the value of the small winning counter 203ac The time-saving termination condition that is satisfied (by becoming 0) becomes the time-saving termination condition that is most likely to be satisfied.

When the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) corresponding to "Jackpot C" is set, when the first game is executed, by winning the small win A twice (the value of the small win A counter 203m The time-saving ending condition that is satisfied (by becoming 0) is the time-saving ending condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the second game is executed, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 70 (special symbol 2 The time-saving ending condition that is satisfied (when the value of the counter 203ae becomes 0) becomes the time-saving ending condition that is most likely to be satisfied, and when the time-saving state (time-saving ending condition) corresponding to "Jackpot D" is set, the above-mentioned " The same time-saving state (time-saving end condition) as in "Jackpot B" is set.

In other words, in a state where the time-saving state is set, by making the game methods executed (selected) different (by the first game (left-handed game) and the second game (right-handed game)), The easy-to-understand time-saving termination conditions can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play a different game as a game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the time-saving termination conditions (values set in various counters) are configured to differ depending on the jackpot type of the won jackpot, and the condition is established when the same game (for example, right-handed game) is played during the time-saving period. The configuration is such that the easy-to-understand time-saving termination conditions are different. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the time saving state will end. Further, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of jackpot that was won this time.

In addition, in this embodiment, four types of jackpot types are provided as jackpot types that are set when winning a jackpot, but the number of jackpot types is not limited to this, and five or more jackpot types are provided. It's okay. In this case, multiple jackpot types with the same game content (opening period, number of round games, interval period between rounds, ending period) of the jackpot game executed when winning the jackpot are provided, and time-saving ending conditions are set for each jackpot type. It is better to configure the settings so that they are different. Thereby, based on the contents of the jackpot game to be executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the contents of the time-saving state (the contents of the time-saving end condition) that are set after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(d), the time-saving termination condition is more likely to be satisfied in a shorter period when the first game is executed than when the second game is executed. It consists of As a result, in the first game, the period during which the time saving state is continuously set (time period) can be made shorter.

In addition, in the second embodiment, it is easier to obtain the second type of small win by executing the first game than by executing the second game (small win where "small win A" is set as the small win type). It is structured so that it is easy to win (win). By configuring in this way, the first game is a game that provides the player with the gameplay of aiming to win two types in a short period of time, and the second game is a game in which the player aims to win one type in a short period of time. It can be a game that provides sex to the player.

Therefore, by allowing the player to select the gaming method (first game, second game) to be executed during the time-saving state, games with different gameplay characteristics can be executed, thereby providing the player with a game that never gets boring. be able to. In addition, in the second embodiment, since the first game and the second game have different playing periods during the time saving state, it is possible for the player to select a playing method depending on the playable period, and various Therefore, it is possible to provide suitable games to various players.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, no matter which gaming method is selected during the time saving state, the jackpot probability during the time saving state (the probability of winning a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and the probability of winning a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and the probability of winning a jackpot during a small winning game) Since the sum of the probabilities of the ball passing through a specific area and winning the jackpot are approximately the same (including errors that the player does not notice (for example, an error of 10% or less)), You can also play games with peace of mind.

In the second embodiment, no matter what type of jackpot is set, time-saving ending conditions are set so that the player will not have an advantage or disadvantage in the first game and the second game. As another configuration, for example, when a predetermined jackpot type is set, a time-saving ending condition is set so that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and other than the above predetermined jackpot type is set. When a specific jackpot type is set, the time-saving ending conditions may be set so that the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a gaming method advantageous to the player according to the set jackpot type (jackpot game executed), thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, in the case where the game method (first game, second game) advantageous to the player is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type in this way, a predetermined distribution rate is taken into consideration for all jackpot types. In this case, it is preferable to configure the game so that there is no advantage or disadvantage to the player depending on whether the first game is executed or the second game is executed. Thereby, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player always selects only one gaming method.

In addition, a storage means is provided for storing the jackpot type (time saving state) set during a predetermined period (for example, a period after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on), and the contents stored in the storage means ( It is also possible to provide a notification means for notifying (displaying) the time saving history) to the player. Thereby, it is possible to predict the time-saving state to be set in the future based on the time-saving state set in the past, and to select a gaming method. Further, the system is configured to inform the player of a suggestion mode that suggests a gaming method that is advantageous to the player by using a performance display (jackpot performance display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during a jackpot game. It's okay.

Returning to FIG. 86, the explanation will be continued. The small hit type selection 2 table 202af is different from the small hit type selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above in that it allows a small win to be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). , the difference is that the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection 2 table 202af will be explained with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202af, and FIG. 90(b) is the content specified in the special drawing 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1. FIG. 90(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 small winning type selection 2 table af2.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), the small winning type selection 2 table 202af includes the special pattern 1 small winning type selection 2 table 202af1 that is referred to when executing the lottery of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), It has a special figure 2 small winning type selection 2 table 202af2 that is referred to when executing the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

As shown in FIG. 90(b), the special figure 1 small hit type selection 2 table 202af1 indicates that the value range of the obtained small hit type counter value C5 is "0 to 89" and that the small hit type is "Small hit A". ”, “Small win B” is defined as the small win type in “90 to 99”.

Here, the small win type "Small win A" is the same as the "Small win A" in the first embodiment described above, and when the ball passes through V (when the ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, 2 ``Jackpot A'' is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot that is set (executed) when a seed hit is obtained. "Small win B" is the same as "Small win B" in the first embodiment described above, and when the ball passes through V (when the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game, when a two-type win is acquired) ) "Jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot that is set (executed).

In addition, in the special symbol 2 small hit type selection 2 table 202af2, as shown in FIG. , "1-99", "Small win D" is defined as the small win type.

Here, the small win type "Small win D" is a small win type in which a small win game is executed with the lowest expectation level (approximately 5%) of two types of small wins among multiple small win types, and ``Jackpot B'' is set as the jackpot type of the jackpot that is set (executed) at the time (when the ball passes through a specific area during a small winning game, when a 2nd type winning is obtained). In other words, this is the most disadvantageous small win for the player.

The opening scenario 2 table 202ag is different from the opening scenario table 202g of the first embodiment described above in that an opening scenario corresponding to the small win D is defined instead of an opening scenario corresponding to the small win C, and Other than that, they are the same. And, in the opening scenario corresponding to small hit D, the ON period of the flow path solenoid 650k is shortened, making it more difficult for the ball to pass through V (passage of the ball to a specific area) among the opening scenarios corresponding to small hit C. Since the only difference is that the opening scenario set at the time of passing V (when winning the second type) is changed to 5 rounds instead of 15 rounds, detailed illustration will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 86(b). FIG. 86(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86(b), in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment, a small win D counter 203ac is provided in place of the small win C counter 203p, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, and a special symbol This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a 2-reserved ball counter 203ab, a special figure 1 counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 counter 203ae are added.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the first implementation failure described above. Since it is provided for the second special symbol, a detailed explanation will be omitted, but when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 that triggers the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol, the second This is variably set when a special symbol lottery (variation) is executed.

The small win D counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of wins of a small win in which small win D is set as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied. In the jackpot control process 2 (S1554 in FIG. 98), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (the jackpot end timing) (S1612 in FIG. 98: Yes), the time saving grant 2 table 202ae specifies The value is set (S1653 in FIG. 98).

Then, in the small hit time saving update process (S405 in FIG. 41) executed in the small hit start setting process (S221 in FIG. 94) of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94), the small win won this time is When it is determined that the small win type is small win D, the value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (not shown). If it is determined that the value of the small hit D counter 203ac after the subtraction is 0, the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the gaming state. In addition, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set for ending the time-saving state, and even when any of the time-saving termination conditions is satisfied (for example, a time-saving termination condition based on the number of special symbol fluctuations). Even if the termination condition is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0. In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (fifth time-saving end condition) that refers to the value of the small hit D counter 203ac is satisfied among the plural time-saving end conditions, the small hit D counter Since the value of 203ac is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to prevent the process of subtracting the value of small hit D counter 203ac from continuing even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, no matter which of the multiple time-saving termination conditions is met, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving termination condition is met when ending the time-saving state are set to initial values (0). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the processing after the time saving state ends from becoming complicated.

The special figure 1 counter 203ad is a counter for measuring the number of changes in the first special symbol executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set, the time saving state is ended. A value corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol set as an end condition for the time reduction is set, and each time the first special symbol fluctuates during the time saving state, the set value is subtracted by 1. Then, it is referenced when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, processing for ending the time saving state is executed.

The special figure 2 counter 203ae is a counter for measuring the number of changes in the second special symbol executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set, the time saving state is ended. A value corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is set as an end condition for the end condition, and each time the second special symbol fluctuates during the time saving state, the set value is subtracted by 1. Then, it is referenced when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value of the counter is 0, processing for ending the time saving state is executed.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, the end condition for ending the time saving state (time saving end condition) is established based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. A time-saving termination condition is set. As a result, when the first game (a game in which only the first special symbol is varied) or the second game (a game in which only the second special symbol is varied) is executed, dedicated time-saving termination conditions can be satisfied. It can be done.

In addition, in this 2nd embodiment, by providing the special figure 1 counter 203ad and the special figure 2 counter 202ae, it is configured to measure the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state (total variation of the number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol) (corresponding to the time saving medium counter 203k of the first embodiment); and a means for measuring either the number of times the first special symbol changes or the number of times the second special symbol changes (e.g. 1 counter 203ae), and may be configured to calculate the number of fluctuations of special symbol 2 (second special symbol) by executing a process of subtracting the number of fluctuations of special symbol 1 from the total number of fluctuations. good.

By configuring in this way, among the time-saving ending conditions, the ending condition for changing the number of times that is satisfied based on the number of changing times of the special symbol is the ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of changing times of the first special symbol, and the ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of changing times of the first special symbol. It is possible to manage the ending condition that is established based on the number of changes of the special symbol and the ending condition that is established based on the total number of changes of the special symbol using two counters. In addition, in order to achieve the same effect, the value measured by the special figure 1 counter 203ae (subtracted value) of the second embodiment and the value measured by the special figure 2 counter 203af (subtracted value) are added together. The configuration may be such that the total number of fluctuations is calculated.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. As shown in FIG. 91(a), the ROM 222 of the second embodiment has a status display selection table 222b and a final status display selection table, in contrast to the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 26(a)). The difference is that a pending display selection table 222aa is provided instead of the table 222c.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the RAM 223 of the second embodiment has a provisional hit determination flag 223h, a provisional short-time end Deletes the flag 223j, time saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, and time saving end variation flag 223n, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa, right-handed hitting flag 223ab, left-handed hitting flag 223ac, and time saving start flag 223ad. , is different in that a time-saving clock counter 223ae is provided. Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 91(a). FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

The pending display selection table 222aa selects the winning symbol for the pending symbol (see FIG. 84(a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the reserved ball of the special symbol obtained during the time saving state. This is referred to when selecting the display mode (see FIG. 84(a)) for notifying the player of the preliminary determination result of the information, and whether or not the time saving state ends (update status of the time saving end condition); Further, the result of determining the validity of the special symbol is suggested (notified) to the player in advance.

Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the contents defined in the hold display selection table 222aa will be explained. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hold display selection table 222aa. In the second embodiment, a state display mode similar to the state display mode set for the special symbol fluctuation being executed in the first embodiment described above is executed for the pending symbol. (See Figure 84).

The pending display selection table 222aa is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the pending mode effect, and is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the pending mode effect, and is a table that displays temporary time saving information (temporarily updated based on the result of pre-reading processing) stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i. Various pending display modes are defined based on the acquired time saving information) and the acquired value of the state effect counter 223o. Note that the values indicating the pending display mode listed in the present pending display selection table 222aa are the same as the status display mode of the first embodiment described above, and the display mode shown with reference to FIG. 15 is different from each value. Since these are defined in a corresponding manner, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the pending display selection table 222aa, the current validity judgment result stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i, that is, the special information included in the winning information corresponding to the current process. If the lottery result of the symbol is "Jackpot", and before this process is executed, information indicating a jackpot (already won information) has not been stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i (already won information). If the pre-termination information indicating that the time-saving pre-termination condition is satisfied is stored (pre-termination information “present”), the value of the acquired state rendering counter 223o is “0~ A hold display mode "3" is defined in the range of "69", and a hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

Also, if the current win/fail judgment result is "Jackpot", the hit information is "None", and the before-end information is "None", the value of the state production counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49". The hold display mode "3" is defined as the hold display mode "1" in the range of "50 to 69", and the hold display mode "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

Furthermore, if the hit information is "Yes", regardless of the presence or absence of the before-end variation information, "-" is set so that the pending display mode is not set for the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69". , a hold display mode of "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

In this way, the winning information corresponding to the pending symbol for which the pending display mode is set this time, and the winning information already stored in the temporary time saving information update area 223i (obtained earlier than the winning information to be set this time) By variably setting the pending display mode according to the winning information (winning information), the validity judgment result of the special symbol included, and the progress of the time saving state, players will be able to see the lottery result of the special symbol, It is possible to suggest in advance whether or not the time saving state will end.

Therefore, when a pending display mode in which there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end is displayed, the player can be made to play the game with the intention of winning a jackpot before the pending display mode is displayed. In addition, by making it possible to set multiple time-saving termination conditions for ending the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending suddenly in gaming machines that make it difficult to understand the period during which the time-saving state continues to be set. This makes it possible to prevent players from playing games that would cause them to feel dissatisfied.

Next, if the current win/fail judgment result is "Small win A", the previous win information is "None", and the pre-end information is "Yes", the value of the state production counter 223o is "0 to 49". The pending display mode "5" is defined in the range "50-69", "9" is defined in the range "70-99", and the pre-end information is "none". In this case, the value of the status rendering counter 223o is in the range of "0 to 49", the pending display mode "7" is in the range of "50 to 69", and the value of the state production counter 223o is in the range of "50 to 69", and the pending display mode "7" is in the range of "70 to 99". “9” is specified in the range.

Furthermore, if the hit information is "Yes", regardless of the presence or absence of the before-end variation information, "-" is set so that the pending display mode is not set for the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69". , a hold display mode of "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

On the other hand, if the current success/failure judgment result is "Small hit B, D", the previous win information is "None", the pre-end information is "Yes", and the value of the state production counter 223o is "0 to 49". ”, the pending display mode “5” is defined in the range “50-69”, the pending display mode “6” is defined in the range “70-99”, and the pre-end information is “None”. In this case, the value of the state rendering counter 223o is in the range "0 to 49", the pending display mode "2" is in the range "50 to 69", the pending display mode "4" is in the range "70 to 99" "9" is specified in the range.

Furthermore, if the hit information is "Yes", regardless of the presence or absence of the before-end variation information, "-" is set so that the pending display mode is not set for the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69". , a hold display mode of "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

If the current win/fail judgment result is "miss", the hit information is "none", and the before-end information is "present", the value of the status effect counter 223o is displayed pending in the range of "0 to 49". In the case where the mode "1" is defined as the pending display mode "4" in the range of "50 to 69", "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99", and the pre-termination information is "none", The pending display mode "1" is defined when the value of the state effect counter 223o is in the range "0 to 69", and "9" is defined when the value is in the range "70 to 99".

Furthermore, if the hit information is "Yes", regardless of the presence or absence of the before-end variation information, "-" is set so that the pending display mode is not set for the value of the state effect counter 223o in the range of "0 to 69". , a hold display mode of "9" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

As explained above, in the second embodiment, the pending display selection table 222aa is written so that the same display mode is selected for the same conditions as the status display mode of the first embodiment described above. There is. In addition, if the winning information obtained earlier includes information on winning a jackpot (win/fail judgment result), the display formats that can be set (selected) for subsequent pending symbols will be limited (pending display The configuration is such that only aspect "9" (see FIG. 15) is selected. Therefore, when configured to select and display a pending display mode for each of a plurality of pending symbols, it is possible to provide a performance that does not give a sense of discomfort.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 92, in the second embodiment, the display mode is configured to be varied with high probability for the won winning information (reserved symbols) obtained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a determination means for determining whether or not to actually display the pending display mode selected in the pending display selection table 222aa, and a display mode of the pending symbols may be varied according to the determination result of the determining means. Alternatively, if the acquired value of the state rendering counter 223o is within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 39"), the pending display mode may be configured not to be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the future game content (whether or not the time-saving state is completed or not, and whether there is a jackpot win or not) from being easily grasped just by the display mode of the reserved symbols.

Furthermore, regardless of the information included in the winning information (reserved symbols) that has been won, the configuration is such that the pending display mode "9" is selected with a predetermined probability, so that future games can be determined only by the display mode of the pending symbols. It is possible to further prevent the content (whether or not the time-saving state has been completed, whether or not a jackpot has been won) from being easily grasped.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 91(b). FIG. 91(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

When the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa receives a command related to the second special symbol among the reserved balls number commands transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa controls the second special symbol according to the content indicated by the command. This is a counter for updating the number of reserved balls in a symbol. Note that the detailed configuration is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a described above except that the target command is changed, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The right-handed game flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to play a right-handed game (second game), and when set to on, the right-handed game (second game) is executed. This indicates that it is the period during which a game (game) is to be executed. This right-hitting flag 223ab indicates that the received winning information is the special figure 1 (special figure 1) in the gaming state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 1 special symbol) (in other words, it is winning information related to special symbol 2 (second special symbol)) (S3002: No in FIG. 101(a)), it is set to on. Ru.

Then, it is referenced in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101(b)) and the hold display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to OFF when the time saving state ends.

The left-handed game flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that it is a period for the player to play a right-handed game (second game), and when set to on, the left-handed game (first game) is executed. This indicates that it is the period during which a game (game) is to be executed. This left-handed hitting flag 223ac indicates that the received winning information is the special figure 1 (special figure 1) in the gaming state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 1 special symbol)-related winning information (S3002 in FIG. 101(a): Yes), it is set to ON.

Then, it is referenced in the game content determination process (S2352 in FIG. 101(b)) and the hold display setting process (S2353 in FIG. 102), and is set to OFF when the time saving state ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the player can select the game method (first game or second game) when the time saving state is set by adjusting the direction in which the ball is actually launched. It is configured as follows. Then, the game method selected by the player is determined to be an appropriate game method during the time-saving state, and the game method not selected by the player is determined to be an inappropriate game method during the time-saving state. .

In addition, in the second embodiment, the ball entrance into which the ball first enters after the time saving state is set is in the left-handed hitting area (the area where the ball can flow down (pass through) when playing a left-handed game). A first ball entry port 64 (see FIG. 2) provided, or a second ball entry port provided in a right-handed hitting area (an area through which a ball can flow down (pass) when playing a right-handed game). 640 by analyzing the winning command sent from the main control device 110, and determines an appropriate gaming method during the time-saving state based on the determination result. It is sufficient that the configuration is such that it is possible to determine whether or not an appropriate game is being played in the set state, and to issue an error notification if an appropriate game is not being played. Configurations other than the configuration of the form may be used.

For example, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the gaming method during the time saving state can be controlled during a jackpot game or during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set. It may be configured such that the selection is made by operating the operating means, and an appropriate gaming method is set when the ball passes through a gaming area corresponding to the gaming method selected by the operating means. Thereby, it is possible to more reliably set the gaming method desired by the player as an appropriate gaming method.

Further, the configuration may be such that the player can variably set an appropriate gaming method while the time saving state is set. With this configuration, by varying the gaming method while predicting the update status of the time-saving end condition, the player can be actively selected to play (by setting the gaming method) so as to achieve a more advantageous time-saving state. game). In this case, changing the game method is set by operating the operating means, and during the game method change period, no matter which game (first game, second game) is executed, it will be inappropriate. It is better to configure it so that it is not recognized as a game. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly change the gaming method performed during the time saving state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when one ball enters a specific ball entry hole, an appropriate game method is set according to the type of ball entry hole into which the ball entered. However, for example, an appropriate gaming method may be set depending on the type of ball entrance into which a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls have entered after the time saving state is set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a ball from being launched into a gaming area corresponding to an undesired gaming method due to an erroneous operation, thereby preventing an incorrect gaming method from being set.

The time saving start flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the time saving state has been set as the gaming state, and when set to ON, it indicates that the time saving state has been set. This time-saving start flag 223ad determines that a time-saving related command has been received (S2215: Yes in FIG. 99) in command determination processing 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99), which will be described later. When it is determined that the information is time saving setting information (information indicating that a time saving state has been set) (S2252 in FIG. 99: Yes), it is set to ON (S2253 in FIG. 99).

Then, it is referred to in the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104) (S3301 in FIG. 104), and when it is determined that it is on, 4000 is set to the value of the time saving clock counter 223ae, which will be described later (S3302 in FIG. 104). ), the flag is set to off (S3303 in FIG. 104). In other words, this time-saving start flag 223ad is used to determine that the time-saving state has been set on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and only when it is set to on, the dedicated processing (time-saving state is set).

The time-saving counter 223ae is a counter for continuing the elapsed period (elapsed time) since the time-saving state is set, and is set to a predetermined value when the time-saving state is set, and subtracts that value. This is used to determine the elapsed period since the time saving state was set. This time-saving clock counter 223ae is set to a value of 4000 when it is determined that the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to on (S3301: Yes in FIG. 104) in the performance setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104). is set (S3302).

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 93 and FIG. 28 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (in the normal state), a left-handed game is performed and a special 1 game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 is performed. be done. Here, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type.

Specifically, if the jackpot type of the won jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state will be set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot will end. It is configured to later shift to a time saving gaming state (time saving state) which is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, if a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal state and a second special symbol is drawn, and if a jackpot is won, the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. It is composed of This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state (normal game), the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640. (difficult to do so), the act of drawing the second special symbol in the normal state is considered a fraudulent act, and the player who committed the fraudulent act is not allowed to play an advantageous game. This is a measure for this purpose. As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the time saving state, the lottery (game) with the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, there was a risk that the lottery for the second special symbol would be drawn by fraudulent acts. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn by a fraudulent act.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the winning information of the second special symbol (winning information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640) is not stored on hold, for example, it saves time. The winning information of the second special symbol is held and stored during the state (the state where the electric accessory 640a is likely to be moved to the protruding position), and the second special symbol is drawn by lottery during the normal state based on the winning information that was stored withholding. (variation) is never executed. Thereby, when a normal game is being played, it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entry port 640 by the opening operation (protruding action) of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640. Therefore, a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 is performed.

Here, if a small hit is won by drawing the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (ball passes through a specific area), a jackpot game is started. In this embodiment, when a jackpot game is set (executed) via a small jackpot game, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid giving discomfort to a player who has won a big win through a small win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the small winning type (small winning A to C) that is set when a small winning is won by drawing the second special symbol, it is possible for the ball to pass through a specific area during the small winning game. It is configured such that small winning games with different probability (probability that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball) are executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special symbol (the first special symbol or the first The number of fluctuation end conditions (first time saving end condition) that are satisfied when the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol (2 special symbol) reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times), and the lottery number of the special symbol (second special symbol). As a result, the operation number end condition (second time saving end condition) that is satisfied when the number of small winning wins (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small winning winning) reaches the specified number of operations. , is set.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the second time saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the small winning type (small winning game to be executed) that is set when a small winning is won. There is.

Then, in the state (situation) where the time saving state is set, before the above-mentioned first time saving end condition or second time saving end condition is met, the special symbol jackpot lottery is won (per type). Or, if you win a small hit in a lottery with special symbols, and during a small winning game corresponding to the won small winning (small winning game depending on the type of small winning), pass the ball into a specific area and win the jackpot. In the case of acquisition (obtaining the second type winning), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) where the time saving state is set, before acquiring the first type or the second type winning, the above-mentioned first time saving ending condition (ending condition according to the number of changes of the special symbol) or the second If any of the time saving end conditions (end conditions corresponding to small win winning (operation of the V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted (set) from the time saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured in this way has a possibility of ending the time saving state ( It is possible to provide the player with both the possibility that the second time-saving termination condition will be met (the possibility that the second time-saving termination condition will be satisfied) and the possibility that the second type of winning will be won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game (the lottery of the second special symbol) executed during the time saving state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, if the time saving state is set and a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, that is, a state where a left-handed game is being played, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls) is the upper limit. number (4 pieces), you win a jackpot, and you win a jackpot in the "first special symbol variation (lottery) during the time-saving state" that can be executed when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Even so, it is possible to suppress providing the player with a result that is disadvantageous to the player.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in second embodiment>
In the control processing in the second embodiment, the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processing is the same as in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 98. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) is changed to special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 94) in the first embodiment described above, and the special symbol variation process is executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 94). Execute the time saving number update process 2 (see FIG. 95) instead of the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42), and change the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) to starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96), The difference is that prefetching process 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed instead of the prefetching process (see FIG. 44) executed in the start winning process. Furthermore, the difference is that the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 98), and the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). This special symbol variation process 2 differs from the above-described special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) in that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is acquired and the time saving number update process The difference is that the time saving number update process 2 (see FIG. 95) is executed instead of .

When this special symbol variation process 2 (S154) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed similarly to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S202, it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S202). :No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are acquired (S251), and the obtained value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is obtained. It is determined whether (N2) is greater than 0 (S252).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is not 0 (S252: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (S253), and the value has been changed by calculation. A special symbol 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is set (S254). After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S254, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (S255). Thereafter, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S252, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) is performed. Similarly, the processes of S206 to S210 are executed, and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), steps S211 to S213 are performed similarly to the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). processing is executed. In the processing of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot (S213: Yes), the processing of S214 to S218 is executed in the same way as the special symbol variation processing described above (see FIG. 38), and the main processing end.

In the process of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S213: No), the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, time saving number update process 2 is executed (S271). This time saving number update process 2 (S271) is a process for updating the time saving number of times and setting the gaming state to the normal state, similarly to the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42). Details of this time saving number update process 2 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

When the time saving number update process 2 (S271) ends, this process ends after executing the processes of S220, S221 and S218 similarly to the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38).

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the time saving number update process 2 (S271) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154 in FIG. 94) will be explained. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving number update process 2 (S271). This time saving number update process 2 (S271) is different from the time saving number updating process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above, by subtracting the time saving number also with respect to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and setting the time saving end condition. The difference is that it is changed to determine whether or not the following holds true, but the other processing is the same. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving number update process 2 (S271) is executed, the processes of S601 and S602 are executed similarly to the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42) of the first embodiment described above. After completing the process of S602, it is then determined whether the current variation is a variation of the special map 2 (S651). If it is determined that the current variation is a variation of the special figure 2 (S651: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is subtracted by 1 (S652), and the process moves to S653. On the other hand, in the process at S651, if it is determined that the current change is not a change in special figure 2 (that is, a change in special figure 1) (S651: No), the value of special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to 1. The value is subtracted (S654), and the process moves to S653.

In the process of S653, a remaining time shortening number command indicating the values of various counters is set (S653), and then it is determined whether the value of any one of the shortening time counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0. It is determined (S655). If it is determined that any of the values of the time saving counter 203k, the special figure 1 counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 counter 203ae are not 0 (S655: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S655, if it is determined that the value of any one of the time saving counter 203k, special figure 1 counter 203ad, and special figure 2 counter 203ae is 0 (S651: Yes), the above-mentioned first embodiment Similarly to the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42), the process from S605 to S607 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the contents of the starting prize winning process 2 (S155) will be explained. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the starting winning process 2 (S155). In this starting winning process 2 (S155), in addition to the starting winning process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 43), it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), and the second When a starting prize is entered into the ball entrance 640, a process for suspending the values indicated by various random number counters and a process for pre-reading the lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been suspended. The difference is that a prefetch process 2 is added, and a prefetch process 2 is executed instead of the prefetch process (see FIG. 44).

When starting winning process 2 (S155) is started, first, the process of S701 is executed in the same way as the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S701, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the processes of S702 and S703 described above are executed.

Then, whether there is no winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: No) or even if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), the process moves to S753. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the process starts from S704 described above. The process of S706 is executed.

After completing the process of S706, it is then determined whether the current time is being shortened or a special symbol jackpot is being won (S751). If it is determined that the current time is being shortened or the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S751: Yes), this process is ended. In the process of S751, if it is determined that the present time is not during time saving or special symbol jackpot (S751: No), prefetch process 2 (S752) is executed and the process moves to S753.

In the process of S701, if a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is not detected (S701: No), there is a winning ball into the first ball entry port 64, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is In the process of S753, which is executed when the value (N1) is the maximum value of 4 (S703: No) and when the process of S752 is completed, it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640. It is determined whether or not (S753). In the process of S753, similarly to the process of S701, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 (S753: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ab is acquired (S754), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is obtained (S754). It is determined whether the value (N2) of the number counter 203ab is less than an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S755).

Then, if there is no ball entering the second ball entry port 640 (S753: No), or even if there is a winning ball into the second ball entry port 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is If it is not less than 4 (S755: No), the process moves to prefetch processing 2 (S752). On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S753: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is less than 4 (S755: Yes), the special symbol 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the pitch number counter 203ab is incremented by 1 (S756). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (S757).

The special chart 2 pending ball number command set here is also stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and executed by the MPU 201, similar to the special chart 1 pending ball number command set in the process of S705. In the external output processing (S1501) of the above-mentioned main processing (see FIG. 51), the signal is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab from the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value as the special symbol 2 in the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved pitch number counter 223aa.

After setting the special figure 2 pending ball count command through the process of S757, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (special figure 2 holding first area to special figure 2 holding fourth area) of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203aa of the RAM 203 (S758). In addition, in the process of S758, similarly to the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is referred to, and if the value is 0, the special symbol 2 reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the 2nd area of special drawing 2 is reserved, if the value is 2, the 3rd area of special drawing 2 is reserved, and if the value is 3, the 4th area of special drawing 2 is reserved. , each as the first area.

Next, when the process of S758 ends, the process moves to prefetch process 2 (S752), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of prefetch processing 2 (S752) will be explained with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of prefetch processing 2 (S752). The pre-reading process 2 (S752) in the second embodiment is different from the pre-reading process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 44) to the pre-reading process 2 (S752), which is referred to when there is a new winning in the first ball entry opening 64. In place of the 1 hit random number table 202a, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the fluctuation pattern table 202d (the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2), the 1st win random number 2 table 202aa, the special figure 1 The point of referring to the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, the special figure 1 small winning type selection 2 table 202af1, and the variable pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variable pattern table 202ad1 or time-saving variable pattern table 202ad2), the lottery in the second special symbol The difference is that pre-reading of the result is added, but other than that, they are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When prefetching process 2 (S752) is executed, first, the process of S801, which is the same as the prefetching process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment described above, is executed. In the process of S801, if there is no new prize in the first ball entry port 64 (S851: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S851: Yes), special symbol 1 random number 2 table aa1, special symbol 1 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab1, special symbol 1 small winning type selection 2 table 202af1 and the variation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal variation pattern table 202ad1 or time-saving variation pattern table 202ad2), the lottery result, jackpot type, small win type, and variation pattern are acquired in advance (S852).

Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, small win type, and variation pattern obtained in the process of S852 is set (S853), and the process moves to S854. On the other hand, in the process of S851, even if there is no new winning in the first ball entry port 64 (S851: No), the process proceeds to S854.

In the process of S854, it is determined whether there is a new prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S854). As a result of the determination, if there is no new prize in the second ball entry port 640 (S854: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S854: Yes), special symbol 2 random number 2 table aa2, special symbol 2 jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab2, special symbol 2 small winning type selection 2 table 202af2, and the fluctuation pattern 2 table 202ad (normal fluctuation pattern table 202ad1 or time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202ad2), the lottery result, jackpot type, small win type, and fluctuation pattern are obtained in advance (S855).

Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result, jackpot type, small win type, and fluctuation pattern obtained in the process of S855 is set (S856), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of jackpot control processing 2 (S1554) will be explained. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 2 (S1554). This jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. This process differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in that the time-saving content (time-saving end condition) set at the end of the jackpot control (end timing of the ending effect) is different. .

When the jackpot control process 2 (S1554) is started, first, the same processes as S1601 to S1612 of the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) are executed, and in the process of S1612, it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect. If it is determined (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time is shortened when the jackpot is won (S1651). If it is determined that the winning time is during the time saving period (S1651: Yes), the process moves to S1653. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time when the jackpot is won is not during time saving (that is, the normal game state) (S1651: No), it is determined whether the special game being executed was jackpot C (5R no time saving jackpot). It is determined (S1652).

If it is determined that the jackpot win is in the normal gaming state (S1651: No), and it is determined in the process of S1652 that it is not a jackpot C (5R time saving jackpot) (S1613: No), or in the process of S1651 If it is determined that the winning jackpot is during time saving (S1651: Yes), the time saving end conditions corresponding to each jackpot type are set based on the time saving grant 2 table 202ae (see FIG. 88(d)) (S1653 ).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot win is in the normal gaming state (S1651: No), and it is determined in the process of S1652 that it is a jackpot C (5R time saving jackpot) (S1652: Yes), or S1653 When the processing is completed, the same processing as S1617 to S1620 of the above-mentioned jackpot control processing (see FIG. 52) is executed, and the present processing is ended.

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105, the content of control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the command determination process (see FIG. 56) is replaced with command determination process 2 (see FIG. 99), and the winning information related process (see FIG. 57) is changed. The winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100) has been changed, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) has been changed to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 103), and the performance setting process (see FIG. 63) has been replaced with effect setting process 2 (Fig. 104), detailed explanations have been added for various counter update processes (see Fig. 105 (a)), and details about the effect update process (see Fig. 105 (b)). The difference is that a detailed explanation has been added, but other than that, they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 99, command determination processing 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) executed in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S2163). This command determination processing 2 (S2163) is different from the command determination processing (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above, in which the winning information command is executed when the winning information command is received from the main controller 110. The difference is that the related process (see Figure 57) has been changed to prize information related process 2 (see Figure 100), and the content of the process to be executed when a time saving related command is received has been changed. are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) is executed, the same processes in S2201 to S2209 as the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above are executed. In the process of S2209, if it is determined that the command received this time is a winning information command (S2209: Yes), winning information related processing 2 is executed (S2251), and then the process moves to S2217. The contents of the winning information related process 2 executed in the process of S2251 will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

On the other hand, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a winning information command (S2209: No), then the same command determination process as in the first embodiment (S2113 in FIG. 56) is performed. If the processes of S2211 to S2215 are executed, and in the process of S2215 it is determined that the command received this time is a command related to time saving (S2215: Yes), then the content of the received time saving related command is set to the time saving setting. It is determined whether the information is information transmitted from the main controller 110 when the time saving state is newly set (S2252).

In the process of S2252, if it is determined that the information received this time is time-saving setting information (S2252: Yes), the time-saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S2253), and the time-saving setting information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g is set. The information is updated (S2254) and the process moves to S2217. In addition, in the process of S2254, values serving as time saving end conditions are set in various counters based on information included in the time saving related command received this time. Specifically, for example, a command including time saving setting information transmitted at the timing of the end of a jackpot game where the jackpot type is jackpot B (time saving corresponding to the content set in S1614 of jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 98) When a command indicating information is received, the time saving grant 2 table 202ae is referred to, and the value of the special figure 1 counter 203ad is set to ``30'', the value of the special figure 2 counter 203ae is set to ``80'', and the small winning A counter is set. The value of 203m is set to "1", the value of small win B counter 203n is set to "3", and the value of small win D counter 203ac is set to "20" (see FIG. 88(d)).

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. After completing the process in S2254, the process in S2217 is then executed and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2252, if it is determined that the information included in the time-saving related command received this time is not time-saving setting information (S2252: No), that is, the information included in the time-saving related command received this time is If it is information (time saving update information) that updates the time saving information (number of fluctuations and number of small winnings) corresponding to the time saving ending condition (bringing it closer to the time saving ending condition), the information regarding the time saving ending condition has already been set. Since the time-saving game has been started, the process of S2253 for setting the time-saving start flag to ON is skipped and the process proceeds to S2254.

In the process of S2254 in this case, time saving update information is read out of a plurality of pieces of information included in the time saving related command received this time, and a process of updating the target time saving information is executed. Furthermore, if the updated time-saving information indicates that the remaining period until the time-saving end condition is satisfied is less than the predetermined period, this fact is stored in the time-saving information update area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of winning information related processing 2 (S2251) will be explained. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning information related processing 2 (S2251). This winning information related process 2 (S2251) is for setting a display mode that shows updated content of time saving information based on winning information, in contrast to the winning information related process of the first embodiment described above (see S2210 in FIG. 57). The difference is that the content of the processing is different, and that a process for setting the gaming method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) during the time saving state is added. ing. Since the other elements are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When winning information related processing 2 (S2251) is executed, first, information stored in the gaming state storage area 223f (information indicating the currently set gaming state) is read out (S2301), and the read information is It is determined whether the gaming state indicated by is a gaming state indicating a time saving state (whether it is in a time saving state) (S2302). If it is determined in the process of S2302 that the current time is not in the time saving period (S2302: No), after executing the same process as S2312 of the winning information related process (see FIG. 57) of the first embodiment described above, the process in S2311 Shift to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the currently set gaming state is a time saving state (currently in a time saving state) (S2302: Yes), then a gaming state setting process is executed (S2351). This game state setting process (S2351) determines whether the game method selected by the player in the current time saving state is the first game (left-handed game) or the second game (right-handed game). , executes processing for setting an appropriate game in a time saving state, and detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 101(a).

After completing the process of S2351, a game content determination process is executed next (S2352). This game content determination process (S2352) is a process for determining whether an appropriate game is being executed during the time saving state.For details, please refer to FIG. 101(b). This will be explained later. When the process of S2352 is finished, a hold display setting process is executed (S2353), and then the process moves to S2311, and this process ends.

The pending display setting process (S2353) executes a process for setting the display mode of the pending symbol displayed in response to the winning information command received this time based on the winning information included in the winning information command received this time. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101(a), the contents of the gaming state setting process (S2351) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 of 100 points) will be explained. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gaming state setting process (S2351). In this gaming state setting process (S2351), the gaming method (playing direction) to be executed during the current time saving state is set based on the winning information included in the winning information command received first after the time saving state is set. Execute the process to do so.

When the game state setting process (S2351 in FIG. 101(a)) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001). This time saving start flag 223ad is set when it is determined in command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) that time saving setting information has been received (S2252 in FIG. 99: Yes), that is, when a new time saving state is set. This is set to on (S2253 in FIG. 99). That is, in the process of S3001, it is determined whether the time saving state is immediately after being set.

In the process of S3001, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3001: No), next, the winning information received this time is related to special symbol 1 (first special symbol lottery (variation) (winning information to show the result) (S3002), and if it is determined that it is related to special drawing 1 (S3002: Yes), in the state where the time saving state is set, the Since this indicates that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 provided, the left-handed batting flag 223ac is set to ON (S3003), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF (S3004), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the winning information received this time is not related to special pattern 1 (it is related to special pattern 2 (second special pattern)) (S3002: No), the time saving state is set. Since this indicates that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 disposed in the right-handed hitting area, the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to ON (S3005), and the process moves to S3004. Then, this process ends. Further, if it is determined in the process of S3001 that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3001: No), this process is directly ended.

In other words, in the second embodiment, the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON after the time saving state is set until the first winning information command is received, and while the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the area where the ball entry port into which the ball entered is located (right-handed hitting area, left-handed hitting area) A game in which a ball is fired at a target is set to be an appropriate game during the time saving state, and the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF.

Thereby, the timing for setting the gaming method during the time saving state can be limited to the period in which the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON.

Next, referring to FIG. 101(b), the content of the game content determination process (S2352) executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be explained. Give an explanation. FIG. 101(b) is a flowchart showing the content of the game content determination process (S2352). In this game content determination process (S2352), it is determined that the winning information included in the winning information command received this time is winning information based on the appropriate gaming method for the gaming method that was set as the appropriate gaming method during the time saving state. and executes processing to set an error command based on the determination result.

When the game content determination process (S2352) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning information received this time is related to the special symbol 1 (winning information for indicating the lottery (fluctuation) result of the first special symbol). S3101), if it is determined that it is related to the special figure 1 (S3101: Yes), it is determined whether the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set on (S3102). In the process of S3102, if it is determined that the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set to ON (S3102: Yes), the left-handed game (first game) in the time saving state is set as an appropriate game. (with the left-handed batting flag 223ac on), a winning command indicating that the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 into which a ball fired in a left-handed game can be received is received. Therefore, this process is ended without determining that there is an abnormality.

On the other hand, in the process of S3102, if it is determined that the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is not set on (set to OFF) (S3102: No), a right-handed hitting game (second game) in the time saving state is set to be an appropriate game (with the right-handed hitting flag 223ab turned on), a ball launched from a left-handed game can enter the first ball entrance 64. Since this is a case where a winning command indicating a ball has been received, it is determined that an appropriate game is not being played, a display error command is set (S3104), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in the process of S3101, the winning information received this time is not related to special drawing 1 (winning information for indicating the lottery (fluctuation) result of the first special symbol), that is, the winning information received this time is related to special drawing 2. (Winning information for indicating the lottery (variation) result of the second special symbol) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to on (S3103). ), if it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to on, this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is not set on (set to OFF) (S3103: No), the left-handed hitting game (first game ) is set to be an appropriate game (with the left-handed hitting flag 223ac turned on), a ball launched in a right-handed game can enter the second ball entrance 640. Since this is a case where a winning command indicating a ball being entered is received, it is determined that an appropriate game is not being played, a display error command is set (S3104), and this processing is ended.

As explained above, if a winning command is received after setting an appropriate gaming method in the current time saving state by the gaming state setting process (S2351) shown in FIG. 101(a), By the game content determination process (S2352) shown in b), it is possible to determine whether the game method during the time saving state is appropriate. With this configuration, even if the player is configured to be able to select the game method (the direction in which the ball is fired) at his or her own will, the game method selected by the player can be set as the appropriate game method, and the game method can be set as the appropriate one. Since it is possible to set an error command indicating an abnormality when a game method other than the above is executed, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the winning information related process 2 (see FIG. 100), after the game state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)) is executed, the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) is performed. Since the configuration is such that the game content determination process is not executed when neither the right-handed hitting flag 223ab nor the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set to on, There is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101(b), if one flag (one of the right-handed hitting flag 223ab and left-handed hitting flag 223ac) is not set to on, the other flag (right-handed hitting flag 223ab and left-handed hitting flag 223ac) is not set to ON. Since it can be determined that the other of the mid-field flag 223ab and the left-field mid-field flag 223ac is set to on, the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)), an appropriate gaming method in the time saving state is set based on winning information included in one winning information command. Therefore, when the game content determination process (see FIG. 101(b)) is executed, an appropriate game method has already been set (either the right-handed playing flag 223ab or the left-handed playing flag 223ac is on). ).

On the other hand, for example, as a game state setting process (see FIG. 101(a)), multiple winning information commands are received, and based on the winning information included in the received winning information commands, appropriate settings are made in the time saving state. When executing the process of setting a gaming method, an appropriate gaming method for the time saving state is set until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the time saving state was set (until the winning information command is received a predetermined number of times). That means you won't be able to do it. In such a case, a flag (unset flag) is provided to indicate that the gaming method has not been set, and if the unset flag is on, that is, the gaming method has not been set, the game content determination process is performed. (See FIG. 101(b)) may be configured to be skipped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an error command from being set based on a game (launching a ball) executed while a game method is being determined.

In the second embodiment, the winning information command received from the main control device 110 includes a gaming method (left-handed game (first game) or right-handed game (second game)) during the time saving state. Since the determination is made based on winning information, there is no need to collect dedicated information to determine the gaming method, and the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a means for detecting passage of a ball in an area through which a ball flowing down a left-handed hitting area reliably passes, and a means for detecting passage of a ball through an area through which a ball flowing down a right-handed hitting area reliably passes. It is also possible to provide a means for detecting the passing of a ball, collect the detection results of each means, and set an appropriate gaming method during the time saving state. Although this configuration requires the addition of a dedicated configuration and complicates the control process, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming method selected by the player, which improves the accuracy of setting the gaming method. can be increased.

Furthermore, in order to determine the gaming method selected by the player, the detection result of a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance is used. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the pending display setting process (S2353) executed in the prize information related process 2 (S2251 in FIG. 100) of the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) will be explained. . FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold display setting process (S2353). In this pending display setting process (S2353), when a proper winning information command is received during the time saving state, the update status of the time saving state and the jackpot game are displayed for the pending symbols displayed corresponding to the winning information command. A process for setting a performance mode of a pending suggestion performance that indicates the possibility of execution is executed.

When the pending display setting process (S2353) is executed, first, the winning information command received this time is a command that includes winning information related to special symbol 1 (winning information for indicating the lottery (variation) result of the first special symbol). If it is determined that it is related to the special figure 1 (S3201: Yes), it is determined whether the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set on (S3202). In the process of S3202, if it is determined that the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set to ON (S3202: Yes), the winning information command received this time is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, and will be described later. The process moves to S3203 to S3206, and a process for executing a reservation suggestion effect using the reservation symbol corresponding to the received winning information command is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if it is determined that the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is not set to on (set to off) (S3202: No), the winning information command received this time is (Because the winning information command for the first special symbol was received while the right-handed game (second game) was determined to be an appropriate game), the process of S3203 to S3206 is performed. Skip this and end this process.

Similarly, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not winning information related to special drawing 1 (S3201: No), that is, winning information related to special drawing 2 (second special symbol). If it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to on (S3207), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S3207: Yes), the winning prize received this time is Since the information command is a winning information command corresponding to an appropriate game, the process moves to steps S3203 to S3206, which will be described later, and executes processing for executing a reservation suggestion effect using a pending symbol for the received winning information command. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, if it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is not set to on (set to off) (S3207: No), the winning information command received this time is (Because the winning information command for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) was received while the left-handed game (first game) was determined to be an appropriate game). This process ends by skipping the processes of S3203 to S3206.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, when a winning information command is received, the winning information included in the received winning information command is the winning information corresponding to the gaming method selected by the player. It is configured to determine whether or not the winning information is the winning information that corresponds to the gaming method selected by the player, and to execute a presentation (suspended display presentation) using the winning information included in the winning information command only if the winning information corresponds to the gaming method selected by the player. ing. This prevents the execution of the hold display performance for games that the player does not intend (for example, games where the player makes a mistake in operating the operation handle 51 and fires a ball in a direction different from the intended direction). can do.

Therefore, by continuing the gaming method that the player has selected, he or she can acquire information advantageous to the player (information provided to the player through the hold display effect), which increases motivation for the player. It is possible to make the player play the game. In addition, in the second embodiment, when the player plays an unintended game (playing method different from the playing method selected by the player), the hold display effect is not executed. It is only necessary to configure the system so that the information that the player can obtain is disadvantageous compared to if he had played the game method he had selected himself.For example, the frequency of occurrence of hold display effects may be lowered, The content of the information displayed in the display mode may be reduced, or the display mode may display information that is different from reality.

Returning to FIG. 102, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3203, the information in the temporary time saving information update area 223i is updated based on the winning information received this time (S3203), and the pending display mode is changed using the pending display selection table 222aa based on the contents of the temporary time saving information updating area 223i. (S3204), stores the selected pending display mode in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3205), sets a display pending display command corresponding to the selected pending display mode (S3206), This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134) in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S2134). This variable display setting process 2 (S2134) replaces the effect setting process (S2804 in FIG. 63) with respect to the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 62) of the first embodiment described above. (see S2851), but other than that, they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the effect setting process 2 (S2851) in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2851). This effect setting process 2 (S2851) is different from the effect setting process (S2804) of the first embodiment described above in that the process executed when the time saving state is set as the gaming state is different. are doing. Other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, when the effect setting process 2 (S2851) is executed, the same processes of S2901 and S2902 as the above-mentioned effect setting process (see FIG. 63) are executed, and the information read in the process of S2902 is information indicating the time saving state. If it is determined that this is not the case (S2902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2902 that the read information is information indicating time saving information (S2902: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301). Here, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that it is the timing to set the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation after the time saving state is set, ( S3301: Yes), the process moves to S3302.

In the process of S3302, the value of the time-saving clock counter 223ae is set to 4000, the time-saving start flag 223ad is then set to OFF, and a display game selection command is set (S3304), and this process ends. The display game selection command set in the process of S3304 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) of the main process (see FIG. 55) of the audio lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display game selection command, the display control device 114 displays a game selection screen (see FIG. 82(b)) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 for allowing the player to select the game method in the time saving state. ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3301: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving clock counter 223ae is larger than 0. It is determined (S3305).

The time saving clock counter 233ae measures a predetermined period (4 seconds in this embodiment) from the timing of setting the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the time saving state is set, and in the process of S3305, It is determined whether the current timing has exceeded the above-mentioned predetermined period (4 seconds in this embodiment).

In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving time counter 223ae is larger than 0, that is, 4 seconds have elapsed from the timing of setting the fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation after the time saving state was set. If it is determined that the selection screen (see FIG. 82(b)) for selecting a gaming method is continuously displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S3305: Yes), the period is in progress. Therefore, the processing of S3306 to S3308 is skipped and the present processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving clock counter 223ae is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S3305; No), the pending value included in the winning information storage area corresponding to the current change The mode information is read (S3306), a production mode corresponding to the read pending mode information is set (S3307), a display production command indicating the selected production mode is set (S3308), and this process is ended.

As explained above, when setting the variable display corresponding to the special symbol lottery (variation), the performance mode corresponding to the variable display is set based on the reservation mode information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Therefore, it is possible to perform a variable display of the effect mode associated with the hold effect display already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the hold mode information. Therefore, a related performance can be executed for a long period of time (a period in which a plurality of special symbol variations are performed), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as described above in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 102), winning information corresponding to the gaming method selected by the player (first game (left-handed game) or second game (right-handed game)) Since the configuration is such that the hold mode information is set only for the player, the special symbol fluctuation that is targeted when the effect setting process (S2851 in FIG. 104) is executed corresponds to the gaming method selected by the player. If it is a special symbol variation that is not displayed, no performance mode is set for the variation display because no reservation mode information is set in the winning information storage area 223a. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect using a predetermined effect mode (see FIGS. 83(a) and (b)) only with special symbol variations corresponding to the gaming method selected by the player, and the effect is easy to understand for the player. can be provided.

Next, various counter update processing 2 (S2161) executed in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55) will be explained with reference to FIG. 105(a). FIG. 105(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processing 2 (S2161). This various counter update process 2 (S2161) is different from the various counter update process (S2111) of the first embodiment described above in that a process for updating (subtracting) the value of the time saving counter 223ae is added, Other elements are the same. Detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

When various counter update processing 2 (S2161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving clock counter 223ae is larger than 0 (S3401), and if it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S3401: Yes), The value of the time-saving counter 223ae is decremented by 1 (S3402), and the values of other various counters are then decremented (updated) by 1 (S3403), and this process ends. Note that the details of the various counters updated in the process of S3403 are the same as the various counter update processes of the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3401: No), the process of S3402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3403, and then This process ends. In other words, the value of the time saving time counter 223ae is decremented (updated) by 1 each time various counter update processing 2 (S2161) is executed at 1 millisecond intervals, so the effect setting processing 2 ( The value of 4000 set in step S2851 in FIG. 104 is a value for measuring a period of 4 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105(b), the contents of the effect update process 2 (S2162) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 105(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 2 (S2162). This effect update process 2 (S2162) is different from the effect update process (S2112) of the first embodiment described above in that a process for setting the display mode of the guide display area Dm2 during the time saving state is added. However, everything else is the same. Detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

When the effect update process 2 (S2162) is executed, it is first determined whether the time saving state is set (S3501), and if it is determined that the time saving state is set (S3501: Yes), then the time saving state is set. It is determined whether the value of the time counter 223ae is greater than 0 (S3502). That is, it is determined whether a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol variation during the time saving state was executed.

In the process of S3502, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving clock counter 223ae is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3502: No), then it is determined whether the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is set to on. (S3503), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S3503: Yes), a right-click command for display is set (S3504), and the process moves to S3508. When this right-click command for display is set, it is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the right-handed display command, it displays the words "Right-handed" in the guide display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the characters "Right-handed" to the player. A guide to execute a hitting game is displayed.

In the process of S3503, if it is determined that the right-handed hitting flag 223ab is not set to on (set to off) (S3503: No), then the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is set to on. If it is determined that it is set to on (S3505: Yes), a left-handed command for display is set (S3506), and the process moves to S3508.

When a left-handed display command is set in the process of S3506, it is sent to the display control device 114 through the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the left-handed display command, it displays the characters "left-handed" in the guide display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the characters "left-handed" to the player. A guide to execute a hitting game is displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3505, if it is determined that the left-handed hitting flag 223ac is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3505; No), that is, the time saving state is set and then stored on hold. The change in the special symbol that was previously in effect has been executed, but if 4 seconds have passed without a new ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, a display standby command is set. (S3507), and the process moves to S3508. The display standby command set in the process of S3507 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby command, it continuously displays the character "?" in the guide display area Dm2 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and prompts the player. The screen for selecting a gaming method (see FIG. 82(b)) is continuously displayed.

With this configuration, even if the game is temporarily interrupted for a restroom break or the like after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to easily restart the game.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, different time-saving ending conditions are set for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the player The game is configured so that a game in which the lottery of special figure 1 is executed (left-handed game) and a game in which the lottery of special figure 2 is executed (right-handed game) can be selected.

This allows the player to play a plurality of types of games while the time-saving state is set, so it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when a game (left-handed game) in which the lottery of special figure 1 is executed is executed during the time saving state, a game (right-handed game) in which the lottery of special figure 2 is executed is executed. It is configured so that the time-saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied and it is easier to win a small win, which is easier to obtain a second type win, than in the case of doing so.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select between a game that is likely to result in a jackpot but is easy to end the time-saving state, and a game that is unlikely to be a jackpot but is difficult to end the time-saving state. You can choose any game that suits your convenience.

In the second embodiment, the state in which the time saving state is set is defined as an advantageous state, and the player is allowed to select multiple types of games in the advantageous state. For example, a gaming state in which a variable probability state is set may be set as an advantageous state, or a gaming state in which a variable probability state and a time saving state are set may be set as an advantageous state.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, in a state where an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state) is set, if an end condition for ending the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving end condition) is satisfied, the player is disadvantaged. Although the configuration is such that a gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when an advantageous state ending condition that ends an advantageous state is satisfied, It may be configured to shift to a super advantageous state that is even more advantageous. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to quickly move from an advantageous state to a super advantageous state.

Furthermore, as advantageous state ending conditions that end an advantageous state, there are unfavorable end conditions that, when met, set an unfavorable state (for example, a normal state) that is more disadvantageous than an advantageous state, and super advantageous states that are more advantageous than an advantageous state (for example, a normal state). For example, it may be configured to set an advantageous ending condition (potential state), or depending on the gaming method selected, in addition to the ease of establishing an advantageous state ending condition, an unfavorable ending condition may be set. It is preferable to configure the configuration so that the ease with which the conditions and the advantageous end conditions are satisfied is also made different.

With this configuration, the subsequent gaming results can vary greatly depending on the gaming method selected during an advantageous situation to the player, giving the player the feeling of playing the game on their own. can be given.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the player can select two types of gaming methods (left-handed game, right-handed game), but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of three or more types of gaming methods can be selected. It may be configured to select a gaming method.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 124. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a second variable winning device 1650 is provided instead of the V winning device 650, and the game content is based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. They differ in the following points.

Specifically, in the first embodiment described above, when a small win is won as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol, a small win game is executed in which the V winning device 650 is opened, and during the small win game, The V winning device 650 has two types of winnings in which when a winning ball passes through a specific area, a jackpot game is executed (set) after the small winning game ends, but in the third embodiment, the small winning The difference is that a small winning game that opens the second variable winning device 1650 is only executed when the player wins, and a specific area is not provided in the second variable winning device 1650. In other words, the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a pachinko machine 10 that does not have two types of playability is used.

First, with reference to FIG. 106, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 106 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that a second variable winning device 1650 is provided instead of the V winning device 650, and the configuration of the electric accessory 640a They are different in that the following has been changed, and the other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 106, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a ball flowing down the right side area (right-handed hitting area) of the variable display unit 80 passes through the through gate 67, and an electric accessory is placed on the downstream side of the ball. A second ball entry port 640 labeled 640a is provided. A plurality of general winning ports 63 are provided on the downstream side thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, similarly to the first embodiment described above, while the normal state is set as the gaming state, the balls are flown down to the left side area (left hitting area) of the variable display unit 80. A game in which the first ball entrance 64 is aimed at by a left-handed game, that is, a game in which the lottery of the first special symbol is the main game, is performed, and while the time saving state is set as the game state, the variable display unit 80 is The game is configured such that a right-handed game in which the ball flows down to the right side area (right-handed area) aims at the second ball entrance 640, that is, a game in which the lottery of the second special symbol is the main feature.

The details are omitted as they have been explained in the first embodiment, but in the second embodiment as well, the lottery with the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, right-handed games are more advantageous to the player than left-handed games.

Here, as shown in FIG. 106, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is located in the left side area (to the left of the lower end position of the variable display unit 80) where the balls fired in the left-handed game can flow down. A second variable winning device 1650 is provided. This second variable winning device 1650 is used to perform an opening operation in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won by drawing a second special symbol.

Although details will be described later, in the small winning game of the third embodiment, an opening operation (opening period is 0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second variable winning device 1650 is executed. , and, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable prize winning device 1650 is arranged in a position that is difficult for the ball to reach.

In other words, if the configuration is such that only the second special symbol out of a plurality of special symbols wins a small hit, and a right-handed game is performed to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball may fall. A second variable winning device 1650 is provided in a left-handed hitting area where there is no left-handed hitting area. With this configuration, when a small winning game is executed, it is difficult for a ball to enter the second variable winning device 1650.

In the third embodiment configured as described above, the small winning of the second special symbol can be used only to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state. Therefore, the bonus (prize ball) is not given to the player by the small winning game that is executed by winning the small winning, so even if the winning probability is set so that the small winning is won with a high probability, the player It is possible to prevent a situation in which benefits are excessively granted.

Furthermore, since the period during which the second variable winning device 1650 is open is set to a short period (0.09 seconds to 0.11 seconds) during which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second variable winning device 1650, there is a high probability of a small win. Even if the probability of winning is set so that the player will win, it is possible to prevent a situation in which excessive benefits are given to the player.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the second variable prize winning device 1650 is provided in the left side area which is different from the game area (right side area) where the ball launched in the right-handed game in which the second special symbol is drawn. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is playing a right-handed game to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is being opened (playing a small winning game). A small winning game can be executed without giving a feeling of discomfort.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the second variable winning device 1650 is configured to be visible to the player, but in addition to that, for example, the glass unit 16 and the second variable winning device A decorative member may be provided between the second variable winning device 1650 and the second variable winning device 1650 so that it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the second variable winning device 1650. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for players who play right-handed games to notice that the second variable winning device 1650 is being opened (playing a small winning game). A small winning game can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, a light-emitting member (for example, an LED) is provided in the decorative member provided near the second variable winning device 1650 to allow the player to visually recognize the light-emitting state, and in some cases when a small winning game is executed, It is preferable to configure the light emitting member to operate (light emit light). Specifically, there is a small win determining means for determining that a condition for executing a small winning game is satisfied, and when the small winning determining means determines that a small winning game will be executed, a predetermined lottery is executed. It is preferable to provide a lottery means for doing so, and a light emission control means for controlling the operation of the light emitting member when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result.

With this configuration, it is possible to create a difference between the number of small winning games that are actually executed and the number of small winning games that are visible to the player (by operating the light emitting member), and the number of small winning games that are actually executed is different. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the game has been executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict when the time-saving end condition will be satisfied (when the time-saving state will end) based on the number of times the small winning game has been executed (the number of times small winnings have been won). I can do it.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the light emitting control means executes control to cause the light emitting member described above to emit light even when the small prize has not been won. As a result, the number of times the light-emitting member emits light can be greater than the number of times the small win is actually won, so it is possible to save time based on the number of times the small win game is executed (the number of times the small win is won). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the end condition will be met (when the time saving state will end).

In this case, the light-emitting member is activated when there is a special symbol lottery result that corresponds to the special symbol variation being executed or a special symbol lottery result that corresponds to the winning information that has been stored and is a jackpot. It is best to configure it in a way that makes it easier. In other words, it is preferable to configure the light emitting operation that is executed to notify you when you win a small winning game based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

As a result, when the light emitting member emits light, it is difficult for the player to understand whether a small winning game has been executed, whether a special symbol jackpot has been won, or whether it is just a decorative effect. . Furthermore, there is a state that is disadvantageous to the player (execution of a small winning game), that is, a state in which a factor that ends an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (time saving state) has been established, and a state that is advantageous to the player ( Since the light-emitting member emits light when the player wins a jackpot, the player can be interested in the game result after the light-emitting member emits light.

In addition, when the above-mentioned structure is used, the timing at which the light emitting control means causes the light emitting member to emit light is determined by the timing at which the small winning is won (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the timing at which the small winning game is started, or the timing at which the small winning game is started. , various timings may be set, such as the timing during the small winning game, the timing after the small winning game ends, or the timing when the special symbol variation is being executed, or a predetermined timing may be set. You may also set .

Furthermore, the light emitting control means may be configured to vary the conditions for causing the light emitting member to emit light based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. In this case, for example, if a predetermined operating condition (for example, an operation of pressing the frame button 22 10 times or more in 2 seconds (repeat operation)) is satisfied, the number of operations of the light emitting member and the number of small winnings will be different. It is preferable that the light emission be controlled so as to approximate (approximately than when the predetermined operating condition is not satisfied). Thereby, the player can be made to actively operate the operating means, and the player can be motivated to participate.

In addition, by using the light-emitting operation of the light-emitting member described above, for example, the situation until the time-saving end condition is met (remaining number of small winnings) and the type of small winning of the small winning this time are notified (suggested) to the player. ). Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in the details of the light emitting operation of the light emitting member.

In addition, in the third embodiment, by making it difficult for the player to understand whether there is a small win or not, it is made difficult to understand the end timing of the time saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, and creates a sense of tension. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the player is notified that he/she has won a small win, the player is not informed of the type of small win that has been set for the small win. It may be configured so that it is not notified, or it may be configured so that the player is notified even of the type of small win. In this case, in order to notify the player that he or she has won the small hit, the third symbol display device 81 displays a specific display mode (for example, a display mode that allows the player to identify that he or she has won the small hit). It is preferable that the third symbol is stopped and displayed) or that the second variable winning device 1650 is provided in the right-hand hitting area. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the number of small winnings during the time saving state, so the player can play the game while predicting the end timing of the time saving state.

<About the production content in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110, a description will be given of the production performed during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. The figures shown in each of FIGS. 107 to 110 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the basic configuration is the same as the first embodiment described above. , the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the winning information of the second special symbol can also be stored and stored, so the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The difference is that the remaining time shortening suggestion performance (performance for suggesting to the player the remaining period of the time saving state) performed is a performance using the hold storage information of the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the short remaining time suggestion performance in the third embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the content of the performance used in the first embodiment.

FIG. 107(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen displayed when the time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 107(a), when the time saving state is set, an effect start screen for explaining the content of the effect executed during the time saving state is displayed. In the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the small display area Dm11 has a plurality of situation display modes: a first situation display mode Dm11a, a second situation display mode Dm11b, a third situation display mode Dm11c, and a fourth situation. Display mode Dm11d is displayed.

Each of these multiple status display modes corresponds to the degree to which multiple time-saving termination conditions are met (progress until the time-saving termination conditions are met), and each display mode corresponds to the degree of progress until the time-saving termination conditions are met. The display mode is configured to vary accordingly. Specifically, a bomb having a fuse of a predetermined length is displayed as each status display mode, and when the first variation is executed after the time saving state is set, the fuse is lit.

Among the time-saving termination conditions, the display manner of the situation display mode corresponding to the time-saving termination condition that is likely to be satisfied is changed so that the length of the fuse is shorter than that of the other situation display modes. By varying the display mode of the situation display mode in this way, it is possible for the player to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends through the performance (remaining time shortening suggestion performance) performed on the third symbol display device 81. , the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 107(a), on the performance start screen (time-saving start screen), in the center of the main display area Dm, in order to inform the player of the content of the remaining time-saving suggestion performance, a message saying "Even one explosion" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. Then, the words ``Time saver completed'' and ``Jackpot after completion of digestion'' will be displayed. As a result, if even one of the bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 explodes, the time saving state will end, and that the flames of the multiple bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 can be extinguished. You can easily figure out that you will hit the jackpot.

The state shown in FIG. 107(a) is a state in which the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol 2 variable display area Dm1b, that is, the variation of the special symbol is executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the plurality of bombs displayed in the small display area Dm11 are lit. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation does not start after the jackpot game has ended and the time saving state is set (the state in which the special symbol fluctuation does not start after the jackpot game ends), the time saving state standby is performed. The screen may be configured to display a screen indicating that a short remaining time suggestion effect that starts changing the special symbols is to be executed.

As you play the game with the time-saving state set and the time-saving end condition approaches (the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, or the number of small winnings during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number) Then, as shown in FIG. 107(b), a combination status display mode Dm11z for suggesting (notifying) this is displayed in the small display area Dm11. FIG. 107(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a display screen during the time reduction suggestion effect during the time reduction state.

This combination status display mode Dm11z is such that the progress status of multiple time saving end conditions is set as the pre-end condition (for example, if the number of changes of the special symbol is set to 50 as the end condition of the number of changes, the number of changes of the special symbol is set to 30). If the number of small win A wins is set to 5 as the condition for ending the number of wins, this will be displayed if the condition is satisfied when the number of small win A wins reaches 3. be. Therefore, by displaying the combination status display mode Dm11z in the small display area Dm11, the player can be made aware that the time saving state will end soon.

In addition, by displaying the combined status display mode Dm11z in a state where the progress status of multiple time saving end conditions satisfies the pre-termination condition, if the time saving state ends (among the set time saving end conditions, If any of the time-saving termination conditions are satisfied), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving termination condition was satisfied to end the time-saving state. In other words, as shown in FIG. 107(a), if a plurality of status display modes (Dm11a to Dm11d) whose display modes are variable according to the progress status of each time-saving termination condition are displayed in the small display area Dm11, When the time-saving state ends, it is necessary to execute an effect in which one of the status display modes explodes, so it is easy for the player to know which of the multiple time-saving ending conditions the current time-saving ending condition is. There was a problem that it was understood by

In this way, the player can easily understand which of the multiple time-saving termination conditions the current time-saving termination condition has been established, and the multiple time-saving termination conditions that are set when transitioning to the time-saving state. There was a risk that the conditions could be easily predicted, and even the timing at which the time saving state would end could be easily predicted. In contrast, in the third embodiment, if the pre-termination condition is satisfied for multiple time-saving termination conditions, the player is prevented from grasping the progress status of each time-saving termination condition of transition. For this purpose, the combination status display mode Dm11z is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving termination condition was satisfied to end the time-saving state.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the combination status display mode Dm11z is configured to be displayed only when the pre-termination condition is satisfied for a plurality of time-saving termination conditions, but even if only one time-saving termination condition is met, The combination status display mode Dm11z may be displayed when the pre-condition is satisfied, or the combination status display mode may be displayed when the value corresponding to a specific time-saving termination condition among the multiple time-saving termination conditions satisfies the pre-termination condition. Dm11z may also be displayed.

When the time saving state ends, the screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed. FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the time saving state. FIG. 108(a) shows the display screen when the time-saving end condition is satisfied for one of the winning number end conditions, and the special symbol 2 variable display area Dm1b corresponds to the second special symbol. The third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "341" indicating that the small win has been won, and in the small display area Dm11, a display mode indicating a state in which a bomb has exploded is displayed, and in the main display area Dm. In the center part, the words "End" are displayed to inform the player that the time saving state has ended.

Next, the content of the remaining time shortening suggestion performance for a special situation when the time saving state is set will be explained with reference to FIG. 108(b). FIG. 108(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special figure 1 variation is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a means for holding and storing the winning information of the first special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a means for storing the winning information of the first special symbol. When a jackpot is won and a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot, a special symbol change corresponding to a first special symbol stored on hold may be executed.

Among these, there have been cases where the winning information of the first special symbol that is held and stored includes winning information that will lead to a jackpot (so-called consecutive winnings within holding). In this way, even though the time saving state is set, the next jackpot is not based on the winning information of the special symbol obtained during the time saving state, but based on the winning information that has already been obtained before the time saving state is set. When the game is executed, if a performance that is executed during the time saving state (remaining time shortening suggestion performance) is executed, there will be a contradiction between the content of the performance and the game result, which will reduce the performance effect. There was a problem with putting it away.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, it is determined whether or not there is winning information that will result in a jackpot in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol that is stored on hold, and the winning information that will become a jackpot is determined. If it is determined that there is information, instead of starting (executing) the normal remaining time shortening suggestion effect (see Figure 107(a)), the system is configured to execute a special effect (time saving on hold effect). ing. As a result, if a performance that is executed during a time saving state (remaining time shortening suggestion performance) is executed, a contradiction will occur between the performance content and the game result, and the performance effect will be suppressed from being reduced. A sense of superiority can be given to the player by executing a special performance in the rare situation of winning the jackpot again in the reserved memory after the jackpot ends.

When the time-saving on-hold effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the combined status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and the characters "!?" are displayed in the combined status display mode Dm11z. The characters ``Something is wrong'' are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to suggest to the player that a presentation different from the normal remaining time shortening suggestion presentation is being performed. . By performing such a display, it is possible for the player to easily understand that a different performance than usual is being performed.

In addition, in FIG. 108(b), since the first special symbol is being varied as described above, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is varying in the special symbol 1 variation display area Dm1a. The third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 2 variable display area Dm1b.

Note that the display screen shown in FIG. 108(b) is also executed, for example, when it is determined that any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied based on the winning information that has already been obtained before the time-saving state is set. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the screen shown in FIG. 108(b) is displayed after the jackpot ends, so that the jackpot can be achieved immediately (before all the special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the winning information that has been stored on hold are finished). Since it is possible to notify the player that either the player has won or the time saving state has ended, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the performance that will be executed next.

When the time saving state ends from the state shown in FIG. 108(b), a display screen similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed to notify the player that the time saving state has ended. do. On the other hand, if the player wins the jackpot from the state shown in FIG. 108(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 109(a) is displayed. FIG. 109(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the timing when a jackpot of the first special symbol is won after time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 108(b).

As shown in FIG. 109(a), when a jackpot is won with the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information of the first special symbol that has already been stored in the time saving state, the special symbol 1 variation display area In Dm1a, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "777" indicating a jackpot, and the extinguished combination status display mode Dm11z is displayed in the small display area Dm11. Then, in the center of the main display area Dm, the words "extinguishing completed" and "jackpot" are displayed to indicate that the player has won the jackpot.

As explained above, in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot (at the timing when the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot is executed), the time saving state is held and stored. The content of winning information is determined, and if it is determined that there is winning information that will lead to a jackpot, a special performance (time saving suggestion performance) that is different from the normal time saving performance (remaining time saving suggestion performance) is performed. The system is configured to execute (on hold).

By configuring in this way, a jackpot may be won immediately after the remaining time shortening suggestion performance is executed, and a situation may occur where the content of the remaining time shortening suggestion performance and the game result do not match, or a situation may arise where the performance content of the remaining time shortening suggestion performance does not match the game result. Therefore, it is possible to suppress forcibly changing the performance content of the short remaining time suggestion performance, and it is possible to suppress a reduction in the performance effect for the short remaining time suggestion performance.

Next, the content of the remaining time shortening suggestion performance when the number of special symbol variations until the end of the time saving state is determined will be explained with reference to FIG. 109(b). FIG. 109(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the remaining number of time reductions is determined during the time reduction state. In the third embodiment, as in the above-described first embodiment, the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state include a variation number end condition that is satisfied when a special symbol variation is executed, and a special symbol lottery. It is configured such that multiple winning number end conditions are set, which are satisfied when a small win is won in , and the time saving state ends when any one of the multiple set time saving end conditions is satisfied. With this configuration, it is made difficult for the player to predict the period during which the time-saving state will continue to be set (the timing at which the time-saving state will end), thereby increasing the interest of the game during the time-saving state. .

Even when a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set in this way, the period until the time-saving state ends may be determined. For example, as the game progresses during the time saving state, the number of times the special symbol changes is 3 times until the condition for ending the number of changes is met, and the number of small winnings won is 5 times until the condition for ending the number of winnings is met. In this case, since you can only win a small hit at most once for each change in the special symbol, the time-saving state will occur if the special symbol lottery is executed three times, regardless of the special symbol lottery result. It will end.

In the third embodiment, when the period (the number of special symbol variations) until the end of the time saving state is determined, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the remaining number of special symbol variations is displayed in the small display area Dm11. (In the example of FIG. 109(b), "3 times") is displayed. With this configuration, in a gaming machine where the timing at which the time saving state ends can be set in a complex manner by setting multiple time saving end conditions, when the timing at which the time saving state ends is determined in advance, Since the timing can be clearly notified to the player, it is possible to have the player play the game while being aware of the remaining period of the time saving state.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the period until the time saving state ends (the number of changes in the special symbol) is determined, the remaining number of changes in the special symbol (in the example of FIG. 109(b)) is displayed in the small display area Dm11. Since "3 times") is displayed, the period during which this display is displayed is a period in which the time saving state will not end based on the number of small wins, no matter how many times the small win is won. Therefore, while the remaining number of special symbol variations is displayed in the small display area Dm11, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win many small wins.

In addition, when such an effect display is used in the above-mentioned first embodiment or second embodiment, there is a possibility of winning the second type winning by winning the small winning, so it is more motivating. You can play games. In other words, in the first and second embodiments described above, if you win a small win during the time saving state, you will have a chance to win two types of wins and a pinch when the time saving state ends. , as shown in FIG. 109(b), the time saving state is a period that does not end based on the small winning winning (a period that is determined to end based on the number of changes of the special symbol). By executing the notification effect (remaining period confirmation notification effect), while the remaining period confirmation notification effect is being executed, if you win a small win, you will only have a chance to win the second type of win. Since the player can be informed, the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to win many small wins.

In addition, in the third embodiment, different time-saving end conditions are set based on the jackpot type set for the won jackpot, and in some of them, after the time-saving state is set, a predetermined end condition is set. Each time-saving end condition may be set so that the time-saving end condition does not hold during the period.

The third embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect for informing the player that there is a period after the above-described time-saving state is set in which the time-saving end condition cannot be satisfied. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen at the time of time saving after the end of the jackpot game in which jackpot D is set as the jackpot type.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113(a), but in the third embodiment, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot D, the time saving state remains until the special symbol variation is executed at least 20 times. Time-saving termination conditions are set so that the process does not terminate. In other words, the period from when the time saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times is a period during which the time saving state continues regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the current time is a specific period after the time saving state is set (a period during which the time saving state continues regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol). A performance (invincibility performance) is performed to notify the player of this fact. During this invincibility effect, an unlit bomb is displayed in the small display area Dm11, informing the player that this is a period in which the bomb will not explode (a period in which the time saving state will not end). There is.

Then, a remaining period mode 820 for informing the remaining period of the invincibility effect is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 110(a), the words "Until the fuse is lit..." and "20" are displayed as the remaining period mode 820. In this way, by executing a performance (invincibility performance) to show the player a period in which the time saving state will not end, it is possible to provide a period during which the player can play games with peace of mind during the time saving state. .

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. . Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 19(a)) in the first embodiment described above, a first random number 3 table 202ba is used instead of the first random number table 202a, and a small winning type selection table is used. The difference is that a small winning type selection 3 table 202bb is provided in place of 202f, a time saving award 3 table 202bc is provided in place of the time saving award table 202e, and an open scenario 3 table 202bd is provided in place of the open scenario table 202g. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba will be explained with reference to FIG. 112(a). FIG. 112(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 112(a), the first winning random number 3 table 202ba defines a special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 and a special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 112(b). FIG. 112(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1. This special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 has the same contents as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 20(b)) of the first embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. do.

FIG. 112(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2. This special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2 differs from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 20(c)) of the first embodiment in that the range of values that are determined to be small wins is different. Different, otherwise the same. Specifically, in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ba2, the acquired first random number counter value C1 defines a small hit determination value in the range of "5 to 499".

In other words, in the third embodiment using the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2, when executing the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined that there is a probability (ratio) of 5/1000 (1/200) that it is a jackpot. However, it is determined that it is a small hit with a probability (ratio) of 495/1000. That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the player is configured to win a jackpot or a small jackpot with a probability of 1/2.

Note that the range in which a jackpot or small win is determined is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and may be defined so that the probability of a small win is lower than the probability of a jackpot, or the range in which a jackpot or small win is determined The range that is determined to be a small hit may not only be defined by continuous values, but may also be defined with intervals. In addition, in the third embodiment, the same table is used to determine whether the jackpot or small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state that is set. For example, depending on the gaming state that is set, It may be configured to use different tables to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit.

Specifically, the range in which a small hit is determined is wider for a table used when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state than for a table used when the normal state is set as the gaming state. It is best to configure it like this. With this configuration, even if the small winnings used to end the time saving state are configured to occur frequently during the time saving state, it is possible to suppress the situation from occurring frequently in the normal state. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), in the third embodiment, there is no chance of winning a small hit by drawing the first special symbol, and only by drawing the second special symbol. Although the configuration is configured so that the first special symbol is won, it may also be configured such that the small win is won by drawing the first special symbol.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the time saving state is set and the winning information of the first special symbol stored on hold includes winning information for winning a small hit, the time saving state is immediately terminated. be able to. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to use it, for example, in a gaming machine that can provide a gaming state advantageous to the player if the time-saving state ends immediately.

Specifically, in addition to the normal state and the time-saving state, the gaming states include a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low as a result of the lottery of special symbols (normal state: low probability state of special symbols, normal symbol The high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state: the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the regular symbol, Potential state: High probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) can be set, and if the short time end condition is met during the period in which the variable probability state is set, the probability state will be set. It is preferable to configure the game so that the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

According to such a gaming machine, it is advantageous for the player that the time-saving termination condition is satisfied in a state where a variable probability state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is rich in interest. In addition, in such a gaming machine, if the winning information of the first special symbol that is held and stored when the variable probability state is set includes winning information of a small win, the variable probability state is immediately terminated. By using the configuration that causes the transition to the probability state, it is possible to make the player play the game with an intention to memorize the winning information of the first special symbol up to the upper limit (4 pieces) before the probability change state is set. .

Next, the contents of the small winning type selection 3 table 202bb will be explained with reference to FIG. 113(a). FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning type selection 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 113(a), the small win type selection 3 table 202bb has different contents for each small win type from the small win type selection table 202f (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above. Other than that, for example, the small win type defined for the range of the small win type counter value C5 is the same, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Unlike the first embodiment described above, the third embodiment does not include the V winning device 650, and is a game in which a ball passes through a specific area during a small winning game to win a jackpot (two types of winning). Therefore, each small winning type defined in the small winning type 3 table 202bb is different in that the details of the jackpot game set at the time of acquiring the 2nd type winning are not associated with each small winning type.

FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving grant 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 113(b), the time-saving grant table 202bc is set corresponding to each jackpot type with respect to the time-saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 21(d)) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the stipulated contents of the time-saving termination conditions are different.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, among the time saving end conditions, as a change number end condition that is established based on the number of changes of the special symbol, "100" is set to the value of the time saver counter 203k, and a small As the winning number end condition established based on the number of winnings, the value of the small winning A counter 203m is "1", the value of the small winning B counter 203n is "10", and the value of the small winning C counter 203ac is "50". Specified to be set. In other words, after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A ends, "the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100", "the small win A (the small win that is set) is won once", "the small win The termination condition is met when either of the following conditions is met: 10 wins for winning B (a small win that is set) or 50 wins for small win C (a small win that is set). A time saving state (hereinafter referred to as time saving state a) is set.

In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, among the time saving end conditions, the change number end condition that is established based on the number of changes of the special symbol is that "50" is set to the value of the time saver counter 203k, and the number of small winning wins As the winning number end condition that is established based on the above, the value of the small win A counter 203m is set to "5", the value of the small win B counter 203n is set to "5", and the value of the small win C counter 203ac is set to "25". It is stipulated as follows. In other words, after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot B ends, "the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 50", "small win A (small win set) is won 5 times", "small win The termination condition is met when either of the following conditions is met: "Win the small win B (a small win that is set) 5 times" or "Win the small win C (a small win that is set) 25 times." A time saving state (hereinafter referred to as time saving state b) is set.

When the jackpot type is jackpot D, among the time saving end conditions, the change number ending condition is established based on the number of changes of the special symbol, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is set to "100", based on the number of small winnings won. As the winning number ending condition that is satisfied, it is specified that the value of the small win A counter 203m is set to "20" and the value of the small win C counter 203ac is set to "80". In other words, after the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A ends, "the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100", "the small win A (the small win that is set) is won 20 times", "the small win A time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as time-saving state c) is set in which an end condition is satisfied when any of the following conditions is satisfied: 80 winnings (small winnings for which win C is set) are met.

As explained above, in the third embodiment, as well as each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a plurality of different time-saving ending conditions are set according to the jackpot type set at the time of winning a jackpot, and the plurality of time-saving ending conditions that are set are Since the time saving state is configured to end when any of the conditions is established, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be diversified.

Also, depending on the time-saving states (a to c) set according to the jackpot type, the time-saving end conditions that are likely to be met and the conditions that are met are different, so the time-saving state is determined based on the number of changes in the special symbol during the time-saving state. Since it is possible to generate a mixture of cases in which the time-saving state ends and cases in which the time-saving state ends based on the number of small winnings during the time-saving state, patterns in which the time-saving state ends can be diversified.

In the third embodiment, the number of items set as time saving end conditions is varied depending on the set time saving state. Specifically, in time-saving states a and b, time-saving ending conditions are set that can be met if small win B is won, while in time-saving state c, time-saving ending conditions are set that can be met if small winning B is won. is configured so that it is not set.

With this configuration, even if the player knows the type of small winning game to be executed during the time saving state (the first symbol corresponding to the small winning type set for the won small winning is stopped and displayed) Even if the player understands the type of small winning game by grasping the first symbol that is stopped and displayed, the player can check whether the type of small winning game is set as a time-saving ending condition or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

In addition, in the present third embodiment, when a small win is won in a special symbol lottery, time-saving ending conditions are set for all possible small win types (small wins A to C). However, as a configuration other than this, for example, you can add a small win type that is set when a small win is won (for example, small win X to Z), and for the added small win type, a time saving The configuration may be such that no termination condition is set.

By configuring in this way, when winning a small win during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state is nearing the end (time saving end condition) or not. To make it difficult for a player to understand the timing at which a time saving state ends.

In addition, in this case, the small winning game to be executed is between the small winning type for which the time saving end condition is set (for example, small winning A) and the small winning type for which the time saving ending condition is not set (for example, small winning X). It is preferable that the contents of the operations are the same (including errors that cannot be discerned by the player). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from determining the current small win type based on the operation content during the small win game.

Next, the contents of the open scenario 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the open scenario 3 table 202bd. As shown in FIG. 114, the opening scenario 3 table 202bd differs from the contents of the opening scenario table 202g described above in that the contents of opening scenarios defined corresponding to small wins A to small winnings C are different. , the difference is that the content of the opening scenario defined corresponding to jackpot D is different, and other elements are the same.

Here, the above-mentioned differences among the contents of the open scenario 3 table 202bd will be explained. Note that detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted. As described above, the third embodiment is a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won, in which the second variable winning device 1650 is opened (a small winning game that opens the second variable winning opening). is configured to run. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, even if a ball enters the second variable winning device 1650 during a small winning game, it is configured such that a second type winning cannot be won.

Therefore, in the opening scenarios defined corresponding to the small winnings A to C of the opening scenario 3 table 202bd, only the operation contents for one round (1R) corresponding to the small winning game are defined. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 114, in the third embodiment, an opening scenario is defined in which an error is provided to a degree that is difficult for the player to identify, corresponding to the small wins A to C.

Specifically, in the opening scenario corresponding to small win A, an opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the second variable winning hole of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.1 seconds, and the opening corresponding to small winning B is performed. In the scenario, an opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is 0.11 seconds, and in the opening scenario corresponding to the small win C, the opening operation of the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 is executed. Each opening scenario is defined so that an opening operation in which the opening time of the variable winning hole is 0.09 seconds is executed.

By configuring in this way, although different opening scenarios are defined for each small winning type, it is difficult to grasp the small winning type corresponding to the current small winning game from the contents of the small winning game that is actually executed. I can do it.

In addition, in the present third embodiment, in order to make it difficult to grasp the small winning type corresponding to the current small winning game from the contents of the small winning game to be executed, the second variable winning prize is set in correspondence with each small winning type. The opening scenario is defined in which the opening time of the second variable prize opening of the device 1650 is varied to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to discern. ) and the period of the end interval (0.5 seconds) may be varied to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to identify them. Moreover, each time may be made different so that the period of the opening scenario defined corresponding to each small winning type is the same.

In addition, by configuring a structure to prescribe an opening scenario for a specific small winning type among a plurality of small winning types, which is different from other small winning types (different to the extent that the player can easily identify it). , the player may be configured to identify that a specific small winning type has been set, and in this case, it is different from other small winning types (different to the extent that the player can easily identify it). It is preferable to configure a time-saving end condition to be set for the small winning type for which the opening scenario is defined. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the timing at which the time saving state will end by understanding the details of the small winning game to be executed.

Furthermore, the same opening scenario may be defined for multiple small winning types, and in this case, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied while the small winning game is being executed, the opening scenario may be set according to the small winning type. It is better to configure the system so that different effects are performed. Here, as a predetermined condition that is set while the small winning game is being executed, for example, a ball enters the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650 during the small winning game, or during the small winning game. It is preferable to set a condition that is satisfied when the player operates the frame button 22. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the period when the small winning game is being executed (during the predetermined period).

In addition, the effects that are executed when a predetermined condition is met during a small winning game include, for example, effects that make different types of sounds when the ball passes through (enters) a predetermined area, and a frame button. In addition to the effects of different sounds and lights based on the operation of 22, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be used to perform different effects.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 115(a). FIG. 115(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the status display selection table 222b and the final status display selection table 222c are deleted from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 26(a)) in the first embodiment, and a time saving remaining period determination table 222ba is added. They are different in that they are Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 116, the contents of the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba will be explained. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving remaining period determination table 222ba. This time-saving remaining period determination table 222ba contains game information (number of changes of special symbols, number of small winnings) corresponding to various time-saving ending conditions set in the set time-saving state, i.e. , the information included in the time saving information update area 223g updated based on the time saving related commands indicating the value of the time saving medium counter 203k, the value of the small winning A counter 203m, the value of the small winning B counter 203n, and the value of the small winning C counter. Based on this, it is determined that the time saving state has passed for a certain period of time.

By referring to this time-saving remaining period determination table 222ba, the current time-saving state can be roughly classified. By varying the performance mode according to the classification, it becomes possible to roughly notify the player of the progress of the time saving state. Although the third embodiment is configured to determine the progress of the time saving state into two stages, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine the progress into three or more stages, for example. . In this case, for example, it is preferable to define a plurality of threshold values in the time-saving remaining period determination table 222ba, and to determine the current progress based on the relevant threshold values.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 115(b). In the third embodiment, a remaining time shortening number determination flag 223ba and a determination fluctuation flag 223bb are added to the second embodiment described above. The other configurations are the same as those in the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining time shortening number confirmation flag 223ba is a flag to indicate that the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time saving state ends is determined, and is turned on when the number of special symbol fluctuations until the time saving state ends is determined. It is set. In other words, in the third embodiment, as the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, there is a change number end condition that is satisfied when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, and a small hit is won during the time saving state. Since a condition for ending the number of winnings that is satisfied when the number of times that the winning number is reached reaches a predetermined number is set, it is possible to determine the remaining period until the end of the time saving state during the entire period in which the time saving state is set. It is configured so that it is not possible.

That is, for example, if a value of "100" is set as the end condition for the number of fluctuations, and a value of "2" is set as the end condition for the number of winnings, the special symbol will fluctuate 100 times, or the small win will be 2. Since the time-saving state ends when the player wins twice, the remaining period of the time-saving state cannot be determined unless the period until the second small win is determined. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned time-saving termination conditions are set, if the game progresses during the time-saving state and the special symbol changes are executed 98 times, and the small win has not been won even once, the time-saving state ends. It is confirmed that the number of special symbol fluctuations will be 2 until the end of the special symbol.

In this way, when the remaining period until the end of the time-saving state (the number of special symbol remaining changes) is determined, the time-saving state ends abruptly by executing a performance that notifies the player. The situation can be brought under control. Furthermore, as in the third embodiment, when the time-saving end conditions include a variable number end condition and a winning number end condition, when the remaining period until the end (special symbol remaining number of fluctuations) is determined, By executing a performance that notifies the player of this fact, it is possible to make the player expect to win a small win without creating a sense of crisis that the time-saving state will end.

This remaining time shortening number confirmation flag 223ba is set to ON when it is determined in the time saving remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123) that the remaining time shortening number has been determined, and is set to ON in the production setting process 3 (see S2871 in FIG. 122). (S3356 in FIG. 122). Then, when it is determined that the remaining time shortening number confirmation flag 223ba is set to ON (S3356 in FIG. 122: Yes), a display time saving command indicating the remaining time shortening number (special symbol variation number) is set (FIG. 122). S3357). As a result, the number of special symbol variations until the time saving state ends on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed (see FIG. 109(b)).

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the time saving state is determined, a remaining time shortening number confirmation flag 223ba is provided as a flag to indicate that. For example, it is sufficient to have a configuration for notifying the remaining period of the time saving state, for example, the number of remaining time saving times of the special symbol 1 to indicate that the number of remaining fluctuations of the first special symbol until the time saving state ends has been determined. A confirmation flag and a special symbol 2 remaining time reduction number confirmation flag to indicate that the number of remaining fluctuations of the second special symbol until the end of the time reduction state are confirmed are provided, and the special symbol 1 remaining time reduction number confirmation flag is turned on. When set to , the remaining number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is displayed, and when the special symbol 2 remaining time shortening number confirmation flag is set to on, the remaining number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is displayed. You may do so.

With this configuration, for example, a game in which only the first special symbol is varied (lottery) during the time saving state and a game in which only the second special symbol is varied (lottery) are set separately. In the machine, it becomes possible to display the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol according to the content of the game actually executed (the type of special symbol that is actually drawn by lottery).

The fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is a flag to indicate that the period from when the time-saving state is set until the time-saving end condition is met at the shortest is longer than a predetermined period, and is a flag that indicates that the period from when the time-saving state is set until the time-saving end condition is met at the shortest is longer than a predetermined period. This is set to ON when the number of symbol variations is 15 times or more. This definite fluctuation flag 223bb is a value corresponding to the values of various counters indicating time saving end conditions in the definite fluctuation determination process (see S3063 in FIG. 124) executed in the time saving remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123). If it is determined that the minimum value of is 15 or more (S3653 in FIG. 124: Yes), a display time saving command corresponding to the minimum value is set (S3654 in FIG. 124) and turned on (S3654 in FIG. 124). S3655).

Then, if it is determined that the minimum value indicating the values of various counters indicating the time saving end condition is not 15 or more (S3653 in FIG. 124: No), a time saving command for display that does not indicate the minimum value is set (see FIG. 124, S3656), and in the time-saving remaining period determination process (see S3358 in FIG. 123), if a plurality of pre-termination conditions are satisfied (S3602 in FIG. 124), it is set to OFF (see S3608 in FIG. 123).

This makes it possible to notify the player of a period during which the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied after the time saving state is set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy about the time saving state ending immediately after the time saving state is set. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind during the time saving state (without worrying that the time saving state will end).

In the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to set the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb on by referring to the values of all counters set corresponding to all the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state. However, it is only necessary that the configuration is such that it is possible to determine the period during which the player can play the game during the time saving state with peace of mind. A time-saving state determining means for determining a time-saving end condition is provided, and it is determined whether or not to set the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb on by referring only to the value of the counter corresponding to the time-saving end condition determined by the time-saving state determining means. Alternatively, a determination means for determining a time-saving termination condition that cannot be satisfied in the current time-saving state may be provided, and only the value of the counter corresponding to the time-saving termination condition determined by the determination means is eliminated. The configuration may also be such that it is determined whether or not to set the confirmed fluctuation flag 223bb on.

<About the control process in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment>
In the control processing in the third embodiment, the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processing is the same as in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120. In the third embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is changed to timer interrupt processing 3 (see FIG. 118), and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) is changed to timer interrupt processing 3 (see FIG. 118). ) In place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 43), the special symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 119) and the starting winning process executed in the second embodiment described above The difference is that the process 2 (see FIG. 96) is executed and the small hit control process is changed to the small win control process 3 (see FIG. 120), and the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, detailed description of the contents of the start-up winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above will be omitted.

First, the contents of timer interrupt processing 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing 3. In this timer interrupt processing 3, in place of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37) of the first embodiment described above, special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38) and start prize winning processing (see FIG. 43) are performed. The special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 119) and the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above are executed, and the V entrance passing process (see FIG. 47) and the V passing process The difference is that (see FIG. 48) is not executed.

When this timer interrupt process 3 is executed, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed similarly to the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 37). When the process of S103 is completed, special symbol variation process 3 is executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (S174). Details of the special symbol variation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 119. Thereafter, instead of the starting winning process (see FIG. 43), starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) executed in the second embodiment described above is executed (S155). The details of this start-up winning process 2 are the same as in the second embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processes of S106 and S107 are executed in the same manner as the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 37) described above, and then S110 of the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 37) described above is executed. The process of S110, which is the same as the process of , is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 (S174) will be explained with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 3 (S174). In this special symbol variation process 3, in contrast to the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38), the point of acquiring the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab and the small hit start setting The difference is that instead of processing, the start of a small win is set.

When this special symbol variation process 3 (S174) is executed, the processes of S201 and S202 are executed similarly to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S202: No), the process from S251 which is the same as the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 94) of the second embodiment described above is performed. The process of S255 is executed. The details of the processing in S251 to S255 are the same as in the second embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Thereafter, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S252, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0 (S252: No), the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 38) is performed. ), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), S211 to S220 are performed similarly to the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). processing is executed. In the process of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S220: Yes), a small win opening scenario corresponding to the small win type set corresponding to the won small win is selected. The settings are made with reference to the open scenario 3 table 202bd (S271). Next, the start of a small hit is set (S272), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set to ON (S273). After that, the small winning time saving update process is executed (S274), and this process is ended. This small hit time saving update process (S274) is a small win executed in the small hit start setting process (FIG. 40, S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment described above. This process is the same as the winning time saving update process (FIG. 41, S405), and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the contents of the small hit control process 3 (S1555) will be explained. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the details of the small hit control process 3 (S1555). This small hit control process 3 (S1555) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, in place of the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment. This is a process to be executed, in which the process related to the V flag 203i and the V pass flag 203j is deleted from the above-mentioned small win control process (see FIG. 53), and the target to be operated during the small win game is changed to the V winning device. The difference is that a second variable winning device 1650 is used instead of 650.

When the small win control process 3 (S1555) is started, first, the same process as S1701 to S1705 of the above-mentioned small win control process (see FIG. 53) is executed, and in the process of S1705, the second variable prize opening is opened. If it is determined that it is the timing (the timing to open the winning hole of the second variable winning device 1650) (S1705: Yes), the process of S1706 which is the same as the process of S1706 of the above-mentioned small win control process (see FIG. 53) is performed. The process is executed, and then the process ends. In addition, the processing of S1701 to S1706 executed in the small win control process 3 is to perform the operation of opening the second variable winning opening of the second variable winning device 1650, and the small winning of the first embodiment described above is performed. Although the object of operation is different from that of the control process (see FIG. 53), since the control contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the process of S1705, if it is not the second variable prize opening opening timing (S1705: No), the same process as S1711 to S1715 of the above-mentioned small hit control process (see FIG. 53) is executed. In the process of S1715, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1715: Yes), the process of S1720 which is the same as the process of S1720 of the above-mentioned small hit control process (see FIG. 53) is executed, and then, This process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment configured as described above is configured to be able to set a normal state and a time saving state as the gaming state, and during the period when the normal state is set, the pachinko machine 10 provided in the left area A left-handed game is performed in which a ball is entered into the first ball entry hole 64 and a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is executed. If so, a right-handed game is performed in order to execute a second special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

The time saving state, which is a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, is a time saving ending condition for ending the time saving state, that is, a variation number ending condition that is established based on the number of variations of the special symbol (number of drawings), Alternatively, the setting is continued until any of the winning number end conditions that are established based on the number of winnings of small winnings in the lottery of the second special symbol is satisfied.

By changing the contents of the time-saving termination conditions depending on the type of jackpot won, the configuration is made so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the time-saving state ends (the period during which the time-saving state continues to be set). are doing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the advantageous gaming state will continue for a long time.

In addition, even if a time-saving end condition is set that makes it difficult to end the time-saving state, the time-saving state may be ended early depending on the lottery result of a special symbol, or a time-saving end condition that makes it easy to end the time-saving state is set. Also, it is possible to continue the time-saving state for a long period of time depending on the lottery result of a special symbol, so the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is longer than a gaming machine where the time-saving state is set for a predetermined specific period of time. It is possible to make the player expect to continue playing the game.

<About the control process in the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124, the content of control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be explained. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the command determination process (see FIG. 56) is replaced with command determination process 3 (see FIG. 121), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) is changed to The difference is that setting process 3 (see FIG. 122) is used, and the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, command determination processing 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) executed in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 55) will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S2183). This command determination process 3 (S2183) is the same as the command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) of the above-described second embodiment in contrast to the command determination process (S2113 in FIG. 56) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the winning information related process (see S2251 in FIG. 100) is executed, and the content of the process executed when a time saving related command is received has been changed, but other than that, they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 3 (S2183 in FIG. 121) is executed, the command determination process 2 (S2163 in FIG. 99) of the above-described first embodiment (S2113 in FIG. 56) or the second embodiment (S2163 in FIG. 99) is executed. If the command received this time is determined to be a time-saving related command in the process of S2215 (S2215: Yes), then the contents of the time-saving information update area 223g are executed. After updating, the process moves to S2217. That is, in the third embodiment, when a command related to time saving is received, the received command is stored as is, instead of performing a process of changing the corresponding flag or counter as in the first embodiment described above. Processing is executed.

The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to grasp the time saving state using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g. In addition, in the third embodiment, when a command related to time saving is received as in the first embodiment described above, processing is performed to vary the corresponding flag and counter as in the first embodiment described above. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the processing of effect setting processing 3 (S2871) will be explained. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 3 (S2871). In this performance setting process 3 (S2871), the progress of the time saving state (the situation until the time saving end condition is met (remaining number of changes) and the number of changes after the time saving state is set) is based on the progress of the time saving state. A mode of presentation for indicating the remaining period is set.

When the performance setting process 3 (S2871) is executed, first, the information stored in the gaming state storage area 223f is read out (S2901), and then it is determined whether the read information is in the time saving state (S2902). . If it is determined that the time saving state is not present (S2902: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving state is in effect (S2902: Yes), the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is read out (S3351), and the special symbol type (special figure 1 , or special drawing 2), the lottery result is extracted from the variation pattern (S3352), and it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied with this variation (S3353).

As a result of the determination in S3353, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is met (S3353: Yes), a time saving command for display indicating the end of time saving is set (S3355), and this process ends. In the process of S3354, if it is determined that the time reduction end condition is not satisfied (S3354: No), then it is determined whether the remaining time reduction number confirmation flag 223ba is set to on (S3356), If it is determined that it is set to on (S3356: Yes), a time saving command for display indicating the number of remaining time saving times is set (S3357), and this process ends.

Then, in the process of S3356, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number determination flag 223ba is not set to ON (S3356: No), a time reduction remaining period determination process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 123, is executed (S3358). , this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the contents of the time saving remaining period determination process (S3358) will be explained. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving remaining period determination process (S3358). In this time saving remaining period determination process (S3358), the current time saving period is determined according to the time saving information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, that is, the time saving information updated based on the command transmitted from the main controller 110. Processing is executed to determine the situation and set the performance mode based on the determination result.

When the time-saving remaining period determination process (S3358) is executed, first, the time-saving remaining period is determined based on the time-saving remaining period determination table 222ba using the time-saving information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g (S3601). . Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether the remaining period has reached multiple pre-end conditions (S3602), and if it has not reached multiple conditions (S3602: No), a definite fluctuation determination process is executed (S3063). , this process ends. The contents of the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124, but in the state where the time saving state is set, the time saving end conditions (values of various counters) set this time are determined. , When a special symbol variation (lottery) is executed, a process is executed to determine the period (the number of special symbol variations) in which the time saving state does not necessarily end.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining period has reached multiple pre-end conditions (S3602: Yes), it is determined whether the determined fluctuation flag 223bb is set to on (S3604), and the determined fluctuation flag 223bb is set to on. If it is determined that it has not been set (set to off) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the number of remaining time reductions has been determined, and if the number of remaining time reductions has not been determined, the combination A time saving command for display indicating the mode is set (S3605), and this processing is ended. When the display time saving command indicating the merging mode is set in the process of S3605, the merging status display mode Dm11z as shown in FIG. 107(b) is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time-saving ending conditions are likely to be met, and also to inform the player that multiple time-saving ending conditions are on the verge of being met (i.e., the time-saving state is likely to be met for a long time). It is possible to notify that the situation is continuing.

In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the confirmed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3604: Yes), the determined fluctuation flag 223bb is set to OFF (S3608), and the above-mentioned remaining time shortening number is determined. The process moves on to the process of determining the In addition, in the process of S3604, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions has been determined, then information indicating the number of remaining time reductions is stored in the time saving information update area 223g (S3606), and information indicating the remaining number of time reductions is displayed. A command is set (S3607), the remaining time shortening number determination fluctuation flag 223bb is set on (S3608), and this processing is ended.

Here, the contents of the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063) will be explained with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the definite fluctuation determination process (S3063). In this confirmed fluctuation determination process (S3063), as described above, a command is issued to determine the period in which the set time-saving state cannot end, and to display this on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The settings process is executed. As a result, in a gaming machine having a game feature in which it is difficult to know when the time-saving state ends (a game feature having multiple time-saving end conditions), the player can check the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 110). ), you can understand the period during which you can play games with peace of mind.

When the determined fluctuation determination process (S3063) is executed, it is first determined whether the determined fluctuation flag 223bb is set to on (S3651), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S3651: No), the time saving The values corresponding to the medium counter 203k, small hit A counter 203m, small hit B counter 203n, and small hit C counter 203p are read from the time saving information update area 223g, and the minimum value thereof is extracted (S3652).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the process of S3652, the values of the various counters described above included in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are determined based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the audio lamp control device 113 may be provided with a counter that varies in synchronization with the various counters included in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 described above, and the discrimination may be made based on the value of the counter. Also good.

It is determined whether the minimum value extracted in the process of S3652 is a condition value (in this embodiment, 15 or more) that can be reported as a definite fluctuation (S3653), and if it is determined that it is the condition value (15 or more), the minimum value is determined (S3653). :Yes), then sets a display time saving command indicating the minimum value (S3654), sets the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb on (S3655), and ends this process.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to notify the player only when the period during which the time saving state cannot end (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, so that the fixed fluctuation The performance mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 only when the flag 223bb is set to on can be set as a performance mode that allows the player to play the game with peace of mind. In other words, for example, if the period during which the time-saving state cannot end (the number of special symbol changes) is one, this is prevented from being notified to the player and giving the player a sense of anxiety. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the period during which the time saving state cannot end (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, a performance mode is set to notify the player of this fact. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the content to be notified to the player may be different based on the operation content of the operation means that the player can operate. For example, when the player performs a specific operation. In this case, even if the period during which the time saving state cannot end (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is less than a predetermined number of times, it may be configured to notify that fact, or if the player performs a special operation. In this case, it may be configured to notify that only when the period during which the time saving state cannot end (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is a special number of times larger than a predetermined number of times.

In the process of S3653, if it is determined that the minimum value is less than the condition value (15) (S3653: No), a time-saving command for display corresponding to the updated time-saving information is set (S3656), and this process ends. do. Further, if it is determined in the process of S3651 that the fixed fluctuation flag 223bb is set to ON (S3651: Yes), the process of S3652 and S3653 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S3654.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 153. In the fourth embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be drawn (varied) at the same time (in parallel). They differ in their composition.

Then, as a time saving state, a time saving state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is more likely to be selected is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (i.e., the second special symbol is drawn (fluctuated) more often). time saving state), and a time saving state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (i.e., a time saving state where the first special symbol is drawn (fluctuated) more often). The difference is that the time-saving state is configured to be settable, and game states with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided in the time-saving state.

Another difference is that different effects (display of the number of time savings) are executed in response to the plurality of time saving states described above.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125, differences in the configuration of the game board 13 used in the fourth embodiment from the above-described first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 125 is a front view of the game board 13 used in the game machine of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 125, the game board 13 of this embodiment is different from the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right-handed play area is different. In this diagram, a ball fired during a left-handed game flows down the left-handed (left side) area along arrow PA1 shown on the game board 13, and a ball fired during a right-handed game flows down the left-handed (left side) area. It is configured to flow down the right-handed (right side) area along arrow PA2 shown in 13.

As shown in FIG. 125, in this embodiment, a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as the left first starting port 64) is provided below the variable display unit 80. This left side first starting port 64 has an opening large enough to accommodate one game ball in its upper surface, and two nails are placed at opposing positions of the opening, slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. They are placed at wide intervals. By adjusting the inclination of this nail, you can increase the winning rate of the game into the left first starting port 64 (for example, the number of game balls that enter the left first starting port 64 when 250 game balls are fired). The structure is configured such that it is possible to vary the ratio of

Further, in the right side area of the variable display unit 80, a second starting port 640 and a first starting port 64 (hereinafter referred to as the right first starting port 64) are arranged vertically in parallel. The second starting port 640 has an opening on the side surface of a decorative member attached to the game board 60 into which one game ball can be inserted. A normal electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 is arranged on the front side (opposing surface) of the opening. This normal electric accessory 640a has a length of about three game balls, and is pivotally supported at one end so as to be rotatable. Then, based on the fact that the second symbol is a hit, the game ball is played a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once or twice) and for a predetermined number of seconds (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds or 1 second). It is configured to rotate at a predetermined angle (in this embodiment, 45 degrees) in a direction (direction away from the opening) in which it can be guided to the second starting port 640. The normal electric accessory 640a is rotated by a solenoid. In addition, under normal conditions (other than when the second symbol hits), the opening of the second starting port 640a is maintained in a closed state (standing vertically).

Further, the right first starting port 64 is arranged below the second starting port 640. When the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state (tilted horizontally), the ordinary electric accessory 640a is arranged at a position facing the opening of the first starting port 64 on the right side. By configuring in this way, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it is possible to configure the game ball into a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right side first starting port 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability state (variable probability state) and a time saving gaming state, the second symbol is configured to have a high probability of being determined to be a hit. In addition, when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, the player shoots the gaming ball so that it passes on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and enters the left first starting port 64 to win the game ball. Execute the game as instructed. Then, when the third symbol becomes a hit and the transition to a fixed variable game or a time-saving game occurs, the probability that the second symbol is determined to be a win increases, so when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol is likely to become a win. has been done. Therefore, the player executes the game by firing the game ball so as to pass the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game). In this case, since the probability that the normal electric accessory 640a will be in the open state increases, the second starting port 640 is configured to be easier to win, but the number of winnings to the right first starting port 64 is reduced.

Here, in this embodiment, in the variable probability gaming state, it is configured such that winning with the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player than with the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol, 50% of the jackpots are jackpots that are likely to be given a probability change after the jackpot game, and the remaining 50% are jackpots that are likely to be given a time-saving game (low probability game state) after the jackpot game ( It is configured so that a jackpot (hard to be awarded in a variable probability game) is awarded.

On the other hand, the second special symbol is configured such that when a jackpot is achieved, a jackpot is awarded in which a variable probability game is likely to be awarded after the jackpot game at 100%. That is, it is configured such that the winning with the second special symbol is more likely to be given the variable probability gaming state.

In addition, in the channel on the right side of the variable display unit 80, when the normal electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the distance between the tip of the ordinary electric accessory 640a and the variable display unit 80 is such that the number of game balls is 1 or more and less than 2 balls. The interval is . The through gate 67 is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the interval can easily pass through the through gate 67 having a gate-shaped opening. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to be difficult to enter the right first starting opening 64 due to the nail placed on the downstream side of the through gate 67. Specifically, on the exit side (downstream side) of the through gate 67, a nail placed above the opening of the right first starting port 64 prevents the game ball from flowing down to the opening side of the right first starting port 64. The ball is arranged at a distance of 300 mm (less than 1 game ball), and is configured to flow downward through the windmill as it is. That is, when a prize is won through the right side first starting port 64, it is configured to be limited to a case where the normal electric accessory 640a is maintained in a closed state (in a vertically erected state).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal electric accessory 640a is open, the structure is such that no prize is entered into the right side first starting port 64, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to have an interval that allows a prize to be won to the opening 64, and the ratio may be made low so that a prize can be won to the right side first starting opening 64.

Next, the contents of the performance mode (effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device) during the time saving state in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. First, with reference to FIG. 126, a display screen displayed when entering the time saving state that is displayed corresponding to the type of the set time saving state will be described.

In the fourth embodiment, although the details will be described later, it is possible to change (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), and furthermore, it is possible to change (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel). By making the variation patterns (variation time) of each special symbol different, the first time saving state and the first special symbol are created in which the variation of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than the variation of the second special symbol during the time saving state. A second time saving state in which the variation of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the variation of the second special symbol is configured to be settable.

Then, it is set so that only the lottery of the second special symbol wins a small win, and when a small win is won, a two-type win can be obtained as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, by varying (drawing) multiple special symbols at the same time (in parallel), in order to prevent lottery results that are advantageous to the player from occurring at the same time, a specific lottery result can be determined by one special symbol's lottery. In the case of a winning (for example, a win), the other special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed as a stop symbol indicating a loss.

Furthermore, if the time-saving state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the time-saving state is set in accordance with the fluctuation start timing of each special symbol that is executed simultaneously (in line). It is configured so that the number of times the state is set (time saving number) is subtracted.

In other words, when the first time-saving state in which the first special symbol mainly changes is set, the time-saving game is likely to be performed according to the number of changes of the special symbol set as the time-saving end condition, but the second special symbol If the second time-saving state is set in which mainly fluctuates, the first special symbol that is changing will be forcibly stopped based on the small hit win as described above, so this is set as the time-saving end condition. There was a problem in that there was a large difference between the number of times the special symbols changed and the number of games actually played.

Specifically, when the time saving end condition is set for the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to reach 100, if the first time saving state is set, the first special symbol When configured so that only the fluctuation (lottery) is executed (so that a long time (longer time than the first special symbol fluctuates 100 times) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol), the first time reduction It is possible to execute special symbol fluctuations approximately 100 times during the state (due to the lottery result of the first special symbol, there is no need to forcefully stop the second special symbol due to a miss).

On the other hand, if the second time saving state is set in the case where the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times as the time saving end condition, the second special symbol is configured so that only the fluctuation (lottery) is executed (so that a long time (longer time than the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times) is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), and If the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit with a probability of approximately 1/1 (excluding the probability of winning a jackpot), the lottery for the second special symbol will win a small win. Each time, the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped due to a miss, so the number of variations actually executed is approximately 50 times.

In this way, even if the same condition is set as the time-saving end condition, the number of changes in the special symbol executed while the time-saving state is set (forcibly stopped) will vary depending on the type of time-saving game to be executed. (number of fluctuations without) will be different. In such a case, regardless of the type of time-saving state that is set, if the actual number of time-saving settings (for example, 100 times) is displayed to the player, the time-saving state will give the player a sense of discomfort. There was a problem with providing .

Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions (remaining number of time reductions) is notified to the player on the display screen when the time reduction state is set (time reduction state entry screen), depending on the type of time reduction state to be set. are configured to differ. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a time-saving state from being provided that would make the player feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to a configuration in which the number of time reductions to be notified to the player (number of remaining time reductions) is displayed differently depending on the type of the set time reduction state, the number of remaining time reductions to be notified to the player is changed. If the number of times and the actual number of time reductions remaining are different, processing is executed to correct the number of remaining time reductions to be notified to the player.

With this configuration, for example, when the first time saving state is set, by temporarily interrupting the game midway through the game, the second special symbol can be executed multiple times, or the second time saving state can be set. In this state, even if the player wins a lottery result other than a jackpot or small win with the second special symbol and is unable to forcibly stop the fluctuating first special symbol, the player may feel uncomfortable. It is possible to synchronize the notified number of remaining time reductions with the actual number of remaining time reductions without giving any error.

Specifically, when the second time saving state (time saving A) mentioned above is set, as shown in FIG. 126(a), the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is actually Even if reaching 100 times is set as the time saving end condition, "50" is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10 in consideration of the number of times the special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped due to winning a small hit, and the first When the time saving state (time saving B) is set, "100" is displayed in the remaining time saving number display area Dm10, as shown in FIG. 126(b).

As a result, when the second time-saving state is set, the player can be made to think that the time-saving end condition in which the number of changes of the special symbol is 50 times has been set. Even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is updated (subtracted) due to the forced stop of the special symbol, the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 is updated (subtraction) in accordance with the update (subtraction). However, since the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 is updated (subtracted) according to the number of changes of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is continuously set. It is possible to update (subtract) a period (the number of special symbol variations) without giving a player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and (b), when the time saving state is set, the pending symbols corresponding to each special symbol are not displayed in the sub display area Ds. are doing. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from being aware of the number of changes in the special symbols actually executed while the time saving state is set, depending on the manner in which the reserved symbols are consumed. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, instead of displaying the reserved symbols corresponding to each special symbol in the sub display area Ds, a special figure 1 reserved ball number display that displays the number of reserved balls for each special symbol in the main display area Dm is used. Although the area Dm6 and the special figure 2 reserved ball count display area Dm7 are formed, the display area Dm7 is not limited to this, and is not limited to the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but rather the display area Dm7 of the decorative member provided on the game board 13. A notification means may be provided to notify the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in a light emitting manner by using a part of the special symbol. Furthermore, this notification means may be used in the configurations of each of the embodiments described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the content of the correction effect for correcting the remaining time reduction count displayed in the remaining time reduction count display area Dm10 described above will be explained. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the number of remaining time reductions displayed on the display screen when the time reduction state is set (time reduction state setting screen) is configured to vary depending on the type of gaming state set. (See Figure 126). In this case, for example, the game may be temporarily interrupted while the first time saving state is set and the second special symbol is executed multiple times, or the second special symbol may be executed while the second time saving state is set. If the special symbol is changed under conditions different from normal, such as when the lottery result is wrong and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped, the reported number of remaining time reductions and the actual remaining time reduction There was a risk that the number of times would be different.

In such a case, for example, during a time saving game where time saving A is set and the second special symbol mainly changes, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss and the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped, That is, when the actual number of remaining time reductions becomes greater than the number corresponding to the notified number of remaining time reductions, first, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the third symbol is temporarily displayed during the variable display. At the same time, the main display area Dm displays the same performance mode as when notifying the player of the lottery result of the special symbol (a concept including an error that is difficult for the player to notice). That is, during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, a pseudo-stop effect is executed to make the player think that the variation of the special symbol has stopped, and the display mode of the short remaining time count display area Dm10 is changed in accordance with the pseudo-stop effect. (Remaining time shortening number for notification) is updated (subtracted), and a correction effect is executed so that the state shown in FIG. 127(b) is reached.

With this configuration, the notified number of remaining time reductions can be synchronized with the actual number of remaining time reductions without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, although a detailed explanation will be given later, this correction effect is executed only when the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (second special symbol) is longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds or longer). It is configured so that Therefore, even if the pseudo-stop performance is executed during one special symbol variation period, the player will not feel uncomfortable. Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if the actual number of remaining time reductions is less than the number corresponding to the notified number of remaining time reductions, the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 will be displayed across multiple special symbol variations. It is sufficient to perform a performance (multiple fluctuation fusion performance) that updates (subtracts) the mode (remaining time shortening number for notification).

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 135. In the fourth embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed from the first embodiment described above. differ.

FIG. 128(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number 4 table 202ca, a first winning type selection 4 table 202cb, a second winning random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern 4 table 202cd, and a small winning type selection 4 table 202ce. It is being

First, the first random number 4 table 202ca will be explained with reference to FIG. 129(a). FIG. 129(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 4 table 202ca. Similar to the first embodiment described above, this first random number 4 table 202ca defines a random number table corresponding to the first special symbol and a random number table corresponding to the second special symbol. The difference from the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 20(a)) is that the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is replaced with the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2, and other than that are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 129(b). FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2. As shown in FIG. 129(b), this special symbol 2 random number 4 table 202ca2 differs from the above-mentioned special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in that the range in which a small hit is determined is from "5 to 989" to "5 to 998". ” except that they are the same. That is, in the lottery of the second special symbol in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning a small win is 994/1000.

Next, the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. 130(a). FIG. 130(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb. This first winning type selection 4 table 202cb replaces the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 with respect to the above-mentioned first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 21(a)). The difference is that the table 202cb1 is replaced with the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 and a special chart 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 is provided, and the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 130(b). FIG. 130(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1. This special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb1 has the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type and the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type, and the contents of the jackpot game after the jackpot game ends, for the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. The game states that are set are different.

Specifically, when jackpot A is selected as the jackpot type, a 15-round jackpot game is executed as a jackpot game, and then a time saving state (time saving A) is set, and when jackpot B is selected. In this case, a 5-round jackpot game is executed as a jackpot game, and then a time saving state (time saving A) is set. When jackpot C is selected, a 5-round jackpot game is executed as a jackpot game, and then a normal state is set. That is, as jackpot types, jackpot A and jackpot B are jackpots in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and jackpot C is a jackpot in which a time-saving state is not set after the end of the jackpot game. In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time saving states (time saving A, time saving B) are configured as the time saving states that can be set after the end of the jackpot game.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when time saving A is set as the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed as a game during the time saving state, and when time saving B is set, the time saving state is in progress. The lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed as the game. In this way, by varying the variation (lottery) of special symbols that are mainly executed during the time saving state depending on the time saving state that is set, it is possible to set different game specifications in the time saving state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has game specifications that are greater than the types of game states that can be set, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 130(c). FIG. 130(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2. This special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cb2 is defined for the above-mentioned special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 21(c)) corresponding to the possible values of the first winning type counter value C2. The difference is that the number of jackpot types to be played is increased, the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type, and the game state set after the jackpot game are different.

Specifically, as the jackpot type, the first winning type counter value C2 defines a jackpot D in the range of "0 to 69", and a jackpot E in the range of "70 to 99". Then, when jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, a 15-round jackpot game is executed as a jackpot game, and then a time saving state (time saving A) is set, and when jackpot E is selected, jackpot A jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed as a game, and then a time saving state (time saving B) is set.

In other words, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game, and in 70% of the cases, time saving A is set, and time saving B is set in 30%. . Here, when time saving A is set as the time saving state, the time saving game mainly consisting of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol will be executed again. On the other hand, when time saving B is set, a time saving game mainly consisting of lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is executed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a left-handed hit is made in a normal state or a variable probability state, and a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability state is advantageous at a rate of 58% (jackpot B, D). It is configured to move to Then, when a right hit is made in a potential state and a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol, an advantageous potential state is looped at a rate of 100% (jackpot E to G). Therefore, once the potential state (the special symbol's variable probability state and the normal symbol's normal state) is set, by hitting the right ball into the second entrance 1640, the second special symbol is drawn. A state that is easy to execute and has a high jackpot probability and a jackpot of the second special symbol are likely to be repeated. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game with one purpose of shifting to the probable state, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern 4 table 202cd will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. As described above, in this variation pattern 4 table 202cd, a random value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display is defined from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 131, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd includes a normal variation pattern table 202cd1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and a time saving A variation table for determining a variation pattern in a time saving state. At least a variation pattern table 202cd2 and a variation pattern table for time saving B 202cd3 are defined. Next, the specific contents of each of these tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. Note that in each of the tables shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following explanation, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. This normal variation pattern table 202cd1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal variation pattern table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 132, the normal variation pattern table 202cd1 has a random value ( The counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) is defined.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determined when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a hit (big hit) in the lottery is that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and the normal reach ( 20 seconds) is associated, and super reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range "51 to 198".

On the other hand, if the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a lottery result, a variation pattern of a short margin (8 seconds) is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 70", and " The range of ``71 to 120'' is associated with a variation pattern of ``long reach'' (12 seconds), and the range of ``121 to 170'' is associated with a variation pattern of ``normal reach'' (20 seconds). Furthermore, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with super reach (30 seconds), which is out of the range of "171 to 198".

Furthermore, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long winning variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, a small win long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, the long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, when the player plays right-handed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variable time of 600 seconds is set each time, so the gaming efficiency is much worse than when the game is played left-handed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player normally plays right-handed.

Next, details of the time saving A variation pattern table 202cd2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 133(a). FIG. 133(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving A variation pattern table 202cd2. This variation pattern table 202cd2 for time saving A is referred to in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in a state where time saving A is set in the time saving state. It's a table.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), when the jackpot of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) occurs, the jackpot super short fluctuation (1 second ) are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), a super long variation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take. There is.

On the other hand, for the jackpot of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), a jackpot short variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take, For the small hit of the second special symbol (special pattern 2), a small hit short fluctuation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take (0 to 198). 2 special symbol (special figure 2), a short fluctuation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take.

Next, details of the time saving B variation pattern table 202cd3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 133(b). FIG. 133(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving B variation pattern table 202cd3. This time saving B variation pattern table 202cd3 is referred to in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed in a time saving state where time saving B is set. It's a table.

As shown in FIG. 133(b), the jackpot of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) requires a short jackpot variation (5 seconds) for the entire range of possible values (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1. are defined in association with each other. In addition, when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is off, a super long variation (5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take. There is.

On the other hand, for the jackpot of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), a jackpot super short variation (1 second) is defined in association with the entire range of values that the variation type counter CS1 can take (0 to 198). , For the small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take (0 to 198), For the second special symbol (special figure 2), a long variation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range of possible values of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198).

Next, details of the small winning type selection 4 table 202ce will be described with reference to FIG. 134. This small winning type selection 4 table 202ce is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of small winning when a small winning occurs in the second special symbol lottery. In this small win type selection 4 table 202ce, corresponding small win types are defined for each value range of the small win type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 134, "small win A" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 69". This "small win A" is a small win type in which a small win game with the same opening pattern as the small win A of the first embodiment described above is executed. Out of the 100 random numbers that the small win type counter C5 can take, there are 70 random numbers that will be "small win A", so if the second special symbol is a small win in the lottery, it will be "small win A". The rate at which this is determined is 70% (70/100).

Furthermore, "small win B" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "70 to 99". This "small win B" is a small win type in which the opening/closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state for 0.06 seconds x 6 times during the small win game. Out of the 100 random numbers that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 30 random numbers that will be a "small win B", so if a small win occurs in the second special symbol lottery, it will be a "small win B". The rate at which this is determined is 30% (30/100).

<About the control processing of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control processing of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 151. The fourth embodiment is significantly different from each of the above-described embodiments in that it is configured so that the lottery (variation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed in duplicate. They are different.

Then, in the state where the time saving state is set, the time saving state (first time saving state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed more frequently than the lottery of the second special symbol, and the lottery of the first special symbol. The difference is that a time saving state (second time saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is executed more frequently can be set.

In the fourth embodiment, a first time saving state and a second time saving state which is more advantageous than the first time saving state can be set as the time saving state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. , it is possible to provide a plurality of game states with different advantageous levels to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

First, with reference to FIG. 137, special symbol variation processing 4 (S194), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be explained. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 4 (S194). Special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 137, S194) performs various judgments and decisions based on each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, Controlling the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 to simultaneously enable variable display in the variable display mode determined by predetermined control, or to stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. Control is executed. The special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (whether the jackpot flag 203d is on or not) (S7001), and it is determined whether the jackpot is being played (Jackpot is in progress). If it is determined that the flag 203d is on (S7001: Yes), there is no need to set special symbol lottery or stop of variable display, etc., so the process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203d is off) (S7001: No), whether or not a small win game is in progress (whether the small jackpot flag 203g is on or not) (S7002). In the process of S7002, if it is determined that the small win is in progress (the small win flag 203g is on) (S7002: Yes), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no small hit (the small hit flag 203g is off) (S7002: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S7003).

In the process of S7003, if it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S7003: Yes), a first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S7005), and the process proceeds to S7006. Here, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is being fluctuated and displayed has elapsed, a process for stopping and displaying a halt symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is performed. When the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, a process is performed to forcibly stop and display the second special symbol that is being fluctuated and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. executed. Details of this first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 142.

On the other hand, in the process of S7003, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S7003: No), at least one pending data (various counter values) is stored in the special symbol 1 pending ball storage area 203a. On the condition that the CPU 10 holds the hold data, a first special symbol variation start process is executed to execute a jackpot determination and a variation pattern selection process based on the pending data (S7004), and the process moves to S7006. Details of this first special symbol variation start processing (S7004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139.

In the process of S7006 that is executed after the first special symbol variation start process (S7004) or the first special symbol variation stop process (S7005) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (S7006), and if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S7006: Yes), a second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S7008) and this process is ended. This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7008) is similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the second special symbol that is being fluctuated has elapsed, the second special symbol This is a process for setting a stop display of a stop symbol indicating the lottery result. Details of this second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149.

On the other hand, in the process of S7006, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S7006: No), the second special symbol is A second special symbol variation start process is executed to execute a special symbol lottery and set the start of a new variable display (S7007), and this process ends. Details of this second special symbol variation start processing (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 143 to 147.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol variation (lottery) control and the second special symbol variation (lottery) control are configured to be executed independently. . With this configuration, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed regardless of whether the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the lottery of special symbols a plurality of times in a short period of time, and it is possible to improve gaming efficiency.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot or small win is won by drawing a special symbol, and while a winning game (big win game, small win game) based on the winning is being executed, a new special symbol is selected. It is configured so that fluctuation (lottery) does not start. With this configuration, there is no need to perform the complicated act of predicting the lottery result of a special symbol while playing a winning game, and it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the winning game during the winning game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, one of the plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that one special symbol has won the jackpot. When the special symbol is changed, the other special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a miss. This prevents situations where the special symbols are changing during a jackpot game, or a situation where one special symbol wins a jackpot (during a jackpot game) while the other special symbol wins a jackpot. Since it can be eliminated, it is possible to provide a game that is easier for players to understand.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation start process and the special symbol fluctuation stop process are configured not to be executed during either the jackpot game or the small win game, but this is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol fluctuation start processing and special symbol fluctuation stop processing may be configured not to be executed only during a jackpot game, or the special symbol fluctuation start processing and special symbol fluctuation stop processing may be performed during a jackpot game or a small win game. , special symbol fluctuation stop processing may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to perform more variations of special symbols (lotteries), so that the player can enjoy the game in a short period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the first special symbol variation start process (S7004), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start processing (S7004).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S7101), and the value of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b ( It is determined whether N1) is a value greater than 0 (S7102). In the process of S7102, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is larger than 0 (S7102: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted by 1. (S7103), and sets a pending ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 203b after the subtraction (S7104).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203b from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b.

When the process of S7104 is completed, next, the data in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S7105). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

When the process of S7105 is completed, next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S7106). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 138, S7106) will be described in detail later, but is set based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the current gaming state.

When the process of S7106 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 138, S7107). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S7107) uses the result of the judgment of the first special symbol and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of .

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107) is completed, a game state update process is then executed (S7108). This game state update process (FIG. 138, S7108) will update the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time saving counter 203k) that indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10, although the details will be described later. This is the process to do so. When the process of S7108 ends, this process ends. Note that a detailed explanation of this game state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

On the other hand, in the process of S7102, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S7102: No), this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S7106).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7201). Next, it is determined whether or not the range of random numbers for a jackpot or small win specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and The determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S7202).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S7202 is a jackpot (S7203), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S7203: Yes), the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the first special symbol. is set (S7204), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S7205). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7206), and the value corresponding to the current gaming state (for example, in the normal state If so, it is 0, and if it is a time-saving state, 1) is stored (set) in the winning state storage area 203cf (S7207), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loser (S7203: No), a loser symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7208), and then , this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol is configured to not win a small hit, so if it is determined in the process of S7203 that it is not a jackpot (S7203: No), the lottery result is a loss. The configuration is configured so that it is determined that there is a jackpot and the process of S7208 is executed, but for example, if the configuration is such that a small win is won as the lottery result of the first special symbol, the process of S7203 determines that it is not a jackpot. If it is determined (S7203: No), it may be configured to determine whether or not a small win has been won, and to execute processing according to the determination result. In this case, a process is executed that is different from the special symbol 2 off variation process (see S7708 in FIG. 145), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 145, in that the first special symbol is targeted instead of the second special symbol. Just do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 138, S7004), will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7107).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 140, S7107), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139, S7106), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot or not. 1. It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S7301). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca is on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the process of S7204 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) described above.

In the process of S7301, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S7301: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot that was acquired in the process of S7201 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) Based on the value of the winning type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined (selected) from the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb (see FIG. 130) (S7302), and the process moves to S7303.

On the other hand, in the process of S7301, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss (that is, the jackpot flag 203ca for the first special symbol is off) (S7301: No), the process of S7302 is performed. This is skipped and the process moves to step S7303.

In the process of S7303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S7303). Next, the variable pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S7304), and the process moves to S7305. Here, in the fourth embodiment, the time-saving states that can be set as the gaming state are a time-saving state A (first time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a time-saving state B (second time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state A. Since the game state is configured to be settable, there are three game states that can be set: normal state, time saving A, and time saving B, and the value of the time saving counter 203k and the time saving The current gaming state is determined based on the information stored in the state storage area 203cd.

Specifically, if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal state, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 1 or more (not 0), the current gaming state is determined to be the normal state. The state is determined to be a time saving state. If the time saving state storage area 203cd stores information indicating time saving A (for example, information indicating a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set), the current gaming state is time saving A (first time saving state). If it is determined that there is, and information indicating time saving B (for example, information indicating a jackpot type for which time saving state is set) is stored in the time saving state storage area 203cd, then the current gaming state is time saving B (second time saving state).

Note that the configuration for determining the current gaming state is not limited to the configuration used in the fourth embodiment, and other configurations may be used. For example, a game state storage area is provided to temporarily store the currently set game state while being constantly updated, and the current game state is determined using the information stored in the game state storage area. You may do so. By configuring in this way, the capacity of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased, but the current gaming state can be reliably determined. Furthermore, even when the types of game states that can be set are increased (for example, to four types), it becomes possible to easily determine the current game state.

In the process of S7305, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (variation pattern table corresponding to the current gaming state) (7305), and then, based on the selected variation pattern, , sets the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S7306).

When the process of S7306 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S7307). Next, the start of variation of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S7308), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the game state update process (S7108), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 138), will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update process (S7108). In this game state update process (see S7108 in FIG. 141), a process for subtracting the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.

In other words, in each of the above-described embodiments, the update of the time saving end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is configured to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. In the fourth embodiment, the update of the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of variations of the special symbol, is configured to be executed at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol. With this configuration, even when using a process that can independently execute fluctuations (lotteries) of multiple special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (start of variation of special symbols) Even if the order and the special symbol variation stop order are interchanged), the time saving state can be appropriately set in accordance with the predetermined number of variations of the special symbol.

When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 141) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (S7401). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S7401: No), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state, the processing of S7402 and S7403 is skipped, and the main Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is greater than 0 (S7401: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is set to 1. After subtracting (S7402) and setting a remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203k (S7403), this process ends.

The remaining time shortening number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining time reduction number command, it extracts the value of the time reduction counter 203k from the remaining time reduction number command, and stores the extracted value in the time reduction information update area 223g of the RAM 223. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the time saving information update area 223g according to the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, so it is synchronized with the value of the time saving medium counter 203k of the main control device 110. You can update its value while

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the first special symbol variation stop process (S7005), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation stop processing (S7005). In this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), the first special symbol is stopped when the fluctuation time has elapsed, and when the first special symbol is stopped due to a combination of symbols indicating a jackpot, Processing is executed to forcibly stop and display the second special symbols in a combination of symbols indicating a miss.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 142, S7005), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (S7501), and if it is determined that it is the end timing, ( S7501: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203ca is set on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S7502). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set on for the first special symbol (S7502: Yes), the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set on (S7503), and the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop is determined. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203cc has been turned on is set (S7504). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S7505).

When the process of S7505 is finished, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S7506), and the jackpot flag 203ca and time saving counter 203k are reset (S7507). Next, the jackpot start flag 203c is set to ON (S7508), the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON (S7509), and the process moves to S7510.

On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S7502: No), the process of S7503 to S7509 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7510.

In the process of S7510, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is to be confirmed and stopped (stop display) (S7510). Thereafter, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 37 (S7511), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7501, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed (S7501: No), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S7512), this process ends. While the process of S7512 is being executed, special symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37.

In this way, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S7005), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is being fluctuated and displayed has elapsed (S7501: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is Then, processing for stopping the variable display (S7503 to S7511) is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S7502: Yes), a process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner (S7503, S7504) is executed.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed as a winning symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished (after the jackpot game is finished), the variable display of the second special symbol may be resumed. As a result, it is possible to create a more natural performance compared to the case where a forced stop is made due to a miss.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 142) is based on the gaming state stored in the state storage area 203cf at the time of winning in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 139). ), the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S7506, but for example, the jackpot scenario is set in the winning state storage area 203cf in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) using the opening period of the jackpot game. Based on the gaming state, a jackpot scenario may be set in the process of S7506.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when the first special symbol (one) is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol (the other) is forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol. , but is not limited to this, for example, when a stop symbol of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed with a small winning symbol, that is, a combination of stopping symbols indicating that the small winning has been won, It may be configured such that the other symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is forcibly stopped at a missed symbol, or when the small winning symbol of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the other symbol is stopped. The variable display of the symbols (for example, the second special symbol) may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of one symbol (for example, the first special symbol) ends (after the jackpot game ends), the variable display of the other symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be resumed.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment and the above-mentioned examples, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed at a specific stop symbol indicating a hit (big win symbol, small win symbol), the fluctuation of the other special symbol is stopped or temporarily displayed. Although the configuration for stopping has been described, other configurations may be used as long as the configuration is such that both winning games are not executed at the same time. Even if the other special symbol is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol continues to change without stopping or temporarily stopping, and while a winning game (for example, a jackpot game) based on one special symbol is being executed, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed at a stop symbol indicating a win (for example, a jackpot symbol), the execution of a winning game based on the other special symbol (for example, a jackpot game) is waited (postponed) until one winning game ends. ).

With this configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the lottery results of multiple special symbols, and to prevent multiple winning games from occurring at the same time and providing games that are difficult to understand. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, after one winning game ends, it is possible to start another winning game, so advantageous benefits (winning games) can be continuously provided to the player, improving the interest of the game. can be done.

In addition, when using such a configuration, by using a performance (win performance) executed during one winning game, the game can indicate that the other special symbol has won a jackpot (the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). It is better to configure the system so that the notification is sent to the person concerned. Thereby, the player can grasp the lottery results of the other special symbols while concentrating on the winning game, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. Furthermore, if the lottery result of the other special symbol executed during one winning game is not a win (it is a loss), it is configured so that the winning effect that is being executed is not used to notify that it is a loss. good. As a result, if the lottery result for a special symbol is a lottery result that does not grant new benefits to the player, the performance for the currently granted benefits will be given to the player with priority. , it is possible to provide games that are easy to understand for players.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery is performed independently (in parallel) for a plurality of special symbols, and as a result of the lottery, one of the special symbols is displayed as a stop symbol indicating a win (small win, jackpot). At the time when the lottery result of one special symbol is a win (small win), control is executed to forcibly make the other special symbol change (lottery) a loss. , jackpot) (when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is a win starts), a forced lottery that excludes the winning lottery result from the subsequent lottery of the other special symbol. (Determination using a special table in which outliers are defined for the entire range of the acquired first random number counter value C1) may be configured to be executed.

By configuring in this way, even if a plurality of special symbol lottery drawings are executed independently, it is possible to suppress a plurality of winning games from being executed at the same time. In addition, it is not the timing when the stop symbol indicating a hit is stopped and displayed, but the timing at which the special symbol is drawn (the timing at which the fluctuation that causes the stop symbol indicating a win to be stopped and displayed) is the timing at which the other special symbol is displayed. Since it is possible to perform forced deviation control for the other special symbol, it is possible to suppress the situation where a contradiction occurs between the performance contents executed during the fluctuating display of the other special symbol and the lottery result of the other special symbol. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the second special symbol variation start process (S7007), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation start processing (S7007).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 143, S7007), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to ON (S7601: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to OFF (S7607), and this process ends. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is stopped and displayed at the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends. This is a flag that is set to ON while causing the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a stop symbol corresponding to a miss. That is, if the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is on, it means that a jackpot is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set.

Therefore, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is on in the process of S7601, the present process is ended without executing each process of S7602 to S7606 for setting the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol, which was forcibly stopped when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, from starting to fluctuate again within the same process. can. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, as explained with reference to the special symbol variation process 4 (S194) in FIG. 137, after the variation process related to the first special symbol is executed, the variation process related to the second special symbol is executed. Since it is configured to execute, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc is used, but for example, in the special symbol variation process 4 (S194) in FIG. 137, after executing the variation process regarding the second special symbol, When configured to execute the variation process related to the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 variation stop flag (changes the target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol) replaces the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203cc. The configuration may be configured to use the flag).

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to change (lottery) independently (in parallel), and the lottery result of one special symbol is a win. In this case, it is preferable to define the variation process for each special symbol (special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 137)) so that the variation process for the special symbol that is advantageous for the player is executed first. As a result, for example, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided with a retention storage function (retention storage means) and the special symbols start changing at the same time (within the same process) after the end of the jackpot game, the player It becomes possible to preferentially handle the lottery results of special symbols that are advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress the provision of disadvantageous games to the player.

Specifically, for example, the first special symbol lottery is likely to give benefits advantageous to the player (for example, per 16 rounds), and the second special symbol lottery is difficult to give benefits advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. In a gaming machine capable of independently executing special symbol drawings, a storage means is provided that can store up to a plurality of rights (for example, four) for executing the special symbol drawing, and after the jackpot game ends. etc., if the drawings for each special symbol are held at the same time (same process), and the lottery results for each special symbol show a win with the same variation time (for example, 30 seconds), By configuring the processing related to the first special symbol to be executed with priority, a winning game (a benefit advantageous to the player) for the first special symbol is granted regardless of the lottery result for the second special symbol. I can do it.

On the other hand, in the process of S7601, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cc is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S7601: No), It is determined whether or not a winning (ball hitting) has been detected (S7602). If winning (ball entering) into the second ball entrance 640 is detected (S7602: Yes), then the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small A second special symbol jackpot determination for acquiring each value of the hit type counter C5 and storing it in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S7603), and executing a jackpot determination for the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. The process is executed (S7604). Details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

When the process of S7604 is completed, next, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S7603. Execute (S7605). Details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605) will be described later with reference to FIG. 146. After the process of S7605 is finished, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 141) is executed (S7606), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7602, if it is determined that no winning has been detected for the second ball entry port 1640 (S7602: No), this process is directly ended.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to vary (lottery) independently (in parallel), and the variation of the special symbol It is configured to execute processing for updating the gaming state (processing for subtracting the number of time saving times) at the time when the (lottery) is executed. In other words, when executing the process of varying (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time (within the same process) while the time saving state is set, the number of time saving times will be subtracted by two. That will happen.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, a configuration is used in which a plurality of special symbols are varied (lottery) independently (in parallel), but in the third symbol display device 81, one of the special symbols is changed depending on the gaming state. is the main special symbol, and is configured to perform a performance that makes it appear as if a game is being played using only the main special symbol (see FIG. 126), thereby providing an easy-to-understand performance to the player. However, even when the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable display that emphasizes only the main special symbol in this way, a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) are displayed internally. Since the number of time reductions is subtracted with the variation (lottery) of special symbols, a contradiction occurs between the display mode of the number of time reductions and the update status of the game state (internal number of time reductions). Alternatively, there is a problem in that the update content of the display mode of the time saving number is inconsistent with the performance content of the variable display that emphasizes only the main special symbol.

In response to such a problem, the details will be described later, but in the fourth embodiment, the number of time reductions for display (remaining number of time reductions) is updated according to the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the main special symbol. If the display is controlled and there is a difference between the number of time reductions on the display and the actual number of time reductions, check whether the fluctuation pattern of the main special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more). If it is determined that a predetermined condition is met, a process is executed to correct the displayed number of time reductions so as to fill the difference between the displayed number of time reductions and the actual number of time reductions. .

With this configuration, the player only has to play the game while paying attention to the performance executed in response to the main special symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can select the appropriate time saving situation (remaining time shortening). This allows the player to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 143, S7007), will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 139) is similar to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 139). We will mainly explain the differences between the

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S7604) is executed, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (second special symbol reserved ball execution area) is acquired (S7701). Then, the process of S7702 is executed to obtain the lottery result as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on each of the obtained counter values and the first random number 4 table 202ca. The only difference in each of these processes is that the counter value used for lottery (judgment) is obtained from the special symbol holding ball execution area (second special symbol holding ball execution area), and other than that, the first special symbol jackpot judgment The same control as the process (see FIG. 137) is executed.

When the process of S7702 is completed, it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S7703), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S7703: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a jackpot. The processes of S7704 to S7707 are executed to complete the process. In each process of S7704 to S7707, the same process as each process of S7204 to S7207 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 137) is executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S7703, if it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a jackpot (S7703: No), the procedure for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or miss of the second special symbol is determined. The special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S7708), and this process is ended. Next, details of this special figure 2 off variation processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 off variation processing (S7708).

In the special symbol 2 out-of-print fluctuation processing (S7708), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S7702 in FIG. 144 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S7801), and if the lottery result is a small win (S7801: Yes), the small hit flag 203cb is set on (S7802), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small hit (S7803). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the value of the acquired small winning type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S7804), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loser in the process of S7801 (S7801: No), a loser symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S7805), and then, This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 145, S7007), will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S7605).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 146, S7605), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the special symbol holding ball execution area (second special symbol execution area) (S7901). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 144, S7604), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S7902). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203ca is on for the second special symbol. This jackpot flag 203ca is set to ON in the process of S7704 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 144) described above.

In the process of S7902, if it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (S7902: Yes), the variable pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is displayed. Read out (S7903). Then, based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S7701 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 144), the first winning type selection 4 table 202cb (see FIG. 131(a)) ) to determine the jackpot type (S7904).

When the process of S7904 is completed, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S7905), and then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S7906). Then, the process moves to S7908.

On the other hand, in the process of S7902, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S7902: No), the special symbol 2 out-of-place fluctuation pattern selection process (S7907) is executed, and the process proceeds to S7908. Transition.

In the process of S7908, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S7908). Next, the start of variation of the second special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S7909), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, this special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (S7907) will be explained. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (S7907).

In the special figure 2 out-of-flight variation pattern selection process (FIG. 147, S7907), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S8001). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cb is set to on (S8001). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is on (S8001: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S8002). Then, based on the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 and the small winning type selection 4 table 202ce (see FIG. 134), the small winning type is selected (S8003).

Next, the variation pattern 4 table 202cd (see FIGS. 131 to 133) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S8004), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the small winning variation corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is A pattern is selected (S8005). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S8006), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S8001, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, a loss) (S8001: No), the variable pattern 4 table 202c ( 131 to 133) is read out (S8007), and an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the readout variation pattern selection table (S8008). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation variation pattern (S8009), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the second special symbol variation stop process (S7008), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (FIG. 137, S194), will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008).

In the second special symbol variation stop processing (S7008), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101). In the process of S8101, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: Yes), the jackpot flag 203ca is turned on for the second special symbol (special symbol 2). is set (S8103). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203ca is set on for the second special symbol (S8103: Yes), a special symbol 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of special symbol 1 is set (S8105), The process moves to S8106.

Next, the processing after S8106 is different from the processing after S7505 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 140, S7005) described above in the following points. In the processing of S8106 and S8102 corresponding to the processing of S7505 and S7512, the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, and in the processing of S8112 corresponding to the processing of S7511, the special symbol 1 confirmation command is changed to the special symbol They are different in that they are changed to 2 confirmation commands. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (S8101: No), the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S8102), this process ends. In addition, in the process of S8103, if the jackpot flag 203ca is set to OFF for the second special symbol (S8103: No), the special symbol 2 out-of-line stop process is executed (S8104), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the special symbol 2 off-stopping process (S8104), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stopping process (FIG. 148, S7008), will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 out-of-place stop processing (S8104).

In the special figure 2 missing stop process (FIG. 149, S8104), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8201). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is set to ON (S8201: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating a stop of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is set (S8202). Next, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as an off symbol (S8203).

After completing the process of S8203, a small win scenario based on the selected small win type is set (S8204). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203cb is set to OFF (S8205), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S8207).

When the process of S8207 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol (S8208). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 37 is stopped varying at the small winning symbol (S8209), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203cb is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss) (S8201: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. A special map 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to do so (S8210). Thereafter, the second special symbol being variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is removed, and the variation is stopped at the symbol (S8211), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of jackpot control processing 4 (S1594) in the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 4 (S1594). This jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is a process ( The difference is that the content of the process for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is different. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Note that the first embodiment described above and the fourth embodiment differ in the configuration of the game board 13 and the main control contents, so the detailed operation contents may differ during a jackpot, but such Even in these cases, the processing contents are the same, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, when the jackpot control process 4 (S1594) is executed, the same processes of S1601 to S1612 as the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) of the first embodiment described above are executed. That is, during the period from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, the same process as the jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) is executed. Then, in the process of S1612, if it is determined that the current time is the end timing of the ending performance (S1612: Yes), then it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot C (S1691).

In the process of S1691, the current jackpot type is determined based on the information stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h and the information stored in the memory area that temporarily stores the currently executed jackpot type. Determine.

In the process of S1691, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot C (it is any jackpot A, B, or D) (S1691: No), that is, after the current jackpot ends (after the jackpot game ends) ), then it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S1692). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, since the time saving state is configured such that the degree of advantage to the player is different depending on the jackpot type is jackpot A, B or jackpot D, The process of S1692 is a process for determining whether to set a time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player or a time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous than the first time-saving state. .

In the processing of S1692, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot D (S1692: No), information indicating the time saving A state is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S1693), and the process moves to S1694. . On the other hand, in the process of S1692, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S1692: Yes), information indicating the time-saving B state is stored in the time-saving state storage area 223cb (S1695), and the process proceeds to S1694. Transition.

If the time saving A state is set here, that is, if the current jackpot type is jackpot A or B, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time saving state. Then, the time-saving A variation pattern table 202cd2 (see FIG. 133(a)) is referred to, and a time-saving game is created in which the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) is more likely to be executed than the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol. If it is executed and the time saving B state is set, that is, if the current jackpot type is jackpot D, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time saving state. , the time-saving B variation pattern table 202cd3 (see FIG. 134(b)) is referred to, and a time-saving game is executed in which the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol. be done.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern during the time saving state is provided according to the jackpot type for which the time saving state is set, and the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is By changing the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol and the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol depending on the jackpot type for which the time-saving state is set, a time-saving state where the second special symbol becomes the main special symbol (time-saving A ) and a time saving state (time saving B) in which the first special symbol becomes the main special symbol can be set. The system is configured such that advantageous benefits are more easily given to the player in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery.

With this configuration, in the fourth embodiment, the time saving states set as the gaming states include a time saving state disadvantageous to the player (time saving B) and a time saving state advantageous to the player (time saving A). ) and can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is possible to set gaming states with different degrees of advantage simply by changing the variation patterns (variation times) of each special symbol, so it is not necessary to use a special configuration to make the degrees of advantage different. Therefore, the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will be continued. When the process of S1693 or S1695 is finished, next, the value of the time saving counter 203k is set to 100 (S1694), and a status command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the set gaming status (S1696). ). Thereafter, the same processes as S1617 and S1618 as the above-described jackpot control process (see S1504 in FIG. 52) are executed, and this process ends.

In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of time saving states (time saving A, time saving B) can be set, and no matter which time saving state is set, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is set to 100. It is configured to do so. In other words, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state in the fourth embodiment, only the change number end condition that is satisfied when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 100 is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to each of the embodiments described above, a time saving state may be set in which a plurality of time saving end conditions are set.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the same time saving end condition (100 for the value of the time saving counter 203k) is set regardless of the type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set. However, different time-saving end conditions may be set depending on the type of time-saving state that has been set, and if a time-saving state is set in which a time-saving game that is advantageous to the player is performed, a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player may be set. It may be configured such that a time-saving end condition that is more difficult to satisfy than when a time-saving state in which a time-saving game is played is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the contents of the small hit control process 4 in the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 4 (S1595). This small win control process 4 (see S1595 in FIG. 151) is a part of the process executed at the opening timing of the V winning opening, in contrast to the small win control process (see S1505 in FIG. 53) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that ``is deleted'', but the process is otherwise the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the small hit control process 4 (S1595 in FIG. 151) is executed, first, the same processes as S1701 to S1706 as the above-mentioned small hit control process (see S1505 in FIG. 53) are executed, and when the process in S1706 is finished, , skips the processing in S1707 and S1708, executes the processing in S1709 and S1710, and ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S1705, if it is determined that the current time is not the timing to open the V winning hole (S1705: No), the process of S1711 to S1721, which is the same as the process of the small hit control process (S1505 in FIG. 53) described above, is executed. Execute and end this process.

As explained above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous fluctuation configuration). ), 1st type winning where you win a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and 2nd type winning where you win a small winning by drawing a special symbol and win a jackpot if the ball passes through a specific area during the small winning game. This embodiment is different from each of the above-described embodiments in that it has a configuration (so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed configuration) that can execute the following.

In the game state in which the time saving state is set, there is a time saving state (time saving B) in which fluctuations in the first special symbol are mainly executed, and a time saving state (time saving A) in which fluctuations in the second special symbol are mainly executed. ) can be set by varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol set in simultaneous variation.

Furthermore, the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol, and the time saving state where the above-mentioned time saving A is set is better than the time saving state where the time saving B is set. The game is configured so that the game state is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving state in which the time saving B is set is configured such that the number of fluctuations (lotteries) of the first special symbol is greater than in the normal state.

In other words, the simultaneous variation configuration described above is applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described 1 type and 2 type mixed configuration, and the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol during the time saving state is made to differ depending on the type of jackpot. By configuring this, it is possible to execute a time-saving game in which a large number of variations (lotteries) of the second special symbol are executed, and a time-saving game in which a large number of variations (lotteries) in the first special symbol are executed.

In addition, by configuring the second special symbol so that it is easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol (including a configuration in which the first special symbol does not perform a small winning lottery), it is possible to play a time-saving game during a time-saving state. There is an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player by aiming for both the 1st type winning and the 2nd type winning (a time-saving game in which the player executes many changes (lotteries) of the 2nd special symbol), and a disadvantageous time-saving state where the player aims only for the 1st type winning. state (a time-saving game in which a large number of variations (lotteries) of the first special symbol are executed) can be set. Further, even when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

Therefore, this is advantageous compared to a conventional gaming machine having a one-type, two-type mixed configuration in which only a gaming state (time-saving state) in which it is easier to win two types than the normal state can be set as a gaming state advantageous to the player. It is possible to set a plurality of game states with different stages and provide various games to the player, thereby making it possible to provide games that are rich in interest.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously. It can be displayed. Therefore, more special symbol lottery games can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a jackpot will be awarded to a player within a predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, in this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display of a jackpot or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or fluctuatingly displayed while measurement of the fluctuating time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of a variable display disappears. It is possible to know that the player is not playing a jackpot game with peace of mind.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. In the fourth embodiment, in contrast to each of the above-described embodiments, the lottery (fluctuation) of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed in duplicate (so-called simultaneous fluctuation configuration). ) There is a big difference in that.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as the time saving state, there is a time saving state (time saving B) in which the first special symbol variation (lottery) is mainly executed, and a time saving state (time saving B) in which the second special symbol variation (lottery) is mainly executed. The state (time saving A) is configured to be settable, and the number of time saving times displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the number of time saving times on the display) is made to vary depending on the set time saving state. It is composed of By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the number of time reductions according to the number of variable performances (the number of variations of the main special symbol) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, the fourth embodiment is configured such that a small win is won by drawing the second special symbol (see FIG. 129(b)), and a small win is won by drawing the second special symbol. In this case (when a small winning symbol indicating a small win is stopped and displayed), the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a missing symbol indicating a loss.

Since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that small wins are won at a rate of 994/1000 (see Figure 129(b)), in the gaming state where time saving A is set, the number of time saving times Even if 100 times is set, the variation (lottery) of the main special symbol (second special symbol) can only be executed about 50 times.

Therefore, when time saving A is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display 50 times as the display time saving number, and the variation (lottery) of the main special symbol (second special symbol) is ) is configured to update (subtract) the display time saving number each time it is executed. As a result, the number of time reductions is actually set to 100, and the number of time reductions is set as 100 without making the player aware that the number of time reductions is subtracted in response to the change in the first special symbol that is forcibly stopped. It is possible to make the player think that 50 times has been set, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, when displaying the number of time saving times mentioned above, for example, if the second special symbol is won by lottery, or if the suspended memory of the first special symbol is exhausted and a new variation of the first special symbol is started. In the case where the first special symbol is not changing at the time when the second special symbol wins the small hit (the time when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed), that is, at the timing when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped. If a situation occurs in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol cannot be stopped, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (main special symbol) that can be executed during the time saving state will be greater than the number of times for display. , If the variation of the first special symbol stops while the second special symbol is changing or the variation of the second special symbol is not performed, and a new variation of the first special symbol starts, the second special symbol Because the first special symbol is changed regardless of the change in the special symbol, the number of times the second special symbol (main special symbol) can be changed during the time saving state is less than the number of times the display time is saved. A problem occurs.

In contrast, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined error occurs between the displayed number of time reductions and the actual number of time reductions, a time reduction number correction effect is executed to correct the error. (See Figure 127). As a result, the time saving state ends with an error occurring between the number of variations of the main special symbol executed during the time saving state set this time (remaining number of times executed during the time saving state) and the display time saving number. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game player gets stuck and feels uncomfortable to the player.

In addition, in order to update the display time saving number according to the fluctuation of the main special symbol executed during the time saving state, the player pays attention to the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the time saving number. With this, you can safely play games while saving time.

In addition, as a correction performance for the number of time reductions mentioned above, the subtraction correction performance that is executed when the number of display time reductions becomes larger than the actual number of time reductions is such that the fluctuation pattern of the selected main special symbol is changed for a predetermined time (e.g. , 30 seconds) or more, and if the variation pattern is longer than a predetermined time, a pseudo-variation effect (pseudo-variation stop and pseudo-variation effect) that makes one special symbol variation look like multiple special symbol variations A performance that updates (subtracts) the display time reduction number is executed at the point when the fluctuation is pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped), or when the fluctuation is restarted from a temporarily stopped state. be done. Thereby, the display time saving number can be subtracted without any discomfort during one special symbol change.

On the other hand, the addition correction performance that is executed when the display time saving number is less than the actual time saving number is whether the fluctuation pattern of the selected main special symbol is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If the variation pattern is longer than a predetermined time, an addition display is displayed on the display screen to indicate that the display time reduction number will be added, and the display time reduction number is added. good. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the number of time reductions has been added in the middle of the game.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the same number of time reductions is set, the number of time reductions displayed is set differently depending on the set time reduction state, thereby providing a benefit to the player. The game can be played during the time saving state without giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, since the number of time reductions to be displayed in advance differs depending on the set time reduction state, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of the effect that corrects the number of display time reductions during the time reduction state, making it easy for players to understand. Easy games can be provided.

In addition, the performance mode of the correction performance that corrects the number of display time reductions during the time reduction state is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and for example, as a performance corresponding to the fluctuating display of the main special symbol, it may be shown that the number of display time reductions is reduced by multiple pieces. By displaying the item on the display screen, it may be configured to subtract multiple display time saving times in one main special symbol change, or a number less than 50 may be displayed in advance as the display time saving number. , the execution frequency of the subtraction correction effect may be extremely reduced.

In addition, the performance mode of the addition correction performance is not limited to the above-mentioned one, for example, after the display time saving number becomes "1 time", "? times" is displayed and how long the time saving state continues. It may be configured so that the player does not know the main special symbol fluctuations, or if it is known in advance that players have won consecutively in the lottery of main special symbol fluctuations, multiple main special symbol fluctuations can be combined into one main symbol fluctuation. It is configured to perform a pseudo variation to make it look like a special symbol variation, and is configured so that the display time saving number is subtracted only once even though the main special symbol variation is actually executed twice. It's okay.

Further, even when there is no error between the display time reduction number and the actual time reduction number, the subtraction correction effect and the addition correction effect may be intentionally executed. Thereby, various performances can be performed during the time saving state, so that it is possible to provide players with games that they will never get tired of.

Among the contents of the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment, points that are different from the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. do. First, the contents of the effect setting process 4 (S2891) will be explained with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of production setting processing 4 (S2891).

This effect setting process 4 (S2891) is different from the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 104 in FIG. 104) in the second embodiment, in which part of the process is (see S2851), different display commands are set depending on the type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B), and display commands are set depending on the actual number of time saving times (remaining number of time saving times). The difference is that a process for correcting the number of shortened working hours has been added.

When the effect setting process 4 (see S2891 in FIG. 152) is executed, first, the same processes as S2901 and S2902 as the effect setting process described above (see S2804 in FIG. 63) are executed, and then the effect setting process described above is executed. 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3301: No), that is, in the state where the time saving state is set, the first special If the symbol variation has ended, the same processes as S3306 to S3308 are executed as the effect setting process 2 (see S2851 in FIG. 104), and then the display time reduction number correction process is executed (S3376), and the main process end.

In this display time saving number correction process (S3376), the display time saving number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state and the actual time saving number are determined, and a predetermined error occurs in the determination result. In this case, processing for correcting the value of the display time saving number is executed. The detailed content of this display time reduction number correction process (S3376) will be described later with reference to FIG. 153.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the time saving start flag 223ad is set to ON (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the type of the currently set time saving state is time saving A (S3371 ), if it is determined that it is not time saving A (S3371: No), a display time saving B start command is set (S3372), and the process moves to S3374. The display time saving B start command set here is output to the display control device 114 through command output processing in the same way as the other display commands described above, and the display screen shown in FIG. 126(b) is displayed. Referenced from time to time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3371 that it is time saving A (S3371: Yes), a display time saving A start command is set (S3373), and the process moves to S3374. When the display time saving A start command is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 126(a) is displayed.

In the process of S3374, the corresponding time saving state (work time saving type) is stored in the time saving state storage area 223cb (S3374), the time saving start flag 223ad is set to OFF (S3375), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the contents of the display time reduction number correction process (S3376) will be explained. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display time reduction number correction process (S3376). In this display time reduction number correction process (S3376), it is determined whether or not to execute the above-mentioned lower correction effect process with reference to FIG. 127.

When the display time reduction number correction process (S3376) is executed, first, the value of the display time reduction number counter Ca, that is, the remaining time reduction number displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm10 on the display screen is read out (S3701). . This display time saving number counter Ca is set for the second special symbol when the time saving A is set, that is, when the time saving state in which the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol is mainly performed is set. It is updated every time a variation is executed, and if time saving B is set, that is, if a time saving state is set in which variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is mainly performed, the first special symbol is updated every time a change is executed.

Next, the actual remaining number of time savings stored in the time saving information update area 223g is read (S3702), and the difference between the value read in the process of S3701 and the value read in the process of S3702 is calculated (S3703), It is determined whether there is a difference between the values compared in the process of S3703 (S3704), and if it is determined that there is a difference (S3704: Yes), the fluctuation time set in the current fluctuation pattern is read (S3705), It is determined whether the read variation time is longer than a predetermined time (30 seconds) (S3706).

In the process of S3706, if it is determined that it is 30 seconds or more (S3706: Yes), then the number of pseudo stops (special symbol (third symbol in the pseudo stop effect) corresponding to the difference value calculated in the process of S3703) (S3707), and determines a correction variation pattern corresponding to the set number of pseudo variations (number of pseudo stops) (S3708). Then, the value of the display time saving number counter Ca is corrected to the value of the time saving information update area, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3704 that there is no difference (S3704: No), or if it is determined in the process of S3706 that the variation time is not 30 seconds or more (S3706: No), this process is continued. finish.

<About the first modification of the first embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the first special symbol lottery is executed by executing the left-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed by executing the right-handed game. A configuration was used in which the first ball entry port 64 was provided in the left region and the second ball entry port 640 was provided in the right region. Then, when a small hit is won by drawing the second special symbol, multiple small winning types (small winnings A to C) can be set, and the number of small winnings won in the time saving state is set. Based on this, in detail, when the number of times set for the small win type set for the difference in winning a small win reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving termination condition for ending the time saving state was configured to be satisfied. .

On the other hand, this modification differs greatly in that it is configured so that by executing a right-handed game, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed. In this way, in the right-handed game executed during the time saving state, by configuring so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, the time saving end for ending the time saving state can be performed. As conditions, it is possible to set a special pattern 1 end condition based on the first special symbol lottery and a special symbol 2 end condition based on the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the time-saving state ends, so that it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the game content, resulting in a monotonous game, and from becoming bored with the game early. can.

Here, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modification will be explained. Note that the same elements as in the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 154, the pachinko machine 10 of this modification differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in the configuration of the right side area. First, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right region, and balls fired in a right-handed game are alternately distributed to a left channel 701 and a right channel 702 formed on the left side of the distribution member.

A movable lid 1500 is provided on the upstream side of the left flow path and forms a downstream surface thereof, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a certain opening/closing operation is performed by a movable control means (not shown). The movable lid 1500 is configured to be positioned in an open state where a ball can enter the first ball entry port 64b disposed below the movable lid 1500, and a closed state where it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64b on the right side. Opening/closing operations are performed.

Specifically, a movable lid opening/closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 51), and the movable lid opening/closing process allows an opening period of 0.1 seconds. , and a closing period of 2 to 3 seconds are repeated according to a predetermined scenario. The first ball entry port 64b on the right side, which is controlled to open and close in this manner, is configured so that it is more difficult for a ball to enter than the first ball entry port 64.

The ball that has flown down the left flow path 701 and flowed down on the movable lid 1500 flows down the bent part of the left flow path 701, passes through the through gate 67 provided at the lower end of the left flow path 701, and then passes to the right side. drains into the lower region of the region. Further, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be able to enter above the through gate 67 of the left flow path 701, and when the electric accessory 640a performs an opening operation, the ball flowing down the left flow path 701 is The ball is configured to be guided to the second ball entry port 640.

On the other hand, the balls distributed to the right channel 702 by the sorting device 700 flow into the inlet 704a of the warp channel 704b provided on the back side of the left channel 701 (the back side from the perspective of FIG. 154). It flows out to the lower area of the right side area. Here, the ball outflow position of the left flow path 701 and the ball outflow position of the right flow path 702 will be explained with reference to FIG. 154.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be explained in detail. This constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 53), the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 0.8 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present modification 1, the balls fired in the right-handed game flow into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the rolling ball in which the constantly movable member 1500 is disposed It flows downstream while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls onto the always movable member) matches the timing at which the always movable valve 1500 becomes open, The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the first left ball entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling onto the constantly movable member) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 becomes open is 0.9 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which both of them match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when a right-handed game is played continuously, about four balls will enter the left first ball entry port 64b in one minute.

In other words, in a gaming state where a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball will periodically enter the left first ball entrance 64b, so the jackpot game will not be possible. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the special drawing 1 is not held when the time saving state is entered after the end of the play. In addition, since the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time is set as a period (0.1 seconds) during which it is difficult for the player to aim, the first ball entered on the left in the normal gaming state. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game in which the player aims at the opening 64a.

To explain specifically, when playing a left-handed game in the normal gaming state, about 15 out of 250 balls fired will enter the first left ball entrance 64a. It is designed so that if a ball enters the ball, five prize balls will be paid out. Further, it is designed so that about 5 balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in a left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to enter approximately 20 balls into the left first ball entrance 64a, taking into account that the prize balls that are paid out will be fired again. becomes.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and a right-handed game is performed, the ball is designed so that about 9 of the 250 balls fired will enter the first right ball entrance 64b. If the ball hits the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right side area. Therefore, in a right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, approximately 10 balls must enter the right first ball entrance 64b, even considering that the prize balls that are paid out will be fired again. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing right-handed games.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the general prize opening 63 is not provided in the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired in the right-handed game passes, when the game state is normal, the right-handed game is more popular than the left-handed game. The general winning hole 63 may be provided based on a design concept that does not give an advantage to the player. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game during a time saving state or a jackpot state.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side area of the game board 13 in this modification 1, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are different from the configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above. I will mainly explain the points.

In the first modification, a through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having the bent portion 701a, and a second inlet is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball mouth 640 is provided. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals can be caused to flow down toward the second ball entry port 640 without reducing the speed of the balls flowing down. Therefore, since the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 at the same time. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, if you do not notice that the electric accessory 640a has been opened and the third symbol display device 81 notifies you that the electric accessory 640a is opened (see FIG. 23(b)), The ball can enter the second ball entry port 640.

In addition, the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, and the electric accessory 640a, whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are divided into different channels (first channel 701, Since the distribution member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702), if the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the balls flow down only to one of the flow paths (if the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entry port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball at 640. In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessories 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the balls flow down only in one flow path. This makes it possible to create a situation in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, it is possible to create a situation in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a situation where it is easy to cause this.

By configuring in this way, when playing a right-handed game in a state where the time saving state is set, it is possible to execute the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Furthermore, even if a ball is fired aiming at the second ball entry port 640 in order to execute a lottery of a second special symbol that is advantageous to the player, the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640 through the flow path. Since the left flow path 701 is provided with the right side first ball entrance 64b for executing the lottery of the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this modification, in the right side area of the game board 13, there is a ball entrance (first ball entrance on the left side 64b) that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, and a ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. A second ball entry port 640 is provided so that a ball fired in a right-handed game can land in any of the ball entry ports. A sorting device may be provided in the right side area of the board 13 for alternately distributing the balls into a first guide path leading to the left first ball entry port 64b and a second guide path leading to the second ball entry port 640.

With this configuration, when the right-handed game is executed, the lottery conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery conditions for the second special symbol can be established alternately, so that excessive damage is caused to the player. (i.e., only the lottery of the second special symbol is carried out biasedly during the time-saving state) and a gaming state that is excessively disadvantageous to the player ( In other words, it is possible to prevent only the lottery of the first special symbol from being carried out unevenly during the time saving state.

<About the first modification of the second embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. In the second embodiment described above, there is a time-saving ending condition (special pattern 1 ending condition) that can be established based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and a time-saving ending condition (special symbol 1 ending condition) that can be established based on the lottery of the second special symbol. 2 ending conditions), and the degree of expectation of winning the second type based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the degree of expectation of acquiring the prize of the second type based on the lottery of the second special symbol, were configured differently.

Specifically, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that the time-saving state ends more easily than the lottery for the second special symbol (the time-saving end condition is more likely to be met), and it is easier to obtain the second type of win. Ta. As shown in FIG. 82, when the time saving state is set, a left-handed game (a game in which the first special symbol is drawn) and a right-handed game (a game in which the second special symbol is drawn) are played. It was configured to display a performance screen that allows the player to select one of the games, and to make the player play the desired game.

On the other hand, in this first modification, an effect is executed to have one game (right-handed game) played in a state where the time saving state is set, and immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied in the one game. When it is determined that the state is (a state in which the pre-time saving end condition is satisfied), an effect is executed to cause the player to play the other game (left-handed game). With this configuration, the player can enjoy the game to the fullest during the time-saving state by playing the game in accordance with the performance being executed (by varying the game method).

Next, the display screen in the state where the time saving state of this modification is set will be explained with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG. 155(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the ending screen of a jackpot (jackpots A, B, and D in the second embodiment described above) in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and FIG. 155(b) ) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when the time-saving termination condition regarding the right-handed game is satisfied during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen after the time-saving end condition regarding the right-handed game is satisfied during the period in which the game is played. In addition, in each display screen, the same reference numerals are given to the elements that display the same effect modes as in the second embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, in addition to displaying "Right hit" in the guidance display area Dm2, the display mode also shows "Right hit" in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. is displayed. Here, in this modified example, unlike the second embodiment described above, an effect display for encouraging the player to play is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2, and a gaming state is entered in the gaming direction instruction display mode Dm20. The display mode is configured to display a display mode corresponding to an instruction command for notifying the corresponding gaming direction.

In other words, during the jackpot game and during the time saving state, the display mode indicating "right-handed play" is always displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Furthermore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment saying "After the jackpot is over, hit right for a thrilling rush" is displayed in order to make the player play the right-handed game after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when a right-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and the time-saving end condition that can be established based on the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is about to be established (special symbol 2 time-saving end condition ), as shown in FIG. 155(b), the comment "End of pounding rush, entry into pullback zone" is displayed, indicating that the right-handed game in the time-saving state has ended, and the guide display area Dm2 displays "Left-handed game". The characters "Uchi" are displayed.

As a result, the player ends the right-handed game and starts playing the left-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state has ended and the normal state has been set. Incidentally, since the time saving state has not actually ended, "Right hit" continues to be displayed in the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. Then, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, reserved symbol displays Dsb to Dse of the first special symbols obtainable by the left-handed game are displayed.

Then, when the player starts a left-handed game, the performance in the pullback zone is executed as shown in FIG. 156(a). Note that the performance during this pull-back zone is the same as that in the case where the left-handed game is performed during the time saving state in the second embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As explained above, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 156(b), in the state where the time saving state is set, the degree to which multiple time saving end conditions are satisfied (progress state) is determined, and the right-handed It is configured to execute effects such as making the player play a game or playing a left-handed game. This has the effect of allowing players to play various games during the time saving state.

Furthermore, in this modification, the game direction is displayed in the guide display area Dm2 so that a right-handed game is played in the first half of the time saving state, and a left-handed game is played in the second half. Thereby, the right-handed game can be executed continuously from the jackpot game, and the left-handed game can be continued when the time saving state is finished and the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation for changing the game direction from becoming complicated.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state is about to end in a right-handed game, that is, the time-saving end condition that is established based on the information updated by the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is just before the time-saving state ends. When it is determined that this is the case, an effect is performed to guide left-handed games, so it is possible to guide the player to games in which it is difficult to satisfy the time-saving termination conditions for ending the time-saving state according to the current situation. . Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to an advantageous gaming method.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment to which this modification is applied, as shown in FIG. 2, both when the normal state is set as the game state and when the time saving state is set, the left-handed game allows The configuration is such that the percentage of balls entering the ball entry port 64 is the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the time-saving state or the normal state is set during the "pull-back zone" in which a left-handed game is played in the latter half of the time-saving state.

In addition, in the second embodiment to which this modification is applied, as described above, it is configured so that it is easier to win two types based on the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state than in the normal state. Therefore, during the "pullback zone" where the time saving state is set, the ease of drawing (fluctuation) of the first special symbol is the same as when the normal state is set, but Since it is easier to win two types based on this, the game state is more advantageous than the normal state.

Therefore, a gaming state in which a jackpot is actually more likely to be set (easier to obtain a second type win) than a normal state can be produced as a "pullback zone," so that the production effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, the timing at which the pre-time saving end condition is satisfied based on the right-handed game differs depending on the lottery result of the right-handed game (the lottery result of the second special symbol), so the period during which this "pullback zone" is executed is indefinite. Become something. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the "pullback zone" will continue for a long period of time.

In addition, in this modification, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is set according to the gaming state, and the guidance is displayed according to the gaming state and the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not it is satisfied before the end of the time saving). The display mode of the area Dm2 is configured to be set, and the display mode of the guidance display area Dm2 is displayed larger than the display mode of the gaming direction instruction display mode Dm20 so as to actively guide the player about the gaming method. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 may be changed depending on the gaming state and the progress of the time-saving termination condition (whether or not it is satisfied before the time-saving termination condition is met). It's okay. In addition, in this case, if the conditions before the end of time-saving are satisfied by a right-handed game (a game for executing the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol) during the time-saving state, the conditions before the end of time-saving are satisfied. It is better to change the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 so that it is less noticeable than when it is not displayed.

In this way, in the state where the time saving state is set, the display mode of the game direction instruction display mode Dm20 is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode depending on the progress of the time saving end condition (whether or not it is satisfied before the time saving end condition is met). By changing the notification mode, it becomes possible for the player to visually determine the degree of advantage when playing the game according to the game direction (for example, right-handed play) notified by the game direction instruction display mode Dm20. .

<About the fifth embodiment>
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. The fifth embodiment is the same as the second embodiment described above in that the player is allowed to select a gaming method when a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set. In the second embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set, there is a game (first game) in which a first special symbol (special symbol 1) is drawn, and a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn. The configuration was such that the player could select a game (second game) in which the game was played (see FIG. 82). Then, when the first game is selected, the special drawing 1 is drawn by aiming at the first ball opening 64 with the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is drawn with the right-handed game. It was configured so that the special drawing 2 lottery was drawn by aiming at the opening 640 (see Fig. 2).

Then, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the conditions that can be established by the special drawing 1 lottery and the conditions that can be established by the special drawing 2 lottery are made different, so that the time-saving ending condition is likely to be satisfied (the time-saving state ends The configuration is such that a player can select a game (which is easier to play) and a game (which is less likely to satisfy a time-saving ending condition) than the other game.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the game in which the time-saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied (the first game) is more effective in one special symbol lottery than the game in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be established (the second game). The probability of winning a jackpot, that is, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and the probability of winning a small win in a special symbol lottery, and winning a jackpot (two types of wins) during the small win (during a small win game) The configuration was such that the sum of the probability and the probability of

In the second embodiment configured in this way, the player can play various games by having the player select a gaming method when the time saving state is set, so that the player can quickly get bored with the game. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, the ease of ending the time-saving state (the ease of establishing the time-saving end condition) and the level of expectation of a jackpot for one special drawing lottery may be varied depending on the gaming method selected by the player. This allows players to select the game that suits them, and it is possible to provide games that are suitable for a variety of players.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, one game (second game) among the game methods selected by the player during the time saving state is the second entering ball that is easier to enter than the normal state. The game is to aim at the opening 640, but the other game (first game) is a game to aim at the first ball entry opening 64, where the ease of entering the ball is the same as in the normal state. There was a problem in that it was difficult to give a sense of advantage due to the time saving state being set.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 168. The fifth embodiment is the same as the second embodiment described above in that the player is allowed to select a gaming method when a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set. In the second embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set, there is a game (first game) in which a first special symbol (special symbol 1) is drawn, and a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn. The configuration was such that the player could select a game (second game) in which the game was played (see FIG. 82). Then, when the first game is selected, the special drawing 1 is drawn by aiming at the first ball opening 64 with the left-handed game, and when the second game is selected, the second ball is drawn with the right-handed game. It was configured so that the special drawing 2 lottery was drawn by aiming at the opening 640 (see Fig. 2).

Then, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the conditions that can be established by the special drawing 1 lottery and the conditions that can be established by the special drawing 2 lottery are made different, so that the time-saving ending condition is likely to be satisfied (the time-saving state ends The configuration is such that a player can select a game (which is easier to play) and a game (which is less likely to satisfy a time-saving ending condition) than the other game.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the game in which the time-saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied (the first game) is more effective in one special symbol lottery than the game in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be established (the second game). The probability of winning a jackpot, that is, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and the probability of winning a small win in a special symbol lottery, and winning a jackpot (two types of wins) during the small win (during a small win game) The configuration was such that the sum of the probability and the probability of

In the second embodiment configured in this way, the player can play various games by having the player select a gaming method when the time saving state is set, so that the player can quickly get bored with the game. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, the ease of ending the time-saving state (the ease of establishing the time-saving end condition) and the level of expectation of a jackpot for one special drawing lottery may be varied depending on the gaming method selected by the player. This allows players to select the game that suits them, and it is possible to provide games that are suitable for a variety of players.

However, in the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, one of the games (second game) selected by the player during the time saving state is more effective than the normal state due to the setting of the time saving state. The game is to aim at the second ball entry port 640 where it is easier to enter the ball, but the other game (first game) is the game to aim at the first ball entry port 64 where the ease of ball entry is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult to give the player a sense of advantage due to the time-saving state being set. In other words, by setting the time-saving state, changes in special symbols (lotteries) are performed more efficiently than in the normal state, and in that state, different game characteristics (ease of ending the time-saving state, one-time It was not possible to provide the expected level of jackpot in the special drawing lottery.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, similar to the fourth embodiment described above, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is simultaneously executed. By varying the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol that can be set depending on the gaming state, the player can select different gaming characteristics in the time-saving state. It is configured as follows.

As a result, by setting the time-saving state, it is possible to provide a game in which changes in special symbols (lottery) can be performed more efficiently than in the normal state, and in which the player can select different gameplay features. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 157 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment has the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 (play area on the right side of the variable display unit 80) and the game area below the variable display unit 80. This is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment (same as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 2). The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is formed so that the right side area is broadly divided into two parts, and the control handle 51 The ball flows down different channels depending on the magnitude of the resistance value (firing strength) detected by a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) by changes in electrical resistance. It is configured as follows.

Specifically, when the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 exceeds a reference amount, the fired ball is configured to flow down the right side area, and If the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) is greater than the reference amount and less than the limit amount (weak right-handed game), the area is divided into left and right by a regulation wall (regulation member) 900 provided in the center of the right area. If the ball is fired toward the first right area 901a on the left side of the area, and the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the operating handle 51 is greater than or equal to the limit amount and less than the limit amount (strong right-handed game), The ball is configured to be launched toward a second right side area 901b on the right side of the area divided into right and left sides by the restriction wall (restriction member) 900. In the fifth embodiment, the firing intensity is configured to increase according to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51, but when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 reaches a predetermined amount of rotational operation. However, the configuration is such that the operating handle 51 can be rotated even after the firing intensity reaches its maximum. With this configuration, when playing a hard right-handed game, there is no need to operate the operating handle 51 to the limit (up to the upper limit) of the rotational operation range of the operating handle 51, making the operating handle 51 difficult to break. be able to.

Hereinafter, in the right-handed game, a game that aims at the first right area 901a will be referred to as a weak right-handed game, and a game that aims at the second right area 901b will be referred to as a strong right-handed game. In addition, in the present fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games depending on the magnitude of the firing intensity of the right-handed game, but the right-handed game can be divided into a plurality of games by other configurations. For example, the configuration may be such that a plurality of games that are different from each other are repeatedly set depending on the magnitude of the firing intensity, or even if the balls are fired with the same firing intensity, It may be configured so that different games are set depending on the timing and number of balls fired, and the right side area may be formed so that the balls flow down a different area for each different game.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the right-handed game is divided into a plurality of games according to the firing strength of the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that a plurality of games are set for each game.

Returning to FIG. 157, the explanation will be continued. The ball fired in the light right-handed game hits the opening formed between the variable display unit 80 and a plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display unit 80). It enters and flows down the first right side area 901a. On the other hand, the ball fired in the hard right-handed game enters the opening formed above the plurality of nails planted above the game board 13 (above the variable display unit 80), and enters the second It flows down the right side area 901b.

As shown in FIG. 157, the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment includes an identifier indicating that the right area is divided into a plurality of right areas (first right area 901a, second right area 901b). A mark 910 resembling a fish (displayed in the first right area) and a mark 911 resembling a turtle (displayed in the second right area) are placed near the entrance of each area in a manner that is visible to the player (the game board 13) is attached. With this configuration, it is possible to identify whether or not the game desired by the player (hard right-handed game, weak right-handed game) is actually being played by the mark affixed to the trajectory of the shot ball. You can easily identify it by doing so.

Although the fifth embodiment uses a configuration in which the above-described first right area display 910 and second right area display 911 are pasted one by one near the entrance of each area, the present invention is not limited to this. , more than one may be pasted. Also, instead of pasting them on the surface of the game board 13, the surface of the game board 13 is made of a transparent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.), and each mark is attached so as to be embedded in the transparent material. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, each mark (first right area display 910, second right area display 911) will not come into contact with the fired ball, so each mark will not peel off due to contact with the ball. It is possible to suppress the problem of storage.

A second ball entry port 640 is provided in the first right region 901a among the regions partitioned by the regulation wall 900, and most of the balls that enter the first right region 901a (approximately 95%) enter the second ball entry port 640. The ball is configured to enter the opening 640. Although the details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, a variable time of 10 minutes is set for the special drawing 2 lottery executed when the normal state is set as the gaming state. are doing. The number of balls to be paid out (number of prize balls) when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is set to one.

With this configuration, even if a weak right-handed game is executed in the normal state, the number of balls will not increase (the number of balls paid out will be smaller than the number of balls fired), and the second entering ball will not increase. Even if the rate of balls entering the mouth 640 is increased, it is possible to efficiently prevent the special drawing 2 lottery from being executed.

Next, in the second right side area 901b of the area partitioned by the regulating wall 900, a through gate 67 and a first right ball entry opening 964 are provided. An electric accessory 964a is attached to this right first ball entrance 964. This electric accessory 964a operates on the same principle of operation as the electric accessory 640a of the second embodiment described above, and is based on the lottery result of a common figure lottery that is executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67. Depending on the situation, the first right ball entry port 964 can be changed into an open state in which the ball can easily enter the ball, and a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball into the opening (964). Note that the detailed contents are the same as those of the second embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by arranging different ball entrances for each divided area, it is configured such that different special drawing lots are executed depending on the game content during the time saving state. Although the details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, a short (5 to 60 seconds) variable time is applied to the special drawing 2 lottery executed when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. configured to be set.

Therefore, during the time saving state, both the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery can be executed, so the player can select which game to play. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the player is configured to receive different lottery results depending on whether the special drawing 1 drawing is held during the time saving state or the special drawing drawing 2 drawing is held during the time saving state. There is.

Specifically, it is easier to end the time-saving state by performing the special map 1 lottery than by performing the special map 2 lottery, and the benefits (number of prize balls) that will be given if you win the jackpot will be larger. It is configured as follows. In other words, during the time saving state, it is possible to execute a high-risk, high-reward game by performing the special drawing 1 lottery rather than performing the special drawing 2 lottery (games with different gameplay characteristics can be executed) . In this way, when the player is allowed to select a gaming method, by having the player perform different gameplay depending on the selected gaming state, the player can be motivated to select the gaming method.

In addition, depending on the gaming method selected, the period during which the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, lasts (average duration) differs, so whether the time-saving state ends in a short period of time or not. The player can choose which one. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to play a game according to his/her convenience.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, if a player selects a gaming method that ends the time-saving state, which is an advantageous gaming state, in a short period of time (shorter period than other gaming methods), he or she will win a jackpot in that time-saving state. The system is configured so that when the player wins, a larger benefit is given to the player than when selecting other gaming methods. Thereby, even if a player selects a gaming method in which the time-saving state ends in a short period of time, benefits can be given fairly to the player, making it easier for the player to select the desired gaming method.

In addition, the fifth embodiment is configured to be able to determine whether the executed right-handed game is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game. Specifically, a first passage sensor 905a is provided in a first right area 901a partitioned by the regulation wall 900, and a second passage sensor 905b is provided in a second right area 901b.

The first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b are detection means for detecting a ball flowing down the surface of the game board 13 (lower surface of ball flow), and can detect the falling (passage) of a ball in a non-contact state. It consists of a proximity sensor. The first passing sensor 905a and the second passing sensor 905b have a passage width of one ball or more and less than two balls (for example, 15 mm) in each area in order to reliably detect a ball passing through each area. It is located at a certain location. By limiting the width of the ball flowing down each area in this way, the accuracy of ball detection can be improved. Furthermore, the number of detection means required to detect the sphere can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b described above are buried in the game board 13 so that their detection areas are on the surface of the game board 13 (the lower surface of the ball flow), and A proximity sensor is provided that detects the change in capacitance caused by the ball flowing down the surface (lower surface of the ball flow), but other types of proximity sensors may also be provided, such as a limit switch, etc. A contact detection type detection means may be provided.

In the fifth embodiment, in order to prevent the proximity sensor corresponding to one area from detecting a ball flowing down the other area, a predetermined thickness ( For example, the configuration is such that the various displacements detected by the proximity sensor (displacement of capacitance, displacement of magnetic field) do not affect the regulation wall 900. The restriction wall 900 may be configured to be made of a material.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, in order to determine which region (first right region 901a, second right region 901b) a ball shot in a right-handed game has passed, a dedicated detection means is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, information (signal) indicating that a ball has entered the ball entrances provided in each of the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b is provided. The determination may be made based on the Alternatively, the amount of adjustment of the operating handle 51 may be detected, and based on the amount of adjustment, a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game may be determined.

In the fifth embodiment, as described above, since the configuration and processing for determining whether the currently executed right-handed game is a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game is provided, the player The current gaming method can be notified to the players.

Next, the detailed configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. First, with reference to FIG. 158, the structure of the upper part of the game board 13, that is, the part where balls fired in a right-handed game are distributed to the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b will be explained. FIG. 158 is a partially enlarged view showing the upper part of the game board 13. FIG. As shown in FIG. 158, the ball fired in the right-handed game passes through the apex portion of the game board 13 (the uppermost portion of the circular playing area of the game board 13 when viewed from the front in FIG. 157). , either an opening 902b formed between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62, or an opening 902a formed below the opening 902b and between the tip nail K1a and the variable display unit 80. It is structured so that it can be distributed to Furthermore, the opening 902b formed above the game board 13 has an entrance width (the width between the tip nail K1a and the rail 62 when a straight line passing through the center point of the circular game area and the tip nail K1a is extended to the rail 62). The entrance width of the opening 902a (distance between the outer wall of the variable display unit 80 and the tip nail K1a among the straight lines passing through the center point of the circular play area and the tip nail K1a) is 4 cm. It is configured to be centimeters.

This is because when a strong right-handed game is performed among right-handed games, the shot ball advances stably along the rail 62, whereas in a weak right-handed game, the trajectory of the ball is stabilized. Since this is difficult, the entrance width of the opening 902a into which the ball fired in the light right-handed game enters is made wider than that of the opening 902b into which the ball fired in the hard right-handed game enters. This is to make it easier to perform.

In other words, by widening the entrance width of the opening 902a, it is possible to widen the range of rotational operation amount of the operating handle 51 that corresponds to a weak right-handed game, so that the player can play a weak right-handed game. It can be made easier.

Furthermore, in the first right area 901a, a fish mark (displayed in the first right area) 910 is pasted near the opening 902a, and in the second right area 901b, a turtle mark (second Right area display) 911 is pasted. In this way, by affixing each mark to the area through which the ball passes immediately after passing through each opening (the ball immediately after being distributed to the divided areas), it is possible to tell the player which area the fired ball is passing through. It is possible to easily understand whether the target has been reached.

Note that in this embodiment, marks for indicating each area (first right area display, second right area display) are pasted in the first right area 901a and second right area 901b, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among the areas through which the ball passes before passing through each aperture (902a, 902b), the first right area is displayed in the area where it is determined which aperture the ball will pass through after passing through that area. 910 and a second right side area display 911 may be attached. In this way, there are marks to indicate each area (first right area display, second right area display) not only within the partitioned area, but also in the area through which a ball that is certain to enter the partitioned specific area passes. By configuring the mark to be pasted (area display), it is possible to easily paste the mark at a position that is easily visible to the player within the limited space of the game board 13.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be explained in detail. FIG. 159(a) is an enlarged view of the right side area when the variable winning device 9650a is open, and FIG. 159(b) is an enlarged view of the right side area when the variable winning device 9650a is closed. be.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, as a game method during a right-handed game, the player selects a weak right-handed game aiming at the first right side area 901a and a strong right-handed game aiming at the second right side area 901b. The game system is configured to allow players to play games with different playability depending on the selected game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, it is necessary for the player to select a desired game method from a weak right-handed game and a strong right-handed game, and adjust the operating handle 51 according to the selected game method. there were. As described above with reference to FIG. 158, in the fifth embodiment, the opening 902a for the light and right-handed games is set so that the adjustment range of the operation handle 51 for the weak and right-handed games that is difficult for the player to adjust is widened. The opening 902b is configured to be wider than the opening 902b for the hard right-handed game, so that the player can easily select a gaming method.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 159(a), in the fifth embodiment, when either game (weak right-handed game or strong right-handed game) is being played in a state where the time saving state is set, Even if there is a jackpot game, a variable prize winning device 9650a is provided which is opened in the jackpot game so that the jackpot game can be executed while continuing the game.

As a result, even if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, it is possible to continue playing the game method selected during the time-saving state, thereby reducing inconvenience to the player in a state where the time-saving state and the jackpot gaming state are repeatedly set. The game can be played without making the user feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, the variable prize winning device 9650a is arranged upstream of the second ball entry port 640 provided in the first right area 901a and the first ball entry port 964 provided in the second right area 901b. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the ball fired in the right-handed game does not enter each ball entrance before winning the variable prize winning device 9650, and the jackpot game can be played smoothly.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 159(b), the variable winning device 9650a operates as a part of the regulation wall 900 in the first right area 901a and the second right area 901b, except during the jackpot game (when the opening operation is not performed). Since the ball is in a closed state so as to partition the two regions, it is possible to prevent balls flowing down each region from entering different regions during the time saving state.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in order to be able to execute a jackpot game while maintaining the gaming method selected by the player during the time saving state, which areas (first right area 901a, second right area Although the variable prize winning device 9650 is arranged so that a ball flowing down the right-hand side 901b) can also win a prize, the present invention is not limited to this. The variable winning device 9650 may be arranged in the area through which the winnings pass before being distributed to the right side area 901b).

Further, a variable winning device may be provided corresponding to each area. Specifically, there is a variable for special figure 2 that is released when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 2 in the first right area 901a where the ball of the weak right-handed game where the lottery of special figure 2 is executed flows down. A winning device is installed, and a special figure 1 is released when a jackpot is won by the lottery of special figure 1 in a second right side area 901b where the ball of the hard right-handed game where the lottery of special figure 1 is executed flows down. The system is configured to include a variable winning device for

With this configuration, if a jackpot is won by playing one of the games (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) while the time-saving state is set, the player will be notified as is. A jackpot game can be executed while continuing the game method. In addition, since different variable winning devices will be opened when a jackpot is won depending on the playing method executed, it is possible to change the playing method while the time saving state is set for the player. It is possible to make it easier to understand that different games are being executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, when the number of changes (lotteries) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (when the condition for ending the number of changes is met), or when the special symbol When the number of small wins in the lottery reaches a predetermined number (when the conditions for ending the number of wins are met), the time saving state changes to the normal state (from a gaming state advantageous to the player to a gaming state disadvantageous to the player). configured to migrate. Note that this configuration differs from the second embodiment described above only in the values set as each termination condition, and the processing for determining whether each termination condition is satisfied or not, and the processing for determining whether each termination condition is satisfied or not. Since the processing for changing the gaming state that is executed when the above is established is the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by making it possible to win a small hit in the lottery for the first special symbol, and not winning a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol. The ease of ending the time-saving state is made different between a game (strong right-handed game) and a game (weak right-handed game) in which a lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Furthermore, if a player wins a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the amount of benefits (amount of prize balls) given to the player in one jackpot will be greater than if the player wins a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. Since the game is configured so that the number of players increases, it is possible to allow the player to actively select a gaming method during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the contents of the jackpot effect executed in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 160(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the jackpot (jackpot game) is started, and FIG. 160(b) is a schematic diagram of the display screen during the jackpot (jackpot game). FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example.

In this embodiment, as described above, the player can select (by operating the operation handle 51) a light right-handed game and a strong right-handed game and execute the game while the time saving state is set. Furthermore, during a jackpot game in which a right-handed game is to be played in the same way as in a time-saving state, the player is guided through a presentation as to whether or not a gaming method corresponding to the desired time-saving game is being performed. It is configured so that it can be done.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 157, the fifth embodiment is configured so that a weak right-handed game and a strong right-handed game can be executed as a gaming method during a time-saving state (time-saving gaming method). The system is configured so that a jackpot game can be executed regardless of which gaming method is being executed. With this configuration, a gaming method corresponding to the gaming method desired by the player during the time-saving state is executed in advance using a period in which a jackpot game is being executed, which is a stage before the time-saving state is set. be able to.

Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment, when different time-saving gaming methods are executed based on the operation of the operating handle 51, the time-saving gaming method desired by the player can be reliably executed. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether the game contents actually executed during the jackpot game (same as the executed game storage area) match the game state desired by the player during the time saving state. The system is configured to perform a performance based on the determination result. This allows the player to understand the current gaming method (gaming method during the jackpot game) in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the jackpot game starts (in the opening period of the jackpot), a comment "Right-handed hit" is displayed in the guide display area Dm2. Then, in the main display area Dm, a selection screen is displayed for the player to select a desired gaming method in the time saving state that is set after the end of the current jackpot game. Specifically, a safe mode display mode 851 and a challenge mode display mode 852 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and an arrow pointing to each display mode periodically repeats pointing to one of the display modes. By operating the frame button 22, a desired gaming method is selected.

This safe mode display mode 851 is selected when wishing to play a weak right-handed game during the time saving state, that is, a game in which a lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed.Challenge mode display mode 852 is selected when desiring a hard right-handed game during the time saving state, that is, a game in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is executed. The diagram shown in FIG. 160(a) shows a state in which an arrow 853 indicating the safe mode display mode 851 is displayed, and by operating (pressing) the operation button 22 in this state, the player can select the desired mode. A gaming method can be selected as a safe mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 160(a), the challenge mode can be selected by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 while the dotted arrow 854 is displayed as a solid line.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Please select the desired game" are displayed as a comment to prompt the player to select the desired mode, and a frame button 22 is displayed to guide the selection operation. A simulated diagram will be displayed. Based on the display contents displayed in this sub-display area Ds, the player understands the contents to be selected at the start of the jackpot, and selects a desired gaming method during the time saving state. With respect to the gaming method selected here, the gaming method being executed during the jackpot game is determined.

During the jackpot game, the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b) is displayed. On the screen during the jackpot game, "Right hit" is continuously displayed in the guide display area Dm2, and the current number of round games is displayed in the round number display area 858. In the example of FIG. 160(b), "ROUND5" indicating that the round game is the fifth round is displayed.

Further, on the right side of the main display area Dm, the current gaming method is displayed in the current game display area 860, and the desired gaming method selected at the start of the jackpot game is displayed in the desired game display area 861. In the diagram shown in FIG. 160(b), a display mode showing "Safety Mode" is displayed in the current game display area 860, and a display mode showing "Challenge Mode" is displayed in the desired game display area 861. . That is, the display contents are displayed when the game method actually executed is different from the game method desired by the player, and in order to change the game method in the game guide area 859 of the sub display area Ds. A comment saying "Hit the right hand harder" is displayed.

By configuring the display mode in this way, adjustments to match the actual gaming method with the gaming method desired by the player (the gaming method that the player wants to execute during the time saving state) can be made before the time saving state is set. This can be done during the period when the jackpot game is being executed. Furthermore, if the playing method being executed during a jackpot game is different from the desired playing method, a guide display for changing the playing method can be displayed during the jackpot game, so that the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to make it easier to execute a desired gaming method during the period of time.

Returning to FIG. 160(b), the explanation will be continued. The display screen during a jackpot game also includes an active jackpot history 855 that shows the playing method when the jackpot in progress was won, a safe mode jackpot history 856 that shows the number of times the jackpot was won during the safe mode, and a challenge. A challenge mode jackpot history 857 indicating the number of jackpot wins during the mode is displayed. The diagram shown in FIG. 160(b) shows that the first special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters the first ball entry hole 64 in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state. The character “V” indicating that the player has won the jackpot is displayed as the running jackpot history 855.

In addition, if the jackpot currently being executed is a jackpot won by a lottery of the second special symbol executed when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 while the time saving state is set. The character "V with a fish mark" is displayed in the winning history 855 during execution, and the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol executed when the ball enters the first ball entry port 964 on the right. If you win, the character "V with a turtle mark" is displayed in the running winning history 855. Thereby, no matter in which gaming state the player wins the jackpot, it is possible to easily understand the trigger of the jackpot.

In addition, by providing a safe mode jackpot history 856 and a challenge mode jackpot history 857, when playing a game with the pachinko machine 10, especially when playing a game in a time saving state, the past information about what kind of game to play is provided. You can refer to your gaming history. This makes it possible to predict a gaming method that will be advantageous to the player, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

In the fifth embodiment, as the past gaming history, a configuration is used in which the gaming methods that were set in the case of winning a jackpot are cumulatively displayed. It may be configured to display the cumulative value of gaming methods selected in the past.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the content of the game during the time saving state in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 161 is a schematic diagram showing the time-saving game contents in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 161, in the fifth embodiment, different games are executed depending on the gaming method executed during the time saving state. Specifically, in a state where the time saving state is set, when a weak right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the first right side area 901a, most of the fired balls enter the second ball entrance 640. The ball enters the ball and one prize ball is paid out.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol lottery that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it is set so that there is no possibility of winning a small hit, and if a jackpot is won, is set so that a 10-round jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the gaming state where the time saving state is set, the fluctuation pattern set according to the lottery of the first special symbol and the fluctuation pattern set according to the lottery of the second special symbol have the same degree of fluctuation. The time is set.

On the other hand, in a state where the time saving state is set, when a hard right-handed game, that is, a game aiming at the second right side area 901b, is executed, the electric accessory 964a based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is executed. opens. When a ball enters the right first ball entrance 964 while the electric accessory 964a is in the opening operation, three prize balls are paid out. Here, the configuration is such that about ⅓ of the balls fired into the second right side area 901b enter the first right ball entry port 964 while the time saving state is set. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when a right-handed game is performed during the time-saving state, whether a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game is performed, the player will be able to maintain the ball in possession. You can get a prize ball (prize ball = medium).

Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery executed in the hard right-handed game is configured so that a small win can be won (the probability of winning is 1/60). ). Here, in the fifth embodiment, as a time saving end condition which is a condition for ending the time saving state, a change number end condition that is satisfied when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) In addition to this, the configuration is such that the time-saving termination condition is satisfied even if a small win is won. In other words, when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is better in a strong right-handed game in which the first special symbol is drawn than in a weak right-handed game in which the second special symbol is drawn. It is configured so that a game that is easy to finish is played.

If the player wins a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the bonus amount (number of prize balls) given to the player is larger than if the player wins a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. The game is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, during the time saving state, the time saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times, but the second special symbol lottery with fewer benefits in case of winning a jackpot is weak. A time-saving state is set until a right-handed game (safety mode) is performed, a special symbol variation is executed 100 times, or a small hit is won, that is, more time-saving ending conditions are set than for a weak right-handed game. However, the time-saving state is easy to end, but there are many benefits if you win the jackpot (12 rounds jackpot) Depending on whether you play the hard right-handed game (challenge mode) in which the first special symbol is drawn, you can enjoy different gameplay. Since the game can be provided to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured such that a small win is not won in the second special symbol lottery, and the time-saving termination condition is satisfied when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery. However, the time-saving termination conditions described in each of the above-described embodiments may be set in addition to the above-mentioned conditions. For example, a small win can be won in both the first special symbol drawing and the second special symbol drawing, and the small winning type set for the won small winning is a specific small winning type (for example, small winning A). It is configured so that the time-saving end condition is satisfied only when You may do so. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether or not the time-saving state ends just by winning a small win, so it is possible to provide the player with a thrilling feeling.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the time-saving end condition is established when a small win is won, that is, when a small win is won once, but the time-saving end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to set a value of one or more as the number of winnings. Furthermore, when winning a small win, a plurality of small win types may be set, and different time-saving termination conditions may be set for each small win type.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. In the fifth embodiment, similarly to the fourth embodiment described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to vary (lottery) at the same time, and the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 is The values set in each table are different from the fourth embodiment described above, but the rest is the same. Detailed explanations of the same locations or locations where the values are simply changed will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 162(a), among the configurations of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment, five tables of variation patterns that differ from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment described above are shown. The contents of 202dd will be explained. FIG. 162(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202dd. This variable pattern 5 table 202dd is different from the above-described variable pattern 4 table 202cd in that the specified contents of the variable pattern table referred to during the time saving state are different.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), the fourth embodiment described above is configured so that different fluctuation pattern tables are referred to depending on the set time saving state (depending on the type of jackpot won). Whereas the first special symbol is configured to be able to set a time saving state where it is easy to change and a time saving state where the second special symbol is easy to change, in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern referred to during the time saving state is set. The difference is that a time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 is defined as the table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 162(b), the contents defined in the time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 will be explained. FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 162(b), this time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 has the first special symbol (special symbol 1) compared to the fluctuation pattern table referred to during the time-saving state of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that there is no major difference in the variation time set for either the variation pattern defined corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) or the variation pattern defined corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2).

That is, in the fourth embodiment described above, in the right-handed game executed when the time saving state is set, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are not drawn by lottery. The lottery is mainly executed by configuring the game board 13 so that the lottery is executed, and by varying the length of the variable time set for each special symbol according to the type of time saving state set as the gaming state. It was configured so that the type of special symbol used could be varied.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the variation pattern table that is referred to when the time saving state is set, the variation time set for each special symbol is set to the same length, and the player The difference is that the type of special symbol in which the lottery is executed is mainly varied by changing the game area in which the symbol is fired.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 162(b), the time-saving simultaneous fluctuation pattern table 202dd2 used in the fifth embodiment includes the lottery results (validity determination A variation pattern (jackpot variation 1 to 3) with a variation time of 10 seconds to 60 seconds is specified for a jackpot (result), and a variation time of 10 seconds for a winning lottery result (judgment result). ~30 second fluctuation patterns (missing fluctuations 1 to 3) are defined. It should be noted that the configuration is such that only the lottery of the first special symbol can be determined as a small hit as a result of the judgment of success or failure, but for this small win, as in the case where the judgment result of success or failure is a loss as described above, it is necessary to wait for 10 seconds or more. A 30-second variation pattern (small win variation 1 to 3) is defined. As a result, it is possible to set the same variation time for a variation that results in a small win and a variation that results in a loss.

Therefore, the effect that suggests that the time saving period ends due to winning the small win can be applied as is even when the lottery result (win/fail judgment result) is a loss. In addition, in the present fifth embodiment, an effect that suggests that the time saving period ends (an effect that indicates that a small win has been won) is performed in cases where the winning/failing judgment result is a loss and in cases where a small win is achieved. However, in addition to that, for example, there is a variation time specified for the case where the lottery result (win/fail determination result) is a small win, and a variation time specified for the case where the lottery result is a jackpot. may be made the same, and an effect may be executed to show the player that he or she has won either a jackpot or a small jackpot. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand until the end whether the player will be given a situation in which he or she wins a jackpot and gets a benefit, or a situation in which he or she wins a small win and the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the contents stipulated in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, in contrast to the second embodiment described above, a first passing counter 223da, a second passing counter 223db, a selected game storage area 223dc, an executed game storage area 223dd, and a jackpot information storage area 223de are provided. The difference is that , and .

The first passing counter 223da is a counter for counting the number of balls detected by the first passing sensor 905a (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game, that is, the number of balls that passed through the first right area 901a during the jackpot game. be. This first pass counter 223da is determined by the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) executed in the main process 5 (see FIG. 164) of the audio lamp control device 113, when the first pass sensor 905a is turned on during a jackpot. If it is determined that there is, the value is incremented by 1 (see S3803). Further, the added value is referred to when determining the gaming method being executed (see S3806 to S3809). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot has ended (when the time saving state is set), the value is cleared (reset) to 0 (see S3811).

The second passage counter 223db is a counter similar to the first passage counter 223da described above, and is the number of balls detected by the second passage sensor 905b (see FIG. 157) during the jackpot game. This is a counter for counting the number of pitches that have passed through the right area 901b. Regarding the processing using this second passage counter 223db, the only difference is that the target of the first passage counter 223da described above is changed from the first passage sensor 905a to the second passage sensor 905b, so a detailed explanation thereof will be given. omitted.

The selected game storage area 223dc is an area for temporarily storing the game method desired by the player during the time saving state. This selected game storage area 223dc stores the game method selected during the game selection period that is set during a predetermined period (10 seconds) after the jackpot game starts (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set). In the frame button input monitoring/performance processing 5 (see S2157 in FIG. 167), if it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is during the game selection period (S3852: Yes), the button press is The corresponding gaming method is stored (S3853).

Based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc, the player determines the game method desired as the game method during the time saving state, and determines the game method desired by the player, and determines the game method on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 160(b)). The display mode of the current gaming method is set. The information stored in this selection game storage area 223dc is configured to be held until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the information stored in the selection game storage area 223dc is retained until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. (see), the selection display mode may be formed such that the arrow points first to the information stored in the selection game storage area 223dc.

Furthermore, if the player does not select any gaming method during the period when the selection screen (see FIG. 160(a)) that is displayed at the start of the jackpot game is displayed (during the game selection period) The game method based on the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc (information stored during the past game selection period) is automatically selected when the frame button 22 is not pressed during the game selection period. It is good to configure.

In this case, at the start and end of the game selection period in which the selection screen is displayed, the game is selected so that the arrow points to the display mode that indicates the game method corresponding to the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. It is a good idea to set the performance mode during the period. With this configuration, even if the player does not select a gaming method, one of the gaming methods is automatically selected without changing the information stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. It is possible to perform a performance that makes it seem as if it has been done.

The executed game storage area 223dd is an area for temporarily storing the game method that is actually being executed. This executed game storage area 223dd stores information indicating the current game method determined based on the area in which the ball shot during a jackpot (during a jackpot game) flows down, and is stored in the execution game storage area 223dd. In the signal input process (see S2151 in FIG. 166) that is executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process 5 of 113 (see FIG. 164), the first right area 901a during a jackpot (during a jackpot game), Information indicating a gaming method based on the number of balls that have flown down the second right side area 901b is stored (S3809, S3810 in FIG. 166). With this configuration, it is possible to determine the area in which the shot ball actually falls and determine the current gaming method based on the determination result, thereby increasing the determination accuracy.

The information stored in the executed game storage area 223dd is used to determine the currently executed game method, and is displayed in the desired game display area 861 of the display screen (FIG. 160(b)) during the jackpot game. This is referred to when setting the aspect (S3554 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot information storage area 223de is an area for storing information related to jackpots. This jackpot information storage area 223de stores information regarding the jackpot won, and includes information indicating the type of jackpot won, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the playing method when winning the jackpot (for example, jackpot The special symbol type that is the target of the winning lottery) is stored, and in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 165), the command transmitted from the main control device 110 is determined to be a winning-related command. If the received command is received (S2211: Yes in FIG. 165), the information included in the received command is stored (S2291 in FIG. 165).

<About the control process in the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control processing of the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be explained. The fifth embodiment executes the same control process as the control process of the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment described above, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are independently (in parallel) ) The structure is configured to allow for fluctuations. If one of the special symbols wins in the lottery (if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a win), the other special symbol fluctuation that is being executed will be displayed to indicate a loss. The configuration is such that the display is forcibly stopped.

In the fourth embodiment described above, when the ball passes through a specific area during the small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the special symbol lottery, The V-switch 650e3 detects a ball) and has a control process so that a jackpot (two types of winning) can be obtained, whereas in the fifth embodiment, the control processing is performed to obtain the above-mentioned two types of winning. The difference is that it does not have any control processing.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned two game states, there are variable probability states (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). ) and a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) are different in that they are configured to be settable.

<About the control process in the audio lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the control processing of the audio lamp control device 1113 in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. As described above, the fifth embodiment is configured so that the player can select the gaming method when the time saving state is set, and the player operates the operation handle 51 to select a weak right-handed game, or Any of the hard right-handed games is executed.

In either a weak right-handed game or a strong right-handed game executed during the time saving state, the ball is fired to the right side of the variable display unit 80 (the right side in front view in FIG. 157) by largely operating the operation handle 51. The game method for right-handed games is divided in detail, and a predetermined adjustment accuracy is required to execute each game method. Therefore, in order for the player to carry out the desired game method, a slight adjustment period and adjustment firing (shooting the ball while adjusting the amount of operation) are required.

In particular, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above with reference to FIG. Since the configuration is such that the amount of operation corresponds to a strong right-handed game, the player can easily execute a strong right-handed game. However, for a weak right-handed game, the amount of operation corresponds to 51 to the extent that it becomes a right-handed game (to the extent that the fired ball reaches the right side area of the variable display unit 80), but to the extent that it does not become a hard right-handed game (the fired ball reaches the second right side area). This requires an adjustment period and adjustment firing.

Therefore, like the performance display executed in the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 82(a)), at the timing when the ending screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing immediately before the time saving state is set. If the effect display for allowing the player to select a gaming method is executed, the time saving state is set while the player is adjusting the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 toward the desired gaming method. Therefore, there is a problem in that the game is likely to be played during the time-saving state in a game method that the player did not intend.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the opening screen of the jackpot game is displayed, that is, at the timing when the jackpot game starts, the time saving is set for the player after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to display an effect for selecting a gaming method in the current state. Thereby, the gaming method can be adjusted using the period in which the jackpot game is executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game in the time saving state using a gaming method that is not intended by the player.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that no matter which one of the plurality of gaming methods the player selects as the gaming method during the time-saving state, the player can obtain the same benefits during the jackpot game. Therefore, the period during which the jackpot game is executed can be used as the period for adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 toward the game method in the time saving state without giving a disadvantageous situation to the player.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select a desired gaming method during the time saving state, and the gaming method selected by the player and the gaming method actually executed during the jackpot game are is compared, and based on the comparison result, a display is made to guide the player on the amount of operation of the operating handle 51. Thereby, the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 can be easily adjusted toward the gaming method desired by the player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the amount of benefits (amount of prize balls) that will be given when winning a jackpot will differ depending on the game (weak right-handed game, strong right-handed game) executed during the time saving state. It is composed of Then, during a period in which the time-saving state (including the variable probability state) and the jackpot game continue repeatedly, that is, during a continuous period (continuous chance period, valid period) in which the normal state (excluding jackpot) is not set as the gaming state, the jackpot is won. The number of winnings (the number of consecutive winnings) is divided and displayed for each game that was being executed when winning the jackpot.

This allows the player to visually check the relationship between the gaming method selected by the player and the jackpot winning situation (number of wins). can be selected based on. Therefore, it is possible to provide a strategy element to the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown using FIGS. 164 to 168, in the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fifth embodiment, the main processing ( Main processing 5 (see Fig. 164) is executed instead of command judgment processing 2 (see Fig. 55), command judgment processing 5 (see Fig. 165) is executed instead of command judgment processing 2 (see Fig. 99), effect update processing 2 (see Fig. 105(b) The difference is that the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 168) is used instead of the process (see FIG. 168).

The fifth embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that the control processing content of the main controller 110 is replaced with the control processing of the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment described above. ing. Therefore, the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 based on the change in the control processing of the main controller 110 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, and the other control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is the same as that of the second embodiment. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of main processing 5 executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 5. As shown in FIG. 164, in main processing 5, frame button input monitoring/production processing 5 (S2197) is performed in place of frame button input monitoring/production processing (S2107) in main processing 2 (see FIG. 55) described above. , is different in that command determination processing 5 (S2193) is executed instead of command determination processing 2 (S2163), and signal input processing (S2151) is further added.

Here, the contents of command determination processing 5 (S2193) will be explained with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 5 (S2193). This command determination process 5 (S2193) is different from the above-described command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) when a winning-related command is received, the information indicated by the received command is stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de. The difference is that it is stored in

When command determination process 5 (S2193 in FIG. 165) is executed, first, the same processes as S2201 to S2209 as command determination process 2 (see S2163 in FIG. 99) described above are executed. Then, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the same winning information related process 2 (S2251) as in the second embodiment described above is executed, and then the process of S2217 is executed. Execute and end this process.

In addition, in the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the above-mentioned winning information related process 2 (S2251), it is determined whether the gaming method in the time saving state is a right-handed game or a left-handed game; Although the system is configured to set the performance content (direction notification performance, error notification performance) based on the result, in the fifth embodiment, such processing is not executed. Although they are different in some respects, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that a winning information command has not been received (S2209 in FIG. 165: No), then it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165). , if it is determined that a winning-related command has been received (S2211 in FIG. 165: Yes), the information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de is updated according to the received content (contents indicated by the winning-related command). Thereafter, the process of S2212 and S2217, which is the same as the command determination process 2 described above (see S2163 in FIG. 99), is executed, and this process ends.

The information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223de that is updated in the process of S2291 described above includes, for example, the number of jackpot wins, the trigger of the lottery that won the jackpot (the trigger of the lottery that won the jackpot, etc.) There is information to indicate the gaming method (playing method used). By configuring the contents of the jackpot information storage area 223de to be updated immediately after winning a jackpot in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to study about past jackpots while playing a jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 165, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2211, if it is determined that a winning-related command has not been received (S2211: No), the process of S2213 to S2217, which is the same as the command determination process 2 described above (see S2163 in FIG. 99), is executed, This process ends.

Next, the contents of the signal input processing (S2151) will be explained with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the signal input processing (S2151). In this signal input processing (S2151), when the first passage sensor 905a and the second passage sensor 905b provided on the game board 13 detect passage of a ball, a process is executed based on the detection result. Specifically, the number of balls passing (flowing down) through each area (first right area 901a, second right area 901b) provided on the game board 13 is counted, and the difference value is calculated as a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls). ), a process is executed to determine the gaming method corresponding to the area where a large number of balls have been detected, that is, the area where many balls have fallen, as the actual gaming method.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the signal input process (S2151) is executed, it is first determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3801), and if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S3801: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the first passing sensor 905a detects a ball (S3802). In the process of S3802, if it is determined that the first passage sensor 905a has detected a ball (S3802: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first passage counter 223da (S3803), and then the process of S3804 Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if it is determined that the first passing sensor 905a does not detect a ball (S3802: No), the process of S3803 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S3804.

In the process of S3804, it is determined whether the second passing sensor 905b detects a ball (S3804). If it is determined that the second passage sensor 905b detects a ball (S3804: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second passage counter 223db (S3805), and then the process of S3806 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S3804, if it is determined that the second passing sensor 905b does not detect a ball (S3804: No), the process of S3805 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3806.

In the process of S3806, the difference between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db is calculated. That is, the difference between the number of balls that passed through the first right area 901a (the value of the first passing counter 223da) and the number of balls that passed through the second right area 901b (the value of the second passing counter 223db) during the jackpot game. Calculate.

After completing the process of S3806, it is next determined whether the difference between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db is 5 or more (S3807), and it is determined that the difference is 5 or more. If so (S3807: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the first passage counter 223da is larger between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db (S3808).

In the process of S3808, if it is determined that the value of the first passing counter 223da is larger (S3808: Yes), a weak right-handed game is set in the executed game storage area 223dd (S3809), and this process is ended. Further, in the process of S3808, if it is determined that the value of the first passage counter 223da is not larger than the value of the second passage counter 223db (the value of the second passage counter 223db is larger) (S3808: No), A hard right-handed game is set in the executed game storage area 223dd (S3810), and this process is ended.

In other words, in the fifth embodiment, the number of balls fired during a jackpot game that flowed down the first right side area 901a and the number of balls that flowed down the second right side area 901b among the right side areas, Based on the measurement results, it is possible to determine whether the current gaming method is a weak right-handed game in which the ball flows down into the first right area 901a or a strong right-handed game in which the ball flows down into the second right area 901b. It consists of

The information (gaming method) set in the executed game storage area 223dd by the process of S3809 and the process of S3810 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 160(b). It is configured so that the player can easily understand the current game by displaying it in the current game display area 860 of the screen.

In the fifth embodiment, when the difference value between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db is a predetermined amount (5 balls) or more, the current gaming method is set. It is composed of In other words, immediately after a jackpot game is executed (a period in which 5 or more balls are not fired by a right-handed game during a jackpot game), no matter which area the balls are fired into, the current game method is executed. Since it is not set in the game storage area 223dd, the game method is configured not to be displayed in the current game display area 860.

With this configuration, immediately after a jackpot game has started and in a state where the player's playing method in a right-handed game is not fixed (unstable state), the current playing method on the display screen is displayed. Display can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the current gaming method is not specified until the difference value between the value of the first passage counter 223da and the value of the second passage counter 223db reaches a predetermined amount (5 balls). It is composed of With this configuration, the display mode (the display mode displayed in the current game display area 860) for showing the current gaming method displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 changes frequently. This can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 166, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3811, it is determined whether the current timing is the end of the jackpot (S3811). In the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that a command indicating that a time saving state has been set (a command including content indicating that the current gaming state is a time saving state) has been output, or during a jackpot game When it is determined that the command indicating that the jackpot is no longer output, it is determined that the jackpot has ended.

In the process of S3811, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the jackpot (S3811: Yes), the value of the first pass counter 223da and the value of the second pass counter 223db that were added during the jackpot game are cleared to 0. (S3812), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current timing is not the jackpot end timing (S3811: No), that is, if the gaming state is neither jackpot nor jackpot end timing, other signal input processing is executed (S3813). , this process ends.

In addition, as for the process of S3813 mentioned above, for example, when the game state is a normal state (when a game state in which a left-handed game aiming at the left side area is an appropriate game), the first passage sensor 905a , or when the second passing sensor 905b detects a ball, that is, when it is determined that a right-handed game is being played, a guidance display is performed to guide the player on the playing method. When the first passing sensor 905a or the second passing sensor 905b detects a ball in a gaming state (for example, a time saving state) in which different games are executed depending on the process or the gaming method executed by the player. Based on this, the game method being executed is determined, and processing for displaying it in the current game display area 860 is executed.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, at the timing when the jackpot game is started (during the opening period of the jackpot game), the player selects a desired gaming method during the time saving state, and uses the period during which the jackpot game is executed. Although the system is configured to allow the player to vary the gaming method, any period in which the jackpot game is executed may be used as a period for varying the gaming method. It may be configured such that an effect for selecting a gaming method (see FIG. 160(a)) is executed in the middle of the execution.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 5 (S2157) executed in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 5 (S2157). In this frame button input monitoring/performance processing 5 (S2157), in addition to the processing performed in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, a game selection period during which the player selects a desired gaming method (see FIG. 160(a) Reference) is different in that the operation process for the frame button 22 in the middle is added.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 5 (S2157 in FIG. 167) is executed, first, it is determined whether the press of the frame button 22 is detected (S3851), and the process determines whether the press of the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that there is no such file (S3851: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3851, if it is determined that the depression of the frame button 22 is detected (S3851: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time is a game selection period (S3852).

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted here, in the fifth embodiment, in the command determination process 5 (see S2193 in FIG. 165), a win-related command is executed when a win-related command is received (S2211: Yes). In the process (S2212), the game selection period is set to 10 seconds after the jackpot starts (after the jackpot start timing is determined). During this game selection period, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the value of a period counter (not shown), and the counter value is updated in various counter update processes (see S2111 in FIG. 164) executed every 1 millisecond. It is configured to measure 10 seconds.

In the process of S3852, if it is determined that the current time is the game selection period (the value of the period counter is not 0) (S3852: Yes), the game method corresponding to the button press on the frame button 22 is selected and the game storage area 223dc (S3853), sets a display press command indicating the gaming method set in S3853, that is, a gaming method corresponding to the button press (S3855), and ends this process.

The display press command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and the game is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is controlled so that the gaming method selected by the player (the gaming method that the player wants to execute during the time saving state) is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player himself/herself to easily grasp the desired gaming method during the jackpot game (see FIG. 160(b)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 160(b), in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot game, the game method desired by the player himself and the gaming method being executed during the jackpot game are displayed together. With this configuration, it is possible to easily understand whether or not it is necessary to adjust the gaming method based on the display content displayed on the display screen.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, if the gaming method desired by the player himself and the gaming method being executed during the jackpot game do not match, the gaming method to be actually executed However, the method of operating the operating handle 51 is configured to be displayed as a guide (instruction) in the game guide area 859 of the sub-display area Ds so that the player himself or herself can play the game in a manner desired by the player. As a result, it is possible to guide the player on a specific adjustment method, and therefore it is possible to easily make the player execute a desired gaming method.

Returning to FIG. 167, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3852, if it is determined that the current time is not the game selection period (S3852: No), then it is determined whether it is during another operation period (S3854), and it is determined that it is during another operation period. If so (S3854: Yes), a display press command corresponding to the button press corresponding to the operation period is set (S3855), and this process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, other operation periods include, for example, a part of the special symbol fluctuation period to show the special symbol lottery results, and a period when the game is not being played (when the special symbol fluctuation is not executed). During the special symbol fluctuation period, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the press of the frame button 22 is detected), the lottery result of the special symbol that is changing will be displayed. It is configured so that a performance is executed to suggest that it is a jackpot.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated (when the press of the frame button 22 is detected) during a so-called demonstration period when no games are being played, a screen explaining the game content of the pachinko machine 10 or a , today's game history is selectively displayed. In this way, by varying the benefits (effects executed) for the operation depending on the gaming state and gaming situation when operating the frame button 22, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player. , it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the contents of the effect update process 5 executed in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update processing 5. This performance update process 5 is different from the performance update process of each embodiment described above in that it executes a process of updating the display content of the display screen displayed during the jackpot game.

When the performance update process 5 is executed, it is first determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3551), and if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S3551: Yes), the game is stored in the selected game storage area 223dc. Then, the information stored in the executed game storage area 223dd is read out (S3552).

Then, a display gaming method command corresponding to the currently selected gaming method and the currently executed gaming method is set (S3554). The display commands set here are output to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S2102 in FIG. 164), and each content is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display mode indicating a gaming method corresponding to is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 168, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3555, it is determined whether the information read out in the process of S3552 (selected gaming method) and the information read out in the process of S3553 (playing gaming method) match (S3555). If it is determined that they match (S3555: Yes), this means that the desired gaming method and the current gaming method match, so a display instruction command to maintain the current gaming method is provided. is set, and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S3556, if a display instruction command for maintaining the current gaming method is set, for example, a "keep as is" command is displayed in the game guide area 859 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A comment will be displayed. As a result, the player can enter into an advantageous state by maintaining the current game technique.

On the other hand, in the process of S3555, if it is determined that the selected game and the executed game do not match (S3555: No), a display instruction command is set to indicate a comment for changing the current gaming method (S3557). reference). Here, for example, if the selected game is challenge mode (strong right-handed game) and the executed game is safe mode (weak right-handed game), in order to change the game method, "hit harder right" Characters are displayed in the game guide area 859. Thereby, when changing the gaming method from the currently executing gaming method to a desired gaming method, it is possible to easily grasp the details of the adjustments that need to be made specifically.

Then, in the process of S3551, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (S3551: No), furthermore, when the process of S3556 or S3557 is finished, other effect update processes are executed (S3558), and the main effect is Finish the process. In addition, in the process of S3558, a corresponding process is executed among the various effect update processes that can be executed in each of the embodiments described above.

As explained above, in the present fifth embodiment, the first advantageous game (strong right/right The player is configured to be able to select either a hitting game) or a second advantageous advantage (weak right hitting game) in which a second special symbol is drawn. Both the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game described above are configured so that the special symbol lottery is more easily executed than when the normal state is set as the game state.

With this configuration, the player can select one advantageous game from among a plurality of advantageous games as a game in which it is easier to execute a special symbol lottery than in a normal condition during an advantageous state advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, no matter which game the player selects, it is possible to make it easier to draw special symbols than in the normal state, so it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a playing method. .

In the fifth embodiment, the player is allowed to select a gaming method in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the conditions for ending the advantageous state are made different for the plurality of gaming methods that the player can select. It is composed of Specifically, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is made into an advantageous state, and the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is the number of fluctuations that is satisfied when the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times). In addition to the end condition, a winning number end condition is set that is satisfied when the number of times a small win is won (a small win game is executed) in the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number (one time), and the first special The lottery for the symbols is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit is higher than the lottery for the second special symbol.

With this configuration, the probability that the advantageous state ends in the first advantageous game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed and the second advantageous game in which the second special symbol lottery is executed, that is, The probability (continuation rate) of winning a jackpot while in an advantageous state can be varied.

Furthermore, among the plurality of advantageous games that the player can select, if the player wins a jackpot in the first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is difficult to continue, the second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more likely to continue than the first advantageous game. The contents of the jackpot game are set so that the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game is greater than if the player won the jackpot during the first advantageous game. In this case (if you win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery), 12 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and if you win the jackpot during the second advantageous game (if you win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery) If the player wins), the jackpot game for 10 rounds is executed.

As a result, the player can play the first advantageous game in which the advantageous state is easier to end but has a large benefit when winning a jackpot, and the second advantageous game in which the advantageous state is more difficult to end than the first advantageous game but has fewer benefits in the event of winning a jackpot. It becomes possible to select either an advantageous game or the like. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select a desired playing method according to the player's own convenience such as the time that can be spent on the game and the player's current condition, thereby suppressing the player from becoming bored with the game early. I can do it.

In the fifth embodiment, the time saving state is used as the advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable probability state may be used as the advantageous state. In other words, the variable number end condition and the number of winning number end condition can be set as the variable number end condition for ending the probability variable state, and the variable number end condition is set in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. It is also possible to configure the configuration so that the ease with which the equations are established differs. Even with this configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effect as when the above-mentioned time saving state is made into an advantageous state.

In addition, when using a variable probability state as an advantageous state, a first variable termination condition under which a normal state is set when the variable termination condition is satisfied, and a second variable termination condition under which a time saving state is set are set in advance. It is preferable to configure the system so that the destination of the game state is changed depending on the end condition that is established first. In this case, for example, if the first variable-probability ending condition is satisfied, a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the variable-probability state is set, and if the second variable-probability ending condition is satisfied, a gaming state that is more advantageous than the variable-probability state is set. It is preferable to configure the gaming performance in each gaming state so that the state is set.

Specifically, the first variable probability termination condition is satisfied when the variable number termination condition is met, and the second probability variable termination condition is satisfied when the winning frequency termination condition is satisfied. , a special pattern 1 variation number end condition that is satisfied when the first special symbol variation reaches 50 times, and a special pattern 2 variation number end condition that is met when the second special symbol variation reaches 80 times. , the first special symbol, or the second special symbol may be configured to set a total variation number end condition that is satisfied when the number of variations of the second special symbol reaches 100 times in total.

With this configuration, the game specifications can be further differentiated between the first advantageous game in which the first special symbol is drawn and the second advantageous game in which the second special symbol is drawn. It is possible to strengthen the meaning of allowing the player to select a gaming method. In addition, since the condition for ending the total number of variations is set, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of games in an advantageous state when the player alternately executes a plurality of advantageous games.

Furthermore, regarding the number-of-winnings ending conditions, there are special pattern 1 winnings ending conditions that hold true when the first advantageous game is executed, and special drawings 2 winnings ending conditions that hold true when the second advantageous game is executed. By setting the values to be different, it is possible to further vary the game specifications.

In the fifth embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous state (time saving state) are different depending on the type of special symbol, and the player is provided with a gaming method during the advantageous state (a special symbol in which a lottery is executed during the advantageous state). The present invention is configured to provide various games to the player by allowing the player to select the type of game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when winning a jackpot, depending on the type of jackpot, the end condition of the time saving state can be set. It is better to configure it so that it is variable. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of games with advantageous conditions, so it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment described above, no matter which gaming method is selected during the advantageous state, the expected value of the amount of benefits granted to the player during the period in which the advantageous state is set (i.e. , the value obtained by dividing the benefit amount (number of prize balls) in the case of winning one jackpot by the average number of special symbol fluctuations in which the advantageous condition is continuously set when the advantageous condition is set once) is the same. However, as mentioned above, when using a configuration in which the end conditions of the advantageous state are different based on the jackpot type in addition to the type of special symbol, the It is preferable to configure the system so that the expected value of the amount of benefits given to the player is larger when selecting the first advantageous game than when selecting the second advantageous game. As a result, it is possible to greatly vary subsequent game results depending on the game method selected by the player.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 177. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), and variable probability state ( It is configured so that four states can be set: special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), potential state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), and the degree of advantage for the player is different. The configuration is such that a plurality of variable probability states and a plurality of time-saving states with different degrees of advantage can be set.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the system is configured such that more benefits are more easily awarded to the player when a jackpot is achieved through the lottery using the second special symbol, compared to when the lottery using the first special symbol is achieved. There is. Specifically, if you win a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, you can win more prize balls than if you win in the first special symbol lottery. , it is configured such that the rate of transition to the probability change state of the special symbol is high (the jackpot type that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, which will be described later, is more likely to be selected).

Then, as probability variable states, there is a variable probability state 1 in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easier to be executed (i.e., relatively disadvantageous), and a variable probability state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than in the variable probability state 1 (i.e., (relatively advantageous) variable probability state 2 is provided. In addition, as a time saving state, there is a time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easier to be executed (i.e. relatively disadvantageous), and a time saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than in the time saving state 1 (i.e. it is relatively disadvantageous). , relatively advantageous) time-saving state 2 is provided.

In this way, even if the same gaming state is set, the type of special symbol that is likely to be drawn can be switched, and the prize balls that can be won can be changed according to the details of the set gaming state. By varying the amount and the rate of transition to a variable probability state, it is possible to have the player play the game aiming for a more advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, variable probability state 1 is a state in which a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined, and variable probability state 2 is a state in which a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol high probability state are combined. This is a state in which probability state 2 (time saving state 2) is combined.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of operation (opening) patterns of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) during the time saving state are prepared, and the operation (opening) of the electric accessory 701 is set. It is configured such that the special symbols that are likely to be drawn during the time saving state can be varied based on the pattern. The operation (opening) pattern of the electric accessory 701 (see FIG. 170) is configured to be variably set based on the type of jackpot won.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the special symbols that are likely to be drawn (changed) during the time saving state based on the type of jackpot won, so it is possible to provide players with various gaming features. can. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time saving states are established for ending the time saving state based on the lottery of special symbols.

Specifically, as a variation number end condition that is established based on the number of variations of the special symbol, a special symbol 1 variation number end condition that is established based on the number of variations of the first special symbol, and a variation number end condition that is established based on the number of variations of the second special symbol. The special figure 2 variation number end condition is established based on the number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol, and the total variation number end condition is established based on the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol. The number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 30 times as the 1st fluctuation number end condition, the number of fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol is 100 times as the special symbol 2 fluctuation number end condition, and 100 times is the number of fluctuations that corresponds to the total fluctuation number end condition. It is set.

Furthermore, as a condition for ending the number of winnings that is established when a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, special symbol 1 that is established based on the special symbol 1 small win (small win A) that is won in the first special symbol lottery. The winning number end condition, the special pattern 2 winning number ending condition that is established based on the special pattern 2 small win (small win B) won by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the special pattern 1 winning number ending condition are set. The number of winnings is set as 2 times, and the number of winnings of 20 times is set as the end condition for the number of winnings of special drawing 2.

By configuring in this way, depending on the type of the special symbol for which the lottery (variation) is executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state can be easily completed (time-saving game in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is easy to be performed). A game) and a game in which the time-saving state is difficult to end (a time-saving game in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is likely to be performed) can be set.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the time-saving termination conditions set for each special symbol may be such that the ease of ending the time-saving state differs depending on the type of special symbol, and each of the above-mentioned embodiments Any of the specific examples used (shown) may be adopted, such as making the small win probability different depending on the special symbol type during the time saving state, or providing multiple types of small wins that can be won in the special symbol lottery. In a configuration in which a winning number ending condition is set for each small winning type, the probability that any winning number ending condition is satisfied may be made different for each special symbol type.

In other words, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of advantageous state ending conditions (time saving ending conditions) for ending an advantageous state (time saving state) which is an advantageous gaming state for the player can be set. The configuration is such that the ease with which the advantageous state end condition is met is varied depending on the type of state. The system is configured such that a plurality of advantageous states in which the conditions for ending the advantageous state are different in ease of fulfillment are transferred based on the type of jackpot won.

This allows the player to play games with various advantageous conditions through a plurality of jackpot wins. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, since there is a special advantageous state that can be transitioned from the normal state only when winning a jackpot multiple times, the player can receive multiple jackpots. Through this, the player can be made to actively play the game so as to move to a special advantageous state.

In addition, the sixth embodiment is configured to set gaming states (for example, a normal state and an advantageous state) with different expectations for shifting to a special advantageous state that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a gaming state (advantageous state) with a high degree of expectation of transitioning to a special advantageous state is set, it is possible to make it easier to continue playing the game, and it is possible to increase the performance of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed. The configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 are partially changed, and some processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from those of the first embodiment. This is a point that has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in . Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 169, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 169 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 169, the sixth embodiment differs from the game board 13 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 2) in the configuration of the lower side and right side area of the variable display unit 80. are doing. Specifically, there are two first ball entrances that trigger the special symbol lottery (the first ball entrance 64a1, the first ball entrance on the right side) that triggers the special symbol lottery. The ball entrance 64a0) and the second ball entrance 64b, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol, are provided, that is, three ball entrances are provided, which are the trigger for the lottery of the special symbol. They are different.

As shown in FIG. 169, in this embodiment, the first ball entrance port 64a1 is located on the lower side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, and the right second ball entrance port 64a1 is located on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. The mouth 64b has a right first ball entrance port 64a2 provided on the right side of the right second ball entrance port 64b when viewed from the front.

In each of the first ball entry port 64a1 and the right first ball entry port 64a2, a first special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters the ball. That is, the first ball entry port 64a1 and the right first ball entry port 64a2 are ball entry ports having the same function. On the other hand, the second right ball entrance 64b has a function different from the two types of ball entrances described above, since the lottery of the second special symbol is executed when a ball enters the ball. It is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, a first actuation accessory 645a is attached to the right first ball entry port 64a2. This first operating accessory 645a has two states: an open state in which it is possible (easily) for a ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64a2, and an open state in which it is impossible (easily) for the ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64a2. It is formed of a pair of vane-shaped members so that it can be changed to a closed state (difficult). This first actuating accessory 645a switches to the open state when a ball enters a first actuating opening 704 provided inside the distribution winning device 700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the first operating accessory 645a, which has been switched to the open state, is switched to the closed state when one ball enters the ball.

Similarly, a second operating accessory 645b is attached to the right second ball entry port 64b. This second operating accessory 645b also has an open state in which it is possible (easily) for the ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b, and an open state in which it is impossible (easily) for the ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b. It is formed of a pair of vane-shaped members so that it can be changed to a closed state (difficult). This second operating accessory 645b switches to the open state when a ball enters the second operating opening 707 provided inside the prize distribution device 700. On the other hand, the second operating accessory 645b, which has been switched to the open state, switches to the closed state when one ball enters the right second ball entrance.

In the sixth embodiment, a first actuator formed of a pair of vane-shaped members serves as a regulating member for regulating the entry of balls into the first right ball entry port 64a2 and the second right ball entry port 64b. Although the object 645a and the second actuating accessory 645b are provided, any device may be used as long as it changes the ease with which the ball enters each ball entry hole. A configuration may also be adopted in which the entry of the ball into the ball entrance is regulated by this, and the ball is allowed to enter the ball entrance by being located in the buried state of being buried in the game board 13. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the operating accessory is in a closed state, the ball cannot enter the corresponding ball entrance (to which the operating accessory is attached); Instead of closing it to the point where it is impossible for the ball to enter the ball, it is sufficient to change it so that it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball than in the open state.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the operating accessory 645 is configured to be able to be positioned in two states, the open state and the closed state, but it is configured to be variable in three or more states. Also good. Further, in the sixth embodiment, a configuration is used in which an operating accessory is attached to each of the first right ball entrance port 64a2 and the second right ball entrance port 64b, but other configurations are used. For example, by changing one actuating accessory to the first state, the ball enters one ball entry port more easily (easier to enter than the other ball entry port), and the ball enters the other ball entry port more easily. By making it difficult for the ball to enter the mouth (making it more difficult for the ball to enter the ball than from one entrance port) and changing the state to a second state different from the first state, it is possible to To make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball opening (harder for the ball to enter than the other ball entrance) and to make it easier for the ball to enter the other ball entrance (easier for the ball to enter than the one ball entrance) It may be configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to vary the entry conditions of the balls into the plurality of ball entry openings depending on the action content of one actuating accessory.

A prize distribution device 700 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. This sorting winning device 700 is a device for sorting (entering) balls that have entered the inside into either the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. As described above, if the ball is distributed to the first operating port 704 (if the ball enters), the first operating accessory 645a attached to the right first ball entry port 64a2 is switched to the open state, and the first right ball entry port 645a is switched to the open state. A ball can enter the opening 64a2. On the other hand, if the ball is distributed to the second operating port 707 (if the ball enters), the second operating accessory 645b attached to the second right ball entry port is switched to the open state, and the ball is transferred to the second right ball entry port 64b. The ball is now ready to enter the ball.

Here, details of the prize distribution device 700 will be explained with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the prize distribution device 700 provided on the right side area of the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment. The upper surface side of the distribution winning device 700 is configured to allow balls to flow down. As shown in FIG. 81, the upper surface side of the prize distribution device 700 is inclined toward the lower left when viewed from the front, so the ball that reaches the upper surface of the prize distribution device 700 basically flows downward to the lower left. do. Furthermore, an electric accessory 701 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the prize distribution device 700. This electric accessory 701 has two states: an open state (immersed state) in which a ball can enter the inside of the prize distribution device 700 (easily), and a closed state (protruding state) in which a ball cannot enter (difficult). ) and is configured to be switchable. This electric accessory 701 is set to an open state when a winning result is obtained by drawing a normal symbol.

The downstream side of the electric accessories 701 is branched into two channels, a first channel 703 and a second channel 706. Since the first operating port 704 is provided on the downstream side of the first channel 703, the ball that has flowed down the first channel 703 enters the first operating port 704. On the other hand, since a second operation port 707 is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 706, the ball flowing down the second flow path 706 enters the second operation port 707. In addition, at the position where the first flow path 703 and the second flow path 706 diverge, a switching valve ( A variable flow path) 702 is provided. This switching valve (variable flow path) 702 switches between a first switching state in which the ball flows down into the first flow path 703 and a second switching state in which the ball flows down into the second flow path 706 (slide displacement). )be able to. In the first switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the left in front view, thereby blocking the upstream side of the second flow path and leaving only the first flow path open. proceeds to the first flow path. On the other hand, in the second switching state, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 slides to the right in front view, thereby blocking the upstream side of the first flow path, leaving only the first flow path open. , the ball advances to the second channel.

The switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is basically set to the first switching state, and is activated for a predetermined period of time after the normal symbol hits (for example, 1.5 seconds after the normal symbol hits the state). ) has elapsed, the first switching state is switched to the second switching state. Furthermore, when a specific period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after being switched to the second switching state, the switching state is switched to the first switching state again.

If the ball can be allowed to enter the distribution winning device 700 during the second switching state, the ball can be caused to flow down toward the second operating port 707. When the ball enters the second operating port 707, the second operating accessory 645b is set to the open state as described above, allowing the ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b. That is, it is advantageous for the player because it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high probability of being given a variable probability state of the special symbol in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the direction of flow of the ball that has entered the distribution winning device 700 (whether it flows down the first channel 703 or the second channel 707). Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 170, a first actuation mechanism 705 is provided inside the first actuation port 704. This first actuation port 704 is configured with a known non-electric accessory, that is, it switches the first actuation accessory 645a to an open state based on the weight of the ball that enters the first actuation port 704. I can do it. In addition, when the first actuating accessory 645a is in the open state, the first actuating accessory 645a can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that entered the right first ball entrance 64a2.

On the other hand, inside the second operating port 707, a second operating mechanism 708 is provided. This second actuation mechanism 708 has a similar configuration to the first actuation mechanism 705. That is, the second operating accessory 645b can be switched to the open state based on the weight of the ball that entered the second operating opening 707. Further, when the second actuating accessory 645b is in the open state, the second actuating accessory 645b can be switched to the closed state based on the weight of the ball that entered the right second ball entrance 64b.

In this way, by letting the ball enter the distribution winning device 700, the ball enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707, and the first operating accessory 645a or the first operating accessory 645a or The 2-actuation accessory 645b can be switched to the open state. As mentioned above, if the special symbol 2 lottery results in a jackpot, it will be more advantageous than the special symbol 1 lottery, so the ball enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. It can draw attention to the crab. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 171, the correspondence between the operation (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 701 in the prize distribution device 700 and the switching operation of the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 171, there are two types of operations (opening patterns) of the electric accessory 701 (opening pattern A and opening pattern B). When the opening pattern A is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a relatively long time (i.e., 1 second) immediately after the winning of the normal symbol starts, and then set to the closed state for 1.4 seconds. be done. Then, after the open state is set for 0.1 seconds, the winning state ends. During the one-second open period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so the balls that enter the distribution winning device 700 during this period are distributed to the first operating port 704. . On the other hand, during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so the balls that enter the prize distribution device 700 during this period are transferred to the second operating port 707. be distributed to. However, since it is difficult to let a ball enter the ball during the 0.1 second opening period, in many cases, the ball that enters the distribution device 700 while the opening pattern A is set is The ball is distributed to the first operation port 704, and the right first ball entry port 64a1 is opened. Therefore, if opening pattern A is set, it will be relatively disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when opening pattern B is set, the electric accessory 701 is set to the open state for a very short time (i.e., 0.1 seconds) immediately after the winning of the normal symbol starts, and then closed for 1.4 seconds. set to state. Then, after the open state is set for a relatively long time (ie, one second), the winning state ends. During the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the first switching state, so the balls that enter the prize distribution device 700 during this period are directed to the first operating port 704. Can be sorted. However, as mentioned above, it is difficult to let the ball enter the ball during an extremely short opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, during the 1-second open period, the switching valve (variable flow path) 702 is set to the second switching state, so the balls that enter the prize distribution device 700 during this period enter the second operating port 707. Can be sorted. Therefore, in many cases, balls that enter the sorting device 700 while the opening pattern B is set are sorted to the second operation port 707, and the right second ball entry port 64b is opened. Therefore, when opening pattern B is set, it is relatively advantageous for the player.

In this way, since the degree of advantage for the player can be varied depending on the set opening pattern, it is possible to arouse interest in the opening pattern every time a normal symbol hits. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern to be set is determined according to the gaming state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability variable non-time saving state), time saving state 1, and probability variable state 1, when the normal symbol is a hit, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability varying state 2, the opening pattern B is set when the normal drawing becomes a hit. Therefore, in the time saving state 2 and the variable probability state 2, it becomes easier for the second special symbol to be drawn, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2 and the probability varying state 2, it is difficult to draw the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous for the player. In this way, the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed can be varied depending on the gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 169, the explanation will be continued. A variable winning device 65 is disposed at the lower right of the game board 13, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is achieved by a jackpot lottery conducted due to a ball entering (winning) the first ball entry port 64a1, the right first ball entry port 64a2, or the right second ball entry port 64b, After a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol for the jackpot is displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot. is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 is the same as the V winning device 650 (see FIGS. 4 to 6) in the first embodiment described above, and is as described above in the first embodiment, but for convenience of explanation, In the sixth embodiment, the numerical value “65” will be added to the reference numeral “650” in FIGS. 4 to 6 for explanation. Although the details will be omitted, the game ball that enters the variable ball entry device 65 during a jackpot is connected to the variable probability switch 65e3 (a switch used in place of the V switch 650e3 of the first embodiment described above) inside the variable ball entry device 65. ), a variable probability state is given after the end of the jackpot, and in this point, it is functionally different from the V winning device 650 of the first embodiment described above. Since the other configurations and functions are the same, their explanation will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174. First, FIG. 173 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 174(a) shows the information contained in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1, and FIG. 174(b) shows the contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 included in the first winning type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. This is a diagram. In addition, the selection table 202b1 for special pattern 1 is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the selection table 202b2 for special symbol 2 is used for the lottery of the second special symbol. When a jackpot occurs, it is referenced to determine the type of jackpot.

First, with reference to FIG. 174(a), the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 included in the first winning type selection table 202b will be described. FIG. 174(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 174(a), the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 defines the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first winning type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9". This jackpot A is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds, the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows passage of the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. . In addition, the pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is, for example, the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 4th round (the provision of the probability change switch 65e3 in the variable prize winning device 65). This is an operation pattern in which the flow path that is closed is opened. In a jackpot, the player continuously shoots balls toward the variable winning device 65, so that one or more balls can flow down to the variable probability switch 65e3 within 5 seconds. When the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in a jackpot, a probability variation state is given after the jackpot.

That is, after the jackpot, a variable probability state 1 (a gaming state in which a special symbol high probability state and a normal symbol high probability state 1 (time saving state 1) are combined) is provided. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot due to the player not hitting the ball during the jackpot, etc., after the jackpot ends, time saving state 1 (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol High probability state 1) is given. Although jackpot A is likely to be in a variable probability state, the variable probability state to be given is variable probability state 1, and it is difficult to draw the second special symbol during the variable probability state, so jackpot type ( This is disadvantageous compared to jackpot B and jackpot F).

A jackpot B is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 49". In this jackpot B, the number of rounds is 4 rounds, and the probability variation solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows passage of the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and after the jackpot, time saving state 2 (normal symbol high probability state 2) This is the type of jackpot that is awarded. When the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 in a jackpot, a special symbol probability variation state 2 (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state 2) is provided after the jackpot.

That is, after the jackpot, a variable probability state 2 which is a combination of the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state 2 is provided. On the other hand, if the jackpot ends without the ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot due to the player not hitting the ball during the jackpot, only the time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot B ends. Jackpot B is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, since it is easy to shift to probability variable state 2, which is most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, since the number of prize balls is smaller than when a jackpot is achieved by drawing the second special symbol, it is disadvantageous in terms of prize balls.

A jackpot C is associated with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 94". This jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that does not allow passage through the probability change switch 65e during the jackpot, and time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. be. In addition, the pattern in which it is impossible to pass the probability change switch 65e3 is, for example, a pattern in which the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is set to be on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 4th round (the probability change switch in the variable prize winning device 65). This is an operation pattern in which the flow path provided with 65e3 is opened. Even if the 4th round is started and the ball enters at the same time as the specific prize opening 65a is opened, the ball cannot reach the channel where the variable rate solenoid 65k is provided within 0.5 seconds. The flow path is closed before the ball reaches the variable rate solenoid 65k. Therefore, in the case of jackpot C, the probability change state of the special symbol will not be given after the jackpot. In other words, jackpot C is a jackpot type in which the probability variable state of the special symbol is not given, and the time saving state 1 in which it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol is given, and furthermore, the number of prize balls is also the same as that of the second special symbol. This type of jackpot is the most disadvantageous for the player because it is rare compared to when a jackpot is won in a lottery.

A jackpot D is associated with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "95 to 94". This jackpot D is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that makes it impossible to pass the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. be. Although the variable probability state is not given and the number of prize balls is smaller than when the jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving state 2 that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is given, so the jackpot D is more advantageous than jackpot C.

Next, the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 174(b). FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 174(b), similar to the special pattern 1 selection table 202b1, the special pattern 2 selection table 202b2 also defines the jackpot type to be selected for each value of the first winning type counter C2. ing. Specifically, the jackpot E is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19". This jackpot E is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15, the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows passage of the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. . Although jackpot E is likely to be in a variable probability state, the variable probability state to be given is variable probability state 1, and it is difficult to draw the second special symbol during the variable probability state, so jackpot type ( The condition after the jackpot is disadvantageous compared to jackpot B and jackpot F).

A jackpot F is associated with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is “20 to 79”. This jackpot F is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15, the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that allows passage of the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. . Jackpot F is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, since it is easy to shift to probability variable state 2, which is most advantageous for the player. In addition, in terms of prize balls, it is possible to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than when a jackpot is achieved by drawing the first special symbol. Therefore, the jackpot F is the most advantageous jackpot for the player.

A jackpot G is associated with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 84". This jackpot G is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15, the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that makes it impossible to pass the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and time saving state 1 is given after the jackpot. be. Therefore, since the jackpot G is a jackpot type in which a special symbol probability variable state is not given and a time-saving state 1 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is given, the game state after the end of the jackpot is the most disadvantageous. On the other hand, in terms of prize balls, it is more advantageous than winning the jackpot by drawing the first special symbol.

A jackpot H is associated with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "85 to 94". This jackpot H is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15, the variable probability solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k is operated in a pattern that makes it impossible to pass the variable probability switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and time saving state 2 is given after the jackpot. be. Although the variable probability state is not provided, the time-saving state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed is provided, so the jackpot H is advantageous compared to the jackpot C and the jackpot G. Also, on the prize sphere, it is more advantageous than winning the jackpot by drawing the first special symbol.

In this way, in this embodiment, various jackpot types are provided. Since each jackpot type differs in the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot, when a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, the player can draw attention to which jackpot type it will be. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, depending on whether the first special symbol is a jackpot or the second special symbol is a jackpot, the number of prize balls that can be obtained and the proportion of jackpot types that have an operation pattern that can pass the probability change switch 65e3 will vary. It's different. That is, it is advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery because he or she can win more prize balls. In addition, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the jackpot type (jackpot E, F) that is an operation pattern that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 80%, while In the special symbol lottery, the ratio of jackpot types (jackpot A, B) that is an operation pattern that can pass the probability change switch 65e3 is 50%. Therefore, it is more likely that a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol will result in a variable probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, so whether the lottery to be executed is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As described above, the sixth embodiment is configured to vary the type of high probability state of the normal symbol depending on the type of jackpot won. Specifically, a normal symbol high probability state 1 and a normal symbol high probability state 2 are configured to be settable. In addition to the normal state as the gaming state, there are variable probability state 1 in which normal symbol high probability state 1 is set for the high probability state of special symbols, probability variable state 2 in which normal symbol high probability state 2 is set, and special symbol high probability state 1. A total of 5 types of game states can be set: time saving state 1 where normal symbol high probability state 1 is set for the low probability state of the symbol, and time saving state 2 where normal symbol high probability state 2 is set. It consists of

Here, with reference to FIG. 172, a gaming state transition method in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 172, five gaming states are provided in the sixth embodiment, and as described above, each time a jackpot is achieved, a new gaming state is set after the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 172, when a jackpot A occurs in the normal state (non-probable variable non-time-saving state), the state basically shifts to the variable probability state 1 (unless the ball launch is stopped during the jackpot) and then to the jackpot B. Then, the state shifts to variable state 2. Further, when the jackpot C is achieved, the state shifts to the time saving state 1, and when the jackpot D becomes the state, the state shifts to the time saving state 2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, when the gaming state is time saving state 1 (time saving state in which it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol) and variable probability state 1 (variable probability state in which it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol) performs the same state transition as the normal state (non-deterministic variable non-time saving state). In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 1 or the probability variable state 1, when a special symbol lottery is executed for the number of time saving times without becoming a jackpot, the state shifts to the normal state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 172, when the gaming state is time-saving state 2 (time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed), when the jackpot E is reached, the state shifts to the variable probability state 1, and when the jackpot F is reached, the game state shifts to the variable probability state 1. , shifts to the most advantageous probability variable state 2, and when the jackpot G occurs, shifts to the time saving state 1, and when the jackpot hits H, shifts to the time saving state 2 (looping the time saving state 2). Moreover, as shown in FIG. 172, the same state transition as the time saving state 2 is performed also in the variable probability state 2 (the variable probability state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed). In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the time saving state 2 or the probability variable state 2, when a special symbol lottery is executed for the number of time saving times without becoming a jackpot, the state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 173. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a. Number counter 203ab, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb, probability variation counter 203zg, probability variation setting flag 203zs, probability variation passing counter 203zt1, winning number counter 203zt2, operation counter 203zt3, counter buffer 203zh, remaining ball timer flag 203zt4, remaining Ball timer 203zt5 , a probability variation valid flag 203zt6, a probability variation validity timer 203zt7, a discharge number counter 203zt8, a time saving medium counter 203zu, a time saving identification flag 203zx, a jackpot flag 203zi, and other memory areas 203z.

Of these, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab are the same as in the first embodiment described above. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203za, like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 (through gate), and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 1). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203za is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb maximizes the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value of 4. be done. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

When the ball passes through the normal entry ball opening 67, if the value of this normal symbol held ball number counter 203zb (the number of holding times M of variable display in the normal pattern) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203za. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal entry ball opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203zb is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203za.

The probability variation counter 203zg is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol is variable, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of this probability change counter 203zg is set to zero, and the main controller 110 determines the closing timing ( In other words, when the probability change flag 203r (described later) is turned on (at the jackpot end timing), that is, when a game ball enters the probability change port 900a and the game ball is detected by the probability change switch (not shown), 100 is set. be done.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the ball flows down a specific area (the area for the probability change switch 65e3 to detect the ball) during the jackpot game, the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game (probability change state). A predetermined value is set in the counter 203zg), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable probability state is automatically set after the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of jackpot won. You may do so.

When the MPU 201 executes the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is referred to, and if the value is greater than 0, a special While a symbol lottery is performed, if the value of the probability variable counter 203zg is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table for low probability times.

As described above, the counter buffer 203zh is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

The jackpot flag 203zi is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203zi is on, a jackpot game is executed in which the distribution prize device 650 or the variable prize device 165 is set to the open state by the jackpot control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The variable probability setting flag 203zs is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to a variable probability state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not a game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during a jackpot game (if the variable probability switch 65e3 detects a game ball during a jackpot game). (or not). Here, when a game ball passes through this probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203zs is set to ON. On the other hand, the probability change flag 203r is set to OFF based on the probability change flag 203r being set to ON. Note that this probability change setting flag 203zs is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

The probability variation passage counter 203zt1 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, 13 rounds in jackpot B). In addition, it can be determined whether all the game balls that entered the first variable winning a prize opening 65 have been ejected by the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203zt1 and the ejected number counter 203zt8, which will be described later. This variable probability passage counter 203zt1 is updated by incrementing by 1 when the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed. Further, after the first variable winning device 65 executes a process to determine whether the number of winning game balls matches the number of ejected balls, it is reset to the initial value "0". Note that this probability variable passage counter 203zt1 is backed up when the power is cut off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203zt2 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won into the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball is detected to have passed through the detection port 65a1 provided in the first variable prize winning device 65, the number is incremented by one and updated. On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winning pieces entered into the first variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the number of winning pieces counter 203zt2), the number of pieces discharged (the total value of the number of discharged pieces counter 203zt8 and the variable passing counter 203zt1), After determining whether they match, it is reset to the initial value "0". Note that the value of this prize winning number counter 203zt2 is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203zt3 is a counter for counting the time during which the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k is set to be on (energized). In this pachinko machine 10, in jackpot B, the channel solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in jackpot C, the channel solenoid 65k is set to be on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Set. In the operation counter 203zt3, for jackpot B, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 13th round, and for jackpot C, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. Note that this operation counter 203zt3 is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in an initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203zt3 and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control winnings to the probability variable switch 65e3 depending on the type of jackpot.

The remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 to ON, a remaining ball timer 203zt5, which will be described later, is incremented by 1 and updated. The remaining ball timer 203zt5 is a counter for determining the time since the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed. This is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203zt5 allows the winning game ball to be ejected from the first variable winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round ends. This is a counter for determining whether the required time has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball to be ejected from the first variable winning device 65 is 2 seconds, and in this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance in the remaining ball timer 203zt5. It is set as an upper limit value. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203zt5 has reached the upper limit (3 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winnings entered into the first variable winning device 65 and the number of winnings matched are the same. Ru. If they do not match, an error command is set and this fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that game balls are jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, by illegally leaving the game ball in the first variable prize winning device 65 and applying an impact at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than it actually does, resulting in a jackpot C. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress fraud in passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

In addition, if the winning number and the number of ejected pieces do not match, a dedicated flag is set on, and if the flag is on, even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203zs is turned on. A configuration may be configured in which this setting is not set to on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the unfair granting of variable probability gaming states.

The probability variation valid flag 203zt6 is a flag for determining whether or not to make the passage valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When this variable probability valid flag 203zt6 is set to ON, based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, the game balls flowing into the special discharge channel 65e2 pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. It shows that it is less than the hour. That is, it shows that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability variation valid timer 203zt7 is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation validity flag 203zt6 mentioned above is set to ON. This variable validity timer 203zt7 can determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variable effective timer 203zt7 is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be fraudulent and is not determined to have passed.

As a result, a game ball can be allowed to enter the special discharge channel 65e2 and pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 without being illegally guided by the switching member 65h to the special discharge channel 65e2, or a piano wire etc. can be accessed from below the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing up a game ball to make it pass, or causing a magnetic sensor to falsely detect that the ball has passed due to radio waves, etc.

The discharge number counter 203zt8 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 in one round. This ejected number counter 203zt8 is reset to the initial value 0 after the first variable winning device 65 determines the number of winning game balls and the ejected number.

The time saving medium counter 203zu is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving gaming state. This time saving medium counter 203zu is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in this embodiment, if the variable probability state is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time saving state for 100 times.

The time saving identification flag 203zx is a flag for identifying the type of time saving state. If the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0, it means that the time saving state 1 (probability variable state 1) is present. In addition, similarly to the time saving state 1, this time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 also in the normal state in which it is difficult to perform the lottery of the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 1, it means that the time saving state 2 (probability variable state 2) is present. When the normal symbol is a hit, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is set with reference to this time saving identification flag 203zx. Specifically, when the time saving identification flag 203zx is 0 and the normal symbol hits, the opening pattern A is set, so the ball enters the sorting winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701. By doing so, the ball enters the first operation port 704, and the ball enters the left first ball entry port 64a2.

On the other hand, if the time saving identification flag 203zx is 1 and the normal symbol hits, the opening pattern B is set, so by letting the ball enter the distribution winning device 700 during the opening period of the electric accessory 701, The ball enters the second operating port 707, and the ball becomes ready to enter the left second ball entry port 64b. This time-saving identification flag 203zx is set to a value corresponding to the time-saving state given after the jackpot at the end of the jackpot. Moreover, 0 is set when the short time period of the normal symbol ends (that is, when the short time counter 203zu becomes 0).

Note that setting the time saving identification flag 203zx to 0 in the normal state (non-probable variable non-time saving state) is an irregular game in which the ball is hit toward the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed hitting) in the non-time saving state. This is to suppress the method. That is, if the configuration is such that the time saving identification flag 203zx is 1 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the player will always hit to the right in an attempt to execute the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol. In the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low, so it is difficult to let the ball enter the second right ball entry port 64b, but if it is a jackpot, the special symbol will hit 80% of the time. Since it is a variable state, the benefits in the event of a jackpot are greater. Therefore, there is a possibility that irregular gaming methods may be induced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 in the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is low, and even if it is a hit, the opening pattern A is set, so the game It is possible to create a state in which there is no benefit for the player to execute right-handed batting. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be forced to play left-handed, so irregular gaming methods can be prevented (suppressed).

<About the control processing of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 175 to 177. The sixth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to store reserved balls, and the height of the special symbol after the jackpot is over. The difference is that the probability state can be set.

First, with reference to FIG. 175, special symbol variation processing 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175) executed in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175).

In the special symbol variation process 6 (Z104 in FIG. 175), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (Z201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (Z201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not changing (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of reservations N1 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab (the fluctuation in the special symbol 2) The display hold count N2) is acquired (Z203).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball in a variable display in the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is larger than 0 (Z204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is 0. If it is determined (Z204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is larger than 0 (Z209), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is determined. ) is determined to be 0 (Z209: No), it is determined that there is no pending ball of variable display in the special symbol, and this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is greater than 0 (Z204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (Z205 ), a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab changed by the calculation is set (Z206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 51) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203ab from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203ab of the RAM 223. do.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of Z206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is shifted (Z207). In the process of Z207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol 2 variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display device 37. Note that a detailed explanation of the special symbol 2 variation start process will be omitted.

In addition, when the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ab is determined to be 0 (Z204: No), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is determined to be greater than 0. (Z209: Yes), the same process as the above-mentioned process for the reserved ball of special symbol 2 is performed for the reserved ball of special symbol 1. Note that a detailed explanation of the special symbol 1 variation start process will be omitted.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the time has not passed (Z214: No), the display on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Z215), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z214, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (Z214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z216). Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol 2 variation start processing (Z208) or special symbol 1 variation start processing (Z213). When this special symbol 2 variation start process or special symbol 1 variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203aa or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 or the special symbol 1 is set.

After the processing of Z216 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start processing will be changed to It is determined whether the symbol is a jackpot (Z217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (Z217: Yes), the jackpot flag 203zi is set to ON (Z218), the jackpot start command is set (Z220), and the time saving medium counter 203zu and probability change counter 203zg are set. The value of is reset (Z271) and the process moves to Z222.

Due to the jackpot flag 203zi set to ON in the process of Z218, the process in the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 51). Since the specific explanation is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the explanation will be omitted.

In addition, the jackpot start command set in the process of Z220 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the jackpot start command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. As a result, a display suggesting the start of a jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, making it possible for the player to recognize that the state has shifted to the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the process of Z217, if the current lottery result is outside the special symbol (Z217: No), the same time saving number update process as in the first embodiment described above (see S219 in FIG. 38) is executed, and the special Information is updated for the variation number end condition that is established based on the number of symbol variations. After completing the process of S219, it is next determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223: Yes), the probability variation counter 203zg is greater than 0 (Z223: Yes). The value of the counter 203zg is decremented by 1 (Z224), the same processes of S220 and S221 as in the first embodiment described above are executed, and the process moves to Z222. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203zg is 0 (Z223: No), the process of Z224 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S220.

In the process of Z222, a stop command is set in order to synchronize the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81, which corresponds to the stop symbol set in the process of Z216. (Z222). When the process of Z222 is finished, this process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the special symbol variation processing 6 of the sixth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a small hit has been won in the same way as in the first embodiment described above, and if a small win has been won, In this case, the small win time saving update process (see FIG. 41) corresponding to the won small win is executed. By configuring in this way, similarly to each of the embodiments described above, as a condition for ending the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), the time saving end is established when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. In addition to the condition (variation number end condition), it is possible to set a time saving end condition (win number end condition) which is satisfied when the number of small wins in the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends. The sixth embodiment is configured such that a high probability state of special symbols can be set in addition to the high probability state of normal symbols as the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot. The high probability state of the special symbol is configured such that the predetermined number of variations of the special symbol (the value set in the probability variation counter zg) is set as the upper limit. In this way, when setting a gaming state (variable probability state) other than the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the game state (variable probability state) is terminated for that gaming state (variable probability state). It may be configured to set conditions.

In this case, the condition for ending the variable probability state may be configured to set a variable termination condition different from the above-mentioned time saving termination condition for terminating the time saving condition, for example, It is good to set the number of winnings as the variable ending condition.

Note that it is preferable that the requirements that cause the variable termination condition to be satisfied and the requirements that cause the time-saving termination condition to be satisfied are different from each other. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which of the variable termination conditions and the time-saving termination conditions is satisfied first. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied (when moving from a state in which it is easy to perform a special symbol lottery to a state in which it is difficult to do so), whether or not the probability-variable end condition has already been satisfied (when the special symbol lottery is easily executed to a state in which it is difficult to perform) is determined. It is possible to imagine whether or not the symbols have shifted from a state in which it is easy to win a jackpot to a state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot.

As explained above, in the sixth embodiment, the game states that are advantageous to the player are the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) and the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols). and are configured to be settable, and the end condition of each game state is a change number end condition that is satisfied when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (time saving state change number end condition, probability variable state change number end condition) ), it is configured to set conditions for ending the number of winnings (terms for ending the number of winnings in a time-saving state, conditions for ending the number of winnings in a variable probability state) that are satisfied when the number of wins for a predetermined small win reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, unlike the gameplay that only determines whether or not a gaming state that is advantageous to the player shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, the end of the time-saving state (the satisfaction of the time-saving end condition) and the end of the variable state (the probability-variable end condition) are ), it is possible to transition to various gaming states.

Therefore, for the player, one termination condition (for example, time-saving termination condition) is satisfied before the other termination condition (for example, variable termination condition), and the other termination condition is satisfied only after one termination condition is satisfied. The period until the condition is met (for example, the potential period) may be configured to be the most advantageous gaming period for the player. As a result, it is possible to provide a new gaming experience in which the player is made to play the game while expecting that the ending condition for ending the gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, which is one of the gaming states, will be satisfied. .

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, depending on the set time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), there is a time saving state (variable probability state) in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed; It is configured to be able to set a time saving state (probability variable state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed. The lottery result that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be obtained in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery. Then, from the normal state, it is easy to shift to a time-saving state (variable probability state) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and from a time-saving state (variable probability state) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, It is configured so that it is easy to shift to a time saving state (variable probability state) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a gaming state more advantageous to the player by shifting the gaming state to multiple states through a jackpot, etc., so that the most advantageous gaming state for the player can be set. It is possible to create expectations for playing games in this state. Furthermore, in this case, in a state where the probability variable state (probability variable state 2) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed, only if the time saving end condition is satisfied before the probability variable ending condition, It is preferable to configure the game state so that the game state shifts to the most advantageous state for the player.

As a result, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set based on winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and furthermore, in a state where a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, that gaming state If a specific termination condition for ending the game is met, it will be possible to move to a more advantageous gaming state, and if other conditions other than the specific termination condition are met, it will be possible to shift to a disadvantageous gaming state. . Therefore, the player can always play the game with a sense of tension.

Note that the specific ending conditions for ending the gaming state advantageous to the player and the ending conditions other than the specific ending conditions used in the sixth embodiment are as explained in each of the above-mentioned embodiments. Various termination conditions may be applied, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, jackpot control processing 6 (Z1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 6 (Z1105). This jackpot control process 6 (Z1105) is a process for executing various performances according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (big opening opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 6 (Z1105), first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203zi is on (Z1301). In the process of Z1301, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is off (Z1301: No), there is no need to control the jackpot, so the process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1301, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203zi is on (Z1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot (Z1371). If it is determined in the process of Z1371 that it is the start timing of the jackpot (Z1371: Yes), an opening command is set (Z1372), and this process ends.

In the process of Z1371, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a jackpot (Z1371: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (Z1374). If it is determined in the process of Z1374 that it is the start timing of a new round (Z1374: Yes), the setting of the opening/closing operation of the first specific prize opening 64a and the switching operation of the probability change solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k are set. In order to perform this, jackpot operation setting processing 6 is executed (Z1375), and this processing is ended.

Here, when the jackpot operation setting process 6 (Z1375) is executed, the opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is first read from the set opening scenario, and based on the read opening scenario (data). to set the switching operation of the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k. Then, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the jackpot game will end midway. Problems like this can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z1374 that it is not the start timing of a new round (Z1374: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the switching operation of the variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376). ).

In the process of Z1376, if it is determined that it is the timing for the switching operation of the variable rate solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: Yes), the state of the variable variable solenoid (channel solenoid) 65k is switched (Z1377), and the main Finish the process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1376, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the switching operation of the variable solenoid (flow path solenoid) 65k (Z1376: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (Z1378). ).

In the process of Z1378, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1378: Yes), ending process 6 is executed (Z1379) and this process ends. The details of this ending process 6 (Z1379) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

In the process of Z1378, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (Z1378: No), winning process 6 is executed (Z1380), abnormality process 6 is executed (Z1381), and this process ends.

When prize winning processing 6 (Z1380) is executed, first, it is determined whether the round validity period has come. The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the opening/closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round validity period, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round validity period, it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning a prize opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning hole 65a has been passed, the winning number counter 203zt2 is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203zt2 is 10 or more.

If it is determined that the value of the number of winnings counter 203zt2 is 10 or more, the end condition for the current round game has been met, so the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to close, and the remaining amount is The ball timer flag 203zt4 is set on. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203zt4 to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown out after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

In this way, in the winning process 6, a process is executed to determine whether the round game end condition is satisfied during one round game in the jackpot game. Further, a process is executed to appropriately determine whether or not the ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0, and if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is greater than 0, the value of the operation counter 203zt3 is updated by -1. Then, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, the value of the probability variation passage counter 203zt1 is updated by adding 1 to it. The probability change setting flag 203zs is set to on. Thereafter, it is determined whether the operation counter 203zt3 is 0. When it is determined that the operation counter 203zt3 is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF, the probability variation valid flag 203zt6 is set to ON, and this process is ended. Here, by setting the probability variation valid flag 203zt6 to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge channel 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation is set to ON. You can control how games are set.

As a result, if the variable probability valid timer 203zt7 is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the variable probability game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball brushing. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being improperly passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 and being given a probability variation gaming state.

Next, as abnormality processing 6 (S1381), processing is executed to monitor whether a game ball is illegally passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

Next, details of ending processing 6 (Z1379 in FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process 6 (Z1379). In ending processing 6 (Z1379), first, an ending command indicating the start of an ending is set in the audio lamp control device 113 (Z4101). Next, the jackpot flag 203zi is set to OFF (Z4102), and it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203zs is ON (Z4103). If it is determined in the process of Z4103 that the probability variation setting flag 203zs is on (Z4103: Yes), the probability variation counter 203zg is set to 100 (Z4104). Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203zs is configured to be set to OFF based on the probability variation counter 203zg being set to 100. Thereafter, the process moves to Z4105.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4103, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203zs is not on (Z4103: No), the process of Z4104 is skipped and the process moves to the process of Z4105.

In the process of Z4105, it is determined whether the jackpot game being executed was a jackpot game based on any of jackpots A, C, E, and G (Z4105). If it is determined in the process of Z4105 that the jackpot is one of A, C, E, or G (Z4105: Yes), the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 (Z4106), and the process proceeds to Z4108.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4105, if it is determined that there was no jackpot A, C, E, or G (Z4105: No), the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 1 (Z4107), and the process moves to Z4108. do.

By the process of Z4106 or Z4107, the time saving identification flag 203zx is set to 0 or 1, thereby switching the opening pattern of the electric accessory set in the normal symbol variation process. When the process of Z4106 or Z4107 is finished, the value of the time saving counter 203zu is set to 100 (Z4108), and this process ends.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when a time saving state (probability variable state) is provided, the type of time saving state is set to be different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, in the time saving state executed after the jackpot game, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 700, the ball enters the first operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. Depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to switch and set whether to let the game ball enter the first right ball entrance 64a2 or to let the game ball enter the second right ball entrance 64b.

Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to switch whether the lottery is executed with the first special symbol or the lottery with the second special symbol. By setting different advantages to be given to the player in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the magnitude of the benefit given to the player can be varied depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is varied between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the probability variation ratio, probability of jackpot determination, number of time reductions, variable time, etc. are changed from the first special symbol. By setting the second special symbol differently, the privilege may be set to be different. Furthermore, with the configuration of this embodiment, even in a variable probability gaming state with the same jackpot probability, the type of special symbol that changes during time saving (during variable probability) can be switched depending on the type of time saving state to be given. It is possible to vary the benefits that a player can receive in a variable probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of variable probability gaming states in which different benefits are granted. In addition, in this embodiment, since the second special symbol is set to have more jackpot types guided by the probability change switch 65e3 than the first special symbol, a plurality of probability change ratios can be set. Therefore, depending on the time saving state, the probability variation ratio can be changed, and a game with a fresh feel can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the conditions for ending the time saving state (probability variable state) (the conditions for ending the time saving state (probability variable state)) ease). Therefore, the advantages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied.

In addition, in the second embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above, the player is configured to be able to select between a game in which a first special symbol is drawn and a game in which a second special symbol is drawn. The system was configured so that the player could play a game corresponding to the game method selected by the player. In other words, when a predetermined game state (time saving state) is set, any game (a game in which a lottery is executed for the first special symbol, a game in which a lottery is executed for the second special symbol) can be executed. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined game state (for example, time saving state), one game state (for example, a game in which a lottery of the first special symbol is executed) can be executed ( Time-saving state 1) is set, and in the state where time-saving state 1 is set, the other game (for example, a game that executes a lottery of the second special symbol) can be executed if a predetermined condition is satisfied. (time saving state 2) can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to set and provide different game states to the player in stages. machine can be provided.

By configuring in this way, for example, in the lottery of the first special symbol that is executed when the time-saving state 1 is set, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied more than in the lottery of the second special symbol. Configure it to make it easier. Specifically, the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is met when the number of fluctuations (lotteries) of the first special symbol reaches 30, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is met when the first special symbol is won twice by the lottery. Configure the system so that it holds true.

In some cases where a special symbol jackpot is won during the period in which time saving state 1 is continuously set, time saving state 2 (second special symbol The configuration is configured such that a time saving state in which the lottery is executed) is set. As mentioned above, this second special symbol lottery is configured so that the time-saving end condition is more difficult to achieve than the first special symbol lottery, and specifically, the number of fluctuations (lotteries) of the second special symbol is 100. The condition for ending the number of variable winnings is established when the second special symbol is selected, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is established when the second special symbol is won 20 times.

With this configuration, once the time saving state 2 is reached, the time saving state is easier to continue than the time saving state 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide players with time-saving conditions with different degrees of play. In addition, in the above example, the time-saving state was shown as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, but it is not limited to this, and it may be used for a variable probability state, and the end conditions for each of the variable probability state and the time-saving state may be used. For example, it may be configured such that a gaming state (potential state) in which a special symbol is a high probability state and a normal symbol is a low probability state can be set.

Furthermore, as the termination conditions for the gaming state that can be set in the sixth embodiment, any of the termination conditions set in each of the above-mentioned embodiments or the assumed termination conditions may be adopted, or a combination of a plurality of termination conditions may be adopted. Also good.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the degree of advantage is different between the case where a jackpot is achieved by drawing the first special symbol and the case where a jackpot is achieved by drawing the second special symbol. 2. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Moreover, in this embodiment, two types of time saving states, ie, time saving state 1 and time saving state 2, are provided as the time saving states given after the end of the jackpot. The time-saving state 1 is a time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easier to be executed (the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64a2 easily), and the time-saving state 2 is the lottery of the second special symbol. This is a time-saving state in which it becomes easier to execute (the ball becomes easier to enter the second right ball entry port 64b). To be more specific, in the time saving state 1, if the ball wins, the electric ball is activated at a timing when it is easy for the ball to enter the first operating opening 704 inside the prize distribution device 700 (the first operating accessory 645a is likely to be released). Accessory object 701 is released. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right in the time saving state 1, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64a1, so it becomes easier to draw the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the time saving state 2, when the ball wins, the electric accessory 701 is activated at a timing when it is easy for the ball to enter the second operating opening 707 inside the prize distribution device 700 (the second operating accessory 645b is easily released). will be released. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right in the time saving state 2, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b, so it becomes easier to draw the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, a variable probability switch 65e3 is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and by varying the internal flow path, a jackpot type in which a ball can (easily) pass through the probability variable switch 65e3 during a jackpot, There is also a jackpot type in which it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Then, by varying the percentage of jackpot types that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 depending on whether a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery or a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change state of the special symbol is achieved. The configuration is such that the rate of transition is variable. That is, the configuration is such that when a jackpot is achieved by drawing the second special symbol, it is easier to shift to a variable probability state than when a jackpot is achieved by drawing the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to draw the second special symbol. It is possible to draw more attention to whether the ball enters the operating port 704 or the second operating port 707. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the game.

Further, in this embodiment, like the time saving state, the variable probability state has two types of states with different degrees of advantage. That is, there are a variable probability state 1 in which the lottery of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, and a variable probability state 2 in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed. The rate of transition to a variable probability state differs depending on whether it is a lottery of the first special symbol or a lottery of the second special symbol, and the probability variable state to be given also has a plurality of variable probability states with different degrees of advantage. Since this is provided, it is possible to have the player play the game aiming for a better state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the present sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that only one of them is varied (lottery) in accordance with a predetermined regularity. As in the fourth embodiment, the present invention may be used in a gaming machine configured to independently execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In the sixth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the types of special symbols for which lottery (variation) is executed during the time saving state are completely divided according to the type of the time saving state (time saving state 1, time saving state 2) set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing (fluctuation) frequency of each special symbol may be configured to vary depending on the type of time saving state that is set. For example, when time saving state A is set, the ratio is such that the second special symbol is drawn twice (variation) for every first special symbol drawing (variation), and time saving state B is set. If set, the ratio is such that the second special symbol lottery (variation) is performed three times for every first special symbol lottery (variation), and if time saving state C is set. In this case, only the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is executed, and when the time saving state D is set, only the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide players with various gaming features depending on the time-saving state that is set.

In place of the pachinko machine 10 used in the sixth embodiment described above, the following pachinko machine 10 may be used, and in a normal game state, a game in which the player aims at the first ball entrance 64a1 (hereinafter referred to as a normal game) is executed. If a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a1, a jackpot game is executed in which the second variable prize winning device 65 is released. At the same time, depending on the type of jackpot that was won, the probability of winning a jackpot after the end of the jackpot game by drawing a special drawing is high, and the probability fluctuating gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a variable probability state) in which it becomes easier to receive a drawing of a special drawing, or The probability of winning the jackpot remains the same, but a time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving state") is provided that makes it easier to receive special drawings.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, this pachinko machine 10 operates in a variable probability state 1 in which the lottery of special drawing 1 is substantially executed during the variable probability state, and in a variable probability state in which the lottery of special drawing 2 is substantially executed during the variable probability state. 2 is provided. In addition, a jackpot based on the lottery of special drawing 2 is more advantageous for the player than a jackpot based on the drawing of special drawing 1 (the number of balls that can be acquired in one jackpot game is large, or It is set so that it is easy to shift to a gaming state in which it is easy to win a jackpot in which the number of balls that can be obtained by playing a jackpot game is large.

In other words, this pachinko machine 10 provides a variable probability state 1 which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and a variable probability state 2 which is even more advantageous than the variable probability state 1. As a result, for example, the rate of transition from normal gaming to variable probability state is increased (making it easier to enter variable probability state 1), making it easier for players to experience a gaming state (variable probability state) in which it is easier to win a jackpot than in normal gaming. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to experience the performance during the jackpot game and the performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable probability state, making it possible to enjoy the game, and to reduce the rate of transition to the variable probability state 2. However, it is possible to provide a sense of superiority to the player who has transitioned to the variable probability state 2, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved for the player.

In addition, this pachinko machine 10 is configured such that it is possible to set time saving state 1 and time saving state 2 in the same way as the above-mentioned variable probability state even in the time saving state, and both of time saving state 1 and time saving state 2 are more effective than the normal game. A gaming state in which it is easy to receive a special drawing lottery (a ball is likely to enter the ball entrance where the special drawing lottery is executed, and a shorter fluctuation time is set for the special drawing in the special drawing lottery than in the normal gaming state) Easy game mode) is set. Furthermore, the time saving state 1 is configured so that the special drawing 1 lottery is substantially executed, and the time saving state 2 is configured so that the special drawing 2 lottery is substantially executed. is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player.

When using such a pachinko machine 10, the configuration of the game board 13 is preferably as follows. That is, to explain with reference to FIG. 169, when the gaming state shifts to the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the right side area of the game board 13 (the right side area of the variable display unit 80) is A target game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is executed. When a right-handed game is executed, a ball shot to the right side of the game board 13 collides with the return rubber 69 and hits the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 or the vicinity of the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67. It passes between the planted nails and flows down toward the prize distribution device 700. The distribution winning device 700 is provided with an electric accessory 710, and is configured so that when the electric accessory 710 is in an open state, a ball can enter the distribution prize device 700. This electric accessory 710 is in an open state when the result of a normal symbol lottery (common symbol lottery) executed based on the ball passing through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 is a win. In addition, the electric accessory 710 is provided with a plurality of opening patterns, and it is preferable to configure the ball to enter the prize distribution device 700 at different timings.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the internal configuration of the prize distribution device 700 will be explained. When the electric accessory 710 provided in the sorting winning device 700 is opened, balls can enter the sorting winning device 700, and the balls that have entered the sorting winning device 700 fall onto the switching valve 702. (It takes about 0.4 seconds for the ball that enters the prize distribution device 700 to reach the switching valve 702). This switching valve 702 is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on a winning result (a winning pattern) as a result of the general drawing lottery, and the first operation is performed depending on the operating position of the switching valve 702. Either the flow path 703 or the second flow path 706 is configured to communicate as a flow path through which the sphere can flow. As described above with reference to FIG. 82, the second channel 706 is in communication for a period of 2 seconds from 1.5 seconds after the winning of the regular symbol until 3.5 seconds have passed. The switching valve 702 may be operated during other periods, and the first flow path 703 may be operated during other periods.

In this way, a mechanism that changes the accessory object into an open state or a closed state by the movement of the ball without using an electrical structure is a known technology called a non-electric accessory. In this embodiment, a detailed explanation of the configuration of this non-electric accessory is omitted, but any technology that has already been disclosed may be adopted as appropriate.

On the other hand, the ball that flows down the second flow path 706 in the prize distribution device 700 and enters the second operating port 707 is activated by the second operating mechanism 708, similar to the configuration of the non-electric accessory described above. The second action accessory 645b is opened. By entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 64b, which becomes possible to enter when the second actuating accessory 645b is in the open state, the lottery for special drawing 2, which is set more advantageously than special drawing 1, is drawn. executed. In addition, regarding the structure of the non-electric accessory that is composed of the second operating port 707, the second operating mechanism 708, and the second operating accessory 645b, the first operating port 704, the first operating mechanism 705, and the first operating accessory described above are Since it is the same as the configuration of the non-electric accessory made up of the actuating accessory 645a, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Note that the above-mentioned switching valve 702 switches the second flow path 706 only for a predetermined period of time, that is, from 1.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (2 seconds) after winning a common symbol. The first flow path 703 is operated to communicate during other periods (including the period when no winnings are won per normal figure) by flowing down the second flow path 706. When the ball enters the second actuating accessory 645b, a special drawing lottery (special drawing 2 drawing) advantageous to the player is executed, thereby preventing the special drawing 2 drawing from being executed due to an illegal game. It's for a reason.

In addition, as for the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, when the first right ball entrance 64a2 or the second right ball entrance 64b becomes able to enter the ball entered into the distribution winning device 700, the distribution is It is preferable that a ball that flows down the right side area of the game board 13 without entering the prize-winning device 700 is guided by a plurality of nails and enters any ball entry opening that is in a state where the ball can enter.

Furthermore, a switching valve 702 is provided in the sorting winning device 700 for distributing the entered balls to the first flow path 703 or the second flow path 706, and this switching valve 702 is operated after winning a normal figure. , after 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the second flow path is moved to the position where it communicates for 3 seconds. The operation control of this switching valve 702 is configured such that a fixed operation is executed regardless of which opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 710.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as the operation control of the switching valve 702, the ball entering in the opening pattern B is reliably guided to the first flow path 703, and the ball entering in the opening pattern B is reliably guided to the first flow path 703. The operation is configured to be executed at a timing delayed by a predetermined period or more (0.5 seconds or more) with respect to the operation of the electric accessory 701 so as to be guided to the second flow path 706 . As a result, it becomes possible to guide the balls that have entered the prize distribution device 700 to a desired flow path, and during the operation that the switching valve 702 performs to change the state, the balls leave the distribution prize device 700. It can prevent it from flowing down.

According to the other example explained above, the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory) can be set based on the jackpot type, and the opening pattern of the electric role (electric accessory) that has been set is set. It is possible to set a game state in which the figure 1 changes substantially and a game state in which the special figure 2 changes substantially. Furthermore, winning a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing. It is set so that a high rate of transition to a gaming state in which the lottery shown in FIG. 2 is executed is given.

As a result, the time saving state and the variable probability state are further divided into gaming states that are advantageous to the player (time saving state 2, variable probability state 2) and gaming states that are more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state but more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It becomes possible to provide a gaming state (time saving state 1, probability variable state 1) which is a gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set a variety of game states for the game played on the pachinko machine 10, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, by setting a high transition rate from the normal gaming state to the time-saving state 1 or the variable probability state 1, the player can easily see the performance executed in the time-saving state or the variable probability state. By setting the rate of transition to variable probability state 2, which is the gaming state most advantageous to the player, to be low, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to players who have shifted to variable probability state 2. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game for the player.

In addition, although the configuration is such that two types of opening patterns, ie, opening pattern A and opening pattern B, can be set as opening patterns for electric accessories (electric accessories), the configuration is not limited to this, and it is configured that three or more types of opening patterns can be set. You may. This makes it possible to set more diverse gaming states.

In addition, as an opening pattern of the electric accessory (electric accessory), there is an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that guides the ball to the first channel 703, and an opening pattern (opening pattern B) that guides the ball to the second channel 706. However, for example, an opening pattern may be provided in which the electric accessory 701 opens at the timing when a ball is guided to either the first channel 703 or the second channel 706. As a result, the player can enjoy watching which flow path (first flow path 703 or second flow path 706) the ball entering the electric accessory 701 is guided to, further improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, it is configured such that the ball that enters the prize distribution device 700 enters either the operating port (the first operation port 704 or the second operation port 707). A flow path is provided for the balls to be discharged from the game board 13 again to the game board 13, or a flow path is provided for the balls to enter an out port that communicates with a discharge port (not shown) provided on the back of the game board 13 without entering each operating port. A road may also be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the flow of the balls within the distribution winning device 700, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, the switching valve 702 is configured so that a predetermined constant operation is performed after a winning game is executed, but for example, a constant operation is always performed after the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 10. Alternatively, the communicating flow path may be switched when the number of balls that enter the distribution winning device 700 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10).

The operation of the switching valve 702 is controlled by an electric drive source (a motor not shown). For example, it is activated when a ball comes into contact with the switching valve 702, which is a switching member, and when a predetermined condition (for example, 10 balls pass) is met. It may be configured such that the communicating flow path is switched when the condition is filled.

Further, the ball guided into any flow path by the switching valve 702 is configured to flow down the flow path and enter into any operating port. A distribution member may be provided that distributes the balls guided into the channel into a plurality of channels, and the ball distributed to a specific channel by the distribution member may be configured to enter the corresponding operating port.

In addition, the ball entering the prize distribution device 700 is configured to reach the switching valve 702 within a certain period of time (0.4 seconds in this embodiment); As a means of varying (extending) the time it takes for the ball that enters the switching valve 702 to reach the switching valve 702, a plurality of routes are provided with different periods of time for the ball that enters the prize distribution device 700 to reach the switching valve 702. Alternatively, a sorting means may be provided to sort the balls that have entered the sorting winning device 700 to one of the routes. This allows the player to play the game while predicting when the ball that enters the prize distribution device 700 will reach the switching valve 702, and prevents the player from getting bored with the game early. It has the effect of being able to

Next, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in another example described above will be explained. This pachinko machine 10 operates based on the jackpot type in which the normal gaming state, probability variable state 1 (unfavorable probability variable), probability variable state 2 (advantageous probability variable), time saving state 1 (disadvantageous time saving) and time saving state 2 (advantageous time saving) are won. configured to migrate.

First, in the normal game state, a game is played in which the variation of special figure 1 is executed, and when a jackpot is won, 50% shifts to probability variable state 1, 30% shifts to probability variable state 2, and 15% shifts to time saving state 1. , and 5% shifts to time saving state 2.

Next, in the probability variation state 1, since the opening pattern A is set as the electric combination opening pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is played (the special figure 1 substantial variation). In probability variable state 1, if a jackpot is won, the probability variable state 1 is looped at 50%, 30% shifts to probability variable state 2, 15% shifts to time saving state 1, and 5% shifts to time saving state 2. In this way, the probability variable state 1 is a gaming state in which the special symbol 1 substantially changes like the normal gaming state, so the jackpot probability is set higher than the normal gaming state, but the game after winning the jackpot is different. The destination of the state and its distribution are the same.

In the probability variation state 2, since the opening pattern B is set as the electric combination opening pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is played (the special figure 2 substantial variation). In probability variable state 2, if a jackpot is won, the probability variable state 2 is looped at 80%, 15% shifts to time saving state 2, and 5% shifts to time saving state 1. In this way, the variable probability state 2 is a gaming state in which the special drawings 2 substantially change, and the jackpot probability is set higher than in the normal gaming state, so it is the gaming state most advantageous to the player. becomes.

Next, in the time saving state 1, since the release pattern A is set as the electric combination release pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 1 is executed is played (the special figure 1 substantial variation). In the time-saving state 1, if a jackpot is won, 50% shift to the variable probability state 1, 30% shift to the variable probability state 2, 15% loop through the time-saving state 1, and 5% shift to the time-saving state 2. In this way, the time saving state 1 is a game state in which the special figure 1 substantially changes like the normal game state, so the fluctuation time of the special figure and the common figure is shortened, and the electric accessory 701 when the normal figure is won. Although the opening pattern is different from the normal gaming state, the destination of the gaming state after winning the jackpot and its distribution are the same.

In the time saving state 2, since the release pattern B is set as the electric combination release pattern, a game in which the variation of the special figure 2 is executed is played (the special figure 2 substantial variation). In time-saving state 2, if a jackpot is won, 80% of the time the game shifts to variable probability state 2, 15% loops through time-saving state 2, and 5% shifts to time-saving state 1. In this way, the time saving state 2 is a gaming state in which the special drawing 2 substantially changes, and the probability of transitioning to the variable probability state 2, which is most advantageous to the player when winning a jackpot, is higher than that of the normal gaming state. This is a gaming state in which the amount is set to 2.5 times or more (so-called pullback zone). By providing such a gaming state, it is possible to make the player more likely to shift to the most advantageous gaming state (variable state 2) than the normal gaming state, and to motivate the player to play the game. This has the effect that it can be done.

Note that the gaming state transition destination and transition distribution rate after a jackpot in each gaming state are not limited to these and may be set as appropriate. For example, only the time saving state 2 may be set as the time saving state to which the game mode transitions from the normal gaming state. This has the effect that it is possible to suppress a decline in the desire of a player to play, who was unable to shift to the variable probability state despite winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, the destination of the gaming state and the distribution rate are unified according to the type of special symbol, but the destination of the gaming state and the distribution rate are not limited to this. may be changed. This makes it possible to provide more complex gameplay, and has the effect of suppressing early boredom with the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot, and 10 time savings are given as the time saving state regardless of the gaming state. It may be designed to continue until it is executed a number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery is executed that shifts to the normal gaming state every time the special symbol changes, and by winning the lottery, the state changes from the variable probability state to the normal gaming state. It may be configured to migrate. In this case, as a variable probability state that is advantageous to the player and a variable probability state that is disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference may be made in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the variable probability state ends, or the lottery probability of transition from the variable probability state to the normal gaming state may be different. You may also do so.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 195. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, when the variable display of special symbols is executed the first number of times (for example, 100 times) without winning a jackpot. The first ending condition (variable number of winnings ending condition) is satisfied based on the second ending condition (variable number of winnings ending condition), and the second ending condition is satisfied based on winning the small winning a second time (for example, five times) without winning the jackpot. The system is configured such that at least the following are set, and the time-saving state is terminated when any one of the plurality of time-saving termination conditions is satisfied. Furthermore, by configuring the number of winnings ending condition to be a different number of winnings for each type of small win, it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which it is difficult to predict the timing at which the time saving state ends. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a V winning is generated during execution of a small winning game (a game ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3), regardless of the game state at the time of winning a small winning. It was structured so that the degree of advantage of the jackpot that starts in each case is the same.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, instead of setting only one type of end condition for the time saving state, the player can select whether or not to satisfy the end condition for the time saving state. Configured. More specifically, if you win a small hit, you can enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500 provided in place of the V winning device 650 to execute a jackpot game, or you can enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500 to execute the jackpot game. The player is configured to be able to select whether to reduce the number of times the remaining time is shortened or not. The degree of advantage for the player is different depending on whether the player wins the jackpot during the time saving state or the case where the player wins the jackpot after the time saving state ends. That is, it is configured so that if the player wins a jackpot in the normal state after the end of the time-saving state, he or she is more likely to win a type of jackpot advantageous to the player (a jackpot of a type in which the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot). As a result, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the player selects whether or not to enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500 each time he wins a small hit in the time saving state, so that the player's It can improve your interest.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the configuration of the RAM 203 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. There have been some changes. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 178, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment when winning a small hit, similar to the V winning device 650 in the first embodiment. A V winning device 6500 is provided on the left side of the board, which is set to allow game balls to enter for a predetermined period of time. The reason why the V winning device 6500 is placed on the left side is because in the seventh embodiment, the game feature allows the player to select whether or not to generate a V winning prize during execution of a small winning game in a time saving state. be. That is, if the V winning device 6500 is installed in the direction in which the game balls are fired in the time saving state (i.e., on the right side of the game board 13), the player may choose not to generate the V winning when a small hit occurs. Even so, there is a possibility that the game ball that has already been launched due to the right hit will enter the V-winning device 6500, resulting in a V-winning against the player's will. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is provided on the left side of the board, and if the game method is not intentionally changed in the time saving state (that is, unless the game is switched from a right-handed game to a left-handed game), the V winning device 6500 is installed on the left side of the board. The configuration is such that this cannot occur (it is difficult for it to occur). As a result, a player who does not want to generate a V win in a small win game can reliably end the small win game without generating a V win.

The V winning device 6500 in this seventh embodiment is provided with a V switch 6500e3 inside thereof. Similar to the V switch 650e3 in the first embodiment, the V switch 6500e3 is configured so that a jackpot is started when a game ball passes through it. That is, in a small winning game in which the V winning device 6500 is set to a state where balls can enter, the jackpot game is started based on the game ball entering the V winning device 6500 and passing through the V switch 6500e3. Ru. In the seventh embodiment, the internal mechanism of the V winning device 6500 is configured such that all game balls that enter the V winning device 6500 pass through the V switch 6500e3. That is, the inside of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment is not provided with any structure equivalent to the normal discharge flow path 650e1, the switching member 650h, etc. in the V winning device 650 in the first embodiment. All the game balls played flow down the special discharge channel 6500e2 and pass through the V winning switch 6500e3, and are then discharged to the outside. Therefore, in a small winning game, a jackpot is confirmed when at least one game ball enters the V winning device 6500, so it is possible to make the gameplay of the small winning game simple and easy to understand. can. Therefore, it is possible to realize gameplay that is easy for players to understand. Although the details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when winning a small hit, the player simply shoots the game ball toward the V winning device 6500 by continuously hitting the left hand. , 10 or more game balls are configured to enter the V winning hole 6500a. Therefore, when winning a small win, the player who wishes to start the jackpot can easily pass the V winning switch 6500e3 to start the jackpot. In addition, even if multiple game balls pass the V winning switch 6500e3 in one small winning game, only the one game ball that first passed the V winning switch 6500e3 is used to determine the start of the jackpot, and subsequent game balls This will not affect the possibility of winning the jackpot in any way. In other words, even if a plurality of game balls enter the V-winning device 6500 and pass through the V-winning switch 6500e3 in one small winning game, only one jackpot will be executed. (You will not be able to win more than one right with one small win). Therefore, in practice, the ratio of the number of game balls that trigger a jackpot to the number of game balls that enter the V winning device 6500 in a small winning game is 1/10 or less.

Further, as shown in FIG. 178, in the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, a second ball entry port 6400 is provided on the right side of the board instead of the second ball entry port 640 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, this second ball entrance 6400 is provided with an electric accessory 6400a, and normally the electric accessory 6400a closes the second ball entrance 6400. While it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400, if the game ball wins in the normal symbol lottery, it will be held for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds x 1 time or 2 seconds x 2 times). ) The electric accessory 6400a is opened to create a state in which the ball can enter the second ball entrance 6400. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 178, in the seventh embodiment, the through gate 67 is provided (moved) on the upstream side on the right side of the board. As a result, when the ball is hit to the right, the distance it takes for the shot game ball to reach the through gate 67 becomes shorter, making it easier to perform the normal symbol lottery at an earlier stage.

Here, details of the V prize winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a top view of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, the opening/closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 in the seventh embodiment is configured to be able to form a channel through which a plurality of game balls can pass through its upper surface in the closed state. . More specifically, a flow path is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1, and a flow path is formed in which the game ball can flow down from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front, and the game ball can flow down the flow path. Convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe are provided to prevent the balls from flowing down. The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 is prevented from flowing down by each of the convex parts 6500fa to 6500fe, so it flows down on the opening/closing door 6500f1 along the outer periphery of each of the convex parts 6500fa to 6500fe. In other words, on the opening/closing door 6500f1, a meandering flow path is formed by each of the convex portions 6500fa to 6500fe. Therefore, compared to the case where each convex part 6500fa to 6500fe is not provided (that is, the case where the game ball can flow down linearly from the right direction to the left direction in front view on the opening/closing door 6500f1), the opening/closing door It is possible to lengthen the period required for the water to completely flow down the upper surface of 6500f1. In other words, when playing a left-handed game and continuously firing game balls toward the V winning device 6500, the configuration is such that a plurality of game balls are likely to flow down toward the opening/closing door 6500f1 at the same time. ing. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 6500f1 is opened due to a small hit, a plurality of game balls that were flowing down the top surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 at the time of opening are displayed inside the V winning device 6500 immediately after the opening/closing door 6500f1 is opened. It can be dropped to. As a result, it is possible to enter more game balls in one small winning game, so if you win a small winning, you want to start a jackpot (entering game balls into the V winning device 6500). A player who wants to let the game ball pass through the V-winning switch 6500e3 can easily make at least one game ball enter the V-winning device 6500. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1 that is set when a small win is won in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, only one type of opening pattern is defined as the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, the opening/closing door 6500f1 is maintained in a closed state for 3 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and the opening/closing door 6500f1 is opened when 3 seconds have elapsed. By continuously hitting the left hand during the 3 second closing period, it is possible to make around 5 game balls reach the top surface of the door 6500f1, so the door 6500f1 switches to the open state (variable ) Immediately after, the game ball that has reached the top surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 can be allowed to enter the V winning device 6500.

As shown in FIG. 180, the open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the opening/closing door 6500f1 is closed when 0.6 seconds have elapsed (3.6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180, the closed state for 3 seconds (a period in which a plurality of game balls can reach (storage) the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 by hitting left) and the open state for 0.6 seconds (opening/closing). The period in which the game ball that has reached the top surface of the door 6500f1 is guided into the inside of the V winning device 6500) is repeated a maximum of two times, and the small winning game ends when the third open state ends in total. . In addition, if it is detected that 10 or more game balls, which is the upper limit number of winnings in a small win, have entered, the small win game is ended at the time of detection. If the game ball enters the V winning device 6500 before the small winning game ends, it passes through the V winning switch 6500e3 and a jackpot starts after the small winning game ends. In this way, in the seventh embodiment, by combining the top structure of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the V winning device 6500 and the small winning opening pattern, more game balls can be entered in one small winning game. is possible. To explain in more detail, the opening period is not divided into three times and set for 0.6 seconds each as in the seventh embodiment, but is simply set for 1.8 seconds (0.6 seconds x If the configuration is configured to set the open state of 3), only about 3 game balls can be fired during the open period, so there is a possibility that not even a single game ball will enter the V winning device 6500. . In other words, even if the player makes a left-handed hit during a small win game in the hope of starting a jackpot, the player is no longer able to start a jackpot, which reduces the player's motivation to play. there is a possibility. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of game balls can be easily entered into the V winning device 6500 in one small winning game, so if you want to start a jackpot, A player who wishes to hit right during a small winning game can easily enter the game ball into the V winning device 6500 to start a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing the game from decreasing, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182, a characteristic effect during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, as in the time saving state in the first embodiment described above, every time a special symbol lottery is executed, a variable display effect is provided to show the lottery result of the special symbol. As part of the (variable pattern performance), a performance in which the boy character 801 searches for a treasure chest is performed. Then, if the lottery result is a small win (or a big win), an effect to discover a treasure box is executed, and a game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during the execution of a small win game, and after the small win ends, a jackpot ( When the start of the 2-type winning game is confirmed, an effect that successfully opens the treasure box 802 is executed, and an effect that a V display 803 appears indicating that a jackpot game is set from inside the treasure box 802 (FIG. 13) (a)) is executed. On the other hand, the game ball did not enter the V winning device 6500 during the execution of the small winning game due to the player not hitting left-handed during the execution of the small winning game (the jackpot starting condition was not met). If the boy character 801 does not open the treasure box 802, an effect is executed in which the boy character 801 passes through the treasure box 802 without opening it.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in a time-saving state in which the electric accessory 6400a is more likely to be opened (the ball is easier to enter the second ball entry port 6400), the player can enter the second ball entry port 6400 by hitting the ball to the right. Every time a ball enters and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases, an effect of acquiring a key is executed. The details of the effect of acquiring (accumulating) this key will be explained with reference to FIGS. 181(a) and (b). Note that the display contents of the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 181(a), in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, a display area HR6 is formed above the boy character 801 to indicate the remaining number of time saving times. FIG. 181(a) illustrates a case where the remaining number of time reductions is 10, and the words "10 remaining" are displayed inside the display area HR6. In addition, in this 7th embodiment, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, it is configured such that 10 times is always set as the number of time saving times. That is, FIG. 181(a) is a diagram showing the display contents immediately after the end of the time-saving jackpot. In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is entered after the end of the jackpot, four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed on the right side of the boy character 801. Each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 and the number of held balls increases, an image of a key corresponding to the number of held balls is displayed in these four display areas. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds, in which the words "Save your keys by hitting right!!" are displayed. These display modes make it easy for the player to understand that keys are accumulated in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by playing right.

FIG. 181(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a game ball enters the second ball entry port 6400 in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 181(b), when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400, an image resembling a key is displayed in the display area HR4. This allows the player to easily understand that the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 6400 and the display of the key are linked. Note that this key image has a plurality of modes. Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, the degree of advantage in the case of generating a V winning prize (when a game ball enters the V winning device 6500) is indicated to the player by the mode of the key. It is configured to be possible. That is, when a V winning occurs, the player is shown the degree of expectation that a time saving state will be given after the end of the jackpot based on the V winning by the display mode of the key image. More specifically, in addition to the key in the mode (normal mode) shown in FIG. A more tattered version than the normal version is provided. Depending on the display mode of these keys, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that allows the player to select whether or not to generate a V winning prize.

As mentioned above, in the seventh embodiment, the V winning occurs in the small winning in the normal state, rather than the big winning in the case where the V winning occurs in the small winning in the time saving state. It is configured such that the rate at which the time-saving state is granted is higher for jackpots executed in the case of the game. In the seventh embodiment, a small winning can be won only in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, the case where a small hit is won in the normal state is when the small hit is won with a reserved ball of the second special symbol that is held during the time saving state and used in the lottery after the end of the time saving state. Therefore, in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, even if you win a small hit during the time saving state, by continuing to hit the ball to the right, you avoid hitting the ball into the V winning device 6500 provided on the left side of the board. It is better to play a game method in which the reserved balls of the second special symbol are used up by continuing to accumulate the reserved balls and ending the time saving number when more reserved balls have been accumulated (that is, transitioning to the normal state) to use up the reserved balls of the second special symbol. Expectations are high. For this reason, during the time-saving state, the type of jackpot that will start when a V winning is generated from the key aspect (whether the time-saving state will be given or not) is guessed, and the jackpot that will give the time-saving state Since it is possible to realize an extremely unique and innovative gaming feature in which V-winning is avoided unless you guess that a game will start, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game. Also, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the player want to keep the number of balls on hold as large as possible (that is, to the upper limit of 4 balls), so the player will be more proactive in hitting right-hand balls during the time-saving state. can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(a), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit is won during the time saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 182(a), if a small win is won in the time-saving state, an effect is executed in which the boy character 801 discovers a tattered-looking treasure box 802 with the word "DANGER" written on it. During the time saving state, the appearance of the treasure chest is set to be worn out, making it possible to make the user think that it is better not to open the treasure chest 802. That is, if a V win occurs during the time saving state and a jackpot is achieved, it can be suggested to the player that the rate at which the time saving state will be awarded is low.

Further, at the bottom of the main display area Dm, there is formed a horizontally long rectangular display area HR7 in which the characters "Choose" are displayed, and for the left half of the sub display area Ds, "Use the key!!" is displayed. A horizontally oblong rectangular display area HR8 is formed in which the words ``Save the key!!'' and the words ``Right-handed'' are displayed on the right half. A horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR9 in which is displayed is formed. Further, on the left side of the display area HR4, an arrow image YG imitating a rightward arrow (that is, an arrow pointing in the direction of the display area HR4) is displayed. This arrow image YG allows the player to easily understand that the key that can be used for the currently displayed treasure box 802 is the key displayed in the display area HR4. According to these display contents, the player can use the key displayed in the display area HR4 to open the treasure box 802 by making a left-handed hit (in other words, it is possible to generate a V prize and start a jackpot. On the other hand, to make the player easily understand that by continuing to hit right, the treasure box 802 can be left unopened (that is, the small winning game can be ended without generating a V winning prize). Therefore, depending on the state of the key, etc., it is possible to create a novel gameplay that allows the player to choose whether to hit the left hand to start a jackpot and aim for a time-saving state, or continue to hit the right and end the small win game. Since this can be realized, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Note that the keys that are not used because the player continues to play right-handed will disappear when the small win ends.

Figure 182(b) shows that when the time-saving state ends and the state transitions to the normal state while there are reserved balls with the second special symbol, a small win is obtained by lottery based on the reserved balls with the second special symbol. FIG. As shown in FIG. 182(b), if a small win is won in the normal state after the end of the time saving state, an effect is performed in which the boy character 801 discovers a treasure box 802 with a shining appearance. When the player receives a small win during the time saving state (when the treasure box 802 is displayed in a tattered appearance), the appearance is set to be more luxurious than the one in which the treasure box 802 is displayed. can be easily understood. In other words, if a V-winning occurs in the normal state after exiting the time-saving state (the time-saving state ends) and a jackpot is achieved, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that the time-saving state will be granted after the jackpot ends. be able to. Further, as shown in FIG. 182(b), a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds, in which the words "Use the stored key by left-handed hitting!!" are displayed. . Based on these display contents, if you get a small win after exiting the time saving state (transferring to the normal state after the number of time saving times has elapsed), you should hit left-handed in order to generate a V win. can be easily understood by players.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the winning small winning in the normal state is more effective than when the jackpot (two types of winning) is started by generating a V winning prize during the execution of the small winning winning game in the time saving state. The configuration is such that when a two-type winning is started by generating a V winning prize during execution of a winning game, the rate at which a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot ends is higher. During the time-saving state, the presentation mode (display mode of the key image) can suggest the degree of expectation that the time-saving state will be granted when a V winning prize occurs. As a result, if you win a small win in a time-saving state, you will be given a choice between ending the small win without generating a V-win, or starting a jackpot by generating a V-win, which is extremely special. It is possible to realize innovative gameplay.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the production mode is different between the time saving state and the normal state after the time saving state (the state where the second special symbol reserved ball exists), and the time saving state ends. In the normal state after winning a small hit, the configuration is such that a performance mode is set that urges (suggests) a left hit (that is, a V win) when winning a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the time-saving state has not ended, the configuration may be such that as soon as the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol reaches the maximum, an effect that encourages left-handed hitting (V winning) is executed. If the number of reserved balls is the maximum, even if the time saving state is not given after the end of the jackpot (that is, even if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal state), the second special in the normal state after the end of the jackpot. It is advantageous for the player because the expectation of a small hit is higher due to the reserved ball of the symbol (in other words, the expectation of being able to start a Type 2 jackpot in the normal state where the rate of time-saving states is high is high), which is advantageous for the player. becomes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won during the time saving state, a gaming method (left hit) for generating a V win (using a key) and a V win are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The game method for avoiding the game (not using the key) (playing with the right hand) and the game method (playing with the right hand) are mainly indicated to the player by text (see Fig. 182(a)), but this is limited. isn't it. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest each gaming method (gaming method for generating and avoiding V winnings) to the player. More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG are moved to the left side in the main display area Dm, and four display areas (display area HRR1 ~HRR4) and an image imitating an arrow (arrow image YG2) similar to arrow image YG may be provided. Then, in the left display areas HR1 to HR4, the image of the key for opening the treasure chest 802 is displayed, as in the seventh embodiment, and in the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4, A configuration may also be adopted in which an image imitating a bomb for blowing up the treasure box 802 is displayed. Then, the arrow image YG is composed of an arrow pointing to the left toward the display area HR4, and the arrow image YG12 is configured to point toward the bomb image displayed in the lowermost display area HRR4 among the display areas HRR1 to HRR4 on the right side. It may also be composed of a right-pointing arrow. With this configuration, if you hit right according to the instructions of the arrow image YG2, which imitates a right-pointing arrow, you can end the small win (avoid V winning) by blowing up the treasure box 802 with a bomb. This can be easily made understood by the player. On the other hand, if you hit left-handed according to the instructions of the arrow image YG, which imitates a left-pointing arrow, you can open the treasure box 802 (generate a V-winning prize) using the key displayed in the display area HR4. can be easily understood by others. That is, the roles of the arrow images YG and YG2 are to indicate the items (keys and bombs) used in the small winning effect that is being executed, and to indicate the player's playing method (game play) for using the items. The ball can be made to play multiple different roles, including the role of indicating the direction in which the ball is launched. Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that is easy for players to understand, and also to use display elements efficiently, so that a more suitable performance mode can be realized.

<Electrical configuration in seventh embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183(a). FIG. 183(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19(a)) in that the small winning type selection table 202f and the open The difference is that the scenario table 202g is deleted. Also, the difference is that the stipulated contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the time saving grant table 202e have been partially changed. .

First, details of the first winning type selection table 202a in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184(a) and (b). Although illustration is omitted, the first winning random number table 202a in the seventh embodiment is similar to the first winning random number table 202a in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21(a)), and the first special symbol lottery Two types are defined: a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for use in the lottery of the second special symbol, and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for use in the lottery of the second special symbol. First, with reference to FIG. 184(a), the stipulated contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 184(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment. This special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, like the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment, defines a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment includes the counter value (random value) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot. As a range, "0 to 9" are defined in correspondence. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is any value from "0 to 9", it is determined to be a jackpot, but if any value from "0 to 9" If it is not (any value from 10 to 999), it is determined to be out of order. Among the 1000 counter values (random values) of "0 to 999" that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, there are 10 counter values (random values) of "0 to 9" that are determined to be a jackpot. , the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/100 (10/1000). Note that the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the seventh embodiment does not specify a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a small hit, similar to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the first embodiment. Therefore, the probability that the lottery of the first special symbol is determined to be a small hit (winning the small win) is 0.

Next, details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 184(b). Similar to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the first embodiment, this special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a big hit or a small win in the second special symbol lottery. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(b), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment includes "0 to 9" as the range of the counter value (random value) that is determined to be a jackpot. ” are defined in association with each other, and “10 to 989” are defined in association with each other as the range of the counter value (random value) that is determined to be a small win. Among the 1000 counter values (random values) of “0 to 999” that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the counter values (random values) that are determined to be a jackpot are 10 of “0 to 9”, Since the counter value (random value) that is determined to be a small hit is 980 from "10 to 989", the probability that the lottery of the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit is 1/100 (10/1000), The probability of determining a small hit is 98/100 (980/1000). That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the player is configured to almost (with a probability of 98/100) win a small win. Therefore, in the time-saving state, a small win is won in almost every special symbol lottery, so the player can enjoy more of the gameplay that allows the player to choose whether or not to generate a V-win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184(c), the stipulated contents of the second winning random number table 202c in the seventh embodiment will be explained. This second win random number table 202c is a data table that defines the range of values of the second win random number counter C4 that is determined to be a normal symbol win, similar to the second win random number table 202c in the first embodiment. be. When a normal symbol lottery is executed, the random number (counter value) specified in the second winning random number table 202c is compared with the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and it is determined whether the normal symbol is a winning or not. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not.

FIG. 184(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second winning random number counter C4 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 184(c), the second winning random number table 202c in the seventh embodiment includes a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a hit for a normal symbol in a high probability state (time saving state) for a normal symbol. and a random value (counter value) at which it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(c), 200 random numbers from "5 to 204" are used as random numbers (counter values) to determine that the normal symbol is a hit in the high probability state of the normal symbol. (counter value) is specified. Of the 240 random numbers from 0 to 239 that the second winning random number counter C4 can take, the number of random numbers that are determined to be hits for normal symbols is 200, so it is normal in the high probability state (time saving state) for normal symbols. The probability of a symbol winning is 1/1.2 (200/240).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 184(c), only "0" is defined as the random number value (counter value) for determining that the normal symbol is a hit in the high probability state of the normal symbol. Among the 240 random numbers from 0 to 239 that the second winning random number counter C4 can take, only one random number is determined to be a hit for the normal symbol, so it is normal in the high probability state (time saving state) for the normal symbol. The probability of a winning symbol is 1/240.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of the normal symbol winning is set to be extremely low in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting the ball to the right in the normal state in the hope that the game ball will hit the normal symbol and enter the second ball entry port 6400. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the normal symbol lottery is won in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 6400a will be displayed in a very short time (0 It is configured so that it can only be opened for 2 seconds x 1 time). As a result, even if you hit right during the normal state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is low, and even if you win, the game ball will almost always enter the second ball entry port 6400. Therefore, it is better to play the game by hitting the game ball to the left into the first ball entrance 64 and aiming to win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (right It is possible to make the player think that it is not worth it even if he hits the ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods in which the player plays right-handed during the normal state.

Next, details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 185(a). This first winning type selection table 202b, like the first winning type selection table 202b in the first embodiment, is a data table that is referred to in order to specify (determine) the jackpot type when winning a jackpot. FIG. 185(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this first winning type selection table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 185(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment includes the jackpot type when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (a so-called "direct hit" occurs). A direct win table 202be1 for specifying (determining) a V win, and a V win table 202be2 for specifying (determining) a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the occurrence of a V win are defined. ing. First, details of the immediate hit table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 185(b).

FIG. 185(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the direct hit table 202be1. As shown in FIG. 185(b), in the seventh embodiment, "Jackpot A7" and "Jackpot There are two types of jackpots: B7. "Jackpot A7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and when winning in the normal state, a time saving state with a number of time saving times of 10 is given after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, "Jackpot B7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and when winning in the normal state, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal state, "Jackpot A7" is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot B7" because the gaming state after the jackpot is more advantageous. In addition, in the time saving state, no matter which jackpot is won, the advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. This means that if a direct win occurs at a relatively early stage after transitioning to the time-saving state, in the time-saving state, either a V winning, which is the characteristic game feature of the seventh embodiment, will occur, or a Since it becomes impossible to fully enjoy the gameplay of choosing whether to play or not, by creating a configuration that always shifts to the time-saving state even after the hit, the player can reliably enjoy the game in the time-saving state. This is the purpose. In other words, in order to prevent the player from being disappointed by not being able to fully enjoy the game in the time-saving state and shifting to the normal state, the time-saving state must be entered after a direct hit during the time-saving state. It is configured so that

In addition, if a direct hit occurs, it has nothing to do with the type of special symbol that triggered the direct hit (whether it is a jackpot due to the lottery of the first special symbol or a jackpot due to the lottery of the second special symbol). Then, either "Jackpot A7" or "Jackpot B7" is specified depending only on the value of the first winning type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 185(b), "Jackpot A7" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49", and "Jackpot A7" is defined in correspondence with the range of "50 to 49" ``Jackpot B7'' is defined in association with the range of ``99''. That is, 50 values of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with each of "Jackpot A7" and "Jackpot B7". Therefore, when a direct hit occurs, the percentage of "jackpot A7" being specified and the percentage of "jackpot B7" being specified are half and half (both are 50%).

Next, details of the V hit table 202be2 will be described with reference to FIG. 185(b). As described above, this V winning table 202be2 is used to specify (select) the type of jackpot to be executed based on the occurrence of a V winning in a small winning game (the game ball has passed the V winning switch 6500e3). This is a data table in which the data of FIG. 185(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this V hit table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 185(b), the V winning table 202be2 defines four jackpot types: "Jackpot C7", "Jackpot D7", "Jackpot E7", and "Jackpot F7".

As shown in FIG. 185(c), "big win C7" is defined in association with the value "0" of the first win type counter C2. This "Jackpot C7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 15, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. This "jackpot C7" has the largest number of rounds among all the jackpot types, and the gaming state after the jackpot is also advantageous, so it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot C7" is 1, so The probability (ratio) that "Jackpot C7" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during execution of a small winning game is 1/100 (1%).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185(c), a "big win D7" is defined in association with the range of "1 to 4" for the first win type counter C2. In this "Jackpot D7", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and if the jackpot is won in the normal state, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. This is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. This "Jackpot D7" has the second largest number of rounds after "Jackpot C7", and if you win in the normal state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends will be advantageous, so it is the second most advantageous jackpot type after "Jackpot C7". It is. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot D7" is 4, so The probability (ratio) that "Jackpot D7" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during execution of a small winning game is 4/100 (4%).

Further, as shown in FIG. 185(c), a "jackpot E7" is defined in association with the range of "5 to 29" for the first win type counter C2. In this "Jackpot E7", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and if the jackpot is won in the normal state, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, and the player wins in the time-saving state. This is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. That is, it is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of rounds than "jackpot C7" or "jackpot D7", and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the same as "jackpot D7". Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot E7" is 25, so The probability (ratio) that "Jackpot E7" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during execution of a small winning game is 25/100 (25%).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 185(c), a "jackpot F7" is defined in association with the range of "30 to 99" for the first win type counter C2. This "Jackpot F7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a normal state disadvantageous to the player, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player because it has the least number of rounds and is also disadvantageous in terms of gaming conditions. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot F7" is 70, so The probability (ratio) that "Jackpot F7" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during execution of a small winning game is 70/100 (70%).

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, if a V winning occurs during the time saving and you win the jackpot, an advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends unless you win the "jackpot C7" with a distribution of 1%. Never. On the other hand, in the normal state after the time saving state ends, if you win a small hit with the reserved ball of the second special symbol and generate a V prize, "Jackpot C7" (distribution 1%), "Jackpot D7" ” (distribution: 4%) and “Jackpot E7” (distribution: 25%), an advantageous time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends. In other words, the configuration is such that the time saving state is set at a rate of 30%. Therefore, since it is more likely that a V-win will occur in the normal state than in the time saving state, it will be an advantageous time saving state, so until the time saving state ends (the number of time saving times has elapsed), there will be a small win. It can be configured so that the degree of advantage becomes higher when a special gaming method is performed in which the player continues playing right-handed so as not to generate a V-winning prize even if the player wins. In addition, even if the state is shifted to the normal state, the time saving state is only set for 30% of the jackpots based on V winnings (the majority are set to the normal state). seems difficult. However, if you continue to hit right until the time saving state ends, in most cases you can transition to the normal state with 4 reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated, and, In the lottery for the second special symbol, the player almost always wins the small prize (98% of the time). In other words, you will be given four chances to win the jackpot based on the V winnings. The probability of winning one of "Jackpot C7" to "Jackpot E7" with a 30% rate within 4 times is approximately 76% (Probability of winning "Jackpot F7" all 4 times is 70% x 70% x 70% x 70%=24%), it is possible to shift to the time saving state again at a relatively high rate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to end the time saving state with the pending amount accumulated to the maximum.

In addition, as soon as the pending amount is accumulated to the maximum, even if a V winning occurs, the normal state will be set almost (99% of the time) after the end of the jackpot. In other words, in the same way as when avoiding V-winning until the number of time-savings reaches 0, you will be given 4 chances to transition to the time-saving state, and it is better than avoiding V-winning until the number of time-savings reaches 0. Since the player wins the jackpot once, it is possible to widen the player's options for playing the game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, details of the time saving grant table 202e in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 186(a). This time saving granting table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to set the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot depending on the type of jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. At the end of the jackpot, this time saving grant table 202e is referred to and the value of the time saving counter 203k is set. The value of the time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed and the variation is stopped. While the value of this time-saving medium counter 203k is 1 or more, the time-saving state is created, and an advantageous state is formed in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entry port 6400 by right-handed hitting. However, when the value becomes 0, Shift to a disadvantageous normal state.

FIG. 186(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this time-saving provision table 202e. As shown in Figure 186(a), for "Jackpot A7" won in the normal state, "10 times" is defined as the number of time saving grants, and for "Jackpot A7" won in the time saving state However, "10 times" is defined as the number of time saving grants. Therefore, if the player wins the "Jackpot A7", a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 186(a), for "Jackpot B7" won in the normal state, "0" is defined as the number of time saving grants, while when winning in the time saving state For "Jackpot B7", "10 times" is defined as the number of time saving grants. Therefore, if a direct hit occurs in the normal state and a "jackpot B7" is determined, the game shifts to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, while a direct win occurs in the time saving state and a "jackpot B7" is determined. Then, the game shifts to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 186(a), for both the "jackpot C7" won in the normal state and the time-saving state, "10" is defined as the number of time-saving grants. Therefore, when a V win occurs in a small win and a "big win C7" is determined, the game shifts to an advantageous time-saving state after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 186(a), for the "Jackpot D7" won in the normal state, "10" is specified as the number of time saving grants. For "Jackpot E7", 0 times is defined in association with the number of time saving grants. Moreover, the same number of time saving times is also defined in association with "Jackpot E7". Therefore, in the normal state, when a V win occurs in a small win and either "big win D7" or "big win E7" is determined, an advantageous time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when these jackpot types are determined in the current state, a normal state is set that is disadvantageous after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 186(a), "0 times" is defined as the number of time saving grants for "Jackpot F7", regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, in both the normal state and the time saving state, if the "jackpot F7" is won, a disadvantageous normal state is set, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the number of time reductions (that is, the value of the time reduction counter 203k) is configured to be decremented by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed, regardless of the type of special symbol. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that different time saving times can be set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when shifting to the time saving state, the number of time saving times of the first special symbol may be set to 5 times, and the number of time saving times of the second special symbol may be set to 10 times. With this configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed up to 10 times during the time saving state, regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of transition to the time saving state. In other words, if you win "Jackpot A7" while there is a reserved ball with the first special symbol, there will be a reserved ball with the first special symbol at the time the time saving state is entered, and the ball will be reserved immediately after the jackpot ends. Even when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, it is possible to suppress the number of lottery of the second special symbol that can be executed during the time saving state from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy the gameplay in which he/she can select whether or not to generate a V winning prize in a small win, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment will be explained. The structure of the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment is the same as the structure of the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23(a)), and the structure of the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment is the same as that of the variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the only difference is that the stipulated contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the stipulated contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are partially changed. Note that the normal variation pattern table 202d1 in the seventh embodiment is different from the normal variation pattern table 202d1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23(b)) in that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is also different from the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern of the symbols is also standardized and is configured to be unified to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first embodiment (the long fluctuation of 180 seconds is not set in the lottery of the second special symbol). Since only the following differences exist, illustrations and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the normal state in the seventh embodiment, the reason why the long variation is not performed when the second special symbol lottery is executed is that the time saving state is ended and the normal state is This is because the player is configured to be able to select a gaming method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the state. In other words, if the player avoids a V-win in a small win won during the time-saving state and the second special symbol lottery is executed after the time-saving state ends, a long variable time will be set. The purpose of this is to prevent this from happening, as the game may be delayed and the player's interest may be lost.

Next, details of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 186(b). FIG. 186(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the time-saving variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 186(b), in the time-saving variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment, symbol types, lottery results, the range of values of the variation type counter CS1, and variation patterns are defined in association with each other. has been done.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 186(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is "miss", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0~ 198'' range, that is, the entire range is defined with a variation time of 1 second being short, and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198". That is, a normal reach with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with the entire range. Therefore, if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the time saving state, the variation will end in a very short time, so if the lottery shifts to the time saving state with the reserved balls of the first special symbol remaining, , To finish the drawing of the first special symbol in a short period where it is impossible to win a small win (that is, it is impossible to play a game where you can choose whether to generate or avoid a V win in a small win). I can do it.

In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is "miss" or "small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", A "short deviation" with a variation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with a "long deviation" with a variation time of 5 seconds for the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189". "Normal reach" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "190 to 195", and a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "196 to 198". In contrast, a "super reach" with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined. That is, compared to when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the normal state (when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 23(b))). The system is configured so that the fluctuation time when the lottery result does not become a jackpot is shortened. As a result, the game during the time-saving state can be quickly played (used up), so it is possible to prevent the game during the time-saving state from becoming redundant.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 186(b), when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". , "Normal reach" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in correspondence, and "Super reach" with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined for the value of variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194". "Special reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "195 to 198". That is, even if a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the variable time is set to be shorter than when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. There is. Thereby, it is possible to more reliably prevent games in the time-saving state from becoming redundant.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183(b). FIG. 183(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 183(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19(b)), and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2. The difference is that a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb, and a winning state storage area 203ec are added. It is also different in that the small hit A counter 203m, the small hit B counter 203n, the small hit C counter 203p, and the short/normal figure short fluctuation flag 203q in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment are deleted.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area. Among the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area) constituting 203a2, the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first reservation area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reservation area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203a2 is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed. Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is a counter that counts reserved balls based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 6400, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203b. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, these special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 are added in order to install the reserved memory of the 2nd special symbol which was not installed in the first embodiment. .

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2. . A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas of the area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203ea is is shifted (moved) to the execution area for executing the lottery, and based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored (memorized) in the execution area, judgments such as the lottery of winning of normal symbols are made. It will be done.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a2, other A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the holding area is moved to the holding area with the area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 to a maximum of four times. This is a counter that counts up to The value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb (the number of pending balls in the variable display in the normal symbol) is set to an initial value of zero, and as the ball passes through the through gate 67, the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1013 in FIG. 191). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is the maximum value of 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Fig. 191, S1012: No). Further, the counter value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is subtracted by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is executed (see S933 in FIG. 190).

The winning state storage area 203ec is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (that is, if the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0), information indicating the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203ec. "00H" is stored. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving state (that is, if the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 1 or more), "01H " is stored. The information stored in this winning state storage area 203ec is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referenced when setting the gaming state (i.e., the number of time reductions) after the jackpot ends (see S1621 in FIG. 192). ).

Next, a method of transitioning between each state in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 187. Here, in the seventh embodiment, two game states are provided. That is, two types of game states are provided: a normal game state (normal state) in which a normal state of normal symbols is set, and a time-saving game state (time-saving state) in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is set. In addition, in the normal game state, the degree of advantage seems to be greatly different between the normal game state where there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the time saving state, and the normal game state where there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is composed of In other words, if there is even one reserved ball with the second special symbol, you will almost (99% of the time) win a small hit or a jackpot, so it is much more likely than when there is no reserved ball with the second special symbol. form a favorable situation. In the following explanation, to simplify the explanation, the normal game state where there is no reserved ball with the second special symbol is referred to as the "normal mode", and the normal game state where there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. This is called the "stock release mode" in the sense that the game is played using the reserved balls of the second special symbol that were accumulated (stocked) during the time saving state, and the time saving game state is referred to as the "stock release mode". It means playing a game by selecting either the gameplay that causes a win and executes a jackpot, or the gameplay that avoids a V-win during a small win and shifts to "stock release mode". This mode is called "select mode."

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 187, a method of transitioning from the normal mode (normal game state where there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode only when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 187, when it comes to "Jackpot A7" where you win with a 50% chance of winning in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is advantageous. Select mode (time-saving gaming state) is set. On the other hand, in the case of "Jackpot B7", which is a 50% chance of winning if the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot, the mode after the jackpot is set again to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. (Loop normal mode). Therefore, in the normal mode, the player can play the game in hopes of winning the "jackpot A7" in the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 187, in the select mode (time-saving gaming state), when a small hit is won and a V-win occurs, resulting in a jackpot, and when the time-saving number of times has elapsed (ended). There is a possibility of switching to other modes. More specifically, as shown in the middle row of FIG. 187, a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, a V win is generated, a 2nd type win (V win) is won, and the jackpot type is a jackpot D7~. In the case of F7, the mode shifts to either the normal mode or the stock release mode after the jackpot ends. That is, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the jackpot D7 to F7, the mode will shift to the normal mode after the jackpot ends, while the second special symbol will be reserved at the end of the jackpot D7 to F7. If the number of balls is 1 or more, the game shifts to stock release mode after the jackpot ends. Similarly, when the number of time reductions has elapsed (ends), if the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 0 when the number of time reductions has elapsed, the mode will shift to normal mode, while the number of time reductions has elapsed. If the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more at the time, the mode shifts to the stock release mode. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game can be played with care so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not become zero. In other words, since it is possible to have the player actively hit the ball to the right so that more game balls enter the second ball entrance 6400, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the game.

As shown in the middle part of FIG. 187, if a direct hit occurs, or if a jackpot C7 with a 1% distribution is determined by winning the second type of winning, the gaming state after the jackpot is changed again. Set to select mode.

Furthermore, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, in the stock opening mode, if a jackpot (direct hit and V hit) is won, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 187, when a direct hit occurs and jackpot A7 is determined, the game shifts to the advantageous select mode after the jackpot ends. Further, if a direct hit occurs, a jackpot B7 is determined, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the jackpot, the game shifts to the normal mode after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, if a V win occurs during the execution of a small winning game, resulting in a type 2 win (V winning), and one of jackpots C7 to E7 is determined, the mode after the jackpot is set to select mode. Ru. In addition, if jackpot F7 is determined as the winning type for the 2nd type hit (V hit) and there is no reserved ball with the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot F7, the system will shift to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. do. On the other hand, if the jackpot B7 or the jackpot F7 occurs and there is one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot ends becomes the stock release mode again.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, there are three modes in which the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the jackpot type and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot (or at the time when the number of time reductions has elapsed). The configuration is such that the mode shifts to one of these modes. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of mode transitions, thereby further increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

<About the control process of the main controller in the seventh embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 188 to 192. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, since a second special symbol retention storage function has been added to the first embodiment, the contents of the starting winning process (see FIG. 43) have also been changed. , the same modification as the start-up winning process 2 (see FIG. 96) in the second embodiment (which, like the seventh embodiment, has a second special symbol retention storage function) already mentioned above. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the starting winning process in the seventh embodiment will be omitted here. First, special symbol variation processing 7 (S121 in FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 188. This special symbol variation process 7 (S121) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 38, S104), and is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 38, S104). ), this is a process for setting variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b.

Of the special symbol variation processing 7 (S121) in this seventh embodiment, each of the processing in S201, S202, S206 to S218, and S220 corresponds to S201 of the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 38, S104). , S202, S206 to S218, and S220 are executed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 7 (S121) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S202 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the special symbol 1 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203b (number of times N1 of pending variable display in special symbol 1) and the value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 (number of pending times N2 of variable display in special symbol 2) are acquired (S231).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is greater than 0 (S232), and it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is 0. In that case (S232: No), the process moves to S206. On the other hand, in the process of S232, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is a value larger than 0 (S232: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 ( N2) is subtracted by 1 (S233), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 changed by the calculation is set (S234).

After setting the number of reserved balls command through the process of S234, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S235). In the process of S235, the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process moves to S210.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S213 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S213: No), then the time saving medium counter 203k is It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S236), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S236: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203k is subtracted by 1 ( S237), the process moves to S220. On the other hand, in the process of S236, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (S236: No), the process of S237 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S220.

In the process of S220, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S220). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S220: Yes), a small win start setting process 7 is executed (S238) instead of the small win start setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 40). ), the process moves to S218. Details of this small hit start setting process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S220: No), the process of S238 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S218.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189, the small hit start setting process 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described. This small hit start setting process 7 (S238 in FIG. 189) is a process executed in place of the small hit start setting process in the first embodiment (see S221 in FIG. 40), and is Similar to the setting process, this is a process for setting the start of a small winning game.

Of the small hit start setting process 7 (S238) in this seventh embodiment, each process of S401 and S404 is different from each of S401 and S404 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 40, S221) in the first embodiment. The same process as the process is executed. In addition, in the small winning start setting process 7 (S238) in the seventh embodiment, when the process of S401 is finished, next, the V winning table 202be2 of the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 185(c)) The data indicating the jackpot type specified with reference to is stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h (S411), the start of the small win is set (S412), and the process moves to S404.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, normal symbol variation processing 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process 7 (S122 in FIG. 190) is a process that is executed in place of the normal symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45, S106), and the normal symbol variation process in the first embodiment ( (see FIG. 45), to control the variable display and variable time of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 6400a attached to the second ball entrance 6400, etc. This is the process.

Of the normal symbol variation processing 7 (S122) in this seventh embodiment, each of the processing in S901, S902, S906 to S910, and S912 to S920 is the normal symbol variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45, S106). The same processes as S901, S902, S906 to S910, and S912 to S920 are executed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 7 (S122) in the seventh embodiment, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing in the process of S902 (S902: No), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter The value of 203eb (number of times M of suspension of variable display in normal symbols) is acquired (S931). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is larger than 0 (S932), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is 0 (S932: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is not 0 (S932: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is subtracted by 1 (S933).

When the process of S933 is completed, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea is then shifted (S934). In the process of S934, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea is acquired (S935).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S936). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state is normal symbol, while if the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is 0. , it is determined that it is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

In the process of S936, if it is determined that the time is shortened for normal symbols (S936: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S936 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability times are used. Based on this, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S937), and the process moves to S906. In addition, in the process of S937, specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random number table for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 184(c)).

On the other hand, in the process of S936, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S936: No), then the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S935 and the normal symbol per Based on the random number table, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S938), and the process moves to S906. In the process of S938, specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random number table for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "1 to 239", it is a normal symbol miss. (See FIG. 184(c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, through gate passage processing 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This through gate passing process 7 (S123 in FIG. 191) is a process executed in place of the through gate passing process in the first embodiment (see S107 in FIG. 46), and whether or not the game ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203ea when the game ball passes.

In the process of S1001 of the through gate passing process 7 (S123) in the seventh embodiment, the same process as each process of S1001 of the through gate passing process (see FIG. 46, S107) in the first embodiment is executed. Ru. In addition, in the through gate passing process 7 (S123) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1001 that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S1001: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter The value of 203eb (number of times M of suspension of variable display in normal symbols) is acquired (S1011). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is a value smaller than 4 (S1012), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is 4 (i.e., (upper limit value) (S1012: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb is smaller than 4 (S1012: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203eb (S1013), The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203ea (S1014), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, jackpot control processing 7 (S1521 in FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 7 (S1521 in FIG. 192) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 52, S1504), and is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 52, S1504). ), this is a process for making various settings during execution of a jackpot game.

Of the jackpot control processing 7 (S1521) in this seventh embodiment, each processing of S1601 to S1612, S1615 to S1618 is different from the jackpot control processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 52, S1504), respectively. The same processes as those from S1618 to S1618 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (S1521) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (ending period) (S1612: Yes), the jackpot type that is being executed , the number of time reductions corresponding to the data in the winning state storage area 203ec is read from the time reduction granting table 202e (see FIG. 186(a)) (S1621), and the read number of time reductions is set to the counter value of the time reduction medium counter 203k. (S1622), the process moves to S1615.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 1113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 193 to 195. First, with reference to FIG. 193, winning information related processing 7 (S2221 in FIG. 193) executed in the seventh embodiment will be described. This winning information related process 7 (S2221 in FIG. 193) is a process executed in place of the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see S2210 in FIG. 57), and is a process executed in place of the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see S2210 in FIG. 57). (See FIG. 57), this is a process for performing control according to the winning information command received from the main control device 110.

Of the winning information related processing 7 (S2221) in the seventh embodiment, each of the processing in S2301, S2302, S2311 and S2312 is different from the winning information related processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 57, S2210). , S2311, and S2312 are executed.

In addition, in the winning information related process 7 (S2221) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the read gaming state is a time saving state (S2302: Yes), then the received winning information command It is determined whether or not it is a command indicating winning information of the second special symbol (S2321). In the process of S2321, if it is determined that the command indicates the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: Yes), the mode of the key corresponding to the lottery result notified by the winning information command is specified (S2322), The display of the key image in the specified manner is set (S2324), and the process moves to step 2311. On the other hand, in the process of S2321, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not a command indicating the winning information of the second special symbol (S2321: No), the process of S2322 and S2324 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2311. Transition.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the winning related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This win-related process 7 (S2222 in FIG. 194) is a process executed in place of the win-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 58, S2212), and is a process executed in place of the win-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 58, S2212). ), when a command related to a win is received from the main control device 110, this is a process for executing control according to the type of the received command.

Of the win-related processing 7 (S2222) in the seventh embodiment, each of the processing in S2401 to S2409 and S2411 to S2418 corresponds to the processing in S2401 to S2409 and S2418 of the winning-related processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 58, S2212). The same processes as those from S2418 to S2418 are executed. In addition, in the win-related process 7 (S2222) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the process of S2409 (S2409: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S2421 ), then this process ends. The details of this small hit start command processing (S2421) will be explained with reference to FIG. 195.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned small hit start command process (S2421). In this small hit start command processing (S2421), first, the information stored in the game state storage area 223f is read (S3901), and then it is determined whether the read information is information indicating a time saving state or not. (S3902). In the process of S3902, if it is determined that the read information is information indicating a time saving state (S3902: Yes), the start of a small winning effect for the select mode (see FIG. 182(a)) is set (S3903). , and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if it is determined that the read information is not information indicating a time saving state (determined to be information indicating a normal state) (S3902: No), the small winning effect for the stock release mode ( (see FIG. 182(b)) is set (S3904), and then this process ends.

By executing this small win start command processing (see FIG. 195), it is possible to change the small win effect depending on whether the small win is won in the normal state or the small win is won in the time saving state. It is possible to realize a game feature that allows a player to select whether or not to generate a V winning prize based on the performance mode.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot in an unfavorable normal state than to achieve a jackpot in an advantageous time-saving state as a gaming state after the jackpot ends. The configuration is such that it is easy to set a time-saving gaming state. In other words, it is configured such that a small win is won with a high probability in the lottery of the second special symbol that is likely to be executed during the time saving state, and when the small win generates a V winning and starts a jackpot, the time saving state is given. The percentage of small wins during the normal state is higher than that during the time saving state. In other words, the first gaming method is to execute a jackpot by hitting the left to generate a V winning as soon as you win a small win in a time saving state, even though you are aware of the risk that the possibility of becoming a time saving state is low, and the first game method is to end the time saving state. Although we are aware of the risk that it will take time and balls to get the ball, we end the time saving state while keeping a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the V prize is generated by a small hit after the end of the time saving state. The player can select the following two gaming methods.

Here, in a general gaming machine, the degree of advantage when hitting a jackpot in an advantageous state (e.g., time saving state) is greater than or equal to the degree of advantage when hitting a jackpot in a disadvantageous state (e.g., normal state). Since the specifications are normal, in most cases when the game transitions to an advantageous state, the player plays the game with strong expectations that he will hit the jackpot during the advantageous state. For this reason, when the advantageous state ends and the state shifts to a disadvantageous state, there is a risk that the player will be discouraged and the player's motivation for playing the game will decrease.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the advantageous time-saving state is configured so that the expectation level for transitioning to the time-saving state is higher. The player can be made to think that he wants to win the jackpot with the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the time saving state ends. In other words, in the case of a small win in a time-saving state, in addition to the option of turning left-handed and making a V-win and winning a jackpot, in the case of a small win during a time-saving state, intentionally returning to the normal state by avoiding a V-win. It is possible to give the player the option of shifting to Therefore, it is possible to provide a very special and novel gaming method as one of the options in which the player intentionally avoids the jackpot, thereby further increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

In the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to almost win a small win (98/100), but the small win probability may be determined arbitrarily. For example, it may be configured such that 1/4 results in a small win. If configured in this way, even if you try to win a V prize with a small hit after transitioning to the normal state, there is a high possibility that you will not win the small win due to the suspension of the second special symbol, so during the time saving state More players can be allowed to select a gaming method in which, as soon as a small win is achieved, a V win is generated and a jackpot is executed. In addition, instead of lowering the small winning probability, balance may be achieved by increasing the time saving grant ratio (for example, to 80%) when two types of winnings occur in the normal state. In addition, instead of lowering the small hit probability (to 1/4), we also lower the percentage of V winnings that occur when left-handed hits are made for small wins (for example, only about one out of four small wins It may also be configured such that winnings do not occur. This allows more players to select the gaming method of ending the time saving state.

In the seventh embodiment, when a V winning occurs during the time saving state and a V winning is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a disadvantageous normal state 99% of the time, regardless of the number of time saving times. It was configured so that In other words, from the time the time saving state is set until the number of time reductions has elapsed (specific conditions are met), the degree of advantage in winning per V will be lower than after the number of time reductions has elapsed (after the specific conditions are met). However, it is not limited to this. For example, even in the time-saving state, the configuration is such that a situation can occur where the rate of time-saving states being granted is high when winning a V win (e.g., 30%, which is the same as when winning a V win in the normal state). You may do so. More specifically, for example, if you win a small hit in the second half of the time saving state (for example, the last three special symbol drawings), and a V win occurs in the small win and becomes a V hit, , the time-saving state may be provided at a relatively high rate similarly to the normal state. Conversely, if you win a small hit in the first half of the time saving state (for example, the first two special symbol draws), and a V win occurs in the small win and becomes a V hit, the normal state Similarly, the configuration may be such that the time saving state is provided at a relatively high rate.

In the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that a small win can be won only in the second special symbol lottery, but the invention is not limited to this, and even in the first special symbol lottery, there is a relatively low probability (for example, 1/200). It may also be configured to win a small prize. With this configuration, even when the first special symbol lottery is executed, it is possible to make the player expect to win a small win, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, when transitioning to the time saving state, the time saving state ends when a total of 10 special symbol draws have been executed, regardless of the type of special symbol drawn. It was composed of, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that different time saving times are set for each type of special symbol (for example, the first special symbol is 5 times and the second special symbol is 10 times). In other words, the number of drawings of the second special symbol until the end of the time saving state may be configured to be the same each time, regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of shifting to the time saving state. With this configuration, in the time saving state, it is possible to make the number of times of the game play to select whether or not to generate a V winning a prize to be the same each time.

In the seventh embodiment, the performance mode is different between the time saving state and the normal state after the time saving state (the state where the second special symbol reserved ball exists), and after the time saving state ends. In the normal state, a presentation mode is set that encourages (suggests) a left hit (that is, a V win) when winning a small win, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the time-saving state has not ended, the configuration may be such that as soon as the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol reaches the maximum, an effect that encourages left-handed hitting (V winning) is executed. If the number of reserved balls is the maximum, even if the time saving state is not given after the end of the jackpot (that is, even if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal state), the second special in the normal state after the end of the jackpot. It is advantageous for the player because the expectation of a small hit is higher due to the reserved ball of the symbol (in other words, the expectation of being able to start a Type 2 jackpot in the normal state where the rate of time-saving states is high is high), which is advantageous for the player. becomes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won during the time saving state, a gaming method (left hit) for generating a V win (using a key) and a V win are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The game method for avoiding the game (not using the key) (playing with the right hand) and the game method (playing with the right hand) are mainly indicated to the player by text (see Fig. 182(a)), but this is limited. isn't it. The image displayed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest each gaming method (gaming method for generating and avoiding V winnings) to the player. More specifically, for example, the display areas HR1 to HR4 and the arrow image YG are moved to the left side in the main display area Dm, and four display areas (display area HRR1 ~HRR4) and an image imitating an arrow (arrow image YG2) similar to arrow image YG may be provided. Then, in the left display areas HR1 to HR4, the image of the key for opening the treasure chest 802 is displayed, as in the seventh embodiment, and in the right display areas HRR1 to HRR4, A configuration may also be adopted in which an image imitating a bomb for blowing up the treasure box 802 is displayed. Then, the arrow image YG is composed of an arrow pointing to the left toward the display area HR4, and the arrow image YG12 is configured to point toward the bomb image displayed in the lowermost display area HRR4 among the display areas HRR1 to HRR4 on the right side. It may also be composed of a right-pointing arrow. With this configuration, if you hit right according to the instructions of the arrow image YG2, which imitates a right-pointing arrow, you can end the small win (avoid V winning) by blowing up the treasure box 802 with a bomb. This can be easily made understood by the player. On the other hand, if you hit left-handed according to the instructions of the arrow image YG, which imitates a left-pointing arrow, you can open the treasure box 802 (generate a V-winning prize) using the key displayed in the display area HR4. can be easily understood by others. That is, the roles of the arrow images YG and YG2 are to indicate the items (keys and bombs) used in the small winning effect that is being executed, and to indicate the player's playing method (game play) for using the items. The ball can be made to play multiple different roles, including the role of indicating the direction in which the ball is launched. Therefore, it is possible to realize a display mode that is easy for players to understand, and also to use display elements efficiently, so that a more suitable performance mode can be realized.

In the seventh embodiment, there are only two types of gaming states: a normal state and a time-saving state, and it is easier to win a V hit in the normal state than to win a V win in the time-saving state. Although the configuration is such that the rate of being given an advantageous time-saving state is high, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to these two types of gaming states, a so-called variable probability state and a potential probability state may be provided, so that the degree of advantage in the case of a jackpot is higher in the probability state than in the variable probability state. The degree of advantage in the case of a jackpot may be made higher in the time-saving state than in the time-saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to achieve a more diverse range of state transitions and to make the player expect to win a jackpot even in a relatively unfavorable state, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 214. The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above is configured such that when the player makes a right-handed hit in a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, in an advantageous time-saving state, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed, and furthermore, the first special symbol lottery is The time-saving state is configured to end more easily when the second special symbol lottery is executed than when it is executed. More specifically, the time-saving ending condition based on the number of drawings of the second special symbol (the number of time-savings of the second special symbol) is better than the time-saving ending condition depending on the number of drawings of the first special symbol (the number of time-savings of the first special symbol). The structure was designed to reduce the number of times. On the other hand, since the lottery with the second special symbol is configured so that the probability of a small hit is higher than the lottery with the first special symbol, the expectation of a big hit for one lottery (direct win and V win) is The total expectation level) was configured so that it would be higher in the second special symbol lottery. As a result, if the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority, the expectation of a jackpot will be higher, but while the time-saving state will be easier to end early, the lottery for the first special symbol will be prioritized. If the game is executed in a timely manner, the expectation of a jackpot will be lowered, but the game will allow players to enjoy the time-saving state for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to allow each player to select a gameplay that matches his or her preference.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, since the lottery of the first special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the second special symbol, right-handed hitting is continued in the time saving state. In this case, first, after the first special symbol lottery with a low jackpot expectation because it is difficult to satisfy the end condition of the time saving state (the number of time savings is large) and the jackpot expectation is low, the second special symbol with a high jackpot expectation is drawn. A lottery of symbols is executed. In other words, in the second half of the advantageous time-saving state (and when the second special symbol is used up after the end of the game), it is possible to realize an extremely innovative gaming experience in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment in terms of configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 The configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 196, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, in the eighth embodiment, the V winning device 6500 is provided (moved) on the right side of the game board 13 (the position where the game ball fired by right-handed hitting can enter the ball). They differ in the following points: The structure, opening pattern, etc. of this V winning device 6500 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above. In other words, in the eighth embodiment, similar to the seventh embodiment, just by firing a game ball to the V winning device 6500 during execution of a small winning game, a V winning almost occurs and you win a V winning. It is configured to do this. In other words, winning a small jackpot is almost the same as winning a jackpot. In addition, the second ball entrance 6400 is deleted, and instead, on the right side of the board surface of the game board 13, there is a prize distribution device 700, which was also provided in the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 169), and a right first The difference is that a ball entry port 64a2 and a right second ball entry port 64b are provided. The prize distribution device 700, the first right ball entrance 64a2, and the second right ball entrance 64b are described in the sixth embodiment with reference to FIG. 170, etc., so detailed description thereof will be given here. is omitted.

Although the details will be described later, in the eighth embodiment, a period during which a game ball is likely to enter the first operating port 704 as a hit with a normal symbol (when the switching valve 702 is switched to the first switching state) is used. The winning type (A8 per normal figure) in which the electric accessory 701 is released (period in which the electric accessory 701 is open) and the period in which the game ball is easier to enter the second operating height 704 (the period in which the switching valve 702 is switched to the second switching state). There is at least a winning type (B8 per normal figure) in which the electric accessory 702 is released during the period in which the electric accessory 702 is released. When a normal symbol hits in the time saving state, 80% of the winnings are A8 and 20% of the winnings are B8. In other words, in the time-saving state, the first right ball entry port 64a2 is opened more frequently (opportunities) than the second right ball entry port 64b. With this configuration, when the player continues to play right in the time saving state, it is possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol more preferentially. In other words, by playing the relatively simple game method of continuing to hit right, you can first intensively draw the first special symbol, which has a low expectation, and then select the second special symbol, which has a high expectation. A lottery can be executed. Therefore, after transitioning to the time saving state, the jackpot expectation level is low (you can only win the jackpot by hitting directly) for a relatively long period (until the special symbol lottery is executed 96 times). After the game is played, the player can be allowed to play the game for a relatively short period of time in a state where the expectation of a jackpot is high (both a direct hit and a V hit can occur). Therefore, even if the first special symbol is not won in the 96th lottery, the player can play the game with a sense of security that the second special symbol with higher expectations will be drawn later. It is possible to realize innovative gameplay.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197 and FIG. 198, characteristic effects during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, by making the small winning probability different between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the occurrence rate of jackpot due to V winning (probability of winning V winning) ) is varied so that the expectation of a jackpot is substantially higher in the lottery with the second special symbol than in the lottery with the first special symbol. Furthermore, in the present eighth embodiment, the number of time saving times of the second special symbol is configured to be smaller than the number of time saving times of the first special symbol, and when only drawings of the second special symbol with high expectation are executed. The advantageous time-saving state is easily ended relatively early, and if only the first special symbol is drawn, the time-saving state can be enjoyed for a relatively long time. In the eighth embodiment, this specification (the first special symbol lottery has a low jackpot expectation and the time saving state is difficult to end, while the second special symbol lottery has a high jackpot expectation, and The system is configured to suggest to the player a specification that makes it easier to end the time-saving state.

FIG. 197(a) is a diagram showing the display mode during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment. Here, even in the time saving state in the eighth embodiment, the same variation pattern effect as in the first embodiment and the seventh embodiment described above is mainly executed. That is, each time a special symbol lottery is executed, as part of a variable display performance (variable pattern performance) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, a performance in which the boy character 801 searches for a treasure box is performed. Then, if the lottery result is a small win (or a big win), an effect to discover a treasure box is executed, and a game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during the execution of a small win game, and after the small win ends, a jackpot ( When the start of the 2-type winning game is confirmed, an effect that successfully opens the treasure box 802 is executed, and an effect that a V display 803 appears indicating that a jackpot game is set from inside the treasure box 802 (FIG. 13) (a)) is executed.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 197(a), the first display area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds has a reserved symbol of the first special symbol and a reserved symbol of the second special symbol. A maximum of four items are displayed. FIG. 197(a) is a diagram showing a state in which three reserved balls of the first special symbol and zero reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed. The reserved balls of the first special symbol are displayed in an approximately circular shape on the upper side of the first display area Ds1, and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed in an approximately equilateral triangular shape on the lower side of the first display area Ds1. . This difference in shape allows the player to easily distinguish between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 197(a), in the center of the sub-display area Ds, an active symbol Dsa for indicating the type of special symbol in the variable display being executed is displayed. In addition, in the example of FIG. 197(a), a state in which a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, which has a substantially circular shape and has the characters "average" displayed inside it, is displayed (i.e., the symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed. This figure shows a state in which a special symbol lottery is being executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 197(a), in the second display area Ds2 formed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds, the words ``Right hit 'Normal' pending consumption'' are displayed. These display contents make it easier for the player to use up the reserved balls of the first special symbol by hitting right in the time-saving state (the lottery of the first special symbol is easier to use than the second special symbol). (The lottery is configured so that it is executed with priority over the lottery).

Further, as shown in FIG. 197(a), a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display region HR10 is formed at the upper center of the main display region Dm. Inside this display area HR10, the remaining number of time savings for the first special symbol and the remaining number of time savings for the second special symbol are displayed. The example of FIG. 197(a) illustrates a situation where the number of time saving times for the first special symbol is 94 remaining, and the number of drawings for the second special symbol is 4 remaining. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197(a), above the display area HR10, a reserved symbol (a roughly circular symbol with the word "average" displayed inside) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. ), the words "94 times left" are displayed on the right side of the image. In addition, in the center of the display area HR10, on the right side of an image imitating the reserved symbol (approximately equilateral triangular shape with the word "heat" displayed inside) corresponding to the second special symbol, a message "4 times remaining" is displayed. ' is displayed. Furthermore, below the display area HR10, the words "RUSH ends when either becomes 0!?" are displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the number of time reductions (time reduction end conditions) for each special symbol.

FIG. 197(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when a starting prize for the right second ball entrance 64b is first detected in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 197(b), when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 64b and the number of reserved balls with the second special symbol increases, the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds A second special symbol, a reserved symbol (a symbol approximately in the shape of an equilateral triangle and labeled with the word "heat"), is displayed. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the word "netsu" is commonly used as a type of character that suggests that the expectation of jackpot is high, so the word "average" displayed on the reserved symbol of the first special symbol. By comparing this with the word "Heat" displayed on the reserved symbol of the second special symbol, the player is intuitively informed that the lottery of the second special symbol has a higher chance of winning the jackpot. can be made to understand.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 197(b), if there is one or more reserved balls with the second special symbol, a message such as "Hit left and heat" is displayed in the second display area Ds2! ? ” will be added and displayed. This allows the player to select whether to use the reserved ball of the first special symbol or the reserved ball of the second special symbol depending on the firing direction. Therefore, since it is possible to have each player play a game using a gaming method that matches his/her preferences, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is compatible with the preferences of a wide range of players. Specifically, for example, for a player who would like to have a lottery with a second special symbol, which has high expectations, rather than a lottery with a first special symbol, which has a low expectation, A gaming method in which a starting prize for the ball mouth 64b is detected, and each time the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol increases, the left hit (or firing stop) is performed to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. It is possible to select a gaming method in which the time saving number is elapsed first. In addition, for players who wish to save the second special symbol lottery for later, which has high expectations, by continuing to hit right during the time saving state, the first special symbol lottery will be prioritized. A game method in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased while the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased. can be selected. In addition, for example, until just before the time saving number of the first special symbol ends (for example, until there is one time saving number of the first special symbol remaining), continue hitting right and give priority to the lottery of the first special symbol. After the first execution, the second special symbol lottery is executed four times, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for the fourth time. It is also possible to select a game method in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are increased as much as possible by right-handed hitting while the ball is being played, and a lottery based on the reserved balls is executed after the time saving ends. Furthermore, just before the time saving number of the second special symbol ends (for example, until there is only one time saving number of the first special symbol remaining), the second special symbol is drawn every time a starting prize of the second special symbol occurs. (i.e., left-handed stroke or firing stop), and right-handed stroke so that the lottery of the first special symbol is executed preferentially when the time saving number of the second special symbol is one time remaining. It is also possible to select a gaming method in which the time saving number of the first special symbol is elapsed by continuously executing the above. In this case, the second special symbol lottery is performed three times during the time-saving state, and the period from the end of the three second special symbol draws until the end of the time-saving number of the first special symbol. With the reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol that have been accumulated (there is a high possibility that it will accumulate up to 4, which is almost the upper limit), the lottery of the highly anticipated 2nd special symbol can be executed at least 7 times, so you can win the jackpot. You can increase your chances. In this way, it is possible to realize various gaming experiences with different jackpot expectations and period lengths depending on the player's playing method, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the present eighth embodiment, by making the display mode of the reserved symbol of the first special symbol different from the display mode of the reserved symbol of the second special symbol, the lottery of the second special symbol is better than the lottery of the second special symbol. 1 The structure was designed to make it easier for players to intuitively understand that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of a special symbol lottery (easier to win a small win). Depending on the look-ahead result, the display mode of the reserved symbols is varied to the extent that the player can grasp the type of the special symbol (whether it is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol or a reserved symbol of the second special symbol). It's okay. More specifically, for example, the color of the reserved symbols may be changed depending on the jackpot expectation level. That is, the configuration may be such that the color can be changed to white, blue, green, or red in order of decreasing jackpot expectation depending on the pre-reading result. As a result, not only the type of special symbol but also the color of the reserved symbol is taken into consideration, and by hitting right, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol, or by hitting left (or stopping firing), the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol. Since the player can select whether to perform a lottery based on the reserved balls, the range of gaming possibilities can be further expanded. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Furthermore, in addition to this, if a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot during the time saving state (a direct hit occurs), the gaming state after the jackpot will change at a predetermined rate (for example, 20%). It is configured so that it is set to the normal state (a jackpot with no time savings is determined), and as a pending symbol, the possibility of winning a jackpot with no time savings increases (it is more likely to be selected in the case of a jackpot with no time savings, and It is also possible to provide a special mode (for example, a pending symbol resembling a bomb) that is difficult to select in the case of a time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb), the second special symbol will be displayed before the starting prize corresponding to the reserved ball occurs. The player can be made to think that it would have been better if he had aimed for a jackpot by using up the reserved balls with special symbols. Therefore, in particular, for a player who has selected a gaming method in which he simply continues to hit the right ball continuously during the time saving state, in the next time saving state, there is a gaming method in which the reserved ball of the second special symbol is used first. It can also make you want to try it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the game. In addition, if the lottery result based on the reserved ball is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb) and the lottery result based on the held ball is announced as a mere loss, the game may be played even though no advantageous result has been announced. It is possible to realize novel gameplay that can make players feel at ease. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, when the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is changed to a special mode (a mode imitating a bomb), the lottery of the first special symbol (the lottery of the first special symbol) so that the reserved ball corresponding to the special mode is not consumed. 2) The player can aim to win the jackpot by executing the lottery which is executed with priority over the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the game method is different depending on the mode of the reserved symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198(a), the display mode after any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied (after the time saving number of times of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has elapsed) will be described. FIG. 198(a) is a diagram showing the display mode at the end of the time saving state. The example of FIG. 198(a) shows a case where the time saving state ends after the number of times of the second special symbol has elapsed. Furthermore, a state in which four reserved balls of the first special symbol and one reserved ball of the second special symbol are reserved at the end of the time saving is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 198(a), when the time saving state ends, the words "1 remaining" are displayed on the right side of the image imitating the reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the display area HR10. , the words "0 times remaining" are displayed on the right side of the image imitating the reserved symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Further, below the display area HR10, the words "RUSH end..." are displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended when the number of time saving times of the second special symbol becomes 0. Further, the characters "Right-handed" are erased in the small display area Ds2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to play right-handed even though the time-saving state has ended and it is unlikely that a starting winning will occur even if he or she hits right-handed, resulting in a loss to the player. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 198(a), at the end of the time saving state, a number indicating the number of reserved balls ("indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol") is displayed in the first display area Ds1 at the left end of the sub display area Ds. 4" and the second special symbol "1" indicating the number of reserved balls are displayed in a small size. That is, the reserved symbols are displayed in a simpler and less conspicuous manner than during the time saving state. In the second display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the words "RUSH END..." are displayed in a manner that is more conspicuous (larger) than the number of reserved pitches. This can give the player a stronger impression that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended. Note that the time saving end screen indicating that the time saving state (RUSH) has ended continues to be displayed until all the drawings based on the reserved balls that were held at the time the time saving state ended are completed. If you win a jackpot or a small hit with the reserved ball while this time saving end screen is displayed, a special performance (resurrection performance) is performed. This revival effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 198(b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 198(b), a display mode will be described in the case where a jackpot or small win occurs after the end of the time-saving state in a lottery based on the reserved balls that were on hold at the time the time-saving state ends. As shown in FIG. 198(b), if you win the jackpot while the time saving end screen is displayed, three symbols imitating the number "7" will break through the display area HR10 from the back side of the display area HR10. A relatively short (for example, 0.2 second) presentation (resurrection presentation) of the appearing appearance is performed. In addition, the words "BONUS confirmed!!" indicating that the player has won a jackpot or a small jackpot are displayed in the second display area Ds2. By executing this revival performance, it is possible to give greater surprise and joy to the player who thought that the time saving state has ended, thereby further improving the player's interest in the game. I can do it. The symbols displayed in this revival performance and the words "BONUS confirmed!!" are configured to continue to be displayed until the start of the jackpot or small win. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the fluctuation time is kept extremely short (0.1 seconds) from the end of the time saving state until at least all the reserved balls are consumed, regardless of the number of drawings. It is composed of This prevents the screen at the end of the revival performance (three "7" symbols and the words "BONUS confirmed!!") from continuing to be displayed for a long period of time, making the game redundant. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199, a description will be given of a change over time in the performance mode when there is a jackpot or a small win among the reserved balls that are reserved at the end of the time saving state. First, with reference to FIG. 199(a), a description will be given of a change over time in the production mode when a reserved ball corresponding to a small hit is reserved within 5 seconds after the last variable display in the time saving state is started. Here, this period of 5 seconds is the period until the character 801 discovers the treasure box 802 in the performance of searching for the treasure box 802. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, an effect is executed in which the contents of the discovered treasure box 802 are empty, and if it is a win (big hit or small hit), a V display 803 appears from the discovered treasure box 802. The performance is executed. That is, within 5 seconds (before opening the treasure box 802), the performance result is rewritten according to the contents of the reserved ball without any discomfort (even if the performance is set such that the contents of the treasure box 802 are empty at the start of the fluctuation) , the effect can be changed to one in which the V display 803 appears from inside the treasure box 802). In other words, in FIG. 199(a), after the performance corresponding to a miss is started, a reserved ball corresponding to a small hit is detected within a period during which the performance result can be rewritten (within 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation). It is a diagram showing changes over time in the presentation mode when the presentation is rewritten.

As shown in FIG. 199(a), when the last variable display in the time saving state (in the example of FIG. 199(a), the missing variable display of the second special symbol) starts, the boy's character An effect in which 801 searches for a treasure box 802 is executed. Since the time-saving state continues until this last fluctuation ends, the electric accessory 701 is opened when the player hits the right hand, and the game ball enters the first operating port 704 and the second operating port 702. In order to play the ball, the game ball can enter the right first ball entry port 64a2 and the right second ball entry port 64b. The example in FIG. 199(a) shows a case where starting winnings are detected three times before 5 seconds elapse, two are misses and one is a small win.

As shown in FIG. 199(a), if the last fluctuation display in the time saving state is a miss and a starting prize corresponding to a small win is detected within 5 seconds after the fluctuation starts, the character 801 will be displayed within 5 seconds. After performing the performance of searching for the treasure box 802, a performance in which a V display 803 appears from the treasure box 802 discovered by the character 801 is performed from 5 seconds to 10 seconds. The state in which this V display 803 is displayed continues until the fluctuation display corresponding to the small hit ends, and when the small winning fluctuation (and the stop display period of the small winning symbol) elapses, the opening of the small winning The performance begins. As mentioned above, the fluctuation display based on the held ball after the end of the time saving state is set to an ultra-short fluctuation of 0.1 seconds (fluctuation time 0.1 seconds, stop display time 0.1 seconds) regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, the period from the end of the last variable display in the time saving state to the start of the small win can be made extremely short (0.6 seconds in the example of FIG. 199(a)). Therefore, even if the display period of the V display 803 is extended (it continues to be displayed even after the last change in the time saving state ends), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, FIG. 199(b) is a diagram showing a change over time in the performance mode when a reserved ball that becomes a small hit is detected after 5 seconds have elapsed since the last variable display was started in the time saving state. In the example of FIG. 199(b), after the ball corresponding to the miss of the first special symbol is reserved within 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the ball corresponding to the small hit of the second special symbol is reserved after 5 seconds have elapsed. This example shows a case where a ball is held. As shown in FIG. 199(b), if a small win occurs after 5 seconds have elapsed, the character 801 performs a search for the treasure box 802 for 5 seconds during the 10 seconds of fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation, and then , the effect that the contents of the discovered treasure box 802 are empty is executed for 4 seconds, and the display mode is switched to the time saving end display (see FIG. 198(a)) after 9 seconds have passed after the start of the variation. The time saving end display continues for 1 second until 10 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, which is the end timing of the fluctuation, and a revival effect (see FIG. 198(b)) is executed after the fluctuation stops. When three symbols imitating the same number indicating a win (big win or small win) are displayed by this revival performance, the symbol display is maintained until the start timing of the small win. In this way, when a hit (big hit or small hit) pending ball is detected after the performance for checking the contents of the treasure box 802 has started, the hit is notified by a revival performance without forcibly rewriting the performance mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the performance, and at the same time to make the player feel great joy at winning. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 200(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 200(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment in that a general map type selection table 202af is added. There is. Another difference is that the stipulated contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, and the time saving grant table 202e have been partially changed.

First, with reference to FIGS. 200(b) and 200(c), the stipulated contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment will be explained. Although illustration is omitted, the first winning random number table 202a in the eighth embodiment is similar to the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 21(a)) in the first embodiment and the seventh embodiment. Two types are defined: a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for use in the lottery of the 1st special symbol, and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for use in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol. First, with reference to FIG. 200(b), the stipulated contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 200(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment. This special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is similar to the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 184(a)) in the seventh embodiment described above, and the random number value ( (judgment value) is specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 200(b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment includes the counter value (random value) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot. As a range, "0 to 3" are defined in correspondence. Therefore, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is any value from "0 to 3", it is determined to be a jackpot, but if any value from "0 to 3" If it is not (any value from 4 to 999), it is determined to be out of order. Among the 1000 counter values (random values) of "0 to 999" that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, there are 4 counter values (random values) of "0 to 3" that are determined to be a jackpot. , the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is 1/250 (4/1000). Further, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 in the eighth embodiment does not specify a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the probability that the lottery of the first special symbol is determined to be a small hit (winning the small win) is 0. Therefore, since the first special symbol lottery is configured so that only a direct hit can occur (V hits based on small winnings cannot occur), the jackpot expectation level is higher than the second special symbol lottery. lower in comparison.

Next, details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 200(c). This special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is similar to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 184(b)) in the seventh embodiment, in which random numbers are determined to be large hits and small wins in the second special symbol lottery. A numerical value (judgment value) is specified. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 200(c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the eighth embodiment includes "0 to 3" as the range of the counter value (random value) that is determined to be a jackpot. ” are defined in association with each other, and “4 to 230” are defined in association with each other as the range of the counter value (random value) that is determined to be a small win. Among the 1000 counter values (random values) of “0 to 999” that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, there are four counter values (random values) of “0 to 3” that are determined to be a jackpot, Since the counter value (random value) that is determined to be a small hit is 226 from 4 to 230, the probability that the lottery of the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit is 1/250 (4/1000), The probability of being determined to be a small hit is 1/4.4 (226/1000). In addition, in the eighth embodiment, similarly to the seventh embodiment, when a small win is won, about 10 game balls can be sent to the V winning device 6500 by simply continuing to shoot the game balls aiming at the V winning device 6500. Therefore, winning a small hit is almost the same as winning a jackpot. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there will be a direct hit with a probability of 1/250, and a small win will occur with a probability of 1/4.4, and a V hit will almost certainly occur. The expectation level of jackpot is greatly increased compared to the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect to win the jackpot.

Next, details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 201(a). This first winning type selection table 202b, like the first winning type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment, is a data table that is referred to in order to specify (determine) the jackpot type when winning a jackpot. FIG. 200(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this first winning type selection table 202b.

As shown in FIG. 200(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment includes cases where a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol (a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs). A first hit table 202bf1 for specifying (determining) the type of jackpot, and a table 202bf1 for specifying (determining) the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol (a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs). 2nd hit table 202bf2 for determining (determining) and identifying (determining) the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot (V winning occurs) based on the fact that a V winning occurs during the execution of a small winning game A V hit table 202bf3 is defined for this purpose. First, details of the special first shift table 202bf1 will be described with reference to FIG. 200(b).

FIG. 201(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special first shift table 202bf1. As shown in FIG. 201(b), in the eighth embodiment, the jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot occurs in the first special symbol lottery (a direct hit of the first special symbol occurs) is “ There are two types of jackpots: "Jackpot A8" and "Jackpot B8." "Jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and when winning in the normal state, a time saving state is given after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, "Jackpot B8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and when winning in the normal state, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal state, "Jackpot A8" is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot B8" because the gaming state after the jackpot is more advantageous. In addition, in the time saving state, no matter which jackpot is won, the advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. This makes it possible to prevent players from being disappointed by shifting to a disadvantageous normal state even if they win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery with low jackpot expectations in a time-saving state. Therefore, the player's interest in playing the game can be further improved.

Next, details of the special second shift table 202bf2 will be described with reference to FIG. 201(c). FIG. 201(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special second shift table 202bf2. As shown in FIG. 201(c), in the eighth embodiment, the jackpot type that can be determined when a jackpot occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol (a direct hit of the second special symbol occurs) is Only "Jackpot C8" is provided ("Jackpot C8" is associated with all the values of the first winning type counter C2). “Jackpot C8” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 15, and when winning in the normal state, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, if a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery in the normal state, there is no possibility of shifting to the advantageous time-saving state, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method that aims to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by right-handed hitting during normal times. It should be noted that if the jackpot C7 is won in the time saving state, the advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed by shifting to a disadvantageous normal state even if he or she wins a direct win with a low probability in the time saving state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. can be further improved.

Next, details of the V hit table 202bf3 will be described with reference to FIG. 201(d). As described above, this V winning table 202bf3 is used to specify (select) the type of jackpot to be executed based on the occurrence of a V winning in a small winning game (the game ball has passed the V winning switch 6500e3). This is a data table in which the data of FIG. 201(d) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this V hit table 202bf3. As shown in FIG. 201(d), the V winning table 202bf3 defines three jackpot types: "Jackpot D8," "Jackpot E8," and "Jackpot F8."

As shown in FIG. 201(d), a "big win D8" is defined in association with the value range of the first win type counter C2 being "0 to 39". This "jackpot D8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 15, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. This "jackpot D8" has the largest number of rounds among all the jackpot types, and the gaming state after the jackpot is also advantageous, so it is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot D8" is 40, so The probability (ratio) that "Jackpot D8" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during execution of a small winning game is 40/100 (40%).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 201(d), a "jackpot E8" is defined in association with the range of "40 to 59" where the first win type counter C2 hits. This "Jackpot E8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. This "jackpot E8" has the second largest number of rounds after the "jackpot D8" and the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous, so it is the next most advantageous jackpot type after the "jackpot D8". Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot E8" is 20, so The probability (ratio) that "Jackpot E8" is determined (selected) as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during execution of a small winning game is 20/100 (20%).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 201(d), a "jackpot F8" is defined in association with the range of "60 to 99" for the first win type counter C2. This "Jackpot F8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. That is, it is a type of jackpot that is disadvantageous in terms of the number of rounds than "jackpot D8" and "jackpot E8", but is equivalent in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot F8" is 40, so The probability (ratio) that "Jackpot F8" will be determined (selected) as the type of jackpot to be started when a V win occurs during execution of a small winning game is 40/100 (40%).

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V hit occurs, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot ends, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. It is said that In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the system is configured to win a small win (=V win) with an extremely high probability compared to a direct win of 1/4.4. Therefore, in the time saving state (and while the reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulated during the time saving state after transitioning to the normal state are being used up), the time saving state is activated every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is possible to increase the expectation that the reward will be awarded again, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the time saving grant table 202e in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 202(a). FIG. 202(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this time-saving provision table 202e. As shown in FIG. 202(a), for the "jackpot A8" won in the normal state, the number of times the first special symbol is applied to save time (the special time saver medium counter for indicating the number of times to save the first special symbol) 203k1 value) and "4 times" as the number of time saving times of the second special symbol (the value of the special 2 time saving medium counter 203k2 for indicating the number of time saving times of the second special symbol). has been done. Furthermore, the same number of times of time saving is provided is also specified for the "jackpot A8" won in the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of winning "Jackpot A8", a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 202(a), for the "jackpot B8" won in the normal state, "0 times" is associated with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the time saving number of times. On the other hand, for "Jackpot B8" won in a time-saving state, the number of time-saving grants for the first special symbol is "96 times" and the number of time-saving grants for the second special symbol is "4 times". It is specified as follows. For this reason, if a direct hit with the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and a "jackpot B8" is determined, the game shifts to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, while a direct hit with the first special symbol occurs in the time saving state. When it occurs and the "jackpot B8" is determined, the game shifts to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Similarly, regarding "Jackpot C8", for "Jackpot C8" won in the normal state, "0" is specified as the time saving number of times for both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. On the other hand, for "Jackpot C8" won in the time-saving state, "96 times" is associated as the number of time-saving grants for the first special symbol, and "4 times" as the number of time-saving grants for the second special symbol. It is stipulated that For this reason, if a direct hit with the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and a "jackpot C8" is determined, the game shifts to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, while a direct hit with the first special symbol occurs in the time saving state. When a jackpot C8 occurs and a jackpot C8 is determined, the game shifts to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 202(a), for "Jackpot D8" to "Jackpot F8", regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the time saving number of the first special symbol is "96", 2. "4 times" is defined as the number of time-saving grants for the special symbol. Therefore, if you win a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state and the pending expiry after the end of the time saving state and a V hit occurs, the time saving state will always be granted after the end of the V winning. Ru. Therefore, when the lottery of the second special symbol with a high small hit probability (1/4.4) is executed, not only can the player's expectation level of winning V be increased, but also the time can be shortened. You can also increase your expectations. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202(b), details of the per ordinary figure type selection table 202fa will be explained. This normal symbol hit type selection table 202fa is a data table that is referred to in order to specify (determine) the winning type when a normal symbol wins. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this ordinary figure type selection table 202fa. As shown in FIG. 202(b), two types of normal pattern types are defined in the normal pattern type selection table 202fa in the eighth embodiment. Specifically, two types of winnings are defined: "A8 per normal pattern" and "B8 per common pattern." "A8 per ordinary symbol" is a winning pattern in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, an opening pattern is set in which the electric accessory 701 is released only once for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the ordinary symbol, while When winning in the time-saving state of the symbol, the opening pattern A (see FIG. 171) is set as the normal symbol winning type. As mentioned above, the switching valve 702 is fixed in the first switching state in which the ball flows down into the first channel 703 for 1.4 seconds after the start of the normal symbol, so that the normal symbol does not hit in the normal state. , and if you win "A", it will be difficult to let the game ball enter the sorting device 700 during the 0.2 second opening period, and Even if a game ball enters the ball, the entered game ball enters the first operation port 704 and the right first ball entry port 64a2 is opened. Therefore, even if you play an irregular game method in which you normally hit the game ball with your right hand and fire the game ball at the sorting device 700, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the sorting device 700, and even if the ball does enter the sorting device 700, Also, since only the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed, the advantage of irregular gaming methods can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods in which the player plays right-handed during the normal state. On the other hand, as described above in the description of the sixth embodiment, when the opening pattern A is set, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the distribution device 700, and the game balls that enter the distribution device 700 are almost always in the first action. The ball enters the mouth 704.

In addition, when "B8 per ordinary symbol" is won in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, an opening pattern is set in which the electric accessory 701 is released only once for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the ordinary symbol. , is a normal symbol winning type in which the opening pattern B (see FIG. 171) is set when winning in the time saving state of the normal symbol. For this reason, in the normal state, if you win "B8 for a regular map", it is difficult for the ball to enter the sorting device 700, as in the case of "A8 for a regular map", and even if the ball enters, it will almost always be in the first operating port. An open pattern in which a game ball enters only 704 is set. On the other hand, if you win "B8 per normal map" in the time saving state, the game ball will easily enter the sorting device 700, and the entered game ball will almost always enter the second operating port 707. Since the ball is thrown, the right second ball entrance 64b, which is an opportunity to draw a second special symbol which is advantageous (that is, has a high expectation of jackpot), is opened. Therefore, it can be said that "B8 per standard pattern" is a more advantageous type of standard pattern per hit than "A8 per standard pattern".

As shown in FIG. 202(b), when the value of the second winning type counter C6 for determining the type per ordinary pattern is in the range of "0 to 79", the type per ordinary pattern is "A8 per ordinary pattern". ” are defined in association with each other. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the second winning type counter C6 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "A8 per common map" is "0". 79'', so the probability that ``A8 per ordinary symbol'' will be determined when the ordinary symbol is a hit is 4/5 (80/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 202(b), for the value of the second winning type counter C6 in the range of "80 to 99", "B8 per normal pattern" is defined in association as the type per normal pattern. ing. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the second win type counter C6 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are associated with "normal pattern hit B8" is 20 from "80 to 99". Therefore, when the normal symbol hits, the probability that "B8 per normal symbol" is determined is 1/5 (20/100).

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, when a normal symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state and a winning result occurs, the "normal symbol winning A8" is determined, in which the first right ball entrance 64a2 is likely to be opened at a rate of 80%. (selected), and "B8 per normal map" is determined (selected) in which the second right ball entry port 64b is likely to be opened at a rate of 20%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more preferentially execute the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a large number of times of time saving and is drawn preferentially, so that the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a large number of times of time saving and is executed preferentially, can be performed more preferentially, so the first special symbol can be drawn immediately after the start of the time saving state. Only the second special symbol lottery is executed, and even though the player wishes to first perform the first special symbol lottery and then execute the second special symbol lottery in the second half, It is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending in a relatively short period. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the convenience for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, a method of transitioning between each state in the eighth embodiment will be described. Here, in the eighth embodiment, two game states are provided, similar to the seventh embodiment. That is, two types of game states are provided: a normal game state (normal state) in which a normal state of normal symbols is set, and a time-saving game state (time-saving state) in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is set. In addition, in the normal game state, the degree of advantage seems to be greatly different between the normal game state where there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the time saving state, and the normal game state where there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol. It is composed of In other words, if there is even one reserved ball with the second special symbol, there is a probability of 1/4.4 that it will be a small hit and win a V hit, and after the V hit ends, the time saving state will be set again. This creates an extremely advantageous situation compared to the case where there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol. In the following explanation, to simplify the explanation, the normal game state in which there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol will be referred to as the "normal mode", and the time-saving game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, The normal game state in which there are held balls of the second special symbol are referred to as "chance mode A" and "chance mode B", respectively, in the sense that the expectation of a jackpot is high.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 203, a method of transitioning from the normal mode (normal game state where there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 203, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode only when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot (direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of Fig. 203, when it comes to "Jackpot A8", which wins at a 50% rate when the first special symbol is a jackpot, the mode after the jackpot is advantageous. Chance mode A (time-saving gaming state) is set. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a jackpot in the lottery, if the jackpot is won at a 50% rate (Jackpot B8), the mode after the jackpot is set again to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. (Loop normal mode). Therefore, in the normal mode, the player can play the game with the expectation of winning "Jackpot A8" in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to the center part of FIG. 203, a method of transitioning from chance mode A (time-saving gaming state) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the center part of FIG. 203, there is a possibility of transitioning from chance mode A to another mode only when the number of time saving times has elapsed. More specifically, when the number of times of time saving has elapsed (after entering the time saving gaming state, the lottery of the first special symbol has been completed 96 times, or the lottery of the second special symbol has been completed 4 times), the second If there is a reserved ball with a special design, the game shifts to chance mode B. On the other hand, if the reserved ball of the second special symbol does not exist when the time saving number has elapsed, the game shifts to the normal mode which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in chance mode A, if there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the number of time reductions has elapsed, for example, when four reserved balls of the second special symbol have been accumulated, hit left (or stop firing). During the fourth fluctuating display of the second special symbol (i.e., the last fluctuating display in the time-saving state), he tried to collect the reserved balls of the second special symbol by hitting the right hand, but "A8 per normal symbol" This is a case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not increase due to the unbalanced winning. In addition, as another case, for example, immediately after the transition to chance mode A, "B8 per common symbol" is won consecutively, and the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed and the lottery of the second special symbol is 4. For example, if the command is executed several times in a row.

On the other hand, as shown in the center part of FIG. 203, if a direct win or a V win based on a small win occurs in chance mode A, the mode after the jackpot is always available to the player, regardless of the type of jackpot. The advantageous chance mode A is set. This makes it possible for the player to be happy when he or she wins a direct hit or a small hit in the special symbol lottery in chance mode A.

Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 203, a method of transitioning from chance mode B (normal game state in which reserved balls of the second special symbol are present) to other modes will be described. As shown in the lower part of Figure 203, chance mode B can be changed to other states (modes) not only when winning a jackpot but also when all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are used up. transition to. Specifically, as shown in Figure 203, when a direct hit occurs and the jackpot type of the direct hit is "Jackpot A8" determined by 50% of the hit rate of the first special symbol. After the jackpot ends, the game shifts to chance mode A, which is advantageous to the player. Further, even when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V win is won, the game shifts to chance mode A which is advantageous to the player after the big win ends.

On the other hand, "Jackpot B8" is determined at a rate of 50% when a direct hit occurs with the first special symbol, and at a rate of 100% when a direct hit occurs with the second special symbol. If either "Jackpot C8" is won and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot is 0, the state (mode) after the jackpot is set to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player. . In addition, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol have been used up (all the lottery of the second special symbol after shifting to chance mode B have been lost), the mode also shifts to the normal mode. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not 0 (1 or more) at the end of "Jackpot B8" or "Jackpot C8", the state (mode) after the jackpot is again chance mode. It becomes B.

In this manner, in the eighth embodiment, the game is configured to switch back and forth between three types of states in response to a jackpot or the like, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 204 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 204, the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 26(b)) with the final fluctuation flag 223fa. The difference is that a final effect setting flag 223fb and a winning effect flag 223fc are added.

The final change flag 223fa is a flag indicating whether or not the last change display in the time saving state is being executed. If the final variation flag 223fa is on, it indicates that the last variation display in the time saving state is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the last variation display in the time saving state is not being executed. This final fluctuation flag 223fa is set to ON when the last fluctuation in the time saving state starts, and is turned OFF when the time saving number reaches 0 (that is, when the last fluctuation display in the time saving state ends). is set (see S2622 in FIG. 213).

The final performance setting flag 223fb indicates whether the type of performance after finding the treasure chest 802 (the performance mode after 5 seconds have passed after the start of the fluctuation) has already been set in the final variation display in the time saving state. It's a flag. If this final effect setting completed flag 223fb is on, it means that the effect type has been determined, and if it is off, it means that the effect type has not been determined. If a hit pending ball is detected during the execution of the final fluctuation (a starting winning of a jackpot or small hit is detected), depending on the state of this final effect setting flag 223fb and the state of the winning effect flag 223fc, which will be described later. , it is determined whether or not to notify a win based on the resurrection effect (see FIG. 198(b)).

The winning effect flag 223fc is the effect mode of the last variable effect in the time saving state, which indicates a effect indicating a win (that is, a mode in which the V display 803 appears from the treasure box 802) or a revival effect (see FIG. 198(b)). This is a flag to indicate whether or not it has been set. If this winning performance flag 223fc is on, it means that a performance mode indicating a win or a revival performance is being executed, and if it is off, it means that a production mode indicating a loss is being executed or the last one in a time saving state. This means that variable display is not in progress. This winning performance flag 223fc is set to ON when a performance mode indicating a win is set (see S3516 in FIG. 209) or when the start of a revival performance is set (see S2326 in FIG. 211), and is set to the time saving state (and This is set to OFF when the presentation mode (on hold) ends.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 205 to 207. First, special symbol variation processing 8 (S131 in FIG. 205) in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 205. This special symbol variation process 8 (S131) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188, S121) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 188), this is a process for setting variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b.

Of the separate symbol variation processing 8 (S131) in the eighth embodiment, each of the processing in S201, S202, S206 to S218, S220, S231 to S235 and S238 is performed in the special symbol variation processing 7 in the seventh embodiment (Fig. 188, S121)) are executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation process 8 (S131) in the eighth embodiment, the order of the process of S206 and the process of S232 is switched. That is, the configuration is such that the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter b (N1) is first determined by the process of S206, and only when the value is 0 (S206: No), the process of S232 is executed. There is. In other words, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1 or more, the lottery of the second special symbol does not start (the lottery of the first special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the second special symbol). Specifications) are adopted.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 205) in the eighth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S213 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S213: No), The time saving number update process 8 is executed (S241), and the process moves to S220. The details of this time saving number update process 8 (S241) will be explained with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing this time saving number update process 8 (S241).

This time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) is a process for updating the time saving number of normal symbols, similar to the time saving number updating process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 42, S219). In the eighth embodiment, as the time saving medium counter 203k, there is a special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 for indicating the number of time saving times of the first special symbol, and a special 2 time saving medium counter 203k1 for indicating the time saving frequency of the second special symbol. A middle counter 203k2 is provided. In the time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) in the eighth embodiment, the value of the corresponding time saving medium counter is updated according to the type of special symbol.

Of the time saving number update process 8 (S241) in the eighth embodiment, the processes in S601, S604 and S607 are respectively similar to the steps S601, S604 and S607 in the time saving number update process (see FIG. 42, S219) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing is executed. Further, when the time saving number update process 8 (S241) in the eighth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611). In the process of S611, if it is determined that the current time is the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 is greater than 0 or not. (S612). In the process of S612, if it is determined that the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 is 0 (S612: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S612, if it is determined that the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 is not 0 (S612: Yes), the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 is subtracted by 1 (S613), and after the subtraction A remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the special 1 time reduction medium counter 203k1 is set (S614), and the process moves to S604.

On the other hand, in the process of S611, if it is determined that the current timing is not the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (S611: No), this means that the current fluctuation stop is the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. Next, it is determined whether the value of the special 2 time saving medium counter 203k2 is greater than 0 (S615). In the process of S615, if it is determined that the value of the special 2 time saving medium counter 203k2 is 0 (S615: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S615, if it is determined that the value of the special 2 time saving medium counter 203k2 is not 0 (S615: Yes), the value of the special 2 time saving medium counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S616), and after the update A remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the special 2 time reduction medium counter 203k2 is set (S617), and the process proceeds to S604.

In addition, in the time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206) in the eighth embodiment, the value of the time saving medium counter 203k becomes 0 in the process of S604 (that is, the value of the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1, or If it is determined that the value of the special 2 time saving middle counter 203k2 has become 0 (S604: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S618), and the special 1 time saving medium counter 203k1 and the special 2 time saving The value of the middle counter 203k2 is set to 0 (S619), and the process moves to S607.

By executing this time saving number update process 8 (see FIG. 206), the time saving number of the first special symbol and the time saving number of the second special symbol are updated accurately according to the type of the special symbol whose fluctuation has been stopped. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, normal symbol variation processing 8 (S132) executed in the eighth embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process 8 (S132) is a process that is executed in place of the normal symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 190, S122) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process that is executed in place of the normal symbol variation process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 190), this is a process for controlling the variable display and variable time of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83, the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 701 in the sorting device 700, etc.

Of the normal symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, the normal symbol variation in the seventh embodiment is The same processes as S901, S902, S906 to S910, S912 to 915, S920, and S931 to S938 of process 7 (see S122 in FIG. 190) are executed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 207) in the eighth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S915 that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S915: Yes), then the normal symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 207) The opening pattern corresponding to the current gaming state is specified with reference to the per-figure type selection table 202fa (see FIG. 202(b)) (S941), and the process moves to S920.

By executing this normal symbol variation process 8 (see Figure 207), when a normal symbol hits, A8 per regular symbol is determined at a rate of 80%, and B8 is determined per regular symbol at a 20% rate. Since the ball can be determined, the first right ball entry port 64a2 can be configured to be opened more easily than the second right ball entry port 64b when the ball is hit to the right in the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a low expectation of a substantial jackpot, so that the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high expectation, is more likely to be executed in the second half of the time-saving state. Can be configured. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts shown in FIGS. 208 to 214. First, with reference to FIG. 208, main processing 8 (FIG. 208) in the eighth embodiment will be described. This main process 8 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 55) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment).

In the main process 8 (see FIG. 208) in the eighth embodiment, the effect is updated instead of the effect update process (S2112) with respect to the main process (see FIG. 55) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). Process 8 (S2121) is executed, command judgment process 8 (S2122) is executed instead of command judgment process (S2113), and variable display setting process 8 (S2123) is executed instead of variable display setting process (S2114). The only difference is that it is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 209, details of the above-mentioned effect update processing 8 (S2121) will be explained.

FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 8 (S2121). This effect update process 8 (S2121) is a process executed in the main process 8 (see FIG. 208) in place of the effect update process (see S2112) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for updating the performance mode according to the progress status of the variable pattern performance (variable display performance).

In this performance update processing 8 (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the final variation flag 223fa is on (S3511), and if it is determined that the final variation flag 223fa is off (S3511: No), it is left as is. This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the final variation flag 223fa is on (S3511: Yes), it means that the final variation display in the time saving state is being executed, so next, the final effect set flag 223fb is on. (In the last variable display in the time saving state, the type of performance after finding the treasure box 802 has been determined) (S3512). In the process of S3512, if it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is off (the last effect in the time saving state has not been determined) (S3512: No), then the current value is 5 from the start of the current variation. It is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed (S3513). In the process of S3513, if it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the current fluctuation (S3513: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a big win or a small win in the hold ( S3514). If it is determined that there is a big win or a small win in the hold (S3514: Yes), the start of the effect in which V appears from the treasure box is set (S3515), the win effect flag 223fc is set to on (S3516), The process moves to S3519.

On the other hand, in the process of S3514, if it is determined that there is no jackpot or small win in the pending state (S3514: No), the start of the effect with the treasure box empty is set (S3517), and the winning effect flag 223fc is turned off. The settings are made (S3518), and the process moves to S3519. In the process of S3519, the final effect setting flag 223fb is set to ON (S3519), and this process ends.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S3512 that the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S3512: Yes), and in the process of S3513, the current time is not the timing when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the current variation. If it is determined that (S3513: No), there is no need to determine the performance mode in the last variable display in the time saving state, and thus the process is directly ended.

By executing this performance update process 8 (see FIG. 209), the results of the pre-reading of reserved balls accumulated during the period from the start of the last variable display in the time-saving state to the elapse of 5 seconds are taken into consideration, and the time-saving It is possible to set the effect mode to be executed during the variation time in the last variation display in the state (and the variation display based on the held ball).

Next, command determination processing 8 (S2122) executed in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 210. This command determination process 8 (S2122) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 56), this is a process for performing control according to various commands received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process 8 (S2122) in the eighth embodiment, the command determination process (see FIG. 56) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment) described above is replaced with the winning information related process (S2210). to execute the winning information related process 8 (S2231), to execute the stop command process (S2232) in place of the process in S2214 that sets the stop display of the third symbol, and to save time in place of the time-saving update process (S2216). The only difference is that update processing 8 (S2233) is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 211, the winning information related process 8 (S2231) described above will be explained. This winning information related process 8 (S2231) is notified by the winning information command received from the main controller 110, similar to the winning information related process (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for executing control according to the prefetch results.

Of the winning information related processing 8 (S2231) in the eighth embodiment, each of the processing in S2311 and S2312 is similar to the winning information related processing (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those in S2311 and S2312 are executed. In the winning information related process 8 (S2231) in the eighth embodiment, first, it is determined whether the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S2321), and if the final effect setting flag 223fb is off. If it is determined that (S2321: No), the process moves to S2312. On the other hand, in the process of S2321, if it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S2321: Yes), then check whether the winning effect flag 203fc is on (i.e., the last variation display in the time saving state (S2322). In the process of S2322, if it is determined that the winning effect flag 203fc is on (S2322: Yes), the process moves to S2312.

On the other hand, in the process of S2322, if it is determined that the winning effect flag 203fc is off (S2322: No), then the received winning information is determined according to the lottery result after the fast consumption period (i.e., after the time saving state ends) First, it is determined whether the winning information is to be consumed within a period in which a variable time of 0.1 seconds is set (S2323). In the process of S2323, if it is determined that the received winning information is not the winning information that will be consumed within the fast consumption period (S2323: No), the process moves to S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information is winning information that will be consumed within the fast consumption period (S2323: Yes), next, check whether the received winning information is winning information that corresponds to a jackpot or a small win. If it is determined that the received winning information is not winning information for a jackpot or small winning (S2324: No), the process moves to S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received prize information corresponds to a jackpot or a small win (S2324: Yes), the execution of a revival effect (see FIG. 198(b)) is set (S2325), and the winning effect is set to be executed (S2325). The flag 223fc is set on (S2326), and the process moves to S2311. In addition, in the process of S2325, if the final change in the time saving state is being executed, the revival effect is set to start based on the end of the final change, but if it is after the final change in the time saving state has ended, the revival effect is set to start. , set the revival effect to start immediately.

By executing this winning information related process 8 (see FIG. 211), when winning information corresponding to a jackpot or small win is detected after setting the final effect of losing, the resurrection effect allows the player to feel comfortable. Since the jackpot or small win can be notified by using the above, it is possible to set the performance mode more suitably.

Next, details of the above-described stop command processing (S2232) will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing this stop command processing (S2232). This stop command process (S2232) is one of the command determination processes 8, and is a process for performing control according to the stop command received from the main control device 110.

In this stop command processing (see FIG. 212), first, it is determined whether or not the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S9001), and if it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223fb is off (S9001). :No), the process moves to S9007. On the other hand, in the process of S9001, if it is determined that the final effect setting flag 223fb is on (S9001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning effect flag 223fc is on (S9002). In the process of S9002, if it is determined that the winning effect flag 223fc is on (S9002: Yes), then it is determined whether the stop command received this time is a stop command corresponding to a winning or small winning symbol. (S9004) If it is determined that the stop command is not a stop command corresponding to a winning or small winning symbol (it is a stop command corresponding to a miss) (S9004: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop command corresponding to a winning or small winning symbol has been received (S9004: Yes), the process moves to S9005.

In the process of S9005, the end of the final performance is set (S9005), the final performance set flag 223fb and the winning performance flag 223fc are set to OFF (S9006), and the process moves to S9007.

On the other hand, in the process of S9002, if it is determined that the winning effect flag 223fc is off (S9002: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (S9003). If it is determined that the number of reserved pitches is 1 or more (S9003: Yes), this process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (S9003: No), each process of S9005 and S9006 is executed, and the process moves to the process of S9007. In the process of S9007, the stop display of the third symbol corresponding to the received stop command is set (S9007), and this process ends.

Next, details of the time saving update process (S2233) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing this time saving update process 8 (S2233). As described above, this time-saving update process 8 (S2233) is included in the time-saving update process (see FIG. 60) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment) in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 210, S2122). This is a process that is executed instead, and similarly to the time saving update process in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 60), the number of time reductions grasped in the audio lamp control device 113 is compared to the actual number of time reductions. This is a process for updating in sync with.

In this time saving update process 8 (see FIG. 213), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating that the number of time saving times has become 0 (S2621). In the process of S2621, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating that the number of time saving times has become 0 (S2621: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the last fluctuation display in the time saving state. Therefore, the final change flag 223fa is set to OFF (S2622), and the process moves to S2623. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating that the time reduction count has become 0 (S2621: No), the process of S2622 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2623.

In the process of S2623, the data in the time-saving information update area 223g and the display setting of the number of time-savings are updated according to the notified time-saving related information (S2623), and this process ends. By executing this time saving update process 8 (see FIG. 213), it is possible to match the actual number of time reductions with the number of time reductions grasped by the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, details of the effect setting process 8 (S2821) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 214. Here, this effect setting process 8 is executed in place of the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment) in the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) in the eighth embodiment. This is the process to be performed. The difference between the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) in the eighth embodiment and the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62) in the seventh embodiment is that this effect setting process 8 (S2821) is executed. Since only the points are shown, the illustration of the variable display setting process 8 (S2123) is omitted.

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing this effect setting process 8 (S2821). This effect setting process 8 (S2821) is similar to the effect setting process (see FIG. 63) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment), in which the effect is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) notified by the variation pattern command. This is a process for determining (setting) a detailed variation display mode.

In this effect setting process 8 (S2821), first, it is determined whether or not the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S2911). In the process of S2911, if it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is off (S2911: No), the effect mode of the variable pattern effect according to the lottery result is set (S2912), and then this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S2911, if it is determined that the final effect set flag 223fb is on (S2911: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning effect flag 223fc is on (S2913). In the process of S2913, if it is determined that the winning effect flag 223fc is on (S2913: Yes), the process moves to S2917.

On the other hand, in the process of S2913, if it is determined that the win effect flag 223fc is off (S2913: No), then it is determined whether the data in the winning information storage area 223a includes a win or a small win. (S2914) If it is determined that the data in the winning information storage area 223a does not include a win or a small win (S2914: No), the process moves to S2917. In the process of S2917, the display continuation of the display mode at the time of the start of variation is set (S2917), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2914, if it is determined that the data in the winning information storage area 223a includes a win or a small win (S2914: Yes), the start of the revival effect (see FIG. 198(b)) is set ( S2915), the winning effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S2916), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the lottery conditions for the first special symbol (start-up win) and the lottery conditions for the second special symbol (start-up win) are set in the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. After configuring the system so that both of the following can be realized, the lottery using the second special symbol is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the lottery using the first special symbol (the possibility of winning a jackpot is actually higher). ). By selecting the first gaming method (the gaming method in which the player continues to play right-handed), it becomes easier to draw the first special symbol, while a second gaming method different from the first gaming method is selected. By selecting a game method (a game method in which the game ball is hit to the left or stops firing every time the game ball enters the second ball entry port 64b on the right), the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to arbitrarily select the timing for executing the lottery of the second special symbol with high expectation of jackpot. As a result, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that suits each player's taste, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is configured to provide a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state (a state advantageous to the player), so that the second special symbol lottery is more effective than when the first special symbol lottery is executed. The configuration is such that the time saving state is more easily terminated when a symbol lottery is executed. More specifically, the number of drawings at which the time saving state is ended (the number of time saving times) is configured to be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of times the time saving state is ended is different (96 times) than the number of time saving times (96 times) of the first special symbol. It is configured so that the number of time saving times (4 times) of the second special symbol is smaller. With this configuration, if the gaming method continues to preferentially execute the lottery of the second special symbol which is advantageous (that is, has a high expectation of jackpot), the lottery of the first special symbol will be executed preferentially. Since there is a higher possibility that the time saving state will end in a shorter period than when One of the player's options can be a gaming method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed after the second special symbol is executed. On the other hand, for players who want to know the result of the time-saving state (whether it will be a jackpot or whether the time-saving state will end) in a relatively short period of time, the number of times the first special symbol will save time will be a loss. Knowing this, it is possible to select a gaming method that preferentially executes the lottery of the second special symbol. In this way, it is possible to realize a game with a high degree of freedom in which each player can select the timing of drawing the second special symbol according to his/her preference, thereby further improving the player's interest in the game. can be done.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, control is performed so that the lottery of the first special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the second special symbol (the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol When there are reserved balls, the reserved balls with the first special symbol are preferentially moved to the execution area and used for the lottery. With this configuration, by simply practicing a relatively simple game method of continuously hitting the right hand during the time-saving state, the first special symbol can be drawn as many times as the number of times the first special symbol has been shortened. At the same time, the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored. Then, when the time saving number of the first special symbol reaches 0, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the upper limit of 4, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol of the upper limit is accumulated. 2. A lottery with special symbols (that is, a lottery with a high expectation of jackpot) can be executed. In other words, from the start of the time saving state until the first condition is met (until the time saving number of the first special symbol is exhausted), the jackpot expectation level is low, and after the first condition is met, Until the second condition is satisfied (until there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol), it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which the expectation of a jackpot is high.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a specific jackpot (for example, a variable probability jackpot) is won, after the jackpot ends, the first gaming state (for example, variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player is first drawn a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine is known in which a second gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set if a jackpot is not won within the predetermined number of drawings. However, in such conventional gaming machines, the first gaming state usually has a higher degree of advantage than the second gaming state, so once the first gaming state ends, the player's gaming There was a problem in that it could reduce motivation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the jackpot expectation level is low (i.e., the expectation level for the player is The lottery for the first special symbol (with low advantage) is configured to be easily executed, and the expectation of jackpot is high after the first condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied (i.e., the lottery for the first special symbol is low). The lottery of the second special symbol (which has a high degree of advantage) is configured to be easily executed. In other words, when transitioning to an advantageous time-saving state, the configuration is such that the system first passes through a state with a low degree of advantage, and then transitions to a state with a high degree of advantage. By configuring this way, even if the player does not win the jackpot before the first condition is met, the player can feel secure in knowing that a state where the expectation of jackpot is higher will come later. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing once the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, after the transition to the time saving state that is advantageous to the player, until just before the time saving number of the second special symbols ends (until the lottery of the second special symbols is executed three times) After executing the lottery of the second special symbol with priority, by continuously hitting right, the time saving number of the first special symbol ends first, and then the time saving number of the first special symbol elapses. By executing the game method of extinguishing the reserved balls of the second special symbol that have been accumulated during the time saving period, the time saving state and until the time saving state ends and the reserved balls accumulated during the time saving state are all consumed. It can be configured so that the number of times the second special symbol is drawn in between is likely to be large (to seven times). In other words, from the transition to the time-saving state until the specific condition is met (the number of time-savings for the second special symbol is 1 remaining), left-handed strokes (or firing This makes it possible to realize a very special and novel specification in which a playing method in which the player continues hitting right after a certain condition is met is the most advantageous for the player. You can further improve your interest.

Although the eighth embodiment is configured such that the number of times the first special symbol is shortened is greater than the number of times the second special symbol is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of time saving times of the first special symbol and the number of time saving times of the second special symbol may be the same number of times (for example, both are 4 times). With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period during which the lottery of the first special symbol with a low expectation level is executed, and therefore it is possible to prevent the game from becoming redundant during the time saving state. Further, for example, the number of time reductions of the first special symbol may be set to be smaller than the number of time reductions of the second special symbol (for example, to three times). When configured in this way, there is a relatively high possibility that the time saving number of the first special symbol will elapse before a sufficient number of game balls (up to the maximum number of reserved balls) enter the right second ball entry port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that can bring joy to the player just by letting the game ball enter the right second ball entrance 64b. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The eighth embodiment is configured so that when the normal symbol hits, B8 will be won as the normal symbol at a 20% rate (the ball can enter the right second ball entrance 64b). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the probability of winning B per common symbol may be set low (for example, to 1/50). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the reserved balls of the second special symbol to accumulate in the time-saving state, so that the game quality is such that the player can be pleased when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated. can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 219. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, when a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V hit occurs, the small win that triggered the V hit is advantageous during the time-saving state. Regardless of whether the player wins or wins during a disadvantageous normal state, the gaming state after winning V is set to an advantageous time-saving state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the time saving state is set more when a V hit occurs during the normal state than when a V hit occurs during the time saving state. The ratio was designed to be high. By configuring in this way, during the time saving state, the player continues to hit right so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed, and while the lottery of the first special symbol with low jackpot expectation is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed. A game method can be performed in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased and after the time saving state ends, the player aims to win V in a lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol. In other words, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to more reliably realize a novel gaming experience in which the player goes from a state with low expectations for a jackpot to a state with high expectations for a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, when the normal symbol hits during the time saving state, the right first ball entry port 64a2 is easily opened (the ball enters the first operating port 704). The ratio of the type per normal pattern (A8 per normal pattern) of the opening pattern (which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second operating port 707) makes it easier to open the right second ball entry port 64b (makes it easier for the ball to enter the second operating port 707). It was configured so that it was determined at a higher rate than the type per ordinary figure (B8 per ordinary figure). Thereby, the lottery condition (starting prize winning) of the first special symbol is configured to be satisfied more often when the player continues to perform the right-handed hit in the time saving state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, even if a normal symbol hits, the first The game ball is configured so that it enters only the operating port 704, and only from the first period until the second period (for example, 360 seconds) elapses, the first operating port 704 and the second ball enter the operating port 704. The operating port 707 is configured so that a game ball can also enter the ball. By configuring in this way, from the start of the time saving state until the first period elapses, only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and only the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is increased. As a result, the game balls enter the second operation port 707 immediately after the start of the time saving state, and the number of time saving times of the second special symbol passes in a relatively short time, and the time saving state ends early. This can be more reliably prevented from ending.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the main controller The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of 110 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 of the sorting device 700 (see FIG. 170) in the ninth embodiment will be described. Here, the switching valve 702 in the eighth embodiment described above is configured to switch between a first switching state in which the first channel 703 can pass in a specific switching pattern, and a first switching state in which the first flow path 703 can pass in a specific switching pattern, triggered by the start of winning a normal symbol. The second switching state in which the second flow path 706 is allowed to pass through is configured to be switched (see FIG. 171). On the other hand, the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment operates in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the end of the jackpot (or initialization of the pachinko machine 10), regardless of the winning period of the normal symbol. The switching operation is configured to be initiated. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing a switching pattern of this switching valve 702.

As shown in FIG. 215, the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment is set to a switching mode (first switching mode) in which the switching valve 702 is maintained in the first switching state for 180 seconds upon completion of the jackpot. . While this first switching mode is set, when a normal symbol hits and the electric accessory 701 is released and a game ball enters the sorting device 700, the game ball enters the first operating port 704. The ball is guided (flows down), and the first right ball entry port 64a2 is opened. Therefore, if you continue to hit to the right while the time saving state and the first switching mode are set, the game ball will only enter the right first ball entry port 64a2 and will be biased towards the lottery of the first special symbol. When executed, only the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be stored.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 215, when the 180 seconds set in the first switching mode have elapsed, the second switching state for 1 second and the first switching state for 3 seconds are periodically repeated ( The second switching mode) is set for 180 seconds (that is, from 180 seconds after the switching pattern is started until 360 seconds have passed). In other words, while the second switching mode is set, the proportion of the period during which the switching valve 702 is set to the first switching state is 3/4, and the proportion of the period during which the switching valve 702 is set to the second switching state is 1/4. Become. If you continue to hit right while this second switching mode is set, approximately 1/4 of the game balls that hit the normal symbol and enter the sorting device 700 will be The balls enter the second operating port 707, and 3/4 of the game balls enter the first operating port 704. Therefore, if you continue to hit right while the second switching mode is set, game balls will enter the first right ball entrance 64a2 at a higher rate than the second right ball entrance 64b. . Therefore, while this second switching mode is set, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased while the lottery of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. Furthermore, during the 180 seconds during which the second switching mode is set, the second switching state is switched at a rate of 1 second every 4 seconds (the second switching state is set 45 times), so you can continue to hit the ball with the right hand. By continuing to do this, it is possible to make almost four or more game balls enter the right second ball entry port 64b. That is, by simply continuing to hit the ball to the right during the second switching state, it is possible to easily store the upper limit number (4 balls) of reserved balls of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 215, after 360 seconds have elapsed since the start of the switching pattern, until 3600 seconds have elapsed, the switching mode (third switching mode) in which the switching valve 702 is maintained in the first switching state is selected. ) is set. While this third switching mode is set, like while the first switching mode is set, the game ball enters only the right first ball entrance 64a2, so the special symbol lottery is not performed. 1. It is possible to place too much emphasis on the lottery of special symbols. These first switching mode, second switching mode, and third switching mode are the minimum unit of the switching pattern of the switching valve 702, and thereafter, every time the minimum unit switching pattern ends, the switching pattern is repeatedly executed from the beginning. be done.

In addition, since the fluctuation time of a miss in the time saving state is about 4 seconds on average, it takes about 384 seconds (4 seconds x 96 times) until the time saving number of the first special symbol passes. That is, since the time saving number of the first special symbol passes while the third switching mode is set, while the time saving state ends and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed, the second special The possibility that the number of reserved balls in a pattern will increase can be reduced to zero. Therefore, in each time saving state, the number of drawings of the second special symbol with a high jackpot expectation can be made uniform, so that the jackpot expectation in one time saving state can be made uniform.

Here, similarly to the eighth embodiment, if the operating port through which the game balls entering the sorting device 700 are easily guided is different depending on the type of normal figure, in particular, the time saving state is If the electric accessory 701 is released by winning "B8 per common symbol" just before the end of the game, and the release continues until at least one lottery using the reserved ball of the second special symbol is started, the second special symbol There is a possibility that game balls enter the sorting device 700 during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases even after the time saving state ends. That is, there is a possibility that the possibility of winning a jackpot in the time-saving state of 1 may be significantly increased or decreased depending on the timing of the winning of the normal symbol and the type of winning of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the third switching mode is easily set before and after the end of the time saving state (that is, around 384 seconds after the end of the jackpot), so even if the time saving state ends, the third switching mode is easily set. Even if you win a normal symbol just before the end and the opening period of the electric accessory 701 based on the winning continues until at least one reserved ball of the second special symbol is consumed, the second special symbol will be released after the time saving state ends. It is possible to suppress the number of reserved balls with special designs from increasing. In other words, even if the normal symbol hits with good timing and the game ball can enter the distribution device 700 with good timing, the only thing that can be done is to increase the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol with low expectations. It can be configured so that it is not possible. Thereby, it is possible to equalize the jackpot expectation in the time-saving state of 1.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. Here, the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 200(a)) in that the prescribed contents of the time saving grant table 202e have been changed. . Further, the difference is that the jackpot types defined in the first winning type selection table 202b are defined as jackpots A9 to F9 instead of jackpots A8 to F8 in the eighth embodiment. In addition, jackpots A9 to F9 are exactly the same as jackpots A8 to F8 in the number of rounds and associated random values (range of counter values of first winning type counter C2), respectively, so they will not be described here. A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Details of the time saving grant table 202e in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the time saving grant table 202e in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 216, for the "jackpot A9" won in the normal state, the number of times the first special symbol is applied to save time (the value of the special 1 time saver medium counter 203k1 to indicate the number of times to save the first special symbol) ) as "96 times" and "4 times" as the number of time saving times of the second special symbol (the value of the special 2 time saving medium counter 203k2 for indicating the number of time saving times of the second special symbol). . Furthermore, the same number of times of time saving is provided is also defined for the "jackpot A9" won in the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of winning "Jackpot A9", a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 216, for the "jackpot B9" won in the normal state, "0" is defined in association with the number of time-saving grants for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, for "Jackpot B9" won in the time-saving state, "96 times" is the number of time-saving grants for the first special symbol, and "4 times" is specified as the number of time-saving grants for the second special symbol. has been done. Therefore, if a direct hit with the first special symbol occurs in the normal state and a "jackpot B9" is determined, the game shifts to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, while a direct hit with the first special symbol occurs in the time saving state. When it occurs and the "jackpot B9" is determined, the game shifts to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 216, for "Jackpot C9", regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state or the time saving state, the number of times the first special symbol is given is "96 times". ”, and “4 times” is defined as the number of times the second special symbol is applied to save time. Therefore, when a direct hit with the second special symbol occurs and a "jackpot C9" is determined, the game shifts to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 202(a), for "Jackpot D9" to "Jackpot F9" won in the normal state, the time saving number of the first special symbol is "96", and the number of times of the second special symbol is "96". While "4 times" is defined as the number of time saving grants, for "Jackpot D9" to "Jackpot F9" won in the time saving state, the time saving of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be applied. "0 times" is defined as the number of grants in both cases. For this reason, if the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state and a small win is won, if a V win occurs and the V win is won, a disadvantageous normal state will always be set. Then, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and a small win is won, an advantageous time-saving state is definitely set by generating a V win and winning the V win. Therefore, during the time saving state, the second special symbol is continuously hit to the right so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed, and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated up to the maximum number, and after the time saving state ends, the second special symbol is drawn. 2. By practicing a gaming method that executes a lottery based on reserved balls with special symbols, it is possible to realize novel gaming properties that are advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, a method of transitioning between each state in the ninth embodiment will be described. Here, in the ninth embodiment, like the eighth embodiment, three modes (normal mode, chance mode A, and chance mode B) are provided. First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 217, a method of transitioning from the normal mode (normal game state where there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 217, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another mode only when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a jackpot (direct hit). More specifically, as shown in the upper part of Fig. 217, when it comes to "Jackpot A9" where the jackpot is won at a 50% rate when the first special symbol is drawn, the mode after the jackpot is advantageous. Chance mode A (time-saving gaming state) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot B9 occurs, which is a 50% chance of winning if the first special symbol is a jackpot, the mode after the jackpot is set again to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. (Loop normal mode). Therefore, in the normal mode, the player can play the game with the expectation of winning "Jackpot A9" in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to the center part of FIG. 217, a method of transitioning from chance mode A (time-saving gaming state) to another state (mode) will be described. As shown in the center of FIG. 217, there is a possibility of transitioning from chance mode A to another mode not only when a jackpot is won, but also when the time saving number has elapsed. More specifically, if a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in chance mode A, and a V win occurs, and a V win is won, the game shifts to a disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the number of time saving times has elapsed in chance mode A (after entering the time saving gaming state, the first special symbol lottery has been completed 96 times, or the second special symbol lottery has been completed 4 times), the second If there is a reserved ball with a special design, the game shifts to chance mode B.

On the other hand, as shown in the center part of FIG. 203, if a direct hit occurs in chance mode A, the mode after the jackpot is always set to chance mode A, which is advantageous to the player, regardless of the type of jackpot. (Loop chance mode A). As a result, in chance mode A, there is no possibility of winning a small hit (that is, a V hit occurs), and by executing a lottery of the first special symbol that has a possibility of winning a direct hit. It is possible to realize a gaming experience that makes the player expect that a direct hit will occur. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay that makes players want to preferentially execute the lottery of the first special symbol, which has a low expectation of a jackpot, over the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high expectation of a jackpot. You can improve your interest in.

Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 217, a method of transitioning from chance mode B (normal game state in which reserved balls of the second special symbol are present) to other modes will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 217, chance mode B can be changed to other states (modes) not only when winning a jackpot but also when all the reserved balls of the second special pattern are used up. transition to. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217, when a direct hit occurs and the jackpot type of the direct hit is "Jackpot A9" determined by the ratio of 50% of the first special symbol's hit. , and in the case of a "jackpot C9" determined by a 100% ratio of a direct hit of the second special symbol, the game shifts to chance mode A advantageous to the player after the jackpot ends. Further, even when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V win is won, the game shifts to chance mode A which is advantageous to the player after the big win ends.

On the other hand, if you win "Jackpot B8", which is determined at a rate of 50% when the first special symbol hits directly, and if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot is 0, then , the state (mode) after the jackpot is set to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. Further, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are used up (all the lottery of the second special symbol after shifting to chance mode B are lost), the mode shifts to the normal mode. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not 0 (1 or more) at the end of "Jackpot B8" or "Jackpot C8", the state (mode) after the jackpot is again chance mode. It becomes B. Therefore, in chance mode B, the player can play the game with the expectation that the player will get a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol (that is, win a V win) rather than a direct win. Therefore, until chance mode A ends, the player continues to hit right so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed and the time saving number of the first special symbol elapses, and after shifting to chance mode B, , it is possible to realize a special and innovative gameplay in which the player can expect a small win in the drawing of the second special symbol, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game. .

<About the control processing of the main control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 218 and 219. First, startup processing 9 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 218. This startup process 9 is a process that is executed in place of the startup process (see FIG. 50) in the eighth embodiment (and first embodiment), and is Similar to the upgrade process (see FIG. 50), this is a process executed to initialize the pachinko machine 10 upon power-on.

In the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) in the ninth embodiment, each process in S1401 to S1417 is the same as each process in S1401 to S1417 in the start-up process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 50). Processing is executed. In the start-up process 9 (see FIG. 218) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1417 is completed, the start of the switching pattern (see FIG. 215) of the switching valve 702 is then set (S1421), and the process of S1410 is Move to processing.

Next, details of jackpot control processing 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 219. This jackpot control process 9 (S1521) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52, S1504) in the eighth embodiment (and first embodiment), and Similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 52) in the embodiment), this is a process for making various settings during execution of the jackpot game.

Of the jackpot control processing 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment, each of the processing in S1601 to S1612 and S1615 to S1618 is the jackpot control processing in the eighth embodiment (and first embodiment) (see FIG. 52, S1504). ) are executed.

In the jackpot control process 9 (S1521) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1617 is finished, the start of the switching pattern (see FIG. 215) of the switching valve 702 is then set (S1623), and the process proceeds to S1618. Transition.

By executing these start-up processing 9 (see FIG. 218) and jackpot control processing 9 (see FIG. 219), the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized and when the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the time saving state, the opportunity for the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to increase can be limited to a period from 180 seconds to 360 seconds after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the sorting device 700 immediately after the end of the time saving state, the right second ball entrance 64b is opened (the normal symbol winning starts just before the end of the time saving state, This makes it possible to prevent game balls entering the sorting device 700 from being guided to the second operating port 707 after the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol is started immediately after the end of the time saving state. , the number of times the second special symbol is drawn in the normal state after the end of the time saving state can be fixed to a maximum of four times. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the jackpot expectation in the time-saving state of 1.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the lottery conditions for the first special symbol (starting prize) and the lottery condition for the second special symbol (starting prize) are set in a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. After configuring the system so that both of the following can be realized, the lottery using the second special symbol is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the lottery using the first special symbol (the possibility of winning a jackpot is actually higher). ). If the second special symbol wins in the time-saving state, there is a high possibility that the player will be transferred to the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player (if a direct hit with a low probability occurs, the player will be transferred to the time-saving state, but (If a V win based on a small win with a high probability occurs, the state will shift to the normal state.) On the other hand, if a win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility that the state will shift to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It was configured to be high. In other words, after the transition to the time saving state, until the specific condition is satisfied (the time saving state ends), the person who won the jackpot based on the lottery of the first special symbol will win the second special symbol. While it is more likely to be advantageous to the player than to win a jackpot based on the symbol lottery being executed, after the specific condition is satisfied (after the time saving state ends), the second special symbol lottery The game player is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to win a jackpot based on the drawing of the first special symbol than to win a jackpot based on the drawing of the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player can change the type of special symbol that he or she wants to draw before and after a specific condition is established. It is possible to improve the player's interest in playing games. That is, until the specific condition is met, a gaming method in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases while the lottery of the first special symbol is executed without interruption (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased) A gaming method in which the lottery based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed after a specific condition is established (i.e., a gaming method in which firing is stopped until there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol). ) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the period during which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol may increase in the time saving state is set within a specific period (from 180 seconds after the jackpot ends to 360 seconds after the end of the jackpot). ). In other words, before and after the end of the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b, regardless of whether or not the normal symbol hits. With this configuration, the number of times the second special symbol is drawn in the normal state after the end of the time saving state can be fixed to a maximum of four times. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the jackpot expectation in the time-saving state of 1.

In the ninth embodiment, by configuring it so that winning a V hit in the normal state is more advantageous than winning a V hit during the time saving state, the first special symbol is used during the time saving number. Although the game method is configured such that the lottery is executed and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are used up in the normal state after the time saving number has elapsed, the present invention is not limited to this. On the other hand, it will be more advantageous if you win a V hit within the number of time-savings than if you win a small hit with the reserved ball of the second special symbol after the time-saving state ends and win a V hit. may be configured. By configuring in this way, when the second special symbol lottery is executed within the number of time saving times, it is possible to make the player think of generating a V winning prize, thereby improving the degree of freedom in the game. can be done.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is operated in a fixed switching pattern with the end of the jackpot as a trigger, and the period during which reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored is set from 180 seconds after the end of the jackpot to 360 seconds after the end of the jackpot. However, it is not limited to this. The period during which the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the switching pattern of the switching valve 702 does not need to be fixed, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which different switching patterns are set depending on the type of jackpot. That is, a time-saving jackpot in which a switching pattern is set that makes it possible to store reserved balls of the second special symbol during the time-saving state, and a switching pattern that makes it impossible (difficult) to store reserved balls of the second special symbol. A configuration may also be provided in which a time-saving jackpot is set.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to switch in a fixed switching pattern triggered by the end of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control such as that of the eighth embodiment described above may be adopted. That is, a control may be adopted in which the switching operation is performed in a fixed switching pattern triggered by the start of winning a normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 701 is varied depending on the type of winning the normal symbol. Conversely, the switching control of the switching valve 702 in the ninth embodiment may be adopted in the eighth embodiment described above.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching operation is performed in a fixed switching pattern triggered by the end of the jackpot, and the switching valve 702 is configured to be more likely to be set to the first switching state before and after the end of the time saving. The game ball that entered the sorting device 700 immediately after the end of the time saving enters the second operation port 707, the right second ball entry port 64b is opened, and after the state shifts to the normal state, the second special symbol is Although the configuration is such that the number of reserved balls is suppressed from increasing, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the confirmed display time of the final variable display in the time saving state, a period longer than the winning period (2.5 seconds) per normal symbol that is set when a normal symbol hits during the time saving state 5 seconds), and the time saving state may be terminated at the end of the variable time (the final variable display final display period is controlled so that the time saving state has already ended). With this configuration, even if the winning of the normal symbol starts immediately before the confirmed display, the winning of the normal symbol can be ended during the confirmed display period, so the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal state. After one or more lottery starts (that is, after the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol decreases), it is possible to reliably prevent game balls from entering the right second ball entrance 64b.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching mode (first to third switching mode) was configured to be varied according to the elapsed time after the end of the jackpot (and after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10). It is not limited. For example, the switching mode may be changed depending on the number of time reductions. More specifically, for example, while there are 80 or more time saving times remaining, the first switching mode (switching mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right second ball entry port 64b) is set. The second switching mode (entering the game ball into the right second ball entry port 64b) is configured so that the number of time saving times is less than 80 times remaining, and within the range of 20 times remaining. If the number of time saving times is less than 20, the third switching mode (switching mode that allows the game ball to enter the right second ball entry port 64b) is set. It may also be configured such that a switching mode) is set. By configuring in this way, only short fluctuation times (for example, 3 seconds) are selected in the time saving state, and even if the time saving state ends in about 300 seconds, immediately after the time saving state ends, and the second special symbol It is possible to more reliably prevent game balls from entering the right second ball entry port 64b at the time when one or more reserved balls have been consumed.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is configured to switch in a predetermined specific switching pattern (see FIG. 215) that is started upon the end of a jackpot (and the initialization of the pachinko machine 10). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the switching operation of a specific switching pattern may be started using the start of a jackpot as an opportunity. With this configuration, the timing at which the second switching mode is set can be varied depending on the time required for the jackpot game, so the second switching mode can be set in a relatively short time after the jackpot ends. , the second switching mode continues even when the time saving state is just about to end, and such events can occur. Therefore, since the degree of advantage of the player can be varied according to the progress of the game during the jackpot, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the ninth embodiment, the switching valve 702 is operated in a predetermined specific switching pattern (see FIG. 215) that is started upon completion of the jackpot (and initialization of the pachinko machine 10), regardless of the type of jackpot. Although the configuration is such that the switching operation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the switching pattern that is set after the jackpot ends may be different depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, for example, if a direct win is won, the state of the switching valve 702 is switched in the switching pattern shown in FIG. 215, while if a V win is won, the state of the switching valve 702 is switched A configuration may also be adopted in which a switching pattern (second switching pattern) in which the switching state is not set (or the period in which it is set is short) is set. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage in the case of a direct win during the time saving state, so that the player can play the game with stronger expectations of a direct win. Further, for example, when the first special symbol wins a direct hit, the switching valve 702 is configured to be switched according to the switching pattern shown in FIG. It may be configured such that two switching patterns are set.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 248. The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above has two types of gaming states: a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, and furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of gaming states: a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. The configuration is such that the degree of advantage of the normal state can be greatly varied depending on the presence or absence.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, in addition to the normal state which is disadvantageous to the player and the time-saving state which is relatively advantageous to the player, the game state includes a potential state which is disadvantageous to the player and a potential condition which is disadvantageous to the player. The configuration is such that the most advantageous variable state is provided. That is, in addition to the normal state and the time saving state, there is a potential state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state, but the electric accessory 64ra is difficult to release and the special symbol lottery is difficult to execute, and the jackpot probability is high, and An advantageous probability change state in which the electric accessory 64ra is easily released is provided. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won, the special symbol is set to a high probability state (potential state or variable probability state) after the jackpot ends at a high rate (90% rate). Instead, an upper limit number (for example, 11 times) is set for the number of consecutive high probability states of the special symbol. This makes it difficult to predict the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, making it possible to realize deep gameplay.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a right-hand hit is made in the time saving state of the normal symbol, both the lottery conditions of the first special symbol and the lottery condition of the second special symbol can be satisfied. The variable display of the first special symbol based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel). (The so-called simultaneous fluctuation method is adopted). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is in progress, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating simultaneously, if one of them stops fluctuating due to a jackpot stop symbol, the other fluctuating display will be related to the remaining fluctuating time and lottery results. It is configured so that the stop symbol is displayed with a stop symbol that is not a miss. This makes it possible to prevent a problem in which the other variable display is displayed as a confirmed jackpot while a jackpot game is being executed, and jackpots are started in duplicate.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, it is assumed that a jackpot is won in the normal state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set and in the probability state, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability variable state or the time saving state. However, these advantageous states are configured to end when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 8 times) after the end of the jackpot, while a time-saving state for the normal symbols is set. If you win a jackpot in a variable probability state or time saving state, a variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot, or a time saving state that continues until the end of 100 special symbol drawings after the end of the jackpot is set. . That is, in the normal state and the potential state, first, by winning the jackpot in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is given a predetermined number of times (8 times), and by winning the jackpot in the lottery within the 8 times, It is configured to be able to shift to a variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot, or a time saving state that continues until the end of 100 special symbol drawings after the end of the jackpot. If you shift to a variable state that continues until the next jackpot, you can always win the next jackpot with the time-saving state of the normal symbol set, so even after the next jackpot ends, it will continue until the next jackpot. This is a variable probability state, or a time-saving state that continues until the 100th special symbol lottery is completed after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the most advantageous situation for the player is created. In addition, even in the time-saving state that continues until the end of the 100 special symbol drawings, if you can win the jackpot within 100 times, it will be a variable probability state that will continue until the next jackpot, or the special symbol 100 times after the jackpot ends. Since this is a time-saving state that continues until the lottery ends, a state in which there is a relatively high expectation that it will be an advantageous state is formed.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the state shifts to a variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot, and the variable probability state and the jackpot are repeated as the probability variable jackpot is won at a rate of 90%, and the variable probability state of the special symbol is repeated. When the maximum number of times (variable variable limit number) is reached, regardless of whether you win the variable jackpot or the normal jackpot, you will be in a time-saving state where the number of time-savings is 100 (i.e., relatively disadvantageous than the variable variable state). Instead, if you win a jackpot within the short time limit (a so-called pullback occurs), the percentage of winnings that will be of an advantageous jackpot type (jackpot with a large number of rounds) will be set when you win a jackpot during a variable probability state. It is structured so that it is easier to get higher than if you win. More specifically, the jackpot with the second special symbol is configured so that the percentage of jackpot types with low advantage (selection percentage with a small number of rounds) is higher than the jackpot with the first special symbol. In the time saving state set by reaching the probability variable limit number of times, the lottery frequency of the second special symbol is configured to be extremely low. In other words, the variation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is significantly longer than the variation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, it is uniformly 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result). The present invention is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed a plurality of times while the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In other words, it is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is high. Thereby, when the probability variable limit number of times is reached, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the jackpot will be pulled back, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment described above is that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the main controller 110 The configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed. There are some changes, and there are some changes in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventh embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 220, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 220, the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment differs from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 178) in that the V winning device 6500 is deleted, and In the position where the second ball entry hole 6400 was provided, the right first ball entry hole 64r is provided as a starting winning hole that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is placed on the right side of the board. The difference is that a second ball entry hole 6450 is provided as a starting prize hole that triggers the lottery. The reason why the V winning device 6500 has been deleted is that in the tenth embodiment, a specification is adopted in which only one of the special symbol lottery wins or the jackpot is won, and a small jackpot is not provided. This is because there is no

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, a characteristic effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, if a jackpot is won while the normal symbol time saving state is set, the normal symbol time saving state is always given after the jackpot ends. In other words, basically, if you win a variable jackpot, a variable condition will be set that will continue until the next jackpot, and if you win a normal jackpot or reach the variable limit number of times, 100 special symbols will be drawn. The configuration is such that a time-saving state is set that continues until the In the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won while the time-saving state of a normal symbol is set, it is clearly stated whether the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is a time-saving state or a variable probability state. It is configured so that it is suggested by the performance mode without being announced. An example of suggestions based on this presentation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 221(a) and 221(b).

FIG. 221(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode indicating that the degree of expectation for which a variable probability state is set is relatively high. As shown in FIG. 221(a), when a display mode indicating a high degree of expectation is set in which a variable probability state is set, a character 801 is displayed in a forest with many trees in the main display area Dm. A scene in which a treasure chest 802 is searched for is played out. In addition to this, the words "Forest Area" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to this forest area is configured to be selected more often when the variable probability state is set than when the time saving state is set.

On the other hand, FIG. 221(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the degree of expectation of the variable probability state is relatively low (the possibility of the time saving state is high). As shown in FIG. 221(b), when the display mode indicating that the expectation level of the variable probability state is low is set, the character 801 searches for the treasure chest 802 in the desolate wilderness in the main display area Dm. be done. In addition to this, the words "wilderness area" are displayed in the second display area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds. The display mode corresponding to this wilderness area is configured so that the rate of selection is higher when the time saving state is set than when the variable probability state is set.

In the tenth embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned presentation modes for the forest area and wilderness area, there is a presentation mode for the sky area in which it is determined that a variable state is set at the time of execution (the character 801 is in a sea of clouds). A scene in which you search for a treasure chest 802 is provided. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each time a new variable pattern presentation (variable display) is started, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display mode can be changed. As a result, even if the production mode of the wilderness area with low expectations is set, each time the variable display is executed, the game is played with the expectation that the production mode will be changed to a production mode that increases the expectation level of the variable state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game.

<Electrical configuration in tenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222(a). FIG. 222(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment has a variation pattern scenario table 202ga added to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 183(a)). They are different in that they are Another difference is that the configurations of the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, and the time saving grant table 202e have been partially changed.

First, details of the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 223(a). FIG. 223(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment includes a random number (first winning random number counter C1 (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) and a random number value (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223(a), the random number (counter value) determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state (potential state, variable probability state) of the special symbol is 25 from "0 to 24". random numbers (counter values) are defined. Among the 1000 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is 25 from 0 to 24. Therefore, when a special symbol lottery is executed in a variable probability state or a probability state, the probability of determining a jackpot is 1/40 (25/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 223(a), seven random numbers from "0 to 6" are used as random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol. (counter value) is specified. Among the 1000 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol is 7 from 0 to 6. Therefore, when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state or a time-saving state, the probability of determining a jackpot is approximately 1/143 (7/1000).

In this way, the tenth embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is greatly different between the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add variety to the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning type selection table 202b in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 223(b), the first winning random number table 202b in the tenth embodiment includes special numbers for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. At least a winning table 202bf1 and a special 2 winning table 202bf2 for determining (selecting) the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are defined. First, details of the special 1 winning table 202bg1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 224(a).

FIG. 224(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special 1 winning table 202bg1 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 224(a), in the special 1 winning table 202bg1 in the tenth embodiment, there are 8 jackpot types from "jackpot A10" to "jackpot H10" as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. stipulated. “Jackpot A10” to “Jackpot C10” are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to a special symbol high probability state. Further, "Jackpot D10" to "Jackpot F10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 3 and the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of the special symbol. Moreover, "Jackpot G10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to a special symbol low probability state. Furthermore, "Jackpot H10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 3 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to a special symbol low probability state. It should be noted that whether or not the time-saving state of the normal symbol is given is configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 5”, “Jackpot A10” (9 round probability variable jackpot) is defined in association with the jackpot type. ing. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot A10" is "0 to 5". ”, so when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the percentage of “jackpot A10” being determined (selected) is 6% (6/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "6 to 46", "Jackpot B10" (9 round probability variable jackpot) is associated as the jackpot type. stipulated. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot B10" is 41 from "6 to 46", so When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the percentage of "jackpot B10" being determined (selected) is 41% (41/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of “47 to 66”, “Jackpot C10” (9 round probability variable jackpot) is associated as the jackpot type. stipulated. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot C10" is 20 from "47 to 66", so When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the rate at which "jackpot C10" is determined (selected) is 20% (20/100).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 224(a), for the value "67" of the first winning type counter C2, "jackpot D10" (3 round probability variable jackpot) is defined in association with the jackpot type. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot D10" is one, so the first special symbol lottery When winning a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot D10" being determined (selected) is 1% (1/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is “68, 69” is associated with “jackpot E10” (3 round probability variable jackpot) as the jackpot type. stipulated. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot E10" is 2, so the first special symbol lottery When winning a jackpot in , the percentage of "jackpot E10" being determined (selected) is 2% (2/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of “70 to 89”, “Jackpot F10” (3 round probability variable jackpot) is associated as the jackpot type. stipulated. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot F10" is 20 from "70 to 89", so When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the percentage of "jackpot F10" being determined (selected) is 20% (20/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 92", "Jackpot G10" (9th round normal jackpot) is associated as the jackpot type. stipulated. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot G10" is 3, so the first special symbol lottery If you win a jackpot, the percentage of "Jackpot G10" being determined (selected) is 3% (3/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "93 to 99", "Jackpot H10" (3rd round normal jackpot) is associated as the jackpot type. stipulated. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot H10" is 7, so the first special symbol lottery If you win a jackpot, the percentage of "Jackpot H10" being determined (selected) is 7% (7/100).

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, it will be a probability-variable jackpot at a rate of 90% (if it is one of "jackpot A10" to "jackpot F10"), The configuration is such that the player usually wins the jackpot at a rate of 10% (in the case of either "jackpot G10" or "jackpot H10"). Further, the configuration is such that a jackpot with a number of rounds of 9 rounds is determined at a rate of 70%, and a jackpot with a number of rounds of 3 rounds is determined at a rate of 30%.

Next, details of the special 2 winning table 202g2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 224(b). As described above, this special 2 winning table 202g2 is a data table for determining the winning type when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 224(b), in the tenth embodiment, four jackpot types, "jackpot I10" to "jackpot L10", are provided as the winning types of the second special symbol. “Jackpot A10” to “Jackpot C10” are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to a special symbol high probability state. Further, "Jackpot D10" to "Jackpot F10" are jackpot types in which the number of rounds is 3 and the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of the special symbol. “Jackpot I10” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to a special symbol high probability state. Moreover, "Jackpot J10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 3 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to a special symbol high probability state. Moreover, "Jackpot K10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to a special symbol low probability state. Furthermore, "Jackpot L10" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 3 and the state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is set to a special symbol low probability state.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 26", "Jackpot I10" (9 round probability variable jackpot) is defined in association with the jackpot type. ing. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot I10" is "0 to 26". '', so when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the percentage of ``jackpot I10'' being determined (selected) is 27% (27/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "27 to 89", "Jackpot J10" (3 round probability variable jackpot) is associated as the jackpot type. stipulated. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot J10" is "27 to 89". '', so when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the percentage of "jackpot J10" being determined (selected) is 53% (53/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 92", "Jackpot K10" (9th round normal jackpot) is associated as the jackpot type. stipulated. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot K10" is "90 to 92". ”, so when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the percentage of “jackpot K10” being determined (selected) is 3% (3/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 224(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "93 to 99", "Jackpot L10" (3rd round normal jackpot) is associated as the jackpot type. stipulated. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot L10" is "93 to 99". ”, so when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the percentage of “jackpot L10” being determined (selected) is 7% (7/100).

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the ratio of 90% ("Jackpot I10", The structure is such that if the winning result is either "Jackpot J10", it becomes a probability-variable jackpot, and at a rate of 10% (when the winning result is either "Jackpot K10" or "Jackpot L10"), the player wins the normal jackpot. Further, the configuration is such that a jackpot with a number of rounds of 9 is determined at a rate of 30%, and a jackpot with a number of rounds of 3 is determined at a rate of 70%. In other words, in terms of the number of rounds, the case where a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous than the case where a jackpot is achieved in the second special symbol lottery.

Next, details of the variation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225(a). Similar to the variation pattern table 202d in the seventh embodiment, this variation pattern table 202d is data in which data for determining the variation time of a special symbol is defined according to the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. It's a table. FIG. 225(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 225(a), the variation pattern table 202d in the tenth embodiment determines the variation pattern (variation time) in the gaming state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. A normal table 202dg1 for (selection), and a time-saving table 202dg2 for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (variable time) in a gaming state (time-saving state, variable probability state) in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is set. , and a limit reaching table 202dg3 for determining (selecting) a variation pattern (variation time) in a state where the probability variation limit number of times has been reached. First, details of the normal table 202dg1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 225(b).

FIG. 225(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202dg1. As shown in FIG. 225(b), in the normal table 202dg1 in the tenth embodiment, symbol types, lottery results, value ranges of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and fluctuation patterns are defined in association with each other. There is. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 225(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is "lost", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0~ For the range of ``139'', a ``short deviation'' with a variation time of 7 seconds is defined in correspondence, and for the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 of ``140 to 149'', a ``short deviation'' with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined. "Normal reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 179", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with "Long off". For the range of "180 to 198", a "super reach" with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 225(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29". , "Normal reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in correspondence, and "Super reach" with a variation time of 60 seconds corresponds to the value range of variation type counter CS1 from "30 to 189". "Special reach" with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "190 to 198".

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is "lost", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range. If a super long loss with a time of 600 seconds is associated and the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 600 seconds in the entire range. A super long hit in seconds is associated and specified. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entry port 6450 by hitting right in the normal state or the potential state, the special symbol lottery can only be executed every 600 seconds. If an irregular game method in which a right-hand hit is performed in a game state in which the symbols are set in a normal state, the game efficiency can be significantly deteriorated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in a normal state or a potential state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226(a), details of the time-saving table 202dg2, which is one of the data tables forming the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, this time-saving table 202dg2 is a data table that is referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a gaming state in which a time-saving state of normal symbols is set. It is. FIG. 226(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this time-saving table 202dg2.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), the time saving table 202dg2 defines the special symbol lottery results and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with each other. In other words, in the time saving state and variable probability state, basically (except when the probability variation limit is reached) the variation pattern is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol, regardless of the type of special symbol. It consists of This is because in the time-saving state of the normal symbol in the tenth embodiment, the game ball frequently enters the right first ball entry port 64r and the second ball entry port 6450 by hitting the ball to the right. This is to prevent the drawing of one special symbol from being carried out unevenly.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), if the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "lost", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", A "short deviation" with a variation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with a "long deviation" with a variation time of 5 seconds for the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189". "Normal reach" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "190 to 195", and a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "196 to 198". In contrast, a "super reach" with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined. In other words, the configuration is such that a short variation time can be determined more easily than in the case where an out-of-line variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)). This makes it possible to efficiently play games in variable probability states and time-saving states in which the time-saving states of normal symbols are set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 226(a), if the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49". Therefore, a "normal reach" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in correspondence, and a "super reach" with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined in correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 194". "Special reach" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with a range in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "195 to 198". In other words, even if the lottery result is a win, the configuration is such that it is easier to determine a short fluctuation time compared to the case where the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)). are doing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226(b), details of the limit reaching table 202dg3, which is one of the data tables forming the fluctuation pattern table 202d, will be described. As described above, this limit reaching table 202dg3 is data that defines the data for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol during the time saving state that is set after reaching the probability fluctuation limit number of times. It's a table. FIG. 226(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this time saving table 202dg2.

As shown in FIG. 226(b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), each variation pattern is selected with the same distribution as in the time-saving table 202dg2 (see FIG. 226(a)). . On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is "lost", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range. If a super long loss with a time of 600 seconds is associated and the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 600 seconds in the entire range. Super long hits in seconds are defined in association. Therefore, if you hit right in the time-saving state after reaching the fixed variation limit number of times, it is possible to intensively execute the lottery of the first special symbol while the super long variation of the second special symbol is being executed. . Here, as mentioned above, since the jackpot of the first special symbol is configured to be easier to determine a jackpot type (jackpot with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous than the jackpot of the second special symbol, the jackpot of the first special symbol is easily determined. It is possible to make the user expect more strongly that he or she will win the jackpot by drawing special symbols.

Next, details of the time saving grant table 202e in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 227. Similar to the time saving granting table 202e in the seventh embodiment, this time saving granting table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to set the number of working hours after the end of the jackpot depending on the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. be. FIG. 227 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the time saving grant table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot A10 (9 round probability strange jackpot) and jackpot D10 (3 round probability strange jackpot) won in the gaming state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set (normal state, potential state) , If the relevant variable jackpot is a hit before reaching the fixed variable limit, the number of time reductions that will continue until the next jackpot will be given, whereas if the fixed variable limit is reached due to the jackpot, the number of time reductions of 8 times will be set. . Therefore, if you win jackpot A10 or jackpot D10 before reaching the fixed variable limit number of times, a fixed variable state (the most advantageous gaming state) will be set that will continue until the next jackpot, while if the fixed variable limit number of times is reached. Since only a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of 8 times are set, the degree of advantage of the player varies greatly depending on whether the probability variation limit number of times is reached or not. In addition, the number of time-savings that will continue until the next jackpot is set to a number that is sufficiently large for the jackpot probability (the number of times that can be considered to be sure to win the jackpot within the number of time-savings), such as 65,536 times, for example. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot A10 (9 round probability variable jackpot) and jackpot D10 (3 round probability variable jackpot) won in the gaming state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, probability variable state) , if the relevant variable jackpot is a hit before reaching the fixed variable limit, a time saving state will be given that will continue until the next jackpot, but if the fixed variable limit is reached due to the jackpot, the time saving number of 100 times will be set. Ru. Therefore, even if the probability variable limit number of times has been reached, the special symbol lottery can be executed 100 times without reducing the number of balls held, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that the jackpot will be returned. As described above, the tenth embodiment is configured not to clearly inform the player whether the limit number of times has been reached (whether it is a variable probability state or a time saving state). Therefore, even if the time-saving state has actually been set due to reaching the probability variation limit, it is possible to make the player expect a probability variation state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, the jackpot B10 (9 round probability strange jackpot), jackpot E10 (3 round probability strange jackpot) won in the gaming state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, and For the jackpot I10 (9 round probability variable jackpot), 8 time saving times are given even if it is a hit before the probability variable limit is reached or even if the probability variable limit number of times has been reached. In other words, before reaching the limit, the game will be in a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot until the end of the 8th special symbol lottery, and will be in a potential state from the 9th time onwards. On the other hand, if the limit number has been reached, the time saving state will be in effect until the end of the 8th special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot, and the normal state will be in effect after the 9th time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, jackpot B10 (9 round probability variable jackpot), jackpot E10 (3 round probability variable jackpot), and jackpot won in the gaming state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, probability variable state) I10 (9-round probability variable jackpot) is associated with the same number of time-saving grants as jackpot A10 and jackpot D10. In other words, the number of time-savings that will continue until the next jackpot is defined in relation to the winnings before reaching the fixed variable limit, and the number of time-savings of 100 times is defined in association with the winnings after reaching the variable variable limit. ing. Therefore, jackpots B10, E10, and I10 will be more disadvantageous than jackpots A10 and D10 in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends if they are won in the normal state or potential state without reaching the probability variable limit number of times, If you win in any other situation (if you win in a variable probability state, time saving state, or if you reach the variable probability limit number of times), the same gaming state as jackpots A10 and D10 is set.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot C10 (9-round probability variable jackpot) and the jackpot F10 (3-round probability variable jackpot) won in the normal state, 8 times is defined as the time saving number. . In addition, if you win a fixed variable jackpot under normal conditions, you will always not reach the fixed variable limit number of times, so the number of time reductions granted when the fixed variable limit number of times is reached is not specified. not necessary). In addition, for jackpots C10 and F10 won in the probability state, even if the winning occurs before the probability variable limit is reached, or even if the probability variable limit number of times has been reached, 0 times is associated and specified as the time saving number. There is. In other words, if the jackpot C10 or F10 is won in the probability state, the time saving state of the normal symbol will not be awarded even once, which will be extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for jackpot C10 (9 round probability variable jackpot) and jackpot F10 (3 round probability variable jackpot) won in the gaming state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, probability variable state) In this case, the same number of time-saving grants is associated with jackpots A10, B10, D10, E10, and I10. In other words, the number of time-savings that will continue until the next jackpot is defined in relation to the winnings before reaching the fixed-variable limit, and the number of time-savings of 100 times is defined in association with the winnings after reaching the fixed-variable limit. ing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, jackpot G10 (9th round normal jackpot), jackpot H10 (3rd round normal jackpot), jackpot won in the gaming state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. For K10 (9 round normal jackpot) and jackpot L10 (3 round normal jackpot), 8 times is defined as the time saving number in association. Note that in the case of winning a jackpot, the variable probability limit cannot be reached, so the number of time-saving grants when the variable probability limit is reached is not specified (there is no need to specify it). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 won in the game state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, variable probability state), 100 times is given as the number of time saving grants. are associated. In other words, if you win the jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10, it will be more disadvantageous than the jackpots A10 to F10, H10 to J10 because the number of time saving grants that will continue until the next jackpot cannot be set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot J10 (3 round probability variable jackpot) won in the gaming state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set (normal state, potential state), the probability variation limit number of times has been reached. Regardless of whether or not, 0 times is associated and defined as the number of time saving times. Therefore, since the jackpot J10 has a small number of rounds and is not given a time-saving state, it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if it is won in the normal state or the probability state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 227, for the jackpot J10 won in the gaming state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, variable probability state), if the variable probability jackpot is a hit before reaching the variable probability limit, While a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot is given, if the probability variable limit number of times is reached due to the jackpot, a time-saving number of 100 times is set.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot is varied depending on the type of jackpot, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and whether or not the probability variable limit number of times has been reached. are doing. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming states after the jackpot is over, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga will be described with reference to FIG. 228. This variation pattern scenario table 202ga is a data table that is referred to in order to select the correspondence relationship (variation pattern scenario) between the number of drawings of special symbols after the end of the jackpot and the type of variation pattern table to be referred to. As shown in FIG. 228, the variable pattern scenario table 202ga in the tenth embodiment includes variable pattern scenarios that are set after the jackpot ends in association with the jackpot type, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and whether or not the limit has been reached. is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228, in a situation where the jackpot type is jackpot A10 or D10 and the probability variable limit number has not been reached, the time saving table 202dg2 is referred to, regardless of the number of drawings of the special symbol. Variation pattern scenarios are defined in association with each other. Therefore, after jackpots A10 and D10 are completed, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referred to and a variation pattern (variation time) is determined every time a special symbol lottery is executed until the next jackpot occurs. This is because when winning either jackpot A10 or D10, a variable probability state is set that continues until the next jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 228, in the normal state or potential state, if the jackpot B10, E10, I10 is won before reaching the variable limit number of times, 8 lottery rounds will be executed after the jackpot ends. Until then, the time-saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and from the 9th lottery onwards, a variable pattern scenario is set in which the regular table 202dg1 is referred to. This is because when the normal state of the normal symbol is set, if you win any of the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 within the variable probability limit, a variable probability state with a time saving number of 8 times will be set. . On the other hand, in the time saving state or probability variable state, if the jackpot B10, E10, I10 is won before the probability variable limit number is reached, the time saving table 202gd2 is referred to and the variable pattern is changed regardless of the number of drawings after the jackpot ends. A variation pattern scenario is set in which the This is because if one of the jackpots B10, E10, and I10 is won in a state where the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, a variable probability state is set that continues until the next jackpot.

In addition, as shown in Figure 228, in the normal state, if you win any of the jackpots C10, F10, or J10 before reaching the variable limit number of times, after the jackpot ends, until the 8th lottery is executed. A variable pattern scenario is set in which the time-saving table 202dg2 is referred to during the lottery, and the regular table 202dg1 is referred to in the ninth and subsequent drawings. This is because in the normal state, if a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won within the probability variable limit number of times, a probability variable state with a time saving number of 8 times is set. In addition, in the probability state, if a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won before the probability variation limit number is reached, the normal table 202dg1 is referred to and the variation pattern is A variation pattern scenario is set in which the This is because, in the probability state, if a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won within the probability variation limit, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability state. On the other hand, in the time-saving state or the variable-probability state, if a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won before reaching the variable-probability limit, the time-saving table 202gd2 is referenced regardless of the number of drawings after the jackpot ends. A fluctuation pattern scenario in which a fluctuation pattern is determined is set. This is because if a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won in a state where the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, a variable probability state is set that continues until the next jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 228, in the normal state or potential state, if you win any of the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10, the time will be saved until the 8th lottery is executed after the jackpot ends. A variable pattern scenario is set in which the regular table 202dg2 is referred to, and the regular table 202dg1 is referred to in the 9th and subsequent drawings. This is because if any of the jackpots G10, H10, K10, and L10 is won while the normal state of the normal symbol is set, a time saving state is set in which the number of time saving times is 8 times. On the other hand, if you win the jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10 before reaching the variable probability limit in the time saving state or variable probability state, after the jackpot ends, until the 100th special symbol lottery is executed. , the time-saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and in the 101st and subsequent drawings, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the regular table 202dg1 is referred to. This is because if a jackpot G10, H10, K10, or L10 is won in a state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, a time saving state where the number of time saving times is 100 is set.

On the other hand, if a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won in the probability state, and the probability variation limit number is reached in the jackpot, the regular table 202dg1 is referenced regardless of the number of drawings after the jackpot ends. A fluctuation pattern scenario is set. This is because if a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won while the potential state is set, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. In addition, if you win a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 in a probability variable state, and the probability variable limit is reached in the jackpot, after the jackpot ends and until the 100th lottery is executed, when the limit is reached, A variation pattern scenario is set in which the regular table 202dg3 is referred to, and the normal table 202dg1 is referred to in the 101st and subsequent drawings. This is because if a jackpot C10, F10, or J10 is won while the variable probability state is set, a time saving state is set in which the number of time saving times is 100.

On the other hand, if you win a probability variable jackpot other than jackpot C10, F10, J10 in the potential state, and reach the probability variation limit number of times with the said jackpot, after the jackpot ends, until the 8th lottery is executed. , the time-saving table 202dg2 is referred to, and a variation pattern scenario is set in which the regular table 202dg1 is referred to in the 9th and subsequent drawings. This is because if a variable probability jackpot other than jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won while the probability state is set, a time saving state in which the number of time reductions is 8 is set. In addition, if you win a probability variable jackpot other than jackpot C10, F10, J10 in a probability variable state, and reach the probability variable limit number of times with the said jackpot, the limit will be reached until the 100th lottery is executed after the jackpot ends. A variation pattern scenario is set in which the time table 202dg3 is referred to, and the regular table 202dg1 is referred to in the 101st and subsequent drawings. This is because if a variable probability jackpot other than jackpots C10, F10, and J10 is won while the variable probability state is set, a time saving state in which the number of time savings is 100 is set.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, when a probability variable jackpot is won in a probability variable state, and the probability variable limit number of times is reached in the jackpot, the limit reaching table 202dg3 is set in the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot. The structure is such that the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the . In other words, the table is configured so that when a right-hand hit is made, a table is referred to which is more likely to be executed with heavy emphasis on the lottery of the first special symbol. In other words, the configuration is such that when winning a jackpot within the number of time-savings, there is a high probability of winning an advantageous jackpot type (jackpot with a large number of rounds). With this configuration, even though the fixed variable limit was reached and the variable jackpot was won, a time-saving state was set that was disadvantageous (less advantageous) compared to the variable variable state. However, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming disappointed and make him strongly expect to win the jackpot within the shortened number of times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, a state transition method in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 229. Here, in the tenth embodiment, as described above, four game states are provided: a normal state and a probability state which are disadvantageous to the player, a time saving state and a probability variable state which are advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, two types of variable probability states are provided: a variable probability state in which the number of time reductions is 8 times, and a variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot win. Further, two types of time saving states are provided: a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 8 times, and a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 100 times. In the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the normal state and probability state that are disadvantageous to the player will be referred to as normal mode A and normal mode B, respectively, and the time saving state where the number of time saving times is small (8 times) and probability variable state will be referred to as normal mode A and normal mode B, respectively. are respectively referred to as chance mode A and chance mode B, and the time saving state where the number of time reductions is large (100 times) is referred to as the pullback mode, and the variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot (a state in which consecutive wins are virtually guaranteed) ) is called consecutive mode. First, a mode transition method in normal mode A will be described with reference to the upper left side of FIG. 229.

As shown on the upper left side of FIG. 229, in normal mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a jackpot is won. In other words, if the player wins either jackpot A10 or D10, which is determined at a rate of 7% in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is a consecutive game mode that is advantageous to the player. is set to In addition, if you win any of the jackpots B10, C10, E10, and F10, which are determined at a rate of 83% when you win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot will be changed to chance mode B. Set. Further, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and either jackpot G10 or H10 determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the jackpot is set to chance mode A. In this way, if you win a jackpot in normal mode A, the time-saving state of the normal symbol will always be given at least 8 times, so by winning the jackpot again within the number of time-savings, you can move to consecutive winning mode. can be expected. Furthermore, when a jackpot occurs in normal mode A, the player mainly wins (at a high rate of 83%) one of jackpots B10, C10, E10, and F10, and shifts to chance mode B. In other words, in most cases, it is possible to receive eight lottery draws in a high probability state of special symbols, so it is possible to make the player expect more strongly to shift to the consecutive winning mode.

Next, a mode transition method in normal mode B will be described with reference to the upper right side of FIG. 229. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 229, in the normal mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, if the player wins either jackpot A10 or D10, which is determined at a rate of 7% in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is advantageous to the player. Set to continuous mode. In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached due to the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot is set to chance mode A. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, if either jackpot B10 or E10, which is determined at a rate of 43%, is won, the mode after the jackpot is set to chance mode B. In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached due to the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot is set to chance mode A. Further, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and either jackpot G10 or H10 determined at a rate of 10% is won, the mode after the jackpot is set to chance mode A. On the other hand, if you win either jackpot C10 or F10, which is determined at a rate of 40% when you win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot will be changed to normal mode B again. Set. That is, a disadvantageous state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is not provided is set. In addition, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached due to the jackpot, the mode after the jackpot is set to normal mode A. In other words, the time-saving state will not be applied whether or not the variable probability limit is reached. In this way, if you win a jackpot in normal mode B, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is only given at a rate of 60%, so in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot, normal mode B is better than normal mode A. becomes disadvantageous. However, in normal mode B, the jackpot probability is increased by more than three times, so normal mode B is more advantageous in terms of jackpot probability.

Next, a mode transition method in chance mode A will be described with reference to the center left side of FIG. 229. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 229, in chance mode A, there is a possibility of transitioning to another state not only when winning a jackpot but also when the time saving number ends. Specifically, as shown on the center left side of FIG. 229, if you win a guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot A10 to F10, I10, J10) that is determined at a 90% rate when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, The mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the consecutive win mode that is most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if a normal jackpot (jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10% is won when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions has elapsed in chance mode A (the special symbol lottery has been missed eight times in a row), the game shifts to normal mode A, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in chance mode A, the player can play the game with a strong expectation of winning the jackpot during the eight time saving times.

Next, a mode transition method in chance mode B will be described with reference to the center right side of FIG. 229. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 229, in chance mode B, like chance mode A, there is a possibility of transitioning to another state if a jackpot is won or if the time saving number ends. Specifically, as shown on the center right side of FIG. 229, if you win a guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot A10 to F10, I10, J10) that is determined at a 90% rate when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, The mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the consecutive win mode that is most advantageous to the player. Note that if the jackpot reaches the probability variable limit number of times, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, if a normal jackpot (jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10) determined at a rate of 10% is won when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, when the number of time reductions elapses in chance mode B (the special symbol lottery is unsuccessful 8 times in a row), the game shifts to normal mode B, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in chance mode B as well as in chance mode A, the player can play the game with a strong expectation of winning the jackpot during the eight time saving times.

Next, a mode transition method in the pullback mode will be described with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 229. As shown on the lower left side of FIG. 229, in the pullback mode, similarly to chance modes A and B, there is a possibility of transitioning to another state if a jackpot is won or if the time saving number ends. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 229, if you win a guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot A10 to F10, I10, J10) that is determined at a 90% rate when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, The mode after the end of the jackpot is set to the consecutive win mode that is most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the number of times of time reduction elapses in the pullback mode (the special symbol lottery is unsuccessful 100 times in a row), the game shifts to the normal mode A which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if you win a regular jackpot (jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10), which is determined at a rate of 10% when you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot ends will change to the pullback mode again. Set (loop pullback mode).

Next, with reference to the lower right side of FIG. 229, a mode transition method in the consecutive game mode will be described. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 229, in the consecutive game mode, there is a possibility of transitioning to another state only when a jackpot is won. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of Figure 229, if you win a regular jackpot (jackpot G10, H10, K10, L10) that is determined at a rate of 10% when you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, The mode after the jackpot is set to the pullback mode. On the other hand, if you win a guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot A10 to F10, I10, J10) that is determined 90% of the time when you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the mode after the jackpot is changed to is set to the most advantageous consecutive game mode (loop the consecutive game mode). In addition, if you win the probability variable jackpot and reach the probability variable limit number of times, the pullback mode is set after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, in order to shift to the consecutive game mode that is advantageous for the player, basically, the player should shift to the chance modes A and B in which the number of time saving times is set to 8, and then So, it is necessary to win the jackpot within a relatively small number of times, 8 times. However, once the player shifts to consecutive game mode, an extremely advantageous situation is formed in which consecutive game mode and jackpot are repeated at a high rate of 90%. It can give you great satisfaction.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 222(b). FIG. 222(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(b), the RAM 222 in the tenth embodiment has a probability variation flag 203ga, a limit counter 203gb, a variation pattern scenario, and a variable pattern scenario, compared to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. Storage area 203gc, special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd, special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge, special figure 1 variable time counter 203gf, special figure 2 variable time counter 203gg, special figure 2 variable stop flag 203gh, and limit reached flag 203gi are added. They are different in that they are In addition, in the tenth embodiment, since a small hit is not installed, a small hit type storage area 203e, a small hit start flag 203f, a small hit medium flag 203g, a V passing jackpot type storage area 203h, a V flag 203i, Another difference is that the V passing flag 203j is deleted.

The probability change flag 203ga is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of the special symbol is set. If this probability variation flag 203ga is on, it indicates that the special symbol is set to a high probability state, and if it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is set to a low probability state. In other words, when the variable probability flag 203ga is set to on, the gaming state is a variable probability state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a potential state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal symbol: Low probability state) is set. The probability change flag 203ga is set to OFF in its initial state, and is also set to OFF when the special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped (see S1877 in FIG. 239 and S1977 in FIG. 244). On the other hand, if a variable probability jackpot is won and the variable probability limit number of times has not been reached, the variable probability flag 203ga is set to ON at the end of the variable probability jackpot (see S1676 in FIG. 246). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38). In other words, in the tenth embodiment, once the probability variable flag 203ga is set to ON, the probability variable flag 203ga is not set to OFF until the next jackpot is won. In this case, the high probability state of the special symbol set after the jackpot ends will ensure that the next jackpot will be won unless the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are initialized (unless the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on). It is configured to continue until

In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special pattern high-accuracy ending condition for ending the special pattern's high-probability state, the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of special pattern fluctuations) after the special symbol's high-probability state (special-pattern high-probability state) is set. The high probability state of the special symbol may be terminated when the number of times (for example, 50 times) is determined in advance. In this case, instead of the probability variation flag 203ga, a probability variation counter may be provided to count the remaining number of drawings until the special symbol is shifted from a high probability state to a special symbol low probability state.

Furthermore, a plurality of special pattern high-accuracy ending conditions are prepared, such as the special pattern 1 high-accuracy ending condition that can be established based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special pattern high-accuracy state, and the variation of the second special symbol. There are various types of lottery ending conditions, such as the special pattern 2 high-accuracy ending condition that can be established based only on the number of times, and the lottery ending condition that can be established when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small win). It may be configured such that the high probability state of the special symbol is terminated when any of the special symbol high probability termination conditions is satisfied.

The limit counter 203gb is a counter for counting the number of probability change limits. If the value of the limit counter 203gb is less than 11 at the end of the probability variable jackpot, it indicates that the probability variable limit number of times has not been reached, so the state after the jackpot is set to a high probability state of a special symbol. On the other hand, if the value of this limit counter 203gb is 11 at the end of the probability variable jackpot, it indicates that the probability variable limit number of times has been reached, so that the state after the jackpot is set to a low probability state of a special symbol. The initial value of this limit counter 203gb is set to 0, and each time a variable probability jackpot is won, the value is incremented by 1 and updated at the end of the variable probability jackpot (see S1674 in FIG. 246). In addition, the value of this limit counter 203gb is reset to 0 when it is determined that the variable limit has been reached (the counter value has been updated to 11) at the end of the variable jackpot and at the end of the normal jackpot (Fig. 246 (See S1672).

The variable pattern scenario storage area 203gc is a storage area for storing data indicating a variable pattern scenario. When the special symbol starts changing, a change is made to determine the change pattern (change time) according to the change pattern scenario indicated by the data stored in this change pattern scenario storage area 203gc and the number of changes after the end of the jackpot. The pattern table is read. This variable pattern scenario storage area 203gc stores data corresponding to the variable pattern scenario determined with reference to the variable pattern scenario table 202ga at the end of the jackpot (see S1683 in FIG. 246).

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol (a lottery based on the starting winning of the first ball entrance 64 or the right first ball entrance 64r). This is a flag (see S1816 in FIG. 235). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1877 in FIG. 239). When this special pattern 1 jackpot flag 203h is on and the variable display of the second special symbol is in progress, when the variable time of the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is not displayed. A forced stop process is executed (see S1875 in FIG. 239). Thereby, when a jackpot is won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the jackpot is started in duplicate.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing. This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge is set to ON when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery based on the starting prize entered into the second ball entrance 6450) (see S1926 in FIG. 241). This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203ge is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S1977 in FIG. 244). When this special pattern 2 jackpot flag 203ge is on and the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, when the variable time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the symbol will be removed from the first special symbol. A forced stop process is executed (see S1974 in FIG. 244). Thereby, when a jackpot is won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the jackpot is started in duplicate.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg are counters for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Depending on the counter values of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg, it is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is a flag indicating that the period is from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (determined display) with the jackpot stop symbol until the jackpot starts. While this special figure 2 variation stop flag 203gh is set on, execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is avoided (see S1902: Yes in FIG. 240). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a missed symbol (see S1873 in FIG. 239), and avoids the process for executing the variable display of the second special symbol. If so, it is set to off (see S1902 in FIG. 240).

The limit reaching flag 203gi is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation limit number of times has been reached. If this limit reaching flag 203gi is on, it means that the fixed variable limit number has been reached (winning the fixed variable jackpot 11 times in a row), and if it is off, it means that the fixed variable limit number has not been reached. . This limit reaching flag 203gi is initially set to OFF, and is set to ON based on the fact that the counter value of the limit counter 203gb is updated to 11, which is the probability variable limit number, at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 246). (See S1677). Further, this limit reaching flag 203gi is set to OFF at the start of a jackpot (when setting the stop display of the first symbol indicating a jackpot) (see S1877 in FIG. 239 and S1977 in FIG. 244).

Next, with reference to FIG. 230(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 230(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230(a), the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment has a final state display selection mode different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 26(a)). The difference is that the table 222c is deleted and the back mode lottery table 222ga is added. The back mode lottery table 222ga is data that defines data for drawing a lottery for a back mode (production mode) that indicates the expectation level for which a probability change state (consecutive game mode) is set in the consecutive game mode and the pullback mode. It's a table. The details of this rear mode lottery table 222ga will be explained with reference to FIG. 231.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this rear mode lottery table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 231, in this back mode lottery table 222ga, the value of the effect lottery counter that is determined to change the back mode is a combination of the current gaming state and the currently set type of back mode. stipulated for each. Specifically, when the gaming state is a variable probability state and the currently set back mode is a wilderness area (back mode with low expectation of a variable probability state), the effect counter 223e is set to "0 to 9". Forest modes are defined in association with ranges. Therefore, if the probability change state is set and the wilderness area is set, each time a special symbol lottery is executed, there is a probability of 1/10 (10/100) to move to a forest area with a high probability change expectation. It is determined that Note that since the back mode of the sky area is not associated with the value of the effect counter 223e, there is no possibility of jumping from the wilderness area to the sky area.

In addition, if the gaming state is a variable probability state and the currently set back mode is a forest area (a back mode with a relatively high expectation of a variable probability state), the performance counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 2". The wilderness mode is defined in association with "5", and the sky mode is defined in association with "5". Therefore, if the probability change state is set and the forest area is set, each time a special symbol lottery is executed, it is determined that the probability is 3/100 to move to the wilderness area where the probability change expectation is low, and 1 It is determined that the area should be moved to the sky area where the variable state is determined with a probability of /100. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 231, in a state where the sky area is set in the variable probability state, a lottery for transition to another back mode is not performed. Therefore, the sky area, which is the most pleasing back mode, can be continued for a longer period of time, thereby increasing the player's interest. In addition, when the probability change state or time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the first back mode is always set to the wilderness area. In other words, in order to transfer the back mode to the sky area, first pass the 1/10 chance of transfer to the forest area in the wilderness area, and then from the forest area before falling to the wilderness area. , it is necessary to pass the lottery with a probability of 1/100 to move to the sky area. That is, since it is relatively difficult to shift to the sky area even in a variable probability state, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction when the game moves to the sky area.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 231, in the time saving state that is set based on winning the normal jackpot, if the wilderness area (back mode with low expectation of probability change state) is set as the back mode, If the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 4", the transition is made to the forest area. That is, the area is moved to a forest area with a high probability of probability change with a probability of 1/20 (5/100). On the other hand, when the forest area is set, if the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 14", the game moves (falls) to the wilderness area. In other words, the configuration is such that the probability of transitioning from the wilderness area to the forest area is lower and the probability of transitioning (falling) from the forest area to the wilderness area is higher than when a variable state is set. has been done. In other words, since the configuration is such that the ratio of wilderness areas being set (staying ratio) is high, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the current gaming state can be estimated from the rear view mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 231, in the time saving state that is set based on reaching the variable probability limit number of times, if the wilderness area (back mode with low expectation of probability variation state) is set as the background mode, , if the value of the effect counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 19", the transition is made to the forest area. That is, the area is moved to a forest area with a high probability of change expectation with a probability of 1/5 (20/100). On the other hand, when the forest area is set, if the value of the effect counter 223e is within the range of "0", the game moves (falls) to the wilderness area. In other words, in the time saving state that is set when the probability variation limit is reached, it is configured such that the possibility of being set in the forest area is highest. Therefore, it is possible for the player to guess that this is a chance rather than a time-saving state based on a normal jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 230(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 230(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 26(b)). The difference is that the determination flag 223h, temporary time saving information update area 223i, time saving lower limit flag 223j, order end condition flag 223k, time saving end variation flag 223m, and state production counter 223n are deleted.

<About the control process of the main controller in the tenth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 232 to 246. First, timer interrupt processing 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 232. This timer interrupt process 10 is a process executed in place of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment), and is This is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, similar to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

Of the timer interrupt processing 10 in the tenth embodiment, each processing in S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110 and S111 is performed in the timer interrupt processing in the seventh embodiment (and the first embodiment) (FIG. 37). The same processes as those of S101, S102, S105 to S107, S110, and S111 of (see) are executed.

In the timer interrupt processing 10 (see FIG. 232) in the tenth embodiment, after executing the process of S102, the first per-win random number counter C1, the first per-win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per-win random number counter The random number counter C4 is updated (S141), and then the special symbol variation process 10 is executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment (S142), and S105 to S107, S110, and After executing the process of S111, this process ends.

Next, details of the special symbol variation process 10 (S142) in the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 233. This special symbol variation process 10 (S142) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 188) in the seventh embodiment, and is a process for making various settings regarding the variable display of special symbols. be. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 10 (S142). When this special symbol variation processing 10 (S142) is executed, it is first determined whether the current jackpot is occurring (S281), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S281: Yes), settings regarding the variation display are made. Since there is no possibility of doing so, this process is ended immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S281, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (S281: No), then check whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203gf is greater than 0 (i.e., the special figure 1 is fluctuating). (S282), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203gf is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S282: No), the first special symbol variation start process ( S283) is executed, and then the process moves to S287 where a variation process regarding the special figure 2 is executed. Details of this first special symbol variation start process (S283) will be described later with reference to FIG. 234.

On the other hand, in the process of S282, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203gf is larger than 0 (the first special symbol is being displayed in variation) (S282: Yes), the first special symbol variation is executed. Intermediate processing (S284) is executed. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, this first special symbol variation execution process (S284) is to execute the process during special symbol 1 variation. When the first special symbol variation execution processing (S284) is completed, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203gf is 0) (S285), and the end timing of the variation time is determined (S285). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S285: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S286) is executed, and then the process moves to S287. Details of this first special symbol variation stop processing (S286) will be described later with reference to FIG. 239. On the other hand, in the process of S285, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S285: No), the process of S286 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S287.

In each process of S287 to S291, the same process as each process of S282 to S286 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S287 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S287), and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg is determined. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203gg is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S287: No), a second special symbol variation start process (S288) is executed, and then this process is ended. The details of this second special symbol variation start process (S288) will be described later with reference to FIG. 240.

On the other hand, in the process of S287, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203gg is larger than 0 (S287: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process (S289) is executed. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 243, this second special symbol variation execution process (S289) is to execute the process during special symbol 2 variation.

When the second special symbol fluctuation execution processing (S289) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation time (whether the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is 0) (S290), and the end timing of the fluctuation time is determined (S290). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S290: Yes), a second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S291) is executed and this process is ended. Details of this second special symbol variation stop processing (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. 244. On the other hand, in the process of S292, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S290: No), the process of S291 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the first special symbol variation start process (S283), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S142 in FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S283).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S283), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is acquired (S1801), and the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1802). In the process of S1802, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is larger than 0 (S1802: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted by 1. (S1803), and sets a pending ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball counter 203b after the subtraction (S1804).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203b from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b.

When the process of S1804 is completed, next, the data in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S1805). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

When the process of S1805 is completed, next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S1806). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the process of S1806 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 236). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 236, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807) is performed based on the result of the judgment of the first special symbol and the storage in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807) is completed, a game state update process is then executed (S1808). This game state update process (S1808) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. This is a process for updating the status of the machine 10. When the process of S1808 is completed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1802, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 0 (S1802: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806) which is a process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S283 in FIG. 234) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. explain. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S1811). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203ga is set to on (S1812). That is, it is determined whether the special symbol is in a high probability state (variable probability state, potential state). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ga is on (that is, the special symbol is in a probability variation state) (S1812: Yes), the first winning random number table 202a for high probability times (see FIG. 223(a)) is set. It is determined whether or not the prescribed random number value for a jackpot matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S1813). On the other hand, in the process of S1812, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203ga is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S1812: No), the first winning random number table 202a for low probability ( It is determined whether or not the random number value for a jackpot specified in FIG. 223(a) matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained ( S1814).

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S1813 or S1814 is a jackpot (S1815), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S1815: Yes), the special map 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON (S1816), The lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S1817). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, a jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1818), and data corresponding to the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area. 203ec (S1819), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1815, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loser (S1815: No), a loser symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1820), and then , this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S283 in FIG. 234), will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1807 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S1806 in FIG. 235), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot or not. 1. It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot has been set (S1821). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is on. This special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to ON in the process of S1816 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235).

In the process of S1821, if it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set on) (S1821: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot described above is determined. Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1811 in the determination process (see FIG. 235), the jackpot type is determined from the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 224(a)) (S1822). , the process moves to S1823.

On the other hand, in the process of S1821, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss (that is, the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is off) (S1821: No), the process of S1822 is skipped. Then, the process moves to S1823.

In the process of S1823, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S1823). Next, a fluctuation pattern scenario (see FIG. 228) corresponding to the data stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203203gc is identified, and the fluctuation pattern scenario is associated with the current number of fluctuations (number of drawings) in the identified fluctuation pattern scenario. The fluctuation pattern table is read (S1824). When the process of S1824 is completed, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern table (S1825), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is executed based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Set (S1826).

When the process of S1826 is finished, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1827), and then a start of variation of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S1828), and the process of S1825 is set. A value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203gf (S1829), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the game state update process (S1808), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 234) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update process (S1808). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, of the state of the probability change flag 203ga, which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203k, only the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is updated when the special symbol starts changing. In order to do so, in the game state update process (see FIG. 237), which is a process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see FIG. 234), the system is configured to execute a process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203k. There is.

Although the details will be described later, the probability change flag 203ga that is set to on is set to off when the jackpot variation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

In other words, among the two conditional elements (the state of the probability change flag 203ga, the value of the time saving counter 203k) that are referenced when setting the gaming state, one conditional element is updated at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the other conditional By allowing the elements to be updated when the special symbols stop varying, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming states set by combining two conditional elements.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 237) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1831). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k is 0 (S1831: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1831: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S1832), and the number of remaining time saving times indicating the value of the time saving medium counter 203k is A command is set (S1833). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203k after the subtraction has become 0 (S1834), and if it is determined that it has become 0 (S1834: Yes), then the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON. It is determined whether there is one (S1835). Here, if it is determined that the probability variable flag 203ga is set to ON (S1835: No), the probability variable state is not given the time-saving game (that is, the probability state), so the probability state is indicated. A status command is set (S1836), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1835, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203ga is not set to ON (S1835: No), the status is in the normal status, so a status command indicating the normal status is set (S1837), and this process end. On the other hand, in the process of S1834, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not 0 (S1834: No), this process is directly ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously until the next special symbol jackpot is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot). However, in addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203ga, and the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted every time a variation of the special symbol is executed, so that the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0. In some cases, the high probability state of the special symbol may be changed to a low probability state.

When using such a configuration, the game state update process (S1808) shown with reference to FIG. By providing a game state update process when special symbol variation stops that updates the value of the probability variation counter, it is possible to determine whether or not to end the high probability state of special symbols and whether to end the high probability state of normal symbols. It is possible to perform the process of determining whether the

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, regarding the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S284) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S142 in FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Give an explanation. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S284). When this first special symbol variation execution process (S284) is executed, first, the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203gf is decremented by 1 and updated (S1851), and then the display on the first symbol display device 37 is changed. The information is updated (S1852), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the first special symbol variation stop process (S286), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S142 in FIG. 233), will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation stop processing (S286).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S286), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set on (that is, whether it is the timing to stop the first special symbol at the jackpot symbol) (S1871) . In the process of S1871, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to on (S1871: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203gg is 1 or more ( That is, it is determined whether the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed (S1872). In the process of S1872, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203gg is a value of 1 or more (the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner) (S1872: Yes), the special figure 2 variation is stopped. The flag 203gh is set on (S1873), and a special figure 2 variation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203gh is set (S1874). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S1875).

When the process of S1875 is finished, the jackpot start corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1876), and the data in the winning state storage area 203ec is updated according to the current gaming state (S1878). Next, the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203gd, the special drawing 2 jackpot flag 203ge, the variable probability flag 203ga, the short time counter 203k, and the limit reaching flag 203gi are all reset (S1878), and the jackpot flag 203d is set to ON (S1879). , the process moves to S1880.

On the other hand, in the process of S1871, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203gd is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S1871: Yes), and in the process of S1872, the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203gg is If it is determined that it is 0 (S1872: No), the processes of S1873 to S1879 are skipped and the process moves to the process of S1880.

In the process of S1880, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S1880). Thereafter, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 (S1881), and this process is ended.

As described above, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S288), the processing (S1873 to S1879) of stopping the fluctuation display at the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S1872: No), a process (S1875) is executed to forcibly stop the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner at a missed symbol.

In addition, in the present first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed as a winning symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to create a more natural presentation compared to the case where the object is forced to stop due to an error. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the start of the jackpot is set in the process of S1876 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203ec in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235). However, for example, the jackpot starts in the process of S1876 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203ec in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) using the opening period of the jackpot game. may also be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S288) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S288). In this second special symbol variation start process (S288), a process for starting variation of the special symbol 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the processing related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 239, the subject of variation is only changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. A detailed explanation of the elements will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S290), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203gh is set to on (S1901). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to ON (S1901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to OFF (S1902), and this process ends. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203gh is a flag that is set to ON when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. . That is, if the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is on, it means that a jackpot is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is on in the process of S1901, the present process is ended without executing each process of S1903 to S1910 for setting the start of fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203gh is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S1901: No), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter The value (N2) of 203b2 is acquired (S1903), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is a value larger than 0 (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is larger than 0 (S1904: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is subtracted by 1. (S1905), and sets a pending ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 after the subtraction (S1906).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control in the external output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203b2 from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203b2.

When the process of S1906 is completed, next, the data in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted to the previous data (S1907). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

When the process of S1907 is completed, next, a second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S1908). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908) is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the process of S1908 is completed, next, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 242). Although the details will be described later, this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S1909) is based on the judgment result of the second special symbol and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of .

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909) is completed, the above-described gaming state update process is then executed (S1910 (S1808)). When the process of S1910 ends, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b2 is 0 (S1904: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908) which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S290 in FIG. 240) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. explain. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) described above is executed, so here, mainly the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) will be explained.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1908) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S1921). Then, the process of S1922 to S1924 is executed to obtain a lottery result as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on each obtained counter value and the state of the probability variable flag 203ga. Each of these processes differs only in that the counter value used for lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area, and other than that, the same control as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see Figure 235) is performed. is executed.

When the process of S1923 or S1924 is completed, it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1925), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S1925: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined. The processing of S1926 to S1929 for setting the jackpot is executed, and the present processing ends. In each of these processes of S1926 to S1929, the same processes as those of S1816 to S1819 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 235) are executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1925, if it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a jackpot (S1925: No), a losing symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set ( S1820), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see S288 in FIG. ) will be explained. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1909 in FIG. 242), in contrast to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 236) and the process related to the variation of the first special symbol, Since the object of the symbol is simply changed from the special symbol to the second special symbol, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the second special symbol variation execution process (S289), which is one process in the special symbol variation process (see S142 in FIG. 233) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain the content. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process (S289). In this second special symbol variation execution process (S289), a process of subtracting the variation time is executed.

When the second special symbol variation execution process (S289) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203gg is updated by subtracting 1 (S1951), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. is updated (S1952), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S291) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S291). This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S291) is to execute the processing when stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

In the second special symbol variation stop process (S291), the target of variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol compared to the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 239) described above. The detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, details of the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 245. This jackpot control process 10 (S1531) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 192) in the seventh embodiment. Of the jackpot control processing 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment, each processing in S1601 to S1612 is the same as each processing in S1601 to S1612 in the jackpot control processing 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 192). is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 10 (S1531) in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is the end timing of the ending period (ending effect) (S1612), the end of the current jackpot game is set. A jackpot end process is executed for the purpose of the game (S1631), and then this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1631) will be explained with reference to FIG. 246.

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S1631). This jackpot end process (S1631) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above. In this jackpot end processing (S1631), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S1671), and if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S1671: Yes), the limit counter 1 is added to the value of 203gb (S1674). Next, it is determined whether the value of the limit counter 203gb after the addition by the process of S1674 is 11 (S1675), and if it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203gb after the addition is 11 (S1675: Yes) , the limit reaching flag 203gi is set on (S1677), and the process moves to S1672.

On the other hand, in the process of S1675, if it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203gb after the addition is not 11 (it is a value of 10 or less) (S1675: No), the probability change flag 203ga is set to ON (S1676), The process moves to S1678.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 1671 that the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (it is a normal jackpot) (S1671: No), the processes of S1674 to S1677 are skipped and the process moves to the process of S1672. In the process of S1672, the value of the limit counter 203gb is set to 0 (S1672), the probability variation flag 203ga is set to OFF (S1673), and the process proceeds to S1678.

In the process of S1678, the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type being executed, the data in the winning state storage area 203ec, and the state of the limit attainment flag 203gi is read from the time reduction granting table 202e (see FIG. 225) (S1678 ), and sets the read time saving number as the counter value of the time saving counter 203k (S1679). Next, a time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting contents is set (S1680), and a state command corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot is set (S1681).

Next, a fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type being executed, the data in the winning state storage area 203ec, and the state of the limit reaching flag 203gi is identified (S1682), and the data indicating the identified fluctuation pattern scenario is changed. It is stored in the pattern scenario storage area 203gc (S1683). Next, the end of the jackpot is set (S1684), the jackpot flag 203d is set to OFF (S1685), and this process is ended.

By executing this jackpot ending process, the gaming state can be appropriately set according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot, and whether or not the probability variation limit has been reached.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 247 and 248. First, with reference to FIG. 247, the variable display setting process 10 (S2141) in the tenth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 10 (S2141) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62, S2114) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment).

In the variable display setting process 10 (S2141) in the tenth embodiment, the effect setting process (S8004) is different from the variable display setting process (see FIG. 62, S2114) in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment) described above. ) is different in that the effect setting process 10 (S2831) is executed, and other than that, the same process is executed, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the effect setting process 10 (S2831) executed in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this effect setting process 10 (S2831). This effect setting process 10 (S2831) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 247, S2141) executed in the tenth embodiment.

In the effect setting process 10 (S2831), first, it is determined whether the variable display currently being executed is a jackpot variable pattern (S2921). In the process of S2921, if it is determined that the fluctuation display currently being executed is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S2921: Yes), the fluctuation display mode for jackpot is selected as the fluctuation display mode (S2922), and then the main Finish the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S2921: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state (S2923). In the process of S2923, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a probability variable state or a time saving state (S2923: No), the process moves to S2928. On the other hand, in the process of S2923, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state (S2923: Yes), the back mode lottery table 222ga (see FIG. 231) is read out (S2924), and the current gaming state is The back mode is randomly selected according to the state and whether the limit has been reached (S2925), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery has been selected when the back mode is changed (S2926). If the back mode is not changed (S2926: No), the process moves to S2928.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the back mode is to be changed (S2926: Yes), a display back image change command corresponding to the changed back mode is set (S2927), and the process proceeds to S2928.

In the process of S2928, the variable display mode for losing is selected as the variable display mode (S2928), and then this process ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, there is a chance that there is a higher possibility of transitioning to the normal modes A and B (normal state, potential state) which are disadvantageous to the player, and the consecutive winning mode which is advantageous to the player. Modes A and B (time-saving state where the number of time-savings is 8 times, variable probability state), continuous win mode that is most advantageous to the player (probable variable state that continues until the next jackpot), and pull-back mode that is relatively advantageous to the player (time-saving state, variable probability state) It is configured to have 6 modes (time saving state where the number of times is 100 times), and if you win a jackpot in normal mode A or B, you will most likely move to either chance mode A or B (direct connection mode). The structure was designed to reduce the possibility of transitioning to sho mode. In other words, if the player does not win the jackpot in either chance mode A or B (that is, if he does not win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery within 8 times after switching to chance mode A or B), it is advantageous for the player. It is configured in such a way that it is difficult to shift to a continuous mode. As a result, the player can feel a sense of accomplishment simply by shifting to the consecutive game mode, and thus the player's interest in the game can be increased. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the consecutive winnings mode, the consecutive winnings mode is set again after the jackpot ends at a high rate (in the case of a jackpot with a 90% chance of winning). Even if you win a low percentage (10% percentage) of regular jackpots or reach the fixed variable limit, you will always switch to the pullback mode without directly falling into a disadvantageous state. It was configured as follows. Then, when winning a jackpot in the pull-back mode, the game is configured to shift (return) only to the consecutive-game mode or the pull-back mode, as in the case of winning a jackpot in the multiple-games mode. In other words, as long as the player wins a jackpot within the number of time reductions in the pull-back mode, there is no possibility of shifting to a disadvantageous gaming state, so the degree of advantage when shifting to the consecutive game mode can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game when the game shifts to the consecutive game mode.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the mode shifts to consecutive winnings mode (a variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot), and the consecutive winnings mode and jackpot are repeated by continuing to win a variable probability jackpot that wins at a rate of 90%. , when the upper limit number of times of the special symbol's probability variable state (probability variable limit number of times) is reached, regardless of whether you win the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot, instead of setting the pullback mode, the time saving number (100 If you win a jackpot (a so-called pullback occurs) during a round (rounds), the percentage of an advantageous jackpot type (jackpot with a large number of rounds) will be higher than when you win a jackpot during a variable probability state. It was configured as follows. More specifically, the jackpot with the second special symbol is configured so that the percentage of jackpot types with low advantage (selection percentage with a small number of rounds) is higher than the jackpot with the first special symbol. In the pullback mode that is set when the probability variation limit number of times is reached, the lottery frequency of the second special symbol is configured to be extremely low. In other words, the variation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is significantly longer than the variation time of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol (for example, it is uniformly 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result). The present invention is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed a plurality of times while the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In other words, the configuration is made such that the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery using the first special symbol is high. Thereby, when the probability variable limit number of times is reached, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the jackpot will be pulled back, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the present tenth embodiment, only when the probability variable limit number of times is reached and the time saving state (pullback mode) is set, during the pullback mode, emphasis is placed on the drawing of the relatively advantageous first special symbol. Although the configuration has been described to form a state to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the pullback mode is set after the jackpot is won by winning a regular jackpot in the consecutive game mode, the lottery of the first special symbol will be more likely to be executed (the table 202dg3 for when the limit is reached is referred to and the fluctuation pattern (determined). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect that a pullback will occur in each pullback mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

In the tenth embodiment, when the game shifts to the consecutive game mode, the consecutive game mode is configured to always continue until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time the lottery conditions for a special symbol are met in consecutive game mode, a lottery (fall lottery) is executed to determine whether or not to transition (fall) the special symbol to a low probability state (pullback mode or normal mode A). Specifications may be adopted. In this case, if it is determined that the state will be changed to a special symbol with a low probability state within 100 times after the end of the jackpot, it will be set to the pullback mode until a total of 100 drawings are completed, and after the 100th drawing. If it is determined that the user will fall, the normal mode A may be set. Further, in this case, when the lottery is caused to fall into the pull-back mode, the lottery may be executed with a heavy emphasis on the advantageous first special symbol lottery during the set pull-back mode. With this configuration, after falling into the pull-back mode, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the pull-back will occur, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Modification of 10th embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 252. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, when the jackpot and the consecutive game mode are repeated in the consecutive game mode and the probability variable limit is reached, and the pullback mode is set, an advantageous (i.e., winning the jackpot) By configuring the lottery so that only the lottery of the first special symbol (in which an advantageous jackpot type is easily determined when configured so that it is possible.

On the other hand, in this modified example, in the pullback mode that is set based on reaching the probability limit number of times, it is not possible to win the jackpot within the time saving number of times, and the transition to normal mode A (normal state) ( The configuration is such that a special state is formed in which, when the user falls down (fall), winning a jackpot in the normal mode A causes a higher rate of transition to the continuous winning mode than normal. This makes it possible to make the player want to continue playing the game even after the transition from the pull-back mode to the normal mode A, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 249, the board structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be described. FIG. 249 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 249, the board configuration of the game board 13 in this modification is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 220) in the tenth embodiment described above, except that the first ball entrance 64 is replaced with , in that a sorting prize device 750 is provided, and instead of the first right ball entrance 64r, a second right ball entrance 6400r is provided as a starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. The difference is that the second ball entrance port 6450 is removed. The sorting winning device 750 sends the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the sorting winning device 750 through the opening 750a at the top to the central first winning hole, which is a type of starting winning opening that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured such that it can be distributed to either the ball entry hole 64c or the central second ball entry hole 6400c, which is a type of starting winning hole that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, the game balls flowing into the distribution winning device 750 through the opening 750a are received by the distribution member 750b provided directly below the opening 750a, and are passed through the central first ball entrance 64c. The ball is caused to flow down toward either the central second ball entry port 6400c. The distribution member 750b is configured to be variable between a state where it is tilted to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 249) and a state where it is tilted to the left side when viewed from the front, and in a state where it is tilted to the right side when viewed from the front. The game balls flowing in from the opening 750a are received by the left side portion of the distribution member 750b, and as a result of the weight of the received game balls, the game balls are rotated counterclockwise and switched to a state tilted to the left when viewed from the front. The game ball received by the member 750b is dropped toward the central first ball entry port 64c located on the lower left side when viewed from the front. On the other hand, when the unfavorable w3 opening member 750b is tilted to the left in front view, the game balls flowing in from the opening 750a are received by the right side of the distribution member 750b, and the weight of the received game balls is used to rotate the game balls clockwise. As a result of the rotation and switching to the state where the ball is tilted to the right side when viewed from the front, the game balls received by the distribution member 750b fall toward the central second ball entrance 6400c located at the lower right side when viewed from the front. . In other words, each time a game ball enters the opening 750a, the distribution member 750b receives the game ball and causes it to flow down alternately to the first central ball entrance 64c and the second central ball entrance 6400c. has been done. Thereby, the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently.

<Electrical configuration in a modification of the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. Here, in this modification, the specified contents of the variation pattern table 202d, time saving provision table 202e, and variation pattern scenario table 202ga are different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the tenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 222(a)). Only some changes have been made. Therefore, illustration of the configuration of the ROM 202 is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 250, details of the normal table 202dg1 that constitutes the variation pattern table 202d in this modification will be described. This normal table 202dg1 is similar to the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)) in the tenth embodiment described above, in the gaming state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set. This is a data table that defines data for determining (selecting) a fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery when a special symbol lottery is executed. FIG. 250(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202dg1.

As shown in FIG. 250(a), the normal table 202dg1 in this modified example distributes the first special symbol of the normal table 202dg1 (see FIG. 225(b)) in the tenth embodiment, regardless of the symbol type. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern with the same distribution. In other words, in this modification, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the gaming state (normal state, potential state) in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the first special symbol lottery is executed. Similarly to the above case, the configuration is such that a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected (an extremely long variation of 600 seconds cannot be selected). As described above with reference to FIG. 249, in this modification, the first ball entry hole 64 (the starting winning hole that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol) in the tenth embodiment is located at the position where it was provided. , a sorting device 750 (configured to alternately place game balls into the center first ball entry port 64c and the center second ball entry port 6400c) is provided, and in the normal state of the normal symbol, the normal game method (left This is because it is configured such that by performing the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, it is easy to execute them in parallel (at the same time). In other words, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed without using an irregular gaming method (a gaming method in which a right-handed player is hit in the normal state of the normal symbol), which improves gaming efficiency. As a purpose, the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be shorter than that of the tenth embodiment.

Next, details of the limit reaching table 202dg3 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 250(b). This limit reaching table 202dg3 is similar to the limit reaching table 202dg3 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 226(b)), even though the probability variable limit number of times is reached and the probability variable jackpot is won, the This is a data table that may be referred to in order to determine (select) the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol when the period after the end of the jackpot is set to a low probability state of the special symbol.

FIG. 250(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202dg3 for when the limit is reached. As shown in FIG. 250(b), the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)) in this modification is different from the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226(b)) in the tenth embodiment described above. ), the correspondence relationship between the value range of the variation type counter CS1 for each lottery result and the selected (determined) variation pattern (variation time) is completely opposite between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. They are different in that they are different. In other words, the correspondence relationship in the first special symbol of the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226(b)) in the tenth embodiment described above is the same as the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)) in this modification. ) corresponds to the second special symbol. In addition, the correspondence relationship in the second special symbol of the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 226(b)) in the tenth embodiment described above is different from the correspondence relationship in the second special symbol of the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)) in this modification. ) corresponds to the first special symbol. Therefore, in this modification, when the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250(b)), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is extremely long, 600 seconds, regardless of the lottery result. While the fluctuation time is always set, a relatively short fluctuation time (3 seconds to 30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. As a result, during the period when the table 202dg3 for reaching the limit is referenced (when the variable probability limit is reached and the special symbol lottery number after the end of the jackpot is 101 or later), the distribution winning device 750 is activated by left-handed hitting. When a game ball is aimed, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed only every 600 seconds, while the lottery for the second special symbol can be performed relatively frequently. In other words, if you win a jackpot, you can place more emphasis on the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to determine an advantageous jackpot type (a jackpot type in which a variable probability state that continues until the next jackpot is given), so that other It is possible to form a special normal state (special state) that is more advantageous than the normal state to which the machine has transitioned under certain conditions (such as when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized or when a jackpot is won). Therefore, since the player can be made to want to continue playing the game during the special state, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, details of the time saving granting table 202e in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 251. Similar to the time saving granting table 202e in the tenth embodiment, this time saving granting table 202e sets the number of working hours at the end of the jackpot depending on the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot (the counter value of the working time saving counter 203k is This is a data table that is referenced when setting FIG. 251 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the time saving grant table 202e in this modification.

As shown in FIG. 251, the time saving granting table 202e in this modification (see FIG. 251) is different from the stipulated contents of the time saving granting table 202e in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 227) in the second special symbol. The difference is that the number of time saving grants for some of the jackpots (jackpot I10, J10) has been changed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 251, for the jackpot I10 (9-round variable probability jackpot) won in the normal state, for jackpots that have not reached the variable probability limit number of times, the number of time reductions that continue until the next jackpot (for example, 65,536 times) are defined in association with each other, and a time saving number of 8 times is defined in association with the jackpot after reaching the probability variable limit number of times. Further, for the jackpot I10 won in the probability state, 8 times is associated with and prescribed as the time saving number even if the winning occurs before the probability variable limit is reached or even if the probability variable limit is reached. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, for the jackpot I10 (9 round probability variable jackpot) won in the gaming state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, probability variable state), the same as other probability variable jackpots. The number of time saving grants is associated. In other words, the number of time-savings that will continue until the next jackpot is defined in relation to the winnings before reaching the fixed-variable limit, and the number of time-savings of 100 times is defined in correspondence with the winnings after reaching the fixed-variable limit. ing.

In addition, regarding the number of time-saving grants for jackpot J10, the same number of time-savings as jackpot C10 and jackpot F10 are defined in association with each other. That is, for the jackpot J10 (3 round probability variable jackpot) won in the normal state, 8 times is defined as the time saving number in association. Further, for the jackpot J10 won in the probability state, 0 times is associated and defined as the time saving number even if the winning occurs before the probability variable limit is reached or even if the probability variable limit number of times has been reached. In other words, if the jackpot J10 is won in the probability state, the time saving state of the normal symbol will not be awarded even once, which will be extremely disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 251, for the jackpot J10 (3 round probability variable jackpot) won in the gaming state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, probability variable state), the same as other probability variable jackpots. The number of time saving grants is associated. In other words, the number of time-savings that will continue until the next jackpot is defined in relation to the winnings before reaching the fixed-variable limit, and the number of time-savings of 100 times is defined in association with the winnings after reaching the fixed-variable limit. ing.

In this way, this modification is configured to have a higher degree of advantage than the tenth embodiment when winning a probability variable jackpot (jackpot I10, J10) in the second special symbol lottery in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, if you win a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the number of time reductions that will continue until the next jackpot is set is set at a rate of 27% (if you win jackpot I10) (i.e. , directly shifts to consecutive game mode), and at a rate of 73% (when winning jackpots J10 to L10), 8 time saving times are set (that is, shifts to either chance mode A or B) It was configured as follows. In other words, under normal conditions, when a jackpot is achieved in the first special symbol lottery, the percentage of players who directly switch to consecutive winning mode after the jackpot ends is 7% (the percentage of winning either jackpot A10 or D10). It is configured so that the rate of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery and shifting to consecutive winnings mode is nearly four times higher than that of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can play the game with strong expectations of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. In addition, when the limit reaching table 202dg3 (see FIG. 250) is referred to and the fluctuation pattern is selected, the possibility of directly transitioning to the continuous play mode increases, so the transition to the special state It is possible to improve the player's motivation for playing the game in such a case. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ga in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 252. Similar to the variable pattern scenario table 202ga in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 228), the variable pattern scenario table 202ga in this modification has a combination of the number of drawings of special symbols after the end of the jackpot and the type of the variable pattern table to be referred to. This is a data table that is referenced to select a correspondence relationship (variation pattern scenario). FIG. 252 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this variation pattern scenario table 202ga.

As shown in FIG. 252, in this modification, the variation pattern scenario that is set when the probability variation limit number of times is reached is partially changed from the variation pattern scenario table 202ga (see FIG. 228) in the tenth embodiment. The only difference is that More specifically, if you win a probability variable jackpot in a probability variable state and reach the probability variable limit number of times due to the jackpot, the time saving table 202dg2 is referenced after the jackpot ends until the 100th lottery is executed. In the 101st and subsequent drawings, a variation pattern scenario is set in which the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to. In other words, by repeating consecutive winnings and jackpots, the number of guaranteed variable limits is reached and the pullback mode is set, and it is not possible to win the jackpot during the pullback mode (time-saving state where the number of time-savings is 100 times). In this case, in the subsequent normal state, each time a special symbol lottery is executed, the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to and a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. Therefore, since it is possible to carry out the lottery with a heavy emphasis on the second special symbol, which is relatively advantageous (if you win a jackpot, there is a high probability of going directly to consecutive winning mode), even after the withdrawal mode ends. , can make the player want to continue playing the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the tenth embodiment, the probability variable limit is reached by repeating the successive game mode and the jackpot, the pullback mode is set, and the jackpot is hit during the pullback mode. The configuration is such that a special state is set in which when the player is unable to win and shifts to the normal mode A which is disadvantageous to the player, the ratio of shifting to the consecutive game mode is increased by winning a jackpot. In other words, the drawing of the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous (it is difficult for the consecutive game mode to be set even if a jackpot is won in the normal state), is rarely executed, and the lottery for the first special symbol, which is advantageous (if the jackpot is won in the normal state, the consecutive game mode is not set), is almost never executed. The present invention is configured to create a state in which it is possible to execute the lottery with a heavy emphasis on the lottery of the second special symbol (with a high proportion of cases). This makes it possible to improve the player's motivation for playing the game when the game transitions to the special state.

Here, it is generally known that gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with gaming states that are advantageous to players, such as a variable probability state and a time saving state. Among such conventional gaming machines, there are machines that repeat the advantageous gaming state and the jackpot at a relatively high rate once they shift to an advantageous gaming state. The aim was to increase the interest of players. However, in such conventional gaming machines, when an advantageous gaming state ends and an unfavorable gaming state (for example, a normal state) is set, it is difficult to make people want to continue playing in the unfavorable gaming state. The problem was that it became difficult.

On the other hand, in this modification, if a special state (a state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the limit reaching table 202dg3) is set after the end of the pullback mode, the game in the disadvantageous normal state is Since the player can be made to want to continue playing, the player's motivation for playing can be maintained even after the advantageous gaming state ends. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In this modification, the special state is set after the end of the pull-back mode only when the probability change limit is reached and the pull-back mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the pull-back mode is set after the jackpot is won by winning a normal jackpot in the consecutive game mode, the normal mode A (normal state) after the pull-back mode ends may be set to the special state. With this configuration, a special state is always set when the pull-back mode ends, which reduces the player's motivation to play when the pull-back mode ends. This can be more reliably prevented (suppressed).

In this modification, in the normal mode A after the pullback mode based on reaching the probability variable limit number of times ends, the limit reaching table 202dg3 is referred to to determine the variation pattern until the jackpot is won. , but not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the limit reaching table 202dg3 only after the end of the pullback until the end of a specific number of (100) lottery rounds. By configuring it in this way, if a so-called hook occurs after the pullback mode ends, it is possible to prevent the player from losing track of the time when the lottery ends, and when the lottery is completed a certain number of times, The player can be made to decide whether or not to quit playing the game.

In this modification, only when the pullback mode ends and shifts to normal mode A, an advantageous state is created in which the lottery of the second special symbol, which is advantageous, can be given more weight, but this is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, in normal mode A or normal mode B, if the special symbol is drawn out a certain number of times (for example, 200 times) or more in a row and loses consecutively, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol will become extremely long ( 600 seconds) may be configured to create an advantageous state. With this configuration, even if so-called addiction occurs, the player's motivation for playing the game is unlikely to decrease.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 272. In the seventh embodiment described above, if the jackpot occurs in an unfavorable normal state than if the jackpot occurs in an advantageous time-saving state, the time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player is more likely to be set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In order to achieve this, the second special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the time saving state is configured to have a high probability of winning a small win, and when a V win is generated in the small win to start a jackpot. The rate at which a time-saving state is applied to a small win during the normal state is higher than that for a small win during the time-saving state.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, there is an advantageous period during which the second special symbol reserved ball (special symbol 2 reserved ball) can be obtained during the time saving state that is advantageous to the player, and an advantageous period during which the player can obtain the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball). It is configured such that a difficult disadvantageous period can be set, and the disadvantageous period is set before the advantageous period. Then, the game executed after the end of the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player if the jackpot game is executed during the advantageous period of the time-saving state than when the jackpot game is executed during the disadvantageous period of the time-saving state. It is configured so that it is easy to do so. In other words, rather than having the player execute a jackpot game between the time a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set and the specific condition being met (until the advantageous period is set), the jackpot game is executed after the specific condition is met (the advantageous It is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to execute the jackpot game (after the period has been set) (it becomes easier to execute the second special symbol lottery using the special symbol 2 reserved ball after the jackpot game ends). There is.

Also, the case where a jackpot game is executed during the normal state and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is better than the case where the jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game. By setting a time-saving state in which the end condition is difficult to satisfy, it is possible to execute a jackpot game during the normal state using the special map 2 reserved balls secured during the time-saving state, rather than executing a jackpot game during the time-saving state. The configuration is such that it is more advantageous for the player if the player is allowed to do so.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the jackpot game as soon as possible (to execute the jackpot game in a state where the special figure 2 reserved balls are not secured or only a small amount of special figure 2 reserved balls are secured). Although we are aware of the first game method (a game method where you win a V prize in a small winning game executed during a disadvantageous period) and the risk that it will take time and balls to end the time-saving state, we will use the second special symbol. The player can be made to select a second game method in which the time saving state is ended while keeping a large number of reserved balls, and a V winning prize is generated by a small win after the time saving state ends.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment described above, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are provided for terminating the time-saving state, and a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are provided depending on the gaming method (left-handed game, right-handed game) performed by the player. Among the conditions (special map 1 end condition, special map 2 end condition), the time-saving end conditions that are likely to be satisfied were configured to be different. Then, it is determined whether the state is immediately before each time-saving end condition is satisfied (a state in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied), and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition is satisfied for the first time-saving end condition, The system is configured to execute a performance (gaming method guide performance) for making the player play a game in a game method in which other time-saving termination conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the first time-saving termination condition in which the time-saving termination condition is satisfied.

That is, in the eighth embodiment described above, in order to maximize the enjoyment of the game during the time saving state by the player (in order to lengthen the playing period during the time saving state), one of the plural time saving end conditions is set. Only the elements for establishing the time-saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol) are updated, and the elements for fulfilling the other time-saving end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations for the first special symbol) are not updated at all. The configuration was configured to prevent the time saving state from ending when the time saving state is not completed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned eighth embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights for the second special symbol can be held and stored, and the time saving state is ended with the lottery rights for the second special symbol held and stored. Thus, during the normal state set after the end of the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery can be executed. In other words, a production that can maximize the number of special symbol drawings executed during the time saving state and end the time saving state with more lottery rights for the second special symbol held and stored. I configured it to run.

On the other hand, in the present eleventh embodiment, similarly to the seventh embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set, the game state (for example, the normal state) other than the time saving state is set. The lottery for the second special symbol, which can make it easier to acquire the lottery right, is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. The time saving state is configured to end when the number of special symbol drawings executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (10 times). In addition, in the present eleventh embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the lottery right of the second special symbol that is reserved and stored at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed) and the time saving state A second special symbol to be executed during the time saving state based on the remaining number of drawings of the special symbol (until the number of drawings of the special symbol reaches 10 during the time saving state) (remaining number of drawings of the special symbol during the time saving state) It is configured such that a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 at the end of the time reduction according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol selected during the time reduction state. The configuration is such that the expectation level of acquiring the number of reserved pitches is varied. That is, based on the timing of increase/decrease in the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during the time saving state, it is configured to make it easier to increase or decrease the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state. ing.

More specifically, as the length of the variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) executed in the last half period of the time saving state (for example, the 9th and 10th time reduction), the special symbol change during the special symbol 2 variation is Figure 2 Extremely short fluctuation time (e.g. 0.1 seconds) that makes it difficult to acquire the number of reserved balls, and long fluctuation time (e.g. 20 seconds) that makes it easy to acquire the number of reserved balls in special figure 2. ) is configured to be selected according to the number of balls reserved for special map 2.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, when the player temporarily interrupts the right-handed game than when the player continues to play the right-handed game, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the time-saving state is greater. It is designed to be easy to use. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is set to the upper limit number (4) during the special figure 2 fluctuation of a specific number of time reductions (for example, the 8th time reduction), the special figure corresponding to the remaining number of time reductions is set. The fluctuation times of the fluctuations in FIG. 2 are all configured to be extremely short fluctuation times (for example, 0.1 seconds).

With this configuration, players who are playing games in a time-saving state are not simply asked to continue playing right-handed games, but are forced to think about whether or not to play right-handed games while playing the game. You can make it happen. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience in which it is more advantageous not to play the game.

In addition, the eleventh embodiment is configured to be able to execute a guidance performance that can guide the player to a gaming method that is advantageous to the player during the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to make the player play a game that requires the skill of the player to play the game in accordance with the performance contents of the guidance performance that is being executed, thereby increasing the player's desire to play. I can do it. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a game in a time-saving state from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.

The eleventh embodiment differs from the seventh and eighth embodiments described above in that it includes a part of the configuration of the game board 13 and a part of the performance content executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The difference is that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 have been changed. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 253, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 253 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 253, the game board 13 according to the eleventh embodiment has the V winning device 6500 arranged from the left side of the board surface to the right side of the board surface, compared to the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 178). The following points have been changed: The placement position of the through gate 67 has been changed to a position below the V winning device 6500, and the placement position of the first variable winning device 65 has been changed from a position below the center of the board to the left side of the board. They are different and otherwise the same. Identical components will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, the game balls that flow down the left side game area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80 win more prizes than the game balls that flow down the right side game area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80. A first ball entry opening 64 and a first variable winning device 65 are arranged in an easy position, and the game ball that has flowed down the right side area can win a prize in a position where it is easier to win than the game ball that has flown down the left side area. A second ball entrance 6400 is provided with a device 6500, a through gate 67, and an electric accessory 6400a.

In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, when the normal state is set and when a jackpot game is being executed, the left-handed game in which the game ball mainly falls in the left side area is an advantageous gaming method for the player. When the time saving state is set and when a small winning game is being executed, a right-handed game in which the game ball is made to flow down mainly in the right side area is an advantageous gaming method for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the board configuration of the right side area of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, a V winning device 6500 is disposed above the right side area, and the nails planted in the game board 13 allow the game balls fired in the right-handed game to be almost All are guided toward the left end of the V winning device 6500 so that they flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6400f1 of the V winning device 6500 from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 253).

In addition, as explained in the seventh embodiment, the opening/closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is configured such that a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can pass is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the closed state. (See Figure 179). Therefore, by playing the right-handed game while the small winning game is being executed, the game ball can be reliably won into the V winning device 6500 during the small winning game.

When the opening/closing door 6500f1 of the V winning device 6500 is closed (the small winning game is not being executed), the game ball flowing down the right side area passes through the top surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 which is in the closed state, and as described above. Similar to the seventh embodiment, the flow path is divided into a flow path that passes through the through gate 67 and reaches the electric accessory 640a, and a flow path that flows down toward the outlet 66 without passing through the through gate 67. It is configured as follows.

In the eleventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 6400a attached to the second ball entry opening 6400 becomes easier to open, A game is performed in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entry port 6400, which is an opportunity to draw a second special symbol.

As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the ball first reaches the V winning device 6500 in the right-handed game executed during the time saving state. Therefore, when a small winning game is executed during the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the through gate 67 or entering the second ball entry port 6400 during the small winning game period. Thereby, the degree of increase in the number of second special symbols held and stored during the time saving state can be managed by varying the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variation during the time saving state.

In addition, in this 11th embodiment, by arranging the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 6400 below the V winning device 6500, the game ball enters the second ball entry port 6400 during a small winning game. However, the invention is not limited to this, and for example, the game ball can be configured to be able to pass through the through gate 67 even during a small winning game, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, it can be triggered. It may be configured such that even if a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery carried out in the game, the game ball cannot reach the second ball entrance 6400 to which the electric accessory 6400a that is opened is attached. In this case, since it becomes possible to pass the game ball to the through gate 67 during the small winning game period, the reserved memory of normal symbols will be exhausted during the small winning game, and the game during the time saving state will be smooth. It is possible to prevent situations in which execution becomes impossible.

Alternatively, only the through gate 67 may be disposed below the V winning device 6500, and the second ball entrance 6400 to which the electric accessory 6400a is attached may be disposed above the V winning device 6500. In this case, it is possible to arrange the second ball entry port 6400 on the upstream side of the right side area, so it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 6400 during the time saving state, To smoothly execute a game during a time saving state.

Here, a brief explanation will be given of the differences from the seventh embodiment regarding the game content in the state in which the time saving state is set. In the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set (selected) for the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is set to the number of special symbol drawings in the time saving state (remaining time shortening number), , is configured to differ based on the number of second special symbols held in memory, and there is a variation pattern in which it is difficult to secure the second special symbol held memory (a variation pattern with a short variation time) and a second special symbol held in memory. A variation pattern that is easy to store (a variation pattern with a long variation time) can be set (selected).

And, depending on the variation pattern (variation time) that is set (selected) for the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, it is possible to secure a large number of second special symbols to be held in memory when the time saving state ends. The configuration is such that it is possible to create a state that is difficult to secure and a state that is difficult to secure. Furthermore, it is easier to suspend the number of second special symbols stored at the end of the time saving state by interrupting the right playing game at a specific timing, rather than continuing to play the right playing game during the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be done. With this configuration, when the player arbitrarily selects a gaming method during the time saving state, the degree of advantage of the game executed after the end of the time saving state (the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery that has been stored on hold) Since this can be made variable, the player can be motivated to play the game during the time saving state.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the predetermined period after the time saving state is set (for example, the period until the special symbol (second special symbol) lottery is executed 6 times during the time saving state) is the predetermined period. The period after the period has passed (the period during which the 7th to 10th special symbol (second special symbol) lottery is executed during the time saving state) is a disadvantageous period in which it is difficult to secure the retention memory of the second special symbol. It is configured so that In other words, the period after the elapse of the predetermined period is more advantageous than the predetermined period after the time saving state is set, in which it is easier to secure the storage of the second special symbol.

By configuring this way, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the securing status of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol can be changed depending on the number of time savings at the time of winning. I can do it. Therefore, the player is asked to select whether or not to play a game to generate a V winning prize during the small winning game, depending on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol secured at the time of winning the small winning. can be done.

In other words, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot) that is executed based on winning a small hit during the time saving state and making the game ball win a V prize during the small winning game, Since it is not possible to newly obtain a second special symbol withheld memory that is advantageous to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed only for the number of second special symbol pending memories that were secured during the time saving state. . Therefore, it is an advantageous game for the player to win a V prize while securing a larger number of second special symbols in the reserved memory during the time saving state.

However, in the eleventh embodiment, the first half period after the time saving state is set is a disadvantageous period in which it is difficult to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol, and the second half period is the disadvantageous period in which it is difficult to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol. Because it is an advantageous period (easier to secure than a disadvantageous period), if you win a small hit immediately after the time saving state is set, you will immediately receive a big hit (V jackpot) regardless of the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol. Either execute the game you are aiming for, or put the game ball in the V prize until the advantageous period (second half period) to secure the retention memory of the second special symbol while taking the risk of not being able to make the game ball in the V prize during the time saving state. The player can choose whether or not to play a game that is not allowed. Therefore, depending on the gaming method selected by the player, subsequent gaming results can vary greatly.

Furthermore, in the present eleventh embodiment, in the second half period (advantageous period) of the above-mentioned time saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation to be selected is made different depending on the number of stored second special symbols. It consists of And, depending on the variation pattern of the selected second special symbol variation, the expected degree of acquisition of the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving state is configured to be different. More specifically, if the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4) at the timing when the second special symbol variation is executed in the ninth rotation after the time saving state is set, the time saving state is set. The number of pending memories of the second special symbol at the end of the period decreases, and the number of pending memories of the second special symbol becomes a specific number ( In the case of 3), the configuration is such that the number of second special symbols held and stored at the end of the time saving state is likely to increase.

In other words, rather than continuing to play the right-handed game during the time-saving state, the right-handed game is temporarily interrupted and the number of second special symbols held in memory is adjusted to a specific number that is not the upper limit number. This makes it possible to easily increase the number of second special symbols held and stored at the end of the time saving state. With this configuration, depending on the gaming method executed by the player during the time saving state, the degree of advantage when the time saving state ends, that is, when the time saving state ends without a jackpot game being executed. Since it is possible to vary the degree of advantage of the game executed after the end of the time-saving state, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the time-saving state.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the game ball winning a V prize during the time saving state, the time saving state As a termination condition for terminating the (time-saving state), a time-saving termination condition (special symbol 1 time-saving termination condition) that is satisfied when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed once is set. As shown in FIG. 253, by the gaming method executed during the jackpot game (left-handed game), the game ball can enter the first ball entry hole 64, which is the trigger for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is composed of

By configuring in this way, if the game ball is made to win a V prize without being able to secure the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the time saving state will be set again after the end of the jackpot game. Even if it is, the first special symbol lottery is executed before the second special symbol lottery is executed, and the special symbol 1 time-saving end condition is met, so the time-saving state ends instantly. It turns out.

On the other hand, if you make a game ball win a V prize with the second special symbol secured in the reserved memory during the time saving state, if the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol will be drawn by lottery. Since the drawing of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the first special symbol, the time reduction of the special symbol 1 is faster than when the time reduction state (re-time reduction state) is set without securing the reservation memory of the first special symbol. The termination condition can be made difficult to satisfy.

In addition, without making a V win during the time saving state, the time saving state is ended with the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol secured to the upper limit, and the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state (during the time saving state) When a time saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game (V win) that is executed based on winning a small win in a lottery based on secured reserved memory and placing a game ball in a V prize during the small win game. That is, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed during the normal state, the above-mentioned special figure 1 time saving ending condition is configured not to be set.

In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, if the player executes a V win within a predetermined period after the time saving state is set, it will be more disadvantageous for the player than if the player executes a V win after the predetermined period has elapsed. Furthermore, it is better to end the time saving state with the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol secured to the upper limit than to execute the V hit within a predetermined period after the time saving state is set. It is structured in such a way that it is advantageous to the public.

With this configuration, the game result can be greatly different depending on the game method selected by the player during the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

<About the production content in the 11th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 254 to 258, characteristic presentation contents among the presentation contents executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be explained. do. Specifically, the content of the time-saving effect that is executed when the time-saving state is set will be explained. In addition, in the present eleventh embodiment, the number of time reductions (the remaining number of time reductions) and the number of pending memories of the second special symbol ( The difference is that the production mode is set based on the special figure 2 (number of reserved balls) and the variation time of the second special symbol variation to be executed, but other than that, they are the same. The same presentation modes (display modes) are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, as described above, the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later is greatly variable depending on the content of the game to be executed during the time saving state, so it is difficult for the player to It is possible to provide the fun of choosing what kind of game to play during the time saving state, and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a guidance effect for guiding the player on a gaming method to increase the degree of advantage of a game to be executed later. As a result, it is possible to easily understand a game that aims to be executed to be advantageous to the player, depending on the performance mode of the guidance performance to be executed. Furthermore, since the player's skill for actually playing the game according to the grasped game content is tested, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, a time-saving effect in which a character 801 imitating a boy collects keys is executed. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in the eleventh embodiment, the first half period of the time saving state (the period during which the first to sixth special symbol fluctuations (second special symbol fluctuations) are executed after the time saving state is set. ), an ultra-short fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time 0.1 seconds) with an extremely short fluctuation time is selected, and the configuration is such that it is difficult to increase the number of balls reserved for special figure 2. Although not shown in the figure, during this first half period, a display mode for explaining the content of the performance during the time saving state (a display mode displayed when the time saving state is set) is continuously displayed. Then, when the first half period of the time saving state has passed and the second half period (the period in which the seventh and subsequent special symbol changes are executed), various display modes are displayed to guide the player on the gaming method to be executed during the time saving state. be done.

Here, the display mode (performance content) that can be displayed during the second half of the time saving state will be explained in detail. FIG. 254(a) is an example of the display mode displayed when the middle variation (10 seconds variation) is executed as the 7th special symbol variation (second special symbol variation) after the time saving state is set. FIG. As shown in FIG. 254(a), in the eleventh embodiment, the time-saving effect (guidance information) is created by changing a part of the display mode compared to the time-saving effect (see FIG. 181) executed in the seventh embodiment described above. performance) is executed.

The example shown in FIG. 254(a) is a display mode that can be displayed in a state in which the 7th second special symbol fluctuation is fluctuating for 10 seconds and one special symbol 2 reserved ball is secured. , and inside the display area HR6, the words "3 times remaining" are displayed, indicating that the remaining number of time reductions is 3 times. Four display areas HR1 to HR4 are formed on the right side of the boy character 801. Each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 6400 and the number of held balls increases, an image of a key corresponding to the number of held balls is displayed in these four display areas. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 181(a), a display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds, in which the words "Save your keys by hitting right!!" are displayed. These display modes make it easy for the player to understand that keys are accumulated in the display areas HR1 to HR4 by playing right.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 254(a), a special symbol is displayed inside the display area HR4 as a display mode indicating that one reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball) is secured. A "key" icon is displayed, which is a display mode that corresponds to the second reserved ball. After that, when the special figure 2 reserved balls are secured up to the upper limit (4 pieces) during the middle fluctuation for 10 seconds, the display mode shown in FIG. 254(b) is displayed. Figure 254(b) is a schematic diagram of an example of the display contents that will be displayed when the maximum number of special map 2 reserved balls (4 pieces) is obtained during the 7th time saving middle variation (10 seconds variation). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 254(b), when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol variation, even if a right-handed game is executed, new special figure 2 reserved balls will be added. Since it is not possible to secure the key, a display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds in which the words "Get 4 keys!! Take a break for a while" are displayed. Then, in the display areas HR1 to HR4, a "key" icon is displayed in each area to indicate that the current number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is the upper limit (4). In addition, in FIG. 254(a), the display mode of the guide display area Dm2 where "Right-handed hit" was displayed is changed so that the display of "Right-handed hit" is changed to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see. These display modes make it easy for the player to understand that the special figure 2 reserved balls have been secured up to the upper limit, and also make it easy for the player to understand that there is no need to execute any more right-handed games. can.

In the example shown in FIG. 254(b), the "right-handed game" display in the guide display area Dm2 is made difficult to see, thereby informing the player that there is no need to play the right-handed game. , without being limited to this, for example, reducing the size of the guide display area Dm2, displaying "Right-handed hitter" in a display area different from the guide display area Dm2, or displaying "Right-handed hitter" than the text "Right-handed hitter" It may be configured to notify the player that he is hitting right in a display format that is difficult for the player to understand (for example, by displaying a mark). In this way, during the time-saving state where a right-handed game is mainly executed, there is a right-handed game guidance display that is easy for the player to understand (see FIG. 254(a)), and a display mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the right-handed game. By configuring the display to switch between and, the player is made to understand that the current time saving state is in progress, and the player is also made to understand that there is no need to execute a right-handed game. be able to. Further, it may be configured such that the display mode itself for guiding the right-handed game is not displayed (hidden).

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the content of the effect displayed while the second special symbol variation of the 8th time saving is being executed will be explained. FIG. 255(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display mode when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is a specific number (3) during the middle fluctuation (10 seconds fluctuation) of the 8th time saving. FIG. 255(b) shows the display mode when the number of balls reserved for special chart 2 is less than the specific number (3) (1) during the 8th time saving middle variation (10 seconds variation). FIG.

Details will be described later, but in the eleventh embodiment, if the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls at the time when the second special symbol variation of the 8th time saving is stopped and displayed is a specific number (3), the 10th time saving It is configured so that a long-time variation is easily selected as the second special symbol variation. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls in special chart 2 reaches the upper limit during the middle fluctuation of the seventh time saving, the break display (see FIG. 255(a)) that continues the break display shown in FIG. 254(b) Is displayed. On the other hand, if it is not possible to obtain the special pattern 2 reserved balls up to the upper limit during the second special symbol change of the 7th time saving, as shown in Figure 255(b), the second special symbol 2 reserved balls The display mode of acquisition chances is displayed.

In FIG. 254(a), "Please wait for a while" is displayed in the main display area Dm as a display mode to suppress the acquisition of new special symbol 2 reserved balls during the execution of the second special symbol variation. Then, a display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds in which the words "Game Break" are displayed. Then, in the guidance display area Dm2, the characters "STOP" are displayed to guide the player to interrupt the game. With these display modes, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the player is currently in a state in which he is not allowed to acquire new special drawing 2 reserved balls.

Also, among the display areas HR1 to HR4 for indicating the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, the display area HR1 where the "key" icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball can be displayed is hidden. So, it is possible to make it seem as if the current number of reserved balls for special figure 2 (3) is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 that can be obtained, and even without visually playing a right-handed game. It is possible to make the player think that the game is in good condition.

Further, in the main display area Dm, a display area HR6 for indicating that the number of remaining time reductions is "2 times" is formed smaller than the display area HR6 shown in FIG. 254(b). Thereby, when the display content of the third symbol display device 81 shifts from the display mode shown in FIG. 254(b) to the display mode shown in FIG. It can be made difficult for players to understand. Note that, different from the display example shown in FIG. 255(a), the display area HR6 may be hidden, or "How many times remaining" may be displayed in the display area HR6. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions, and it is therefore possible to make it easy for the player to focus only on the content of the performance that is being executed. In addition, in this case, the display mode showing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls displayed in the display areas HR1 to HR4 is changed so that the display mode of the number corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not displayed. It's okay. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the increase/decrease in the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2, making it easier for the player to focus only on the content of the performance being executed.

FIG. 255(b) is a display screen in a state where a guidance effect is being executed to guide players to enter game balls into the second ball entrance 6400 until the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 reaches three. , a display area HR5 is formed in the sub-display area Ds that displays "Accumulate 3 keys by hitting right! 4 keys is no good!!". Of the display areas HR1 to HR4, the display area HR1 corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball has a visual indication that the fourth special figure 2 reserved ball should not be acquired. The words "DANGER" are displayed to notify the user.

Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, if the number of reserved balls in special pattern 2 reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol variation of the seventh time saving, or when the second special symbol variation of the eighth time saving is executed. It is configured such that when the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 becomes three, the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is likely to be the largest. On the other hand, if the number of special pattern 2 pending balls reaches the upper limit (4) during the execution of the second special symbol variation of the 8th time saving state, the number of special pattern 2 pending balls at the end of the time saving state will decrease. It is configured to be easy.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 255(a) and (b), when the middle variation (10 seconds variation) is executed as the second special symbol variation of the 8th time saving, the special symbol 2 at the start of the variation By varying the performance content depending on the number of reserved balls, it is possible to guide the player to a gaming method that is advantageous. In addition, as shown in Figure 254(b), if the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the execution of the second special symbol variation of the seventh time saving, during the second special symbol variation of the seventh time saving. Since the configuration is configured to display a guidance mode for interrupting the right-handed game to the player from In comparison, the number of game balls present in the right area can be reduced at the start timing of the second special symbol variation of the eighth time saving. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls to reach the upper limit (4 pieces) during execution of the 8th time saving second special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 256, a diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content displayed while the long variation (20 seconds variation) is being executed at the 10th time saving (final variation in the time saving state). It is a diagram. In this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation of the 10th time saving is executed in a state where the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 2 (at the time the second special symbol variation of the 10th time saving is started, the special figure 2 The number of reserved balls is 1), and a long variation with a variation time of 20 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. Then, during the long fluctuation, an effect is executed to obtain the special figure 2 reserved balls up to the upper limit. Furthermore, as a display mode of the guidance display area Dm2, an emphasis display mode (displayed with a double frame line in the figure) is displayed which emphasizes and guides the right-handed game more than other timings during the time saving state.

In the example shown in FIG. 256, the display area HR6 displays the word "Last" indicating that this is the final change in the time saving state, and the sub-display area Ds displays the words "Collect treasure by hitting right". A display area HR5 is formed. And, since it is confirmed that the special figure 2 reserved balls acquired during this fluctuation will be used in the second special symbol lottery to be executed after the time saving state ends, that is, during the normal state, the special figure 2 As a display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls, a "treasure" icon is displayed as a display mode different from the display mode ("key" icon) shown in FIG. 254(a). In this way, by changing the display mode for showing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, it is possible to make the player understand that the degree of advantage of the reserved special figure 2 reserved balls is different. .

In addition, in this embodiment, since the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, Specifically, the second special executed during the normal state is more effective than the case where a jackpot game (V win) is executed based on winning a small win in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. In the case where a jackpot game (V win) is executed based on winning a small win in a symbol lottery, a time-saving ending condition that is difficult to satisfy is set as a time-saving ending condition when a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that Therefore, the display mode (treasure) showing the special figure 2 reserved ball used during the normal state is more visually valuable than the display mode (key) showing the special figure 2 reserved ball used during the time saving state. This is the display mode. In this way, by correlating the actual degree of advantage with the value indicated by the display format, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is visually easy to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, a description will be given of the display contents that are displayed when the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 during the time saving state becomes the number of reserved balls that is disadvantageous to the player. FIG. 257(a) schematically shows an example of the display content that is displayed when the number of reserved balls in special chart 2 reaches the upper limit (4 balls) during the 8th time saving middle variation (10 second variation). FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 255(b), during the 8th time saving middle variation (10 second variation), the effect of accumulating three keys is executed. Here, if the player makes a mistake in the operation of the right-handed game and accumulates 4 keys (the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 becomes 4), the case shown in Fig. 257 (a) As shown, an icon 890 resembling a bomb is displayed in the center of the main control device 110, and in the display area HR6 indicating the number of remaining time reductions, there is a display format that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions. ' is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the player enters the "DANGER zone", which is a performance mode in which it is difficult for the player to grasp when the time saving state ends and how many balls are currently on hold for special map 2. A display area HR5 is formed in which is displayed "DANGER ZONE ENTRANCE!!" indicating that this is the case.

As shown in FIG. 257(a), when the DANGER zone is set, the remaining time shortening number and the number of special map 2 reserved balls are no longer displayed on the display screen. The details will be described later, but if the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the special symbol 2 variation of the 8th time saving, the fluctuation pattern of the 2nd special symbol variation of the 9th time saving and 10th time saving will be changed to A short fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds) is selected, and it is configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to acquire a new special symbol 2 reserved ball during the second special symbol fluctuation of the 10th time saving. In this way, once the DANGER zone is set, it becomes a disadvantageous state in which the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is reduced. By displaying this kind of display mode, it is clearly notified to the player that the playing method that was executed was the wrong one, so that the player can play the game using the correct playing method in the next game. The player can be made to play the game with enthusiasm.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, in order to provide a disadvantageous state that is disadvantageous to the player in the latter half of the time saving state, it is possible to select an ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. It consists of Then, by executing an ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, it is configured to make it difficult to obtain the special symbol 2 reserved ball during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol. There is. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain special symbol 2 reserved balls during the fluctuation period, but it is difficult to notify the player of the lottery result of the second special symbol using only the extremely short fluctuation period. There was a problem that.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the DANGER zone is set in the second half of the time saving state, an icon 890 resembling a bomb is displayed as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in Fig. 257(b), if you win a small hit in the second special symbol variation where a super short variation pattern is set, you can display a situation in which you do not know whether the bomb will occur or not. The icon 890 is configured to explode and the letter "V" 891 indicating a small win is displayed. With this configuration, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed by simply displaying a display mode in which a bomb is exploded from a state in which the icon 890 imitating a bomb is already displayed. Therefore, even if the second special symbol variation is set to have a short variation time, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown in the diagram, if the lottery result of the second special symbol variation in which the ultra-short variation pattern is set is a loss, even if the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the bomb will not be released. The configuration is such that the simulated icon 890 is continuously displayed. As a result, the display mode (bomb icon) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not displayed in a variable manner to indicate to the player that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of troublesome effects. In addition, when the final fluctuation of the time saving state is stopped and displayed with the DANGER zone set, a display mode in which a bomb explodes is displayed as shown in Figure 257(b), and the reserved special FIG. 2 A display mode showing the number of reserved pitches is displayed. With this configuration, when the DANGER zone is set, a display mode in which a bomb explodes is displayed finally (when a small win or a big win is won, or when the time saving state ends). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which display mode (the display mode indicating a hit or the display mode indicating the end of the time saving state) will be displayed when the bomb explodes, and the final You can enjoy the performance until the end.

In addition, the DANGER zone is set when it is difficult to secure many special map 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state, so during this DANGER zone, if you win a small hit, , it is a situation where it is more likely to be advantageous to the player if the game ball wins a V prize. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257(b), when a small win is won in the DANGER zone, a guidance display is displayed as a display mode to make the player play a game aiming for a V prize (right-handed game). In the region Dm2, "Right hit" is highlighted, and in the sub display region Ds, a display region HR5 is formed in which "Aim for the small hit V" is displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the number of special map 2 reserved balls and the number of remaining time shortening times are not displayed in the DANGER zone, but the display mode that is normally displayed during the time saving state ( For example, it may be configured to display the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls and the number of remaining time shortening times in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to distinguish than in the case shown in FIG. 254(a). In addition, by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operating means (frame button 22), a display that can specifically notify the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 and the number of shortened remaining times even in the DANGER zone. It may be configured to display the mode.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 258, a description will be given of the display contents that are displayed when a small hit is won while the time saving state is in progress and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 is 0. FIG. 258 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode that is displayed when a small hit is won with the number of reserved balls of special drawing 2 being 0 during the time saving state. As mentioned above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set and a V hit (jackpot game) is executed in a state where the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls is 0, the jackpot game Even if the time saving state is set again after the end, the time saving state is immediately ended by executing the first special symbol variation. Therefore, if the time saving state is set and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 is 0 and you win a small hit, you can either execute a game aiming for a V prize, or win a V prize in this small winning game. The player is made to select whether to execute a game aiming at the next small winning prize while acquiring special symbol 2 reserved balls during the remaining time period without aiming for the next small winning prize.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 258, if a small hit is won in the time saving state and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 is 0, the words "Choose" are displayed at the bottom of the main display area Dm. A horizontally long approximately rectangular display area HR7 is formed, and the horizontally long approximately rectangular display area in which the words "I want to save a key" and the words "STOP" are displayed on the left half of the sub-display area Ds. is formed, and a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area is formed on the right half in which the words "I want you to hit the jackpot" and the words "Right hit" are displayed. In the guidance display area Dm2, the guidance display mode is hidden to indicate that this is a period for allowing the player to select a gaming method. Further, on the left side of the display area HR4, an arrow image YG imitating a rightward arrow (that is, an arrow pointing in the direction of the display area HR4) is displayed. This arrow image YG allows the player to understand that the current time saving state is in progress. Depending on these display contents, the player can either stop the game (STOP) and finish the small winning game without generating a V winning prize, or play a right-handed game to generate a V winning prize. Since it is possible to realize an innovative game feature in which the player can select whether to start a jackpot or not, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, "STOP", which indicates to interrupt the firing of the game ball, is used as a guidance for a game method for not playing a right-handed game, but other game methods may also be provided. For example, it may be configured to guide "left-handed hitting" as a gaming method in which the game ball cannot win a V prize during a small winning game. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is determined at the start of the small winning game, and if the number is 0, the display mode shown in FIG. 258 is displayed, and the player is prompted to select a playing method. However, in addition to this, for example, whether the number of special map 2 reserved balls has increased during a small winning game (or whether a game ball has entered the second ball entrance 6400 during a small winning game) The configuration may be such that the display mode during the small winning game is varied based on the determination result.

In this case, for example, if the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during a small winning game, it would be most advantageous for the player to generate a V prize in that state and start the jackpot game. Therefore, the display mode is configured to display a display mode that forcibly executes a right-handed game (for example, a display mode that displays large letters "Right-handed game" as the most emphasized guidance display mode in the center of the main display area Dm). , the sub-display area Ds may be configured to display the words "Super Chance" indicating that the most advantageous game will be executed if a V win is generated now. In addition, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 increases within a range below the upper limit, based on the amount of increase and the number of remaining time reductions, whether it is better to make a V prize during the current small winning game or not. The degree of emphasis of the display mode that guides the right-handed game based on the prediction result is displayed in a variable manner (for example, in a display area that guides "STOP", a display that gradually guides "right-handed game") The display may be configured so that the area is displayed variably so that the size of the area becomes larger. With this configuration, the display mode according to the change in the gaming situation during the small winning game is executed during the small winning game, so that the player can be drawn to the game during the small winning game.

In addition, in this case, multiple types are set for the small winning game to be executed when a small winning is won, and the period during which the opening/closing door 6500f1 is closed during the small winning game is determined according to the set small winning type. They may be configured to have different lengths. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 6400 during the small winning game depending on the type of the small winning game to be executed. In other words, as shown in FIG. 253, if the closing period of the opening/closing door 6500f1 is set to be long during the small winning game executed in the time saving state, the game ball flowing down the right side area due to the right-handed game will enter the through gate 67. Or, since it can be made easier to reach the second ball entrance 6400, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls during a small winning game.

Furthermore, as a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning type among multiple small winning types, a first period (1 second) opening period is set immediately after the small winning game is executed, and then a 10 second period is set. After a closing period of It is preferable to set a win number ending condition under which the small winning game ends when a prize is won. In this case, if you continue to play the right-handed game during the small winning game, two or more game balls will enter the V winning device 6500 during the first period, and the small winning game will end. On the other hand, by interrupting the right-handed game during the first period, a closing period of 10 seconds is set, and after acquiring the special map 2 reserved ball during the closing period, the V winning device will be used during the second period. You can win game balls up to 6500. In other words, even during execution of a small winning game, the degree of advantage in subsequent games can be varied depending on the gaming method selected by the player.

In addition, when providing the above-mentioned specific small winning type, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the small winning game to be executed this time is a small winning game corresponding to the specific small winning type, for example, It is preferable to provide a small winning type in which an open period of one period (1 second) is set, and then a small winning game ends after a closing period of 0.2 seconds. With this configuration, whether or not the small winning game to be executed this time is a small winning game for which it is better to interrupt the right-handed game can be determined by checking the opening operation details of the small winning game (when the small winning game is being executed). It is possible to prevent the opening operation from being easily recognized depending on the contents of the opening operation (from the time when the opening operation is performed until the predetermined period of time has elapsed).

In addition, in this case, in order to provide a suggestion effect that can suggest to the player the type of small winning game to be executed (small winning type), and the method of playing during the small winning game (continuation of right-handed hitting, interruption of right-handed hitting). The guidance performance may be configured to be executed during the small winning game.

<Electrical configuration in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 259 to 261. First, with reference to FIG. 259(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 259(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 259(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ha2 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 184(b)) in determining the small hit. The difference is that the range of the first random number counter C1 defined as the value is different, but other than that, they are the same. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 259(a), a range of "10 to 259" is defined as the determination value for winning a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, the range of values that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is "0 to 999", so in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, about 1/4 It is configured so that there is a probability of winning a small win.

FIG. 259(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving grant table 202hb. This time saving award table 202hb changes the number of time saving grants (time saving end condition) that is set when the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state, with respect to the above-mentioned time saving award table 202e (see FIG. 186(a)). The difference is that if you win jackpot D11 during the time saving state, or if you win jackpot E11, the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game.Other than that, the game is the same. be. Identical elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, some of the names of the jackpot types have been changed for convenience of explanation, but since the contents are substantially the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 259(b), when winning "Jackpot A11" and "Jackpot B11", the same result as when winning "Jackpot A7" and "Jackpot B7" of the seventh embodiment described above. Since the number of time saving grants is set, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, for "Jackpot C11", if the game state when the jackpot game is executed is the normal state, "10 times" is defined as the number of time saving grants, and the jackpot game is executed. When the current gaming state is the normal state, "10 times" or "1 variation of special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" is defined in association as the number of time saving grants. That is, when the "jackpot C11" is determined, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot ends regardless of the gaming state. If you win "Jackpot C11" during the time saving state, the time saving will end if the special symbol variation is executed 10 times during the time saving state, or if the first special symbol variation is executed once. It is specified that the time saving state ends when the condition is satisfied.

With this configuration, if a V winning occurs during the time saving state and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 is 0 in a state where "Jackpot C11" is set, a jackpot game in which a left-handed game is executed. In order to obtain a reserved ball with the first special symbol (special pattern 1 reserved ball) with a high probability, after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the first special symbol is carried out with no priority over the lottery of the second special symbol. will be executed. Therefore, the time-saving end condition stipulated as "one variation of special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" is satisfied, and the time-saving state ends immediately.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, it is configured to determine whether the time saving end condition is satisfied at the time when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed (determined display). However, since the configuration is such that the ultra-short fluctuation pattern (variation time 0.1 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation of the first rotation during the time saving state, V winning is possible during the time saving state. If this occurs and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 is 0 in a state where "Jackpot C11" is set, the game result is substantially the same as when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, if a V winning occurs during the time-saving state and the number of reserved balls in special pattern 2 is 4 when "Jackpot C11" is set, after the time-saving state is set, the first special symbol lottery The lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority, and by acquiring a new special symbol 2 reserved ball while the lottery for the second special symbol is executed four times, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority. It is possible to make it easier to satisfy the time saving end condition of "10 times" than "1 time of variation of 1 special symbol)".

In this way, by varying the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established according to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) at the time when the time-saving state is set, the game state at the time of winning and Even if the set jackpot types are the same, the game state set after the jackpot game ends can be substantially different, and it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player. .

Since the same number of time-saving grants (time-saving end conditions) as for the above-mentioned "jackpot C11" are set for "jackpot D11" and "jackpot E11", detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, regarding "Jackpot F11", the presence or absence of time saving is changed depending on the gaming state when the jackpot game is executed, and specifically, the gaming state when the jackpot game is executed is the normal state. In this case, "10 times" is defined as the number of time saving grants. On the other hand, if the game state when the jackpot game is executed is the time-saving state, the number of time-saving grants is "0", that is, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, and the normal state is set. stipulated in In this way, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game can be switched between the presence or absence of a point-in-time state based on the combination of the set jackpot type and the gaming state when the jackpot type was set. By doing so, it is possible to provide various variations when setting the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same number of time saving grants (time saving end conditions) is set for all of "Jackpot C11", "Jackpot D11", and "Jackpot E11", but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, For "Jackpot D11", it is defined as "10 times" or "3 variations of special symbol 1 (first special symbol)", and a state in which a V winning occurs during the time saving state and "Jackpot D11" is set. When the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 is 0, the time saving state may be configured to be more difficult to end than when "jackpot C11" is set. By configuring in this way, when you win a small hit in the time saving state and the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is 0, depending on the set jackpot type, there are cases where it is better to make a V win, It is possible to provide cases in which it is better not to allow V-wins. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the importance of having the player decide which game to select when a small hit is won in the time saving state and the number of reserved balls of special drawing 2 is 0.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to perform a performance that suggests the type of jackpot that will be set this time as a result. This allows the player to watch the performance being executed, thereby increasing the performance effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261, the differences between the variation pattern table 202d in the eleventh embodiment and the variation pattern table in the seventh embodiment described above will be explained. First, the contents defined in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dh1 that is referred to during the normal state will be explained with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202dh1. As shown in FIG. 260, the normal variation pattern table 202dh1 has a second special symbol, which is different from the structure of the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23(a)) in the seventh embodiment (first embodiment) described above. (Special Figure 2) The difference is that the variation pattern selected as the variation pattern is different, and other than that, they are the same. Specifically, in the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state, regardless of the lottery result, the fluctuation time is "10 seconds" for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179". "Short fluctuation" is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "180 to 198", and "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in correspondence.

That is, the case where the second special symbol variation is executed in a state where the normal state is set is mainly when the normal state is set in a state where the special symbol 2 reserved ball is secured. In this state, as in each of the above-described embodiments, since a dedicated effect (pullback effect) is executed, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol to be selected is controlled as much as possible. It is configured to be fixed. As a result, the performance period of the pullback performance using the number of reserved special figure 2 reserved balls (maximum 4) in the state where the normal state is set is specified in advance, and the fluctuating period of multiple second special symbols is determined in advance. It is possible to easily execute (set) a pullback performance as a series of straddling performances.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2, which is referred to when the time-saving state is set, will be explained. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2. This time-saving variation pattern table 202dh2 is selected for the first special symbol variation executed at the first time-saving time with respect to the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 186(b)) in the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the variation pattern selected for the second special symbol variation has been changed, and the rest is the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of time-saving variations is "1", that is, the special symbol 1 variation is used as the first time-saving special symbol variation. is executed, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, in the entire range, regardless of the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 or the lottery result. Variations are defined in correspondence. Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the first rotation in the time saving state, the variation is completed in a very short time. Then, when "one variation of special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" is set as the end condition of the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) (see Figure 259(b)), the ultra-short variation The time saving state ends when the special figure 1 variation ends. As a result, even if the conditions for setting the time-saving state are met after the end of the jackpot game, it can be assumed that the normal state has actually been set.

In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of time-saving fluctuations is "2~", it is the same as the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 186(b)) of the seventh embodiment described above. Since the variation pattern is specified to be selected, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the number of time-saving fluctuations is "1 to 6", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is The range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range is defined with ultra-short fluctuations having a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds. As a result, during the period until the time saving variation number reaches 6 times (first half period of the time saving state), the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in a state where it is difficult to increase the number of reserved balls for the special drawing 2. Therefore, if a small win is won in the first half of the time saving state, the small win game will be more likely to be executed without securing the special drawing 2 reserved balls, and the display screen shown in FIG. 258 will be displayed, and the player In contrast, the player is made to choose whether to aim for a V prize or not to win a V prize in the small winning game (by puncturing the small winning game) and to execute the second half of the time saving state.

Next, if the number of time-saving fluctuations is "7, 8" and the lottery result is a loss, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49" regardless of the number of reserved balls in special chart 2. , "Ultra short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is defined in correspondence, and "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 198". They are defined in correspondence. In other words, if the 7th time saving variation is the special figure 2 variation, the middle variation will be selected with about 3/4 probability, and the super short variation will be selected with about 1/4 probability. In addition, if the lottery result is a "big hit or a small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is in the entire range, regardless of the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2. A middle fluctuation of 10 seconds is associated and prescribed.

Here, when the middle fluctuation is selected, as shown in FIG. 254(a), a performance mode for obtaining the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is displayed. On the other hand, when the ultra-short variation is selected, the eighth time-saving variation is executed without displaying the presentation mode shown in FIG. 254(a).

In addition, even when the 8th time saving variation is the special figure 2 variation, the variation pattern is selected with the same probability as the 7th time saving mentioned above, and the 7th time saving and 8th time saving are different. , the lottery result is a loss, and the probability that the very short fluctuation is selected is about 3.5%. Therefore, when the time-saving state is set, in about 3.5% of cases, a regrettable time-saving state is set in which you cannot get a chance to acquire the number of special map 2 reserved balls in the 7th and 8th time-saving times. It turns out.

On the other hand, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is acquired up to the upper limit during the special figure 2 variation of the 7th time saving, if the middle variation is selected as the special figure 2 variation of the 8th time saving, as shown in Fig. 255 (a) The performance mode shown in is displayed, and a gaming method for suppressing the acquisition of a new number of special figure 2 reserved balls is guided. In other words, if you get the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 up to the upper limit during the special pattern 2 variation of the 7th time saving, if the 8th time saving is a super short variation, it is better to get the number of reserved balls by mistake during the special pattern 2 variation of the 8th time saving. This makes it difficult for the player to acquire a new number of reserved balls for special drawing 2, resulting in a fluctuation pattern that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, if the number of reserved balls of special pattern 2 could not be obtained to the upper limit during the special pattern 2 variation of the 7th time saving (during middle variation), or if the super short variation pattern was selected as the special pattern 2 variation of the 7th time saving. In this case, when the 8th time saving special figure 2 variation is a middle variation, the performance mode shown in FIG. 255(b) is displayed.

Finally, if the number of time-saving fluctuations is "9, 10" and the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is "0, 2, 3", the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" regardless of the lottery result. ” range, that is, the entire range is defined with an ultra-short fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds, and if the number of reserved balls in special chart 2 is “1”, the fluctuation will occur regardless of the lottery result. A long variation with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in association with the range in which the value of the type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, the entire range. In other words, only when the number of time-saving fluctuations is "10", that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the last fluctuation in the time-saving state is "1", the last fluctuation in the time-saving state is the long fluctuation ( 20 seconds fluctuation), making it easier to end the time saving state with the maximum number of special map 2 reserved balls acquired.

Also, when the number of time-saving fluctuations is "9", that is, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 when selecting the fluctuation pattern one time before the last fluctuation in the time-saving state (pre-last fluctuation) is "1", It is configured to have long fluctuations (20 second fluctuations). In this case, either play a game to ensure that the number of special map 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit at the end of the time saving state by using the pre-last fluctuation, or By acquiring only one special figure 2 reserved ball in the previous variation, the player can select whether to play a game aiming at executing the long variation again in the last variation.

In addition, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, if you continue to play the right-handed game during the period in which the time saving state is set, the special figure 2 reserved ball that can be secured at the time the time saving state ends The configuration is such that the number can easily be reduced. Therefore, there was a possibility that the game in the time saving state would be executed without securing the special figure 2 reserved ball. Therefore, if the 9th time-saving special pattern 2 variation is executed without securing the special pattern 2 reserved balls, the ultra-short variation will be selected, and then the ultra-short variation will be selected for the 10th time-saving special pattern 2 variation. It is structured in such a way that it is easy to use. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game in which the special figure 2 reserved ball is not intentionally secured.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, for a predetermined period after the time saving state is set (while the second special symbol variation with the number of time saving variations being "1 to 6" is executed), the second special symbol lottery is executed. The configuration is such that a variable time of 0.1 seconds is set (selected) regardless of the result of When the number of fluctuations is "1", that is, only the first special symbol fluctuation (second special symbol fluctuation) after the time saving state is set, the fluctuation is more than the ultra-short fluctuation pattern described above (fluctuation time 0.1 seconds). It may be configured such that a very short fluctuation pattern with a long time (fluctuation time of 3 seconds) is selected.

By configuring in this way, for example, when a jackpot game is executed during the time saving state and the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is secured, the time saving state (re-time saving state) is set again after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, when "10 times" or "1 special pattern 1 variation" is set as the number of time saving grants (time saving end condition), priority is given to the first special symbol variation (special pattern 1 variation). The second special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) for the number of acquired special symbol 2 reserved balls that is executed will end instantly, and the time saving state will end when the special symbol 1 variation is executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In this case, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation (second special symbol fluctuation) after the time-saving state is set, that is, the fluctuation time defined as a very short fluctuation pattern, is during the time-saving state (the height of the normal symbol A variation time longer than the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol variation executed during the probability state) is defined, and while the second special symbol variation is executed, the normal symbol per game during the time saving state is executed. It is best to configure it so that it is easy to execute. Thereby, it is possible to easily obtain a new special symbol reservation within the period from when the time saving state is set until the time saving state ends. Furthermore, by making the first special symbol fluctuation (second special symbol fluctuation) after the time saving state is set to a very short fluctuation (for example, a 3 second fluctuation), during the first special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) of the number of time saving times. 2), there is a risk of acquiring multiple special drawings 2 pending. Even with this configuration, when the number of time-savers is "2 to 6", the second special symbol fluctuation is executed in an ultra-short fluctuation pattern, so during the special symbol 2 fluctuation of the first time-saver. Even if a plurality of reserved memories are acquired, when the number of time reductions reaches "7", the number of acquired special map 2 reserved balls can be reduced (to 0).

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 262, the RAM 223 of the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment (and first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 26(b)) in that the RAM 223 has a special symbol 2 reserved ball. The difference is that a number counter 223b2, an acquired performance set flag 223ha, a second acquired performance set flag 223hb, a third acquired performance set flag 223hc, a MAX acquisition flag 223hd, a danger flag 223he, and a game waiting flag 223hf are added. , otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Note that the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 has the same content as the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223aa in the second embodiment described above, and among the reserved ball number commands transmitted from the main controller 110. , is a counter for updating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol according to the contents of the command when a command related to the second special symbol is received, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The acquisition performance set flag 223ha is a flag for indicating that the performance shown in FIG. 254(a) (first pending acquisition performance) is being executed, and when the first pending acquisition performance is being executed. This is set to ON, and is set to OFF when the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 reaches the upper limit number (4) during the first reservation acquisition performance and the first reservation acquisition performance ends. Specifically, in the first effect setting process (see S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), if it is determined that the seventh variation in time reduction is a middle variation (see 272 S9102: Yes) is set to ON (see S9105 in FIG. 272), and in the special drawing 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265), The setting status is referred to (see S8001 in FIG. 266).

Then, when it is determined that the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls is 4 after winning a prize (see S8002 in FIG. 266), it is set to OFF. Furthermore, it is set to ON during the period when the effect shown in FIG. 256 (final hold acquisition effect) is being executed (see S9208 in FIG. 273). In addition, if the final change in the time-saving state is stopped and displayed while the acquisition effect set flag 223ha is set to on (when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state), it is also set to off (Fig. 270 (See S8204). In other words, if this acquisition effect set flag 223ha is set to ON, the increase in the number of special map 2 reserved balls until the number of special map 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit is a period in which it is advantageous for the player. It shows that something is true.

The second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is a flag for indicating that the effect shown in FIG. It is set to on when the special figure 2 reserved ball number reaches the upper limit number (4) during the second reserved acquisition performance and is set to off when the second reserved acquisition performance ends. . Specifically, in the first effect setting process (see S2988 in FIG. 272) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), when it is determined that the 8th time-saving special symbol variation is a middle variation. (S9107 in FIG. 272: Yes) and it is determined that the MAX acquisition flag 223hd, which will be described later, is not set to ON (S9108 in FIG. 272: Yes) Figure 2: Set to ON when the number of reserved balls cannot be acquired up to the upper limit (4) (see S9113 in Figure 272), and executed in winning information related processing 11 (see S2295 in Figure 265) In the special drawing 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266), the setting status is referred to (see S8008 in FIG. 266).

Then, various production modes are set according to the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 after winning (see S8013 to S8016 in FIG. 266), and it is finally determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 after winning is 4. If so (S8009 in FIG. 266: Yes), it is set to off (see S8012 in FIG. 266). In other words, if this second acquisition effect setting flag 223hb is set to ON, it is advantageous for the player to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls until the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches 3. This is a period, and indicates that it is a period in which the player will be at a disadvantage if the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls reaches 4. In addition, if the final change in the time saving state is stopped and displayed while the second acquisition performance setting flag 223hb is set to on (when a jackpot game is executed during the time saving state), it is also set to off ( (See S8204 in FIG. 270).

The third acquisition effect set flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the effect (third pending acquisition effect) that is executed when the ninth time-saving special symbol variation is a long variation is being executed, This is set to ON when the third reservation acquisition performance is being executed, and is set to OFF when the number of special figure 2 reservation balls increases by one during the third reservation acquisition performance. Specifically, in the second effect setting process (see S2989 in FIG. 273) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271), when it is determined that the 9th time-saving special symbol variation is a long variation. (S9202: Yes in FIG. 273), is set to on (see S9204 in FIG. 273), and is executed in the special drawing 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) of the winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265). In the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267), the setting status is referenced (see S8101 in FIG. 267). Then, when the third acquisition performance setting flag 223hc is set to ON (S8101 in FIG. 267: Yes), that is, when the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls increases by one during the third reservation acquisition performance, It is set to off (see S8104 in FIG. 267). In addition, if the final change in the time saving state is stopped and displayed while the third acquisition performance setting flag 223hc is set to on (when a jackpot game is executed during the time saving state), it is also set to off ( (See S8204 in FIG. 270).

The MAX acquisition flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the performance (MAX acquisition performance) shown in FIG. 254(b) is being executed, and is during the first pending acquisition performance shown in FIG. 254(a). This is set to ON when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit and the display mode indicating game standby (see Figure 254(b)) is displayed, and corresponds to the 8th time-saving special figure change. This is referred to when setting the production mode, and is set to off after setting the production mode corresponding to the 8th time-saving special symbol variation (see S9110 in FIG. 272).

By providing this MAX acquisition flag 223hd, when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 2 reaches the upper limit number during the 7th time-saving special pattern change and a guidance notification to interrupt the right-handed game is executed, the guidance notification will be executed. It can be displayed continuously over the 8th time-saving special symbol change.

The danger flag 223he is used to indicate that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has increased excessively during the time saving state, and it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls for special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state. flag, and when it is determined that the number of special chart 2 reserved balls has reached 4 while the second reserved acquisition effect (see FIG. 255(b)) is being executed (S8009 in FIG. 266: Yes) or , is set to ON when it is determined that a new special symbol 2 reserved ball has been acquired while the game standby effect (see FIG. 255(a)) is being executed (S8017 in FIG. 266: Yes).

While the danger flag 223he is set on, the danger effect (see FIG. 257(a)) is executed, and the player is informed of the short period of remaining time until the end of the time-saving state and the special features secured. Figure 2: A presentation mode is displayed that makes it difficult to understand the number of reserved pitches. As mentioned above, in the period before the end of time reduction in the time reduction state (9th time reduction, 10th time reduction), if there is a number of special figure 2 reserved balls other than the appropriate number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 piece), The time saving variation pattern table 202dh2 is defined so that a very short variation (0.1 seconds) can be easily set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation. Therefore, by executing the danger performance, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the multiple special symbol 2 fluctuations corresponding to the period before the end of the time reduction are completed in a short period of time.

In addition, when the danger flag 223he is set to on, it is difficult to secure a large number of reserved balls for special chart 2 when the time saving state ends, so if you win a small hit, The configuration is such that a guidance effect (see FIG. 257(b)) is executed that guides the player to a game that will lead to a V win. By configuring in this way, even if the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is small, if it is difficult to secure a large number of reserved balls for special figure 2 within a short period of time, Instead of a selection effect that allows the player to choose whether or not to win a V prize (see Figure 258), a guidance effect that guides the player to win a V prize (see Figure 257(b)) can be executed, so that the player can It is possible to prevent players from selecting games that are disadvantageous to them.

The game standby flag 223hf is a flag for indicating that the performance (game standby performance) shown in FIG. During the 1 hold acquisition performance (see Figure 254(a)), the number of special figure 2 reservation balls reached the upper limit number (4), and the performance shown in Figure 254(b) (MAX acquisition performance) was executed. In this state, it is set to ON when the 8th time saving special symbol variation is executed in the middle variation (10 seconds variation) (see S9111 in FIG. 272). Then, it is referred to in the special drawing 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) (see S8017 in FIG. 266), and the game standby flag 223hf is set to on (S8017 in FIG. 266: Yes), that is, The display mode when the special figure 2 winning occurs while the game standby performance is being executed is set (see S8018 in FIG. 266), and then set to off (see S8020 in FIG. 266).

As explained above, in the eleventh embodiment, in order to set various production modes to be executed during the time saving state, the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations) during the time saving state and the special symbol pending It is configured to set various flags based on the number of pitches (number of reserved pitches for special chart 2) and the selected fluctuation pattern, and increases the number of reserved pitches for special chart 2 based on the setting status of various flags. It is configured to set a display mode for guiding the player as to whether the increase is permitted or the increase is prohibited. Furthermore, if the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is in a good condition to be increased, a display is displayed to guide the player to the range (tolerable range) of the amount of increase in the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 that would be advantageous to the player. It is configured to set the mode. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the optimal gaming method to be executed during the time saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the transition of the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 during the time saving state in the eleventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 263 is a diagram showing the relationship between the remaining time reduction number, the number of special figure 2 reservations (the number of special figure 2 reservation balls), and the special figure 2 fluctuation time in the time reduction state.

As shown in FIG. 263, in this embodiment, the time saving state is defined as a normal time saving period in which the number of remaining time reductions is 10 to 5 (the 1st to 6th time reduction), and a normal time reduction period in which the remaining number of time reductions is 4 or 3 (7th or 8th time reduction). ) is divided into three periods: a preparation period for the end of the time reduction, a period before the end of the time reduction when the remaining number of time reductions is 2 or 1 (9th or 10th time reduction), and a change in the second special symbol for each period. A time saving variation pattern table 202dh2 is defined so that different variation times can be selected as the time (special figure 2 variation time).

In addition, when selecting the special pattern 2 variable time in each period, the number of special pattern 2 reserved balls is referenced, and a different special pattern 2 variable time is selected depending on the number of reserved special pattern 2 balls. It is configured as follows. Then, depending on the length of the special figure 2 variation time selected for each period in the time saving state, there are states in which it is easy to acquire new special figure 2 reserved balls during the special figure 2 variation, and states in which it is difficult to obtain. It is configured so that it can make it appear.

In addition, if a situation arises where it is easy to obtain the special figure 2 reserved ball (for example, during execution of a special figure 2 variation in which a long variation time is selected), it is better to obtain the special figure 2 reserved ball in the end. The configuration is such that there are cases in which the player is advantageous and cases in which the player is disadvantaged. With this configuration, for a player who is playing a game in a time-saving state, it is possible to check whether or not the player is in a state where it is easy to acquire a special figure 2 reserved ball or not, and to acquire a special figure 2 reserved ball. The game can be played while predicting whether the game is in a certain state or not, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, the pullback game (the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 reserved ball) that is executed after the time saving state ends and the normal state is set is advantageous to the player. In other words, various guidance performances (see FIGS. 254 to 258) are performed to guide the gaming method during the time saving state so that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 at the time the time saving state ends becomes larger. It is configured to do so. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the game in the time-saving state in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 263, during the short time normal period, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in the ultra-short fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 0.1 seconds. This 0.1 second is a time shorter than the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and in this embodiment, the second ball entrance 6400 is reached in one normal symbol game. Since the game is configured so that the game ends per normal symbol when one game ball enters, during this time-saving normal period, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is not secured, and the second special symbol is A lottery will be held. In addition, during one game per normal pattern, a plurality of game balls may enter the second ball entrance 6400 in a row, but in this case as well, the second special variation is executed multiple times in a short time. Therefore, the game is not executed during the time-saving normal period while maintaining the state in which the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is maintained.

Then, when the time saving normal period passes and the transition to the time saving end preparation period occurs, there is a probability of about 3/4 that the middle variation (10 seconds variation) will be selected, and a probability of about 1/4 that the very short variation (0.1 seconds variation) will be selected. seconds) is selected. If the middle variation is selected in the special figure 2 variation where the number of remaining time reductions is 4 (seventh time reduction), the performance (accumulate performance) shown in FIG. 254(a) for accumulating reserved balls is executed. Then, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is accumulated to the upper limit (4) during the execution of this accumulation effect (when the special figure 2 reserved MAX is reached), the next special figure 2 variation (remaining When the number of time reductions is 3 (eighth time reduction) (special figure variation), a standby performance that does not allow the acquisition of new special figure 2 reserved balls shown in FIG. 255(a) is executed.

According to the performance mode (guidance content) during this standby performance, when the 8th time-saving special figure change ends without acquiring a new special figure 2 reserved ball, it will move to the period before the end of the time-shortening, and the 9th time-saving time will start. A 0.1 second variation is executed, and a 20 second long variation is executed for the 10th time reduction. During this 10th time-saving long variation, an effect (see FIG. 258) is executed to urge the player to acquire the number of reserved balls of special drawing 2 up to the upper limit. Therefore, in the flow shown in FIG. 263(a), it becomes easy to secure a large number of reserved balls for special symbols 2 at the end of the time saving state.

On the other hand, if the standby effect is being executed during the 8th time saving special figure 2 change and the player accidentally acquires a new special figure 2 reserved ball, or if the player accidentally acquires a new special figure 2 reserved ball, or if the player accidentally acquires a new special figure 2 reserved ball, If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls could not be obtained up to the upper limit during the accumulation effect executed during Figure 2 fluctuation, or if the ultra-short fluctuation pattern was selected as the seventh time-saving special figure 2 fluctuation. During the 8th time-saving special figure 2 variation, the accumulation effect (which causes the special figure 2 reserved balls to be accumulated until the number of special figure 2 reserved balls shown in Fig. 255(b) reaches a specific number (3)) is performed. 2nd save effect) is executed. If the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is set to 3 during this second accumulation effect (if the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is 3 when the 8th time saving special figure fluctuation stops), the above-mentioned figure The effect of the period before the end of time reduction is executed in the same flow as 263(a).

Also, if the number of special chart 2 reserved balls is increased to 4 during this second accumulation performance (if the number of special chart 2 reserved balls is 4 when the 8th time saving special chart fluctuation stops), the As shown in 263(b), for all special chart 2 fluctuations executed during the 9th time reduction and 10th time reduction, that is, the period before the end of time reduction, an ultra-short variation of 0.1 seconds is executed. As a result, the game flow is such that the expectation of acquiring the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is low (the expected value of the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is about 2).

In addition, if the number of special chart 2 reserved balls becomes 2 during this second save performance (if the number of special chart 2 reserved balls is 2 when the 8th time saving special chart fluctuation stops), the time saving 9 A long variation is executed as the second special figure variation. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is obtained up to the upper limit during the 9th time saving long variation, as shown in Figure 263(c), as the special chart 2 variation for the 10th time saving, the number of balls exceeds 0.1 seconds. Because the short fluctuation is executed, the expected value of acquiring the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is medium (the expected value of the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is approximately 3). It becomes a flow.

Here, if only one special figure 2 reserved ball is obtained during the 9th time saving long variation, the long variation will be executed also in the following 10th time saving special figure 2 variation, so as shown in Fig. 263(a) ), the flow makes it easy to secure a large number of special chart 2 reserved balls at the end of the time saving state (FIG. 263(d)).

In addition, in a time saving state, a game in which the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is not intentionally accumulated, specifically a game in which a small number (one) of game balls are fired by timing the electric accessory 6400a to be released ( In the case of a stop hit), as shown in FIG. 263(e), the special pattern 2 variation is executed with a very short variation of 0.1 seconds even in the time reduction end preparation period and the time reduction end pre-period. This is the flow of the game in which the expected degree of acquiring the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is the lowest (the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 at the end of the time saving state is about 0).

As explained above, in the eleventh embodiment, an unfavorable period (period in which it is difficult to obtain special figure 2 reserved balls) is set in the first half period of the time-saving state, and an advantageous period (period in which it is difficult to acquire special figure 2 reserved balls) is set in the second half period (number of reserved balls for special figure 2). It is configured so that it is possible to set a period during which it is easy to obtain Therefore, the game situation is more advantageous to the player when a jackpot game is executed based on a small win won during the second half of the period than when a jackpot game is executed based on a small win won during the first half period. The settings can be made easier.

Also, even during advantageous periods, it is better to interrupt the right-handed game for a predetermined period of time (perform the right-handed game with a predetermined firing interval) than to continue playing the right-handed game. It is configured to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience to a player who is playing a game in a time-saving state by interrupting a right-handed game.

Furthermore, by acquiring a specific number of special figure 2 reserved balls corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions (number of time reductions), a pullback game that is advantageous to the player as a pullback game that is executed at the end of the time reduction (at the end of the jackpot game) Since the game is configured to be able to execute the following, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing of acquiring the special figure 2 reserved ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, even if you are unable to obtain the specific number of special numbers 2 reserved balls corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions (number of time reductions), you will receive a specific number of special drawings corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions (number of time reductions) again. Since the system is configured to provide an opportunity to acquire the number of reserved balls, the player can continue playing the game with enthusiasm until the time saving state ends.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the details of the control processing of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be explained. The main control device 110 of the eleventh embodiment executes the same control processing as that of the seventh embodiment described above, and the structure of the data table (see FIGS. 259 to 261) that is referenced in various processing has been changed. , except that the operation contents of the small winning game (opening operation pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1) which is executed when winning a small winning is changed, and other than that are the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the operation contents (opening operation pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1) during the small winning game in this embodiment will be explained. The opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the eleventh embodiment is configured such that the closing period during the small winning game is shorter than the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 180). The game ball is configured to be difficult to flow down to the downstream side of the V winning device 6500 during a small winning game. Specifically, the small winning game is executed in an opening pattern in which an opening operation is repeated three times, with one set of a closing period of 0.1 seconds and an opening period of 0.6 seconds after the small winning game is started. Ru.

The 0.1 second set as the closing period is shorter than the period required for the game ball to pass through the ball channel formed on the top surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1 in the closed state. Even when the game ball reaches the opening/closing door 6500f1 during the closing period, the opening/closing door 6500f1 becomes open before passing the upper surface of the opening/closing door 6500f1, and the game ball can win a prize in the V winning device 6500.

Incidentally, a plurality of types of opening patterns for the small winning game may be prepared, and the opening pattern executed may be different depending on the small winning type set for the winning small winning or the gaming state at the time of winning. In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during a small winning game, the winning game ball passes through the V winning switch 6500e3, and the jackpot starts after the small winning game ends. In other words, if even one game ball enters the V winning device 6500 during a small winning game, the jackpot starts, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of routes are provided in the V-winning device 6500, and a distribution member that distributes the game balls flowing down the V-winning device 6500 to one of the plurality of routes described above is provided, and the game balls are It may be configured such that it can pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 only when it flows down a specific route.

In addition, in this case, an opening pattern is set in which the opening/closing door 6500f1 is opened multiple times as a small winning game, and the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the V winning switch 6500e3 only when a specific opening is performed among the multiple openings. You may do so. With this configuration, when a small winning game is executed, there is a game in which the V winning device 6500 wins the game ball and only the prize ball is won, and a game in which the V winning device 6500 wins the game ball and wins the prize ball. A game in which a ball and a jackpot are won can be executed by simply switching the timing at which the player puts the game ball into the V winning device 6500.

Furthermore, in this 11th embodiment, the game balls are suppressed from flowing down to the downstream side of the V winning device 6500 during the small winning game so that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls cannot increase during the small winning game. Although the configuration is such that the small winning game is executed in an open pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a specific small winning game is executed, the opening/closing door 6500f1 is in a closed state during the small winning game. It may be configured such that the closing period is longer than other small winning games. Thereby, when a specific small winning game is executed, it is possible to easily increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls during the small winning game. Therefore, even if a small winning game is executed when the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is 0, there is still a chance to increase the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, so players can keep their expectations until the end. You can let them play games while holding it.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 to 273, the details of the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be explained. In the eleventh embodiment, in contrast to the seventh embodiment (first embodiment) described above, command determination processing 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264) is performed instead of command determination processing (see S2113 in FIG. 56). Winning information related process 11 (see S2295 in FIG. 265) is executed instead of the information related process (see S2210 in FIG. 57), and win related process 11 (see S2296 in FIG. 264) is executed instead of the win related process (see S2212 in FIG. 57). ), the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) is executed instead of the effect setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63), and the stop command process 11 (see S2291 in FIG. 270) is added. Other than that, they are the same. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of command determination processing 11 (S2195) will be explained with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 11 (S2195). This command determination process 11 (S2195) is a process executed in place of the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see S2113 in FIG. 56), and is a process executed in place of the command determination process of the first embodiment described above. (See S2113 in FIG. 56), if it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), winning information related processing 11 is executed (S2295), and it is determined that a winning related command has been received. (S2211: Yes), the winning related process 11 is executed (S2296), and when it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2297). In addition, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, in the present eleventh embodiment, the lottery right of the second special symbol is configured to be able to be stored and stored, so when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been received ( S2207), included in the received held ball number command to the held ball number counter (special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 held ball number counter 223b2) corresponding to the special symbol type indicated by the received held ball number command. They differ in that they execute processing to store information. Since the rest is the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, winning information related processing 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) executed in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) is a process executed in place of the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see S2210 in FIG. When an information command is received, control is executed to vary the presentation mode of various effects being executed (see FIGS. 254 to 258).

When the winning information related process 11 (S2295) is executed, first, the same processes of S2301 and S2302 as the winning information related process (see FIG. 57, S2210) in the first embodiment described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S2302 that the time saving state is not in progress (S2302: No), the process of S2312 is the same as the winning information related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 57, S2210), and , S2311 is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the time saving state is in progress (time saving) (S2302: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning information command received this time includes the winning information of the second special symbol. (S2395), and if it is determined that the winning information of the second special symbol is included (S2395: Yes), the special symbol 2 winning process is executed (S2396), the process of S2311 is executed, and this process is executed. finish. In the process of S2395, if it is determined that the winning information of the second special symbol is not included (only the winning information of the first special symbol is included) (S2395: No), the process of S2396 is skipped. , S2311 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the special drawing 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) executed in the winning information related process 11 (S2295 in FIG. 265) will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266). This special figure 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is a process that is executed when winning information of the second special symbol is received during the time saving state, and various effects being executed (see FIGS. 254 to 258) ) is executed based on the fact that the special figure 2 reserved ball is newly acquired.

When the special drawing 2 winning process (S2396 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, it is determined whether the acquisition effect set flag 223ha is set to on (S8001), and if it is determined that it is set to on, (S8001: Yes), by receiving the number of reserved balls command corresponding to the winning information command received this time, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) has become 4 (upper limit number)? (S8002). In the process of S8002, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawings 2 is 4 (upper limit number) (S8002: Yes), the display mode indicating the pending MAX is set (S8003), and the display mode indicating the game standby is set. is set (S8004), the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to ON, the acquisition effect set flag 223ha is set to OFF (S8006), and the process proceeds to S8022, which will be described later, and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S8002, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawings 2 is not 4 (upper limit number) (S8002: No), a display mode indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls is set (S8007), and the process proceeds to S8022. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S8001, if it is determined that the acquisition effect set flag 223ha is not set on (S8001: No), then it is determined whether the second acquisition effect setting flag 223hb is set on. (S8008), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S8008: Yes), the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 (second It is determined whether the number of special symbols reserved and stored has reached 4 (the upper limit number) (S8009).

If it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol) is 4 (upper limit number) (S8009: Yes), a display mode indicating an excessive increase in the number of reserved balls is set (S8010), The danger flag 223he is set on (S8011), the second acquisition effect setting completed flag 223hb is set off, and the process moves to S8022. If it is determined in the process of S8009 that the number of special pattern 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol) is not 4 (the upper limit number), then It is determined whether the stored number) is 3 (specific number) (S8013), and if it is determined that it is 3 (specific number) (S8013: Yes), a display format indicating the appropriate number of reservations is set (S8014) , sets a display mode indicating game standby (S8015), and proceeds to the process of S8022.

In addition, in the process of S8013, if it is determined that the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is not 3 (specific number), a display mode indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls is set (S8016). , the process moves to S8022. In the process of S8008, if it is determined that the second acquisition effect set flag 223hb is not set on (S8008: No), it is determined whether the game standby flag 223hf is set on (S8017), If it is determined that it is set to on (S8017: Yes), a display mode indicating an excessive increase in the number of reservations is set (S8018), the danger flag 223he is set to on (S8019), and the game waiting flag 223hf is set. It is set to off (S8020), and the process moves to S8022.

In the process of S8017, if it is determined that the game standby flag 223hf is not set to ON (S8017: No), then the pre-end period setting process is executed (S8021), and then the received prize information command information is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S8022), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the contents of the pre-end period process (see S8021 in FIG. 267) executed in the special drawing 2 winning process (see S2396 in FIG. 266) will be explained. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-end period processing (see S8021 in FIG. 267). When this pre-end period process (see S8021 in FIG. 267) is executed, first, it is determined whether the third acquisition effect setting flag 223hc is set to on (S8101), and if it is set to on, If it is determined (S7101: Yes), a display mode indicating the number of pending corrections is set (S8102), a display mode indicating game standby is set (S8103), and the third acquisition effect setting flag 223hc is set to OFF. , this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the third acquisition performance setting flag 223hc is not set to ON (S8101: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the contents of jackpot end processing 11 (S2498) will be explained. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 11 (S2498). This jackpot end process 11 (S2498) is a control process executed in the win-related process 11 (S2296 in FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264), and is an effect at the end timing of the jackpot game. Processing for setting the mode is executed.

When jackpot end processing 11 (S2498) is executed, first. The information stored in the game state storage area (223f) is read (S2501), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time saving state (S2502). If it is determined that the time saving state is not in effect (S2502: No), the present process is directly ended.

In the process of S2502, if it is determined that the time is shortened (S2502: Yes), next, based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2, special symbol 2 reserved (second special symbol reserved memory) ), that is, whether the special map 2 reserved ball is secured (S2591), and if it is determined that the special map 2 reserved ball is secured (S2591; Yes ), a display command is set to indicate that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (S2592), and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2591, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved balls are not secured (S2591: Yes), the next variation special figure 1 information (first special The winning information stored in the symbol reservation area 1 is read out (S2593), and it is determined whether the read out special drawing 1 information includes winning information (information indicating that a jackpot will be won) (S2594). If it is determined that winning information is not included (S2954: No), a display command is set to extend the display period of the jackpot end screen by 0.1 seconds (S2595), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S2594, if it is determined that there is winning information, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot will be won in the first special symbol variation executed immediately after (S2594: Yes), the A display command is set (S2596), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the contents of the small hit start command processing 11 (S2491) will be explained. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit start command processing 11 (S2491). This small win start command process 11 (S2491) is a control process executed in the win related process 11 (S2296 in FIG. 264) of the command determination process 11 (see S2195 in FIG. 264), and is the start timing of the small win game. Processing for setting the performance mode is executed.

When small hit start command processing 11 (S2491) is executed, first. Information stored in the gaming state storage area (223f) is read (S3901), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (S3902). If it is determined that the time saving state is not present (S3902: No), the start of the small winning performance is set (S3977), and the present process is ended.

In the process of S3902, if it is determined that the time is shortened (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether the danger flag 223he is set to on (S3991), and if it is determined that it is set to on, ( S3991: Yes), the display mode for making the game ball win V during the current small win game (to aim for the small win V) is set (S3994), the process of S3997 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3991, if it is determined that the danger flag 223he is not set to on (S3991: No), then the number of reserved balls (special The number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is read out (S3992), and it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 is 4 (upper limit number) (S3993). In the process of S3993, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is 4 (the upper limit number), that is, if a jackpot game is generated in the current small win game, 4 times ( If it is determined that the second special symbol lottery (upper limit number of times) can be executed (S3993: Yes), a display mode is set to make the player aim for the small win V (S3994), and the process of S3997 is executed. , this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S3993, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is not 4 (S3993: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is 0 (S3995), and it is 0. If it is determined that (S3995: Yes), a display mode (see FIG. 258) for allowing the player to select a game with a small win is set (S3996), the process of S3997 is executed, and this process ends. . If it is determined in the process of S3995 that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is not 0, that is, the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is between 1 and 3 (S3995: No), the process of S3997 is executed and the main process end.

Next, the contents of stop command processing 11 (S2291) will be explained with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 11 (S2291). This stop command processing 11 (S2291) is executed when a stop command is received from the main controller 110 to indicate that the special symbol fluctuations have been stopped and displayed, and is based on the stop timing of the special symbol fluctuations. Processing for setting various presentation modes to be set is executed.

When stop command processing 11 (S2291) is executed, first, information stored in the gaming state storage area (223f) is read out (S8201), and based on the read information, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state or not. (S8202). If it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (S8202: No), the stop display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the received stop command is set (S8211), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8202 that the time saving state is present (S8202: Yes), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation stop is the final fluctuation of the time saving state (S8203). The determination in S8203 is based on the update information (time reduction number, remaining time reduction number) stored in the time saving information update area 223g to determine whether the current fluctuation stop is the final change in the time saving state.

Here, if it is determined that it is the final change in time saving (S8203: Yes), it is the timing for the time saving state to end, so the various flags (acquisition effect settings) that were set to execute various effects during the time saving state Completed flag 223ha, 2nd acquisition effect set flag 223hb, 3rd acquisition effect set flag 223hc, MAX acquisition flag 223hd, danger flag 223he, game waiting flag 223hf) are all set to OFF (S8204), and the processing of S8205 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S8203, if it is determined that it is not the time saving final fluctuation (S8203), then it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a jackpot or a small winning fluctuation (S8206), and the current fluctuation is a jackpot or a small winning fluctuation. Alternatively, if it is determined that the fluctuation is not a small hit fluctuation (missing fluctuation) (S8206: No), the processing of S8211 is executed and the present processing ends. In the process of S8206, if it is determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot or small win fluctuation (S8206: Yes), the process moves to S8205.

In the process of S8205, the number of reserved balls (special pattern 2 reserved balls number) stored in the special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223b2 is read out (S8205), and it is determined whether the number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is 4 (upper limit number). (S8207). In the process of S8207, if it is determined that the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is 4 (the upper limit number), that is, it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery 4 times (the upper limit number of times) after the end of the time saving state. If it is determined (S8207: Yes), a display mode is set to indicate that an advantageous game advantageous to the player will be executed as a game (pullback game) after the end of the time saving state (S8208), and the process of S8211 is performed. Execute and end this process.

In addition, in the process of S8207, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is not 4 (S8207: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is 0 (S8209), and it is 0. If it is determined that (S8209: Yes), a display mode is set to indicate that a disadvantageous game disadvantageous to the player will be executed (the pullback game will not be executed) as a game after the time saving state ends (pullback game). (S8210), executes the process of S8211, and ends this process. If it is determined in the process of S8209 that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is not 0, that is, the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is between 1 and 3 (S8209: No), the process of S8211 is executed and the main process end.

Next, the contents of the effect setting process 11 (S2891) will be explained with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 11 (S2891). This production setting process 11 (S2891) is executed in place of the production setting process (see S2804 in FIG. 63) of the first embodiment described above, and is based on the number of special symbol fluctuations (time saving number) in the time saving state. Processing for setting different presentation modes is executed accordingly.

When the effect setting process 11 (S2891) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (S2981), and if it is determined that it is not a time saving state (S2981: No), the variable display mode is , the variable display mode for the normal state corresponding to the lottery result is selected (S2982), and this processing is ended. In the process of S2981, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a time saving state (S2981: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the second special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation). (S2983), If it is determined that it is not the special symbol 2 variation (it is the first special symbol variation) (S2983: No), the variation display mode for the special symbol 1 time-saving state corresponding to the lottery result is selected as the variation display mode. is selected (S2984), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2983, if it is determined that it is a special symbol 2 variation (S2983: yes), then the current special symbol variation is the first to sixth time reduction (special symbol 2 executed in the first half period of the time reduction state). (S2985), and if it is determined that it is the 1st to 6th time saving (S2985: Yes), the variable display mode for the special drawing 2 time saving state corresponding to the lottery result is determined as the variable display mode. is selected (S2986), and this process ends.

In the process of S2983, if it is determined that the special chart 2 variation is not the first to sixth time saving state (S2983: No), then the current special chart 2 variation is the seventh or eighth time saving state (the second half of the time saving state). It is determined whether the current special figure 2 variation is the 7th or 8th time reduction (in the latter half of the time reduction period) (S2987). If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time-saving end preparation period (S2987: Yes), the first effect setting process is executed (S2988), the process of S2986 is executed, and this process ends. .

In the process of S2987, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is not the 7th or 8th time reduction (special figure 2 variation executed in the time reduction end preparation period of the latter half period of the time reduction state), that is, If it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is the 9th or 10th time reduction (special figure 2 variation executed in the period before the end of time reduction in the latter half of the time reduction state) (S2987: No), 2 effect setting processing is executed (S2989), the processing of S2986 is executed, and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be explained. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first effect setting process (S2988). This first effect setting process (S2988) is a process for setting the effect mode for the special figure 2 variation that is executed during the 7th or 8th time shortening (the time saving end preparation period in the latter half of the time saving state). It is something to be carried out.

When the first effect setting process (S2988) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current special figure 2 variation is the special figure variation of the 7th time-saving rotation (S9101), and it is determined whether the current special figure 2 variation is the special figure variation of the 7th time-saving rotation. If it is determined that there is one (S9101: Yes), it is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a middle fluctuation (S9102). If it is determined that it is not a middle fluctuation pattern (it is a very short fluctuation pattern) (S9102: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a middle fluctuation in the process of S9102 (S9102: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special map 2 is 4 (upper limit number) (S9103), and 4 (upper limit number) If it is determined that this is not the case (S9103: No), an effect mode is set to encourage the acquisition of special drawing 2 pending (S9104), the acquisition effect set flag 223ha is set to ON (S9105), and this process is ended. . Further, in the process of S9103, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawings 2 is not 4 (upper limit number) (S9103: No), the process of S9104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9105.

In the process of S9101, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is not the special figure variation of the 7th time-saving rotation (S9101: No), then the current special figure 2 variation is the special figure variation of the 8th time-saving rotation. (S9106), and if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is the special figure variation of the 8th time-saving rotation (S9106: Yes), it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a middle variation. It is determined (S9107). If it is determined that it is not a middle fluctuation pattern (it is a very short fluctuation pattern) (S9107: No), this process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of 9107, if it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is a middle fluctuation (S9107: Yes), then it is determined whether the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to on (S9108), and the MAX If the acquisition flag 223hd is not set to on and the group is divided (S9108: No), a performance mode is set to encourage the number of reserved balls for special map 2 to be 3 (S9112), and a second acquisition performance setting is performed. The completed flag 223hb is set to on (S9113), and this process ends.

In the process of S9108, if it is determined that the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is set to on (S9108: Yes), a performance mode to indicate waiting for the game is set (S9109), and the MAX acquisition flag 223hd is turned off. is set (S9110), the game standby flag 223hf is set to ON (S9111), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the contents of the second effect setting process (S2989) executed in the effect setting process 11 (see S2891 in FIG. 271) will be explained. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second effect setting process (S2989). This second effect setting process (S2989) is a process for setting the effect mode for the special figure 2 variation that is executed during the 9th or 10th time reduction (period before the end of time reduction in the latter half of the time reduction state). It is something to be carried out.

When the second effect setting process (S2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current special figure 2 variation is the special figure variation of the 9th time-saving rotation (S9201), and it is determined whether the current special figure 2 variation is the special figure variation of the 9th time-saving rotation. If it is determined that there is one (S9201: Yes), it is determined whether the selected fluctuation pattern is a long fluctuation (S9202). If it is determined that the pattern is not a long variation (it is a very short variation pattern) (S9202: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9202 that it is a long fluctuation (S9202: Yes), then a performance mode is set to encourage increasing only one special drawing 2 pending (S9203), and a second acquisition performance setting is performed. The completed flag 223hc is set on (S9204), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S9201, if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is not the special figure variation of the 9th time-saving rotation (S9201: No), then the current special figure 2 variation is the special figure variation of the 10th time-saving rotation. It is determined whether it is a figure variation (last variation) (S9205), and if it is determined that the current special figure 2 variation is the special figure variation (last variation) of the 10th time saving rotation (S9205: Yes), it is selected. It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern detected is a long fluctuation (S9206). If it is determined that the pattern is not a long variation (it is a very short variation pattern) (S9206: No), the process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S9206, if it is determined that it is a long fluctuation (S9206: Yes), a performance mode that encourages the acquisition of special map 2 reservation is set (S9207), and the acquisition performance set flag 223 ha is set on (S9208). ), this process ends.

As explained above, in the eleventh embodiment, the period in which the gaming state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set is a disadvantageous period in which at least a specific condition (obtainment of special drawing 2 reservation) is difficult to satisfy. The period is configured to be set earlier than the advantageous period in which the specific conditions are likely to be satisfied, and the advantageous period is set earlier than the advantageous period when the time saving state is set. The configuration is such that it is more advantageous for the player if the jackpot game is executed after the setting.

In addition, during the small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbol that is mainly (prioritized) performed during the time saving state, a jackpot game is executed by placing the game ball in a V prize. It is configured so that it can be In other words, the player is configured to be able to select at what timing during the time saving state the jackpot game is to be executed and whether or not to make the game ball win a V prize during the small win game.

With this configuration, when a small winning game is executed during a disadvantageous period in the time saving state, in order to ensure that the player executes the jackpot game during the time saving state, the game is executed during the disadvantageous period. The player is made to choose whether to play a game that allows the game ball to win a V prize even if it is a small winning game, or to play a game that does not allow the game ball to win a V prize in order to execute a jackpot game after the advantageous period is set. It is possible to provide new gameplay.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a time saving state is set, a predetermined disadvantageous period and an advantageous period are always set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the type of jackpot type set for the triggering jackpot game and the gaming state at the time of winning, it is possible to set a time saving state where only a disadvantageous period is set or a time saving state where only an advantageous period is set. Also good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time saving state is formed by one unfavorable period (time saving 1st to 6th special symbol fluctuation period) and one advantageous period (time saving 7th to 10th special symbol fluctuation period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that disadvantageous periods and advantageous periods are set alternately. Furthermore, when the time saving state is set without using the jackpot winning as an opportunity, for example, as the game state, both the probability state of the normal symbol and the probability state of the special symbol are configured to be variable, and four types of games can be set. The states are normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), short time state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), variable state (high probability state for special symbols, This is a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set a high probability state for normal symbols and a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and when a variable probability state is set. There are cases where the time-saving state is set based on the fulfillment of the falling condition that moves the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (making it fall), and cases where the time-saving state is set based on the winning of the jackpot. In this case, the setting contents of the disadvantageous period and advantageous period may be changed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, within the advantageous period of the time saving state, there is a first state in which it is easy to acquire the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, and a second state in which it is more difficult to acquire the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 than in the first state. , a first state in which it is easy to obtain the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 at the time when the variation of special symbol 2 during the advantageous period is executed, and the first state. A second state in which it is more difficult to obtain the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is configured to be variably set.

This makes it easier to acquire the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls during the time saving state (during the advantageous period) based on the game result of how many special drawing 2 reserved balls to obtain at which timing. Since the number of balls reserved for special symbols 2 at the end of time saving can be varied, it is possible to provide the player with an innovative game including a new element of timing for obtaining special symbols 2 reserved balls.

Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the first state and the second state described above are configured to be set using a predetermined specific setting method, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, , even if the setting methods (setting conditions) for the first state and the second state are different depending on the type of jackpot type set for the jackpot game that triggers the setting of the time saving state and the gaming state at the time of winning. good. By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which game to play at which timing and based on which gaming method, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with the game early. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first state and Although it is configured to set two states, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a special symbol executed (set) within a predetermined period (for example, within a period until the special symbol variation is executed 5 times). The first state and the second state may be set by comprehensively determining the lottery result and the variation pattern of the selected special symbol. Furthermore, it may be configured such that an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the first state and the second state are set based on the content of the player's operation on the operating means.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, the player is configured to be able to execute a guidance effect that is helpful when selecting a gaming method in a time-saving state, and prevents a time-saving game from being performed that is excessively disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from being put away. In addition, in this embodiment, when the timing for making the player select a gaming method arrives, the guidance effect is executed using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, but this is not limited to this. Alternatively, a guidance presentation may be performed that only informs the player that it is the period for selecting a gaming method, or a plurality of options may be displayed as choices that the player can select, but it is also possible to display a guidance effect that only informs the player that it is a period for selecting a gaming method. It may be configured to inform the player in a way that it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not this is a gaming method that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the configuration may be configured so that when a game is played using the gaming method selected by the player, a suggestion effect is executed to suggest whether or not the currently selected gaming method is the correct gaming method. good.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the performance modes of the various guidance performances described above with reference to FIGS. 254 to 258 are changed at the timing when the special symbol starts changing or at the timing when the winning command for the second special symbol is received. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation may be configured at the fluctuation stop timing of the previous fluctuation. In other words, when a game is executed using a gaming method according to the presentation mode of the guidance presentation after visually confirming the guidance presentation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the timing at which the game can be executed using the appropriate gaming method If so, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation may be varied at any timing.

Furthermore, it is configured to be able to display a plurality of appropriate gaming methods set for various game patterns that may occur during the time-saving state (patterns that combine the number of time-savings and the number of reserved balls for special drawings 2), so that the current game It may be configured such that the player identifies the pattern and then selects and executes an appropriate gaming method. In this case, a first notification mode (for example, a mode in which the number of time reductions and the number of reserved balls for special drawings 2 are displayed numerically) that can inform the player of the game pattern currently being executed in an easy-to-understand manner, and the first notification mode. A second notification mode that is more difficult for players to understand than the mode (for example, a mode in which only one of the number of time reductions and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is displayed numerically, or the number of time reductions and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) The mode of displaying the corresponding mark) is configured to be displayable, and the display condition that is established (for example, the condition that is established according to the result of the player's operation on the frame button 22, or the lottery result of the special symbol) is configured to be displayable. It is preferable that the notification mode to be displayed is determined based on the conditions (conditions that are satisfied). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a new enjoyment of predicting the current game pattern.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set and the special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired up to the upper limit during the period (advantageous period) in which the special figure 2 reserved balls can be easily obtained, the game is started. A first period in which it is likely to be advantageous to the player, a second period in which it is likely to be advantageous to the player if the player acquires a certain number (for example, 3) of special figure 2 reserved balls, and a second period in which the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is only one. A third period in which it is likely to be advantageous to the player if acquired is configured to be settable. As a result, even during the period when an advantageous period is set, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not increased needlessly, but the game can be played to increase the number of special figure 2 reserved balls to an arbitrary number. Since the player can play the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this 11th embodiment, since there is one data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period Although the setting rule is fixed, it is not limited to this, for example, a plurality of data tables may be provided that are referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol during the time saving state, and the above-mentioned first period, first period, etc. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of setting rules for the second period and the third period are provided.

Further, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period are set for each execution period of the second special symbol variation to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned first period, second period, and third period may be set across multiple special symbol changes, or based on the elapsed time after the time saving state is set. The above-described first period, second period, and third period may be set.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set, the number of remaining time reductions is notified on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but the number of remaining time reductions is not displayed. It may be configured, or it may be configured to abstractly display the number of remaining time reductions. With this configuration, even if the ultra-short variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol 2 variation during the time-saving state, the display of the remaining time-saving number will not decrease rapidly, so the player will not feel any discomfort. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which this happens.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment described above, when the special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) is executed, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation is configured to be set based on the selected variation pattern. Without being limited to this, for example, the fluctuation pattern or lottery result to be selected may be determined in advance based on the information (pre-read information) included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110, and the The configuration may be such that the performance mode is set based on the above. As a result, for example, if a special symbol lottery in which an ultra-short fluctuation pattern is selected is won, in addition to the ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds) period, the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol 2 fluctuation) Since it is possible to set a presentation mode to indicate winning to the player using the variation period of the special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) executed before, it is possible to execute a production that is easy to understand for the player. can.

In addition, in the present 11th embodiment, as a pullback game (second special symbol lottery in the normal state) executed after the time saving state ends, there is a drawback game during the time saving state in order to make the player execute an advantageous pullback game that is advantageous to the player. Although various guidance effects for guiding the player about the gaming method are always executed during the time saving state, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a specific execution condition is satisfied during the time saving state. It may be configured such that the various guidance effects described above are executed only when In this case, for example, when a special figure change is executed during the preparation period for the end of time reduction, which corresponds to the 7th or 8th time reduction, it is necessary to check whether it is better to newly acquire the number of reserved balls for special figure 2. The player executes an initial performance that is difficult to distinguish, and the initial performance being executed is changed to the above-mentioned guidance performance in accordance with the gaming method executed while the initial performance is being executed. Specifically, if the length of the period from when the initial performance is executed to when the number of reserved balls for special map 2 is newly acquired is longer than a predetermined period, the guidance performance is executed. It is good to configure.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the ease of execution of the guidance performance depending on the gaming method (the firing interval of game balls in a right-handed game) during the time saving state, so it is possible for the player to It is possible to further increase the enjoyment of selecting a gaming method during the time saving state.

In addition, in the present eleventh embodiment, the gaming method (the presence or absence of a right-handed game) during the time saving state is configured to be set for each special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) executed during the time saving state. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be set for multiple special symbol variations (special symbol 2 variations), or for one special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variations), the first half The gaming method may be set to encourage right-handed games during the period, and to encourage right-handed games to be prohibited during the latter half of the period.

<About production modification examples in the 11th embodiment>
Next, a modification of the performance executed during the time saving state of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be explained based on the flow shown in FIG. 263 described above. In the eleventh embodiment described above, as a performance executed during the time-saving state, there is an accumulation performance that newly acquires a specific number of special figure 2 reserved balls based on the number of time-saving fluctuations and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls. (For example, see FIG. 254(a)), and when a specific number of newly acquired special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired during the accumulation effect, the special figure 2 reserved balls are displayed for a predetermined period of time. It was configured to execute a standby effect (for example, see FIG. 254(b)) that prevents the player from acquiring any more.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned accumulation effect, when a special symbol variation (special symbol 2 variation) is executed, the variation time of the special symbol 2 variation to be executed this time is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). This fluctuation pattern is configured to be executed when it is more advantageous for the player to increase the number of special map 2 reserved balls than the number of currently acquired special map 2 reserved balls, and the When a new special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired while the ``ro effect'' is being executed, it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reserved balls after acquisition is the number of special figure 2 reserved balls that is advantageous to the player. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is advantageous to the player, a standby effect is executed to prevent new reserved balls for special figure 2 from being acquired until the final variation of the time saving state is executed. It was configured like this. Furthermore, if a new special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired while the standby effect is being executed, it is determined that an excessive number of special figure 2 reserved balls have been acquired, and the current time-saving state is disadvantageous to the player. It was configured to execute a DANGER effect indicating that

Then, the above-mentioned standby effect or DANGER effect is configured to be executed continuously until the end timing of the time saving state, and the normal state is changed based on the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls acquired at the end of the time saving state. It was configured to execute a pull-back effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the drawing.

On the other hand, in this production modification example, the winning information included in the special figure 2 reserved ball obtained in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired is read in advance (preliminarily determined), and the performance is based on the result of the preliminary determination. is configured to run. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a performance that corresponds to the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the special drawing 2 lottery that is executed during the standby performance.

Next, the presentation contents of this presentation modification example will be explained. First, the contents of the effect executed in accordance with the flow shown in FIG. 263(a) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 263(a), when the middle variation (10 seconds variation) is set (selected) as the special figure 2 variation for the 7th time reduction (4 remaining time reductions), the above-mentioned 11th embodiment A guidance performance (accumulate performance) for accumulating the same number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 up to the upper limit (4 balls) is executed.

Then, the guidance performance (accumulate performance) is executed until the 7th time-saving special figure 2 variation is stopped and displayed, or until the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit. Here, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit, a standby effect for a predetermined period is executed. In this performance modification example, a performance in which the player actively releases his/her hand from the operating handle 51 is executed as a standby performance. Specifically, a presentation (touch presentation) that allows users to simultaneously touch a plurality of decorative members provided on the pachinko machine 10, specifically, a plurality of decorative members provided at positions larger than the size of a human palm of the hand. As a result, a touch effect is executed in which the words "Keep touching the decorative member" and an icon imitating the decorative member to be touched by the player are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

The above-mentioned decorative member is provided with a detection means (touch sensor) capable of detecting that the player is touching it, and during the period when the above-mentioned touch effect is being performed, the decorative member is It is configured so that an operation performance that changes the performance mode is executed. Specifically, as the production mode of the operation production, the initial display mode is first displayed, and then the length of the period during which the detection means detects the player's operation, and the information on the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball are displayed. The presentation mode of the operation presentation is configured to be variable based on the pre-read result.

In this case, if it is determined that there is a specific pre-read result (jackpot), and if it is determined that the player has touched multiple decorative members for a predetermined period or longer, a special feature corresponding to the pre-read result is determined. The system is configured to notify the player before the variation shown in FIG. 2 is executed. With this configuration, in order to quickly grasp the result of a game to be executed later (the game result corresponding to the reserved special figure 2 reservation), the player is proactively asked to place the decorative member in a predetermined manner. You can touch it for a longer period of time. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operation handle 51 during the period when the standby effect is being executed, so it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player acquires an excessive amount of special drawing 2 reserved balls during the standby effect. can.

In addition, in this production modification example, if a special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired during the 7th time saving special figure 2 variation, the variation pattern of the next special figure 2 variation (the 8th time saving special figure 2 variation) (variation time) is a super short variation pattern (variation time 0.1 seconds) or a medium variation (variation time 10 seconds). If it is 0.1 seconds, the first period (for example, 5 seconds) of standby effect will be executed after the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, and the 8th time-saving special figure 2 variation will be in 10 seconds. In some cases, the standby effect for a second period (for example, 15 seconds) is configured to be executed after the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 reaches the upper limit. In addition, the period set as the execution period of the standby effect is the end timing of the standby effect that is executed when the special figure 2 reserved balls reach the upper limit number in the shortest period during the 7th time saving special figure 2 change. It is sufficient if the length overlaps with the final fluctuation period of the time saving state.

In this way, by pre-reading the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation that will be executed later and setting the production period of the standby production to be executed based on the pre-reading result, the special symbol to be executed within the target period of the standby production Since there is no need to set a standby effect every time a variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed, the processing load related to the effect setting can be reduced.

In addition, by executing a standby effect for a predetermined period, for example, if the special figure 2 reserved ball reaches the upper limit earlier during the 7th time-saving special figure 2 variation, it is possible to reach the upper limit earlier. The end timing of the standby performance can be made earlier than if it were not possible. Therefore, the execution timing of the save effect (see FIG. 256) that is executed during the final variation of the time saving state can be accelerated, and the game can be played in which the special drawing 2 reserved balls are acquired up to the upper limit number during the final variation of the time saving state. , it can be executed with some leeway.

Furthermore, for example, if you acquire the maximum number of special pattern 2 reserved balls during the 7th time saving special pattern 2 variation, the winning information (small If it is determined in advance that a winning or jackpot is included, a special standby effect that is different from the normal standby effect is executed. Specifically, as a result of the above-mentioned touch performance and operation performance, a performance is performed that notifies the player in advance that the most advantageous game will be executed after the end of the time saving state.

In other words, if you acquire the maximum number of special pattern 2 reserved balls during the 7th time saving time special pattern 2 variation, the last acquired special pattern 2 reserved balls will be used for the next execution when the time saving state ends. 2 special symbol lottery, that is, the special symbol 2 reserved ball used in the 2nd special symbol lottery that is executed first after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state. In other words, when the special standby performance is executed, the player can know in advance that the most advantageous game for the player will be executed by winning the second special symbol lottery during the normal state. . Therefore, the player will actively perform the touch performance while expecting that the special standby performance will be executed, so that the player can be motivated to participate in the game and also participate in the touch performance. This makes it easier to let go of the operation handle 51, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a new special map 2 reserved ball is acquired during the period when the standby performance is being performed. .

In addition, for example, when the standby effect is being executed, the special figure 2 variation, specifically, in the flow of the game shown in FIG. If it is determined in advance that the player has won, a special selection effect is performed instead of the standby effect. In this special selection performance, the player is asked to select whether to play a game aiming for a V prize during a small winning game or to play a game not aiming for a V prize during a small winning game, as shown in FIG. 258. is executed. The performance mode of this special selection performance is configured such that different performance modes are set based on the preliminary determination results for special figure 2 reserved balls other than the special figure 2 reserved ball corresponding to the 9th time-saving special figure 2 variation. For example, if the number of special map 2 reserved balls reaches the upper limit during the 7th time saving special map 2 fluctuation, the preliminary determination result for the last acquired special map 2 reserved ball is a win (small win). In this case, a special selection performance mode is set that indicates that it is more advantageous not to aim for the V prize during a small win game based on the small win won in the 9th time-saving special figure 2 change, and other special figures If there is no preliminary determination result indicating winning for the two reserved balls, a special selection performance mode is set in which the player is allowed to arbitrarily select which game to play. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from selecting an excessively disadvantageous game, thereby preventing the player from selecting a disadvantageous game and reducing his or her desire to play. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment described above, when an excessive number of special drawing 2 reserved balls are obtained, as shown in FIG. It was composed of Then, at the timing when the time saving state ends, the DANGER effect is terminated, the reserved number of reserved special map 2 balls is notified, and the pullback effect is executed.

On the other hand, in this production modification example, if the special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired excessively, the second special symbol variation (the special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state) is executed after the normal state is set. The DANGER effect is also executed using the variation period of the second special symbol variation using reserved balls. In other words, the end timing of the DANGER effect is different from that of the eleventh embodiment described above. As a result, when the DANGER effect ends, a game is executed in which the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. With this configuration, when the DANGER effect is executed, it is difficult to be given the opportunity to acquire a large number of special map 2 reserved balls during the time saving state, and the pullback effect is not executed. It is possible to notify the player that the gaming situation is disadvantageous. In addition, since the DANGER effect can be executed using the variation time of the second special symbol variation that is executed after the normal state is set, the time period from when the DANGER effect is executed until the end timing of the time saving state arrives. If the period is extremely short, for example, in the game flow shown in FIG. 263(b), if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 reaches the upper limit just before the end of the 8th time-saving special chart 2 variation, It is possible to prevent the DANGER performance from ending in an instant and performing a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

In addition, the performance period of the above-mentioned DANGER performance is the remaining period from when the DANGER performance is executed until the end of the time saving state, and the entire period of the execution period of the second special symbol variation that is performed after the normal state is set. For example, if the number of executions of the second special symbol variation executed after the normal state is set is two or more, it is not necessary to use the first one executed after the normal state is set. 2 The DANGER performance is ended in response to the stop display timing of the special symbol fluctuation, a display mode is displayed indicating that a pullback performance will be executed as a result of the DANGER performance, and the pullback performance is then executed. It's okay.

In addition, as in this production modification example, a configuration in which a series of productions is executed using the remaining period in the time saving state and the execution period of the second special symbol variation that is executed after the normal state is set, It may also be used for standby performances. In this case, the performance mode of the standby performance (at least some performance modes included in the standby performance) is configured to be variable depending on the length of the period in which the standby performance is being executed, and It may be configured such that the longer the time, the more advantageous the game result will be to the player.

<About the modification of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modification of the eleventh embodiment described above, specifically, an example in which the technical idea of the eleventh embodiment is applied to the technology described in the eleventh embodiment described above will be described. In the eighth embodiment described above, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are provided for ending the time-saving state, and a plurality of time-saving termination conditions ( It was configured so that the time-saving ending conditions that are more likely to be met among the special drawing 1 ending conditions and special drawing 2 ending conditions are different. Then, it is determined whether the state is immediately before each time-saving end condition is satisfied (a state in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied), and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition is satisfied for the first time-saving end condition, The system is configured to execute a performance (gaming method guide performance) for making the player play a game in a game method in which other time-saving termination conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the first time-saving termination condition in which the time-saving termination condition is satisfied.

That is, in the eighth embodiment described above, in order to maximize the enjoyment of the game during the time saving state by the player (in order to lengthen the playing period during the time saving state), one of the plural time saving end conditions is set. Only the elements for establishing the time-saving end condition (for example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol) are updated, and the elements for fulfilling the other time-saving end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations for the first special symbol) are not updated at all. The configuration was configured to prevent the time saving state from ending when the time saving state is not completed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned eighth embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights for the second special symbol can be held and stored, and the time saving state is ended with the lottery rights for the second special symbol held and stored. Thus, during the normal state set after the end of the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery can be executed. In other words, a production that can maximize the number of special symbol drawings executed during the time saving state and end the time saving state with more lottery rights for the second special symbol held and stored. I configured it to run.

On the other hand, in the modification of the eleventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, it is easier to acquire the lottery right than when a gaming state other than the time saving state (for example, normal state) is set. A time-saving end condition (special figure 2 end condition) is set only for the second special symbol, and the number of drawings (variable number of times) of the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). The special symbol 2 ending condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends when the special symbol 2 is reached, and the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery. This embodiment differs from the above-mentioned eighth embodiment in its configuration. In addition, since the specific control content for executing the second special symbol lottery with priority over the first special symbol lottery is the same as the first embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this modification, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the lottery right of the second special symbol that is reserved and stored at the time when the second special symbol lottery is executed) and the end of the special symbol 2 The variation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed during the time saving state can be varied and selected based on the remaining number of special symbol lottery numbers (remaining time shortening number) until a condition is satisfied.

Specifically, from the time the time saving state is set until the remaining time saving number reaches 5, the second special symbol is changed for a short time based on the same fluctuation pattern table as in the eighth embodiment described above. The structure is configured such that the variation pattern (short variation pattern A) is selected, and when the number of remaining time reductions is 5 to 3 and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 2 or more, the above-mentioned short variation pattern is selected. If a variation pattern (medium variation pattern (for example, 10 to 20 seconds)) with a longer variation time than the variation time that can be selected as variation pattern A is selected, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 1, When the above-mentioned short fluctuation pattern A is selected and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the above-mentioned short fluctuation pattern A (very short fluctuation pattern (for example, 0. 1 second)) is selected.

Then, when the number of remaining time shortening times is 2 or 1 time (final change in time saving state) and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, 2, or 3, the above-mentioned super short fluctuation pattern ( 0.1 second) is selected and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is one, a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the above-mentioned medium fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation pattern (for example, 30 seconds)) is selected. It is configured to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the number of second special symbols held and stored at the end of the time saving state depending on the gaming method executed during the time saving state.

Here, the game content during the time saving state in this modification will be explained. In this modification, similarly to the eighth embodiment described above, when the time saving state is set, the gaming method of playing the right-handed game and executing the lottery of the second special symbol is the most advantageous for the player. It is configured to be a method.

While the right-handed game is being played continuously during the time saving state, the interval at which the lottery right for the second special symbol is acquired will be shorter than the interval at which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. , the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state (during the high probability state of normal symbols), the execution period of the game per normal symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol variation, and the variation time of the second special symbol variation, which are arranged on the game board 13. The arrangement intervals of various devices to be used are set. As a result, if you continue to play a right-handed game during the time-saving state, the game will be executed toward the final change in the time-saving state while maintaining the upper limit (4) for the number of second special symbols held in memory. will be done.

From now on, when explaining the flow of the game during the time saving state, the period from when the time saving state is set until the remaining number of time reductions reaches 5 will be referred to as the normal time reduction period, and the period when the remaining number of time reductions is 5 to 3. In the following explanation, we will refer to the period in which the remaining number of time reductions is 2 or 1 (the final change in the time reduction state) as the period before the end of time reduction.

As mentioned above, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is maintained at the upper limit (4 balls) and the game is executed during the time saving state, an ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) will occur in the period before the end of the time saving. will be selected. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the time saving state ends (when the final variation of the special symbol during the time saving state is stopped and displayed) is likely to decrease. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is at the upper limit (4 pieces), the second special symbol fluctuation with the remaining time shortening number of times being "2" (99th rotation in the time saving state) is an ultra short fluctuation pattern. is executed, and with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reduced to 3, the second special symbol variation with the remaining time shortening number of "1" (100th rotation in the time saving state) is executed in a super short variation pattern. Ru. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving is two.

In this way, when the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol is a predetermined number (4) and the period before the end of time reduction is entered, the second special symbol executed twice during the period before the end of time reduction is Since the ultra-short fluctuation pattern is set, it becomes difficult to newly acquire the reserved balls of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, if the right-handed game during the time-saving state is temporarily interrupted and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of time-saving is set to other than 4, the reserved balls of the second special symbol The fluctuation time is set for the second special symbol fluctuation during the period before the end of time reduction so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time of end of time reduction is likely to increase compared to the case where the number is four.

For example, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time reduction is 3, the second special symbol fluctuation with the remaining time reduction number of "2" (99th rotation in the time reduction state) is super short. It is executed in a variation pattern, and with the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol reduced to 2, the 2nd special symbol variation with the remaining time shortening number of "1" (100th rotation in the time saving state) is executed in a long variation pattern. be done. Therefore, since the final variation in the time saving state can be executed for a long time, it is possible to easily obtain a new reserved ball of the second special symbol during the final variation. In addition, in this modification, the variable time of 30 seconds is selected as the long variation pattern, and by executing the right-handed game for 30 seconds during the time saving state, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is Since it is configured so that three or more new balls can be acquired, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time reduction can be easily increased by simply continuing the right-handed game during the time reduction final variation when the long variation pattern is selected. The upper limit value (4 pieces) can be set.

Next, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of time reduction is 2, the second special symbol fluctuation with the remaining time reduction number of "2" (99th rotation in the time reduction state) is long. When the variation pattern is executed, by continuing the right-handed game during the variation of the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be temporarily brought to the upper limit (4 balls). Then, with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol set to the upper limit (4 pieces), the second special symbol variation with the remaining time shortening number of "1" (100th rotation in the time saving state) is executed in a super short variation pattern. be done. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the time saving can be set to three. In other words, it is possible to easily increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the time saving ends than when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state.

In addition, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 when entering the period before the end of the time reduction, that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, and a new second special symbol is reserved. When a ball is acquired and the second special symbol variation with the remaining time shortening number of "2" (99th rotation in the time saving state) is executed, the super short variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. Ru. Similarly, if the second special symbol fluctuation is executed with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol being 1 and the remaining time shortening number is "1" (100th rotation in the time saving state), the second special symbol The fluctuation pattern is executed in a very short fluctuation pattern. In other words, if you enter the pre-time saving period with the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol being less than the predetermined number (2), you will not have the opportunity to acquire a new number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. The time saving state will end without giving any.

As explained above, in this modification, the expectation of acquiring the reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time of the end of the time reduction is determined according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time reduction in the time reduction state. Since the values can be made different, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a gaming method that saves time.

In addition, in this modification, rather than continuing to play a right-handed game during the time saving state, it is better to temporarily interrupt the right-handed game or play a game other than the normal right-handed game (left-handed game). Since the configuration is such that it is easier to provide advantageous games to players in the period after the time saving state ends by executing the Changing the way can provide fun.

Furthermore, in this modification, if a right-handed game executed during the time-saving state is interrupted more than necessary, the bonus provided to the player in the period after the time-saving state ends (the second game in the normal state) The number of executions (execution of special symbol lottery) is smaller than when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to have a player playing games in a time-saving state not only change the game method, but also consider the length of the period for changing the game method. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the game during the time saving state.

In addition, in this modification, the time reduction end preparation period is a period during the time reduction state and is earlier than the period before the end of the time reduction (period in which the remaining number of time reductions is 2 or 1 (final change in the time reduction state)). (period when the number of remaining time reductions is 5 to 3) is configured so that a different fluctuation pattern is selected from the normal time reduction period (period until the number of remaining time reductions reaches 5), and this preparation for the end of time reduction Depending on the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the period, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of time reduction is arbitrarily changed by the player selecting a gaming method. It is configured so that it can be done.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "3 or 4" during the time-saving end preparation period, the fluctuation time is longer than the short fluctuation pattern selected during the time-saving normal period. The medium fluctuation pattern is configured so that it is easy to select, and if you continue to play right-handed games during the time saving state, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol when entering the period before the end of the time saving is the upper limit (4 balls). ). In addition, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "1 or 2" during the time-saving end preparation period, a variable pattern will be selected within the range that can be selected during the time-saving normal period. It is configured so that if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "0" when entering the period before the end of time reduction, the ultra-short fluctuation pattern, which is shorter than the short fluctuation pattern, is selected. ing.

In other words, when the above-mentioned medium fluctuation pattern is selected and the right-handed game is continuously executed, the number of balls of the second special symbol that is stored on hold at the beginning of the period before the end of the time reduction is the upper limit. value (4). Thereby, even if the player continues to play the right-handed game, it is possible to prevent the player from entering the time-saving pre-end period without newly acquiring the reserved balls of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily award benefits according to the content of the gaming method executed during the time saving state.

In addition, in this modification, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 when entering the time-saving end preparation period, the ultra-short fluctuation pattern (0.1 seconds) is used as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. is configured so that it is selected. Therefore, in order to prevent the second special symbol from entering the pre-time saving period when the number of reserved balls is at the upper limit (4), the game during the time saving state is interrupted while the right-handed game is interrupted more than necessary. When executed, in other words, in order not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the time saving state, do not play the right-handed game while the second special symbol variation is being executed, and the second special symbol variation is stopped. It is possible to suppress the playing of a game method in which a right-handed game is performed after the game is played (so-called a stop-hitting game).

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this modification, as a time-saving effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the time-saving state, a first time-saving effect is executed during the normal time-saving period. A second time-saving effect mode executed during the time-saving end preparation period, and a third time-saving effect mode executed during the time-saving end pre-period are configured to be settable. Here, the presentation mode unique to this modification will be explained.

As explained above, in this modification, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol variation to be selected is different based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state. By configuring the expected value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol obtained at the end of the time saving state to be different, the degree of advantage of the game executed after transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state is increased. are configured to differ. In other words, the configuration is such that the degree of advantage of the game to be executed later can be changed depending on the gaming method selected by the player during the time saving state. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game during the time saving state.

In addition, as described above, in this modification, the period during which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily increased (the period during which the second special symbol variation in which the long variation pattern is set) is When set, it is configured so that cases in which it is better to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and cases in which it is better not to increase occur depending on the remaining number of time reductions in the time reduction state. Therefore, when a period (easy period) in which it is possible for the player to easily increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has arrived, it is determined whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. It is possible to provide the fun of making choices.

In addition, in this modification, only the time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specific number (100 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state. For example, the time saving end condition may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot type set in the jackpot winning that triggered the setting of the time saving state, for example, when the number of changes of the special symbol is 50 A jackpot type that has a time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times is reached, a jackpot type that has a time-saving ending condition that is established when it reaches 75 times, and a time-saving ending that is established when it reaches 1 time. You may provide a jackpot type in which conditions are set.

In this case, since it is difficult for the player to predict the duration of the time saving state, the player can decide whether or not to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the easy period based on the remaining time saving number. This can make it difficult to distinguish.

In addition, as described above, in this modification, only the time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of changes in the special symbol is set as the time-saving end condition, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the result of the special symbol lottery Set up a time saving end condition (lottery result ending condition) that is satisfied when a specific lottery result (for example, a specific win or a specific loss) is made, so that the time saving state is forcibly ended regardless of the number of remaining time savings. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the time saving state will end, so the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed to the player at the time the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute a game in a time-saving state while considering a game method for securing a large amount of money.

In addition, in this modification, the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected second special symbol variation is varied based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state. Although the configuration is such that the expected value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol obtained at the end of the time saving period is different, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of remaining time reductions in the time saving state and the second special symbol The variation pattern of the second special symbol variation may be selected based on the result of the lottery, or the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the number of time reductions remaining in the time reduction state, and the second special symbol. The variation pattern of the second special symbol variation may be selected based on the lottery result. In this way, by configuring to refer to the lottery result of the second special symbol when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation, for example, before the end of the time saving state, which is the period immediately before the end of the time saving state, During the period, the super short fluctuation pattern will be selected unless the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a small win), and the super short fluctuation pattern will be selected only if the result is a specific lottery result (for example, a small win). A configuration may be adopted in which a long variation pattern in which a longer variation time is set than a short variation pattern is selected.

With this configuration, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery in a specific period during the time saving state (the period before the end of the time saving state), the first advantageous period (period in which the time saving state is set) that is advantageous to the player is determined. ) The advantageous degree (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) of the second advantageous period (the reserved expiration period of the second special symbol executed during the normal state) that comes after the second advantageous period can be made different. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state can influence the degree of advantage during the first advantageous period and the degree of advantage during the second advantageous period, providing a novel gaming property. be able to.

In addition, in this modification, the normal period of time reduction (1 to 95 time reductions), the preparation period for the end of time reduction (96 to 98 time reductions), and the period before the end of time reduction (99,100 time reductions) are set as the periods in the time reduction state. However, so that different fluctuation patterns are selected according to each set period, the fluctuation patterns to be selected are different depending on the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations during the time saving state). However, without being limited to this, for example, the length (range) of each period described above may be varied depending on the type of jackpot that is set when winning a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set. .

Furthermore, when the time-saving state is set, the entire period of the time-saving state is set as a normal time-saving period, and the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is a specific lottery result (for example, a small win). If you win, the special fluctuation pattern will be selected for a predetermined period of time (for example, during 5 rotations of the special symbol fluctuation) as a fluctuation pattern selected in response to the second special symbol lottery to be executed after the small winning game ends. A special fluctuation pattern table that can be selected is used, and when a fluctuation pattern is selected using the special fluctuation pattern table, the above-mentioned ultra short fluctuation pattern or long fluctuation pattern can be selected. Also good. With this configuration, the first advantageous period advantageous to the player (when the time saving state is The degree of advantage (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) of the second advantageous period (the reserved expiration period of the second special symbol executed during the normal state) that comes after the set period) can be made different. . Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state can influence the degree of advantage during the first advantageous period and the degree of advantage during the second advantageous period, providing a novel gaming property. be able to.

<About the production content in the modified example of the 11th embodiment>
Next, the content of characteristic effects among the plurality of effects executed in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment will be explained. As described above, in this modification, when a time-saving state that is an advantageous gaming state for the player is set, the time-saving state (first period) ends depending on the gaming method executed during the time-saving state. It is configured such that the degree of advantage of the game executed in the subsequent predetermined period (second period) can be varied. During the time saving state (during the first period), the system is configured to perform a performance for guiding (suggesting) a gaming method for more advantageously playing the game during the second period. With this configuration, it is possible to provide easy-to-understand guidance to the player about the game during the time-saving state.

Specifically, when the time saving state is set, there is a measurement means that measures the number of remaining time reductions until the time reduction end condition is met, and based on the measurement results of that measurement means, the current time saving situation is determined to be normal. It has a period determining means for determining whether the period is a period, a time reduction end preparation period, or a time reduction end pre-end period, and a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode corresponding to the determination result of the period determination means, By displaying the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can grasp the situation during the time saving state.

Furthermore, a prediction means is provided for predicting in advance a variation pattern that can be selected until the time saving end condition is satisfied, based on the measurement result of the measurement means and the storage content of the storage means that stores the number of stored second special symbols. establish.

If the prediction means predicts that only the ultra-short fluctuation pattern will be selected until the time-saving termination condition is met, for example, the final fluctuation of the time-saving termination preparation period (which is executed when the remaining time-saving number is 3) If there are 4 reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol at the time when the 2nd special symbol variation) is executed, regardless of whether or not a new reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol is acquired during the final variation. , since it is confirmed that the remaining time-saving fluctuations (the two second special symbol fluctuations executed during the time-saving state) will be executed in the ultra-short fluctuation pattern, the three times including this final fluctuation are 2. Set a composite performance mode based on the special symbol variation lottery results (preread results). Then, the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied, that is, the period from the start of the final fluctuation of the time saving end preparation period until the final fluctuation of the period before the end of time saving (the final fluctuation of the time saving state) is stopped and displayed. and executes the composite performance used in the composite performance mode.

By executing a composite effect in this way, in a case where a super short variation pattern can be set in order to make it difficult to newly acquire the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol, the super short variation pattern Since the lottery result of the selected second special symbol variation can be notified to the player using a plurality of variation periods of the second special symbol variation, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern determining means for determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation to be executed this time determines that the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation to be executed this time is a long fluctuation pattern, the storage means is stored. The situation is such that it is more advantageous for the player to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol based on the stored number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the measurement result of the measuring means (remaining time shortening number). The player has a situation determining means for determining whether or not the current situation is present, and is configured to set a performance mode based on the determination result of the situation determining means and execute a guidance performance that guides the player about the current situation. There is.

In this guidance presentation, a first guidance mode is used to inform the player that a second special symbol variation is being executed (during the easy period), and a second special symbol variation with a long variation time is set; On the other hand, it includes at least a second guidance mode for guiding either a continuation game that continues a right-handed game or a switching game that interrupts a right-handed game (executes a left-handed game). The performance is executed in the display mode.

In addition, instead of this guidance performance, a special guidance performance that can display the above-mentioned first guidance mode and a special guidance mode that allows the player to perform either a continuation game or a switching game is executed, and the easy period elapses. Afterwards, a result mode indicating the game result may be displayed based on the game content of the player during the easy period and the content of the second guidance mode described above. In this case, it is better to increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol while informing the player that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be easily increased during the easy period. A performance that makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the game is good or not is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which the player is allowed to select a gaming method without understanding the content of the performance.

In addition, as a technical configuration different from the eleventh embodiment and the modification of the eleventh embodiment described above, for example, it is possible to perform the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery simultaneously. When a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the special symbol indicating the small win is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol fluctuation that is being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed when it is a miss. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when a gaming state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, the time saving state ends when the number of changes of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. In the pachinko machine 10, if the reserved balls of the first special symbol have been acquired and the reserved balls of the second special symbol have not been acquired at the time the time saving state is set, the reserved balls of the first special symbol are It is configured to execute a guidance performance that prevents a game (time-saving game) for acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol from being executed until the number reaches 0 (until the first special symbol variation is no longer executed). Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the number of second special symbol fluctuations that are forcibly stopped and displayed due to a miss based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations from being updated unnecessarily. That is, when an advantageous state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, a game more advantageous to the player can be provided by interrupting the game for acquiring the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment and the modified example of the eleventh embodiment described above, an example has been described in which the time saving state is used as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. may be considered an advantageous state. In addition, in a gaming machine that has a gaming feature that allows you to acquire benefits through multiple stages, the state where you have reached a specific stage among the multiple stages, that is, the state where it is easier to obtain benefits than the initial state, is considered to be an advantageous state. Good.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specific number of fluctuations among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, that is, the time-saving end condition is set. The time-saving state is changed to the normal state at different timings depending on whether the number-of-time end condition is met and the time-saving end condition is met when a small win is won by drawing a special symbol, that is, the time-saving end condition is met. It was configured so that it could be moved to

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of winnings is met, the gaming state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is met. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine that is controlled to shift the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the completion of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the variation of the same special symbol due to the time saving termination condition that is satisfied, the range that is the sum of the variation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small winning game is executed You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving termination condition that has been met. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving termination condition that is met, even during a small winning game in which a small amount of benefits are given to the player, the electric accessory 640a can be activated to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game more advantageous for the player.

In addition, we have set up multiple types of small winnings with different periods in which small winning games are executed, and even if the conditions for ending the number of winnings are met, the game will be played according to the type of small winning for which the conditions for ending the number of winnings have been met. It is a good idea to make the benefits given to different people different. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of time-saving termination condition that has been met but also in the more detailed content of the time-saving termination condition.

In addition, in this case, even if the conditions for ending the number of winnings are met, there are cases where the time saving state ends at the timing when the small winning game starts, and cases where the time saving state ends at the timing when the small winning game ends. It is best to configure the system so that there is a mixture of This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, there is a process for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of changes in the special symbol, and a process for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the small win has been won. Although a configuration is used in which the process of determining and the process of determining are executed separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of special symbols is centrally managed, and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied is used. You may use the structure which sets the timing which ends a time saving state based on.

In each of the embodiments described above, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the number of reserved balls command is issued. Although a case has been described in which data is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the transmission is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, entering the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving the symbols vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. Moreover, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the embodiments described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed when the player is in a gaming state advantageous to the player (time saving state), and a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed when the player is in a normal gaming state. Although the configuration is such that a left-handed game is executed in which the game is aimed at, it is only necessary to change the target area of the game board 13 depending on the game state. It is also possible to have the player execute a right-handed game. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that games can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as operating means that can be operated by the player, and the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used to determine that the operating means has been operated when the player presses the button. A lever-shaped operating means that can be used to determine whether the player has operated the lever by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or a lever-shaped operating means that can be used to determine whether the player has operated it by touching or coming close to it. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means that can be identified, a wireless type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c It may be configured such that part or all of the operation control is executed not by the main control device 110 but by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the embodiments described above, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is controlled by the audio lamp. Although configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The same control device may execute the processing for With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In the sixth, eighth, and ninth embodiments described above, the first operating port 704 for opening the first right ball entrance port 64a2 inside the sorting device 700 and the second right ball entrance port 64b are opened. Although the second operating port 707 is provided for the purpose of the operation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first right ball entrance port 64a2 and the second right ball entrance port 64b may be provided directly inside the sorting device 700. In other words, the first operating port 704 may be replaced with a right first ball entry port 64a2, and the second operating port 707 may be replaced with a second right ball entry port 64b. With this configuration, the first operating port 704, the second operating port 707, the first operating accessory 645a, and the second operating accessory 645b can be deleted, so the board configuration can be simplified. can. Therefore, since the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the cost rate can be reduced.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as the plurality of special symbol types, but the number of types of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more types of special symbols are used. The special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game feature in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules, and a game feature in which a lottery (variation) is carried out independently of each other are explained. However, the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

Furthermore, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which a plurality of levels of probability combinations (commonly referred to as settings) are provided for the jackpot lottery, and the settings can be changed at the game parlor side. In addition, for pachinko machines that have multiple settings, the combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of jackpot probability in a low probability state and jackpot probability in a variable probability state) can be set in one of multiple stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to , but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the pachinko machine is capable of varying the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot depending on the settings. It's okay. That is, the rate at which jackpots of a type advantageous to the player are determined may be varied, or the rate at which jackpots of a type disadvantageous to the player are determined, may be varied depending on the settings. More specifically, for example, the rate at which jackpots are determined with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied depending on the settings, or the rate at which jackpots are determined with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting is varied by varying the proportion of each setting. In addition, for example, after the jackpot ends, the ratio at which a jackpot is determined that will give a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) can be varied depending on the setting, or a jackpot that will give a small number of time savings (for example, 0 times). The rate at which the is determined may be varied depending on the settings. Furthermore, the rate at which jackpots are determined to transition (or are likely to transition) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot can be varied according to settings, or may be changed to a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, normal state). ) may be changed depending on the setting. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided which has a significantly higher probability of being determined only in a specific setting (almost never being determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the settings can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. In setting 6, if there is a jackpot, a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, there is an extremely high possibility that the most advantageous setting is 6, so the player is forced to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot when playing the game. be able to. In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the proportion of the jackpot type in which 66 time saving times are given after the jackpot ends is higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the accessory inside the jackpot) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the ratio of determination becomes higher) with a specific setting. In addition, when changing the combination of jackpot probabilities depending on the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the setting is less favorable to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot probability increases as the number increases. This configuration is particularly suitable for a type of game ball type in which the number of special symbol drawings increases as the number of drawings for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out is easier to increase than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying this to a type of gaming machine that has a configuration in which the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and in which the variable probability state has a high probability of winning a small win, the advantage of high settings can be realized. You can improve your sexuality. That is, when the probability of a jackpot is low in a variable probability state, the number of drawings until the next jackpot is likely to be increased, so there are many chances to win a small jackpot and win a prize ball. Therefore, when the probability changes, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, slot machines are well-known machines in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and the symbol active line determined, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Each of the embodiments described above may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristics Group A> (Save time if you win a small prize)
A discriminating means for performing a predetermined discrimination when a discriminating condition is met, a display means for displaying identification information to show the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and an operation for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit; a small bonus game execution means for executing a small bonus game different from the bonus game when the identification information indicating a second discrimination result different from the discrimination result is displayed; and a small bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means. After the bonus game ends, a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state are set by the game state setting means and the game state setting means. and an end condition setting means for setting an end condition for the second gaming state, and the end condition setting means is established based on the dynamic display being executed a predetermined number of times by the dynamic display execution means. a second termination condition that can be satisfied based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result; and a second termination condition that can be satisfied based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to set at least a third termination condition that can be satisfied based on the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period in which a lottery is more likely to be drawn after a bonus game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) that is predetermined depending on the type of bonus game to be executed. Therefore, it is difficult to have the player play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving game will continue, and the game tends to become monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to set a plurality of ending conditions for ending the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player. This has the effect of making it difficult to predict and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine A1, when the number of times that the determination result of the determination means becomes the second determination result reaches a predetermined number during the period in which the second gaming state is continuously set, the third termination occurs. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that a condition is satisfied.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second gaming state can be ended depending on the number of times the small bonus game is executed during the second gaming state, the player can be made to pay close attention to the determination result of the determining means during the second gaming state. I can do it.

Further, it is possible to prevent small bonus games from being executed excessively during the second gaming state.

In gaming machine A2, the discrimination means also discriminates a third discrimination result different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result, and the small bonus game execution means determines whether the discrimination result of the discrimination means is The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the small bonus game is executed even when the third determination result is obtained.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since it is possible to execute a small bonus game in which the third termination condition cannot be satisfied, it is not possible to execute a small bonus game in the second gaming state by simply knowing the number of small bonus games executed during the second gaming state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the period for which the game will continue to be set, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the determination means includes, as the second determination result, a specific second determination result that causes the minor benefit game execution means to execute the first minor benefit game, and a specific second determination result that causes the minor benefit game execution means to execute the first minor benefit game. At least a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result that causes a second minor bonus game different from the first minor bonus game to be executed is determined, and the number of times it is determined to be the specific second determination result is The third termination condition is satisfied when the first predetermined number of times is reached, or when the number of times determined as the special second determination result is a second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A4 characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, since it is possible to set a different number of termination conditions depending on the type of small bonus game, it is not possible to continue the second gaming state by simply knowing the number of small bonus games executed during the second gaming state. This makes it difficult to predict the period to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In the gaming machine A4, when the small bonus game is executed, a variable ball entry means that can change from a first state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter into a second state where it is easy to enter the ball, and the variable ball entry means. a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game even when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the small bonus The ease with which the game ball passes through the specific area is made different depending on when the first small bonus game is executed by the game execution means and when the second small bonus game is executed. A gaming machine A5 characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the possibility that the second game state will end and the possibility that the bonus game will be executed can be different depending on the type of the minor bonus game executed by the gaming machine A. It is possible to make the player pay close attention to the content of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics Group B> (Different time-saving ending conditions for special 1 game and special 2 game)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball into which the game ball enters the first ball entering means. , a predetermined first determination is performed when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, a game ball enters the second ball entering means, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is established. a discriminating means for performing a predetermined second discrimination when the discriminating means is present; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a dynamic display execution for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the bonus game execution means executed by the bonus game execution means. After the bonus game ends, a game state setting means that can set a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; a termination condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of termination conditions for the second gaming state; At least a first termination condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the first determination is executed than the second termination condition is set. Game machine B1 is characterized by certain things.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period in which a lottery is more likely to be drawn after a bonus game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Further, the gaming machine described above executes a special symbol lottery as a game lottery, and by providing two types of special symbols, it is possible to execute a variety of games. However, in the gaming machine described above, the time-saving state is ended when the number of drawings of the special symbols executed during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number of times. Regardless of the type, the time saving state ends under the same conditions. Therefore, there has been a problem that the game in the time-saving state tends to become monotonous. In addition, although the content of the lottery executed during the time saving state differs depending on the type of special symbol drawn, the game result of whether or not the time saving state ends depends on the special symbol drawn. Because it is the same regardless of the type, it is impossible to create a relationship between the period during which the time saving state continues and the type of special symbol drawn during the time saving state, and the game tends to become monotonous. There was a problem. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine B1, it is possible to make different ending conditions for ending the second gaming state depending on when the first determination is performed and when the second determination is performed. Therefore, since the player can pay close attention to which determination will be executed during the second gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine B1 includes a small bonus game execution unit that executes a small bonus game different from the bonus game when the determination result of the determination unit is a second determination result, and the end condition setting unit is configured to perform at least the above-mentioned. A determination result termination condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result, and a dynamic display termination condition that can be established based on the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means. conditions, and the determining means is characterized in that it is easier to determine the result of the second determination when the second determination is performed than when the first determination is performed. Game machine B2.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, it is easier to satisfy one of the termination conditions for ending the second gaming state when the second determination is executed than when the first determination is executed. The player is concerned about the determination being executed and the result of the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the termination condition setting means sets the determination result termination condition as the first termination condition, and sets the dynamic display termination condition as the second termination condition. Game machine B3.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first determination is performed, the determination result termination condition is more likely to be met than when the second determination is performed. In other words, although the second determination is more likely to yield the second determination result, the determination result end condition is difficult to satisfy. Therefore, since the player pays close attention to whether the second determination result is the first determination or the second determination, it is possible to provide a game that never gets boring.

In gaming machine B2 or B3, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the second discrimination result, one second discrimination result type is determined from a plurality of second discrimination result types as the type of the second discrimination result. It has a second discrimination result type determining means, and the termination condition setting means sets a different termination condition for each second discrimination result type determined by the second discrimination result type determination means as the discrimination result termination condition. A gaming machine B4 characterized by:

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B2 or B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, since different end conditions can be set based on the second determination result type, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of predicting future games, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B4, the second determination result type determining means determines whether the first determination result is the second determination result or the second determination result is the second determination result. A gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is possible to determine different second determination result types depending on the case.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, different second discrimination result types can be determined between the first discrimination and the second discrimination. This has the effect that the ease with which the result termination condition is satisfied can be easily varied.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B5, the end condition setting means sets a first dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display based on the first determination is executed as the dynamic display end condition. and a second dynamic display end condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display based on the second determination is executed.

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines B2 to B5, the following effects are achieved. That is, it becomes possible to vary the ending conditions for ending the second gaming state. Therefore, since the player can pay close attention to which determination will be executed during the second gaming state, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B6, the dynamic display termination condition is such that the termination condition is satisfied when the number of times the dynamic display has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times, and the termination condition setting means is configured to A gaming machine B7 characterized in that the number of times of dynamic display for satisfying the first dynamic display end condition and the number of times of dynamic display for satisfying the second dynamic display end condition are set differently. .

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times of dynamic display that satisfies the first dynamic display end condition and the number of times of dynamic display that satisfies the second dynamic display end condition can be made different, so that the second gaming state is set. To provide a variety of games, since the ease of ending the second game state can be made different between a game in which the first determination is performed and a game in which the second determination is performed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine B7, the end condition setting means adds up the first dynamic display number executed based on the first determination and the second dynamic display number executed based on the second determination. A gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it sets an upper limit dynamic display end condition that is satisfied when the total number of times the dynamic display is performed reaches the upper limit number of times.

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved. That is, even if the total number of dynamic displays, which is the sum of the first dynamic display number and the second dynamic display number, reaches the upper limit, the second gaming state is terminated. It is possible to prevent the first determination and the second determination from being performed excessively. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine B8 has an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the determination result of the determination means is likely to become the first determination result for a specific period when a predetermined transition condition is established, and the predetermined transition condition is A gaming machine B9, which can be established when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

According to gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B8, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the advantageous state can be set in accordance with the timing at which the second gaming state is set, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B9 has special state setting means for setting a special state advantageous to the player when the first gaming state is set during the specific period in which the advantageous state is set. A game machine B10 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second gaming state ends during the period in which the advantageous state is set, the special state is set. This makes it possible to set different gaming states depending on the timing at which the second gaming state ends. In addition, since the special state is set by ending the second gaming state within a predetermined period called a specific period, it is novel in that it actively ends the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game and making the game more interesting.

Note that the specific period may be set as a period from the timing when the second gaming state is set until a predetermined end condition is met, or the specific period may be set as The configuration may be such that a period is set from the time when the fulfillment condition is satisfied until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied.

<Characteristics Group C> (Short-term performance remaining)
a discriminating means for performing a predetermined discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied; a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a display means for displaying the identification information indicating a first discrimination result. a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the bonus game is executed; and a first game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is completed; a gaming state setting means that can set a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player; and an ending condition setting means that can set a plurality of ending conditions for the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. A termination condition determining means for determining a termination condition that is likely to be satisfied among the plurality of termination conditions set by the termination condition setting means, and a suggestion for indicating a period during which the second gaming state is continuously set. It has a suggestive performance execution means that executes a performance, and a suggestive performance mode setting means that sets a performance mode of the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means, and the suggestive performance mode setting means is configured to meet the termination condition. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a performance mode of the suggested performance is set based on the termination condition determined by a determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period in which a lottery is more likely to be drawn after a bonus game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period (predetermined number of times) that is predetermined depending on the type of bonus game to be executed. Therefore, it is difficult to have the player play the game while paying attention to whether or not the time-saving game will continue, and the game tends to become monotonous. Therefore, the present applicant has developed a gaming machine that makes it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the time-saving game is set to continue by setting a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving game. In this gaming machine, since there are multiple termination conditions for ending the time-saving game, it is difficult to inform the player of the remaining period in which the time-saving game will be played, and the problem is that the game is provided with a game that is difficult for the player to understand. there were. The purpose of the above gaming machine is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

According to the gaming machine C1, even if a plurality of ending conditions are set for ending the second gaming state, it is possible to set a suggestive effect based on the ending condition that is likely to be satisfied among them. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to understand the period during which the second gaming state continues to be set.

A gaming machine C2 in the gaming machine C1, wherein the ending condition determining means determines the ending condition that is likely to be satisfied based on the execution content of the determining means during the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the end conditions that are likely to be satisfied are determined based on the actual execution details of the determining means, there is an effect that the determination accuracy can be improved.

The gaming machine C2 includes updating means for updating predetermined gaming information based on the execution content of the determining means executed during a period in which the second gaming state is continuously set, and the ending condition setting means The plurality of termination conditions include a first termination condition that can be satisfied when the first gaming information is updated by the updating means, and second gaming information different from the first gaming information being updated by the updating means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it sets at least a second termination condition that can be satisfied when the game is played.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the termination condition is set for a plurality of pieces of game information that can be established by executing the determining means, it is possible to determine whether or not the second gaming state ends based on the execution content of the determining means. It can be made difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the suggestive performance and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C3, the first end condition is satisfied when the number of updates of the first game information reaches a first number, and the second end condition is established when the number of times the second game information is updated. becomes the second number of times, and based on the game information updated by the updating means, the first remaining update number until the first ending condition is satisfied and the second ending and a second remaining number of updates until the condition is met, and the end condition determining means determines the ending condition that is likely to be satisfied according to the determination result of the remaining number of updates determining means. A gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it discriminates.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the end conditions that are likely to be satisfied are determined based on the remaining number of times until each end condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the accuracy of the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation can be improved.

The gaming machine C4 has a pre-termination condition determination for determining whether the first remaining update number or the second remaining update number determined by the remaining update number determining means satisfies a predetermined pre-termination condition. A gaming machine C5, characterized in that the suggestive performance mode setting means sets the performance mode of the suggestive performance based on the determination result of the pre-termination condition determining means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the performance mode of the suggestion performance can be set depending on whether or not the pre-completion condition is satisfied by the pre-termination condition determining means, the performance mode of the suggestion performance can be used until the termination condition is satisfied for the player depending on the performance mode of the suggestion performance. This has the effect of being able to predict the remaining number of times.

In the gaming machine C5, the suggestive performance mode setting means sets a specific suggestive performance mode when the pre-termination condition determining means determines that a plurality of the pre-termination conditions are satisfied. Gaming machine C6 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are achieved. That is, since it is possible to set a specific suggestion performance mode when the pre-termination condition is satisfied, it is possible to make the player predict the remaining period of the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of making predictions.

Any of the gaming machines C1 to C6 includes a first period setting means for setting a first period after the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and the suggestive performance mode setting means includes: The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that when the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first period is set by the first period setting means, a special suggestion performance mode is set.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the end condition is satisfied within a predetermined period after the second game state advantageous to the player is set, the special suggestion performance mode is set, so the performance mode is set according to the timing when the end condition is satisfied. Can be set. Therefore, by making the player aware of the timing at which the termination condition is satisfied, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C7, the first period setting means sets the first period until the number of determinations performed by the determining means reaches a predetermined number after the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine C8 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C7, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the first period is set until the number of determinations performed by the determining means reaches a predetermined number, it becomes easier for the player to understand the state in which the first period is set. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy seeing whether or not the end condition is satisfied while the first period is set, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C7 or C8, the first period setting means sets the first period until a predetermined time elapses after the second gaming state is set. Machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C7 or C8, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the first period is set when the elapsed time after the second gaming state is set is within a predetermined period of time, the player is encouraged to play the game in order to satisfy the end condition within the first period. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristics Group D> (1 type and 2 types usually saves time)
a first discriminating means that performs discriminating when a first discriminating condition is satisfied; a display means on which identification information indicating the discrimination result by the first discriminating means is displayed; and the identification information indicating the first discrimination result on the display means. When the information is displayed, a bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player, and after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is completed, the first determination condition is different. A specific gaming state setting means for setting a specific gaming state in which a second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied, a second discriminating means for making a discriminating when the second discriminating condition is satisfied, and a result of the discriminating by the second discriminating means. variable ball entry means capable of changing from a first state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter a game ball to a second state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball when identification information indicating a second determination result is displayed on the display means; The variable ball entry means has a specific area through which the game ball that has entered can pass, and the bonus game execution unit executes the bonus game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. , the specific gaming state setting means sets a first specific gaming state in which the second discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied, and a second specific gaming state in which the second discrimination condition is more difficult to be satisfied than the first specific gaming condition. A gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it is at least configurable.

Here, when a game ball enters the starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, or if the lottery result is other than a win, A gaming machine has been proposed in which a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area during a predetermined game that can be executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Furthermore, there is a game machine that allows setting a game state in which the above-mentioned bonus game is likely to be executed as a game state. The gaming machine described above sets two gaming states, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and another gaming state, and it is not possible to set multiple gaming states that are advantageous to the player in stages. However, there was a problem in that the game could easily become monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine D1, since it is possible to set gaming states in which the ease with which the second discrimination condition is satisfied is varied during a specific gaming state, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine D1, a display means capable of displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means and second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determining means, and a display thereof; a first dynamic display means for causing the means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period; and a second dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for a predetermined second period. and a first dynamic display period setting means for setting a first dynamic display period of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display means; a second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period of second identification information, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. , a first display mode in which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first identification information indicates the first determination result on the display means; The specific game state is set in response to the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the second display mode for indicating the second determination result, and the variable ball entering means is changed to the second state, and the specific game state setting means is configured to control the first dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means or the second dynamic display period. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state are set by differentiating the second dynamic display period set by a setting means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, by making the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period during the specific gaming state different, it is possible to set the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. Another advantage is that it is possible to easily set gaming states in which the ease with which the second determination condition is met is varied.

In the gaming machine D2, the second dynamic display period setting means sets the second dynamic display to be shorter when the first specific gaming state is set than when the second specific gaming state is set. A gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it makes it easy to set a period.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, by shortening the dynamic display period, it is possible to make it easier for the second determining means to perform the determination, so there is an effect that the gaming state can be easily set.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3, the second determining means is configured to be able to also determine the first determination result, and the second dynamic display period setting means is configured to determine whether the second determining means is able to determine the result of the first determination during the second specific gaming state. A game machine D4 characterized in that when the determination result is the first determination result, a second dynamic display period is set that is shorter than when the determination result is other than the first determination result. .

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination result of the second determination means is the first determination result, a shorter dynamic display period is set than other determination results, which has the effect of making it easier to execute the bonus game. .

In any of gaming machines D2 to D4, the first dynamic display period setting means is shorter when the second specific gaming state is set than when the first specific gaming state is set. A gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it facilitates setting of a first dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is easier to set the first dynamic display period which is shorter when the second specific gaming state is set than when the first specific gaming state is set, so the gaming state can be easily set. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine D5, the first dynamic display period setting means, when the determination result of the first determination means is the first determination result during the first specific state, the A gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the first dynamic display period is set shorter than that in the case of the determination result.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the case of the first determination result during the first specific state, a shorter first dynamic display period is set than in the case of a determination result other than the first determination result. Thereby, it is possible to immediately notify the player that the determination result is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a feeling of anxiety to the player.

A first acquisition means for acquiring first ball entry information when a predetermined first acquisition condition is satisfied in any of the gaming machines D2 to D6, and the first ball entry information acquired by the first acquisition means. a first storage means capable of storing a plurality of items up to a first predetermined number until the first determination condition is satisfied; and when a predetermined second acquisition condition is satisfied, second ball entering information is acquired. and a second storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the second ball entry information acquired by the second acquisition means up to a second predetermined number until the second determination condition is satisfied. and when the first determination result of the second determination means executed in the state where the first specific gaming state is set is the second determination result, the first specific gaming state is set. A gaming machine D7, characterized in that a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period for showing the first determination result of the first determination means executed in a state in which .

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D2 to D6, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the determination result of the second determination means that is executed first in the state where the first specific gaming state is set is the second determination result, then the first determination result in the state where the first specific gaming state is set is the second determination result. A dynamic display period that is shorter than the first dynamic display period for showing the determination result of the first determining means executed in the first determination section is set. As a result, even if the first specific game state is set in a state where the first storage means and the second storage means both store ball entry information, the second determination means of the second determination means that is advantageous to the player The determination result can be immediately notified to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a feeling of anxiety to the player.

<Characteristics Group E> (Electronic support control when winning a small win during time saving)
A discriminating means that performs discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a display means that displays identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the bonus game execution means executed by the bonus game execution means. After the bonus game ends, a game state setting means that can set a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; and a termination condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of termination conditions for the second gaming state, the gaming state setting means setting the first gaming state according to a termination condition that is satisfied among the plurality of termination conditions. A gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the timing for playing the games is different.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period in which a lottery is more likely to be drawn after a bonus game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machines described above, the time-saving games end at the same time, so the player immediately knows whether the time-saving games have ended or not, making the game monotonous and losing interest in the game. There was a problem that the performance decreased. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that increases the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be varied based on the type of termination condition that has been met, so that when the termination condition is satisfied, the player is not interested in the type of termination condition. You can have it. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

The gaming machine E1 has a small bonus game execution unit that executes a small bonus game different from the bonus game when the determination result of the determination unit is a second determination result different from the first determination result, The termination condition setting means sets at least a first termination condition that can be satisfied when the dynamic display is executed, and a second termination condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result. and a condition, and when it is determined that the first termination condition is satisfied, the corresponding dynamic display is terminated, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. The first gaming state is set based on the fact that the second end condition is satisfied, and the first gaming state is set based on the execution of the corresponding small bonus game. A game machine E2 characterized in that it is a game machine that allows settings.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the first game state is set according to the content of the satisfied termination condition, it is possible to provide a game that does not give a sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine E2 includes a termination condition determining means for determining whether one of the first termination condition and the second termination condition is satisfied, and the termination condition determining means is configured to determine whether the termination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the first termination condition is determined with priority over the termination condition.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, if a plurality of termination conditions are satisfied by one determination performed by the determination means, the first termination condition is determined with priority. Therefore, a situation in which the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the second termination condition can be made difficult to occur, and there is an effect that a special feeling can be provided to the player.

In addition, when using the configuration of the gaming machine E3, when the first gaming state is set based on the second ending condition being satisfied, the first gaming state is set based on the first ending condition being satisfied. It is preferable to configure the system so that it is more advantageous to the player than when the state is set. This makes it possible to draw the attention of the player not only to whether or not the termination condition is satisfied, but also to the termination condition that is satisfied, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E3, the termination condition determination means determines whether the first termination condition is satisfied when the determination of 1 is executed by the determination means, and determines that the first termination condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the gaming machine E4 determines whether the second termination condition is satisfied when the second termination condition is met.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the timing for determining whether each termination condition is satisfied is made different, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the first termination condition is satisfied over whether or not the second termination condition is satisfied. effective.

Any of the gaming machines E2 to E4 includes a game type determining means for determining the type of the small bonus game to be executed when the determination result of the determining means is the second determination result, and the game type determining means determines the type of the small bonus game to be executed. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that the means determines one type among a plurality of types in which the period in which the small bonus game is executed is different.

According to the gaming machine E5, it is possible to execute small bonus games with different execution periods. Therefore, the timing at which the second gaming state ends can be greatly varied across the gaming period during the small bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E5, a variable ball entry means is variable between a first state where it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball and a second state where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball than the first state, and the state of the variable ball entry means is variable. and a variable control means for controlling the game, wherein the small bonus game execution means executes variable control by the variable control means so that the variable entry means is in the first state as the small bonus game. Gaming machine E6 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E5, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the degree of advantage to the player is greatly different between when the first ending condition is met and the first gaming state is set, and when the second ending condition is met and the first gaming state is set. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the type of ending condition that has been satisfied and the type of small bonus game that is to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E6, the type of the small bonus game is one in which the length of the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the second state during the small bonus game is varied.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the amount of benefits given to the player as a small bonus game is also variable depending on the type of small bonus game that is set, it is difficult to make the player pay close attention to the type of small bonus game to be executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the type of the small bonus game has a plurality of types in which the length of the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the first state during the small bonus game is the same. A gaming machine E8.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the execution period of the small bonus game can be set to be different for a plurality of small bonus games in which the amount of bonus that can be given to the player as the small bonus game is set to be the same. This has the effect that the length of the period during which the second gaming state is set can be varied.

<Feature Group F> (Player selects multiple time-saving games)
A first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, which is different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball into which the game ball enters the first ball entry means. executing the first determination based on the fact that the first acquisition information that can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entrance means has acquired the second acquisition information that can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means; a discriminating means for performing a second discrimination based on the discriminating means; a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and a bonus game execution means executed by the bonus game execution means. After the bonus game has been completed, a first game state and an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be set. When a gaming state is set, a first advantageous game for executing the first determination, and a second advantageous game for executing the second determination, which is different from the first game, are played. A gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it has a selection means that can be selected by a player.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period in which a lottery is more likely to be drawn after a bonus game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). Such a gaming machine is configured to allow a player to play a game in which a game ball is fired toward a different gaming area than usual when executing the above-mentioned time-saving game. The above-mentioned gaming machines can provide a special feeling by executing a different gaming method than usual during time-saving gaming, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Since the game only requires the player to perform the following, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the game becomes less interesting. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that increases the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be varied based on the type of termination condition that has been met, so that when the termination condition is satisfied, the player is not interested in the type of termination condition. You can have it. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the player can select a gaming method in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide a variety of games to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the bonus game executed by the first advantageous game is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game executed by the second advantageous game. .

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the second advantageous game allows the advantageous gaming state to continue more easily than the first advantageous game.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3 has a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down, and a firing means that can vary the firing intensity and can make the gaming ball reach the gaming area, The game ball has a first game area where it can flow down, and a second game area different from the first game area where game balls fired at a predetermined firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can flow down. The first ball entering means is provided in one game area, the second ball entering means is provided in the second game area, and the selecting means is for varying the firing intensity of the firing means. Game machine F4.

The gaming machine F4 has a variable ball entry means that allows the game ball fired by the shooting means to enter when the bonus game is executed, and the variable ball entry means includes a variable ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter the first game area. A game machine F5 characterized in that the game ball flowing down and the game ball flowing down the second game area are configured to be able to enter the ball.

The gaming machine F4 or F5 includes a third ball entering means that makes it easier for the ball to enter the ball than the first ball entering means when the advantageous state is set, and the game ball enters the third ball entering means. The first determination is also executed when the first determination condition is met, and the first advantageous game is a game in which the game ball enters the third ball entry means. The gaming machine F6 is characterized by the following.

In the gaming machine F6, the first ball entering means is provided in a third gaming area different from the first gaming area and the second gaming area among the gaming areas. Machine F7.

In any of gaming machines F5 to F7, a first detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the first game area, and a second detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down the second game area. and an executed game determining means for determining the type of the currently selected advantageous game based on the detection result of the first detecting means and the detection result of the second detecting means, and the executed game determining means. A gaming machine F8 characterized in that it has a notification means for notifying a player of information for indicating a determination result.

A gaming machine F9 in the gaming machine F8, wherein the notification means provides notification while the bonus game is being executed.

<Characteristics Group G> (Different time-saving fall conditions for Gifu types)
A variable ball entry means that is variable between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the open state, and the variable ball entry means is adapted to satisfy the open condition. a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path; a distributing means capable of distributing the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means to one of the first flow path and the second flow path; A distribution state setting means for setting a first distribution state in which the balls are easily distributed to the flow path and a second distribution state in which the balls are easily distributed to the second flow path; and a game ball entering the first flow path. a first ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the second flow path; and a second ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the second flow path. , a first determining means for performing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; and a first determining means for performing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means a first game state in which it is easier for the variable control means to change the variable ball entry means to the open state; and a first game state in which it is more difficult to change the ball entry means to the open state than the first game state. 2 gaming state, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a game state, and the gaming state setting means executes the first determination by the first determining means, or executes the second determination by the second determining means. When the first gaming state is set, it is better to execute the first determination than to execute the second determination. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that a gaming state can be easily set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets a variable game state with a predetermined probability in which the lottery result becomes advantageous after a bonus game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem in that only variable probability gaming states are set with a certain probability, and the game tends to be monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine G1, it is possible to make it more difficult for the second gaming state to be set by executing the first determination than by executing the second determination. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the 1 discrimination will be executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, when the first discrimination means has a specific first discrimination result, a first bonus game is executed, and when the second discrimination means has a specific second discrimination result, the first bonus game is executed. The bonus game execution means executes a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game, and the bonus game execution means executes a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it has a ratio variable means for varying the set ratio set between the first allocation state and the second allocation state by the allocation state setting means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first distribution state and the second distribution are determined according to the gaming state when a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result is obtained. Since the ratio set in any one of the states is variable, there is an effect that the game can be varied not only depending on the determination result but also the gaming state.

In the gaming machine G2, a plurality of gaming states are set as the gaming states, and one game state is selected from the plurality of gaming states based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that it has a selection setting means for selecting and setting a gaming state.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, one gaming state is selected and set by the selection setting means based on a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that not only the determination result but also the set gaming state can be made interesting and the interest can be increased.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, a second variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the first state. and a specific area into which the game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a benefit granting means that provides a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific region. A gaming machine G4 characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, it is possible to perform a game that makes the player look forward to whether or not the ball will enter a specific area, and has the effect that the games can be diversified.

In the gaming machine G4, the privilege awarded by the privilege awarding means is set such that the probability of the award being determined as the specific first determination result or the probability that the award is being determined as the specific second determination result is set to be high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the probability of being determined as a specific first discrimination result or a specific second discrimination result can be varied, so that it has the effect of further improving the interest in the game. .

In either gaming machine G1 or G3, when the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is reached, the specific first determination result is reached until the termination condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine G6 characterized in that it has a special state setting means that sets the probability of being determined to be the determined result or the specific second determined result to be higher than normal.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the player can be made to worry about whether or not the end condition will be met, and the game can be made more interesting. be.

<Characteristics Group H> (After shifting to an advantageous state, it is more advantageous to win after the specific condition is met than to win before the specific condition is met)
A discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, a discrimination means that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means. In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result, the player The game machine includes a first state setting means for setting a first state advantageous to the first state, and the gaming machine performs discrimination using all of the discrimination information acquired during the first state after the first state is set. Until the end of the bonus game, there are cases where the bonus game is executed before a predetermined specific condition is met, and cases where the bonus game is executed after the specific condition is met. A gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is configured to have different degrees of advantage for the player.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery that is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are designed to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and having the player play games aiming to win in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the degree of advantage of the player remains constant while the same gaming state is set, so the game becomes monotonous while the same gaming state is set. There is a possibility that it becomes difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, when a bonus game is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game by paying attention to whether or not it is executed before the specific condition is satisfied. This has the effect of increasing interest in the subject.

In the gaming machine H1, if the bonus game is not executed during the period from when the first state is set until the first predetermined number of determinations by the determining means is completed, the first state is changed. and a second state setting means for setting a second state which is disadvantageous, and the specific condition is such that after the first state is set, the determination by the determining means is completed a second number of times equal to or less than the first number of times. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that the game is established when the bonus game is not executed during the period.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the degree of advantage of the bonus game is varied according to the number of determinations performed in the first state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine H2 includes a storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information at least until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; The second state is configured such that it is more difficult for the discrimination information acquisition means to acquire the discrimination information than the first state, and the specific condition is such that the first state is set. The game machine H3 is characterized in that the bonus game is established when the bonus game is not executed after the first number of determinations by the determining means is completed.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, there are also discriminations performed until the first state ends, and discrimination information stored in the storage means at the time when the second state is set. Since the degree of advantage when the bonus game is executed is variable based on the determination based on the , the game is performed while paying attention to the number of pieces of determination information stored in the storage means at the time when the second state is set. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine H3, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball into which a game ball can enter. and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position, and the predetermined acquisition condition is such that the first ball entering means The second state is established based on the game ball entering at least one of the second ball entering means, and the second state is such that the variable means moves from the second position to the second position more than the first state. A gaming machine H4 characterized in that it is configured such that it is difficult to change to the first position.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H3, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter different ball entering means depending on whether it is in the first state or the second state, so that the player This has the effect of increasing interest in playing games.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, a third ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a third position where a game ball can enter into the third ball entry means, and from the third position. a fourth position in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball; variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period; and a variable game execution means provided at a position where a game ball that enters the third ball entry means can enter the ball. A gaming machine H5 comprising: a specific area in which the bonus game is played, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on a game ball entering the specific area.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a variable game. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the game machine H5, a firing means capable of firing a game ball in any one of a plurality of directions including at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction according to a player's operation. and the predetermined acquisition condition is more satisfied when the game ball is launched in the second direction than when the game ball is launched in the first direction, at least in the first state. The third ball entry means is configured such that a game ball launched in the first direction enters the ball more easily than a game ball launched in the second direction. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that it is provided in a position where it is easy to play.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine H5, when a variable game is executed while a game ball is being fired in the first direction in the first state, the game ball is fired in the first direction. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball that has been in use from directly entering the specific area of the third ball entry means, in the first state, the launching direction is changed to the second direction in order to cause the game ball to enter the specific area. The player can select whether to change the direction to the first direction or to terminate the variable game without letting the game ball enter the specific area by continuing to shoot the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the first state setting means is configured to control the first state from the time the first state is set until the determination using all the determination information acquired during the first state is completed. between, if the bonus game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied, the first state is set at a first rate as the state after the bonus game ends, and the specific condition is When the bonus game is executed after the bonus game is established, the first state is set at a second rate higher than the first rate as the state after the bonus game ends. Characteristic game machine H7.

According to the gaming machine H7, in any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, when the bonus game is executed after the specific condition is satisfied, the ratio of the advantageous first state being set is higher. It is possible to make the player play the game with stronger expectations that the bonus game will be executed after the specific condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine H7, the first state setting means sets the first state as the state after the end of the bonus game when the bonus game is executed based on the specific determination result in the two states. A gaming machine H8 characterized in that the first state is set at a third rate higher than the first rate.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the rate at which the disadvantageous second state is set to the advantageous first state is higher than that of the first state before the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second state from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

<Characteristics Group I> (Let the player select the timing to execute the special 2 lottery with high expectations while saving time)
a discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; A gaming machine comprising: a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition; and a predetermined specific condition in the first gaming state. a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state based on the fact that the first gaming state is established in the first gaming method; By playing a game, it becomes difficult to execute the bonus game, and it becomes difficult to satisfy the specific condition, and by playing a game using a second gaming method different from the first gaming method, the first A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is configured so that the bonus game is easier to execute and the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied than when the game is played using the gaming method.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery that is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are designed to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and having the player play games aiming to win in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it may be disadvantageous for the player if the same gaming method is not used while the same gaming state is set. While the game is set, the game method corresponding to the game state must continue to be executed. Therefore, the game may become monotonous, and it may be difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the gameplay can be varied depending on whether the game is played using the first gaming method or the second gaming method, so that the player's interest in playing the game can be changed. The effect is that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a first discriminating condition, and a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. and a second discriminating means for executing the above, and the first discriminating means makes it more difficult for the bonus game to be executed when the discrimination is executed than the discrimination by the second discriminating means. , and is configured such that the specific condition is difficult to satisfy, and the first gaming method is executed more in the determination by the first determining means than in the determination by the second determining means. and the second gaming method is comprised of a gaming method in which the determination by the second determining means is easier to execute than the determination by the first determining means. Features gaming machine I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the gameplay in the first gaming state can be varied depending on the type of determining means that performs the determination, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. The effect is that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine I2, the specific condition is based on the fact that the first determining means has performed the determination a predetermined first number of times without executing the bonus game after the first gaming state is set. is established based on the fact that the bonus game has not been executed since the second gaming state was set, and the determination by the second determining means has been performed a second number of times, which is less than the first number of times. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of determinations made by the first determining means and the number of determinations made by the second determining means.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, there is provided a firing means capable of firing a game ball, and a first entrance provided at a position where the game ball launched in a predetermined specific direction by the firing means can enter. a ball means, a second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter, and which is different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball directed into the first ball entry means; a first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination by the discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball; a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information; the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means; A gaming machine I4 characterized in that the second determination means executes determination using the determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, in the first gaming state, by firing the game ball in a specific direction, the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the discrimination by the second discrimination means are performed. Since it is possible to perform both the determination and the determination, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine I4, the first discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means can be stored up to a predetermined first number of information until it is used for discrimination by the first discrimination means. storage means; and a second memory capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of second information until it is used for discrimination by the second discrimination information. means, and the second discriminating means is configured to suppress execution of the discriminating when one or more of the discriminating information is stored in the first storage means. A gaming machine I5 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, in the first gaming state, it is possible to preferentially execute the discrimination by the first discriminating means in which the specific condition is difficult to satisfy even if the discrimination is executed. , the first gaming state can be configured so that it is easy to continue for a long time. Therefore, since the player can enjoy the first game state for a longer period of time, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine I5, the second gaming method is such that when one or more pieces of the discrimination information are stored in the second storage means, the discrimination information stored in the second storage means determines the discrimination. A game machine I6 characterized in that the game is performed in such a way that the firing of game balls is suppressed until they are used.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5, by performing the second gaming method, it is possible to make it difficult for the first discriminating means to perform the discrimination, thereby making it easier to execute the bonus game. I can do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have higher expectations for each determination.

In any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means from the first position. a second position where the game ball is difficult to enter; a first variable means that is variable; a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means; a fourth position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the means; a second variable means that is variable; a passing means provided at a position through which a game ball fired in the specific direction can pass; a third ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the passage means can enter; and a third ball entry means that is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed the passage means can enter. a different fourth ball entering means; a sorting means for distributing game balls that have passed through the passing means to either the third ball entering means or the fourth ball entering means; and firing in the specific direction. a third variable means that is variable between a fifth position where the game ball that has been played can pass through the passing means, and a sixth position where it is more difficult for the game ball to pass through the passing means than the fifth position; variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary from the sixth position to the fifth position for a predetermined period based on establishment of a predetermined variable condition; It is configured to vary from the second position to the first position based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, and the second variable means A gaming machine I7 characterized in that it is configured to change from the fourth position to the third position based on the entry of a game ball into the ball means.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the game can be played by paying attention to the type of ball entering means to which the game balls that have passed through the passing means are sorted by the sorting means. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine I7, the variable condition is configured such that the first gaming state is more easily satisfied than the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I7, in the first gaming state, the game ball can easily pass through the passing means, so that the game can be played more efficiently.

In the gaming machine I7 or I8, the first gaming state is configured such that the game balls that have passed through the passing means are more easily distributed to the third ball entering means than to the fourth ball entering means. A gaming machine I9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7 or I8, when a game ball passes through the passing means, there is a possibility that the first ball entering means can enter the ball more than the second ball entering means. Since it can be made higher, there is an effect that the first determining means can be configured to perform the determination more easily.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, a predetermined execution condition that can be established based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means becomes a second determination result different from the specific determination result is established. and a second bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game, and the second determination means is configured such that the probability that the determination result is the second determination result is higher than that of the first determination means. A gaming machine I10 characterized in that it is a gaming machine I10.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I9, when the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, not only a specific discrimination result but also a second discrimination result is obtained. Since the player can play the game with anticipation, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine I10 is configured to be variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state, and a second state in which a game ball can enter. Based on the fact that the determination result of the variable ball entrance means provided with a specific area and the determination means becomes the second determination result, the variable ball entry means changes from the second state to the second state for a predetermined period. a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied to one state, and the execution condition is established based on the fact that a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means has entered the specific area. A gaming machine I11 characterized in that it is a gaming machine I11.

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I10, when a variable game is executed, it is possible to perform a game by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters a specific area. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic Group J> (Game experience where the expectation of jackpot is higher after the advantageous condition ends than during the advantageous condition)
a first discriminator that executes a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition; a second determining means that executes a second determination that is highly advantageous to the player; and a first determining condition that is likely to satisfy the first determining condition based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The gaming machine comprises a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state. , in the case where the setting condition is satisfied in the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the setting condition is established in the second gaming state than the first gaming state. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it is configured to form a first state in which a determination condition is easily satisfied.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery that is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are designed to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and having the player play games aiming to win in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when the gaming state shifts from an advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous gaming state, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, even if an unfavorable second gaming state is set, the advantageous second discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied while the first state is formed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game when such a situation occurs.

In gaming machine J1, when the setting condition is satisfied in the first gaming state and the second gaming state is set, if a predetermined specific condition is not satisfied, the gaming machine A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it is configured to form a second state in which the second determination condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first state.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, it is possible to make the player play the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is met at the time when the second gaming state is set, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game. It has the effect of being able to improve the

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, based on the fact that either the determination result of the first determination means or the determination result of the second determination means has become a predetermined specific determination result, the player A bonus game execution means capable of executing an advantageous bonus game is provided, and the first determination means is configured to reach the specific determination result with a predetermined first probability. A gaming machine J3, wherein the second determining means is configured to obtain the specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, even after the advantageous first gaming state ends, there is a high probability that a specific determination result will be obtained until the specific condition is satisfied. , it is possible to make the player play the game while creating a feeling of anticipation for the bonus game at least until the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine J3, the gaming machine makes the second determination from the first state without changing the gaming state based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the first state. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is configured to form a second state in which a condition is difficult to satisfy.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, it is possible to form a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage as the second gaming state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball into the first ball entering means. a first discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring first discrimination information for use in discrimination by the first discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means; a second discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring second discrimination information for use in discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the second discrimination information, and a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means. The second discrimination information acquired by the first storage means, which can be stored until it is used for the discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination information acquisition means, with an upper limit of a second storage means capable of storing information up to an upper limit of the number until it is used for the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and the first discrimination means is stored in the first storage means. The first discrimination is performed using the first discrimination information, and the second discrimination means executes the second discrimination using the second discrimination information stored in the second storage means. The first determination is configured to be executed with priority over the second determination, and the first game state is the first determination by the first ball entering means. and the second ball entering means, and the second playing state is such that the game ball enters the second ball entering means more than the first playing state. A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it is configured to make it difficult for at least a game ball to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the determination by the first determining means is executed with priority, so that when the first gaming state ends, the second memory is This has the effect that a larger amount of second discrimination information can be stored in the means.

In the game machine J5, a first position allows a game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a second position makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. and a variable means that can be changed from the second position to the first position, and the first game state is configured such that the variable means is more easily changed from the second position to the first position than in the second game state. The first state is configured such that the second gaming state is set and at least one piece of the second discrimination information is stored in the second storage means. Game machine J6 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J5, more second discrimination information is stored in the second storage means while the discrimination by the second discrimination means is being executed preferentially. Therefore, when the second gaming state is set, there is an effect that the first state can be more reliably formed.

The gaming machine J6 is provided with a third ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the first discrimination information acquisition means is configured to send a game ball to at least one of the first ball entry means and the third ball entry means. The first discrimination information is acquired based on the ball entering the ball, and the second gaming state is such that the game ball enters the third ball entering means rather than the first ball entering means. A gaming machine J7, characterized in that the game ball is configured to enter the third ball entering means more easily than the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J6, the ball entering means that is easy to enter can be changed depending on the gaming state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J7, a fourth ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a third position where a game ball can enter into the fourth ball entry means, and from the third position. a fourth position in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball; variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period; and a variable game execution means provided at a position where a game ball that enters the fourth ball entry means can enter the ball. A gaming machine J8 comprising: a specific area in which the bonus game is played, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on a game ball entering the specific area.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines J1 to J7, the game is played with strong expectations that the game ball will enter a specific area when a variable game is executed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature K group> (Suppresses the increase in suspension immediately after the end of advantageous state)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position; using a variable means that can be changed to , a discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. A gaming machine having a discriminating means for performing discrimination, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the satisfaction of a first setting condition; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state in which the variable means is difficult to change from the second position to the first position; A game machine K1 characterized in that it is provided with a control means capable of controlling the game ball so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means when the state is changed to the first position.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a bonus game when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole is a predetermined result. Some of these gaming machines allow players to set a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and make it easier to execute a lottery when a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).

However, depending on the timing of switching from an advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous gaming state, a situation may occur in which it is possible to execute a lottery in the same way as in an advantageous gaming state, even though the disadvantageous gaming state is set. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was not possible to equalize the level of expectation for bonus games in unfavorable gaming conditions.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the ball entering means immediately after the second setting condition is satisfied, so that the bonus game in the first gaming state of 1 can be suppressed. This has the effect of equalizing expectations.

The gaming machine K1 is provided with a second ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and the control means is configured to move at least the variable means to the first position by straddling before and after the second setting condition is satisfied. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that when the variable state is reached, the game ball is controlled so that it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the game ball from entering the ball entering means immediately after the second setting condition is satisfied.

In the game machine K2, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information based on the game ball entering at least one of the ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and The means is configured to determine whether the game ball has entered the second ball entry means than when performing the determination using the discrimination information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine K3 is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific discrimination result is higher when the discrimination is performed using the discrimination information acquired based on the above.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, it is possible to prevent advantageous determinations that tend to result in specific determination results from being executed frequently even after the second gaming state is set. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine K2 or K3, when the variable means is arranged at the first position, the game ball can flow in, and when the variable means is arranged at the second position, it is difficult to enter the game ball. A specific flow path provided, and a distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the specific flow path to either the ball entry means or the second ball entry means, the control means , the distribution means is controlled so that the game balls are easily distributed to the second ball entry means by the distribution means at least for a predetermined period after the second setting condition is satisfied; The gaming machine K4 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K2 or K3, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably suppress the distribution of gaming balls to the ball entering means after the second gaming state is set. be.

In the gaming machine K4, the control means is configured to control a first distribution state in which the game balls that have reached the distribution means are distributed to the ball entry means, and a second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second ball entry means. and controls the distribution means so as to switch according to a predetermined specific switching pattern, and the specific switching pattern is a period during which the second distribution state is set in the predetermined period. The ratio is configured such that the ratio is likely to be higher than the ratio of the period during which the first distribution state is set, and at least part of the period from when the first gaming state is set until the second setting condition is satisfied. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that, in a period, a ratio of the period set to the first distribution state is higher than that of the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4, in the first game state, the ease with which the ball enters the ball entering means can be varied depending on the distribution state of the distributing means. This has the effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the state of the dividing means.

In the gaming machine K5, the control means controls the allocating means with the specific switching pattern based on the first gaming state being set.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, the processing load is reduced because it is only necessary to execute simple control of setting a specific switching pattern each time when the first state is set. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristics L group> (The advantage is higher if you hit during the short pullback time than when you hit during the variable probability state)
A discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discrimination result. In a gaming machine equipped with a game execution means, a first gaming state, a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current state; and gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least the third gaming state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous degree of a predetermined element regarding the advantageous degree is more likely to become higher while the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. L1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery that is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are designed to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and having the player play games aiming to win in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when the gaming state shifts from an advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous gaming state, there is a risk that the player's motivation for playing the game may be reduced. In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines do not directly transition from an advantageous first gaming state (for example, variable probability state) to the most disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, normal state). A transition is made to a third gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) with an intermediate advantage between the state and the second gaming state, and only when there is no win in the third gaming state, a transition is made to the first gaming state. There are also things that do.

However, even in gaming machines with such specifications, the degree of advantage decreases upon transition to the second gaming state, so it has been difficult to fundamentally suppress the decline in motivation for gaming. Therefore, there is a possibility that it will be difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, while the first condition is satisfied, the second gaming state, which has a lower degree of advantage, has a higher degree of advantage of a predetermined element, so that the player's game This has the effect of increasing interest in the subject.

In gaming machine L2, the gaming machine achieves the specific discrimination result while the first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, rather than achieving the specific discrimination result in the third gaming state. The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that it is configured such that it is more likely to be advantageous when

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on a predetermined specific condition being satisfied in the third gaming state, and the gaming machine , the case where the specific judgment result is obtained in the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the specific condition is better than the case where the specific judgment result is obtained in the third gaming state. A gaming machine L3 characterized in that it is configured such that the degree of advantage of the elements tends to increase.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, in the third gaming state, the game can be played while expecting that the specific condition will not be met, and the specific condition can be met and the game will be played in the third gaming state. Since the degree of advantage of the predetermined element becomes higher when two gaming states are set, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine L3, the gaming state setting means sets the second condition in a case where the specific condition is satisfied in the third gaming state and a case where a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the first gaming state. The gaming machine is configured to be able to set a gaming state, and the gaming machine is configured such that the specific condition is satisfied rather than the second gaming state that is set based on the second condition being satisfied. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the second gaming state set based on this is configured such that the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is more likely to be higher.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L3, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which the degree of advantage can be varied even in the same second gaming state.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, the specific condition is composed of at least a first specific condition and a second specific condition different from the first specific condition, and the gaming machine The second gaming state, which is set based on the establishment of the first specific condition, is configured such that the degree of advantage of the predetermined element is more likely to be higher than the gaming state. Game machine L5.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3 or L4, it is possible to make the player expect more strongly that the first specific condition will be met in the third gaming state than that the second specific condition will be met. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L5, the types of the bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means include at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. The game state setting means includes a type determining means for determining one type of bonus game from among them, and the game state setting means determines the first bonus game by the type determining means when the specific determination result is obtained in the third game state. The gaming machine L6 is characterized in that the gaming state after the end of the first bonus game is set to the second gaming state based on the fact that the second specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L5, when the first bonus game is determined in the third gaming state, not only a disadvantageous second gaming state is set, but also the degree of advantage of a predetermined element becomes low. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game with the expectation that the first bonus game will not be determined if a specific determination result is obtained.

In the gaming machine L6, the gaming state setting means terminates the second privilege game when the specific determination result is obtained in the third gaming state and the second privilege game is determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine is configured to be able to set a subsequent gaming state to the third gaming state, and the gaming machine is configured to set the specific discrimination result in the third gaming state to the type determining means. comprising control means for controlling the second game state to be set by the game state setting means if a predetermined specific setting condition is satisfied when a second bonus game is determined; The gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state by determining that the first specific condition is satisfied when the second gaming state is set by the control means. A gaming machine L7.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L6, when the second bonus game is determined in the third gaming state, the advantageous third gaming state is set or the second gaming state is set. Even if the degree of advantage of a predetermined element becomes high, there is a strong expectation that the second bonus game will be decided when a specific determination result is obtained in the third game state. This has the effect of allowing players to play games.

In the gaming machine L7, the specific setting condition is established based on the second bonus game being determined consecutively over a predetermined specific number of times. .

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L7, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that the second bonus game will be determined a specific number of times.

The gaming machine L5 or L6 includes a second determining means that performs a second determination based on the establishment of the determining condition in the third gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is configured to determine whether the determination result of the second determining means is The gaming machine L9 is characterized in that the second gaming state is set by determining that the second specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined first determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5 or L6, the player's benefit when the third gaming state becomes the first determination result and the second gaming state with a lower advantage is set. This has the effect of alleviating feelings of disappointment.

In the gaming machine L9, the gaming state setting means determines whether the determination result of the second determining means is the same as the first determination result before the first determination is completed a predetermined number of times after the third gaming state is set. The second gaming state is set based on the determination result of No. 1, and after the third gaming state is set and a predetermined first number of determinations are completed, the second determining means The gaming machine L10 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the determination result being the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L9, it is possible to alleviate the player's sense of disappointment when the first discrimination result is obtained with a small number of discriminations in the third gaming state. There is.

<Characteristics Group M> (Opportunity zone after the pullback time reduction ends)
A determining means that executes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed based on the determination result of the determining means being a predetermined specific determination result. and a plurality of types of bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means, including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous than the first bonus game. a type determining means for determining one type of bonus game from among them, and a first game state in which the second bonus game is determined at a first rate by the type determining means based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition. and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Based on the establishment of the setting condition and the setting of another gaming state, the second bonus game is determined at a higher rate than the first rate until a predetermined specific condition is established. A gaming machine M1 characterized by comprising: a state control means for controlling to a special state in which the game becomes easier.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery that is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are designed to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and having the player play games aiming to win in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, when the gaming state shifts from an advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous gaming state, the player is satisfied with being able to play in the advantageous gaming state and tries to continue playing. There was a problem that it became difficult to make people think.

In addition, some of these conventional gaming machines do not directly transition from an advantageous first gaming state (for example, variable probability state) to the most disadvantageous second gaming state (for example, normal state). A transition is made to a third gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) with an intermediate advantage between the state and the second gaming state, and only when there is no win in the third gaming state, a transition is made to the first gaming state. There are also things that do.

However, even in gaming machines with such specifications, there is a possibility that the player will be satisfied with the game once the second gaming state ends, so the player's motivation after transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state may be affected. The problem was that it became difficult to maintain. Therefore, there has been a problem in that it is difficult to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine after transitioning to the first gaming state.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine M1, a special state is set when transitioning from the advantageous second gaming state to another gaming state, so it is possible to make people want to continue playing during the special state. . Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine M1, the state control means controls the special state until the specific condition is satisfied based on the fact that the setting condition is satisfied in the second state and the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that it is controlled so that.

According to the gaming machine M2, a special state occurs when the second gaming state, which is more advantageous, shifts to the first gaming state, which has a lower degree of advantage, so that the player can stop playing when the second gaming state ends. You can prevent this from happening. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the judgment result, and the type determining means is configured such that the second discriminating means determines whether the discrimination result of the first discriminating means is the specific discrimination result or not. The second bonus game is more easily determined when the determination result of the means is the specific determination result, and the state control means is configured to perform the first determination as the special state. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that the determination by the means is controlled so that it is more difficult to execute than the determination by the second determining means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the determination by the second determining means is more likely to be executed during the special state, so that a specific determination result is obtained during the special state. This has the effect of making the player play the game with stronger expectations.

In the gaming machine M3, a firing means capable of firing a game ball, a first ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction by the firing means can enter, and the first direction a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, provided at a position where a game ball launched in the direction can enter the ball, and a game ball launched in the first direction difficult to enter; A third ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, and a game ball can enter the third ball entry means. and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first position than the first position, and a variable means that is variable based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means. A game ball enters at least one of the first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination by the discrimination means, the second ball entry means, and the third ball entry means. a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the first discrimination information obtained by the first discrimination information acquisition means; The second determination means executes the determination using the determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means, and the variable means is configured to determine whether the game state is higher than the first game state. , a gaming machine M4 characterized in that the second gaming state is configured to be more easily changed from the second position to the first position.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, even in the second gaming state in which no special state is set, the second determining means can perform the determination. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game with strong expectations that the determination will yield a specific result.

In the gaming machine M3 or M4, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a first dynamic display means dynamically displaying the identification information to show the determination result of the first determination means, and a second determination means. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to show the determination result of the identification information; dynamic display period determining means for determining a display period, and the state control means determines that the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the first dynamic display means is longer than the special state. A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the second dynamic display means controls the dynamic display period of the identification information so that the period is likely to be longer than the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3 or M4, in the special state, when the first discriminating means performs the determination, a long dynamic display period is likely to be set. The determination by the second determining means can be performed multiple times during the target display period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a specific determination result will be obtained by the determination by the second determining means.

In the gaming machine M5, the dynamic display means overlaps dynamic display of the identification information by the first dynamic display means and dynamic display of the identification information by the second dynamic display means. A gaming machine M6 characterized in that it is configured to be able to play.

According to the gaming machine M6, there is an effect that the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the discrimination by the second discrimination means can be executed more efficiently.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. One game state is set from among a plurality of game states including at least one game state, and the second game state is set by the game state setting means based on the establishment of a specific setting condition in the third game state. A gaming machine M7 characterized in that it is configured to be set.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the advantageous third gaming state is ended and the second gaming state is set, and the second gaming state is also ended and the disadvantageous one is set. When the game has shifted to the first gaming state, creating a special state has the effect of alleviating the player's sense of disappointment.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M7, the game state setting means determines that the bonus game has not been executed after the second game state has been set, and the determination by the determination means has been completed a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine M8 is characterized in that, when the setting condition is established, another gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the player's advantage when the bonus game is not executed in the advantageous second gaming state and the player shifts to another gaming state It has the effect of alleviating feelings of disappointment.

<Characteristics Group N> (During an advantageous state, it is easier to gain an advantage by firing game balls at a second firing interval that is longer than the first firing interval than by firing game balls at a first firing interval. gameplay)
In a game machine equipped with an operation means that can be operated by a player and a firing means that can fire a game ball according to the operation contents of the operation means, the game can be played based on the establishment of predetermined setting conditions. A game in which one gaming state can be set from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A state setting means is provided, and the gaming machine is configured such that in the second gaming state, while at least a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, game balls are likely to be fired by the firing means at a first firing interval. When operating the operating means with a second operation content that makes it easier for game balls to be fired at a longer firing interval than the first firing interval than when operating the operating means with the first operation content of A gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it is configured in such a way that it tends to be advantageous.

According to the gaming machine N1, it is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which the longer the firing interval is, the more advantageous it becomes, and thus has the effect of increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

In the gaming machine N1, a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a discrimination information acquisition means capable of obtaining predetermined discrimination information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means; A discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the discriminating information acquired by the discriminating information acquiring means, and a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the discriminating information obtained by the discriminating information acquiring means, and a discriminating means that provides an advantage to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discriminating result. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, wherein the gaming machine operates the second operation rather than operating the operation means with the first operation content while the specific condition is satisfied. When the operation means is operated based on the content, the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to increase until the discrimination using all the discrimination information acquired in the second gaming state is completed. Gaming machine N2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the longer the firing interval is, the more the number of determinations made by the determining means is, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. This has the effect of further improving the performance.

In the gaming machine N2, a second ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and second discrimination information capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means. and a storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination means a first discriminator that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; and a second discriminator that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means. The game machine is configured such that the judgment by the first judgment means tends to give a more advantageous judgment result than the judgment by the second judgment means. is, while the specific condition is satisfied, operating the operating means with the second operation content is better than operating the operating means with the first operation content. A gaming machine N3 characterized in that the game machine N3 is configured such that the number of times of discrimination by the first discrimination means is likely to increase until the discrimination using all the discrimination information acquired in the state is completed.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the novelty of the feature is that the number of times the first determining means determines which degree of advantage is high can be varied depending on the content of the operation while the specific condition is satisfied. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

A gaming machine N4, characterized in that, in the gaming machine N3, the determination by the second determining means is executed with priority over the determination by the first determining means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3, the discrimination by the second discrimination means, which has a lower degree of advantage, is executed preferentially, so it is more strongly desired to increase the number of discriminations made by the second discrimination means. It has the effect of giving you hope.

In the gaming machine N3 or N4, the gaming state setting means is configured based on the fact that the first determining means has completed a predetermined first number of determinations without executing the bonus game in the second gaming state. and the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state by determining the second number of times the bonus game is not executed and the second number of times is greater than the first number of times in the second gaming state. A gaming machine N5 characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on completion of determination of means.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3 or N4, the conditions under which the first gaming state is set are made different depending on the number of determinations made by the first determining means and the number of determinations made by the second determining means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Any one of the gaming machines N2 to N5 includes a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to show the determination result of the determination means, and the second The operation content is comprised of operation content that makes it easier for the game ball to be launched so that the game ball enters the ball entry means in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed. Game machine N6.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N2 to N5, by performing the second operation content, a period in which dynamic display is not executed is likely to occur, so the advantageous second It can be configured such that the period set in the gaming state is likely to be long. Therefore, there is an effect that the second gaming state can be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the firing means is configured to be able to fire the game ball at a firing interval equal to or greater than a predetermined specific firing interval, depending on the operation content of the operating means. A gaming machine N7, characterized in that the first operation content is configured to make it easier for the firing means to fire the game ball at the specific firing interval.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines N1 to N6, the operation of the first operation consists of a relatively simple operation of firing game balls at the shortest firing interval. Therefore, it can be easily performed regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

<Characteristics Group O> (After shifting to an advantageous state, it is more advantageous to win after the specific condition is met than to win before the specific condition is met)
A discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, a discrimination means that executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means. In a gaming machine equipped with a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result, the first The gaming machine is provided with a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state, and the gaming machine is configured to obtain the first gaming state between the setting of the first gaming state and the first gaming state. Until the end of the discrimination using all the discrimination information that has been used, the above-described specific discrimination result is obtained before the predetermined specific condition is met, and the case where the specific discrimination result is obtained after the specific condition is met. The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is different depending on the case where the specific determination result is reached.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery that is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are designed to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and having the player play games aiming to win in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the degree of advantage of the player remains constant while the same gaming state is set, so the game becomes monotonous while the same gaming state is set. There is a possibility that it becomes difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, when a specific determination result is obtained, it is possible to make the player play the game by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, so that It has the effect of increasing interest.

In the gaming machine O1, a predetermined specific condition is met after the first gaming state is set until the determination using all the discrimination information acquired during the first gaming state is completed. The player is configured to be more likely to be advantageous if the specific determination result is reached after the specific condition is satisfied than if the specific determination result is reached before the specific condition is satisfied. Characteristic game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, when the game transitions to the first gaming state, the player is allowed to play the game in the expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained after the specific condition is satisfied. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the gaming state setting means continuously sets the specific determination result after the first gaming state is set and continues over a predetermined number of times of determination by the determining means. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state is set based on a second determination result that is different from the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1 or O2, in the first gaming state, the player can be made to expect a specific determination result by the end of a specific number of determinations. This has the effect of increasing interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine O3, the specific condition is that the second determination result is continuously obtained for a second number of determinations by the determining means that is less than or equal to the specific number of times after the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine O4 characterized in that it is established based on the following.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O3, the advantageous degree of the bonus game is varied according to the number of determinations performed in the first gaming state, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine O4 includes a storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information at least until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; The second gaming state is configured such that it is more difficult for the discrimination information acquisition means to acquire the discrimination information than the first gaming state, and the specific condition is the first gaming state. The gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second determination result is established based on the fact that the second determination result is obtained continuously over the specific number of determinations by the determination means after the determination is set.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4, there are also determinations that are performed until the first gaming state ends, and that are stored in the storage means at the time when the second gaming state is set. Since the degree of advantage when the bonus game is executed in the discrimination based on the discrimination information is variable, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the storage means at the time when the second gaming state is set. The effect is that it can be done.

<Characteristics P group> (Let the player select the timing to execute the special 2 lottery with high expectations while saving time)
a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; and a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first gaming state. and a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is such that the specific condition becomes difficult to satisfy by playing the game using the first gaming method. , by playing a game using a second gaming method different from the first gaming method, the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied than when playing the game using the first gaming method. Characteristic game machine P1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery that is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are designed to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and having the player play games aiming to win in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it may be disadvantageous for the player if the same gaming method is not used while the same gaming state is set. While the game is set, the game method corresponding to the game state must continue to be executed. Therefore, the game may become monotonous, and it may be difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the gameplay can be varied depending on whether the game is played using the first gaming method or the second gaming method, so that the player's interest in playing the game can be changed. The effect is that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine P1, there is a discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. and a game execution means, wherein the first gaming state is such that playing the game using the first gaming method makes it difficult to execute the bonus game, and makes it difficult for the specific condition to be satisfied, and the second gaming state By playing the game using the gaming method described above, the bonus game is more easily executed than when playing the game using the first gaming method, and the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied. Characteristic game machine P2.

According to the gaming machine P2, the gameplay can be made more different depending on whether the game is played using the first gaming method or the second gaming method, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine P2, the discriminating means includes a first discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a first discriminating condition, and a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition. and a second discriminating means for executing the above, and the first discriminating means makes it more difficult for the bonus game to be executed when the discrimination is executed than the discrimination by the second discriminating means. , and is configured such that the specific condition is difficult to satisfy, and the first gaming method is executed more in the determination by the first determining means than in the determination by the second determining means. and the second gaming method is comprised of a gaming method in which the determination by the second determining means is easier to execute than the determination by the first determining means. Characteristic game machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2, the gameplay in the first gaming state can be varied depending on the type of determining means that performs the determination, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game. The effect is that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine P3, the specific condition is based on the fact that the first determining means has performed the determination a predetermined first number of times without executing the bonus game after the first gaming state is set. is established based on the fact that the bonus game has not been executed since the second gaming state was set, and the determination by the second determining means has been performed a second number of times, which is less than the first number of times. A gaming machine P4 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P3, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of determinations made by the first determining means and the number of times determination made by the second determining means.

In the gaming machine P3 or P4, there is provided a firing means capable of firing a game ball, and a first entrance provided at a position where the game ball launched in a predetermined specific direction by the firing means can enter. a ball means, a second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the specific direction can enter, and which is different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball directed into the first ball entry means; a first discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information for use in discrimination by the discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball; a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information; the first discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the first discrimination information acquisition means; A gaming machine P5, characterized in that the second discrimination means executes discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P3 or P4, in the first gaming state, by firing the game ball in a specific direction, the discrimination by the first discrimination means and the discrimination by the second discrimination means are performed. Since it is possible to perform both the determination and the determination, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are designed to increase the player's interest in the game by making it possible to set a plurality of states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and having the player play games aiming to win in various states. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the player's interest in playing games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 uses a discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. and a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. and includes a first state setting means for setting a first state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the gaming machine is configured to change the first state to the first state after the first state is set. In the case where the bonus game is executed before the predetermined specific condition is satisfied until the discrimination using all the discrimination information acquired during the period is completed, and if the specific condition is The degree of advantage for the player is different depending on the case where the bonus game is executed after the bonus game is established.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the award is applied between the time when the first state is set and the time when the determination by the determination means is completed a predetermined first number of times. a second state setting means for setting a second state that is more disadvantageous than the first state when a game is not executed; This is true when the bonus game is not executed until the determination by the determining means is completed the following second time.
In the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is used for at least the discrimination by the discrimination means, with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit. The second state is configured such that it is more difficult for the discrimination information acquisition means to acquire the discrimination information in the second state than in the first state. The specific condition is established when the bonus game is not executed after the first state is set until the first determination by the determining means is completed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, which includes: a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter; a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means; comprising a variable means that is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means; The predetermined acquisition condition is established based on a game ball entering at least one of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the second state is established based on the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. The variable means is configured to be more difficult to change from the second position to the first position.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, which includes a third ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball into the third ball entry means. a second variable means that is variable between a third position where the ball can enter and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the third position; and a determination result of the determination means that determines the specific determination. variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period based on the result, and the third ball entering means; a specific area provided at a position where the entered game ball can enter, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on the game ball entering the specific area. It is something to do.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a discrimination information acquisition means acquires discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and discrimination is performed using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. and a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result, and The gaming machine is provided with a first state setting means for setting a first state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a setting condition, and the gaming machine is configured to acquire the first state between the setting of the first state and the first state. Until the determination using all the above-mentioned discrimination information is completed, the above-mentioned bonus game is executed before the predetermined specific condition is established, and the above-mentioned bonus game is executed after the above-described specific condition is established. It is configured such that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on when the bonus game is executed.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the discrimination by the discrimination means is completed a predetermined first number of times after the first state is set. a second state setting means for setting a second state that is more disadvantageous than the first state if the bonus game is not executed until the first state is set; This is established when the bonus game is not executed after the determination is made by the determining means for a second number of times that is equal to or less than the first number of times.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is set to a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit, and at least the A storage means capable of storing data until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means is provided, and the second state is such that it is more difficult for the discrimination information acquisition means to acquire the discrimination information than the first state. The specific condition is a case where the bonus game is not executed after the first state is set until the first number of determinations by the determining means is completed. This holds true.
This has the effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the storage means at the time when the second state is set.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, the first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and the first ball entering means different from the first ball entering means are provided. Two ball entry means, variable between a first position where a game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first position. variable means, the predetermined acquisition condition is established based on the game ball entering at least one of the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and The second state is configured such that it is more difficult for the variable means to change from the second position to the first position than in the first state.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 4, a third ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and the third ball entering means are provided. a second variable means that is variable between a third position where a game ball can enter the ball means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball means; variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position for a predetermined period based on the determination result being the specific determination result; and a specific area provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the third ball entry means can enter, and the bonus game execution means is configured to act when the game ball enters the specific area. The bonus game is executed based on the bonus game.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
64 First ball entrance (first ball entrance means)
203a Special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
203a2 Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
6400 Second ball entrance (second ball entrance means)
6400a Electric accessories (variable means)
6500 V winning device (third ball entry means)
6500f1 Opening/closing door (second variable means)
S215 Part of the advantageous game execution means in the seventh embodiment
S221 Variable game execution means S303, S307 Determination means in the seventh embodiment
S237 Predetermined state setting means in the seventh embodiment
S706, S758 Acquisition means in the seventh embodiment
S1622 Specific state setting means in the seventh embodiment
S1717 Part of the advantageous game execution means in the seventh embodiment

Claims (1)

acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
A determination means that executes a determination using the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A gaming machine comprising an advantageous game execution means capable of executing an advantageous game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result,
determining means for determining one of the advantageous games out of a plurality of games including at least a specific advantageous game as the advantageous game to be executed by the advantageous game execution means;
a specific state setting means for setting a specific state advantageous to the player as a state after the gaming state related to at least the specific advantageous game has ended;
Based on the fact that a determination result different from the specific determination result has been obtained continuously over a predetermined number of determinations made by the determination means after the specific state is set, a predetermined state setting means for setting a predetermined state with a low degree of advantage;
The number of determinations made by the determining means after the specific state is set, which can continue until the specific number of determinations is executed, is greater than a predetermined number of times less than the specific number of times, and is less than or equal to the specific number of times. a first performance execution means capable of executing a performance including at least a predetermined performance mode as a predetermined performance for indicating the determination result of the determination means based on the determination of the determination means having been executed within a range of times; ,
The number of determinations made by the determining means after the specific state that can continue until the specific number of determinations is executed is within the range of the predetermined number of times or less. a second performance execution means capable of executing a performance that does not include the predetermined performance mode as the predetermined performance based on the predetermined performance;
The number of times the determination means makes a determination after the specific state that can continue until the specific number of determinations is executed is within the range of the predetermined number of times or less and a number of times greater than the predetermined number of times. The expected value at which the advantageous game is executed and the specific state is set is different depending on the number of times less than or equal to the specific number of times,
Based on the fact that a predetermined execution condition is satisfied in a range in which the number of determinations made by the determining means after a specific state that can continue until the specific number of determinations is executed is equal to or less than the predetermined number of times; , an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the advantageous game will be executed and the specific state will be set within a range of times that is greater than the predetermined number of times and less than or equal to the specific number of times; A game machine characterized in that it can be executed in a game machine.

Images